Skip to main content

Full text of "2003-2004 West Chester University Undergraduate Course Catalog"

See other formats


West 

Chester 

University 

lii 


Undergraduate  Catalog 


:ij4i.ta8;afc^.    _. ..  ,^,s:if^s^iia 


2003-2004 

r 

^^^i. 

^^^-  ^J-^^ 

Expect 
Excellence 


1 


of  Pennsylvania 


West 

Chester 

University 


Ut^**- 


Undergraduate  Catalog 

2003-2004 


The  West  Chester  University  Mission  Statement 

West  Chester  University,  a  member  of  the  Pennsylvania  State  System  ot  Higher  Education,  is  a  public,  regional,  comprehensive 
institution  committed  to  providing  access  and  offering  high-quality  undergraduate  education,  select  post-baccalaureate  and  graduate 
programs,  and  a  variety  of  educational  and  cultural  resources  for  its  students,  alumni,  and  citizens  of  southeastern  Pennsylvania. 

The  West  Chester  University  Values  Statement 

West  Chester  University  is  committed  to  attracting,  enrolling,  and  graduating  quality  students  from  a  wide  variety  of  educational,  cultural, 
and  economic  backgrounds.  This  endeavor  requires  the  University  to  attract  and  retain  highly  qualified  faculty  and  staff  and  to  provide 
each  member  ot  the  University  community  with  learning  and  leadership  development  opportunities.  To  this  end,  the  University  supports 
and  encourages  programs  which  benefit  all  people  and  which  seek  to  eradicate  discrimination  and  injustice.  We  treasure  what  we  believe  to 
be  the  highest  principles  of  American  society:  the  worth  and  uniqueness  of  each  individual,  the  belief  that  success  is  to  be  earned  by  indi- 
vidual effort  put  forth  in  an  environment  founded  on  equality  ot  opportunity,  and  the  appreciation  of  the  ideal  of  an  inclusive  society. 
We  believe  that  it  is  incumbent  upon  all  members  of  our  community  -  staff,  students,  faculty  and  administrators  -  to  conduct  them- 
selves with  civility  toward  one  another  at  all  times.  We  value  the  special  talents  and  contributions  of  each  member  of  our  community. 
We  flirther  affirm  the  worth  and  dignity  of  each  member  and  the  shared  responsibility  ot  all  to  treat  each  other  as  individuals,  with 
respect  and  courtesy. 

As  a  university  owned  by  the  citizens  of  Pennsylvania,  we  value  our  mission  to  provide  the  best  educational  opportunities  possible  which 
will  enable  the  University  community  to  successfully  address  the  concerns  of  a  global  society.  To  this  end.  West  Chester  University  seeks 
to  provide  diligent  advising  for  students  and  to  focus  on  teaching  students  to  think  clearly  and  critically,  to  make  logical  and  ethical  judg- 
ments, and  to  communicate  effectively  with  others. 

West  Chester  University's  community  strongly  supports  the  principles  of  academic  integrity  and  academic  responsibility,  viewing  both  as  the 
province  of  every  member  of  the  campus  community.  We  hold  the  highest  esteem  for  teaching  directed  toward  student  learning  and  affirm  that 
mastery  of  content  as  well  as  mastery  ot  teaching  skills  necessary  to  communicate  such  content  are  paramount. 

This  values  statement  is  intended  to  be  a  living  document  which  will  serve  West  Chester  University  as  it  changes  and  evolves  in  the  com- 
ing years. 


Communications  Directory 


MAILING  .\DDRESS: 
TELEPHONES: 


World  Wide  Web: 
Academic  Advising 

Academic  Development 
Program 

Admissions/Under- 
graduate Catalogs 

Affirmative  Action 

Billing/Payments 

Bookstore 

Careers/Placement 

Conference  Ser\aces 

Continuing  Education 
(Adult  Studies) 
Counseling 

Financial  Aid/ 

Work  Study 
Graduate  Studies/ 

Catalogs 
Housing 

Police 

Public  Relations 

and  Marketing 
Services  for  Smdents 
wdth  Disabilities 

Student  Activities 
and  Universitv'  Events 


West  Chester  Universitv 

West  Chester,  PA  19383 

Dial  610-436  plus  number  in  parentheses. 

For  offices  not  shown  here,  call  the 

University  Information  Center:  610-436- 

1000. 

wwvir.  wcupa.edu 

Director  of  Academic  Ad\ising,  Lawrence 

Center  (3505) 

Director  of  Academic  Development 

Program,  Lawrence  Center  (3505) 

Director  of  Admissions,  Messikomer  Hall, 

(3411);  877-315-2165  (toll  free) 

Office  of  Social  Equit)',  13/15  University 

Ave.  (2433) 

Office  of  the  Bursar,  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center 

(2552) 

Student  Services,  Inc.,  Svkes  Student 

Union  (2242) 

Director  of  Career  Development  Center, 

Lawrence  Center  (2501) 

Office  of  Conference  and  Rental  Sendees, 

13/15  Universit)' Ave.  (6931) 

Office  of  Graduate  Studies  and  Extended 

Education,  McKelvie  HaU  (1009) 

Counseling  Center,  Lawrence  Center 

(2301) 

Director  of  Financial  Aid, 

Elsie  O.  BuU  Center  (2627) 

Dean  of  Graduate  Studies  and  Extended 

Education,  McKelvie  HaU  (2943) 

Residence  Life,  Sykes  Student  Union 

(3307) 

Public  SafetN'  Department,  Peoples 

Building  (3311) 

Director  of  Public  Relations  and  Marketing, 

13/15  University-  Avenue  (3383) 

Director,  Office  of  Services  for 

Students  with  Disabilities,  Lawrence 

Center  (2564) 

Student  Programming  Dept./Student 

Activities  Council,  Sykes  Student  Union 

(2983)  or 

Student  Union  Information  Desk  (2984) 

Sykes  Student  Union  (2955) 

Universit}'  Registrar,  Elsie  O.  BuU  Center 

(3541) 

Office  of  the  Registrar, 

Elsie  O.  BuU  Center  (2230) 

Teacher  Education  Center,  Recitation  HaU 

(3090) 


Student  Services,  Inc. 
Scheduling/Registration 

Summer  Sessions 

Teacher  Certification 

Accreditation 

West  Chester  University  is  accredited  by  the  American  Chemical 
Society,  American  Dietetics  Association,  American  Speech- 
Language-Hearing  Association,  Commission  on  Accreditation  of 
Allied  Health  Education  Programs  (CAAHEP),  Commission  on 
Accreditation  in  Clinical  Chemistry,  CouncU  of  Social  Work 
Education,  Joint  Review  Committee  for  Respiratory  Therapy 
Education,  Middle  States  Association  of  CoUeges  and  Schools 
(MSA),  National  Association  of  Schools  of  Music,  National  League 
for  Nursing,  Society  of  Public  Health  Education/ American 
Association  for  Health  Education  (SOPHE/AAHE),  and  approval 
from  the  State  Board  of  Nursing  of  the  Commonwealth  of 
Pennsylvania.  West  Chester  Universit)''s  professional  education  pro- 


grams are  accredited  by  the  National  Council  for  the  Accreditation  of 
Teacher  Education  (NCATE)  and  approved  bv  the  Pennsylvania 
Department  of  Education  to  recommend  candidates  for  certification. 

Nondiscrimination/ Affirmative  Action  Policy 

West  Chester  University  is  committed  to  providing  leadership  in 
extending  equal  oppormnities  to  aU  individuals.  Accordingly,  the 
Universitv'  wiU  continue  to  make  every  eftort  to  provide  these  rights  to 
aU  persons  regardless  of  race,  religion,  sex,  national  origin,  ancestry, 
age,  marital  stams,  sexual  orientation,  disabUitv',  or  veteran  status. 
This  poUcy  applies  to  aU  members  of  the  University  commiunity, 
including  smdents,  faculty,  staff,  and  administrators.  It  also  applies  to 
aU  applicants  for  admission  or  employment  and  aU  participants  in 
University-sponsored  activities. 

This  poUcy  is  in  compliance  with  federal  and  state  laws,  including 
Tides  VI  and  VII  of  the  CivU  Rights  Act  of  1964,  Title  LX  of  the 
Educational  Amendment  of  1972,  Section  504  of  the  Rehabilitation 
Act  of  1973,  Americans  with  DisabUities  Act  of  1990,  and  Executive 
Order  of  the  Governor  of  Pennsylvania.  Any  individual  having  sug- 
gestions, problems,  complaints,  or  grievances  with  regard  to  equal 
oppormnity  or  affirmative  action,  or  to  request  a  translation  ot  this 
publication  into  a  language  other  than  English,  is  encouraged  to  con- 
tact Ms.  Luz  Hernandez,  director.  Office  of  Social  Equitv,  13/15 
Universitv'  Ave.,  610-436-2433. 

Sexual  Harassment  Policy 

West  Chester  University  is  committed  to  equaUtv  of  opportunity  and 

freedom  from  discrimination  for  aU  of  its  students  and  employees. 

Because  sex'ual  harassment  is  a  form  of  discrimination  based  on  sex, 

the  University  wiU  not  tolerate  it  in  any  form. 

Uppon  official  filing  of  a  complaint,  immediate  investigation  wiU  be 

made  culminating  in  appropriate  corrective  action  where  warranted, 

which  may  include  termination  of  the  relationship  with  the 

Universit)'. 

Sexual  harassment  is  defined  as  unwelcome  sex'ual  advances,  requests 

for  sex'ual  favors,  and  other  verbal  or  physical  conduct  of  a  sexual 

nature  occurring  when: 

1.  submission  to  the  unwelcome  conduct  of  a  sexual  nature  is  made 
either  explicitly  or  impUcitly  a  term  or  condition  of  an  individu- 
al's employment,  or  of  a  smdent's  academic  stams  or  treatment; 

2.  submission  to  or  rejection  of  the  unwelcome  conduct  of  a  sexual 
namre  by  an  individual  is  used  as  the  basis  for  academic  or 
employment  decisions  affecting  such  an  individual;  or 

3.  the  unwelcome  conduct  of  a  sexual  nature  is  sufficiently  severe, 
persistent,  or  pervasive  to  Umit  an  individual's  abUitv'  to  partici- 
pate in,  benefit  from,  or  perform  at  extracurricular  activities, 
work,  academic  or  educational  programs,  or  to  create  a  hostile  or 
abusive  Uving,  working,  or  academic  environment. 

A  complete  copy  of  the  University's  Sex-ual  Harassment  PoUcv'  docu- 
ment, inclusive  of  the  Sexual  Harassment  Complaint  Procedure,  mav' 
be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  Social  Equity. 

Individuals  who  beUeve  themselves  to  be  the  victims  of  sexual  harass- 
ment, or  who  have  questions  about  the  LTniversitv''s  policy  on  this 
matter  should  contact  Ms.  Luz  Hernandez,  director,  Office  of  Social 
Equin-,  13/15  Universitv'  Ave.,  610-436-2433. 

ADA  Policy  and  Accommodations 

In  keeping  with  West  Chester  University's  commitment  to  equaUtv'  of 
opportunity  and  compUance  with  the  Americans  with  Disabilities  Act 
ot  1990,  the  Universit)'  has  established  procedures  and  designated 
ofifices  to  provide  accommodations  for  aU  people  with  disabiUties.  A 
complete  copy  of  the  ADA  Poliq-  Statement,  as  weU  as  appropriate 
offices,  appears  on  page  53  of  this  catalog.  Individuals  needing 
accommodations  should  make  their  needs  known  to  the  responsible 
office  at  least  a  week  in  advance.  This  publication  is  available  on  our 
Web  site  (wwvv.wcupa.edu).  A  disk  version  for  those  needing  accom- 
modations is  available  from  the  Office  of  Admissions,  610-436-3411. 

The  provisions  of  this  catalog  are  not  to  be  regarded  as  an  irrevocable 
contract  between  the  student  and  the  Universit)'.  West  Chester 
Universit)'  reserves  the  right  to  change  any  provisions  or  requirements 
at  any  time. 


Contents 


Communications  Directory    ii 

Introducing  West  Chester  Universit}' 3 

Campus  and  Facilities    4 

Admission  to  West  Chester  Universit)' 7 

Fees  and  Expenses 9 

Financial  Aid    12 

Student  Affairs   21 

Academic  Affairs 29 

Degree  Requirements 36 

Academic  Policies  and  Procedures    40 

Structure  of  Academic  Affairs 54 

Undergraduate  Programs  at  West  Chester    55 

Programs  of  Study  and  Course  Offerings    56 

Department  of  Accounting    57 

Department  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology 57 

Department  of  Art   59 

Department  of  Biology    62 

Department  of  Chemistry    65 

Citizenship  Education  Program 68 

(formerly  Social  Studies) 

Department  of  Communication  Studies 68 

Department  of  Communicative  Disorders    71 

Department  of  Computer  Science    72 

Department  of  Counseling  and  Educational 

Psychology    74 

Department  of  Criminal  Justice 74 

Department  of  Earlv  Childhood  and  Special 

Education 76 

Department  of  Economics  and  Finance   78 

Department  of  Educational  Development    80 

Military  Science  Program  (Army  ROTC)    81 

Air  Force  ROTC  Program    82 

Department  of  Elementary  Education    82 

Department  of  English    84 

Department  of  Foreign  Languages 88 

Department  of  Geography  and  Planning    94 

Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 96 

Department  of  Health 98 

Department  of  History 102 

Honors  Program    105 

Interdisciplinary  Programs 106 

American  Studies  Program    107 

Comparative  Literature  Studies  Program 107 

Ethnic  Studies  Program 109 


Latin-American  Studies  Program    109 

Linguistics  Program    110 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  Program    110 

Russian  Studies  Program Ill 

Department  of  Kinesiology    Ill 

Liberal  Studies  Program 116 

Department  of  Literaa'   117 

Department  of  Management    118 

Department  of  Marketing    119 

Department  of  Mathematics    120 

Music  (School  of)    122 

Department  of  Applied  Music 124 

Department  of  Music  Education 126 

Department  of  Music  History  and  Literature 127 

Department  of  Music  Theon'  and  Composition  .  .  .127 

Department  of  Nursing   128 

Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  Program    131 

Department  of  Philosophy 131 

Department  of  Physics  and  Pre-Engineering  Program  .  .133 

Department  of  Political  Science 135 

Pre-Medical  Program 138 

Department  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education   .  .138 

Department  of  Psycholog}' 140 

Department  of  Social  Work 141 

Department  of  Sports  Medicine 143 

Teaching  Certification  Programs   145 

Department  of  Theatre  Arts 147 

Women's  Studies  Program 148 

Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 150 

Administration 151 

Facult}- 152 

Academic  Calendar    166 

University  Policy  for  Storm  Closings 166 

Campus  Map 167 

Borough  Map 168 

Chester  Count)'  Map    169 

Index 170 

Department  Telephone  Numbers 174 


Introducing  West  Chester  University 


QualiU'  education  at  a  reasonable  price... 
this  is  the  goal  of  West  Chester 
University,  the  second  largest  of  the  14 
institutions  of  higher  learning  that  com- 
pose the  State  Svstem  ot  Higher 
Education  of  the  Commonwealth  of 
Pennsylvania.  A  comprehensive  and  mul- 
tipurpose university,  West  Chester  sen'es 
indi\dduals  of  all  ages  with  a  variety  of 
programs  to  fill  their  educational  needs. 

West  Chester  offers  degrees  in  the  arts 
and  sciences,  teacher  preparation  and  cer- 
tification, advanced  stud}'  preparation  in 
fields  such  as  medicine  and  law,  educa- 
tion for  specific  professions,  and  continu- 
ing education.  See  page  55  for  a  complete 
listing  of  undergraduate  degree  programs. 

Total  enrollment  at  West  Chester 
includes  approximateh'  10,200  under- 
graduate students  and  about  2,000  gradu- 
ate students.  While  most  undergraduates 
are  recent  high  school  graduates  prepar- 
ing for  career  objectives,  many  others  are 
older  indi%iduals,  including  veterans  and 
homemakers,  who  either  never  before 
had  the  opportunity  for  a  college  educa- 
tion or  whose  schooling  was  interrupted. 

Most  students  are  residents  of  Penn- 
sylvania, but  students  from  other  states 
and  foreign  countries  are  welcome.  West 
Chester's  student  body  represents  a  cross 
section  of  manv  ethnic,  racial,  and  reli- 
gious groups  and  includes  students  from 
all  economic  levels. 

Like  the  world  around  it,  West  Chester 
University  is  constantly  changing  and 
growing.  The  school  continues  to  broaden 
and  modif>'  the  nature  and  number  of  its 
programs  to  reflect  the  needs  of  its  stu- 
dents in  their  endea\'or  to  prepare  them- 
selves for  success  and  fijlfillment  in  life. 

History  of  the  University 

Although  its  founding  year  is  1871,  the 
Universit)'  in  fact  has  deeper  roots  trac- 
ing from  West  Chester  Academv,  a  pri- 
vate, state-aided  school  that  existed 
from  1812  to  1869.  The  academy 
enjoyed  strong  support  from  the  highlv 
intellectual  Chester  Counrv  Cabinet  of 
the  Natural  Sciences  of  the  pre-Civil 
War  decades.  It  was  recognized  as  one 
of  Pennsylvania's  leading  preparatory 
schools,  and  its  e.xperience  in  teacher 
training  laid  the  groundwork  for  the 
normal  school  years  that  were  to  follow. 


As  the  state  began  to  take  increasing 
responsibUitV'  tor  public  education,  the 
academy  was  transformed  into  West 
Chester  Normal  School,  stiU  privately 
owned  but  state  certified.  The  normal 
school  admitted  its  first  class,  consisting 
of  160  students,  on  September  25,  1871. 
In  1913,  West  Chester  became  the  first 
of  the  normal  schools  to  be  owned  out- 
right by  the  Commonwealth. 

West  Chester  became  West  Chester 
State  Teachers  College  in  1927  when 
Pennsylvania  initiated  a  four-vear  pro- 
gram of  teacher  education.  In  1960,  as 
the  Commonwealth  paved  the  way  for 
liberal  arts  programs  in  its  college  sys- 
tem. West  Chester  was  renamed  West 
Chester  State  College,  and  nvo  years 
later  introduced  the  liberal  arts  program 
that  turned  the  one-time  academv  into  a 
comprehensive  college. 

In  recognition  of  the  historic  merit  of  the 
campus,  in  1981  the  West  Chester  State 
College  Quadrangle  Historic  District  was 
placed  on  the  National  Register  of 
Historic  Places.  The  buildings  included  in 
this  historic  district  are  Philips  Memorial 
Building,  Rubv  Jones  Hall,  Recitation 
Hall,  and  the  Old  Library.  Except  for 
Philips,  these  buildings  are  all  constructed 
of  native  Chester  Count\'  serpentine  stone. 

West  Chester  State  achieved  another 
major  milestone  with  passage  of  the 
State  Svstem  of  Higher  Education  bill. 
West  Chester  became  one  of  the  14 
universities  in  the  State  System  of 
Higher  Education  on  Julv  1,  1983. 
Along  with  its  new  name  —  West 
Chester  Universir\'  of  Pennsylvania  of 
the  State  System  of  Higher  Education 
—  the  institution  acquired  a  new  system 
of  governance  and  the  opportunity'  to 
expand  its  degree  programs. 

The  Frederick  Douglass  Institute 

The  Frederick  Douglass  Institute  at  West 
Chester  University'  is  an  academic  pro- 
gram for  advancing  multicultural  studies 
across  the  curriculum  and  for  deepening 
the  intellectual  heritage  of  Frederick 
Douglass,  the  former  slave,  distinguished 
orator,  journalist,  author,  and  statesman. 
Douglass,  who  was  a  frequent  \'isitor  to 
the  West  Chester  area,  gave  his  last  pub- 
lic lecture  on  West  Chester's  campus  on 
February  1,  1895.  Thuty  years  earlier,  at 
the  inauguration  of  a  Baltimore, 


Maryland,  institute  named  for  him  in 
October  1865,  Douglass  said  that  the 
mission  was  "to  be  a  dispenser  of  knowl- 
edge, a  radiator  of  light.  In  a  word,  we 
dedicate  this  institution  to  virtue,  tem- 
perance, truth,  liberty,  and  justice." 

At  West  Chester  Llniversity-,  the 
Douglass  Institute  is  primarily  involved  in 
four  academic  areas:  1)  conducting 
research  in  multiculturalism  and  on 
Frederick  Douglass;  2)  sponsoring  distin- 
guished exhibits  and  lectures;  3)  establish- 
ing opportunities  for  advanced  study  for 
public,  private,  and  college-level  teachers; 
and,  finally',  collaborating  with  historical 
societies  and  other  educational  and  cul- 
tural agencies.  West  Chester  University's 
Douglass  Institute  is  recognized  as  the 
model  for  other  Pennsylvania  campuses 
and  is  called  collectively  the  Frederick 
Douglass  Institute  of  the  Pennsylvania 
State  System  of  Higher  Education. 

The  activities  of  the  institute  take  place 
on  and  off  campus.  With  undergraduate 
and  graduate  students,  and  West 
Chester  faculty,  the  institute  sponsors 
seminars  and  forums  on  selected  topics. 
The  Anna  Alurrav  Douglass  Circle  is 
the  name  for  a  lecture  series  offering  a 
platform  for  today's  leading  intellectuals. 
Annually  in  October,  the  institute  spon- 
sors Douglass  Days,  a  festival  of  educa- 
tional activities  on  Douglass  and  multi- 
culturalism that  involves  the  entire  cam- 
pus and  surrounding  communities. 

For  fiirther  information,  call  Dr.  C. 
James  Trotman,  director,  Frederick 
Douglass  Institute  at  610-436-2766,  or 
e-mail  FDouglass@wcupa.edu.  The  fax 
number  is  610-436-2769. 

The  Frederick  Douglass  Society 

Drawing  its  content  from  our  campus 
history  of  social  consciousness  and  its 
strucmre  from  a  variety  of  models  in  pub- 
lic life,  the  Frederick  Douglass  Society  of 
West  Chester  University  is  the  organiza- 
tion of  faculty'  and  staff  at  West  Chester 
who  embrace  Frederick  Douglass'  quest 
for  fi-eedom  and  inclusiveness.  Named  in 
1983  for  one  of  the  19th  century's  most 
distinguished  advocates  of  human  free- 
dom, the  organization  is  oriented  toward 
self-help  and  improvement  by  offering  a 
coDective  voice  in  the  affairs  of  the 
University.  Its  programs  also  aim  to  stim- 
ulate other  groups  on  campus  to  enrich 


Campus  and  Facilities 


our  climate.  The  society  annually  raises 
money  for  scholarship  funds.  It  also 
seeks,  by  the  example  of  Douglass,  to 
promote  an  intellectual  standard  that  is 
not  only  grounded  in  excellence  but  pro- 
foundly rooted  in  the  public  mission  of 
higher  education. 

Institute  for  Women 

The  Institute  tor  Women  was  initially 
designated  to  sen'e  as  the  parent  organi- 
zation to  represent  the  interests  of 
women  on  campus.  The  institute  is  an 
independent  body  headed  by  a  director 
and  board  of  directors.  Along  with  the 
Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women, 
Women's  Center,  and  women's  studies 
program,  the  Instiwte  for  Women 
engages  in  campus  activities  for  the  bene- 
fit of  women  students,  faculty,  and  staff. 
The  institute  sponsors  activities  to 
enhance  the  self-esteem  and  career  suc- 
cess of  women  at  the  University  includ- 
ing the  Woman-in-Residence  Program, 
and  the  Graduate  Grant  and  Endowed 
Book  Funds.  The  institute  prepares 
periodic  reports  on  the  status  of  women 
at  the  Universitv  and  has  also  secured 
Charlotte  W.  Newcombe  Scholarship 
Grants  for  mature  or  second-career 
women  for  more  than  20  years.  For 


more  information  contact  Dr.  Joan  M. 
Welch,  director,  at  610-436-2940. 

Location  of  the  University 

West  Chester  University  is  in  West 
Chester,  a  to%vn  that  has  been  the  seat  of 
government  in  Chester  Count)'  since 
1786.  With  a  population  of  about 
20,000,  the  borough  is  small  enough  to 
have  the  pleasant  aspects  of  a  tree-shaded 
American  town,  large  enough  to  contain 
essential  services  and  the  substance  of  a 
\agorous  communit}',  and  old  enough  to 
give  the  student  exposure  to  America's 
early  history.  Students  can  walk  to  West 
Chester's  many  churches.  The  town  has 
excellent  stores  and  a  fine  hospital. 
West  Chester  was  settled  in  the  early 
18th  centun',  principally  bv  members  of 
the  Societ}'  of  Friends.  In  the  heart  of 
town  is  its  courthouse,  a  classical  revival 
building  designed  in  the  1840s  by 
Thomas  U.  Walter,  one  of  the  architects 
for  the  Capitol  in  Washington,  D.C. 
West  Chester  today  is  part  of  the  rapid- 
ly growing  suburban  complex  surround- 
ing Philadelphia  and  offers  interesting 
opportunities  for  the  study  of  local, 
county,  and  regional  government  in  a 
period  ot  change  and  growth. 


Philadelphia  is  25  miles  to  the  east  and 
Wilmington  17  miles  to  the  south, 
putting  the  libraries,  museums,  and 
other  cultural  and  historical  resources  of 
both  cities  in  easy  reach.  Valley  Forge, 
the  Brand}-wine  Battlefield,  Longwood 
Gardens,  and  other  historical  attractions 
are  near  West  Chester.  New  York  and 
Washington  are  easily  accessible  by  car 
or  train. 

How  to  Reach  West  Chester 

The  Borough  of  West  Chester  can  be 
accessed  from  all  directions  both  by  car 
and  public  transportation.  Route  3,  the 
West  Chester  Pike,  leads  directly  into 
town  from  center-cit\'  Philadelphia. 
From  the  Pennsylvania  Turnpike, 
motorists  traveling  west  should  take 
Route  202  south  from  the  Valley  Forge 
Interchange  while  those  traveling  east 
can  arrive  via  Route  100  south  from  the 
Downingtown  Interchange.  From  the 
south,  Route  202  from  Wilmington  and 
Routes  100  and  52  from  U.S.  Route  1 
all  lead  to  West  Chester. 
Public  transportation  is  available  fi-om 
Philadelphia  and  other  nearby  commu- 
nities. 

Information  on  public  transportation 
and  carpoohng  is  available  in  Sykes 
Student  Union,  610-436-2984.' 


Campus  and  Facilities 


Description  of  the  Campus 

West  Chester  Universitv's  campus  is  a 
unique  mixture  of  19th  century  colle- 
giate Gothic  and  contemporary  architec- 
tural stales.  Sbcty-two  buildings,  com- 
prising more  than  2.4  million  square 
feet,  are  specially  landscaped  within  400 
acres  of  rolling  countryside.  The  distinc- 
tive buUdings  and  magnificent  old  trees 
make  the  campus  one  of  the  aesthetic 
treasures  of  Southeastern  Pennsylvania. 

Approaching  West  Chester  Borough 
from  the  south,  the  University  stretches 
westward  from  High  Street  and  provides 
a  gateway  to  the  borough.  The 
Academic  Quadrangle  serves  as  a  land- 
mark surrounded  bv  the  University's 
oldest  buildings  -  Philips  Memorial, 
Recitation  Hall,  Anderson  Hall,  Ruby 
Jones  Hall,  and  the  Old  Library.  Three 
of  these  buildings  are  constructed  of  the 
green-hued  serpentine  stone  that  has 


given  West  Chester  a  particular  charac- 
ter for  more  than  a  century.  Over  the 
decades  the  Universirv  has  expanded  to 
the  west  and  south  to  include  eight  resi- 
dence halls,  science  and  athletic  facili- 
ties, a  dining  facility',  and  drama  and  art 
buildings.  The  focal  point  of  student 
leisure  life  outside  the  classroom  is  the 
Sykes  Student  Union,  including  the  lat- 
est in  aerobics/conditioning  facilities,  a 
movie  theater,  dining  areas,  a  computer 
center,  meeting  rooms,  and  lounges. 

A  dynamic,  ongoing  building  program 
during  the  past  decade  has  brought  the 
Boucher  Science  Center,  expansion  and 
renovation  of  Sykes  Student  Union,  com- 
puter technology'  labs,  renovated  science 
and  academic  buildings,  and  the  reopen- 
ing of  the  Philips  Memorial  Building, 
Emilie  K.  Asplundh  Concert  Hall,  and 
Philips  Autograph  Library.  In  addition, 
the  Graduate  School  of  Business  is  now 


at  a  site  off  Route  202,  five  miles  trom 
the  main  campus.  The  University'  learn- 
ing environment  will  continue  to  keep 
pace  with  the  needs  ot  students  into  the 
21st  century  with  the  construction  of  the 
dramatic  new  Swope  Music  Building  and 
the  Performing  Arts  Center,  the  addition 
of  the  Business  and  Information  Tech- 
nology Center,  a  suite-stvle  residence 
complex  on  North  Campus,  an  apart- 
ment-st\'le  residence  complex  on  South 
Campus,  enlarged  dining  facilities,  and 
two  parking  garages. 

Traveling  south  three-fourths  of  a  mile 
from  the  original  campus,  the  visitor  wUl 
discover  the  South  Campus  area,  located 
on  a  300-acre  expanse  of  gendy  rolling 
Chester  Count}'  countryside.  South 
Campus  includes  an  11 -building  housing 
complex  providing  apartment-style  living 
for  500  students,  and  the  Sturzebecker 
Health  Sciences  Center,  a  nationally 


Campus  and  Facilities 


acclaimed  teaching,  performance,  and 
research  facility.  Surrounding  the  center 
are  athletic  fields,  tennis  courts,  and 
Farrell  Stadium,  home  to  the 
University's  renowned  football  program 
and  the  2002  national  champion  wom- 
en's lacrosse  team.  Also  at  South 
Campus  is  the  67-acre  Gordon  Natural 
Area,  which  includes  woodlands,  fields, 
and  a  streamside  habitat.  This  area  has 
been  conserved  as  a  research  and  teach- 
ing resource  for  the  natural  sciences. 
From  the  archway  of  learning  at  the 
Philips  Memorial  Building  to  the  hiking 
trails  ot  the  Gordon  Center,  the  visitor 
will  find  a  rich  tradition  of  educational 
excellence  and  a  diverse  variety  of  facili- 
ties in  which  to  learn,  live,  and  recreate. 

Information  Services 

Information  Services  provides  comput- 
ing resources  for  a  wide  variety  of  users, 
both  academic  and  administrative.  Many 
of  the  University's  administrative  func- 
tions, such  as  registration,  grade  report- 
ing, and  billing,  depend  heavily  on  the 
campus-wide  transaction  processing  sys- 
tem that  provides  centrahzed  access  to 
University  data  from  workstations  locat- 
ed throughout  the  campus. 
More  importandy,  computing  is  a  vital 
instructional  and  research  tool.  Infor- 
mation Services  offers  students  and  facul- 
ty a  wide  range  ot  computing  resources, 
from  mainframe  to  microcomputers, 
printers,  plotters,  graphics  workstations, 
digitizers,  and  optical  scanners.  Many  of 
these  facilities  are  available  at  various 
campus  locarions,  but  the  Academic 
Computing  Center  in  Anderson  HaU 
serves  as  a  focal  point  for  instructional 
computing  activity.  A  valid  WCU 
Identification  (ID)  card  is  required  to  use 
the  Academic  Computing  Center.  For 
fiirther  information  contact  the  Academic 
Compudng  Center  at  610-436-3349. 
Computing  facilities  throughout  the 
campus  are  joined  by  the  Information 
Services  Network.  This  network  offers 
electronic  mail  capabilities  for  all  campus 
workstations,  connection  to  the  Internet, 
and  access  to  the  University's  main  library 
catalogs.  AH  WCU  undergraduate  stu- 
dents are  provided  computer  accounts. 
The  Information  Services  Network  pro- 
vides high-speed  access  to  software 
applications  (programming  languages, 
spreadsheets,  word  processors,  faculty 
developed  programs,  etc.)  and  electronic 
communication  capabilities  to  worksta- 
tions. Student  laboratory  facihties  are 
available  in  the  Academic  Computing 


Center  and  in  each  ot  the  eight  resi- 
dence halls.  South  Campus  apartments, 
and  in  Sykes  Student  Union. 
Students  interested  in  acquiring  a  work- 
ing knowledge  of  several  commonly 
used  software  packages  are  encouraged 
to  enroU  in  the  introductory  computing 
courses  offered  by  the  Department  of 
Computer  Science. 

Major  hardware  facilities  include  an  IBM 
mainframe,  numerous  NTAS  tile  servers, 
PCs,  Macintosh,  SUN,  and  DEC  work- 
stations. Letter-quality  laser  printers  also 
are  available  for  student  use. 
Academic  Computing  Services  is  located 
in  Anderson  H;iU,  610-436-3349.  The 
West  Chester  University'  web  site 
address  is  http://www.wcupa.edu. 

Geology  Museum 

The  West  Chester  University  Geology 
Museum  in  Schmucker  Science  Center 
houses  several  collections  of  historic  and 
scientific  importance.  Minerals  from 
around  the  world,  drawn  from  the  col- 
lections of  William  Yocom  and  Ruth 
Bass,  are  on  display.  The  collection  of 
the  late,  well-known  West  Chester  geol- 
ogist Hugh  McKinstr}'  contains  fine 
specimens  found  in  Chester  County,  as 
well  as  specimens  from  notable  locahties 
world-wide  and  collections  of  other  sig- 
nificant 19th  century  amateurs.  A  spe- 
cial cabinet  with  ultraviolet  light  houses 
selected  specimens  trom  the  extensive 
collection  of  fluorescent  minerals  of 
John  Stolar,  Sr.  Other  exhibits  include 
fossils,  the  geology  of  Chester  County, 
and  labels  written  by  tamous  collectors 
and  mineralogists.  The  museum  is  free 
and  open  to  the  public  by  appointment. 
Contact  the  Department  ot  Geology 
and  Astronomy  at  610-436-2727. 

WCU  Observatory 

The  Department  of  Geology  and 
Astronomy  maintains  an  astronomical 
observatory  on  the  roof  of  the 
Schmucker  Science  Center.  The  main 
instrument  is  an  11.5  inch  reflecting 
telescope  that  can  be  used  in  either  the 
Newtonian  or  Cassagrain  format.  The 
auxihary  telescopes  include  a  pair  of 
four-inch  refractors,  one  used  to  project 
solar  images  in  white  hght  and  the  other 
equipped  with  a  hydrogen  alpha  solar  fd- 
ter.  A  five-inch  Schmidt  camera  also  can 
be  mounted  on  the  telescope  assembly. 
The  telescope  system  can  be  used  for 
basic  observing,  astrophotography,  pho- 
tometry, and  spectroscopy.  The  observa- 
tory is  equipped  with  a  graphics  com- 


puter system  and  a  video  camera  for  pic- 
ture capturing  capabihties.  The  observa- 
tory is  used  as  an  astronomical  laborato- 
ry for  astronomy  courses  and  as  a 
research  area  for  independent  study  for 
junior-  or  senior-level  research  projects. 

WCU  Planetarium 

The  Department  of  Geology  and 

Astronomy  operates  the  University 
Planetarium  which  houses  a  Spitz  A-5 
planetarium  projector.  The  planetarium  is 
used  for  astronomy  class  lectures  and  labs 
as  well  as  for  school  and  pubBc  programs. 
Approximately  70  schools  and  other 
groups  attend  the  free  programs  each 
year,  and  annual  attendance  approaches 
5,000.  The  planetarium  dome  is  10 
meters  in  diameter,  and  the  projector  was 
rebuilt  and  upgraded  by  Spitz  Space 
Systems  in  1993.  Persons  interested  in 
arranging  group  visits  should  contact  the 
Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 
at  610-436-2727  for  details. 

Darlington  Herbarium 

The  Darlington  Herbarium,  housed  in 
Schmucker  Science  Center,  is  one  of  the 
most  highly  regarded  historical  collections 
of  dried  plant  specimens  in  the  East. 
Ainong  the  20,000  specimens  are  plants 
collected  by  such  famous  explorers  and 
botanists  as  Captain  John  Fremont, 
Thomas  Nuttall,  Sir  William  Hooker, 
C.S.  Rafinesque,  and  George  Englemann. 
More  than  200  collectors  from  America's 
formative  years  of  1820  to  1850  are  repre- 
sented. The  herbarium  was  the  work  of 
Dr.  William  Darlington  (1782-1863),  a 
member  of  the  West  Chester  Cabinet  of 
Science.  Dr.  Darlington  was  eminent  in 
West  Chester  as  a  physician,  educator, 
banker,  businessman,  historian,  and 
botanist.  His  plants,  however,  were  his 
first  love.  A  state  park  has  been  estab- 
lished in  northern  California  to  preserve  a 
rare  species  of  insectivorous  plant  named 
in  his  honor —  Darlingtonia. 

Robert  B.  Gordon  Natural  Area  for 
Environmental  Studies 

The  University  has  conserved  100  acres  of 
natural  woodland  and  field  and  stream- 
side  habitat  located  on  South  Campus 
and  uses  it  for  several  kinds  of  outdoor 
studies  in  the  natural  sciences.  Dedicated 
in  1973,  the  area  was  named  for  Robert 
B.  Gordon,  faculty  member  and  chairper- 
son of  the  University's  Department  of 
Science  firom  1938  to  1963. 


Campus  and  Facilities 


Francis  Harvey  Green  Library 

The  Francis  Harvey  Green  Library  at  the 
corner  of  High  Street  and  Rosedale 
Avenue  provides  an  excellent  environ- 
ment for  study  and  research.  The  sLx- 
story  facUit}'  includes  individual  study 
carrels,  faculty  and  graduate  lounges, 
group  studv  and  seminar  rooms,  and  gen- 
eral reading  areas.  The  Rdl-time  library 
staff  of  38  includes  the  director  and  assis- 
tant director  of  library  services,  12  faculty 
librarians,  and  24  library  staff  members. 
The  hbran"  has  a  pivotal  role  in  both 
teaching  and  research  with  a  growing 
collection  of  more  than  2,000,000  items, 
including  the  following: 
Print  Materials 

•  Books  -  more  than  550,000 

•  Current  journal  subscriptions  -  more 
than  2,800 

•  Government  documents  -  more  than 
287,000 

Audio  Visual  Materials 

•  Fihns  and  videos  -  more  than  4,000 

•  Sound  recordings  -  more  than  64,000 
Microforms  (microfilm,  microfiche, 
microcard,  etc.) 

•  Books,  journals,  dissertations,  docu- 
ments -  more  than  1,200,000 

Electronic  Materials 

•  Indexes  and  other  databases  -  more 
than  100,  many  of  which  (e.g., 
EBSCO  Academic  Search  Premier 
and  Academic  Universe)  include  the 
full  text  of  articles 

•  Journals  -  articles  from  more  than 
3,000  journals  are  available  through 
providers  such  as  EBSCO  Online, 
JSTOR,  Catchword,  and  Project  Muse 

•  Books  -  more  than  3,600  titles 
through  NetLibrarv' 

The  vast  majority  of  these  materials  are 
listed  in  PILOT,  the  Librarv's  Web-acces- 
sible catalog  (http://pilot.sshe.edu:8022). 
FHG  Librar\'  resources  provide  an 
excellent  basis  for  undergraduate 


research  and  compare  favorably  with 
those  ot  other  public  and  private  acade- 
mic libraries  in  West  Chester's  geo- 
graphic area.  Interlibrary  Loan  and 
PALCI  Direct  Borrow  via  the  web  per- 
mit students  and  facult)'  to  obtain  mate- 
rials from  major  libraries  in  Penn- 
sylvania and  around  the  world. 
Noteworthy  collections  in  the  library' 
include  K-12  textbooks  and  instructional 
materials,  children's  literature,  and  maps. 
The  library  is  a  selective  depository  for 
government  documents  and  maps. 
Special  Collections  includes  the 
University'  Archives,  the  Stanley 
Weintraub  Center  for  the  Study  of  the 
Arts  and  Humanities;  scientific  and  his- 
torical books  from  the  Chester  Counts- 
Cabinet  of  Natural  Sciences;  the  Normal 
Collection  (publications  by  West  Chester 
Universit)'  facultv  and  alumni);  the 
Ehinger  Collection  (historical  books  on 
physical  education);  the  Biographies  of 
the  Signers  of  the  Declaration  of 
Independence  by  John  Sanderson;  and 
the  complete  set  of  the  Folios  of 
Shakespeare.  The  Phihps  Autograph 
Librar)'  is  housed  in  a  specially  designed 
room  in  Philips  Memorial  Building. 
The  library  maintains  an  extensive  web 
site,  www.wcupa.edu/libran'.fhg,  which 
provides  comprehensive  information  on 
and  access  to  library  resources  and  services. 

Music  Library 

The  Music  Library  is  part  of  the 
University  hbrary.  Located  in  Swope 
Hall,  it  houses  an  extensive  collection  of 
music,  one  of  the  largest  of  its  kind  in 
the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania.  Its 
rapidly  growing  holdings  include  more 
than  32,000  scores  (historical  editions, 
collected  works,  opera,  keyboard,  and 
vocal  and  instrumental  music)  and  more 
than  30,000  recordings  (classical,  folk, 
nonwestern,  and  popular).  Listening 
facilities  for  20  persons  are  available 
within  the  Hbrar}'. 


Historical  Properties 

The  Chester  Counts'  Cabinet  of  Natural 
Sciences  (1826-1871)  and  the  West 
Chester  Academy  (1811-1871)  merged 
to  form  the  West  Chester  Normal 
School,  which  evolved  into  West  Chester 
Universit)'.  Historical  properties  that 
came  to  the  Normal  School  from  the 
Chester  County  Cabinet  are  a  grandfa- 
ther's clock  that  belonged  the  Benjamin 
Franklin,  Anthony  Wayne's  telescope,  an 
herbarium,  library  and  museum  collec- 
tions, and  the  Anthony  Wayne  Letters, 
including  those  to  Wayne  from  George 
Washington,  Benedict  Arnold,  and  oth- 
ers. The  letters  and  the  library  collec- 
tions are  housed  in  the  FHG  Library 
Special  Collections. 

Art  Collections 

The  University's  permanent  art  collection 
is  made  up  primarily  of  gifts  from  interest- 
ed art  patrons,  senior  class  purchases,  and 
gifts  from  alumni.  The  Student  Services, 
Inc.  (SSI)  permanent  art  collection  is  on 
display  in  buUdings  throughout  the  cam- 
pus. The  SSI  collection  consists  of  a  num- 
ber of  important  works,  such  as  the  water- 
color,  Andress  Place,  by  j\ndrew  Wyeth. 

Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic 

The  Speech  and  Hearing  Clinic  provides 
diagnostic  and  therapeutic  services  for 
persons  with  speech,  language,  and  hear- 
ing problems.  These  services  are  provided 
free  of  charge  to  West  Chester  University 
students,  facult)',  and  staff,  and  to  stu- 
dents enrolled  at  Cheyney  University.  A 
fee  is  charged  to  others  who  wish  to  use 
the  services  of  the  clinic.  Located  at  201 
Carter  Drive  (across  Madack  Street  from 
the  BuU  Center  parking  lot),  the  clinic  is 
operated  by  the  Department  of 
Communicative  Disorders  as  a  teaching 
and  training  tacUit)'  tor  its  undergraduate 
and  graduate  students. 


Admission  to  West  Chester  University 


West  Chester  University-  welcomes  appli- 
cations from  qualified  residents  ot 
Pennsylvania,  other  U.S.  states,  and  inter- 
national students.  The  University  evalu- 
ates its  applicants  on  the  basis  of  scholar- 
ship, character,  and  potential  for  achieve- 
ment in  the  programs  to  which  they 
apply.  The  University  operates  on  a  mod- 
ified rolling  admissions  policy,  whereby 
applicants  with  the  strongest  academic 
credentials  are  given  priority  processing 
and  notified  as  quickly  as  possible  ot  their 
status.  Other  applicants  are  evaluated  as 
their  files  become  complete  and  may  have 
final  decisions  deferred  until  later  in  the 
processing  cycle,  depending  upon  their 
individual  academic  profile.  AH  decisions 
are  communicated  to  applicants  in  writ- 
ing. Qualified  students  of  any  age  from  all 
racial,  religious,  ethnic,  and  socio-eco- 
nomic backgrounds  are  welcome  at  West 
Chester.  Smdies  may  be  pursued  on  a 
friU-  or  part-time  basis. 

General  Requirements  for 
Admission  of  Freshmen 

1.  Graduation,  with  satisfactory  scholar- 
ship, from  an  approved  secondary 
school  or  approval  by  the  Credentials 
Evaluation  Division  of  the  Pennsyl- 
vania Department  of  Education. 

2.  Either  a  satisfactor)-  score  on  the 
SAT  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  (CEEB)  or  satis- 
factory scores  on  the  tests  given  in  the 
American  College  Testing  Program 
(ACT).  Applicants  who  graduated 
from  high  school  more  than  five  years 
ago  do  not  need  to  submit  test  scores. 

How  and  When  Freshmen  Should 
Apply 

For  application  materials  please  write  or 
call  the  Office  of  Admissions,  West 
Chester  University,  West  Chester,  PA 
19383,  610-436-3411  (or  toll-free  at  877- 
315-2165),  e-mail  ugadmiss@wcupa.edu, 
visit  our  Web  site  at  www.wcupa.edu  or 
the  State  System  Web  site  at 
www.sshechan.edu. 

Freshmen  for  the  fall  semester  are  urged 
to  begin  the  application  process  early  in 
their  senior  year  of  high  school.  Appli- 
cants for  the  spring  semester  should 
complete  an  application  by  December  1. 
However,  if  enrollment  limits  are  met 
before  these  dates,  admissions  will  be 
closed. 


Candidates  will  receive  notification  from 
the  director  of  admissions  as  soon  as 
possible  after  decisions  are  reached. 
Freshmen  who  are  denied  admission  on 
the  basis  of  academics  wiU  not  be  per- 
mitted to  enroU  as  a  nondegree  student 
at  the  Universit)'  but  will  be  encouraged 
to  consider  a  junior  or  communit)'  col- 
lege as  an  alternative. 

Policy  on  Early  Admission 

In  exceptional  circumstances,  students 
with  superior  academic  qualifications  and 
unusually  mamre  personal  development 
are  admitted  as  freshmen  upon  complet- 
ing their  junior  year  of  secondary  school. 
Students  who,  in  the  opinion  ot  their 
guidance  counselors,  warrant  considera- 
tion for  early  admission  may  obtain  more 
information  from  the  director  of  admis- 
sions. Early  admission  applications 
should  be  submitted  in  accordance  with 
deadlines  recommended  for  freshmen. 

Arranging  for  Tests 

Information  about  the  SAT  and  ACT 
may  be  obtained  from  high  school  guid- 
ance counselors.  It  is  the  student's  respon- 
sibilitv'  to  ensure  that  all  required  test 
scores  are  forwarded  to  the  Office  of 
Admissions. 

The  Universit)-  awards  credit  for  courses 
taken  through  the  Advanced  Placement 
Program  ottered  b)-  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board.  Test  scores  of  three 
or  better  are  required  and  credit  may  be 
applied  toward  advanced  placement  in 
the  Universit)'  and/or  requirements  for 
graduation.  Students  are  encouraged  to 
submit  their  scores  to  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  as  early  as  possible  to  be  sched- 
uled appropriately  for  their  first  semester. 

Transfer  Students 

Individuals  who  have  been  enrolled  in  any 
postsecondai)-  institution  after  graduation 
from  high  school  and/or  have  attended 
West  Chester  University  on  a  nondegree 
basis  must  apply  as  transfer  students. 
Applicants  whose  secondan-  school  cre- 
dentials would  not  warrant  admissions 
consideration  as  freshmen  must  complete 
the  equivalent  of  one  full  academic  year 
prior  to  attempting  a  transfer.  A  mini- 
mum cumulative  Grade  Point  Average 
(GPA)  of  2.00  is  required  for  transfer 
consideration.  However,  the  University's 
modified  rolling  admissions  policy  gives 
priority  to  applicants  with  the  strongest 


academic  credentials.  In  addition,  some 
academic  departments  have  established 
prerequisite  course  work  and  specific 
grade  point  average  requirements  for 
admission.  Special  consideration  is  award- 
ed to  graduates  of  Pennsylvania  commu- 
nit\'  colleges  and  to  students  transferring 
from  other  universities  in  the 
Penns)-lvania  State  System  of  Higher 
Education.  Specific  information  may  be 
obtained  from  the  Office  of  Admissions. 
Transfer  applicants  for  the  fall  semester 
should  begin  the  application  process 
early  in  the  preceding  spring  semester. 
Spring  semester  appUcations  should  be 
completed  bv  December  1.  If  enrollment 
limits  are  met  before  this  time,  admis- 
sions will  be  closed. 

Application  Procedures  for 
Students  Transferring  from  an 
Accredited  Institution 

1.  File  an  application,  available  from  the 
Office  of  Admissions  or  through  the 
Internet  at  http://www.wcupa.edu. 

2.  See  that  the  director  of  admissions 
receives: 

a.  An  official  transcript  from  all  insti- 
tutions attended.  If  preliminary 
transcripts  are  submitted,  the  stu- 
dent must  see  that  final  transcripts 
are  filed  at  the  end  of  the  semester. 

b.  Mid-term  grades,  if  the  student  is 
currently  enrolled  elsewhere  and  is 
applv-ing  to  West  Chester  for  the 
following  semester. 

3.  If  a  student  has  completed  less  than 
30  semester  hours  of  credit,  he  or  she 
must  supply  SAT  or  ACT  scores  and 
an  official  high  school  transcript. 

If  a  student  is  accepted,  admission  is 
contingent  upon  successful  completion 
of  current  course  work  with  at  least  a  C 
average  as  documented  by  transcripts  of 
all  work  attempted  or  completed. 
Transfer  students  should  read 
"Maintenance  of  Academic  Standards" 
in  the  "Academic  Policies  and 
Procedures"  section  of  this  catalog. 
Transcripts  ■will  be  evaluated  in  accor- 
dance with  the  policies  of  the  department 
to  which  the  smdent  seeks  admission. 
After  the  student  has  been  admitted,  he 
or  she  should  work  out  an  acceptable 
program  of  study  in  close  consultation 
with  an  adviser  in  the  major  department. 
Transfer  applicants  who  are  denied 
admission  on  the  basis  of  academics  will 
not  be  permitted  to  enroll  as  a  nonde- 


Admission  to  West  Chester  Universirv' 


gree  student  without  the  approval  of  the 
Office  of  Admissions.  Such  approval 
may  be  rendered  in  the  event  of  extenu- 
ating circumstances  and  only  under  cer- 
tain agreed-upon  conditions  in  accor- 
dance with  University  policy. 

Academic  Passport 

The  Board  of  Governors  of  the  State 
System  of  Higher  Education  adopted  an 
Academic  Passport  Polic)-  effective 
January'  1999.  The  goal  of  this  pohcy  is 
to  facilitate  transfer  to  State  System  uni- 
versities from  Pennsylvania  community 
colleges  and  other  System  universities. 

Pennsylvania  community  college  students 
who  have  earned  the  associate  of  arts 
degree  (A.A.)  or  the  associate  of  science 
(A.S.)  degree  in  a  transfer  program  con- 
taining a  minimum  of  30  credits  of  liber- 
al arts  courses  for  the  A.S.  and  45  credits 
of  liberal  ans  courses  for  the  A.A.  degree 
with  a  2.00  GPA  or  above  are  considered 
to  have  an  Academic  Passport.  Students 
completing  12  credits  or  more  from 
another  State  System  university  with  a 
minimum  2.00  GPA  are  said  to  have  an 
Academic  Passport  as  well.  The  transfer- 
credit  provisions  described  in  the 
Academic  Passport  are  extended  to  com- 
munitv  college  students  without  an  asso- 
ciate degree  who  transfer  12  or  more 
credits  to  a  Svstem  instimtion.  In  addi- 
tion, West  Chester  University  is  extend- 
ing the  transfer-credit  pro\isions  to  all 
transfer  students  from  accredited  institu- 
tions, effective  January  1999. 

The  Academic  Passport  pohcy  states 

Up  to  a  maximum  of  45  general  education 
credits  and  liberal  arts  course  credits  shall  be 
used  to  meet  lower-division  university  general 
education  requirements,  even  if  the  receiving 
university  does  not  offer  the  specific  course 
being  transferred  or  has  not  designated  that 
course  as  general  education.  A  course-by-course 
match  shall  not  be  required. 

Transfer  credit  not  applied  to  general  edu- 
cation will  be  applied  to  major  require- 
ments and  other  degree  requirements. 

Please  note:  Students  must  meet  the 
admissions  standards  for  their  selected 
program  of  study,  and  enrollment  hmi- 
tations  may  restrict  the  number  of  stu- 
dents who  can  be  accommodated. 

Specifics  of  this  policy  can  be  obtained 
from  the  Office  of  Admissions  or  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Students  are  urged  to  apply  early  and 
submit  transcripts  from  transfer  institu- 
tions as  soon  as  possible  so  that  students 
have  maximum  information  on  course 
equivalency  and  which  requirements 
have  been  met. 


University  Policies  for  Students 
Transferring  from  a  Nonaccredited 
Institution 

Apphcants  from  coUegiate  institutions 
(including  communit)'  colleges  and 
junior  colleges)  that  are  not  accredited  by 
one  of  the  six  regional  associations  in 
the  United  States  wLU  be  considered  for 
admission  if  the  appUcant's  cumulative 
index  is  2.00  (C)  or  better. 
The  evaluation  of  courses  hsted  on  tran- 
scripts from  an  institution  not  accredited 
bv  one  of  the  six  regional  associations 
vviU  be  made  by  the  student's  major 
department  in  consultation  with  the  fac- 
ulty dean  and  transfer  credit  analyst.  AH 
evaluations  are  subject  to  review  by  the 
provost  and  academic  vice  president. 

International  Students 

Students  from  foreign  countries  may  be 
considered  for  degree  admission  if,  in 
addition  to  satisfying  the  general  require- 
ments, they  also  demonstrate  proficiency 
in  Enghsh.  Standardized  test  scores  fi-om 
one  of  the  following  must  be  submitted 
with  the  apphcation:  Test  of  Enghsh  as  a 
Foreign  Language  (TOEFL),  SAT,  or 
American  College  Test  (ACT).  Non- 
native  Enghsh  speakers  are  encouraged  to 
submit  the  TOEFL;  a  minimum  score  of 
550  is  required  for  the  written  exam,  and 
at  least  213  for  the  computer-based  test. 

International  students  are  admitted  for 

both  the  faU  and  spring  semesters. 
AppUcations  for  the  fall  must  be  submit- 
ted to  the  Office  of  Admissions  by  May 
1,  while  apphcations  for  the  spring  semes- 
ter should  be  submitted  by  August  1.  All 
students  are  required  to  submit  an  apph- 
cation fee.  Accepted  smdents  must  be 
able  to  verif\'  their  abihty  to  fuUy  meet  aU 
educational  and  hving  expenses  before  any 
immigration  documents  can  be  issued. 
Because  of  the  amount  of  time  it  takes  for 
a  student  visa  to  be  secured,  international 
apphcants  are  encouraged  to  complete  the 
admissions  process  well  in  advance  of  the 
May  1  and  August  1  deadlines. 

Insurance  Requirements  for 
International  Students 

International  students  at  West  Chester 
University  are  required  to  carry  adequate 
health  and  accident  insurance.  Insurance 
must  be  effective  for  all  periods  of  time 
the  student  has  been  authorized  to  be  in 
the  United  States  by  an  immigration  doc- 
ument issued  by  West  Chester  University. 
Health  and  accident  insurance  pohcies 
must  be  purchased  through  a  company 
that  sells  insurance  in  the  United  States. 
West  Chester  University  has  set  mini- 


mum coverage  standards  which  must  be 
met  by  all  insurance  pohcies.  Information 
about  the  minimum  standards  are  avail- 
able at  the  Center  for  International 
Programs  Office,  610-436-3515. 

To  assure  comphance  with  the  insurance 
requirement,  all  international  smdents 
must  come  to  the  Center  for  International 
Programs  bv  September  1  of  each  acade- 
mic year.  There  smdents  may  obtain 
information  as  to  the  amount  of  insurance 
required  and  the  means  of  obtaining  cov- 
erage to  meet  the  insurance  requirement. 

Physical  Examination 
Requirements 

Apphcants  are  not  asked  to  submit  a 
report  of  medical  history'  until  they  have 
been  accepted  for  admission  and  have 
committed  to  enroll.  The  form  for  the 
necessary  health  examination,  which  wiU 
be  mailed  to  students,  must  be  complet- 
ed by  a  physician  and  returned  to  the 
University  Health  Center  prior  to  the 
start  of  classes. 

Students  with  Disabilities 

West  Chester  University  wiU  make 
every  effort  to  assure  students  with  dis- 
abihties  access  to  all  classes  required  for 
their  program  of  study  and  will  endeavor 
to  remove  all  obstacles  to  a  flihlUing, 
comprehensive  university  experience. 
Students  should  contact  the  Office  of 
Services  for  Students  with  DisabUities  in 
Room  105  Lawrence  Center  to  arrange 
suitable  accommodations.  Additional 
information  can  be  obtained  by  calhng 
610-436-2564. 

Second  Baccalaureate  Degree 

An  individual  may  pursue  a  second  bac- 
calaureate degree  at  West  Chester 
University'  after  earning  the  first  bac- 
calaureate degree  either  at  West  Chester 
University  or  another  institution.  Such 
an  individual  must  apply  for  admission 
through  the  Office  of  Admissions  as  a 
transfer  student. 

Admission  of  CoUege  Graduates 
Seeking  Certification 

College  graduates  who  yvish  to  obtain 
teaching  certification  should  consult 
with  the  Teacher  Education  Center, 
610-436-3090. 

Readmission  of  Former  Students 

Smdents  who  have  withdrawn  from,  or 
who  for  other  reasons  have  not  matricu- 
lated at.  West  Chester  for  two  or  more 
consecutive  semesters  are  classified  as 
"inactive"  and  must  request  an  apphca- 
tion for  readmission  from  the  Office  of 


Fees  and  Expenses 


Admissions.  After  an  absence  of  only  one 
semester,  students  wishing  to  return 
should  contact  the  Oftlce  of  the  Registrar 
and  their  department  advisers.  Those 
who  have  attended  any  institutions  of 
higher  learning  since  leaving  West 
Chester  must  request  those  institutions  to 
forward  transcripts  of  their  records  to  the 
Office  of  Admissions,  West  Chester 
University,  West  Chester,  PA  19383. 
Readmitted  students  who  have  a  disabil- 
ity that  they  previously  did  not  disclose 
but  wish  to  do  so  should  contact  the 
Office  of  Services  for  Students  with 
Disabilities  (OSSD)  at  610-436-2564. 
These  students  will  be  informed  of  the 
appropriate  documentation  to  submit  as 


well  as  the  assistance  and  support  ser- 
vices available  to  them.  Students  who 
believe  that  their  disability  had  an  effect 
on  their  previous  course  work  at  the 
University  and  wish  to  have  this  fact 
considered  should  include  that  informa- 
tion in  their  personal  statement.  They 
also  may  wish  to  seek  the  support  of  the 
OSSD  in  the  readmission  process. 
Readmitted  students  are  bound  by  the 
requirements  in  the  major,  minor,  and 
cognate  areas  at  the  time  of  readmission, 
except  where  permission  is  granted  by 
the  respective  department. 
Students  intending  to  enroll  in  student 
teaching  in  the  first  semester  of  readmis- 
sion must  file  an  application  for  student 


teaching  with  the  individual  departments 
at  least  four  months  before  their  expected 
readmission.  See  also  "Student  Teaching" 
in  the  section  entided  "Academic  Affairs." 
All  readmission  applications,  including 
all  supporting  documents,  should  be 
filed  by  August  1  for  the  fall  semester 
and  December  1  for  the  spring  semester. 

Office  of  Admissions  Staff 

Marsha  Haug — Director  of  Admissions 
Edwin  Wright — Associate  Director 
Courtney  Hoover  -  Assistant  Director 
Angela  Howard  —  Assistant  Director 
Heather  Irwin  -  Assistant  Director 
Angel  Harper  Jackson  -  Assistant 

Director 
MoUy  Leese  -  Assistant  Director 


Fees  and  Expenses 


special  Note:  The  fees  listed  below  reflect 
charges  at  press  time.  For  up-to-date  infor- 
mation on  fees  at  any  given  time,  contact 
the  Office  of  the  Bursar,  610-436-2552. 
Fees  and  expenses  are  subject  to  change 
without  notice.  Fees  shown  here  are  in 
effect  for  the  academic  year  2003—2004, 
unless  otherwise  noted. 

Tuition  Rates 

The  following  tuition  rates  are  those  in 
effect  for  2002-03  and  are  subject  to 
change  for  2003-04. 
Unless  otherwise  specified,  fees  may  be 
paid  by  Visa,  MasterCard,  American 
Express,  check,  or  money  order  made 
payable  to  West  Chester  University.  The 
canceled  check,  money  order  record,  or 
charge  card  billing  serves  as  a  receipt. 

Undergraduate  Tuition  for  Legal 
Residents  of  Pennsylvania 

Full-time  students  (between  12-18  credits) 
$2,189.00  per  semester 
Part-time  students  (11  credits  or  less), 
or  per  credit  for  each  credit  over  18 

$182.00  per  credit 
See  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  for  resi- 
dency requirements. 

Undergraduate  Tuition  for 
Out-of-State  Students 

Full-time  students  (between  12-18  credits) 
$5,473.00  per  semester 


Part-time  students  (11  credits  or  less), 
or  per  credit  for  each  credit  over  18 

$456.00  per  credit 

General  Fee 

The  general  tee  of  $514  per  fiill-time  stu- 
dent (12  credits  or  more)  or  $43  per  cred- 
it hour  for  the  part-time  student  (11  cred- 
its or  less)  is  a  mandatory  charge  which 
covers  the  use  of  the  following  services: 

•  Sykes  Student  Union  Fee  ($55) 
Previously  called  the  community  cen- 
ter fee,  this  charge  is  for  the  opera- 
tion and  use  of  Sykes  Student  Union. 

•  Health  Center  Fee  ($60) 
This  charge  is  for  the  use  of  the 
University  Health  Center. 

•  Snident  Services,  Inc.  (SSI)  Fee  ($84) 
The  SSI  fee  fiinds  student  activities, 
services,  clubs,  and  sports. 

•  Sykes  Student  Union  EJcpansion  Fee 
($60) 

This  fee  supports  the  recent  renovation 
of  Sykes  Student  Union,  which  features 
new  and  improved  student  services. 

•  Exiucational  Services  Fee  ($219) 
(10%  of  in-state  undergraduate  tuition 
or  $219  using  2002-03  tuition  schedule) 
Students  pay  this  fee  in  lieu  of  specific 
department  charges. 

•  Parking  Improvement  Fee  ($36) 
This  fee  is  dedicated  to  improve  the 
quality  and  availability  of  campus 
parking  for  students.  The  fee  will 
provide  for  new  student  parking 
spaces,  improved  shuttle  service,  and 
safety  improvements. 


Technology  Tuition  Fee 

This  mandatory  instructional  fee  will  be 
used  to  enhance  classroom  technology. 
All  charges  are  per  semester. 
Legal  residents  of  Pennsylvania: 
FuU-time  undergraduate  and  graduate 

$50.00 
Part-time  undergraduate  and  graduate 

$25.00 
Out-of-state  students: 
FuU-time  undergraduate  and  graduate 

$75.00 
Part-time  undergraduate  and  graduate 

$38.00 
Summer  will  be  considered  as  one  semes- 
ter. Students  enrolled  in  multiple  summer 
sessions  wiU  be  charged  no  more  than  the 
equivalent  of  the  fiiU-time  semester  rate. 

Housing  Fee 

North  Campus  Residence  Halls  -  This  fee 
entities  the  student  to  occupancy  of  a  stan- 
dard double  room  in  any  North  Campus 
residence  hall  with  one  roommate. 
Per  student  $1,856.00  per  semester 

South  Campus  Apartment  Complex  - 
This  fee  entitles  the  student  to  occupan- 
cy of  a  four-  or  five-person  apartment 
with  the  following  bedroom  occupancy: 
Single  occupancy  bedroom 
(per  student)         $2,328.00  per  semester 
Double  occupancy  bedroom 
(per  student)         $2,153.00  per  semester 
Students  in  the  North  Campus  residence 
halls  losing  their  roommates  who  do  not 


^H      Fees  and  Expenses 


have  another  roommate  assigned  to  them 
will  be  assigned  a  roommate,  relocated, 
or  charged  a  private  room  fee  of  $39  per 
week  for  every  week  that  they  occupy  the 
room  alone.  These  options  are  available 
on  a  limited  basis;  however,  available 
spaces  win  be  used  if  demand  requires. 

Meal  Fee 

Students  in  the  North  Campus  resi- 
dence halls  must  choose  among  Plans  1, 
3,  5  and  the  175  block. 
Plan  1:  14- Variable  Program 

S898.00  per  semester 
This  convenient  program  entitles  resi- 
dent, off-campus,  and  commuter  stu- 
dents to  any  14  out  of  the  19  meals 
served  Monday  through  Sunday  and 
includes  a  flex  fund  of  S 100.  The  flex 
aspect  of  the  14-variable  board  plan  gives 
students  the  flexibility  of  making  up  to 
$100  in  purchases  at  any  dining  service 
location.  Students  may  add  to  their  flex 
account  at  any  time  in  $25  increments. 
With  flex  fiinds  students  can: 

•  Supplement  meal  entidements 

•  Treat  friends  or  family  members  to 
meals 

•  For  a  late  night  snack,  have  a  freshlv 
made  ITZA  PIZZA  deUvered  to 
the  residence  hall 

•  Purchase  items  from  the 
Convenience  Stores 

Plan  2:  Flex  Program 

This  program  is  designed  for  the  South 
Campus  apartment  complex,  off-campus 
and  commuter  students,  faculty,  and 
staff.  A  minimum  of  $100  can  be  placed 
in  a  flex  account  that  can  be  accessed  by 
an  ID  card.  The  program  can  be  used  in 
the  Lawrence  Food  Court,  Campus 
Corner,  Convenience  Stores,  or  in  the 
Sykes  Ram's  Head  Food  Court.  Faculty 
and  staff  may  use  their  flex  dollars  in  the 
University  Club  as  well.  With  this  pro- 
gram, there  is  no  need  to  carry  cash  for 
meals.  The  flex  fund  may  be  increased 
by  $25  increments  at  any  time  during 
the  semester. 

Plan  3:  10- Variable  Program 

$824.00  per  semester 
This  plan  allows  resident,  off-campus, 
and  commuter  students  more  flexibility 
in  scheduling  their  meals  throughout  the 
week.  This  plan  entitles  participants  to 
10  out  of  the  19  meals  served  Monday 
through  Sunday  and  includes  a  flex  fund 
of  $100  that  can  be  used  as  described  in 
Plan  1. 

Plan  4:  5-Variable  Program 

S611.00  per  semester 


This  plan  is  designed  for  South  Campus 
apartment  complex,  off-campus,  and 
commuter  students  who  wish  to  have 
the  convenience  of  meals  on  campus. 
This  plan  entitles  participants  to  five  out 
of  the  19  meals  served  Alonday  through 
Sunday  and  includes  a  flex  fund  of  $100 
that  can  be  used  as  described  in  Plan  1. 

Plan  5:  19  All-inclusive  Program 

$965.00  per  semester 

This  plan  entitles  resident,  off-campus, 
and  commuter  smdents  to  all  of  the  meals 
served  during  the  week  and  includes  a  flex 
fijnd  of  $100  that  can  be  used  as 
described  in  Plan  1. 

For  those  students  in  residence  halls,  the 
meal  plan  cost  has  already  been  included 
in  the  University  bLUing.  South  Campus 
apartment  complex,  off-campus,  and 
commuter  students  can  sign  up  for  one  of 
these  meal  plans  by  applying  at  the  Office 
of  the  Bursar  in  the  E.O.  BuU  Center. 

Block  Plans 

175  with  $100  flex       $858  per  semester 

50  with  $100  flex         $560  per  semester 

The  block  plan  is  different  from  the 
other  plans  since  students  may  vary  the 
number  of  meals  they  eat  in  a  given  week 
from  0-19.  The  number  of  remaining 
meals  carries  over  week  to  week,  but  all 
meals  must  be  consumed  by  the  end  of 
the  semester  or  be  forfeited.  There  is  no 
refund  for  unused  meals  at  the  end  of  the 
semester.  The  two  block  plans  available 
are  the  175  per  semester  and  the  50  per 
semester,  and  both  include  $100  in  flex 
funds.  However,  resident  students  may 
only  select  the  175,  which  averages 
approximately  12  meals  per  week.  Since 
meals  may  not  be  added  if  they  run  out 
early,  it  is  important  to  use  them  wisely. 
Any  flex  funds  left  at  the  end  of  the  first 
semester  will  transfer  to  the  second 
semester.  Any  flex  dollars  remaining  at 
the  end  of  the  second  semester  will  be 
forfeited. 
How  the  Meal  Plan  Works 

A  West  Chester  University'  identifica- 
tion card  will  be  encoded  to  access  a  stu- 
dent's dining  service  account. 

A  meal  or  flex  dollars  will  be  deducted 
from  the  balance  automatically  when  the 
card  is  presented  to  the  cashier. 

This  identification  axd  vvoll  serve  as  a  ticket 
to  the  offerings  at  Lawrence  Food  Court, 
Campus  Comer,  Convenience  Stores,  and 
Sykes  Ram's  Head  Food  Court. 

Identification  Card  Fees.  The 

University  charges  a  $10  fee  to  issue  an 
identification  card  to  each  fuU-  or  part- 


time  student.  If  this  card  is  lost,  stolen, 
or  damaged,  the  student  will  be  charged 
$10  for  a  replacement  card.  This  fee  is 
payable  at  the  Student  Services,  Inc. 
(SSI)  service  center  located  on  the 
ground  level  of  Sykes  Student  Union. 

International  Student  Services  Fee 

International  students  are  assessed  a  fee 
of  $25  per  semester  to  support  the  ser- 
vices provided  to  them  by  the  Interna- 
tional Program  Office. 

Payment  of  Fees 

Fall  semester  bills  should  be  received  by 
mid-July.  Spring  semester  bills  should  be 
received  by  the  first  week  of  December. 
If  you  do  not  receive  a  bUl,  contact  the 
Office  of  the  Bursar  at  610-436-2552.  It 
is  the  responsibility  of  each  student  to 
pay/submit  the  semester  biU  by  the  due 
date.  Nonreceipt  of  a  semester  bill  does 
not  relieve  the  student  of  the  responsi- 
bility of  paying/  submitting  the  bUl  by 
the  due  date.  Address  changes  should  be 
made  through  the  Office  of  the  Registrar 
to  allow  for  sufficient  time  to  reflect  an 
accurate  biUing  address. 

Students  who  are  receiving  approved 
financial  aid  awards  that  fully  cover  or 
exceed  the  amount  of  their  bills  do  not 
have  to  pay,  but  they  must  submit  to  the 
Office  of  the  Bursar  the  appropriate  por- 
tion of  their  semester  bill  to  complete  reg- 
istration. Failure  to  return  the  biU,  even  if 
no  payment  is  due,  may  result  in  the  can- 
cellation of  registration/  schedule  and 
the  assessment  of  late  penalties.  Students 
who  cannot  pay  their  bills  in  hill  by  the 
due  date  may  apply  for  partial  pavment 
(see  "Partial  Payment  Policy"  below). 

Failure  to  meet  the  payment  deadhne 
could  result  in  cancellation  of  the  stu- 
dent's schedule.  In  order  to  have  another 
schedule  reinstated,  the  student  would 
have  to  pay  his  or  her  bill  in  fiiU  as  well 
as  a  $35  late  registration  fee. 

Students  who  owe  money  to  the 
Universitv  will  have  a  hold  placed  on 
their  accounts.  If  not  satisfied,  this  hold 
will  cancel  registration/scheduling  for 
future  semesters,  prevent  the  release  of 
transcripts,  and  prohibit  graduation 
clearance.  The  University  also  mav,  at 
its  discretion,  invoke  any  other  penalty 
appropriate  for  a  particular  case  in 
which  money  is  owed  to  the  University. 

Partial  Payment  Policy 

The  University  extends  partial  payment 
privileges  to  all  students  who  are  in 
good  financial  standing  and  have  not 


Fees  and  Expenses 


defaulted  on  a  previous  payment  plan. 
The  nonrefundable  fee  charged  for  this 
service  is  $35  per  semester.  Installment 
payments  received  late  are  subject  to  a 
$25  late  payment  fee.  For  more  informa- 
tion about  the  plan  offered,  contact  the 
Office  of  the  Bursar  at  610-436-2552. 

Uncollectible  Check  Policy 

A  fee  of  $25  is  charged  for  any  check 
returned  to  the  University  for  insufficient 
funds,  stopped  payment,  or  closed 
account.  The  University  may,  at  its  dis- 
cretion, charge  this  fee  for  any  check 
returned  to  it  for  any  other  reason. 
The  check  will  be  returned  to  the  student 
upon  its  replacement  through  cash, 
cashier's  check,  MasterCard,  Visa, 
American  Express,  or  money  order. 
Students  who  have  two  or  more  checks 
returned  against  their  accounts  wiU  no 
longer  be  able  to  make  payment  by  person- 
al check;  all  future  payments  must  be  made 
by  cash,  certified  check,  MasterCard,  Visa, 
American  Express,  or  money  order. 

Refund  Policy 

AH  requests  for  refunds  for  dropped  or 
canceled  courses,  or  for  withdrawals, 
must  be  made  in  writing  or  in  person  to 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  Refunds  are 
not  automatic;  it  is  the  student's  respon- 
sibility to  initiate  a  refund  request. 
Appeals  concerning  the  refiind  policy  for 
tuition  and  the  general  fee  are  made  to 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  Appeals  con- 
cerning the  Housing  or  Meal  Fee  are 
made  to  the  Office  of  Residence  Life. 
Further  appeals,  if  necessary,  may  be 
made  to  the  Appeals  Committee. 
The  refund  poUcy  does  not  affect  the 
time  Une  for  W,  WP,  and  WF  grades  as 
described  under  "Withdrawing  from  a 
Course"  (see  page  42). 
Individual  fees  will  be  reflinded  accord- 
ing to  the  policies  described  below. 
Tuition  -  in  fuU  through  the  first  day  of 
the  semester  or  according  to  the  follow- 
ing schedule  once  classes  have  begun. 
(This  schedule  assumes  that  the  student 
account  is  paid  in  fuU  and  that  the  per- 
centages apply  to  the  total  tuition  biU, 
not  to  a  partial  payment  of  tuition.) 
Withdraw  during  Receive  tuition  and 

general  fees  refiind 
Through  1st  day  of  semester  100% 

Days  2-5  of  1st  week  of  semester     90% 
2nd  week  of  semester  80% 

3rd  week  of  semester  70% 

4th  week  of  semester  60% 

5th  week  of  semester  50% 


6th  week  of  semester  and  after  No  refiind 
No  refiind  will  be  given  if  the  student 
drops  a  course  but  retains  fiill-time  status, 
or  if  he/she  owes  the  University  money. 
General  Fee  -  in  fiiU  through  the  first  day 
of  the  semester  and  prorated  on  a  credit- 
hour  basis  for  a  change  fi-om  fiiU-time  to 
part-time  status.  A  change  in  the  number 
of  credit  hours  within  the  flill-time  status 
(12  credit  hours  or  above)  does  not  result 
in  a  refund  of  the  General  Fee;  however,  a 
change  within  the  part-time  status  (below 
12  credit  hours)  will  result  in  a  per-credit- 
hour  adjustment  according  to  the  refiand 
schedule  used  for  tuition  refunds. 
Housing  Fee  -  in  fiill  prior  to  the  first 
day  of  the  semester;  after  the  first  day  of 
the  semester,  prorated  refiinds  are  made 
on  an  individual  basis  through  the  Office 
of  Residence  Life. 

Meal  Fee  -  in  fijU  prior  to  the  first  day 
of  the  semester;  after  the  first  day  of  the 
semester,  prorated  refiinds  are  made  on 
an  individual  basis  through  the  Office  of 
Residence  Life  for  resident  students,  and 
through  the  Office  of  the  Bursar  for 
commuter  students. 

Other  Fees 

AppUcation  Fee.  $35  is  charged  to  all 
prospective  students  for  the  processing  of 
their  applications  to  the  University.  The 
fee  is  nonrefundable  and  is  not  credited 
to  the  student's  account. 
Nondegree  Student  AppUcation  Fee. 
Nondegree  students  are  charged  a  one- 
time $15  initial  processing  fee. 
Acceptance  Fee.  AH  newly  accepted  and 
readmitted  students  pay  $100  as  proof  of 
intention  to  enroU  at  the  University.  It  is 
credited  against  the  student's  tuition  and 
is  nonrefundable  if  the  student  decides 
not  to  attend. 

Housing  Deposit.  AH  new  and  return- 
ing students  who  wish  to  live  in  the  resi- 
dence halls  are  charged  $100.  It  is  credit- 
ed against  the  student's  housing  fee  and 
is  nonrefiindable  if  the  student  decides 
not  to  live  on  campus. 
Late  Registration  Fee.  AH  students  who 
schedule  during  the  late  registration  peri- 
od are  charged  a  $35  nonrefundable  late 
registration  fee. 

Credit  by  Examination  Fee.  A  charge  is 
made  to  aU  students  who  register  for  a 
Credit  by  Examination  through  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  Each  examina- 
tion scheduled  costs  $25. 
PortfoUo  Assessment  Fee.  Equal  to  50 
percent  of  the  per  credit  hour  rate,  this 
fee  is  charged  to  have  a  faculty  member 


assess  a  student's  prior  knowledge  in  a 
particular  course. 

Course  Audit  Fee.  Students  who  audit 
courses  pay  the  same  fees  as  students 
taking  the  courses  for  a  letter  grade. 
Damage  Fee.  Smdents  are  charged  for 
damage  or  loss  of  University  property. 
This  fee  varies,  depending  on  the  extent 
of  the  damage. 

Identification  Card  Fees.  The 
University  charges  a  $10  fee  to  issue  an 
identification  card  to  each  fiall-  or  part- 
time  student.  If  this  card  is  lost,  stolen, 
or  damaged,  the  student  wiH  be  charged 
$10  for  a  replacement  card.  This  fee  is 
payable  at  the  Student  Services  Center 
Office,  Sykes  Union. 
Parking  Fees.  The  University  charges  a 
nonrefundable  parking  fee  to  students 
who  are  eligible  to  purchase  a  permit  to 
use  University  parking  lots.  The  current 
parking  fee  is  $30  per  year.  Parking  per- 
mits are  available  at  the  Department  of 
Public  Safety.  Parking  fines  are  assessed  at 
$10  up  to  $40  depending  on  the  violation. 
Music  Instrument  Rental  Fees.  Each 
student  renting  a  musical  instrument  for 
a  semester  is  charged  $20  per  instrument. 
Every  student  using  a  pipe  organ  for 
practice  for  one  period  each  weekday  is 
charged  $36  per  semester. 
Lost  Key  Replacement.  Students  who 
lose  the  key  to  their  residence  haU  room 
are  charged  a  nonrefiindable  fee  of  $30 
to  replace  the  lock. 

Transcript  Fee.  The  fee  for  transcripts  is 
$3  per  copy.  Transcript  request  forms  are 
available  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 
Immediate  transcripts  are  $5  per  request. 
Commencement  Fee.  The  University 
charges  $56  to  aH  students  enrolled  in  a 
degree  program  who  wLU  have  ftilfiHed 
their  degree  requirements  by  the  end  of 
the  semester.  This  fee  is  paid  after  the 
student  completes  a  Graduation 
Application  Form  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  and  is  approved  for  graduation. 
Placement  Credentials  Fee.  This  $10 
charge  covers  the  cost  of  registration, 
development,  and  updating  a  student's 
credentials  file  in  the  Twardowski  Career 
Development  Center.  The  fee  entitles 
the  student  to  five  mailings  of  creden- 
tials, as  weH  as  a  personal  copy. 
Fees  for  Health  and  Physical  Education 
Majors.  Students  in  the  B.S.  degree  pro- 
grams in  health  and  physical  education 
must  purchase  uniforms  at  the  University 
Bookstore.  AH  students  must  be  in  prop- 
er uniform  for  activity  classes. 


Financial  Aid 


The  financial  aid  program  at  West 
Chester  Universit}'  provides  financial 
assistance  and  counseling  to  students  who 
can  benefit  from  further  education,  but 
who  cannot  obtain  it  without  such  assis- 
tance. Financial  aid  consists  of  gift  aid  in 
the  form  of  scholarships  or  grants,  and 
self-help  aid  in  the  form  ot  employment 
or  loans.  The  main  responsibility  for 
meeting  educational  expenses  rests  with 
students  and  their  families.  Financial  aid 
is  a  supplement  to  family  contribution  and 
is  to  be  used  for  educational  expenses. 
Ehgibility  for  financial  aid,  with  the 
exception  of  some  private  scholarships 
and  the  Parent  Loan  Program,  is  based 
on  demonstrated  financial  need.  Family 
income,  assets,  and  family  size  influence 
a  student's  demonstrated  financial  need. 
All  documents,  correspondence,  and 
conversations  among  the  applicants,  their 
families,  and  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid 
are  confidential  and  entitled  to  the  pro- 
tection ordinarily  arising  from  a  counsel- 
ing relationship. 

In  order  to  receive  financial  aid,  the 
student  must: 

1.  Be  accepted  for  admission  as  a  degree 
student  enrolling  at  West  Chester 
University,  or,  in  the  case  of  a  student 
already  attending  the  University',  be 
enrolled  and  making  satisfactory  aca- 
demic progress  as  a  degree  student.  See 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid  for  a  more 
detailed  explanation  of  this  requirement. 

2.  Submit  a  Free  Apphcation  for  Federal 
Student  Aid  before  March  1  for  pri- 
ority' consideration.  This  apphcation 
will  be  used  to  determine  demonstrat- 
ed financial  need  for  the  student.  AH 
students  are  encouraged  to  complete 
this  apphcation. 

3.  Apply  for  the  state  grant  program  in 
his  or  her  state  of  legal  residence. 

4.  Submit  any  other  requested  documen- 
tation concerning  financial  and  family 
circumstances  that  may  be  requested 
by  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid,  or  any 
agency  that  administers  financial 


'  Federal  financial  aid  includes  the  Federal  Pell 
Grant,  SEOG  Grant,  Perkins  Loan,  Federal 
Stafford  Loan,  and  Federal  PLUS  Loan. 

**Withdrawal  date  is  defined  as  the  actual  date  the 
student  began  the  institution's  withdrawal 
process,  the  student's  last  date  ot  recorded 
attendance,  or  the  midpoint  of  the  semester  for  a 
student  who  leaves  without  notifying  the 
institution. 


assistance  programs.  Financial  aid 
applicants  may  be  required  to  submit 
copies  of  their  IRS  forms,  and/or 
their  parents'  forms,  or  various  other 
income-related  documents. 
Submission  of  the  above  does  not  auto- 
matically entitle  a  student  to  receive  finan- 
cial aid.  The  Office  of  Financial  Aid  fol- 
lows the  regulations  estabhshed  by  the 
federal  government  in  awarding  aid.  Aid 
applicants  are  ranked  according  to  unmet 
need  (based  on  budget,  federal  and  state 
grants,  and  expected  family  contribution), 
and  available  funds  are  offered  to  the 
neediest  students  first.  Students  must  apply 
for  financial  aid  each  academic  year. 
Unless  otherwise  specified,  requests  for 
scholarships,  grants,  loans,  and  employ- 
ment opportunities  described  in  this  cata- 
log should  be  made  to  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid.  Application  forms  for  state 
and  federal  grants  may  be  obtained  from 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid  at  West 
Chester  University  and  from  the  offices  of 
most  high  school  guidance  counselors. 
Questions  concerning  financial  aid  may  be 
directed  to  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid, 
138  Elsie  O.  Bull  Center,  West  Chester 
University,  West  Chester,  PA  19383,  610- 
436-2627.  Office  hours  are  from  8  a.m.  to 
4:30  p.m.,  Monday  through  Friday. 

Withdrawal/Enrollment  Change 
and  Aid 

Students  who  officially  withdraw  or 
change  their  enrollment  status  may  be 
entided  to  a  refund  of  certain  fees,  accord- 
ing to  West  Chester  University's  policy. 
(See  section  entitled  "Fees  and  Expenses.") 
If  that  student  has  been  awarded  financial 
aid  for  the  semester  in  which  the  with- 
drawal or  enrollment  change  occurs,  a  por- 
tion of  the  reflind  will  be  returned  to  finan- 
cial aid  program  funds. 
Financial  aid  refunds  due  to  withdrawals 
or  enrollment  changes  are  processed  in 
accordance  with  federal,  state,  and  award- 
ing agency  guidelines  and  regulations. 
The  Office  of  Financial  Aid  recalculates 
federal*  financial  aid  ehgibihty  for  stu- 
dents who  withdraw,  drop  out,  are  dis- 
missed, or  take  a  leave  of  absence  prior  to 
completing  60  percent  of  a  semester. 
Recalculation  is  based  on  the  percent  of 
earned  aid  using  the  following  formula: 

Percent  earned  = 

Number  of  days  completed  up  to  withdrawal 

date^/total  days  in  semester 


Federal  financial  aid  is  returned  to  the  fed- 
eral government  based  on  the  percent  of 
unearned  aid  using  the  following  formula: 
Aid  to  be  returned  = 

(100%  -  percent  earned)  x  amount  of  aid  dis- 
bursed toward  institutional  changes 

When  aid  is  returned,  the  student  may 
owe  a  debit  balance  to  the  University. 
The  student  should  contact  the  Office  of 
the  Bursar  to  make  arrangements  to  pay 
the  balance. 

Student  Consumer  Rights  and 
Responsibilities 

You  have  the  right  to  ask  a  school: 

1.  The  names  of  its  accrediting  organi- 
zations. 

2.  About  its  programs;  its  instructional, 
laboratory,  and  other  physical  facih- 
ties;  and  its  facult)'. 

3.  What  the  cost  of  attending  is  and 
what  its  poUcies  are  on  refiinds  to 
students  who  drop  out. 

4.  What  financial  assistance  is  avail- 
able, including  information  on  all 
federal,  state,  local,  private,  and 
institutional  financial  aid  programs. 

5.  What  the  procedures  and  deadhnes 
are  for  submitting  apphcations  for 
each  available  financial  aid  program. 

6.  What  criteria  it  uses  to  select  finan- 
cial aid  recipients. 

7.  How  it  determines  your  financial 
need.  This  process  includes  how  costs 
for  mition  and  fees,  room  and  board, 
travel,  books  and  supplies,  personal 
and  miscellaneous  expenses,  etc.  are 
coi^sidered  in  your  budget.  It  also 
includes  what  resources  (such  as 
parental  contribution,  other  financial 
aid,  your  assets,  etc.)  are  considered 
in  the  calculation  of  your  need. 

8.  If  you  have  a  loan,  what  the  interest 
rate  is,  the  total  amount  that  must  be 
repaid,  the  length  of  time  you  have  to 
repay  the  loan,  when  payments  are  to 
begin,  and  any  cancellation  and 
deferment  provisions  that  apply. 

9.  If  you  are  offered  a  work  study  job, 
what  kind  of  job  it  is,  what  hours 
you  must  work,  what  your  duties 
wiU  be,  what  the  rate  of  pay  will  be, 
and  how  and  when  you  will  be  paid. 

10.  To  reconsider  your  aid  package,  if 
you  believe  a  mistake  has  been  made. 

11.  How  the  school  determines  whether 
you  are  making  satisfactory  academic 


Financial  Aid 


progress,  and  what  happens  if  you 
are  not. 
12.  What  special  facilities  and  services 
are  available  to  the  disabled. 

You  have  the  responsibility  to: 

1.  Review  and  consider  all  information 
about  a  school's  program  before  you 
enroU. 

2.  Pav  special  attention  to  your  applica- 
tion for  student  financial  aid,  com- 
plete it  accurately,  and  submit  it  on 
time  to  the  right  place.  Errors  can 
delay  your  receipt  of  financial  aid. 

3.  Provide  all  additional  documenta- 
tion, verification,  corrections, 
and/or  new  information  requested 
by  either  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  or  the  agency  to  which  you 
submitted  your  application. 

4.  Read  and  understand  all  forms  that 
you  are  asked  to  sign  and  keep 
copies  of  them. 

5.  Accept  responsibUity  for  the  promis- 
sory note  and  all  other  agreements 
that  you  sign. 

6.  If  you  have  a  loan,  notify  the  lender 
of  changes  in  your  name,  address,  or 
enrollment  status. 

7.  Perform  in  a  satisfactory  manner 
the  work  that  is  agreed  upon  in 
accepting  a  college  work  study  job. 

8.  Know  and  comply  with  the  dead- 
lines for  application  tor  aid. 

9.  Know  and  comply  with  your 
school's  refund  procedures. 

THE  FOLLOWING  IS  A  BRIEF  DE- 
SCRIPTION OF  THE  nNANCL\L 
AID  PROGRAMS  AVAILABLE  AT 
WEST  CHESTER  LTNIVERSIT\". 

Federal  Work  Study  Program 

Federal  work  study  is  an  employment 
program  that  allows  students  to  work 
part  time  on  campus.  Application  is 
made  through  the  Free  Apphcation  for 
Federal  Student  Aid.  The  priority  dead- 
line is  INIarch  1. 

Federal  Perkins  Loan  Program 

The  Office  of  Financial  Aid  administers 
the  Federal  Perkins  Loan  Program  for 
students  who  demonstrate  financial  need. 
TTie  annual  loan  limit  is  S4,000,  wth 
aggregate  limits  of  $20,000  for  students 
who  have  successfully  completed  two  years 
of  an  undergraduate  program  leading  to  a 
bachelor's  degree  (but  have  not  completed 
that  degree)  and  S8,000  for  all  other  stu- 
dents. The  interest  rate  is  5  percent  and 
begins  to  accme  when  repa\'ment  com- 
mences -  nine  months  after  the  student 


leaves  school  or  drops  below  half-time  sta- 
tus. There  are  deferment  and  cancellation 
privileges  for  smdents  meeting  specific  cri- 
teria. Application  is  made  through  the 
Free  Application  for  Federal  Student  Aid. 
The  priority  deadline  is  March  1. 

Federal  Stafford  Loan  Program 

This  loan  program,  formerly  the 
Guaranteed  Smdent  Loan  Program, 
operates  with  the  cooperation  of  private 
lenders  (banks,  credit  unions,  etc.).  Loans 
for  students  who  demonstrate  need  are 
subsidized  (no  in-school  interest  pay- 
ments); loans  for  smdents  who  do  not 
demonstrate  need  are  unsubsidized  (in- 
school  interest  payments  required). 
Annual  loan  limits  are  $2,625  for  first- 
year  students,  $3,500  for  second-year  stu- 
dents, and  $5,500  for  undergraduate  stu- 
dents who  have  completed  two  years. 
Independent  students  may  borrow  addi- 
tional unsubsidized  funds:  up  to  $4,000 
per  year  for  their  first  two  years,  and  up 
to  $5,000  per  year  after  they  have  com- 
pleted tvvo  years.  The  academic  level 
maximum  amounts  are  riot  guaranteed. 
The  loan  amount  is  influenced  by  the 
receipt  of  other  aid.  The  interest  rate  for 
first-time  borrowers  is  variable,  not  to 
exceed  8.25  percent.  For  subsidized  loans, 
it  begins  to  accrue  when  repa\Tnent  com- 
mences— six  months  after  the  student 
terminates  his  or  her  education  or  drops 
below  halt-time  status.  Students  should 
allow  10  weeks  for  processing  and  apply 
by  May  31.  The  Master  Promisson*  Note 
and  the  Free  Application  for  Federal 
Student  Aid  must  be  filed. 

Federal  Parent  Loan  for 
Undergraduate  Students  (PLUS) 

The  Federal  PLUS  program  operates 
through  private  lenders.  Parents  may 
borrow  up  to  the  cost  of  education 
minus  other  aid  for  each  dependent  stu- 
dent attending  a  postsecondary  educa- 
tional instimtion  for  each  academic 
level.  The  interest  rate  is  variable,  not  to 
exceed  nine  percent,  and  repayment 
commences  60  days  after  disbursement 
of  the  loan  funds.  Applications  are 
secured  at  lending  institutions. 

Short-Term  Emergency  Loan 

Students  in  need  of  funds  to  cover  unusu- 
al or  emergency  education  expenses  may 
contact  the  Office  of  the  Bursar  concern- 
ing the  Short-Term  Emergency  Loan 
Program.  The  maximum  loan  is  $200. 


Federal  PeU  Grant 

This  is  the  federal  grant  program.  All 
students  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  a 
Federal  PeU  Grant.  Students  receive 
notification  of  eligibilitv'  in  the  form  of  a 
Student  Aid  Report.  Interested  students 
must  file  the  Free  Apphcation  for 
Federal  Student  Aid.  Deadhne  is  May  1 
of  the  current  academic  year. 

Federal  Supplemental  Educational 
Opportunity  Grant  (FSEOG) 

The  FSEOG  program  is  federally  fund- 
ed and  administered  by  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid.  A  student  must  demon- 
strate financial  need  and  be  an  under- 
graduate. Students  must  file  the  Free 
Application  for  Federal  Student  Aid. 
The  priorit)'  deadhne  is  March  1. 

State  Grants 

PENNSYLVANIA  HIGHER  EDU- 
CATION ASSISTANCE  AGENCY 
(PHEAA)  GRANT.  The  Common- 
\vealth  of  Pennsylvania,  through 
PHEAA,  makes  state  grants  available  to 
students  who  demonstrate  financial  need 
and  are  Pennsylvania  residents.  PHEAA 
requires  that  students  successfiilly  com- 
plete at  least  24  credits  for  each  fiill-year 
grant  awarded.  Students  must  file  the 
Free  Application  for  Federal  Student 
Aid.  Deadline  is  Mav  1. 
The  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  has 
entered  into  reciprocal  agreements  with 
the  following  adjacent  states:  Delaware, 
West  Virginia,  and  Ohio.  Residents  of 
these  states  who  wish  to  attend  West 
Chester  University  are  permitted  to  use 
state  grants  from  their  home  states  for 
educational  expenses  at  West  Chester. 
Some  other  states  not  adjacent  to 
Pennsylvania  may  permit  their  residents 
to  use  state  grants  for  attendance  at  West 
Chester  University.  Students  should  con- 
tact the  agency  for  higher  education  in 
their  states  for  more  information. 

Scholarships  and  Awards 

'ACADEMIC  ACHIEVEMENT 
AWARDS.  Awards  of  $4,000  each 
(one-time  awards)  are  given  to  freshmen. 

ACME  MARKETS,  INC.  SCHOL- 
ARSHIPS. Acme  Markets,  Inc.  spon- 
sors four-year  scholarships  for  six  enter- 
ing freshmen.  Students  are  to  be  enrolled 
in  a  degree  program  in  business,  man- 
agement, or  marketing  and  have  a  career 
interest  in  retail  management  or  related 
area.  Recipients  wiU  also  participate  in 
an  Acme  internship  or  co-op  program. 
The  scholarships  are  renewable  provided 


Financial  ^^id 


all  scholarship  requirements  are  main- 
tained. Applications  will  onl)'  be  accept- 
ed even-  four  years  beginning  with  the 
1996-97  academic  year. 
THE  J.PETER  ABLER  PRIZE  FOR 
EXCELLENCE  IN  THEATRE.  The 
J.Peter  Adler  Prize  for  Excellence  in 
Theatre  has  been  funded  through  indi- 
vidual, family,  and  group  gifts  to  honor 
the  memon'  of  J.Peter  Adler,  son  of 
WCU  President  Madeleine  Wing 
Adler.  The  prize  is  awarded  annually  to 
West  Chester  University  seniors  who 
have  exhibited  strong  talent  in  theatre, 
and  who  will  be  continuing  their  educa- 
tion in  a  graduate  degree  program. 
LENORE  ALT  EXCELLENCE  IN 
LEADERSHIP  AWARD.  This  $500 
award,  which  was  established  by  Lois 
Alt,  associate  professor  of  vocal  and 
choral  music,  in  memory  of  her  mother, 
will  be  presented  to  a  junior  woman 
music  major  with  a  3.25  GPA,  who  has 
completed  all  theory  and  history  of 
music  200-level  courses. 
WEST  CHESTER  UNIVERSITY 
ALUMNI  ASSOCIATION  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP FUND.  A  scholarship  fond 
was  established  by  the  Alumni  Associa- 
tion of  West  Chester  University'  in  1974 
to  benefit  the  students  of  West  Chester 
University.  The  criteria  for  selection  are 
scholarship,  leadership,  character,  and 
need.  Scholarships  may  be  awarded  to 
sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors. 
Applications  are  available  from  the  Office 
of  Financial  Aid  or  the  Office  of  Alumni 
Relations.  The  awards  are  generally  made 
on  Alumni  Day  each  year  and  are  applied 
to  the  students'  course  fees  for  the  next 
academic  year.  Scholarship  amounts  vary. 
GERALDINE  RUTH  DALEY 
ANDERSON  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
fund  was  established  to  honor  Mrs. 
Geraldine  Dalev  Anderson  '34  by  a  gift 
from  her  husband,  Robert  S.  Anderson, 
M.D.  The  awards  from  the  fond  are 
restricted  to  physical  education  majors 
who  are  graduates  of  high  schools  in 
Lackawanna,  Luzerne,  and  Wyoming 
counties  in  Pennsylvania.  Students  also 
must  have  financial  need  and  demon- 
strate academic  achievement.  Preference 
will  be  given  to  women  students.  The 
value  of  the  award  is  estimated  at  $1000. 
Applications  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
ROBERT  S.  ANDERSON  '23 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Robert  S.  Anderson 
'23  created  this  endowed  scholarship  in 
his  will  to  benefit  West  Chester 


University  students  with  fmancial  need. 
Renewable  scholarships  will  be  awarded 
to  incoming  students  with  satisfactory 
academic  standards  and  financial  need. 
SANDRA  ALESL\  ATKINS  MEMO- 
RIAL SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholar- 
ship is  awarded  annually  as  a  memorial  to 
Sandra  Alesia  Atkins,  a  member  of  the 
class  of  1981,  to  an  outstanding  music 
student  from  Overbrook  High  School  in 
Philadelphia  who  erurolls  at  West  Chester 
Universit}'  as  a  candidate  for  the  B.S. 
degree  in  music  education.  The  recipient 
win  be  selected  by  the  School  of  Music 
upon  recommendation  of  the  Overbrook 
High  School  Music  Department. 
HERBERT  BELLER  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP IN  GEOLOGY.  EstabUshed  by 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Herbert  Beller,  this  schol- 
arship is  awarded  annually  (renewable) 
to  an  outstanding  junior  or  senior  geolo- 
gy major  who  needs  assistance  to  pay 
tuition.  The  Department  of  Geology 
chair  will  select  the  recipient;  the  dean 
of  the  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  also 
must  approve  the  selection. 
BENZING  FAMILY  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. C)Tithia  Benzing,  professor  of  eco- 
nomics and  finance  at  West  Chester 
Universit)',  and  her  spouse,  William 
Benzing,  instructor  of  history'  at  Delaware 
Count}'  Community  College  and  a  tax 
consultant,  have  established  this  fond. 
The  scholarship  is  awarded  through  the 
Department  of  Economics  and  Finance  to 
an  outstanding  senior  in  the  department. 
*BOARD  OF  GOVERNORS 
SCHOLARSHIPS.  Merit-based  renew- 
able scholarships  available  to  incoming 
freshmen  who  are  residents  of  Penn- 
sylvania. Awards  are  based  on  the  suc- 
cessfol  completion  of  an  academic  high 
school  program,  satisfactory  SAT/ ACT 
scores,  high  school  rank,  and  academic 
record.  The  Free  Application  for  Federal 
Student  Aid  also  must  be  completed. 
ELIZABETH  O'BYRNE  BORZ  '41 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship 
provides  $500  annually  to  an  entering 
freshman  with  a  B  average  and  is  renew- 
able providing  a  3.0  GPA  is  maintained 
as  an  undergraduate  at  the  University-. 
GEORGE  AND  SUSAN  BOYER 
ORGAN  SCHOLARSHIP.  This  schol- 
arship was  created  by  alumni  George 
Boyer  '69  and  Susan  Bover  '79  to  assist  a 
talented  incoming  student  whose  main 
area  of  performance  is  the  organ.  In  the 
even  that  there  is  no  incoming  student 
eligible  for  the  scholarship,  it  may  then 


be  awarded  to  a  current  organ  major  who 
meets  the  criteria  of  excellence. 
CAROL  BRANCA  SCHOLARSHIR 
This  scholarship,  established  bv  the 
Branca  family  in  honor  of  Carol  Branca,  is 
awarded  to  a  B.A.  communications  stud- 
ies major  who  has  an  overall  GPA  of  3.5 
or  better  at  the  end  of  the  first  semester  of 
the  sophomore  year.  To  qualify,  students 
must  have  completed  three  semesters  at 
the  University,  and  a  minimum  of  15 
credits  per  semester.  The  scholarship  is 
renewable  provided  the  recipient  contin- 
ues as  a  communications  studies  major 
and  maintains  a  GPA  of  3.5  or  better. 
Transfer  students  with  more  than  six 
credits  are  not  eligible  for  the  scholarship. 
The  minimum  award  is  currently  $500. 
JUSTO  B.  BRAVO  SCHOLARSHIP 
IN  CHEMISTRY.  This  award  is  avaU- 
able  to  a  foil-time  student  majoring  in 
chemistry'.  Applications  are  made  to  the 
Department  of  Chemistry'. 
LAURY  SAMUEL  BROKENSHIRE 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 
presented  annually  as  a  memorial  to 
Laury  Brokenshire  '59  by  his  parents, 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  James  R.  Brokenshire  of 
Reading.  It  is  awarded  to  an  outstanding 
junior  class  music  student  selected  by 
the  School  of  Music  faculty. 
ROBERT  M.  BROWN  ENDOWED 
SCHOLARSHIP  FOR  PHYSICS. 
This  scholarship  was  established  by 
alumnus  Robert  M.  Brown  '38  for  a 
worthy  foU-time  sophomore,  junior,  or 
senior  undergraduate  physics  major.  The 
scholarship  is  renewable  if  the  recipient 
maintains  the  required  3.0  GPA. 
BONNIE  CLAIRE  BRUNO 
ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP.  One 
$500  award  is  made  to  an  outstanding 
foU-time  student  in  the  College  of  Arts 
and  Sciences  yvho  is  a  Pennsylvania  resi- 
dent, demonstrates  fmancial  need,  and 
has  a  cumulative  GPA  of  at  least  3.00. 
DIANE  AND  ROGER 
CASAGRANDE  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Established  by  Drs.  Diane  and  Roger 
Casagrande,  this  scholarship  is  awarded 
to  a  foU-time  communication  studies  or 
pre-engineering  declared  major  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  2.5  or  higher  and  a 
consistent  record  of  considerable  campus 
and  community  ser^'ice.  The  scholarship 
is  renewable  but  not  automatically  so. 
The  selection  committee  will  consist  of 
the  chairs  from  the  departments  of 
Physics  and  Communication  Studies,  as 
well  as  a  graduating  senior  for  either 
department  as  invited  by  the  chairs. 


Financial  Aid 


CAVALCADE  OF  BANDS  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  award  is  sponsored  joindy 
by  the  Cavalcade  of  Bands  Association 
and  the  School  of  Music.  The  recipient(s) 
must  be  admitted  in  good  standing  to  the 
music  program  at  West  Chester  Univer- 
sity and  selected  by  the  director  ot  the 
winning  band(s)  in  each  category  of  the 
American  and  Yankee  Conferences.  The 
awards  are  determined  annually.  Normal- 
ly, one  student  from  each  of  the  four  win- 
ning bands  will  be  selected  to  receive  a 
$1,000  tuitional  scholarship. 
ROBERT  L.  CARL  MEMORIAL 
KEYBOARD  SCHOLARSHIP.  Two 
scholarships  are  awarded  to  freshman 
keyboard  majors,  in  honor  of  the  late 
Robert  L.  Carl,  former  chairperson  of 
the  Department  of  Keyboard  Music, 
who  taught  piano  at  the  University  from 
1946  until  1971.  Applications  are  made 
to  the  dean  of  the  School  of  Music. 
PAUL  E.  CARSON  BAND  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  award  has  been  made  pos- 
sible by  the  generosity  of  Paul  E.  Carson, 
former  chair  of  the  Instrumental  Depart- 
ment and  a  member  of  the  University  fac- 
ulty for  28  years.  Scholarships  are  awarded 
to  freshmen  majoring  in  band  instruments. 
VINCENT  D.  CELENTANO 
MEMORIAL  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  is  awarded  as  a  memorial  to 
Dr.  Vincent  D.  Celentano,  musician, 
scientist,  and  Explorer  Committee  mem- 
ber. Eligible  freshmen  in  the  School  of 
Music  must  be  affiHated  with  Exploring 
or  the  Senior  Branch  of  Scouting. 
ELVA  L.  BOYER  CHAMBERLIN  '31 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 
awarded  to  an  academically  qualified  stu- 
dent who  demonstrates  financial  need, 
with  preference  given  to  a  student  study- 
ing in  the  field  of  education.  Awards  are 
made  by  the  University  Scholarship 
Committee  based  on  recommendations 
from  the  director  of  financial  aid. 
CHESTER  COUNTY  ALUMNI 
CHAPTER  SCHOLARSHIP.  The 
West  Chester  University  Chester  County 
Alumni  Chapter  sponsors  a  scholarship 
for  a  Chester  County  high  school  gradu- 
ate and  freshman.  The  $500  award  is 
fiinded  through  contributions  from  chap- 
ter members.  Applications  may  be 
obtained  through  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  and  the  Office  of  Alumni  Relations. 
CLASS  OF  1920  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  fiind  was  established  by  the  Class  of 
1920  through  a  gift  on  the  occasion  of  the 
class's  65th  reunion.  The  award  is  inade  to 
a  student  who  has  completed  one  year  of 


study  at  the  University  or  to  an  outstand- 
ing freshman.  Documented  financial  need 
and  demonstrated  leadership  qualities  are 
essential.  The  amount  will  be  no  less  than 
$500.  Application  forms  are  available 
through  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
CLASS  OF  1937  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  fund  was  established  by 
the  Class  of  1937  as  a  golden  anniversary 
gift  to  West  Chester  University  on  the 
50th  reunion  of  the  class.  The  scholar- 
ships are  awarded  to  entering  freshmen 
based  on  scholarship,  leadership,  charac- 
ter, and  financial  need.  The  awards  are 
generally  made  on  Alumni  Day  each  year 
and  are  applied  to  tuition  fees  tor  the 
academic  year.  Applications  are  available 
from  the  Office  of  Development  and 
Alumni  Relations  or  the  Office  of 
Financial  Aid.  Selection  of  recipients  will 
be  made  by  the  Scholarship  Committee 
of  the  Alumni  Board  of  Directors. 
CLASS  OF  1938  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  fund  was  established  by  the  Class  of 
1938  as  a  Golden  Anniversary  Gift  to  the 
University  at  the  50th  reunion  of  the  class. 
The  award  is  to  be  made  to  a  student  who 
has  successfiJly  completed  one  academic 
year  at  West  Chester  and  is  based  on  lead- 
ership, scholarship,  character,  and  financial 
need.  Application  forms  are  available 
through  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
CLASS  OF  1942  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Established  by  the  Class  of  1942,  this 
scholarship  is  awarded  to  a  student 
enrolled  in  the  School  of  Education  with 
a  record  of  high  academic  achievement, 
demonstrated  financial  need,  and  evi- 
dence of  contributions  to  the  campus 
community  through  volunteer  activities. 
CLASS  OF  1943  MATH  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  initiated  by 
two  Class  of  1943  members  to  improve 
the  teaching  of  math  on  the  middle 
school  and  secondary  levels.  It  is  award- 
ed annually  to  an  undergraduate  who 
intends  to  teach  mathematics,  exhibits 
excellence  in  that  discipline,  and  wUl 
help  foster  the  job  of  problem  solving  in 
others.  Applications  are  made  through 
the  Department  of  Mathematics. 
CLASS  OF  1948  SCHOLARSHIP.  The 
Class  of  1948  initiated  this  scholarship  as  a 
gift  in  celebration  of  its  50th  reunion. 
Recipients  must  be  a  junior,  have  a  mini- 
mum GPA  of  3.0,  major  in  an  area  of 
teacher  education,  and  be  active  in  at  least 
one  school-sponsored  extracurricular  activ- 
ity. The  scholarship  is  renewable  provided 
the  minimum  3.0  GPA  is  maintained. 
The  minimum  award  is  currentlv  $750. 


CLASS  OF  1951  SCHOLARSHIP. 
The  Class  of '51  established  this  scholar- 
ship as  a  gift  in  celebration  of  its  50th 
Reunion  in  May  2001.  The  award  is  made 
to  an  incoming  freshman  who  plans  to 
major  in  education,  has  a  cumulative  high 
school  grade  average  of  "B"  or  better,  par- 
ticipated in  extracurricular  or  community 
activities,  and  demonstrates  financial  need. 
The  scholarship  is  renewable  provided  the 
recipient  maintains  an  overall  3.0  average 
at  West  Chester  University. 
CLASS  OF  1957  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  fund  was  established  by  the  Class 
of  1957  to  assist  entering  freshmen  with 
demonstrated  exemplary  achievement  in 
mathematics  or  science  and  English. 
Application  forms  are  available  through 
the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
CLASS  OF  1967  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Estabhshed  by  the  Class  of  1967,  this 
scholarship  is  awarded  to  a  deserving 
incoming  freshman. 
CLASS  OF  1970  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  fund  was  made  available  through 
the  Class  of  1970  on  its  15th  reunion  in 
1985.  The  award  is  to  be  made  to  a  stu- 
dent who  has  demonstrated  academic 
achievement  and  good  University  citi- 
zenship. The  amount  is  no  less  than 
$100.  Application  forms  are  available 
through  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
JOHN  T.  COATES  HORN  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  was  estab- 
hshed in  1987  as  a  memorial  to  John  T. 
Coates  by  his  wife  and  daughters.  It  is 
awarded  to  a  talented  incoming  fresh- 
man whose  major  performing  area  is  the 
French  horn. 

COLONIAL  SCHOLARSHIP  FOR 
BUSINESS  STUDY.  This  scholarship 
is  awarded  to  incoming  freshmen  with 
demonstrated  financial  need  from 
Plymouth  Whitemarsh  High  School 
enrolled  in  the  School  of  Business  and 
PubHc  Affairs. 

*CONNELLY  FOUNDATION 
SCHOLARSHIP.  The  ConneUy 
Foundation,  established  in  1955  by  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  John  F.  Connelly  (deceased), 
provided  the  fiinds  for  this  endowed  schol- 
arship. Awards  wiU  be  made  to  deserving 
graduates  of  Catholic  high  schools  in  the 
five-county  Philadelphia  area  including 
Chester,  Delaware,  Montgomery,  Bucks, 
and  Philadelphia  counties. 
SAMUEL  RUSSELL  COSBY,  JR. 
ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP 
(VOICE).  This  scholarship  was  created 
to  honor  Samuel  R.  Cosby,  Jr.  '44  by  his 
nephew  BiU  Cosby.  The  scholarship  will 


Financial  Aid 


be  awarded  to  an  incoming  freshman 
who  plans  to  attain  a  bachelor  of  music 
degree  in  performance,  with  a  concentra- 
tion in  vocal  performance.  It  is  restricted 
to  students  from  WiUiam  Penn  High 
School  or  Bodine  Magnet  School,  both 
in  Philadelphia.  The  School  of  Music 
dean  will  select  the  recipient. 
PAT  CROCE  SPORTS  MEDICINE 
ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP.  The 
scholarship  was  estabUshed  through  a 
personal  gift  from  Pat  Croce  to  recog- 
nize and  reward  outstanding  students  in 
the  sports  medicine  program. 
KENDALL  PARIS  DAVIS  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  is  awarded  to 
an  incoming,  fuU-time,  female  student 
from  Delaware  with  demonstrated  finan- 
cial need  and  deep  academic  desire. 
CLIFFORD  DeBAPTISTE  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. Named  in  honor  of  Clifford 
DeBaptiste,  former  mayor  of  the  Borough 
of  West  Chester,  communitv'  leader,  and 
local  businessman,  this  scholarship  will 
assist  qualified  traditional  and  nontradi- 
tional  social  work  students  from  both  the 
B.S.W.  and  M.S.W.  programs.  Require- 
ments include  excellence  in  academic 
achievement,  demonstrated  communit)' 
leadership  initiatives,  and  a  demonstrated 
commitment  to  biculmral  and  bihngual 
social  work  practice.  Initial  assistance  in 
the  range  of  $500  will  be  provided  for 
book  funds  and/or  travel  assistance  to  and 
from  practicum  assignments. 
ERIC  S.  DELLECKER  '84  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  for  pre-med- 
ical  students  was  established  in  memory  of 
Eric  S.  Dellecker  bv  his  parents.  Recipients 
are  chosen  by  the  University  Pre-Medical 
Committee  based  on  academic  achieve- 
ment and  the  completion  of  one  academic 
year  in  the  pre-medical  program. 
PHILLIP  B.  DONLEY  AWARD.  This 
scholarship  was  established  bv  the  athlet- 
ic training  alumni  and  is  awarded  to  a 
junior  majoring  in  athletic  training.  The 
recipient  will  be  chosen  based  on  GPA, 
cUnical  evaluations,  and  service  (profes- 
sional, Universitv,  and  community). 
'RALPH  H.  DeRUBBO  ENDOWED 
SCHOLARSHIP  FUND.  This  scholar- 
ship was  created  by  Ralph  H.  DeRubbo 
'47  to  assist  a  student  in  financial  need. 
FREDERICK  DOUGLASS  SOCI- 
ETY SCHOLARSHIP.  Scholarships 
are  available  to  minority  students  who 
are  enrolled  fuU  time.  Applicants  must 
demonstrate  their  ability'  to  make  a  posi- 
tive contribution  to  the  University 
and/or  community  through  active 


involvement.  Applications  and  guidelines 
are  available  during  the  spring  semester 
in  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
DR.  ROBERT  E.  DRAYER  MEMOR- 
IAL AWARD.  An  annual  award  for  die 
senior  who  graduates  with  the  most  distin- 
guished record  in  histon',  in  memor\'  of 
Dr.  Robert  E.  Draver,  assistant  professor 
of  history,  who  died  in  1968.  The  Depart- 
ment of  History  selects  the  recipient. 
*ROBERT  EDWARD  DRAYER 
SCHOLARSHIPS.  There  are  three 
renewable  Drayer  Scholarships.  The 
four-year  full  scholarship  is  given  to  a 
freshman  history'  major  with  strong  aca- 
demic achievement;  it  covers  in-state 
tuition,  fees,  room,  and  board.  The  two- 
year  hill  scholarship  also  covers  in-state 
tuition,  fees,  room,  and  board,  and  is 
awarded  for  academic  merit  each  year  to 
a  history  major  who  will  be  returning  to 
West  Chester  University  as  a  junior.  The 
S2,000  four-year  partial  scholarship  is 
awarded  each  year  to  a  freshman  histor)- 
major  on  the  basis  of  need  and  merit. 
EARTH  AND  SPACE  UNDER- 
GRADAUTE  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Awards  will  be  made  to  junior  or  senior 
majors  in  B.S.  geoscience  or  B.S.Ed,  earth 
and  space  sciences  on  the  basis  of  academ- 
ic achievement,  financial  need,  and  per- 
sonal characteristics.  Recipients  will  be 
chosen  by  vote  of  the  faculty  in  the 
Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy. 
FACULTY  AWARD.  A  certificate  pre- 
sented annually  to  a  graduating  senior  in 
the  Department  of  Nursing  who,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  department  faculty,  demon- 
strates "outstanding  ability  and  exceptional 
commitment  to  professional  nursing." 
FACULTY  SCHOLARSHIP  FUND. 
Annual  awards  of  $200  each  are  made  in 
May  to  undergraduate  students  on  the 
basis  of  academic  abUity  and  financial 
need.  Applications  are  made  to  the 
Faculty  Scholarship  Fund. 
DEBRA  POLLARD  FORD  '76  MAR- 
KETING SCHOLARSHIP.  Inter- 
Media  Marketing  and  American 
Telecast  Corporation  estabhshed  this 
scholarship  in  memor\-  of  Debra  PoUard 
Ford  '76,  an  educator  who  later  served  as 
the  director  of  training  and  development 
at  Inter-Media  Marketing.  The  scholar- 
ship is  awarded  annually  to  a  marketing 
major  who  is  selected  by  the  Department 
of  Marketing  faculty. 
WEST  CHESTER  UNIVERSITY 
FOUNDATION  GRANT.  The  West 
Chester  University  Foundation  has  mod- 
est funds  available  for  grants  to  needy 


students.  Any  student  who  is  about  to 
complete,  or  has  completed,  his/her  first 
year  may  apph'.  In  evaluating  applica- 
tions, the  foundation  will  give  special 
attention  to  those  who  are  active  in  all 
facets  of  University  hfe.  Each  year,  appli- 
cations for  the  fall  semester  should  be 
submitted  by  May  1,  and  for  the  spring 
semester  by  December  1. 
*MELVIN  L.  FREE  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  was  established  by 
Melvin  L.  Free,  a  member  of  the  class  of 
1932.  It  is  offered  to  an  incoming  fresh- 
man with  a  strong  academic  record. 
CHARLES  S.  AND  NL\RGHERITA 
GANGEMI  MEMORIAL  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. Established  in  memory  of  the 
parents  of  retired  music  faculty  member 
Charles  D.  Gangemi,  this  scholarship  is 
awarded  annually  to  two  students  in  the 
School  of  Music.  One  award  is  to  an 
entering  freshman  piano  major,  to  be 
selected  bv  the  Department  of  Ke^'board 
Music.  The  other  award  is  to  an  under- 
graduate or  graduate  theory  and/or  compo- 
sition major,  to  be  selected  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Music  Theory  and  Composition. 
RA\'MOND  AND  AL\Y  GR./>lYSON 
FRIDAY  xMEMORIAL  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  established 
by  Dr.  Raymond  Friday,  professor  of 
vocal  and  choral  music,  in  memory  of  his 
parents.  It  is  awarded  annually  to  a  fresh- 
man voice  major  who  is  selected  in  the 
spring  semester  on  the  basis  of  scholar- 
ship and  vocal  achievement. 
MIRIAM  GOTTLIEB  PIANO 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  award  has  been 
made  possible  through  the  generosity  of 
Mrs.  JVIiriam  Gottlieb,  who  was  a  mem- 
ber of  the  University's  Department  of 
Keyboard  Music  faculty  from  1946  until 
her  retirement  in  1975. 
MICHAEL  C.  GREY  AWARD.  This 
award  was  established  in  memory  of 
Michael  C.  Grey  '89  by  Barbara  J. 
Brown,  an  alumnus  and  former 
faculty/staff  member. 
BESSIE  GRUBB  SCHOLARSHIP 
FOR  GR.APHIC  ARTS.  Named  for 
Bessie  Gmbb,  who  was  employed  at  West 
Chester  University  in  the  School  of  Educa- 
tion's Visual  Aids  Department  for  30  years 
until  her  retirement  in  1969,  this  scholar- 
ship is  awarded  to  a  junior  vWth  a  concen- 
tration in  graphic  design  or  photography. 
THE  JOHN  GUTSCHER  MEMORI- 
AL SCHOLARSHIP  IN  MUSIC 
EDUCATION.  This  award,  presented 
for  the  first  time  in  1988,  is  based  on 
music  student  teaching  excellence,  acade- 


Financial  Aid 


mic  excellence,  and  financial  need.  The 
award  was  established  by  the  family  of 
John  Gutscher,  a  former  School  of  Music 
facult)'  member.  The  student  or  students 
are  selected  by  the  music  student  teach- 
ing supervisors  with  the  approval  of  the 
Department  of  Music  Ediication. 
*EVELYN  H.  HALDEMAN  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  was  estab- 
lished by  Evelyn  H.  Haldeman,  a  member 
ot  the  class  ot  1944.  One-time  awards  are 
made  by  the  University  Scholarship 
Committee  to  students  based  on  need, 
above-average  scholarship,  and  citizenship. 
MAZIE  B.  HALL  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  was  estabhshed  in 
honor  of  Mazie  B.  Hall  '24  who  worked 
all  of  her  adult  life  to  establish  better 
relations  among  individuals. 
*DR.  CLIFFORD  H.  HARDING 
ARTS  AND  SCIENCES  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  established  by 
a  bequest  from  Dr.  Clifford  H.  Harding, 
former  professor  of  history  and  chair  of  the 
Department  of  Political  Science.  Awards 
ot  S2,000  each  will  be  made  to  qualified 
entering  freshmen  with  several  renewable 
for  the  second  year.  Applicants  to  majors 
in  the  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  will  be 
invited  to  applv  based  on  a  re\dew  of  their 
high  school  rank,  high  school  GPA,  and 
total  SAT  scores.  Selection  will  be  made 
by  a  faculty  committee  from  the  College  of 
Arts  and  Sciences. 

*DR.  CLIFFORD  H.  HARDING 
BUSINESS  AND  PUBLIC  AFFAIRS 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  by  a  bequest  from  Dr. 
Cliftord  H.  Harding,  former  professor  of 
history  and  chair  of  the  Department  of 
Political  Science.  Awards  of  S1,000  each 
will  be  made  to  qudified  entering  fresh- 
men. Applicants  to  majors  in  the  School 
of  Business  and  Public  Affairs  will  be 
invited  to  applv  based  on  a  review  of 
their  high  school  rank,  high  school  GPA, 
and  total  SAT  scores.  Selection  wUl  be 
made  by  a  faculty'  committee  from  the 
School  ot  Business  and  Public  Affairs. 
LEONARD  HOCKENSMITH 
MEMORLVL  SCHOLARSHIP  FOR 
PHI  KAPPA  SIGMA.  This  ftind  was 
established  in  memor)'  of  Leonard 
Hockensmith  '91,  a  history  major  and  Phi 
Kappa  Sigma  brother,  who  was  active  in 
his  fraternity  and  campus  organizations, 
which  included  being  a  cartoonist  for  the 
Quad  The  scholarship  will  be  awarded  to  a 
Phi  Kappa  Sigma  brother  or  a  relative  of  a 
Phi  Kappa  Sigma  alumni  brother  from  any 
chapter  who  is  active  in  extracurricular 


activities,  has  a  cumulative  GPA  of  at  least 
2.60,  and  is  in  good  standing  with  the  fra- 
ternity and  the  campus  community. 
ALEXANDER  VON  HUMBOLDT 
FOREIGN  LANGUAGE  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  frind  was  established  in 
honor  of  the  German  naturalist 
Alexander  von  Humboldt  (1769-1859), 
pre-eminent  scholar  of  his  time  who 
explored  much  of  Latin  America,  collect- 
ing and  cataloging  the  flora  of  the  New 
World  and  is  considered  the  founder  of 
plant  geography.  The  recipient  should  be 
a  foreign  language  major  who  plans  to 
continue  with  graduate  study,  or  a  junior 
or  senior  foreign  language  major  enrolled 
in  a  study  abroad  program. 
MARY  LOUISE  TURNER  HOPKINS 
'43  AWARD.  This  award  was  established 
by  John  Feelye  Hopkins  '43  in  memory  of 
his  wife  Mary  Louise  Turner  Hopkins  and 
has  been  permanendy  endowed  through 
his  recent  bequest.  It  is  presented  annually 
to  a  senior  majoring  in  special  education. 
HELEN  TAPPER  IVINS  '35  EN- 
DOWED SCHOLARSHIP.  The  Helen 
Tapper  Ivins  '35  Endowed  Scholarship 
was  established  by  Mrs.  Ivins's  sister, 
Marie  Tapper  Lewis  '32,  and  her  son,  C. 
Stephen  Lewis,  in  memoiy  of  Helen 
Tapper  Ivins,  a  member  of  the  West 
Chester  University  History/Social  Studies 
Department  who  also  served  on  one  of  the 
school's  first  scholarship  committees.  The 
Ivins  Scholarship  is  awarded  to  an  under- 
graduate student  with  a  minimum  grade 
point  average  of  3.0  who  is  stud}ing  to 
become  a  history/social  smdies  teacher. 
Applications  can  be  made  through  the 
Department  of  History. 
MARION  PETERS  IRVIN  EN- 
DOWED SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  was  established  by  family 
members  to  assist  an  upperclass  educa- 
tion major,  committed  to  teaching,  who 
has  financial  need. 

ANN  JOHNS  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  is  awarded  by  the  Faculty 
Dames  of  West  Chester  LTniversit)'  to 
undergraduate  women  who  are  at  least 
25  years  old  and  enrolled  in  degree  pro- 
grams. Contact  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  for  additional  information  and 
application  forms. 

ARTHUR  E.  JONES  MEMORIAL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Talent  in  the  choral 
conducting  area  is  the  consideration  for 
this  annual  award  to  a  music  student  in 
remembrance  of  Dr.  Arthur  E.  Jones,  for- 
mer chair  of  choral  music.  To  be  eligible, 
a  student  must  be  a  junior  who  has  com- 


pleted a  course  in  choral  conducting.  A 
2.0  overall  GPA  and  a  2.5  music  GPA 
are  required.  The  Department  of  Vocal 
and  Choral  Music  selects  the  recipient. 
CAROLYN  KEEFE  SCHOLARSHIP. 
The  Carolyn  Keefe  Scholarship  was  estab- 
lished to  honor  Dr.  Carol)Ti  Keefe,  profes- 
sor emerita  of  communiations  studies,  for- 
mer longtime  professor  of  speech  commu- 
nication, and  a  director  of  forensics  at 
WCU.  To  qualif)'  for  the  scholarship,  a 
student  must  have  completed  at  least  two 
years  on  the  Forensics  Team,  remrn  to  the 
University  and  participate  in  active  com- 
petition the  following  year,  have  a  mini- 
muiTi  GPA  of  3.0,  and  be  a  member  of  Pi 
Kappa  Delta,  national  forensics  honorary. 
VERA  A.  KENNY  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  renewable  award  is  made  to  an 
incoming  freshman  enrolled  in  School  of 
Education. 

DEPARTMENT  OF  KINESIOLOGY 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Three  scholarships 
are  awarded  to  any  sophomore,  junior,  or 
senior  student  in  health  and  physical 
education.  Applications  are  made  to  the 
chairperson.  Department  of  Kinesiology. 
CHARLES  KING  '32  AND 
DOROTHY  ECKMAN  KING  '32 
SCHOLARSHIP.  An  annual  $600 
award  was  established  by  family  mem- 
bers to  honor  Charles  and  Dorothy 
King.  No  limitations  are  set  for  recipi- 
ents who  will  be  determined  through  the 
Otfice  of  Financial  Aid. 
CHARLOTTE  E.  KING  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  endowed  scholarship  was 
established  by  N.  Ruth  Reed  in  memory 
of  Dr.  Charlotte  E.  King,  former 
University  professor  and  first  chair  of  the 
Elementary  Education  Department.  The 
committee  from  the  department  will 
select  an  elementary  education  recipient. 
DAVID  S.  KONITZER  ENDOWED 
MEMORIAL  SCHOLARSHIR  This 
scholarship  honors  the  memory  of  David 
S.  Konitzer,  a  West  Chester  University 
senior  who  was  tragically  killed  in  an 
automobile  accident.  The  scholarship  is 
awarded  to  a  sophomore,  junior,  or  senior 
Chester  County  resident  who  plans  to 
teach  physical  education  and  who  meets 
other  scholarship  requirements. 
FRITZ  K.  KRUEGER  MEMORIAL 
VOICE  SCHOLARSHIP.  Two  schol- 
arships, endowed  bv  the  Kxueger  family, 
tor  freshmen  who  are  vocalists  are 
awarded  in  honor  of  the  late  Fritz  K. 
Krueger,  who  taught  in  the  Department 
of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music  from  1961 


Financial  Aid 


until  1971.  Applications  are  made  to  the 
dean  of  the  School  of  Music. 
STANLEY  H.  AND  FLEURETTE 
LANG/NORTHEAST  HIGH 
SCHOOL  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  was  established  by  the 
Northeast  High  School  Alumni  Associa- 
tion and  is  awarded  to  a  Northeast  High 
School  graduate  based  on  high  scholastic 
standing,  class  rank,  SAT  scores,  sendee 
to  Northeast  High  School,  good  charac- 
ter, school  and  community  citizenship, 
and  financial  need.  The  scholarship  is 
renewable  through  four  years. 
LEONARD  LAUBACH  MUSIC 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Alumnus  Leonard 
Laubach  '40  estabhshed  this  scholarship 
to  fund  scholarships  for  music  students. 
Awards  are  determined  by  the  School  of 
Music  Scholarship  Committee. 
MEL  LORBACK  END0\\T:D 
SCHOLARSHIP  FUND.  Established 
by  Jerad  L.  Yeagley  '62,  this  scholarship 
honors  Mel  Lorback,  former  WCU  soc- 
cer coach  and  professor.  The  scholarship 
will  assist  a  male  soccer  player  with  out- 
standing academic  and  leadership  quali- 
ties, with  preference  given  to  physical 
education  majors. 

LEWIS  H.  NL\RSHALL  AWARD.  An 
annual  award  is  made  to  a  senior  in  the 
social  and  behavioral  sciences  whose  lead- 
ership, professional  promise,  and  academic 
achievement  are  outstanding.  It  is  made 
available  by  the  Chester  Count)'  Associa- 
tion of  Township  Officials,  and  the 
awardee  is  selected  bv  a  committee  of  fac- 
ulty selected  from  appropriate  disciplines. 
CHARLES  MAYO  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  award  of  approximately  S250  is 
made  annually  in  memor)-  of  Dr.  Charles 
Mayo,  a  political  scientist,  who  was  pres- 
ident of  West  Chester  University  from 
1974  until  1982.  It  is  made  by  vote  of 
the  political  science  facult)'  to  an  out- 
standing junior  or  senior  in  the  disci- 
pline. Details  are  available  through  the 
Department  of  Political  Science. 
JAMES  E.  McERLANE  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP FOR  INTERNATIONAL 
STUDY.  This  award  is  presented  to  a 
student  with  academic  abilit}'  and  finan- 
cial need  for  study  abroad.  The  scholar- 
ship was  established  in  honor  of  James 
E.  McErlane,  Esq.  by  his  friends  in  the 
Chester  Count}'  community. 
*NLA.RTHA  FORD  McILVAIN 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Established  by  Martha 
Ford  '52  and  Donald  Mcllvain,  this  schol- 
arship provides  annual  assistance  to  enter- 
ing freshmen  of  high  academic  promise, 


and  is  renewable  through  graduation  pro- 
vided a  minimum  3.0  GPA  is  maintained. 
NANCY  R.  McINT^HE  MEMORL'\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  is 
awarded  to  an  inconung  freshman  from 
Penns\ivania  who  has  been  diagnosed 
with  multiple  sclerosis  or  has  some  other 
physical  disability.  Preference  will  be  given 
to  smdents  enrolling  in  the  College  of 
Arts  and  Sciences  or  the  School  of  Educa- 
tion. Applicants  should  demonstrate 
extracurricular  involvement  and  leadership 
capabilities  through  service  or  group  work. 
DR.  ALAN  P.  MEWHA  ENDOWED 
SCHOL.\RSHIP.  Established  by  Dr. 
PriciUa  .Alden  Mewha  in  memorj'  of  Dr. 
.Alan  P.  Mewha  and  his  instructors  Miss 
Harriet  Elliot  and  Miss  Leone  Broadhead, 
this  scholarship  is  awarded  to  an  outstand- 
ing upperclass  geography  major. 
S.  POWELL  MIDDLETON  MEMO- 
RIAL SCHOLARSHIP.  This  is  an 
annual  award  to  a  freshman  music  stu- 
dent for  talent  and  achievement  on  an 
orchestral  instrument.  The  award  honors 
the  former  conductor  of  the  University 
Symphony  Orchestra  who  died  in  1970. 

DOROTm'  gi\t:n  miller  and 

FRANK  WILLL\M  MILLER 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  by  Dorothy  Given  Miller  '19 
and  Frank  William  Miller  '20.  Recipients 
must  have  successfully  completed  one 
year  at  the  University  and  demonstrate 
academic  achievement,  leadership, 
strength  of  character,  and  financial  need. 
Application  forms  are  available  from  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
LLOYD  C.  MITCHELL  PIANO 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  in  honor  of  Dr.  Lloyd  C. 
Mitchell  upon  his  retirement  in  1971 
after  35  years'  service  at  the  University, 
including  20  years  as  chair  of  the 
Department  of  Music  and  dean  of  the 
School  of  Music.  It  is  awarded  annually 
to  a  freshman  music  student  selected  by  a 
piano  faculty  jury.  Applications  are  made 
to  the  dean  of  the  School  of  Music. 
MCHAEL  P.  MONTEMURO 
MATH  SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholar- 
ship was  established  by  the  Montemuro 
fainily  in  memor\'  of  math  professor  Dr. 
Michael  P.  Montemuro.  A  SI, 000  scholar- 
ship for  tuition  will  be  awarded  to  an 
incoming  freshman  who  is  enrolled  in  the 
B.S.Ed,  degree  program  in  mathematics. 
Selection  by  a  Department  of  Mathematics 
committee  wdU  be  based  on  the  high 
school  record  of  the  candidates,  including 


SAT  scores,  class  rank,  courses,  grades, 

and  recommendations. 
AGNES  MONTEMURO  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  is  awarded  to  an 
honors  graduate  of  Interboro  High  School, 
with  preference  given  to  a  student  plan- 
ning to  major  in  education.  The  Interboro 
High  School  guidance  staff,  administra- 
tion, and  senior  teachers  choose  recipients. 
MICHAEL  MOROCHOKO 
MEMORI.AL  PIANO  AWARD.  The 
Department  of  Keyboard  Music  presents 
a  scholarship  annually  to  an  outstanding 
junior  music  student  majoring  in  piano. 
This  award  is  a  memorial  to  Michael 
Morochoko,  father  of  a  former  student. 
CONNIE  MURRAY  SCHOLARSHIP 
FOR  PLANO.  The  Main  Line  Music 
Teachers  established  this  S300  award  in 
memory  of  Connie  Murray,  one  of  their 
members,  who  championed  the  cause  of 
private  music  teachers.  The  scholarship  is 
presented  each  year  to  a  piano  pedagog)' 
major  and  selected  by  the  Keyboard 
Department  of  the  School  of  Music. 
NATIONAL  GUARD  OFnCERS 
SCHOLARSHIP  PROGRAM.  Upon 
certification  by  the  appropriate  National 
Guard  official  as  being  eligible,  students 
may  register  for  a  given  semester  by  pay- 
ing 25  percent  of  tuition  costs  plus  all 
other  fees.  The  University  wUl  bill  the 
National  Guard  directly  for  the  remain- 
ing 75  percent  of  the  tuition  charges. 
NEW  JERSEY  ALUMNI  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. The  New  Jersey  Chapter  of  the 
West  Chester  Universit}'  Alumni 
Association  sponsors  uvo  annual  $500 
scholarship  awards.  These  awards  are  avail- 
able to  smdents  who  are  New  Jersey  resi- 
dents and  are  fijnded  by  the  contributions 
of  New  Jersey  alumni.  Applications  may  be 
obtained  through  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid  and  the  Office  of  Alumni  Relations. 
CHARLOTTE  W.  NEWCOMBE 
FOUNDATION  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  is  awarded  to  under- 
graduate women  who  are  at  least  25 
years  old  and  enrolled  in  their  junior  or 
senior  years.  Selection  is  based  on 
scholastic  abilit}',  financial  need,  and 
special  life  circumstances.  Contact  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid  for  additional 
information  and  application  forms. 
DOROTLTr'  NOWACK  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  award  was  established  in 
memory  of  Dorothy  Nelson  Nowack,  a 
professor  of  public  health  at  West  Chester 
until  her  retirement  in  1991.  Recipients 
will  be  seniors  with  90  credits  who  are 
smdving  public  health/health  promotion. 


Financial  Aid 


have  a  3.3  or  higher  cumulative  GPA,  and 
exhibit  a  commitment  to  professional 
activities  and  service  to  the  University,  a 
department,  or  outside  community. 
OFF-CAMPUS  STUDENT  ASSO- 
CIATION SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  is  awarded  annually  by  the 
Off-Campus  Student  Association  to 
undergraduate  commuters  who  are 
involved  with  off-campus  activities. 

RICHARD  PACIARONI  '55  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  endowed  memorial  schol- 
arship for  geography,  established  by  the 
Paciai'oni  family,  is  awarded  annually  to 
an  undergraduate  geography  major  or 
graduate  student  for  enrichment  activities 
or  career/professional  development. 
Recipients  are  required  to  have  a  3.0 
GPA  in  geography  major  and  are  chosen 
by  the  Department  of  Geography  faculty. 
THEODORA  PANDEL  MEMORI- 
AL PIANO  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
award  is  presented  through  the  generos- 
ity of  Praxiteles  Pandel,  associate  profes- 
sor of  piano. 

EDITH  HARMON  PARKER 
BLACK  CAUCUS  ALUMNI  CHAP- 
TER SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholar- 
ship was  established  through  the  estate 
of  Edith  Harmon  Parker  '33  and  is 
awarded  to  a  student  with  good  academ- 
ic standing  studying  a  discipline  related 
to  human  relations,  with  preference 
given  to  black  students. 
HILLARY  H.  PARRY  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  An  annual  award  to  a 
junior  music  student,  granted  for  scholar- 
ship, citizenship,  and  achievement  in  vocal 
study.  The  scholarship  is  in  remembrance 
of  a  former  teacher  of  voice.  A  2.0  overall 
GPA  and  a  2.5  music  GPA  are  required. 
BLANCHE  STRETCH  PETERSON 
PIANO/ORGAN  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  is  awarded  to  an  incom- 
ing freshman  from  New  Jersey  whose 
main  area  of  performance  is  the  piano  or 
organ,  with  preference  given  to  a  student 
from  Salem  or  Cumberland  counties. 
PHI  MU  ALPHA  SINFONIA,  POW- 
ELL MIDDLETON  AWARD.  An 
annual  award  in  memory  of  S.  Powell 
Middleton  is  presented  by  the  Rho 
Sigma  chapter  of  Phi  Mu  Alpha  Sinfonia 
men's  music  fraternity.  It  is  based  on  out- 
standing musicianship,  scholarship,  and 
character.  Applications  are  made  to  the 
dean  of  the  School  of  Music. 

WILLIAM  PYLE  PHILIPS  SCHOL- 
ARSHIPS. Awarded  annually  to  juniors 
and  seniors  who  are  natives  of  Chester 
County  on  the  basis  of  demonstrated 


scholastic  ability.  Funds  are  available  for 
approximately  eight  scholarships  to  cover 
the  basic  tuition.  Application  forms  may 
be  secured  in  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 

'PRESIDENTIAL  SCHOLARSHIP. 
These  merit-based,  renewable  scholar- 
ships are  awarded  to  incoming  freshmen 
based  on  the  successful  completion  of  an 
academic  high  school  program,  SAT  or 
ACT  scores,  high  school  rank,  and  aca- 
demic record.  For  additional  informa- 
tion and  application  forms,  contact  the 
Office  of  Admissions. 

PRESSER  SCHOLARSHIP.  This  is  a 
grant  of  $1,000,  consisting  of  $500  from 
the  Theodore  Presser  Foundation  and 
$500  from  the  School  of  Music,  to  be 
applied  toward  tuition  in  a  student's 
senior  year.  It  is  awarded  by  the  presi- 
dent of  the  University  to  the  student 
majoring  in  music  who  achieved  the 
highest  cumulative  GPA  at  the  end  of 
the  junior  year,  having  completed  no 
less  than  95  credits  at  West  Chester 
University.  During  the  recipient's  senior 
year,  the  student  will  be  known  as  the 
Presser  Scholar,  denoting  a  reward  for 
excellence  with  the  hope  that  the  award 
will  help  the  student  not  only  financial- 
ly, but  also  in  his/her  fliture  career. 

N.  RUTH  REED  HEALTH 
DEPARTMENT  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  scholarship  is  sponsored  by  the 
West  Chester  University  Department  of 
Health.  Applicants  must  be  students  at 
West  Chester  University  (specifically, 
undergraduate  health  majors  with  sopho- 
more academic  status  or  better),  possess 
a  cumulative  GPA  of  at  least  3.0,  and 
demonstrate  high  moral  character,  posi- 
tive personality  traits,  and  evidence  of 
genuine  interest  and  aptitude  in  working 
in  the  health  field.  For  information  con- 
tact the  Department  of  Health. 

WINIFRED  PIERSOL  REESER  '43 
ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  supports  an  upperclass  student 
who  is  committed  to  the  field  of  kinesiol- 
ogy and  maintains  a  GPA  of  at  least  3.0. 

REISS  FOREIGN  STUDIES 
ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Retired  faculty  member  Mary  Ann  Reiss 
created  this  scholarship  for  students 
majoring  in  French,  German,  Russian, 
or  Spanish  who  plan  to  study  abroad. 

FRANCIS  J.  REYNOLDS  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  scholarship  is  awarded 
by  the  Department  of  Chemistry  to  a 
chemistry  major  who  has  successfully 
completed  one  year  at  the  University. 


Applications  are  available  through  the 
Department  of  Chemistry. 

LEAH  GALLAGHER  RIDDLE  '41 
ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  was  established  as  a  memori- 
al to  alumna  Leah  Gallagher  Riddle  '41 
by  her  family  and  friends.  It  wiU  be 
awarded  annually  to  an  exemplary  upper- 
class  student  whose  major  is  in  early 
childhood  and/or  elementary  education. 

ALFRED  D.  ROBERTS  FOREIGN 
LANGUAGE  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
fund  was  established  in  honor  of  Dr. 
Alfred  D.  Roberts,  professor  of  foreign 
languages  at  West  Chester  University 
from  1959  through  1988.  He  founded  the 
Department  of  Foreign  Languages  and 
the  Junior  Year  Abroad  program  at  West 
Chester,  and  served  as  the  president  of 
the  Faculty  Senate.  The  scholarship  recip- 
ient will  be  a  student  with  outstanding 
achievement  in  the  study  of  a  foreign  lan- 
guage but  does  not  need  to  have  a  major 
or  minor  in  foreign  language. 
SARTOMER  COMPANY  ENVI- 
RONMENTAL SCHOLARSHIP.  A 
$1,500  annual  environmental  award  is 
presented  to  a  sophomore  or  junior  who 
is  a  Pennsylvania  resident  and  has  fiilfilled 
a  number  of  chemistry  courses  including 
the  chemistry  of  the  environment  course. 
Recipients  must  have  a  minimum  overall 
GPA  of  3.0  and  a  3.2  GPA  in  the  sci- 
ences as  well  as  write  an  essay  judged  by  a 
company  representative. 
MABEL  KRING  SCHAFFER  '10 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  award  was 
established  in  memory  of  Mabel  Kring 
Schaffer  through  the  estate  of  her  daugh- 
ter, Nancy  E.  Schaffer,  class  of  1949.  It 
will  be  awarded  to  a  worthy  student  with 
financial  need  as  determined  by  the 
offices  of  Admissions  and  Financial  Aid. 
ANNE  M.  SCHAUB  MEMORL\L 
SCHOLARSHIP.  The  Anne  M.  Schaub 
Memorial  Scholarship  is  awarded  annual- 
ly to  a  kinesiology  major  who  is  entering 
the  second  semester  of  the  sophomore 
year.  A  minimum  3.0  GPA  is  required. 
SCHOOL  OF  EDUCATION 
ENDOWMENT.  The  School  of 
Education  Endowment  was  created  by 
John  F.  Kenny  '32  in  memory  of  his 
wife.  Vera  A.  Kenny,  and  in  recognition 
of  Clarence  L.  McKelvie  '24,  professor 
of  education.  Awards  or  loans  will  be 
made  to  academically  deserving  students 
under  the  guidance  of  the  dean  of  the 
School  of  Education. 

SCHOOL  OF  MUSIC  STRING 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Two  scholarships  are 


Financial  Aid 


awarded  to  incoming  freshmen  who  are 
string  majors. 

EVERETT  E.  SH.\EFER  MEMORI- 
AL ENDOWED  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Established  by  R.  Elizabeth  Wyers 
Shaefer  '44  in  memory  ot  her  husband, 
this  scholarship  assists  a  performing 
musician  enrolled  in  anv  music  degree 
program  with  a  minimum  2.0  cumulative 
grade  point  average  wdth  a  minimum  2.5 
grade  point  average  in  music. 
DR.  AHMAD  H.  SHAMSEDDINE 
MEMORL\L  AWARD.  An  annual 
award  is  given  to  an  outstanding  student  in 
the  field  of  business/economics,  in  memor)- 
of  Dr.  Ahmad  H.  Shamseddine,  associate 
professor  ot  economics,  who  died  in  1971. 
JANE  ELIZABETH  SHEPPARD 
VOCAL/CHORAL  SCHOLARSHIP. 
This  award  was  established  in  honor  of 
Jane  E.  Sheppard  upon  her  retirement  in 
May  1987  after  34  years  of  senice  in  the 
Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music. 
The  recipient  of  this  monetary  award 
will  be  selected  on  the  basis  of  outstand- 
ing participation  in  vocal  and  choral 
activities,  which  must  include  four 
semesters  of  Chamber  Choir,  scholar- 
ship, and  personal  qualifications. 
SICO  FOUNDATION  SCHOLAR- 
SHIPS. The  SICO  Company  provides  a 
limited  number  of  scholarships  for  four 
years  of  study  at  West  Chester  Universirv 
at  a  rate  of  $1,000  per  year  ($4,000  total' 
value).  High  school  students  qualified  for 
college  admission  or  high  school  gradu- 
ates who  have  not  attended  college  on  a 
fUl-time  basis  may  compete  tor  a  SICO 
Foundation  Scholarship  when  their  legal 
residences  are  located  in  the  foDowing 
Pennsylvania  counties:  Adams,  Berks, 
Chester,  Cumberland,  Dauphin, 
Delaware,  Lancaster,  Lebanon,  and  York. 
A  student  attending  the  Shippensburg, 
Boyertown,  Spring-Ford,  or  Williams 
Valley  High  Schools  in  Pennsylvania 
whose  residence  is  outside  the  aforemen- 
tioned area  is  considered  in  the  SICO 
Company  service  area  and  mav  apply  for  a 
scholarship.  No  distinction  is  made  on 
the  basis  of  sex,  race,  or  religious  belief 
JESSE  V.  SILVANO  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. This  scholarship  was  established 
in  memory  of  Jesse  V.  SUvano,  a  West 
Chester  University  student.  To  qualify, 
recipients  must  be  a  sophomore,  junior, 
or  first-semester  senior,  have  a  minimum 
GPA  of  2.5,  be  committed  to  complet- 
ing an  undergraduate  degree  in  criminal 
justice,  have  an  interest  in  attending  law 


school,  be  active  in  campus  or  communi- 
ty' activities,  and  have  financial  need. 
ROB  SIMON  MEMORIAL  AWARD. 
This  award  has  been  established  by 
Joseph  and  Janice  Simon,  alumni  of  the 
School  of  Music,  and  the  late  Dr.  Irving 
H.  Cohen,  a  member  of  the  School  of 
Music  faculty  for  many  years,  in  memory 
of  Rob  Simon,  who  was  a  double  bass 
major  at  the  Universitv'.  The  competition 
is  open  to  double  bass  majors  during 
their  junior  or  senior  year. 
VINCENT  D.  AND  MARY  R.  SKA- 
HAN  SCHOLARSHIP.  The  scholar- 
ship, in  honor  of  Vincent  D.  and  Mary 
R.  Skahan,  benefits  graduating  seniors 
from  West  Catholic  High  School  who 
have  been  accepted  for  admission  to 
West  Chester  Universirv.  Recipients 
must  have  a  cumulative  B  average  upon 
graduation  from  West  Catholic.  The 
scholarship  is  renewable  provided  the 
recipient  maintains  a  3.0  GPA.  The 
minimum  award  is  currently  $500. 
GREG  SMITH  MEMORIAL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  An  annual  scholar- 
ship of  $100  is  presented  by  the  baseball 
club  in  memory  of  a  former  baseball  cap- 
tain and  president  of  the  baseball  club. 
W.  W.  SMITH  CHARITABLE 
TRUST.  The  W.W.  Smith  Charitable 
Trust  was  established  in  1977  under  the 
will  of  WUliam  Wikoft  Smith,  an  impor- 
tant supporter  of  educational  opportunity 
in  the  Delaware  Valley.  Established 
through  his  will,  the  W.  W.  Smith 
Charitable  Trust  has  carried  on  Smith's 
work.  Funds  from  this  program  are  used 
to  support  students  from  middle-income 
families  who  might  not  qualify'  for  other 
aid.  The  funds  also  support  students 
enrolled  in  the  Academic  Development 
Program  at  West  Chester  University.  For 
additional  information,  contact  the  direc- 
tor of  the  Academic  Development 
Program  or  the  Office  of  Financial  Aid. 
SOPHOMORE  MUSIC  EDUCA- 
TION SCHOLARSHIP.  Three  schol- 
arships are  given  annually  to  music  edu- 
cation sophomores.  University  citizen- 
ship and  musical  performance  as  well  as 
a  2.0  overall  GPA  and  a  2.5  music  GPA 
are  required.  Applications  are  made  to 
the  dean  of  the  School  of  Music. 
SOPHOMORE  MUSIC  SCHOLAR- 
SHIPS. These  awards  are  presented  annu- 
ally to  three  sophomore  music  students, 
one  each  in  the  areas  of  instrumental, 
vocal,  and  keyboard.  Recipients  must 
exhibit  good  citizenship  and  performance 
skills,  as  well  as  have  an  overall  2.0  GPA 


and  a  2.5  GPA  in  music.  Auditions  for  the 
scholarships  are  held  in  the  fall  semester. 
CHARLES  A.  SPRENKLE  EN- 
DOWED SCHOLARSHIP.  Created  by 
family  and  friends,  this  scholarship  hon- 
ors Dr.  Charles  A.  Sprenkle,  who  joined 
the  facult}'  in  1955  and  was  appointed 
dean  of  the  School  of  Music  in  1971.  The 
scholarship  is  awarded  annually,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  fall  semester,  for  tuition 
assistance  to  the  sophomore  who  achieved 
the  highest  grade  point  average  during 
the  previous  year  as  a  fijll-time  freshman 
enrolled  in  the  School  ot  Music. 
DR.  ETHEL  M.  STALEY  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. Established  in  memor)'  of  Dr. 
Ethel  M.  Staley,  who  taught  French  at 
West  Chester  from  1930  to  1952,  this 
scholarship  is  awarded  annually  to  an 
outstanding  graduate  or  undergraduate 
student  in  French. 

JANE  B.  SWAN  SCHOLARSHIP. 
Sponsored  by  the  Women's  Institute  of 
West  Chester  University',  a  scholarship  of 
approximately  $500  is  awarded  annually 
to  a  woman  student  who  is  completing 
an  interrupted  education.  Application 
forms  are  available  at  the  Women's 
Center  and  the  Office  ot  Financial  Aid. 
DR.  CHARLES  S.  SWOPE  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP FOUNDATION.  A  Memorial 
Scholarship  Trust  Foundation  established 
by  Charles  E.  Swope  and  Richard  M. 
Swope  in  memory  of  Dr.  and  Mrs. 
Charles  S.  Swope.  Dr.  Swope  served  as 
president  of  West  Chester  University  for 
a  quarter  ot  a  centun'.  Applicants  must  be 
fijll-time  students  enrolled  in  their  junior 
year.  Scholarships  are  S1,000  each;  up  to 
15  may  be  awarded  annually.  Applications 
must  be  fded  on  or  before  April  1. 
Selection  is  made  during  May  with  schol- 
arships commencing  in  September. 
WILLIAM  A.  .\ND  BARBARA  V. 
TAYLOR  SCHOLARSHIPS.  Mrs. 
Barbara  Taylor  Toland  established  this 
endowed  scholarship  in  memory  of  her 
first  husband  of  35  years,  William  A. 
Taylor.  Two  renewable,  fiiU-tuition 
scholarships  are  awarded  to  incoming 
freshmen,  one  to  a  Chichester  High 
School  graduate  and  one  to  a  Sun  Valley 
High  School  graduate.  The  recipients  are 
to  be  deserving  students  who  have  not 
qualified  for  any  other  scholarships  or 
financial  aid  at  the  University. 
S.  ELIZABETH  T\^SON  MEMORI- 
AL SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship 
is  awarded  to  an  outstanding  undergrad- 
uate student  in  the  Department  ot 
Communicative  Disorders. 


Student  Affairs 


ROBERT  M.  VALYO  SCHOLAR- 
SHIP. The  scholarship  honors  Chief 
Robert  M.  Valyo,  who  served  as  chief  ot 
police  in  Whiteland  Township,  Chester 
Counrv'.  To  qualify,  recipients  must  be 
criminal  justice  majors  entering  their 
junior  or  senior  year  and  have  an  o\'erall 
minimum  GPA  of  3.0.  The  minimum 
award  is  currently  S500. 
JOY  VANDEVER  ENDOWED 
SCHOLARSHIP.  Established  by  the 
friends  of  Joy  Vandever  upon  her  retire- 
ment from  the  West  Chester  University 
faculty,  this  scholarship  is  awarded  to  a 
music  major  who  finishes  among  the 
top  50  percent  in  the  Parr)- Junior  Year 
Voice  Competition. 
EARLE  C.  WATERS  ENDOWED 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  in  memory  of  Earle  C. 
Waters,  former  professor  of  health  and 
physical  education  and  coach  of  nationally 
renowned  soccer,  track,  and  g}Tnnastics 
teams.  Awards  will  be  made  to  students 
demonstrating  financial  need  who  have 
completed  their  first  year  with  a  GPA  of 
no  less  than  2.8  in  the  Department  of 
Kinesiology'  with  a  concentration  in  the 
teaching  of  health  and  physical  education, 
and  who  have  demonstrated  qualities  of  a 
well-rounded  citizen  b)-  participating  in 
and  contributing  to  the  success  of 
University  or  community-sponsored  activ- 
ities. Awards  will  be  made  by  a  committee 
from  the  School  ot  Health  Sciences. 
WEST  CHESTER  UNI\T:RSIT\' 
MERIT  SCHOLARSHIPS.  These 


one-time  scholarships  are  awarded  to 
incoming  freshmen  who  demonstrate 
high  academic  achievement. 
MYNN  DIEFENDERFER  WHITE 
'27  HONORS  SCHOLARSHIP.  This 
scholarship  has  been  endowed  in  honor 
of  ALTin  Diefenderfer  WTiite  by  her 
husband,  Paul,  her  two  children, 
Cynthia  and  Jim,  and  three  of  her 
grandchildren.  The  SLOOO  scholarship  is 
awarded  annually  to  a  rising  junior  who 
is  a  member  in  good  standing  of  the 
University  Honors  Program,  is  active  in 
the  Honors  Student  Association,  and 
who  demonstrates  leadership  in  the  cam- 
pus communit)'.  The  award  is  renewable 
for  the  second  year  proxdded  the  recipi- 
ent maintains  the  standards  for  which 
they  were  initially  selected. 
HARRY  WILKINSON  MUSIC  THE- 
ORY SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholar- 
ship is  awarded  to  a  sophomore  music 
student  during  the  spring  semester  on  the 
basis  of  talent  and  achievement  in  the 
areas  of  music  theory,  ear- training,  and 
sight  singing.  The  scholarship  fund  has 
been  established  by  Dr.  Harry  Wilkinson, 
retired  professor  in  the  Department  of 
Music  Theory  and  Composition. 
LOIS  WILLIAMS  ENDOWED 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  scholarship  was 
established  by  Lois  WiUiams,  the  former 
choral  conductor  and  vocal  professor  who 
retired  in  1991  after  36  years  of  service  to 
the  Universit}'.  It  is  awarded  to  a  student 
in  any  music  degree  program  within  the 
School  of  Music  who  has  earned  a  mini- 


mum cumulative  GPA  of  3.0  in  all  music 
subjects.  The  student  must  be  at  least  in 
his  or  her  third  semester  ot  Concert 
Choir.  The  candidate  for  this  scholarship 
will  be  selected  by  the  conductor  of  the 
Concert  Choir  and  wiU  be  presented  to  a 
student  whose  leadership  and  responsi- 
bilitv'  as  a  member  of  the  Concert  Choir 
is  an  obvious  indication  of  this  person's 
potential  as  a  musician/educator. 
DR.  CARLOS  ZIEGLER  SCHOL- 
ARSHIP. This  S500  award  is  presented 
annually  to  a  junior  student  majoring  in 
early  childhood  or  elementar)'  education. 
The  recipient  must  have  a  3.0  GPA  or 
higher,  and  show  leadership  and  poten- 
tial as  an  early  childhood  or  elementary 
teacher. 

RUTH  WALDAL\N  ZOLL 
SCHOLARSHIP.  This  tlind  was  estab- 
lished through  the  generosity  of  the  late 
Mrs.  Ruth  Waldman  ZoU  '28.  These 
scholarships  are  especially  for  students 
who  have  significant  need.  One  scholar- 
ship each  year  is  reserved  for  a  student 
entering  the  University  from  a  high 
school  in  Berks  Counn-  where  Mrs.  ZoU 
resided.  Award  amounts  vat}'  and  appli- 
cation forms  may  be  obtained  fi'om  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid. 

'Students  accepted  to  tibe  Universit}.'  prior  to 
Januan"  15  who  have  demonstrated  outstanding 
achievement  will  be  invited  to  apply  for  these 
merit  scholarships.  Candidate  selection  is  based  on 
academic  performance,  involvement,  and  accom- 
plishment, and  is  determined  by  the  University 
Scholarship  Committee. 


Student  Affairs 


The  administration  of  West  Chester 
Universit)'  is  committed  to  pro\'iding  a 
comprehensive  educational  experience 
for  students.  To  accomplish  this  mis- 
sion, the  Division  ot  Student  Affairs 
provides  a  variety  of  services  and  pro- 
grams to  augment  the  classroom  experi- 
ence. The  goal  of  the  division  is  to  assist 
students  in  their  intellectual,  social,  and 
psychological  growth  and  to  contribute 
to  developing  a  campus  community 
where  knowledge,  acceptance,  and  social 
concerns  are  basic  values. 
Offices  within  the  Student  Affairs 
Division  include  Athletics,  Career  De- 


velopment, Children's  Center,  Counsel- 
ing and  Psychological  Services,  Greek 
Life  and  Student  Organizations,  Health 
Services,  Judicial  Affairs  and  Community 
Development,  Multicultural  Affairs, 
New  Student  Programs,  Recreation  and 
Leisure  Programs,  Residence  Lite  and 
Housing,  Service  Learning  and  Volun- 
teer Programs,  Sykes  Student  Union,  and 
the  Women's  Center.  The  Division  of 
Student  Affairs  also  offers  services  for 
commuter  and  off-campus  students  and 
for  lesbian,  gay,  and  bisexual  students. 
The  administration  believes  that  stu- 
dents should  share  the  responsibility  for 


governing  their  communit)'  and  should 
have  a  voice  in  shaping  the  objectives  of 
the  University.  Through  a  democratical- 
ly constructed  student  government  and 
committee  structure,  the  administration, 
facult)',  and  student  body  seek  to  work 
together  on  behalf  of  the  general  weltare 
of  the  University. 

Classification  of  Students 

Students  who  attend  West  Chester 
Universit)'  are  classified  for  administra- 
tive purposes  into  two  categories. 
(1)      RESIDENT  STUDENTS 
These  students  live  in  housing 
facilities  operated  by  the  University. 


Student  Altairs 


Residents  of  North  Campus  resi- 
dence halls  are  required  to  choose 
from  four  University  meal  plans. 
(See  "Meal  Fee"  on  page  10.) 
Those  residents  living  in  the  South 
Campus  apartment  complex  are  not 
required  to  be  on  a  meal  plan;  how- 
ever, they  may  choose  any  meal 
plan  option  if  they  are  interested. 
(2)     OFF-CAMPUS  STUDENTS 
This  classification  covers  students 
who  travel  or  commute  to  and 
from  their  legal  residences,  as  well 
as  students  who  hve  away  from 
the  homes  of  their  parents  or  legal 
guardians  in  a  dwelling  that  is  not 
supervised  or  approved  by  the 
University. 

Services 

Residence  Life  and  Housing  Services 

The  Office  of  Residence  Life  and 
Housing  Services  is  responsible  for  creat- 
ing and  maintaining  an  environment  in 
each  housing  tacUity  that  encourages  aca- 
demic, social,  and  emotional  growth. 
Each  facility  is  staffed  with  trained  per- 
sonnel who  are  available  24  hours  a  day 
to  provide  services,  assistance,  and  a  vari- 
ety of  information.  AH  resident  students 
are  given  and  encouraged  to  read  the  resi- 
dential handbook,  A  Guide  to 
Residential  Living,  which  contains  valu- 
able information  on  all  services,  policies, 
and  responsibilities  pertaining  to  all  hous- 
ing facilities.  The  Office  of  Residence 
Life  and  Housing  Services  is  located  in 
238  Sykes  Student  Union,  610-436-3307. 
On-Campus  Housing 
The  residence  haUs  on  the  North  Campus 
provide  accommodations  for  approximate- 
ly 3,100  resident  students  in  double  occu- 
panc)'  accommodations.  In  addition,  the 
South  Campus  apartment  complex  houses 
almost  500  residents  in  four-  or  five-per- 
son, fijUy  fiirnished  units  with  each  bed- 
room having  either  single  or  double  occu- 
pancy. AH  students  may  be  guaranteed 
housing  for  their  hill  four  years. 
Housing  Assignments.  The  Office  of 
Residence  Life  and  Housing  Ser\'ices 
makes  the  housing  assignments  for  all 
students  living  in  all  housing  facilities. 
These  assignments  are  made  without  dis- 
crimination. Only  individuals  of  the  same 
gender  will  be  assigned  as  roommates  or 
in  the  same  apartment  unit.  Each  room 
or  apartment  has  basic  fiirnishings  for 
comfortable  hving,  and  the  students  mav 
make  them  more  homelike  with  their 
own  accessory  additions.  During  orienta- 


tion, students  are  informed  about  the  ser- 
vices and  equipment  fiarnished  by  the 
University  and  those  necessities  that  they 
must  supply  for  themselves.  Lounge  and 
recreation  areas,  television,  and  a  variety 
of  other  facilities  and  conveniences  pro- 
vide a  pleasant  setting  for  student  life  in 
each  residence  hall.  Services  are  also 
available  in  a  central  location  in  the 
apartment  complex. 

Transfer  Students.  Transfer  students  are 
admitted  both  as  resident  students  and 
as  commuting  students.  Those  transfer 
students  who  desire  on-campus  housing 
should  indicate  this  at  the  time  they 
apply  for  admission  to  the  University. 
Married  Students.  The  University  has  no 
housing  facilities  for  married  students 
with  their  spouses  or  for  students  with 
children  or  dependents.  Prior  to  registra- 
tion, they  will  need  to  secure  their  own 
accommodations  in  the  community. 
Readmitted  Students.  Students  readmit- 
ted to  the  University  are  eUgible  for  on- 
campus  housing  unless  a  specific  disci- 
pUnary  sanction  would  prohibit  such 
occupancy.  Interested  students  should 
contact  the  Office  of  Residence  Life  and 
Housing  Services  for  specific  informa- 
tion about  the  apphcation  process. 
Policy  for  Withdrawals.  Resident  students 
must  vacate  their  residence  hall  or  apart- 
ment within  24  hours  of  completing  the 
withdrawal  form  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  Resident  students  must  secure 
the  signature  of  the  assistant  director  of 
housing  prior  to  vacating  their  residence 
hall  or  apartment. 

Students  with  Disabilities.  Students  must 
be  able  to  care  for  themselves  indepen- 
dendy  or  arrange  for  services  that  will 
allow  them  to  perform  normal  life  fiinc- 
tions  in  the  context  of  a  residential  set- 
ting, including,  but  not  limited  to, 
bathing,  dressing,  and  other  personal-care 
issues.  This  requirement  may  be  met  by 
having  a  live-in,  personal-care  attendant, 
within  certain  restrictions.  Some  accom- 
modations are  also  available  for  students 
who  have  special  needs.  Additional  infor- 
mation, including  available  services  and 
penalties  tor  noncompliance,  can  be 
obtained  by  contacting  the  director  of 
housing  services  at  610-436-3307.  The 
fiiU  text  of  the  policies  and  procedures  are 
found  in  the  WCU  Handbook  on 
Disabilities,  the  "Guide  to  Residential 
Living,"  or  on  the  University  web  page  at 
www.wcupa.edu/_services/sm.lif7. 


Dining  Accommodations 

AH  students  residing  in  the  North 
Campus  residence  halls  must  be  on  the 
University  meal  plan  as  a  condition  of 
occupancy.  Students  with  medical  prob- 
lems who  cannot  meet  this  requirement 
may  request  a  meal  waiver.  Residents  of 
the  South  Campus  Apartment  Com- 
plex, as  well  as  off-campus  and  com- 
muting smdents,  may  purchase  any 
University  meal  plan  offered,  choose  one 
of  the  options  hsted  below,  or  obtain 
meals  at  the  transient  rates. 
The  University's  meal  plan  provides  a 
number  of  choices  for  students.  North 
Campus  resident  students  must  select 
one  of  the  following  meal  plan  options: 

•  Variable  10  guaranteed  meal  plan 
(any  10  meals  of  the  19  meals  served) 
plus  $100  of  flex 

•  Variable  14  guaranteed  meal  plan 
(any  14  meals  of  the  19  meals  served) 
plus  SI 00  of  flex 

•  19  guaranteed  meal  plan  plus  $100 
flex,  or 

•  Block  Plan  of  175  meals  per  semester 
plus  $100  flex 

The  meal  week  runs  from  Saturday  to 
Friday  and  any  unused  meals  at  the  end 
of  the  week  will  be  forfeited. 
In  addition  to  the  above  meal  plans,  the 
following  meal  plans  are  also  available  to 
South  Campus  Apartment  residents, 
off-campus,  and  commuter  students: 

•  Block  Plan  of  50  meals  per  semester 
plus  $100  flex 

•  Variable  5  guaranteed  meal  plan  (any 
5  meals  of  the  19  meals  served)  plus 
$100  flex,  or 

•  Flex  dollars  only  -  must  begin  with  a 
$100  minimum  balance  and  may  be 
increased  in  $25  increments. 

The  flex  dollar  portion  of  every  meal  plan 
may  be  increased  in  $25  increments  at 
any  time  during  the  semester.  Flex  dollars 
not  used  at  the  end  of  the  fall  semester 
will  be  transferred  to  the  spring  semester. 
The  smdent  forfeits  any  flex  dollars 
remaining  at  the  end  of  the  spring  semes- 
ter which  wiU  not  be  refunded.  Students 
who  leave  the  University  after  the  fall 
semester  wUl  forfeit  any  remaining  flex 
dollars.  AH  meal  plans  may  be  used  in  the 
foHowing  locations:  Lawrence  Dining 
HaU,  Lawrence  Convenience  Store  and 
Campus  Corner,  the  12th  and  South 
Convenience  Store  at  the  South  Campus 
Apartments,  and  the  Ram's  Head  Food 
Court  in  S\kes  Union. 
Students  in  North  Campus  residence 
haUs  wiU  have  their  meal  plan  cost 


Student  Affairs 


included  in  their  University  billing.  Off- 
campus,  commuter,  and  South  Campus 
apartment  students  can  sign  up  for  a 
meal  plan  bv  applying  at  the  Office  of 
the  Bursar  in  the  Elsie  O.  BuU  Center. 

Off-Campus  and  Commuter 
Services 

Services  to  Off-Campus  and  Commuter 
Students,  which  are  coordinated  by  the 
associate  director  of  Sykes  Student 
Union,  include  the  Off-Campus  Housing 
Service,  advising  the  Off-Campus  and 
Commuter  Association,  and  serving  as  a 
community  resource  agent  in  areas  related 
to  off-campus  and  commuting  students. 
Additional  services  provided  to  off-cam- 
pus students  include  landlord/tenant  legal 
aid  information  and  development  of 
long-range  plans  and  research  on  the 
profile  and  needs  of  off-campus  students. 
The  assistant  director  of  Sykes  Student 
Union  and  Off-Campus  and  Commuter 
Services  is  located  in  116  Sykes  Student 
Union,  610-436-2984. 

OfF-Campus  Housing 

Students  who  choose  to  live  in  the  com- 
munit\'  must  secure  their  own  living 
accommodations.  Off-Campus  and 
Commuter  Services  wiU  assist  students  in 
finding  housing  b\'  providing  up-to-date 
listings  of  available  housing.  These  listings 
are  available  in  Sykes  Student  Union.  The 
off-campus  housing  listings  may  also  be 
accessed  on  the  Internet  at  http:// 
maimTTi.wcupa.edu/public/qn'och.proc. 

Bookstore 

The  Student  Services,  Inc.  Bookstore  is 
located  on  the  ground  floor  of  Sykes 
Student  Union.  The  Bookstore  sells  both 
new  and  used  textbooks  for  all  WCU 
courses  as  well  as  school  and  art  supplies. 
Textbooks  may  also  be  purchased  on  the 
store's  web  site.  The  SSI  Bookstore  also 
stocks  best  sellers,  a  variety  of  general 
interest  literature,  and  a  wide  selection  of 
reference  books,  as  well  as  study  and 
teacher  aids.  SSI  Bookstore  offers  a  com- 
plete line  of  official  WCU  imprinted 
clothing  and  an  array  of  gifts  that  can  be 
purchased  on  the  store's  web  site. 
Greeting  cards,  groceries,  snacks,  and 
laundry  supplies  are  also  available  in  the 
Bookstore.  Services  offered  include  film 
processing,  special  orders  for  computer 
software  and  general  interest  books  (at  no 
extra  cost),  UPS  shipping,  and  daily  book 
buybacks.  AH  major  credit  cards,  SSI 
EZPay,  and  personal  checks,  accompa- 
nied by  a  valid  ID,  are  accepted.  The 
Bookstore  hours  are  as  follows:  Monday 


-  Thursday  firom  8  a.m.  -  6  p.m.;  Friday, 
8  a.m.  -  4  p.m.;  and  Saturday,  11  a.m.  - 
3  p.m.  (hours  are  subject  to  change).  For 
additional  convenience,  the  store  offers 
extended  operating  hours  at  the  begin- 
ning of  each  semester.  For  more  infor- 
mation call  610-436-BOOK  or  visit  the 
web  site  at  www.click2ssi-bookstore.com. 

Bus  Transportation  on  Campus 

The  University  provides  bus  service  from 
North  to  South  Campus  (and  return) 
during  the  spring  and  fall  semesters.  The 
buses  run  from  7:15  a.m.  to  1  a.m.  on 
weekdays,  from  4  p.m.  to  1  a.m.  on 
Saturdays,  and  firom  1  p.m.  to  1  a.m.  on 
Sundays.  On  North  Campus,  the  buses 
stop  at  University  Avenue  and  Church 
Street,  and  also  in  front  of  Wayne  Hall. 
On  South  Campus  the  buses  stop  at  the 
Russell  L.  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences 
Center,  McCoy  Center,  the  South 
Campus  Apartment  Complex,  and  Q_ 
and  R  Lots.  Bus  schedules  are  available 
at  residence  hall  desks  or  the  Student 
Union  Information  Center.  There  is  no 
bus  service  during  the  summer. 
Students  using  the  bus  service  should  be 
advised  that  it  is  impossible  to  provide 
timely  transportation  between  the  North 
and  South  Campus  within  the  standard 
10-minute  class  break.  Therefore,  stu- 
dents should  plan  and  develop  class 
schedules  that  allow  time  to  be  trans- 
ported between  the  two  campuses 
through  the  use  of  open  class  periods. 

Career  Planning  and  Placement 
Services 

The  professional  staff  of  the  Twardowski 
Career  Development  Center  assists  stu- 
dents in  defining  career  goals,  relating 
academic  preparation  to  these  goals,  and 
eventually  helping  in  the  search  for 
internships  and  part-time/fiiU-time  career 
opportunities.  These  services  are  available 
throughout  the  entire  calendar  year  in 
Lawrence  Center,  second  floor.  A  career 
information  library  is  available  for  brows- 
ing and  research.  Graduate  school  refer- 
ence material  is  maintained  for  students 
considering  graduate  school.  Other  activ- 
ities of  the  Twardowski  Career  Develop- 
ment Center  include  seminars,  on-cam- 
pus  interviews  and  job  fairs  with  poten- 
tial employers,  resume  critique,  resume 
referral,  electronic  resume  databases,  and 
a  job  posting  system. 
Additional  information  is  available  at 
http://wwav.wcupa.edu/_services/sru.car/. 
The  Twardowski  Career  Development 
Center  is  located  in  106  LawTence 


Center,  610-436-2501,  or  e-mail 
cdc#wcupa.edu. 

Children's  Center 

The  Children's  Center  provides  afford- 
able, quality'  child  care  on  campus  for 
children  of  students  and  employees  of  the 
University.  The  center  offers  a  develop- 
mentally  based  educational  program  for 
children  ages  three  to  six  years  with  a 
summer  program  for  ages  three  to  twelve. 
A  multiple-child  discount  of  20  percent  is 
available.  Snacks  are  provided  by  the  cen- 
ter, with  parents  providing  a  bag  lunch. 
Located  on  the  ground  floor  of 
McCarthy  Hall,  the  Children's  Center  is 
licensed  by  the  Commonwealth  of 
Pennsylvania,  and  all  required  registration 
material  must  be  completed  prior  to 
enrollment.  Enrollment  for  each  semester 
begins  when  the  schedule  of  courses  is 
available  from  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 
The  Children's  Center  also  offers  a  wide 
range  of  opportunities  for  involvement 
by  students  such  as: 

•  Practicum  experiences  in  the  fields  of 
early  childhood  education,  social 
work,  and  nursing; 

•  Volunteer  programs  with  the  Depart- 
ment of  Social  Work,  communit)' 
service  programs,  Greek  organiza- 
tions, and  individual  students; 

•  Paid  part-time  aide  positions  through 
the  Work  Study  program  and 
Student  Services,  Inc.  funding; 

•  Classroom  participation  through  the 
departments  of  Music  Education, 
PCinesiolog}-,  and  Foreign  Languages. 

For  more  information  contact  the 
Children's  Center  at  610-436-2388. 

Counseling  and  Psychological 
Services  Department 

The  Department  of  Counseling  and 
Psychological  Services  (the  Counseling 
Center)  is  located  on  the  second  floor  of 
Lawrence  Center,  610-436-2301. 
Services  are  available  to  all  currendy 
enrolled  undergraduate  and  graduate 
students.  The  Counseling  Center 
includes  licensed  psychologists,  consult- 
ing psychiatrists,  and  graduate-level 
trainees  with  whom  students  may  dis- 
cuss their  concerns  in  strict  confidence. 

COUNSELING  SERVICES 

Since  the  Counseling  Center  provides 
services  for  a  wide  range  of  concerns, 
each  student's  experience  will  be  tailored 
to  his  or  her  needs.  Students  may  wish 
to  improve  their  interpersonal  skills, 
resolve  personal  conflicts,  or  clarify  their 


Student  Affairs 


educational  or  vocational  choices.  Any  ot 
the  following  approaches  may  be  imple- 
mented to  address  a  student's  concerns: 

1.  Individual  psychological  counseling 
consists  of  a  one-to-one  experience 
where  the  focus  is  on  resolving  person- 
al conflicts  and  conflicts  with  others, 
and  on  improving  the  student's  exper- 
tise at  making  meaningflil  choices.  It 
may  also  help  people  avoid  choosing 
behaviors  that  restrict  personal  growth 
and  undermine  their  well-being. 

2.  Group  counseling  consists  of  a  small 
number  of  peers  with  one  or  two 
counselors.  Such  groups  meet  once 
each  week  to  help  group  members 
learn  about  themselves.  Groups  may 
or  may  not  have  a  specific  focus.  Past 
groups  with  a  focus  have  included 
students  who  have  experienced  the 
death  of  a  parent,  bad  habits  which 
block  personal  growth,  eating  disor- 
ders, and  assertiveness  training. 
General  counseling  groups  have 
included  those  for  interpersonal  prob- 
lem solving  and  for  female  smdents. 

3.  Individual  vocational  counseling 
consists  of  a  one-to-one  experience 
that  focuses  on  clarifying  the  student's 
choice  of  concentration  and  vocation. 
Vocational  choice  is  most  solid  when 
it  is  the  outgrovrth  of  understanding 
oneself.  Such  understanding  is 
advanced  by  the  thoughtflil  explo- 
ration of  values,  interests,  and  abilities. 

4.  Testing  may  include  psychological  or 
vocational  interest  tests  which  can 
clarify  educational  and  vocational 
planning.  The  student  and  counselor 
can  determine  whether  such  testing 
might  be  helpfiil.  Arrangements  also 
can  be  made  at  the  Counseling 
Center  for  taking  the  Miller 
Analogies  Test,  a  graduate  school 
admissions  examination. 

5.  Consultation  services  for  staff  and 
faculty  are  available  on  a  hmited 
basis.  Psychologists  may  be  able  to 
assist  with  crises,  program  planning, 
group  and  interpersonal  communica- 
tions, and  referral  to  other  agencies. 

Greek  Life  and  Student 
Organizations 

The  Office  of  Greek  Life  and  Student 
Organizations  coordinates  three  distinct, 
yet  interrelated,  programming  areas.  It 
advises  West  Chester  Universifys  frater- 
nity and  sorority  community,  compris- 
ing 27  inter(national)  chapters,  on  their 
service  projects,  community  activities, 
scholarship  support  programs,  recruit- 


ment and  new  member  programs,  and 
other  related  matters.  In  addition,  the 
office  works  with  four  governing/pro- 
gramming councils,  three  Greek  affdiat- 
ed  honor  societies,  and  the  Camp 
Dreamcatcher  fiind-raiser.  The  office 
also  is  responsible  for  the  registration 
and  coordination  of  all  209  recognized 
student  clubs  and  organizations.  In  con- 
junction with  the  Student  Leadership 
Project  Team,  the  office  creates  and 
implements  a  multidimensional  smdent 
leadership  program.  See  the  office's  web 
site  at  www.wcupa.edu/stu/greek.  The 
Office  of  Greek  Life  and  Student 
Organizations  is  located  in  238  Sykes 
Student  Union,  610-436-2117. 

Health  Services 

The  University  Health  Center  is  staffed 
by  a  medical  and  health  education  team 
of  physicians  and  nurses  who  are  avail- 
able to  meet  first-aid  needs  and  to  treat 
acute  illnesses  and  minor  surgical  condi- 
tions. Gynecological  services,  including 
testing  for  pregnancy  and  sexually  trans- 
mitted diseases,  contraceptive  counsel- 
ing, and  routine  e.xaminations,  are  also 
available.  Nutritional  services,  HIV  test- 
ing, and  health/wellness  education  are 
also  offered  through  the  Health  Center. 
The  Universit)'  is  not  responsible  for  any 
additional  medical.  X-ray,  or  surgical 
services  or  hospitalization. 

All  smdents  are  required  to  pay  a  health 
sen,ace  fee  at  the  beginning  of  each 
semester,  the  fee  covers  all  office  visits. 
Many  medications  are  available  at  a 
nominal  fee.  Allergy  injections  also  are 
given  at  the  Health  Center. 

The  University  requires  that  all  students 
have  a  medical  history  form,  along  with 
verification  of  a  current  ph)'sical  examina- 
tion, on  file  in  the  Health  Center.  Certain 
prematriculation  immunizations  are  also 
required.  Forms  for  these  requirements  are 
mailed  to  students  prior  to  registration. 

The  University  Health  Center  is  located 
on  the  second  floor  of  Wayne  Hall, 
610-436-2509.  Services  are  available  to 
currently  enrolled  students  only.  When 
school  is  in  session,  the  Health  Center 
is  open  Monday  through  Friday  from  8 
a.m.  to  8  p.m.  and  Saturdays  from  10 
a.m.  to  6  p.m.  during  fall  and  spring 
semesters.  Summer  hours  are  provided 
weekdays  only  from  8  a.m.  to  4  p.m.  All 
visits  are  by  appointment. 

Insurance  Programs 

Because  of  the  unpredictable  nature  of 
medical  and  surgical  emergencies,  all 


students  are  encouraged  to  be  covered 
by  a  health  insurance  program.  Student 
insurance  plans  are  offered  through  the 
Health  Center.  Information  on  the 
insurance  program  is  mailed  to  students 
prior  to  registration  or  may  be  obtained 
from  the  University  Health  Center. 

Insurance  requirements  may  be  mandat- 
ed by  specific  departments  and/or  ath- 
letic programs.  Refer  to  the  appropriate 
section  in  the  catalog  for  further  infor- 
mation on  these  requirements. 
Liability  Insurance  Requirement  for 
Students  in  Nursing.  See  the  section 
describing  the  Department  of  Nursing. 

Student  Physical  Examinations 

A  physical  examination  is  required  tor  all 
entering  and  transfer  students.  The 
University  Health  Center  reserves  the 
right  to  request  an  annual  physical  exam- 
ination by  the  family  physician  for  any 
student  suffering  from  a  chronic  illness. 

No  student  will  be  permitted  to  register 
for  classes  until  a  histor)'  and  physical 
examination  report  is  completed  and 
filed.  These  forms  are  available  at  the 
University  Health  Center  and  are 
mailed  to  students  prior  to  registration. 

Communicable  Diseases 

A  current  report  of  a  negative  tuberculin 
test  or  chest  X-ray  showing  no  active 
mberculosis  (TB)  is  mandated  by  the 
Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education 
for  all  senior  student  teachers  and  all 
junior  or  sophomore  students  participat- 
ing in  a  field  experience  in  the  public 
schools.  The  TB  test  can  be  given  at  the 
Health  Center  for  a  nominal  charge. 

AH  students  born  after  1957  must  show 
evidence  of  immunization  involving  other 
communicable  diseases  and  booster  shots 
against  measles.  Highly  recommended 
vaccines  include  a  series  of  three  Hepatitis 
B  injections,  and  a  single  injection  of 
meningococcal  vaccine.  The  American 
College  Health  Association  recommends 
that  all  college  students  under  the  age  of 
30  consider  getting  vaccinated  against 
meningococcal  disease.  Pennsylvania  state 
law  requires  the  meningococcal  vaccine  for 
all  students  li\'ing  in  University  housing. 
Guidelines  published  by  the  Centers  for 
Disease  Control  wiU  be  adhered  to  and 
revised  as  appropriate  to  protect  the  health 
of  those  in  the  Universit}'  communit)'. 

Because  of  the  potential  for  transmission 
of  several  infectious  diseases,  all  students 
utilizing  injectable  medicines  wiU  be 
required  to  show  evidence  of  satisfactory 
disposal  of  needles  and  syringes.  The 


Student  Affairs 


Health  Center  will  provide  free  disposal 
of  medical  waste. 

Judicial  Affairs  and  Community 
Development 

West  Chester  University's  judicial  system 
is  the  responsibility  of  the  Office  of  the 
Dean  of  Students  and  is  overseen  by  the 
diretor  ot  Judicial  Affairs  and  Commu- 
nity Development.  In  accordance  with 
the  Universit\''s  Mission  and  Values 
Statements,  the  University'  is  committed 
to  providing  a  sound  educational  envi- 
ronment for  intellectual  pursuits. 

Accordingly,  a  set  of  behavioral  stan- 
dards has  been  created  to  maintain  a 
safe  and  secure  campus  environment. 
The  West  Chester  University  Student 
Code  of  Conduct,  found  in  Section  III 
of  the  Ram's  Eye  View,  translates  those 
acts  that  constitute  unacceptable  behav- 
ior for  the  Universit}''s  students  and  stu- 
dent organizations.  Students  and  stu- 
dent organizations  accept  the  responsi- 
bility to  abide  by  all  University  rules  and 
regulations.  In  addition  to  these  rules 
and  regulations,  students  are  expected  to 
obey  federal,  state,  and  local  laws.  The 
University,  for  educational  purposes,  has 
the  right  to  review  any  action  taken  b)' 
local  law  enforcement  agencies  regard- 
ing students.  If  off-campus  behavior 
affects  the  University  in  an)'  wav,  a  stu- 
dent may  be  charged  with  a  violation  of 
the  West  Chester  University  Student 
Code  of  Conduct.  Proven  failure  to 
meet  this  obligation  will  justify  appro- 
priate disciplinary  action. 
As  members  of  the  University  commu- 
nity, students  have  the  right: 

•  To  participate  in  all  activities  of  the 
University,  free  from  any  form  of 
harassment  or  discrimination; 

•  To  personal  privacy  except  otherwise 
provided  by  the  law;  and 

•  To  procedural  due  process  in  all 
action  arising  from  violations  of 
University  regulations. 

Along  with  those  rights,  students  have 
the  responsibilit}-: 

•  To  respect  the  rights  and  property  of 
others 

•  To  become  fiilly  acquainted  with  the 
published  Universit)'  regulations  and 
to  comply  with  them;  and 

•  To  recognize  that  their  actions  reflect 
on  the  entire  University  community. 

The  Office  for  Judicial  Affairs  and 
Community  Development  also  works 
collaboratively  with  administrators,  fac- 
ulty, staff,  and  student  leaders  to  devel- 
op educational  programs  designed  to 


promote  community  building  activities, 
consistent  with  the  West  Chester 
University  Values  Statement.  Such 
efforts  have  a  special  emphasis  on  civili- 
ty, respect  for  individuals,  teamwork, 
conflict  resolution,  and  academic 
integrit}'.  The  Office  for  Judicial  Affairs 
and  Community  Development  is  located 
in  238  Sykes  Union,  610-436-3511. 

Mail  Service 

The  University  has  an  on-campus  post 
office  located  on  the  second  floor  of 
Lawrence  Center.  Commuting  students 
requesting  a  mail  box  must  show  a  need 
for  the  box  by  applying  to  Off-Campus 
and  Commuter  Services,  located  in  il6 
Sykes  Student  Union,  610-436-2984, 
which  will  approve  or  disapprove  the 
request  depending  on  the  availability  of 
a  Umited  number  of  mail  bo.xes  and  the 
demonstrated  lack  of  alternative  mail 
receipt  options  for  the  student.  Resident 
students  receive  their  mail  at  their  resi- 
dence halls.  To  ensure  prompt  delivery, 
mail  sent  to  North  Campus  resident  stu- 
dents should  show  the  student's  name, 
room  number,  the  name  of  the  residence 
hall,  and  the  University's  name  and 
address  (West  Chester  University,  West 
Chester,  PA  19383).  Mail  sent  to  South 
Campus  residence  students  should  show 
the  student's  name,  839  South  Campus 
Drive,  Box#,  West  Chester,  PA  19382 
(do  not  include  WCU  in  the  South 
Campus  address). 

Multicultural  Affairs 

The  Office  of  Multicultural  Affairs  is 
dedicated  to  the  development  of  multi- 
cultural sensitivity,  understanding,  and 
appreciation  of  diversity  among  stu- 
dents. The  office  develops  and  imple- 
ments comprehensive  programs  aimed  at 
addressing  the  needs  and  concerns  of 
the  multicultural  student.  The  staff  of 
the  Office  of  Multicultural  Affairs  also 
serve  as  consultants  to  other  University 
offices  regarding  multicultural  students 
and  aids  in  projects  focused  on  improv- 
ing the  general  campus  climate.  The 
office  is  located  in  238  Sykes  Student 
Union,  610-436-3273. 

New  Student  Programs 

The  Office  of  New  Student  Programs 
coordinates  orientation  and  outreach 
programs  for  freshman  and  transfer  stu- 
dents. Orientation  programs  include 
summer,  fall,  and  January  sessions  as 
well  as  sessions  for  transfer  students. 


West  Chester's  orientation  programs  are 
designed  to  introduce  new  students  to 
the  University  and  acquaint  them  with 
the  academic,  student  services,  and 
social  aspects  of  college  life.  Attendance 
at  orientation  is  required. 
Outreach  efforts  include  participation  in 
Fall  Welcome  Back  activities,  coordina- 
tion of  the  Learning  Communities 
Project,  and  Family  Day.  A  variety  of 
social  and  educational  programs  are 
offered  during  the  first  year  to  aid  new 
students  in  making  a  successfiil  transi- 
tion to  West  Chester  Universit}'. 
The  Office  of  New  Student  Programs  is 
located  in  236  Sykes  Student  Union, 
610-436-3305.  ' 

Public  Safety 

West  Chester  University  is  concerned 

about  the  safety  and  welfare  of  all  cam- 
pus members  and  is  committed  to  pro- 
viding a  safe  and  secure  environment. 
Campus  security  is  the  responsibility  of 
the  University's  Department  of  Public 
Safet)',  located  in  the  Peoples  Building 
at  the  corner  of  Church  Street  and 
University  Avenue. 

Because  no  campus  is  isolated  from 
crime,  the  University  has  developed  a 
series  of  policies  and  procedures  to  ensure 
that  every  possible  precautionary  measure 
is  taken  to  protect  members  of  the 
Universit)'  communit)'  while  thev  are  on 
campus.  Public  Safet)'  provides  a  "Safe 
Walk"  program  to  escort  individuals  to 
and  from  campus  locations.  Van  trans- 
portation is  also  available  for  the  physical- 
ly challenged.  In  addition,  Public  Safet)- 
provides  assistance  for  those  needing  help 
in  jump-starting  a  car  or  those  who  have 
locked  themselves  out  of  their  vehicle. 

A  fiiU  explanation  of  the  Universit)''s  secu- 
rity policies  and  procedures,  as  well  as 
additional  pertinent  information,  appears 
in  a  publication  called  'Your  Safety  Is  Our 
Concern,"  which  is  available  from  the 
Office  of  Admissions,  the  Department  of 
Public  Safety,  and  the  Public  Safety  web 
site:  www.wcupa.edu/_Information/ 
AFA/publicsafety/. 

Vehicle  Registration 

/Ul  University  parking  lots  require  a  cur- 
rent Uniyersit\'  parking  permit  or  pass  to 
be  displayed  on  all  vehicles.  All  employ- 
ees, eligible  students,  and  visitors  desiring 
to  use  designated  parking  lots  must  regis- 
ter their  vehicle  with  the  Department  of 
Public  Safet)'  Parking  Services  Office  and 
purchase/obtain  a  parking  permit.  Parking 
permits  are  nonrefundable  and  may  only 


Student  Aftairs 


be  used  by  the  registered  purchaser. 
Permits  are  not  transferable  between  indi- 
viduals nor  ma)'  they  be  resold.  All  West 
Chester  Universit}'  parking  pennits  are 
the  property  of  West  Chester  University. 
Resident  students  with  63  credits  or 
more  and  commuter  students  with  25 
credits  or  more  are  eligible  to  purchase  a 
North  Campus  permit.  Residents  ot  the 
South  Campus  apartments  are  eligible  to 
purchase  a  permit  for  that  area  only. 
Freshman  resident  students  are  not  per- 
mitted to  bring  cars  to  campus.  A  fresh- 
man is  defined  as  one  having  earned 
fewer  than  25  credits  prior  to  the  fall 
semester.  Other  students  must  park  at 
South  Campus  Q_and  R  lots.  Shuttle 
bus  service  is  provided  between  South 
and  North  campuses.  The  annual  regis- 
tration fee  is  established  by  the  Council 
of  Trustees  upon  recommendation  of  the 
Parking  Committee  and  the  approval  of 
the  president.  Specific  registration  pro- 
cedures wlU  be  announced  yearly. 
A  valid  student  ID,  nonsuspended  opera- 
tor's license,  and  vehicle  registration  card 
must  be  presented  at  the  time  the  vehicle 
is  registered.  The  parking  permit  should 
be  placed  in  the  vehicle  immediatelv. 
Instructions  on  placement  are  on  the 
reverse  side  ot  the  permit.  Mutilated  or 
defaced  parking  permits  must  be 
replaced.  Please  contact  the  Department 
of  Public  Safet)'  Parking  Services  Office 
for  the  current  cost.  The  operation  and 
registration  of  a  vehicle  must  conform  to 
Commonwealth  vehicle  law  and 
University  regulations.  For  complete 
information  regarding  motor  vehicles  and 
registration,  refer  to  the  A-Iotor  Vehicle 
Regulations  pamphlet  available  at  the 
Public  Safet)'  Office  and  the  Public 
Safety  web  site  at  www.wcupa.edu/ 
_Information/AFA/publicsafety/. 
Any  change  in  the  vehicle  registration 
number  must  be  reported  to  the  Depart- 
ment of  Pubhc  Safetv  immediatelv. 
Persons  in  violation  of  the  parking  rules 
and  regulations  are  subject  to  ticketing 
and  towing. 

Parking  fines  are  assessed  at  SIO  up  to 
$40  depending  on  the  violation.  The 
current  towing  charge  is  $60  plus  the  fee 
for  the  violation. 

Service  Learning  and  Volunteer 
Programs 

The  Office  of  Service  Learning  and 
Volunteer  Programs  promotes  communi- 
ty service  within  academic  courses  and  as 
cocurricular  activities.  The  office  provides 
assistance  to  facultv  who  use  communitv' 


service  as  a  teaching  method  and  to  stu- 
dents in  need  of  service  placements.  In 
addition,  the  office  works  directly  with 
more  than  90  local  agencies  providing 
volunteer  opportunities  to  WCU  stu- 
dents. Throughout  the  vear  special  events 
are  planned,  and  the  entire  campus  is 
imdted  to  participate.  West  Chester 
University  is  a  member  of  Pennsylvania 
Campus  Compact.  The  Office  of  Service 
Learning  and  Volunteer  Programs  is 
open  from  August  -  May  and  is  located 
in  B-19  Killinger  HaU,  610-436-3379. 

Student  Services,  Incorporated  (SSI) 

Student  Services,  Incorporated  (SSI)  is  a 
not-for-profit  organization  primarily 
designed  to  serve  the  students  of  West 
Chester  Universitv.  The  objective  of  this 
corporation  is  to  initiate,  regulate,  and 
operate  the  financial  matters  of  all  cocur- 
ricular student  activities.  Such  activities 
include  the  management  of  the  campus 
bookstore,  student  pubhcations,  student 
organizations,  check  cashing/ticket  ser- 
vice, student  programming,  intercolle- 
giate athletics,  and  the  graduate  smdent 
association. 

In  fiscal  matters  and  in  various  poUcy- 
making  areas,  the  final  authority  rests 
with  the  president  of  the  Universitv'. 

The  SSI  Business  Office,  610-436-2955, 
is  located  in  259  Sykes  Student  Union. 

Sykes  Union  Building 

The  Earl  F.  Sykes  Union  first  opened  in 
1975  as  the  communit\-  center  for  West 
Chester  University.  Major  renovations 
and  a  building  expansion  was  completed 
in  1995  providing  students  with  a  new 
102,000-square-foot  facility. 
Sykes  Union,  as  a  facility  and  an  opera- 
tion, is  designed  to  encourage  all  mem- 
bers of  the  campus  community  to  partici- 
pate in  a  wide  variety  of  culmral,  social, 
educational,  and  recreational  programs. 
The  multipurpose  building  features  a 
350-seat  theater,  a  fitness  center,  a  book- 
store, and  an  amusement  game  room,  all 
on  the  ground  floor.  The  first  floor  offers 
a  dining  area  with  seating  for  350,  an 
outdoor  terrace,  and  a  large  food  servery. 
Also  included  on  the  first  floor  is  a 
5,000-square-foot  multipurpose  room 
designed  for  dances,  concerts,  banquets, 
and  lectures,  as  well  as  the  union  admin- 
istrative offices  and  Information  Center. 

The  second  floor  houses  the  Student 
Affairs  offices  of  the  Vice  President,  Dean 
of  Students,  Assistant  Vice  President, 
Residence  Life  and  Housing,  Off- 
Campus  and  Commuter  Services,  New 


Student  Programs,  Judicial  Affairs  and 
Communitv'  Development,  Multicultural 
Affairs,  and  Greek  Life  and  Smdent 
Organizations.  The  Smdent  Services,  Inc. 
Business  Office  and  the  departments  of 
Student  Programming  and  Activities, 
along  with  smdent  clubs  and  organiza- 
tions, are  also  located  on  the  second  floor. 

The  third  floor  penthouse  features  a  22- 
unit  computer  lab,  the  Frederick  Douglass 
study  lounge,  and  seminar  space.  Sykes 
Union  also  houses  17  meeting  rooms 
accommodating  groups  fi'om  five  to  500. 

For  information  concerning  Sykes 
Union  please  call  the  Information 
Center  at  610-436-3360/2984. 

Women's  Center 

The  Women's  Center  addresses  the  spe- 
cial concerns  particular  to  women,  includ- 
ing the  issues  facing  women  students  who 
enter  the  University  from  high  school  or 
remrn  to  college  after  time  at  home  or  in 
the  job  world.  Located  in  LawTence 
Center  on  the  second  floor,  the  Women's 
Center  provides  a  lounge  area  for  conver- 
sation, as  well  as  study,  peer  advising, 
support  for  personal  and  professional 
issues,  and  special  interest  programs  (lec- 
tures, films,  concerts,  etc.).  For  more 
information,  including  opportunities  for 
student  volunteers,  call  610-436-2122. 

Activities 

Student  Activities  on  Campus 

Smdent  activities  at  West  Chester 
University'  encompass  a  wide  range  of  cul- 
tural, social,  educational,  and  recreational 
programs  for  a  diverse  smdent  population. 

TTie  departments  of  Cocurricular 
Programs  and  Campus  Activities,  under 
the  auspices  of  Student  Services,  Inc.,  take 
a  leadership  role  in  organizing  and  spon- 
soring joint  or  individual  programs  as  part 
of  their  mission.  One  major  role  centers 
on  advisory  relationships  with  the  Smdent 
Activities  Council,  the  major  smdent  pro- 
gramming organization  on  campus. 
Current  movies,  area  band  performances, 
national  cultural  entertainment  acts,  lec- 
tures (with  a  special  emphasis  on  the 
"Leadership,  Unit)',  and  Volunteerism, 
and  Image  Maker"  -  LUVIM  -  pro- 
grams), variety  lunchtime  entertainment, 
and  special  events  such  as  "Welcome 
Back"  activities  in  September  are  all  spon- 
sored by  Campus  Activities  and  the 
Smdent  Activities  Council.  Homecoming, 
Family  Day,  Spring  Weekend,  and  major 
concerts  are  additional  special  University 
events  that  unite  many  segments  of  the 


Student  Affairs 


campus.  The  Cocurricular  Programs  and 
Campus  Activities  departments  are  locat- 
ed in  236  Svkes  Student  Union,  610-436- 
2983  or  436-3037. 
Students  can  become  a  vital  force  on 
campus  through  participation  and 
involvement  in  student  organizations  and 
activities.  AH  smdents  have  an  opportuni- 
ty to  attend  campus  events  and/or  join  an 
organization  that  meets  their  individual 
needs.  Leadership  roles  are  always  avail- 
able; these  opportunities  to  be  active  can 
become  one  of  the  more  enriching  experi- 
ences in  student  life.  Becoming  involved 
builds  individual  integrity  and  a  sense  of 
community — two  desirable  qualities  in  all 
aspects  of  life.  Student  activities  and  orga- 
nizations are  the  lifeblood  ot  any  campus 
environment,  and  West  Chester  Univer- 
sity has  many  such  opportunities. 

Student  Organizations 

Each  October,  an  updated  "Directory  of 
Student  Organizations'"  is  printed  that 
includes  the  names,  addresses,  and  tele- 
phone numbers  of  all  presidents  and 
advisers  of  more  than  200  campus  student 
organizations.  For  a  comprehensive 
description  of  WCU  student  organiza- 
tions, refer  to  the  Ram'i  Eye  View  Student 
Handbook,  or  contact  the  Office  for  Greek 
Life  and  Student  Organizations,  238 
Sykes  Student  Union,  610-436-2117. 
The  following  is  the  official  list  ot  all  stu- 
dent organizations  that  were  registered 
during  the  2002-2003  academic  year: 

Student  Governing/Campus 
Programming  Organizations 

Graduate  Student  Association 
Off-Campus  and  Commuter  Association 
Residence  Hall  Association 
Student  Activities  Council 
Student  Government  Association 
Sykes  Union  Advisory  Board 

Academic/Professional  Organizations 

Accounting  Society 

Alchemist  Club 

Anderson  Mathematics  Club 

Anthropolog}'  Club  of  WCU 

Art  Association 

Association  for  Childhood  Education 

International 
Athletic  Training  Club 
Contemporary  Dance  Company 
Council  for  Exceptional 

Children/Special  Education 
Criminal  Justice  Association-Lambda 

Alpha  Epsilon 
Dance  Production  Workshop 
Darlington  Biological  Society 
Economics  and  Finance  SocieU' 
English  Club 
English  Graduate  Student  Association 


Forensics 

French  Club 

Genetics/Ethics  Club 

Geography  Club 

German  Club 

Graduate  Social  Work  Student 

Association 
History  Club 

Honors  Student  Association 
Institute  of  Management  Accountants 
Italian  Club 
Linguistics  Club 
National  Association  of  Black 

Accountants 
National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English 
National  Student  Speech,  Hearing  and 

Language  Association 
Philosophy  Club 
Political  Science  Club 
Pre-Law  Society 
Psychology  Club 
Russian  Club 
Social  Work  Club 
Society  of  Physics  Students 
Sociology  Club-Delta  Alpha  Tau 
Spanish  Club 

Student  Dietetic  Association 
Student  Nurses'  Association  of 

Pennsylvania  (SNAP) 
University  Theatre 
West  Chester  Association  for  the 

Education  of  Young  Children 
WCU  Education  Association/Student 

PSEA,  NEA 
Women  in  Communications 
Women  in  Science 

Special  Interest  Organizations 

Anime  Club 

Asian  American  Association 

Association  for  Disability  Awareness 

(ADA) 
Black  Men  United 
Black  Student  Union 
Caribbean  Island  Association 
Chess  Club 
College  Democrats 
College  Republicans 
Dance  Team 
Darkness  Before  the  Light  Role-Plaving 

Club 
EARTH  (Environmental  Association 

for  Repairing  the  Habitat) 
Feminist  Majority  Alliance 
HiUel  Jewish  Student  Union 
Homecoming 
Human  Rights  Coalition,  Amnesty 

International 
INDU-Indo-American  Association 
International  Student  Organization 
LASO-Latino  American  Student 

Organization 
LEAD-Leadership,  Empowerment,  and 

Development 
LGBTA-Lesbian,  Gay,  Bisexual 

Transgendered  Association 


Recreation  and  Leisure  Programs 

Sistahs  United 

Students  for  Life 

Swing  Dance  Club 

Wiccan  Society 

Women's  Center  Club 

Religious  Organizations 

Campus  Bible  Fellowship 

Campus  Crusade  for  Christ/Christian 

Impact 
Catholic  Newman  Student  Association/ 

Center 
Chosen  Generation  Outreach  Ministries 
Covenant  Campus  Fellowship 
CrossSeekers 

Gospel  Choir-Praise  Project 
HiUel  Jewish  Student  LTnion 
Inter- Varsity  Christian  Fellowship 
Jewish  Heritage  Programs 
Latter  Day  Saints  Student  Association 
Lutheran  Student  Association 
MusUm  Student  Association 
University  Christian  Fellowship 
Young  Life 

Service  Organizations 

The  Abbe  Society 

Alpha  Phi  Omega 

Best  Buddies 

Circle  K  Club 

Emergency  Medical  Services 

Friars'  Society 

Habitat  for  Humanity 

Phi  Sigma  Pi 

Rotaract 

University  Ambassadors 

Greek  Letter  Organizations 
Governing  Councils 

Black  and  Latino  Greek  Council 
Interfraternity  Council 
Inter-Greek  Council 
Panhellenic  Council 

Honoraries 

Gamma  Sigma  Alpha 
Order  of  Omega 
Rho  Lambda 

Fratemiries 

Beta  Theta  Pi 
Delta  Chi 
Kappa  Alpha  Psi 
Kappa  Delta  Rho 
Lambda  Theta  Phi 
Omega  Psi  Phi 
Phi  Beta  Sigma 
Phi  Kappa  Sigma 
Pi  Kappa  Phi 
Sigma  Alpha  Epsilon 
Sigma  Pi 

Sigma  Phi  Epsilon 
Tau  Kappa  Epsilon 
Theta  Chi 

Sororities 

Alpha  Kappa  Alpha 


Student  Affairs 


Alpha  Phi 

Alpha  Sigma  Tau 
Alpha  Xi  Delta 
Chi  Upsilon  Sigma 
Delta  Phi  Epsilon 
Delta  Sigma  Theta 
Delta  Zeta 
PhiMu 

Phi  Sigma  Sigma 
Sigma  Gamma  Rho 
Zeta  Phi  Beta 
Zeta  Tau  Alpha 

Publications  and  Media  Organizations 

Daedalus 

Media  Advisor\-  Board 

The  Quad 

The  Serpentine 

WCUTV  5-West  Chester  University 

Television 
WCUR-West  Chester  Universit\'  Radio 

Sports  Clubs 

Equestrian 

Fencing 

Ice  Hockey 

RoUer  Hockey 

Rugby-Men 

Rugby-Women 

Shotokan  Karate 

Skiing 

Sports  Club  Council 

Volleyball-Men 

Water  Polo-Women 

Musical  Organizations 

Brass  Ensemble 
Chamber  Choir 
Collegium  Musicum 
Concert  Band 
Concert  Choir 
Criterions  Jazz  Ensemble 
Flute  Ensemble 
Guitar  Ensemble 
Kappa  Kappa  Psi 
Marching  Band-"Golden  Rams" 
Mastervvorks  Chorus 
Men's  Chorus 

Music  Educator's  National  Conference- 
Chapter  21  (PCMEA) 
Opera  Theatre  Ensemble 
Penns}'lvania  Music  Teachers  Association 
Percussion  Ensemble 
Phi  Mu  Alpha  Sinfonia 
Saxophone  Ensemble 
Sigma  Alpha  Iota 
Symphonic  Band 
Symphony  Orchestra 
Tau  Beta  Sigma 
Universit)'  Chorale 
Wind  Ensemble 
Women's  Choir 

Honor  Societies 

Communication  Studies-Pi  Kappa  Delta 
Communications-Lambda  Pi  Eta 
Counseling-Chi  Sigma  Iota 


Criminal  Justice— Sigma  Tau  Omicron 
Economics-Omicron  Delta  Epsilon 
Education-Delta  Kappa  Gamma 
Education-Kappa  Delta  Pi 
Education-Phi  Delta  Kappa 
Educational  Services-Chi  Alpha  Epsilon 
English-Sigma  Tau  Delta 
Foreign  Languages-Alpha  Mu  Gamma 
Geographv-Gamma  Theta  Upsilon 
Geolog\'-Sigma  Gamma  Epsilon 
Histor\'-Phi  Alpha  Theta 
Kinesiolog}'-Phi  Epsilon  Kappa 
Leadership-Omicron  Delta  Kappa 
Literac)-  (Reading)-Alpha  Upsilon  Alpha 
Mathematical  Sciences-Pi  Mu  EpsUon 
Music-Pi  Kappa  Lambda 
Nursing-Sigma  Theta  Tau 
PhUosophy-Phi  Sigma  Tau 
Physics-Sigm.a  Pi  Sigma 
PoUtical  Science-Pi  Sigma  Alpha 
Psvcholog\'-Psi  Chi 
Social  Science— Pi  Gamma  Mu 
Social  Work-Phi  Alpha 
Sociolog}-Alpha  Kappa  Delta 
Theater  Arts-Alpha  Psi  Omega 

Recreation  and  Leisure  Programs 

The  Office  of  Recreation  and  Leisure 
Programs  provides  recreational  and 
leisure-time  activities  for  the  University 
communit)'. 

Intramural  Sports  affords  students  the 
opportunity  to  participate  in  individual  or 
team  competitive  activities.  The  Intra- 
mural Sports  program  promotes  health, 
weUness,  and  physical  fitness,  as  well  as 
encourages  the  worthy  use  of  leisure  time. 
Regardless  of  abilit)'  level,  even-  individual 
can  experience  successflil  participation  in 
a  variety'  of  individual  or  team  athletic 
events  including  flag  football,  basketball, 
soccer,  floor  hockey,  and  softball. 
For  students  who  enjoy  organized  sports 
other  than  varsity  athletics.  Sports  Club 
options  are  provided  for  those  who  are 
either  skilled  athleticall}'  or  interested  in 
participating  in  a  club  sport  for  enjoy- 
ment. Becoming  a  member  of  a  club  pro- 
vides opportunities  for  instruction,  social- 
ization, competition,  and  fun. 
Kinesiolog)'  majors  receive  a  sports  credit 
through  participation  in  a  club  program. 
Currently,  West  Chester  University  has 
10  Sports  Clubs:  equestrian,  fencing,  ice 
hockey,  shotokan  karate,  men's  rugbw 
women's  rugby,  skiing,  men's  volleyball, 
women's  water  polo,  and  roller  hockey. 
Outdoor  recreational  opportunities  are 
conducted  through  the  Outdoor 
Adventure  Program  which  offers  a  vari- 
ety of  different  trips  and  one-day  activi- 
ties for  students  throughout  die  year. 
Examples  include  canoeing,  rafting,  ski- 


ing, camping,  and  spelunking  trips;  ice 
skating  nights;  hiking;  and  horseback  rid- 
ing. In  addition  to  scheduling  trips,  the 
Outdoor  Adventure  Program  rents  recre- 
ation equipment  such  as  backpacking 
equipment,  tents,  sleeping  bags,  camping 
equipment,  mountain  bikes,  snow  boards, 
and  cross-countr)'  skis/boots. 
For  students  who  do  not  wish  to  partici- 
pate in  a  formal  recreational  program. 
Open  Recreation  provides  days,  times, 
and  facilities  in  which  students  may  par- 
ticipate in  an  informal  recreational  activ- 
ity. The  semester  calendar  hsts  sched- 
uled days  and  times  for  utiUzing  swim- 
ming pools,  weight  rooms,  indoor/out- 
door tracks,  outdoor  tennis  courts,  and 
basketball  g}-mnasiums. 
Special  Events  include  one-dav  programs 
such  as  skating  nights,  racquetball  nights, 
or  special  tournaments  such  as  the  Schick 
Basketball  Super  Hoops  Tournament. 
The  Aerobics  program  is  one  of  our  most 
popular  acti\'ities  with  over  800  students, 
faculty,  and  staft'  participating  in  30  dif- 
ferent aerobic  sessions.  The  program  pro- 
vides regidar  aerobics,  aerostep,  car- 
diostep,  cardio-kickboxing,  slide  step,  step 
and  sculpt,  and  cross-training  sessions. 
Registration  is  required  for  participation. 
The  Fitness  Center  in  Sykes  Student 
Union  is  designed  to  give  students  a 
professional  setting  tor  exercise  and 
weight  training.  The  Sykes  Fitness 
Center  is  equipped  with  cardiovascular 
equipment,  pin-selectorized  equipment, 
and  Olympic  free  weights.  The  center 
also  includes  an  aerobics  studio  where  aU 
the  aerobics  sessions  are  held.  A  valid 
student  ID  is  required  for  admission  to 
the  center,  and  an  orientation  session  is 
also  required  for  all  participants. 
For  more  information  on  any  program 
pro\'ided  by  the  Office  of  Recreation 
and  Leisure  Programs,  call  610-436- 
2131  or  436-3088,  or  stop  by  Room  133 
Ehinger  Gymnasium. 

Intercollegiate  Athletic  Program 

West  Chester  University's  Department 
of  Athletics  aftirms  academic  excellence 
as  the  cornerstone  in  the  Ufe  of  the  stu- 
dent-athlete, placing  the  highest  priority 
on  the  overall  quaht}-  of  the  educational 
experience.  By  strengthening  the  inte- 
gration of  athletic  program  objectives 
with  academic  and  developmental  goals, 
athletics  support  the  Universit)'s  mis- 
sion to  meet  student  needs  and  interests. 
Participation  in  athletics  can  serve  to 
strengthen  the  student's  integrity,  sense 


Academic  Affairs — Special  Programs  and  Services 


of  fairness,  respect  for  others,  and  dedi- 
cation to  goals.  It  also  can  provide  the 
opportunity  for  enhancing  interpersonal 
leadership  skills.  Both  men  and  women 
can  choose  from  a  broad  variety  of  team 
and  individual  sports.  In  addition,  acad- 
emic support  services  are  available  for 
student-athletes,  underscoring  the  com- 
mitment to  scholastic  success. 
The  women's  intercollegiate  athletic  pro- 
grams include  basketball,  cross  country, 
field  hockey,  golf,  indoor  track,  lacrosse, 
soccer,  Softball,  swimming  and  diving, 
tennis,  outdoor  track  and  field,  and  vol- 
leyball. The  men's  intercollegiate  athletic 
programs  include  baseball,  basketball, 
cross  country,  football,  golf,  indoor  track, 
soccer,  swimming  and  diving,  tennis,  and 
outdoor  track  and  field. 
West  Chester  University  is  a  Division  II 
member  of  the  National  Collegiate 
Athletic  Association  (NCAA),  the 
Eastern  College  Athletic  Conference, 
and  the  Pennsylvania  State  Athletic 
Conference.  The  Division  I  field  hockey 
program  competes  in  the  Atlantic  10. 
The  Department  of  Athletics  is  located 
in  the  Russell  L.  Sturzebecker  Health 


Sciences  Center  on  South  Campus, 
which  has  won  national  acclaim  for  the 
quahty  and  extent  of  its  teaching,  per- 
formance, and  research  facilities.  Of 
special  note  is  the  one-acre  gymnasium 
(which  can  be  divided  into  six  smaller, 
pneumatically  sealed  gyms),  a  natatori- 
um  with  two  fiiU-size  swimming  pools 
connected  by  a  diving  well,  20  lecture 
rooms,  two  dance  studios,  a  multipur- 
pose room,  a  human  performance  labo- 
ratory, an  environmental  health  labora- 
tory, and  two  physical  therapy  rooms. 
This  complex  is  surrounded  by  John  A. 
Farrell  Football  Stadium  and  its  new 
state-of-the-art  lighting  system;  Serpico 
Baseball  Stadium;  and  the  brand-new 
South  Campus  Softball  Complex,  prac- 
tice and  playing  fields,  tennis  courts,  and 
weight  rooms. 

Alumni  Association 

The  West  Chester  University  Alumni 
Association  is  an  organization  of  more 
than  58,000  graduates  of  the  University. 
The  purpose  of  the  Alumni  Association 
is  to  promote  the  interests  of  West 
Chester  University  in  all  areas  of  acade- 
mic, cultural,  and  social  needs,  to 


strengthen  the  Alumni  Association 
through  a  strong  network  of  graduates, 
and  to  increase  the  awareness  of  alumni 
to  the  University's  needs. 
The  Alumni  Association  sponsors  five 
major  events  on  campus  each  year: 
Welcome  to  West  Chester  Day  and 
Homecoming  in  the  faU,  Alumni 
Weekend  in  the  spring,  and  Senior  Days 
in  December  and  May.  The  West  Chester 
University  Magazine,  published  three 
times  each  year,  incorporates  RAM- 
PARTS, providing  aU  alumni  with 
information  on  their  classmates  and 
events  of  interest. 

The  Alumni  Association  also  offers  pro- 
gramming and  services  to  students 
through  its  efforts  with  admissions 
recruiting,  career  mentoring,  and  net- 
working. The  on-campus  University 
Ambassadors  group  works  with  current 
matriculating  students  to  build  ties  with 
the  University  that  will  continue  when 
these  students  become  alumni.  In  turn, 
this  group  also  keeps  alumni  updated  on 
events  and  news  of  their  alma  mater. 


Academic  Affairs 


West  Chester  University's  undergraduate 
programs  include  teaching  certification 
programs,  local  certificate  programs,  and 
programs  of  study  leading  to  the  bache- 
lor of  arts,  bachelor  of  fine  arts,  bachelor 
of  music,  bachelor  of  science  in  educa- 
tion, bachelor  of  science,  bachelor  of  sci- 
ence in  nursing,  and  bachelor  ot  social 
work.  A  complete  list  of  undergraduate 
degree  programs  appears  on  page  55. 
Programs  of  study  at  the  graduate  level 
are  also  available.  These  are  listed  on 
page  35  and  are  described  in  detail  in  the 
Graduate  Catalog. 

Honors  Program 

The  University  provides  to  able  students 
with  outstanding  achievements  in  schol- 
arship, community  service,  the  arts, 
and/or  leadership  the  opportunity  to  par- 
ticipate in  a  challenging  honors  program 
and  to  receive  appropriate  recognition 
when  they  complete  the  requirements. 
The  aim  of  the  honors  program  is  to 


provide  an  inviting  environment  for  aca- 
demically gifted  and  highly  motivated 
students  to  interact  and  form  a  learning 
community  of  peers,  faculty,  administra- 
tors, and  staff  that  will  challenge  and 
enrich  the  students'  college  experience. 
Grounded  in  the  liberal  arts  tradition,  the 
honors  program  seeks  cross-disciplinary 
connections  in  order  to  develop  students' 
natural  intellectual  abilities  and  to  chal- 
lenge them  to  employ  those  gifts  on 
behalf  of  the  larger  community.  For  this 
reason,  the  West  Chester  Universit)'  hon- 
ors program  considers  "honors"  more  than 
a  matter  of  strong  grades.  It  means  using 
the  gift  of  knowledge  to  be  an  active  and 
creative  problem  solver  in  both  the  cam- 
pus community  and  in  the  world.  Honors 
is  about  building  character  and  fostering  a 
commitment  of  lifelong  learning  that  can 
develop  the  leaders  of  the  21st  century. 
Membership  is  competitive  and  based  on 
attainment  and  maintenance  of  a  cumula- 
tive 3.25  grade  point  average,  regular 


enrollment  in  honors  courses,  and  service 
to  the  campus  community. 
The  program  consists  of  27  hours  of 
cross-disciplinary  core  courses  surround- 
ing the  theme  of  community  investment 
and  leadership  development  that,  along 
with  a  course  dravwn  from  mathematics  or 
science,  fidfiUs  the  University's  general 
education  requirements.  Certification  for 
honors  is  achieved  by  the  completion  of 
the  core  27  hours,  two  upper-level  honors 
seminars,  and  a  capstone  project. 
Seminars  are  special  topic  courses  that 
rotate  on  a  semester  basis  and  are  com- 
petitively selected  by  the  Honors  Council 
from  faculty  submissions.  Such  subjects 
have  included  "Leadership  in  South 
Africa,"  "Media  Ethics,"  "Family  Com- 
munication," "Vampires  in  Fiction,  Film, 
and  Folklore,"  "Peer-Assisted  Learning," 
and  "The  Mexican  Connection."  The 
capstone  project  allows  students  to  put 
theory  into  practice  by  inviting  them  to 
identify  and  investigate  a  problem  in  a 


Academic  .Aftairs — Special  Programs  and  Services 


community  business,  nonprofit  agency,  or 
research  laboratorv,  and  then  work  to 
solve  the  problem. 

The  honors  supplemental  certification 
program  option  exists  for  academically 
qualified  students  who  have  completed  a 
minimum  of  45  credits,  maintain  a  mini- 
mum GPA  of  3.25,  and  demonstrate 
active  contributions  and  service  to  the 
co-curricular  elements  of  the  campus 
community.  To  receive  the  special  hon- 
ors certificate  award,  students  need  to 
complete  a  minimum  of  12  hours  of 
honors  course  work  at  the  300/400  level 
and  demonstrate  active  contributions  and 
service  to  co-curricular  elements  of  the 
campus  community.  Generally,  a  mini- 
mum of  two  300-level  or  above  courses 
is  offered  each  semester.  These  small 
group  (10-20  students)  seminar  offerings 
are  interdisciplinaty/writing  emphasis 
and  have  no  prerequisites.  Students  may 
petition,  on  special  circumstances,  to 
substitute  an  HON  400-level  indepen- 
dent study  for  three  hours  ot  credit. 

Honors  students  who  have  successRiUy 
completed  their  first  year  in  the  program 
may  qualify  for  a  Bonner  AmeriCorps 
service-learning  scholarship.  An  educa- 
tion voucher  of  $1,000  will  be  awarded  to 
students  who  verify  300  hours  of  com- 
munity service  during  a  calendar  year. 

The  program  provides  housing  in 
Killinger  Hall  for  on-campus  residents. 
Rooms  feature  direct  connection  to  the 
University'  computer  system.  Students 
also  have  membership  in  the  Honors 
Student  Association. 

An  Honors  Council,  which  includes 
both  faculty  and  students,  sets  the  poli- 
cies of  the  program.  A  committee  of 
that  council,  working  with  the  director, 
determines  the  admission  and  retention 
of  students.  Students  completing  the  fuU 
honors  program  receive  designation  on 
their  University  transcript  and  the  right 
to  wear  a  medallion  of  achievement  at 
commencement.  Recognition  at  com- 
mencement is  based  on  the  student's 
academic  record  as  of  the  completed 
semester  prior  to  commencement. 

Further  information  about  the  honors 
program  -  requirements,  offerings,  hous- 
ing, and  the  co-curricular  activities  of  the 
Honors  Smdent  Association  -  is  available 
from  the  Honors  Program  Office,  Room 
131  Francis  Harvey  Green  Libraty,  West 
Chester  University,  West  Chester,  PA 
19383;  phone,  610-436-2996;  fax,  610- 
436-2620;  e-mail,  honors@wcupa.edu. 


International  Education 

Established  in  1973,  the  Center  for 
International  Programs  is  responsible  for 
coordinating  study  abroad  programs, 
international  faculty  exchanges,  visits  by 
foreign  scholars,  and  international  pro- 
grams for  the  campus  and  the  broader 
community.  In  addition,  the  Center  for 
International  Programs  actively  pro- 
motes development  of  an  international 
curriculum,  facilitates  internships  and 
independent  study  abroad,  and  provides 
a  variety  of  essential  services  for  approxi- 
mately 130  international  students  and 
scholars  from  more  than  60  countries. 

Students  are  encouraged  to  participate  in 
semester  or  year-long  study  abroad  pro- 
gram as  well  as  summer  study  abroad  pro- 
grams sponsored  by  West  Chester 
University.  The  Center  tor  International 
Programs  provides  numerous  study 
abroad  information  seminars  evety  semes- 
ter. The  schedule  of  seminars  is  available 
at  the  Center  for  International  Programs 
Office  in  the  Old  Libraty,  Room  101. 

Academic  Development  Program 

The  academic  development  program 
(ADP)  is  designed  to  provide  an  oppor- 
tunity for  a  college  education  at  West 
Chester  University  to  those  students 
who  do  not  meet  current  admission 
requirements  but  who  show  a  potential 
for  success  in  college.  Students  admitted 
to  the  program  are  expected  to  take 
advantage  of  the  program  components 
which  have  been  developed  to  enhance 
their  skills  in  reading,  writing,  speaking, 
mathematics,  and  critical  thinking,  as 
well  as  to  help  them  in  their  transition 
from  high  school  to  college. 

ADP  comprises  a  series  of  required  cours- 
es supplemented  by  specialized  tutoring, 
counseling,  scheduling,  and  advising. 

The  program  begins  with  an  intensive, 
six-week  session  during  the  summer 
which  smdents  must  complete.  Any 
developmental  course  work  taken  during 
this  time  is  credit-bearing,  but  these  cred- 
its are  not  applicable  toward  graduation. 

Students  in  the  program  also  are 
required  to  complete  the  following 
courses:  COM  101,  EDR  100,  and 
WRT  120,  aU  of  which  should  be  taken 
as  soon  as  possible  after  completion  ot 
summer  requirements.  All  of  these 
courses  satisfy  University  requirements 
for  graduation.  Students  will  be  advised 
also  on  the  completion  of  general  educa- 
tion requirements  and,  as  necessaty,  on 
the  transition  to  a  major  course  of  study. 


For  further  information,  please  contact 
the  academic  development  program,  103 
Lawrence  Center,  610-436-3274. 

Assessment 

To  assess  and  improve  student  learning, 
academic  programs,  and  student  services, 
the  University  wiU  seek  information  on 
student  perceptions  and  satisfaction,  as 
well  as  intellectual/personal  growth.  AH 
students  are  expected  to  participate  in 
the  assessment  program  when  requested. 

National  Student  Exchange  Program 

West  Chester  is  one  of  approximately  180 
participating  colleges  and  universities 
across  the  United  States  and  Canada  that 
offers  students  the  opportunity  to  spend  a 
maximum  of  one  year  of  study  at  another 
college  or  university.  The  exchange  pro- 
gram enables  smdents  to  experience  a 
quarter,  semester,  or  year  at  another  uni- 
versity or  college,  yet  not  encounter  com- 
plications such  as  transfer  credits  and  out- 
of-state  tuition.  While  encouraging  sm- 
dents to  experience  and  appreciate  various 
cultural  perspectives,  the  National  Smdent 
Exchange  Program  also  provides  students 
with  the  opportunity  to  take  advantage  of 
specialized  courses  and  programs  that  may 
not  be  available  at  West  Chester. 
To  qualify  for  the  program,  students  must 
be  fiiU  time,  have  a  2.50  cumulative  GPA, 
and  should  be  a  sophomore  or  junior  dur- 
ing the  period  of  exchange  to  ensure  that 
students  share  experiences  and  insights 
with  other  students  when  resuming  their 
smdies  at  West  Chester.  Applications  and 
fiirther  information  are  available  from  the 
National  Student  Exchange  coordinator 
in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  Applica- 
tions are  due  Februaty  15  or  each  year.  A 
nonrefi.indable  fee  is  required  of  all  stu- 
dents who  apply  for  the  National  Smdent 
Exchange  Program.  For  more  informa- 
tion, contact  the  Office  of  the  Registrar, 
610-436-3085. 

Pennsylvania  State  System  Visiting 
Student  Program 

Undergraduate  smdents  enrolled  in  a 
degree  program  who  have  earned  27 
credits  and  are  in  good  academic  stand- 
ing have  the  opportunity  to  enroll  as  a 
visitor  for  a  faU,  spring,  or  summer  term 
at  any  of  the  other  13  Pennsylvania  State 
System  of  Higher  Education  instimtions. 
The  program  allows  smdents  to  take 
advantage  of  specialized  courses,  pro- 
grams, or  experiences  not  available  at  the 
home  institution  without  losing  (home) 
instimtional  residency.  Advance  approval 
from  both  the  home  and  the  host  institu- 


Academic  Affairs — Special  Programs  and  Services 


tions  is  required.  Visiting  Student 
Program  information  is  available  at  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar,  E.  O.  BuU 
Center,  610-436-3085. 

Environmental  Programs 

Students  interested  in  pursuing  environ- 
mental degree  programs  may  choose 
from  those  identified  below.  Consult  the 
departments  listed  for  details  on  these 
programs. 

Ecology.  Offered  by  the  Department  of 
Biology,  this  program  provides  a  strong 
background  in  field  biology  and  prepares 
students  for  careers  as  biologists  in  envi- 
ronmental agencies,  industry,  consulting 
firms,  and  similar  organizations.  (See 
page  62  for  more  information.) 
Environmental  Health  Science.  Offered 
by  the  Department  of  Health,  this  pro- 
gram synthesizes  a  rigorous  scientific 
preparation  wdth  specialized,  applied 
environmental  courses  and  a  required 
internship.  Courses  include  topics  such  as 
hazardous  wastes,  industrial  hygiene  and 
safety,  risk  assessment,  environmental 
regulations,  toxicology,  and  a  research- 
based  seminar.  This  degree  program  pre- 
pares graduates  for  careers  as  environ- 
mental scientists  in  consulting  firms, 
industry,  and  government.  (See  page  99 
for  specific  program  information.) 

Pre-Professional  Study 

West  Chester  University  recognizes  that 
some  students  will  select  career  goals 
that  win  require  pursuit  of  academic 
degrees  after  the  baccalaureate,  either  in 
graduate  school  or  at  a  professional 
school.  Students  with  such  goals  are 
encouraged  to  discuss  them  with  appro- 
priate members  of  the  faculty. 

Pre-Medical.  Students  interested  in 
graduate  studies  in  one  of  the  health  pro- 
fessions (dentistry,  medicine,  optometry, 
podiatry,  veterinary  medicine,  or  physi- 
cian assistant  studies)  are  encouraged  to 
apply  for  admission  to  the  pre-medical 
program,  which  is  supervised  by  mem- 
bers of  the  Pre-Medical  Committee. 
More  information  about  this  program 
can  be  found  under  the  pre-medical  pro- 
gram listing  in  the  section,  "Programs  of 
Study  and  Course  Offerings." 
Pre-Law.  Students  who  are  contemplat- 
ing going  on  to  law  school  should  take 
part  in  the  pre-law  program  conducted  by 
the  University.  Law  schools  maintain  that, 
while  there  is  no  proper  "pre-law  major," 
students  should  choose  courses  that 
sharpen  their  analytical  reasoning,  writing, 
speaking,  and  listening  capabilities  in  the 


humanities,  social  sciences,  or  natural  sci- 
ences (particularly  those  courses  requiring 
research  and  communication  skills). 
Overall  academic  performance  is  essential; 
a  cumulative  average  of  at  least  3.0  is 
required  by  most  accredited  law  schools. 
Students  interested  in  attending  law 
school  should  contact  Prof.  Sandra 
Tomkowicz,  Department  of  Marketing 
and  director  of  the  pre-law  program,  in 
Room  312  D,  Anderson  Hall,  early  in 
their  academic  careers.  Students  also  are 
encouraged  to  participate  in  the  Pre- 
Law  Society. 

Engineering.  West  Chester  University, 
in  cooperation  with  The  Pennsylvania 
State  University  at  University  Park  and 
the  Penn  State  Harrisburg  campus,  pro- 
vides a  program  in  which,  at  the  end  of 
five  years,  a  student  earns  a  B.S.  in 
physics  firom  West  Chester  University 
and  a  B.S.  in  engineering  from  Penn 
State  University.  Students  spend  three 
years  at  West  Chester  and  two  years  at 
Penn  State,  taking  only  engineering- 
related  courses.  AU  mathematics,  physics, 
cognates,  and  general  education  courses 
are  taken  at  West  Chester  University. 
Students  may  choose  from  many  fields  of 
engineering,  some  of  which  are  listed  in 
the  "Phvsics"  section  of  this  catalog. 
Pre-Theology.  Pre-seminary  students 
tend  to  major  in  religious  studies  under 
the  auspices  of  the  Department  of 
Philosophy  but  select  courses  from  a 
wide  variety  of  disciplines.  Students 
interested  in  graduate  studies  in  theolo- 
gy and  religious  studies  should  work  out 
their  programs  of  studv  with  the 
Department  of  Philosophy. 

Pre-Major  Academic  Advising 
Program 

The  pre-major  academic  advising  pro- 
gram allows  students  who  have  not  yet 
chosen  a  major  to  explore  their  interests 
before  entering  a  degree  program.  During 
their  fu'st  year,  students  are  encouraged  to 
schedule  courses  that  fiilfill  the  general 
education  requirements.  In  addition  to 
these  requirements,  other  courses  may  be 
scheduled  in  a  wide  range  of  disciplines. 
Academic  advisers  will  help  students 
select  and  schedule  appropriate  courses,  as 
well  as  make  referrals  and  discuss  voca- 
tional and  career  interests.  Academic 
advisers  also  help  students  to  develop 
sound  strategies  for  academic  success. 
Students  should  understand  that  certain 
academic  programs  require  prerequisites 
for  fiirther  study.  Completion  of  such 
prerequisites,  if  not  taken  during  the 


period  of  study  as  an  undeclared  major, 
may  prolong  University  attendance. 
These  prerequisite  courses  require  that 
students  earn,  at  least,  a  "C"  grade. 
A  student  may  transfer  into  a  program 
from  pre-major  status  only  if 

1.  there  is  a  vacancy  in  the  desired  pro- 
gram, 

2.  the  chairperson  of  that  program 
approves,  and 

3.  a  formal,  approved  "change  of  major" 
form  has  been  filed  in  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar. 

Students  should  inquire  about  program 
vacancies  as  early  as  possible  during 
their  first  year  of  study. 
The  pre-major  academic  advising  program 
is  located  in  Room  132  Lawrence  Center. 
Pre-major  academic  advising  provides 
the  following  services  for  students  who 
have  not  yet  declared  a  major: 

Advice  regarding  course  selection; 
Assistance  in  establishing  educational 

objectives; 
Information  regarding  various  pro- 
grams offered  by  the  LTniversity; 
Advice  to  students  in  academic  difficulty; 
Referral  to  University  support  services; 
Guidance  in  and  instructions  for 

declaring  a  major;  and 
Interpretation  of  University,  school, 
and  department  regulations,  rules, 
and  requirements. 

Learning  Assistance  and  Resource 
Center 

The  Learning  Assistance  and  Resource 
Center  (LARC)  provides  academic  sup- 
port services  that  help  students  become 
independent,  active  learners  and  achieve 
academic  success.  The  LARC  offers 
tutoring  services  in  most  general  educa- 
tion such  as  mathematics,  viriting,  natur- 
al sciences,  social  sciences,  foreign  lan- 
guages, and  introductory  business  cours- 
es. Tutoring  sessions  are  50  minutes  long 
and  are  held  by  appointment  only. 
Interested  students  register  on  a  furst- 
come,  first-served  basis  and  are  assigned 
tutors  depending  on  availability.  The 
LARC  offers  supplemental  instruction 
(SI)  in  several  general  education  and 
"high-risk"  courses;  registration  tor  SI 
sessions  is  done  in  the  classroom  at  the 
beginning  of  the  semester.  The  LARC 
also  offers  refresher  workshops  in  prepa- 
ration for  the  Pre-Professional  Skills  Test 
(PPST)  for  education  majors.  Available 
to  student  groups  on  request  are  work- 
shops that  demonstrate  the  application  of 
learning  strategies  to  the  course  content 
and  seminars  on  affective  skills  that  influ- 


Academic  Affairs — Special  Programs  and  Services 


ence  learning,  such  as  stress  manage- 
ment, test  anxiet}'  reduction,  assertive- 
ness,  concentration,  and  motivation.  The 
LARC  web  site  (www.wcupa.edu/ 
_Academics/cae.tut/)  includes  informa- 
tion on  its  services,  a  list  of  courses  being 
tutored,  and  links  to  helpful  resources. 
The  LARC  provides  opportunities  for 
paid  practical  training  for  undergraduate 
students,  as  well  as  assistantships  for 
graduate  students.  The  LARC  offers  a 
comprehensive  training  program  for  new 
tutors,  which  includes  seminars,  work- 
shops, on-line  training,  individualized 
projects,  and  peer  observation.  Tutors 
employed  by  the  L7\RC  acquire  the 
knowledge  and  experience  necessary  to 
meet  the  requirements  for  certification  by 
the  College  Reading  and  Learning 
Association. 

The  LARC  is  open  Monday  - 
Thursday  from  8  a.m.  to  8  p.m.  and 
Friday  from  8  a.m.  to  4:30  p.m.  For 
more  information  call  610-436-2535  or 
visit  105  Lawrence  Center. 

Services  for  Students  with 
Disabilities 

The  Office  of  Services  for  Students  with 
Disabilities  (OSSD)  offers  services  for 
students  with  physical  and  learning  dis- 
abilities. The  OSSD  is  designed  to  assist 
students  in  making  a  successfiil  transi- 
tion to  the  Universit}'.  We  take  a  proac- 
tive stance  that  encourages  students  to 
understand  their  needs  and  strengths  in 
order  to  best  advocate  for  themselves. 
At  West  Chester  University  we  recognize 
that  some  students  with  disabilities  want 
minimal  assistance  while  others  require 
the  full  range  of  support  and  services. 
The  staff  of  the  OSSD  supports  suidents 
as  they  become  more  self-reliant  by 
emphasizing  their  knowledge  and  com- 
munication skills  and  the  understanding 
of  their  rights  and  obligations  under  the 
laws.  To  facilitate  successfiil  transition  we 
recommend  a  comprehensive  assessment 
of  needs  through  this  office. 
The  OSSD  provides  advocacy  with  fac- 
ulty' for  classroom  accommodations 
under  the  requirements  of  Section  504 
and  the  Americans  with  Disabilities 
Act.  Recent,  appropriate,  and  compre- 
hensive documentation  provided  by 
licensed  professionals  must  accompany 
requests  for  accommodations. 
The  OSSD  coordinates  provision  of 
direct  services  for  students  with  disabih- 
ties  through  support  staff  in  the  research 
and  technical  areas  of  the  Universitv'.  We 


also  advocate  in  the  readmission  proce- 
dure, with  the  offices  of  Financial  Aid 
and  the  Registrar,  and  supplement  advis- 
ing services  to  the  extent  that  the  infor- 
mation or  assistance  is  disability  related 
and  necessary  to  promote  student  access. 

The  OSSD  is  located  within  the 
Academic  Programs  and  Services 
Division  and  coordinates  services  with 
other  units  within  the  division,  such  as 
the  Learning  Assistance  and  Resource 
Center  and  the  Pre-Major  Academic 
Advising  Program,  as  well  as  other 
Universit)'  offices  including  the  Writing 
Center  and  the  Office  of  Residence  Life 
and  Housing.  Liaison  with  governmental 
agencies  and  private  practitioners  for  pro- 
vision of  services  is  also  available  through 
the  OSSD.  In  order  to  ensure  continuity 
of  services,  suidents  should  pursue  such 
actions  prior  to  enrollment.  Students 
needing  financial  support  for  personal  ser- 
vices or  interpreters  should  register  with 
the  appropriate  agency  at  least  sbc  months 
in  advance  of  matriculation.  The  policies 
and  procedures  used  by  the  OSSD  are 
contained  in  the  West  Chester  University 
Handbook  on  Disabilities,  which  is  avail- 
able in  the  OSSD  office. 

Office  of  Services  for  Students  with 

Disabilities 

Room  105  Lawrence  Center 

West  Chester  University 

West  Chester,  PA  19383 

610-436-2564 

Services  Provided  for  Students  with 
Disabihties 

•  Academic  coaching 

•  Special  summer  orientation 

•  Specialized  tutoring  in  English  and 
math 

•  Central  documentation  file 

•  Optional  comprehensive  needs 
assessment 

•  Advocac)'  with  faculty 

•  Alternative  test-taking  arrangements 

•  Academic  advising 

•  Priority  registration 

•  Note-taking  support 

•  Study  skills  tutoring 

•  Alternate  formatting  assistance  (e.g.. 
Recordings  for  the  Blind,  Inc.) 

•  Adaptive  technology 

•  Readers  for  visually  impaired  students 

•  Interpreters  for  deaf  students 

•  Referrals  for  LD  testing 

•  Peer  support 

•  Swdents  with  Disabilities  Association 


ADA  Classroom  Modifications 

Appeals  Procedure 

Notification  of  Classroom  Modifications 

For  a  student  with  a  documented  dis- 
ability requesting  classroom  modifica- 
tions, the  Office  of  Services  for  Students 
with  Disabilities  (OSSD)  will  issue  a 
copy  of  a  letter  of  modifications  for  the 
student  to  present  to  the  facult)'  member 
of  the  course.  This  modifications  letter 
will  inform  the  faculty  member  of  the 
student's  specific  academic  needs.  It  is 
the  responsibility  of  the  student  to  pre- 
sent the  letter  of  modifications  to  the 
faculty  member.  Students  v«th  disabili- 
ties are  held  to  the  same  academic  stan- 
dards as  all  other  students.  Faculty 
members  are  not  required  to  provide 
modifications  prior  to  or  retroactive 
from  the  date  a  modifications  letter  is 
presented.  Facult)'  members  should  con- 
tact the  OSSD  if  they  have  questions 
about  the  modifications  outhned. 

Appeals  Regarding  Classroom 
Modifications 

The  University  provides  for  an  appeals 
process  regarding  classroom  modifica- 
tions. Any  and  all  efforts  will  be  made 
with  the  understanding  that  a  timely  res- 
olution is  in  the  best  interest  of  all  parties 
involved.  While  an  appeal  is  under 
review,  the  student  is  expected  to  attend 
classes  and  do  assignments  to  the  best  of 
his/her  ability  and  faculty  members  are 
expected  to  provide  reasonable  classroom 
modifications  to  the  best  of  their  abilities. 
While  an  appeal  is  under  revdew,  the  stu- 
dent and  the  faculty  members  of  his/her 
courses  are  expected  to  make  good  faith 
efforts  toward  reasonable  classroom  mod- 
ifications and  engage  in  the  educational 
process.  /Vn  appeal  reviewed  under  this 
policy  does  not  alter  or  interfere  vsdth  the 
student's  right  to  file  a  complaint  of  dis- 
crimination on  the  basis  of  a  disabilit)' 
with  the  Universit)''s  Office  of  Social 
Equity  or  to  pursue  a  formal  complaint 
with  the  Pennsylvania  Human  Relations 
Commission  or  the  U.S.  Department  of 
Education,  Office  of  Civil  Rights. 
A.  If  a  student  has  concerns  with  the 
determination  of  modifications  by 
the  OSSD,  the  student  and  the 
director  of  OSSD  should  first  meet 
in  order  to  resolve  the  matter.  If  they 
do  not  reach  agreement,  the  student 
may  initiate  a  formal  appeal  by  con- 
tacting in  writing  the  associate 
provost  (for  undergraduate  students) 
or  the  graduate  dean  (for  graduate 
students)  (see  section  C). 


Academic  ^Aiiairs — Special  Programs  and  Services 


B.  If  a  faculty  member  has  concerns 
about  the  application  of  the  modifi- 
cations to  his  or  her  course  and/or  a 
student  feels  the  modifications  are 
not  being  adequately  implemented, 
the  student  and  the  professor  should 
meet  in  order  to  resolve  the  problem. 
If  these  efforts  are  unsuccessfiil, 
either  the  faculn-  member  or  the  stu- 
dent may  request  informal  resolution 
through'OSSD. 

1.  The  student  and/or  the  taculr\' 
member  informs  both  OSSD  and 
the  chair  of  the  department  of  the 
course  vvithin  tvvo  work  days  fol- 
lowing the  meeting  between  the 
faculty'  member  and  the  student 
about  unresolved  concerns  for 
modifications  in  the  course. 

2.  Within  one  week  after  being 
informed  of  the  concerns,  OSSD 
will  coordinate  a  meeting  of  the 
student,  faculty'  member,  and/or 
chair  in  an  attempt  to  achieve  a 
resolution  by  meeting  with  the 
student  and/or  facultv  member. 
During  this  meeting,  wth  the 
consent  of  the  student,  OSSD 
may  fiirther  ad\'ise  the  faculrv' 
member  of  the  student's  individual 
needs  and  the  appropriateness  of 
any  recommended  modifications. 

C.  If  resolution  is  not  accompUshed 
after  informal  meetings  between 
OSSD,  the  student,  facult\'  member, 
and  chair,  a  formal  appeal  may  be 
started.  Either  the  faculty-  member  or 
the  student  may  initiate  the  formal 
appeal  bv  contacting  OSSD  in  writ- 
ing; as  appropriate,  the  associate 
provost  or  the  graduate  dean  will 
then  be  notified.  The  formal  appeal 
will  proceed  as  follows: 

1.  Within  the  two  weeks  following 
the  initiation  of  the  formal  appeal, 
a  Classroom  Modifications 
Review  Panel  wiU  meet.  If  the 
student  involved  is  an  undergradu- 
ate, the  associate  provost  wLU  con- 
vene the  panel.  If  the  student  is  a 
graduate  student,  the  graduate 
dean  will  convene  the  panel.  The 
panel  will  consist  of  a  dean  of  a 
school  or  college,  a  faculn-  mem- 
ber, and  a  student,  each  of  whom 
will  be  from  outside  the  depart- 
ment than  the  one  in  which  the 
problem  arose  and  selected  from 
respective  pools  of  individuals  who 
have  received  training  in  ADA 
law  and  procedures;  the  dean  shall 
serve  as  panel  chair.  Panel  mem- 


bers will  be  informed  in  writing  by 
the  associate  provost  or  dean  of 
Graduate  Studies  at  least  a  week 
in  advance  of  the  date,  time,  and 
place  that  the  panel  will  be  con- 
vened. 

2.  At  the  proceedings  of  the  panel, 
the  representative  of  OSSD  will 
present  to  the  panel  relevant  infor- 
mation about  the  nature  of  the 
student's  disabilit\'  and  appropriate 
modifications.  Because  this  infor- 
mation is  confidential,  the  stu- 
dent's consent  to  the  disclosure  of 
the  information  must  be  obtained 
beforehand.  In  order  to  protect 
matters  which  are  confidential,  the 
panel  may,  upon  its  own  motion 
or  upon  the  request  of  any 
involved  pany,  hear  statements  in 
private  wthout  the  other  parties 
being  present. 

If  the  situation  involves  a  chal- 
lenge to  the  OSSD  director's 
denial  of  a  requested  modification, 
the  OSSD  shall  present  informa- 
tion and  documentation  showing 
why  such  modification  is  inappro- 
priate. 

It  the  dispute  is  related  to  the 
apphcation  of  a  modification  in  a 
particular  course,  the  facultv' 
member  shall  then  present  to  the 
panel  his  or  her  concerns  about 
the  modification  and  shall  have 
the  opportunitN'  to  present  any 
information  or  documentation 
\vhich  the  faculty-  member  beheves 
is  relevant.  The  panel  may  request 
that  the  chairperson  of  the  acade- 
mic department  in  which  the  dis- 
pute arose,  or  other  taculf\-  mem- 
bers who  teach  the  same  course, 
present  any  concerns  that  they 
may  have  regarding  how  the  mod- 
ifications might  create  a  funda- 
mental alteration  in  the  nature  of 
the  course. 

The  student  shall  have  the  oppor- 
tunit\-,  but  shall  not  be  required, 
to  make  a  statement  to  the  panel 
and  to  present  any  informatiop  or 
documentation  which  the  student 
beheves  is  relevant. 
The  Office  of  Social  Equit)-  wiU 
be  available  to  the  panel  for  con- 
sultation on  an  "as  needed"  basis. 

3.  It  shall  be  the  function  of  the 
panel  to  make  a  recommendation 
to  the  provost  concerning  the 
appropriateness  of  the  requested 
modifications  and/or  a  rewsion  of 


the  modifications.  The  panel  shall 
deUberate  immediately  following 
the  meeting  and  shall  render  its 
recommendation  hv  majorirv'  vote. 
The  decision  and  any  dissenting 
opinions  of  the  panel  shall  be  sent 
in  writing  to  the  pro\'OSt  within 
three  work  days  by  the  panel 
chair. 
4.  The  provost  shall  review  the  rec- 
ommendation of  the  panel  and 
render  a  final  decision  on  the  mat- 
ter in  writing  to  the  student,  the 
facult)'  member,  and  the  OSSD 
director  within  one  week  after 
receiving  the  panel's  recommenda- 
tion. 

The  Writing  Program 

West  Chester  University's  cross-discipli- 
nar\'  writing  program  was  begun  in  1978 
as  a  pUot  project  fiinded  b}-  the  National 
Endowment  for  the  Humanities  and  the 
Pennsylvania  State  College  Educational 
Trust  Fund.  Building  on  the  skills  devel- 
oped in  Enghsh  composition  courses,  the 
program  is  based  on  the  assumption  that 
writing  is  integral  to  all  academic  learn- 
ing in  hberal  and  professional  studies. 
The  program's  focus  is  therefore  not  on 
remediation  but  on  enhancement;  the 
Universit)'  regards  vvriting  as  much  more 
than  a  set  of  basic  language  skills.  The 
program  provides  for: 

(1)  Writing-emphasis  courses  each  semester 
in  traditional  hberal  studies  (for 
example,  Enghsh  hterature,  history, 
anthropology,  sociology',  chemistry, 
and  physics)  and  in  protessional 
studies  (for  example,  criminal  jus- 
tice, early  childhood  education, 
nursing,  and  pubhc  health) 

(2)  A  general  requirement  that  all  stu- 
dents must  take  three  of  these  writing- 
emphasis  courses,  in  addition  to 
Enghsh  composition.  Transfer  stu- 
dents need  to  consult  the 
Undegraduate  Catalog  under 
"Writing  Emphasis"  for  details  on 
their  degree  requirements. 

The  WCU  writing  program  has  been 
recognized  for  its  scope  and  achieve- 
ment by  the  Association  ot  American 
Colleges.  It  is  administered  by  a  director 
and  a  committee  of  one  student  and 
seven  faculty  members  representing  dif- 
ferent fields  of  study. 

Internships 

A  number  of  departments  offer  the 
opportunit)'  for  internships,  field  experi- 
ences, or  practicums  in  which  students 


Academic  Affairs — Special  Programs  and  Senices 


may  earn  credit  through  employment  in 
their  field  of  interest.  Students  need  to 
consult  with  their  department  and 
review  the  various  department  hstings  in 
this  catalog. 

Three  University-wide  internship 
opportunities  are  open  to  students  from 
anv  major:  The  Harrisburg  Internship 
Semester  (THIS)  is  a  full-semester,  15- 
credit  experience  in  Pennsylvania  state 
government.  It  is  open  to  any  junior  or 
senior  who  has  a  minimum  GPA  of  3.5. 
A  stipend  is  involved.  (See  Department 
of  Political  Science,  HBI  400,  401, 
402.)  The  Washington  Center 
Internships  are  15-credit  experiences 
with  the  U.S.  Congress,  Executive 
Branch,  interest  groups,  and  lobbies. 
The  Pennsylvania  House  of  Rep- 
resentatives Legislative  Fellowship 
Program,  open  to  all  junior/senior  stu- 
dents with  a  minimum  GPA  of  3.5, 
involves  committee  staff  assignments  in 
pohcy  development  and  a  stipend.  All 
three  programs  are  administered  bv  the 
Department  of  Pohtical  Science;  contact 
the  chair  at  610-436-2743. 

Summer  Sessions 

West  Chester  University's  summer  pro- 
gram, among  the  oldest  university-spon- 
sored summer  programs  in  the  United 
States,  has  one  of  the  largest  enroll- 
ments in  the  State  System  of  Higher 
Education.  More  than  600  courses,  both 
graduate  and  undergraduate,  are  offered, 
including  workshops,  seminars,  and 
internships,  as  well  as  the  typical  semes- 
ter classes.  Offerings  are  generally  avail- 
able in  everv'  department  and  in  interdis- 
ciplinary areas. 

Students  from  any  college  or  university-, 
as  well  as  nontraditional  students,  may 
take  courses  for  enjoyment,  personal 
grovrth,  or  degree  credit.  The  summer 
program  runs  for  13  weeks  (two  five- 
week  sessions  and  a  three-week  post  ses- 
sion), and  a  student  can  earn  up  to  12 
credits  during  the  summer  sessions. 

Summer  session  booklets  containing  the 
course  schedules  may  be  obtained  from 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar  (undergradu- 
ate), the  Office  of  Graduate  Studies  and 
Extended  Education  (graduate),  and 
academic  departments  or  the  University 
web  site  (wvvw.wcupa.edu).  For  more 
information  contact  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  at  610-436-3541  or  the  Office 
of  Graduate  Studies  and  Extended 
Education  at  610-436-2943. 


Office  for  Adult  Studies 

Nondegree  is  an  academic  term  for  "not 
formall}'  accepted  in  a  degree  program." 
Students  often  begin  their  college 
careers  bv  taking  classes  nondegree,  for 
personal  and  professional  growth. 
Nondegree  students  take  the  same 
courses  as  ever\'one  else  and  earn  the 
same  college  credit.  Students  may  earn  a 
total  of  1 8  credits  (usually  about  six 
courses)  as  a  nondegree  student.  After 
earning  18  credits,  students  need  to 
apply  for  adnussion  if  they  wish  to  con- 
tinue. College  graduates  can  take  as 
many  courses  as  they  want. 
Nondegree  students  can  take  a  maxi- 
mum of  nine  credits  each  semester. 
Students  may  be  considered  for  nonde- 
gree status  if  they 

•  graduated  from  high  school  (or 
received  a  GED)  three  or  more  years 
ago; 

•  have  less  than  30  credits  from  anoth- 
er college  or  university  with  at  least  a 
2.0  cumulative  grade  point  average 
(GPA); 

•  have  earned  a  college  degree  and 
want  to  take  courses  for  professional 
or  personal  development; 

•  are  a  high  school  student  with  a  letter 
ot  recommendation  from  their  guid- 
ance counselor  or  principal. 

The  University'  recognizes  and  awards 
credit  for  hfe-learning  experience  that 
can  accelerate  a  student's  degree.  The 
Office  for  Adult  Studies  advises  students 
on  how  to  earn  college  credit  tor  their 
learning  experience  through  three  avail- 
able options: 

•  Credit  by  Examination  (contact  the 
Registrar's  Office) 

•  Portfolio  Development 

•  College  Level  Examination  Program 
(CLEP) 

Students  may  use  anv  combination  of 

these  options  and  progress  at  their  own 

pace. 

Nondegree  students  may  take  advantage 

of  all  ser\'ices  offered  b\'  the  University 

including: 

•  Internet  registration 

•  Payment  plans 

•  Da\time  childcare 

•  Career  and  personal  counsehng 
For  additional  information,  contact  the 
Office  for  Adult  Studies  at  610-436- 
1009  or  e-mail  adultstudy@wcupa.edu. 

Veterans  Affairs 

Under  the  provisions  of  Tide  38,  West 
Chester  University  is  an  accredited  uni- 


versity for  the  education  of  veterans.  The 
University  cooperates  with  the  Veterans 
Administration  to  see  that  honorably 
separated  or  discharged  veterans  receive 
every  consideration  consistent  with  either 
degree  or  nondegree  admission  standards. 

All  veterans,  certain  dependents  of  dis- 
abled or  deceased  veterans,  and  war 
orphans  who  wish  to  obtain  educational 
benefits  under  the  appropriate  public 
laws  must  register  with  the  office  over- 
seeing veterans  affairs  at  initial  registra- 
tion. Veterans  must  renew  their  registra- 
tion with  this  office  at  the  beginning  of 
each  subsequent  semester  and  each  sum- 
mer session.  The  Veterans  Administra- 
tion requires  students  who  are  veterans 
to  schedule  at  least  12  semester  hours 
per  semester  in  order  to  receive  fiiU  ben- 
efits under  the  GI  Bill. 

Certification  tor  Veterans  Administra- 
tion benefits  is  administered  by  the 
Office  of  Financial  Aid,  Room  138, 
Elsie  O.  Bull  Center. 

Armed  Services  Programs 

Army  Reserve  Officers'  Training 
Corps  (ROTC)  is  available  through  a 
cross-enrollment  agreement  with 
Widener  University'.  Classes  are  gener- 
ally conducted  on  the  campus  of 
Widener  University.  Students  receive 
from  1.0  to  3.0  free  elective  credit  hours 
per  course  (maximum  12  credit  hours) 
towards  their  baccalaureate  programs. 

West  Chester  students  also  may  enroll  in 
the  Air  Force  Reserve  Officers'  Training 
Program  (AFROTC)  through  an  agree- 
ment with  Saint  Joseph's  Universitv'.  All 
aerospace  studies  courses  are  held  on  the 
Saint  Joseph's  University  campus,  and 
these  courses  earn  transfer  credit  at  WCU. 

The  University,  with  the  approval  of  the 
Council  of  Trustees,  permits  West 
Chester  LTni\'ersit\'  students  enrolled  in 
the  Armed  Services  Reserve  Officer 
Candidate  Program  (ROC)  to  receive  six 
semester  hours  of  baccalaureate  credit 
upon  successflil  completion  and  certifica- 
tion of  ROC  militan'  requirements. 
These  credits  are  classified  as  free  elective 
transfer  credits.  Depending  on  the  status 
of  the  student's  program  at  the  time  of 
ROC  credit  transfer,  these  credits  will  be 
counted  toward,  or  in  excess  of,  the  120 
credits  required  for  a  baccalaureate  degree. 

ROC  programs  are  contingent  on  suc- 
cessflil completion  of  a  military  require- 
ment during  vacation  and  the  awarding 
of  a  college  degree  before  being  granted 
the  service  commission. 


Academic  Affairs — Special  Programs  and  Ser\ices 


Graduate  Studies 

West  Chester's  graduate  programs,  intro- 
duced in  1959,  offer  study  opportunities 
leading  to  the  master  ot  education,  mas- 
ter of  arts,  master  of  science  in  adminis- 
tration, master  of  science  in  nursing, 
master  of  business  administration,  master 
of  public  health,  master  of  science,  mas- 
ter of  social  work,  and  master  ot  music 
degrees.  West  Chester  schedules  its  grad- 
uate courses  in  the  late  afternoon  and 
e\'ening  during  the  fall  and  spring  semes- 
ters. It  is  possible  to  pursue  fiill-rime 
graduate  stud}'  during  the  academic  year 
and  during  summer  sessions. 

Administration 

^LSA-   (Concentrations:  Human  Resource 

Management,  Individualized,  Leadership 
for  Women,  Long-Term  Care,  Public 
Administration,  Regional  Planning,  Sport 
and  Athletic  Administration,  Training  and 
Development) 

Certificates  in  Administration;  Human  Resource 
Management;  and  Leadership  for  Women 

Anthropology/Sociology 

M.S.A.  (Concentration:  Long-Term  Care) 
Certificate  in  Geronotolog\' 

Biology 

M.S.  Biology 

Business 

^LBA.  (Concentrations:  Exonomics/Finance, 
Executive,  General  Business,  Manage- 
ment, TechnologT.'  and  Electronic 
Commerce) 

Chemistry 

MA.      Physical  Science  (Concentration: 

Chemistry) 
M.Ed.  Chemistry 
M.S.  Chemistry 
M.S.      Clinical  Chemistry 

Communication  Studies 

M.A.      Communication  Studies 

Conununicative  Disorders 

MA.      Communicative  Disorders 

Computer  Science 

M.S.       Computer  Science 
Certificate  in  Computer  Science 

Counseling  and  Educational 
Psychology 

.M.Ed.    Elementan-  School  Counseling 
M.Ed.    Secondan-  School  Counseling 
ALS.      Higher  Education/Post- Secondary 

Counseling 
Specialist  I  Certificate  in  Counseling 

(Elementari-  or  Secondary) 
Post  Master's  Certificate 

Criminal  Justice 

M.S.      Criminal  Justice 

Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 

M.Ed.    Special  Education 
Certification  in  Special  Elducation 


Educational  Research 

See  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 

Elementary  Education 

M.Ed.    Elementary  Education 
Certificate  of  Advanced  Graduate  Study 
Certification  in  Elementarj'  Education 

English 

M.A.     English 

Foreign  Languages 

M..-\.  French 

M..A  Spanish 

M.Ed.  French 

M.Ed.  Spanish 

Geography  and  Planning 

M.A.      Geography 

M.S..'^.  (Concentration:  Regional  Planning) 

Geology  and  Astronomy 


M.A. 


Ph^•5ical  Science  (Concentration: 
Earth  Sciences) 


Health 

M.Ed,  School  Health 
M.P.H.PubUc  Health 
Certificate  in  Emergency'  Preparedness  (pending 

approval) 
Certificate  in  Integrative  Health 
Certification  in  Health  Care  Administration 

History 

M.A.     History 
M.Ed.   Histor)' 

Holocaust  and  Genocide  Studies 

MA.      Holocaust  and  Genocide  Studies 
Certificate  in  Holocaust  and  Genocide  Studies 

Kinesiology 

M.S.       Health  and  Physical  Education 

(Concentrations:  General  Ph\-sical 

Education,  Elxercise  and 

Sport  Phii-siolog)) 
M,S,A,  (Concentration:  Sport  and  Athletic 

Administration) 
Certification  in  Driver  Education  and  Safe  Li\'ing 

Literacy 

M,Ed,   Reading 
Certificate  in  Literac)' 
Certification  as  a  Reading  Specialist 

Mathematics 

M..^.      Mathematics  (Concentrations: 

Mathematics,  Mathematics  Education) 
M.S.      AppUed  Statistics 
Certificate  in  Applied  Statistics 
Certification  in  Mathematics 


Music 

MA 

Music  Histon' 

M.M. 

Accompanying 

M.M. 

Music  Composition 

M.M, 

Music  Education 

M,M, 

Music  Performance 

M.M, 

Music  Theon' 

M.M, 

Piano  Pedagog)' 

Nursing 

z\LS,N. 

Certificate  in  Parish  Nursing 

Certification  as  a  School  Nurse 

Philosophy 

M.A.     Philosophy 


Physical  Science 

See  Chemistry,  and  Geology  and  Astronomy 

Political  Science 

M.S..\.  (Concentration:  PubUc  .A.dministration) 

Professional  and  Secondary  Education 

M.Ed.    Secondar)'  Education 
M.S.       Educational  Research 
Certification  in  Secondary-  Education 
Certificate  in  Teaching  and  Learning  with 

Technology- 
Courses  in  En\ironmental  Education,  Urban 

Education 

Psychology 

MA.      Clinical  Psycholog)- 

M.A.      General  Ps\chologi.' 

M.A.      Industrial/Organizational  Psychologv- 

Certificate  in  Clinical  Mental  Health 

Public  Administration 

See  Political  Science 

Social  Work 

MS.W.  Social  Work 

Special  Education 

(See  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education) 

Teaching  English  as  a  Second 
Language 

M.A.     Teaching  English  as  a  Second  Language 
Certificate  in  Teaching  English  as  a  Second 
Language 

The  follo>ving  departments  and  inter- 
disciphnarv'  areas  offer  graduate  cours- 
es, but  no  graduate  degree: 

Anthropolog}'  and  Sociolog}',  Art,  Lin- 
guistics, Theatre  Arts,  and  Women's 
Studies, 

Scholarly  Publications 

College  Literature  is  an  international,  quar- 
terl)- journal  of  scholarly  criticism  dedicat- 
ed to  the  needs  of  coUege/universit\'  teach- 
ers; it  pro\ides  access  to  innoN'ative  wav-s  of 
studying  and  teaching  ne%v  bodies  of  liter- 
ature and  experiencing  old  literatures  in 
newwa\'s,  Kostas  IM\Tsiades  ot  the 
Department  of  English  serves  as  editor. 
Journal  of  the  Hellenic  Diaspora  is  a  semian- 
nual, international  scholarly  re\iew  focus- 
ing on  the  Greek  experience  of  the  19th 
and  20th  centuries,  published  at  West 
Chester  University'  by  Fella  Publishing 
Co.  of  New  York  Kostas  AhTsiades, 
Department  of  English,  serves  as  editor. 

Aralia  Press 

This  nationally  renowned  literary  fine 
press,  located  in  509  Francis  Har\'ey 
Green  Libran',  gives  students  hands-on 
experience  in  the  publishing  field 
through  actual  book  production. 
Professor  Michael  Peich,  Department  of 
English,  serves  as  the  director. 


Degree  Requirements 


GENERAL  INFORMATION 

Responsibility 

The  ultimate  responsibility'  for  satisfying  all  graduation  require- 
ments is  the  student's.  Facult)'  academic  advisers  are  expected  to 
provide  accurate,  helpRd  information  to  students,  and  students 
are  expected  to  be  knowledgeable  about  the  academic  policies 
and  procedures  governing  the  completion  of  their  degrees.  The 
smdent  and  faculrv  adviser  are  expected  to  consult  with  each 
other  regularly.  Under  West  Chester  Universit)''s  advising  pro- 
gram, all  students  have  faculty  advisers,  appointed  through  their 
major  departments,  who  counsel  them  on  academic  matters 
throughout  their  undergraduate  vears.  Students  who  have  not 
yet  declared  a  major  are  advised  by  the  Pre-Major  Academic 
Advising  Center  in  Lawrence  Center. 

Applicable  Catalog  Year 

AH  students  are  bound  bv  the  catalog  in  the  year  they  are  most 
recendy  admitted  to  the  Universit}'  for  general  education 
requirements.  Students  are  bound  by  the  major,  minor,  and  cog- 
nate requirements  in  the  catalog  for  the  academic  year  for  which 
thev  are  accepted  into  the  major  or  minor.  If  any  of  the  degree 
requirements  change  while  students  are  matriculating,  they  may, 
but  do  not  have  to,  meet  changed  requirements  after  their  first 
semester  of  study  as  a  declared  major.  In  some  instances,  accred- 
iting and/or  certification  standards  necessitate  the  change  in 
major,  minor,  and  cognate  requirements.  In  such  situations,  the 
respective  school  or  college  will  formally  inform  each  student 
that  he  or  she  must  meet  the  new  requirements.  Readmitted  stu- 
dents are  bound  bv  the  requirements  in  place  for  general  educa- 
tion, major,  minor,  and  cognate  areas  at  the  time  of  readmission, 
except  where  permission  is  granted  by  the  respective  department. 

Dual  Degrees  and  Majors 

Students  are  permitted  to  pursue  dual  majors  under  the  same 
degree  or  dual  degrees  with  the  concurrence  of  the  participating 
departments.  (See  "Dual  Degrees"  and  "Dual  Majors"  in  the 
"Academic  Policies  and  Procedures"  section  of  this  catalog.) 

Basic  Proficiency 

Students  who  do  not  demonstrate  basic  proficiency  in  English 
or  mathematics  may  be  required  to  take  000-level  courses  as 
prerequisites  of  their  degree  programs.  These  courses  do  not 
count  towards  graduation. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE 
BACCALAUREATE  DEGREE 

1.  Satisfactor\'  completion  ot  a  minimum  of  120  semester 
hours  at  or  above  the  100  level,  distributed  as  shown  in  the 
curriculum  for  the  .student's  major  field.  NOTE:  Three  pro- 
grams -  B.S.Ed.  ii3'biolog)',  B.S.Ed,  in  chemistry,  and  B.M. 
in  music  education  -  require  126  credits. 

2.  Achievement  of  a  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average  (GPA) 
of  at  least  2.00  (C)  and  an  average  of  at  least  2.00  (C)  in  the 
major  field. 

3.  Attendance  at  West  Chester  University  for  at  least  30 
semester  hours  of  the  degree  program,  normally  the  final  30 
semester  hours  of  the  degree  program. 


4.  Fulfillment  of  any  special  requirements  or  program  compe- 
tencies that  are  particular  to  a  department  or  a  school. 

5.  Fulfillment  of  all  financial  obligations  to  the  University, 
including  pavment  of  the  graduation  fee,  and  of  all  other 
obligations,  including  the  return  ot  Universit)'  property. 

6.  Compliance  with  aU  academic  requests,  including  filing  an 
apphcation  for  graduation  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 

BACCALAUREATE  GENERAL 
EDUCATION  REQUIREMENTS 

The  General  Education  Goals  Common  to  All 
Baccalaureate  Curricula 

A  broad  education  emphasizes  the  enhancement  of  basic  skills 
in  English  and  mathematics,  and  encompasses  experiences  in 
the  humanities,  the  social  and  natural  sciences,  and  the  arts.  At 
the  same  time,  this  education  must  be  versatile  because  of  the 
many  new  courses  and  areas  of  study  that  are  constantly 
becoming  available. 

West  Chester  University  strives  to  have  students  meet  the  fol- 
lowing general  education  goals: 

1.  Ability  to  communicate  effectively 

2.  Ability  to  employ  quantitative  concepts  and  mathematical 
methods 

3.  Ability  to  think  critically  and  anal\ticaUy 

4.  Abilit)'  to  demonstrate  the  sensibilities,  understandings,  and 
perspectives  of  a  person  educated  in  the  liberal  arts  tradition 

5.  Ability  to  respond  though tfliUy  to  diversity 

6.  Ability  to  make  informed  decisions  and  ethical  choices 

7.  Preparation  to  lead  productive,  contributing  lives 
West  Chester  University's  curriculum  has  been  planned  to 
allow  freedom  of  choice  for  the  student  within  educationally 
sound  limits. 

This  revised  general  education  program  applies  to  all  students 
entering  West  Chester  in  August  2002  and  thereafter  (special 
provisions  apply  to  honors  program,  see  page  105).  All  stu- 
dents should  consult  with  their  advisers  and  their  department 
handbooks. 

Policy  on  General  Education  Requirements 

Students,  both  those  matriculating  as  freshman  and  transfer 
students,  who  have  not  completed  the  academic  foundations 
requirements  in  mathematics  and  English  by  the  time  they 
have  earned  60  credits  toward  graduation  must  have  the  per- 
mission of  the  dean  of  their  school  or  coDege  (or  his  or  her 
designee)  to  schedule  additional  courses. 
A  total  of  48  semester  hours  of  general  education  requirements 
must  be  completed  for  a  baccalaureate  degree.  Those  48  credits 
are  allocated  among  English  composition,  mathematics,  di\'erse 
communities,  communication,  science,  behavioral  and  social  sci- 
ences, humanities,  the  arts,  interdisciplinary  studies,  and  student 
electives.  Credit  requirements  for  each  area  are  pro\'ided  in  the 
following  list.  NOTE:  Except  for  the  nine  student  elective 
semester  hours  under  Category  IV,  courses  taken  to  satisfy  gen- 
eral education  requirements  may  not  be  taken  Pass/Fail.  This 
includes  courses  taken  to  satisfy  interdisciplinar}',  diverse  commu- 
nity, and  writing  emphasis  general  education  requirements. 


Degree  Requirements 


Specific  general  education  courses  may  be  required  by  a  major  or 
minor  program,  but  no  course  may  have  its  numeric  credits 
duplicated  in  any  application.  A  student  may  use  the  course  from 
one  major  to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  second  major.  In  this 
case,  the  adviser  will  work  with  the  student  to  determine  which 
course(s)  should  be  used  to  address  any  remaining  credits.  But  in 
no  case  may  a  student  graduate  with  fewer  than  120  credits  at 
the  100  level  or  above.  Students  should  be  aware  that,  although 
general  education  requirements  have  been  met,  major  degree 
requirements  mav  necessitate  a  specific  minimum  performance 
level  in  general  education  courses,  e.g.,  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 
Following  is  an  example  of  a  general  education  course  that  also 
fulfills  program  requirements:  BIO  110  is  a  biology  require- 
ment and  serves  as  a  general  education  option. 
Consult  your  major  degree  program  for  guidance. 
Students  in  the  honors  program  should  consult  pages  105-106 
concerning  general  education  requirements. 

General  Education  Components 

I.        Academic  Foundations  18  semester  hours 

A.  English  Composition  (6  semester  hours) 

WRT  120,  WRT  121,  or  204,  or  205,  or  206,  or  208, 
or  220 

Policy  for  placement  in  English  composition 
courses:  Placement  in  the  appropriate  composition 
course  is  determined  bv  the  score  on  the  SAT  and/or  by 
performance  on  a  placement  test  administered  b}'  the 
Department  of  English.  A  student  who  places  into  and 
passes  WRT  121  or  above  is  not  required  to  take  WRT 
120.  The  student,  however,  must  complete  a  minimum 
of  120  credits  to  graduate.  AH  entering  freshmen  with 
an  SAT  Verbal  score  below  500  will  be  placed  into 
ENG  020  and  must  pass  this  course  with  a  grade  of  C- 
or  better.  Entering  freshmen  with  an  SAT  Verbal  score 
of  500  and  above  and  below  610  must  take  WRT  120. 
Entering  freshmen  with  an  SAT  Verbal  score  of  610 
and  above  are  not  required  to  take  WRT  120  but  must 
take  one  of  the  foUowing:  WRT  121,  204,  205,  206, 
208,  or  220.  A  student  enrolled  in  ENG  020  must  pass 
with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better  before  he  or  she  enrolls  in 
WRT  120.  IMPORTANT:  Credits  earned  in  ENG 
020  are  computed  in  the  student's  GPA.  However, 
these  credits  will  not  be  counted  as  part  of  the  120  col- 
lege-level credits  required  for  graduation.  Non-native, 
English-speaking  students  seeking  admission  to  ENG 
030,  ENG  130,  and  ENG  131  must  consult  the 
English  as  a  Second  Language  (ESL)  program  staff  for 
a  placement  evaluation  prior  to  registering  tor  these 
courses.  ENG  130  and  131  are  comparable  to  WRT 
120  and  121  for  non-native,  English-speaking  students 
only.  All  students  who  do  not  place  out  of  WRT  120 
must  take  and  pass  WRT  120  (130)  to  graduate,  and 
no  substitution  of  other  courses  satisfies  this  require- 
ment. A  student  who  fails  this  course  after  three 
attempts  vnll  be  dismissed  immediately  following  the 
third  failure  regardless  of  GPA. 

B.  Mathematics  (3  semester  hours) 

College-level  mathematics  course  designated  by  the  stu- 
dent's major  department. 

Pohcy  for  placement  in  mathematics:  Placement  in 
the  appropriate  mathematics  course  is  determined  by 
the  student's  math  SAT  score  or  performance  on  the 


II. 


Mathematics  Placement  Examination  adniinistered 
by  the  Department  of  Mathematics.  All  entering 
fi-eshmen  with  SAT  scores  between  440  and  480  must 
complete  MAT  000  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better  unless 
they  are  early  childhood,  elementary,  or  special  educa- 
tion majors,  in  which  case  they  take  MAT  001  before 
they  enroU  in  any  other  mathematics  course.  Any  stu- 
dent, regardless  of  major,  who  scores  below  440  must 
take  MAT  001.  Students  who  score  between  440  and 
480  on  the  SAT  but  who  take  and  pass  the  departmen- 
tal placement  test  during  the  summer  orientation  may 
place  out  of  the  developmental  math  levels  and  eru-oU 
directly  into  the  college-level  (100)  mathematics 
course.  IMPORTANT:  Credits  earned  in  MAT  000 
or  001  are  computed  in  the  student's  GPA.  However, 
these  credits  will  not  be  counted  as  part  of  the  120  col- 
lege-level credits  required  for  graduation. 

C.  Communication  (3  semester  hours) 

One  communication  course  will  be  required  of  all 

WCU  students. 

Choose  from  the  following  list: 

COMlOl,  208,  216,  or230 

D.  Diverse  Communities  (3  semester  hours) 
Effective  for  all  students  entering  fall  2002  and  later, 
one  diverse  communities  course  wiU  be  required  of  all 
WCU  students.  The  requirement  for  a  diverse  commu- 
nities course  may  be  fiilfilled  by  any  approved  course 
with  a  "J"  designation  in  the  course  schedule.  Approved 
diverse  communities  courses  are  indicated  by  a  I  sign  in 
the  catalog  course  descriptions.  ^  diverse  communities 
course  mav  simultaneously  fiilftll  another  degree  require- 
ment. If  a  y  course  is  used  tofulfdl  another  degree  require- 
ment, general  education  student  electives  increase  from  nine 
to  12  credits  as  needed  to  reach  120  credits. 

E.  Interdisciplinary  Requirement  (3  semester  hours) 
One  interdisciplinary  course  will  be  required  of  all 
WCU  students.  Interdisciplinan'  courses  may  be  fill- 
filled  by  any  approved  course  with  an  "I"  designation  in 
the  course  schedule.  Approved  interdisciplinary  courses 
are  indicated  by  a  pound  sign  (#)  in  the  catalog  course 
descriptions.  An  interdisciplinary  course  may  not  be 
used  to  fulfill  a  general  education  distributive  or  diverse 
communities  course  requirement. 

NOTE:  A  course  may  not  simultaneously  meet  the 
interdisciplinary,  diverse  communities,  or  foreign  culture 
cluster  requirements.  A  complete  list  of  approved  inter- 
disciplinary courses  can  be  found  on  this  page  below. 

Distributive  Requirements  21  semester  hours 

A.  Science  (6  semester  hours) 

Select  courses  from  at  least  two  of  the  following  areas. 
Courses  must  be  selected  from  outside  the  student's  major 
department.  Recommended  courses  are  listed  below: 

1.  Biology— BIO  100  or  BIO  110 

2.  Chemistry— CHE  100,  CHE  103,  CHE  104, 
CHE  105,  CHE  106,  or  CHE  107 

3.  Computer  Science — CSC  110,  CSC  115,  or 
CSC  141 

4.  Earth  Science— ESS  101,  ESS  111,  or  ESS  170 

5.  Physics— PHY  100,  PHY  105,  PHY  130,  ?UY 
140,  PHY  170  or  PHY  180 


Degree  Requirements 


B.  Behavioral  and  Social  Sciences  (6  semester  hours) 
Select  courses  from  at  least  two  of  the  following  areas. 
Courses  must  be  from  outside  the  student's  major 
department.  Recommended  courses  are  listed  beloiu: 

1.  Anthropology— ANT  102  or  ANT  103 

2.  Psycholog)'— PSY  100 

3.  Sociology— SOC  200  or  SOC  240 

4.  Economics— ECO  101,  ECO  111,  or  ECO  112 

5.  Geography— GEO  101  or  GEO  103 

6.  Government— PSC  100,  PSC  101,  or  PSC  213 

C.  Humaniries  (6  semester  hours) 

Select  courses  from  at  least  tujo  of  the  following  areas. 
Courses  must  be  selected  from  outside  the  student's  major 
department.  Recommended  courses  are  listed  below: 

1.  Literature— LIT  165,  CLS  165,  CLS  260,  or 
CLS  261 

2.  History— HIS  101,  HIS  102,  HIS  150,  HIS  151, 
or  HIS  152 

3.  PhUosophy— PHI  101  or  PHI  180 
D. The  Arts  (3  semester  hours) 

Any  courses  in  the  following  areas:  art,  cinematogra- 
phy, dance,  music,  photography,  and  theatre. 

III.  Student  Electives  9  semester  hours 
Students  are  encouraged  to  choose  electives  in  consulta- 
tion with  their  major  adviser. 

Courses  taken  to  satisfy  the  distributive  area  of  general  educa- 
tion requirements  and  the  courses  taken  to  satisfy  the  diverse 
communities,  interdisciplinary,  or  writing  emphasis  require- 
ments may  not  be  taken  Pass/Fail. 

All  students  are  encouraged  to  complete  the  above  program  in  their 
first  two  years  at  West  Chester. 

Additional  Baccalaureate  Requirements 

IV.  Writing  Emphasis  Courses  9  semester  hours 

AH  students  who  take  their  entire  general  education  pro- 
gram at  WCU  must  complete  three  approved  vmting 
emphasis  courses.  AH  students  who  enter  with  fewer  than 
40  credits  must  take  at  least  three  approved  writing  empha- 
sis courses  at  WCU.  Transfer  students  who  enter  with 
40-70  credits  must  take  two  writing  emphasis  courses. 
Students  who  transfer  more  than  70  credits  must  take  one 
writing  emphasis  course.  AH  students,  regardless  of  time  of 
entrance  into  the  University  (native  or  transfer),  must  take 
one  writing  emphasis  course  at  the  300-400  level.  WRT 
120,  121,  204,  205,  206,  208,  or  220  do  not  count  as  writ- 
ing emphasis  courses.  Each  writing  emphasis  course  may 
simultaneously  fijlfill  another  degree  requirement.  Writing 
emphasis  courses  may  not  be  transferred  to  WCU. 


Diverse  Communities  Courses 

American  Indian  Today 

The  Culture  ot  Cities 

Introduction  to  World  Literature 

African  Studies 

Women's  Literature  I 

Women's  Literature  II 

World  Literature  I 

Latino  Literature  in  the  U.S. 

Diversity  Perspectives  in  Early 

ChildhoodEducation 


EDA/EDE  230 
EDE  352 


EDR 


341 


Approved 

ANT 

321 

ANT 

347 

CLS 

165 

CLS 

203 

CLS 

258 

CLS 

259 

CLS 

260 

CLS 

335 

ECE 

407 

GEO 

204 

GEO 

312 

HEA 

110 

HIS 

362 

HIS 

373 

HIS 

451 

HON 

202 

KIN 

246 

KIN 

457 

LIN 


WOS 


211 


LIT 

303 

MHL 

125 

MUE 

332 

NSG 

109 

PHI 

180 

PSC 

101 

PSC 

301 

PSC 

323 

PSC 

343 

SCE 

350 

SWO 

351 

THA 

250 

WOS 

225 

WOS 

250 

315 


Inclusive  Classrooms 

Self  Group  Processes  in  Diverse 

Classrooms 

Inclusion  and  Reading  in  the  Content 

Area 

Introduction  to  Urban  Studies 

Urban  Geography 

Transcultural  Health 

Violence  in  America 

African-American  History 

Women  in  America 

Education  Systems  and  Social 

Influence 

Sport,  Culture,  and  Society 

Psychosocial  Aspects  of  Physical 

Disabilities 

Language  Communities  in  the  U.S.  and 

Canada 

Multi- Ethnic  American  Literature 

Perspectives  in  Jazz 

Music  Curriculum  II 

Health  Issues  of  Women 

Introduction  to  Ethics 

The  Politics  of  Diversity  in  the  United 

States 

Gender  and  Politics 

The  Politics  of  Race,  Class,  and 

Gender 

Cultures  and  Politics  of  Asia 

Science  in  Secondary  School 

Human  Behavior  in  the  Social 

Environment 

Race  and  Gender  in  American  Theatre 

Women  Today 

Women's  Self-Reflections  in  History, 

Art,  and  Music 

Third  World  Women 


AMS 

200 

AMS 

210 

AMS 

250 

BIO 

102 

CLS 

201 

CLS 

270 

CLS 

329 

CLS 

352 

CLS 

368 

CLS 

371 

COM  340 

ECO 

344 

EFR 

220 

EGE 

222 

EGE 

323 

ENG 

215 

ENV 

102 

ERU 

209 

ESP 

219 

ESP 

222 

ESP 

324 

ESP 

362 

Approved  Interdisciplinary  Courses 

American  Civilization 

Mass  Media  and  Popular  Culture 

Myths  and  Modernization 

Humans  and  the  Environment 

Classical  M\thology  in  the  20th  Century 

Life,  Death,  and  Disease 

Gender  and  Peace 

Modernit}'/Postmodernity 

Literature,  Myth,  and  Society 

Law,  Literature,  and  Communication 

Political  Communication 

American  Economic  Experience 

French  Civilization  (in  English) 

German  Civihzation  (in  Enghsh) 

Austrian  Civilization,  1848-1938 

Views  on  Literacy 

Humans  and  the  Environment 

Soviet  Russian  Culture  (in  English) 

Civilization  of  Spain  (in  English) 

Latin-American  Culture  and  Civilization 

(in  English) 

Puerto  Rican  Language  and  Culture 

New  World  America 


Degree  Requirements 


ESS  102  Humans  and  the  Environment 

GEO  204  Introduction  to  Urban  Studies 

GER  221  German  Civilization  (in  German) 

HIS  302  Modern  India 

HIS  306  Chinese  Civilization 

HIS  308  An  Introduction  to  the  Islamic  World 

HIS  323  Austrian  Civilization 

HIS  329  Gender  and  Peace 

.  IND  201  Unified  Science  I 

IND  110  Applied  Environmental  Science 

KIN  246  Sport,  Culture,  and  Society 

LIN  330  Introduction  to  Meaning 

LIT  162  Literature  of  the  Apocalypse 

LIT  245  Medieval  Women's  Culture 

LIT  250  Victorian  Attitudes 

LIT  270  Urbanism  and  Modern  Imagination 

LIT  309  Martin  Luther  King 

MAT  201  The  Scientific  Revolution 

MHL  201  Form  and  Style  in  the  Arts 

NSG  222  Transcultural  Health 

PHI  102  Introduction  to  Religious  Studies 

PHI  174  Principles  of  the  Arts 

PHI  330  Introduction  to  Meaning 

PHI  470  Biomedical  Ethics 

PSC  204  Introduction  to  Urban  Studies 

PSC  318  International  Political  Economy 

SCB  210  The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 

SOC  349  Perspectives  on  Mental  Illness 

SSC  200  Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 

SSC  201  Global  Perspectives 

SWO  225  Race  Relations 

WOS  225  Women  Today — An  Introduction  to 

Women's  Studies 

WOS  250  Women's  Self  Reflections  in  Writing, 

Music,  and  Art 

WOS  315  Third  World  Women 

WOS  329  Gender  and  Peace 

WOS  405  Feminist  Theory 

NOTE:  There  are  particular  honors  courses  that  have  been 
approved  as  interdisciplinary  at  the  300  and  400  levels.  Honors 
students  should  discuss  these  courses  with  the  director  of  the 
honors  program. 

Foreign  Language  and  Culture  Requirements  for 

Bachelor  of  Arts  and  Bachelor  of  Music  Degree  and 

Certain  B.S.  Degree  Candidates 

A.  West  Chester  University  beheves  that  college  students 
today  require  exposure  to  global  cultures,  and  the 
University  integrates  this  belief  into  courses  and  pro- 
grams in  various  ways.  Departments  in  the  College  of 
Arts  and  Sciences,  the  School  of  Business  and  Public 
Affairs,  and  the  School  of  Music,  particularly,  see  a 
need  for  students  earning  bachelor  of  arts  degrees  to 
gain  competency  in  foreign  language  and  cultures  as  a 
critical  aspect  of  their  education.  The  University  pro- 
vides options  for  these  students  based  on  varying  lev- 
els of  language  competency  deemed  appropriate  by 
major  departments  tor  study  in  their  field.  Questions 
regarding  foreign  language  requirements  should  be 
directed  to  the  department  chairperson. 
A  number  of  B.A.  degree  programs  require  a  foreign 
language  proficiency  gained  from  completing  the  sec- 


ond half  of  the  intermediate  year  (202)  of  a  foreign 

language.  At  this  level,  students  may  be  expected  to 

have  a  working  knowledge  of  the  language  and  culture 

of  a  foreign  country.  These  programs  are  as  follows: 

Biology 

Comparative  Literature 

English 

Foreign  Languages  (in  a  second  foreign  language) 

History 

Liberal  Studies 

Mathematics  (limited  to  French,  German,  and  Russian) 

Political  Science  (B.A.  in  international  relations  only) 

B.  Other  B.A.  degree  programs  offer  students  the  fol- 
lowing options: 

(a)  demonstrating  foreign  language  proficiency 

through  the  intermediate  level  (202)  or 
(b)demonstrating  foreign  language  proficiency 
through  the  Elementary  II  (102)  level  of  a  lan- 
guage and  further  acquiring  a  cultural  foundation 
through  taking  three  culture  cluster  courses  within 
the  same  foreign  language  area.  It  is  not  necessary 
for  students  to  complete  the  Elementary  II  (102) 
level  before  taking  culture  cluster  courses. 
While  this  option  does  not  give  students  the  depth 
and  focus  of  language  study,  the  three  courses  will 
help  them  understand  a  foreign  culture.  (In  this 
option,  students  may  elect  to  further  their  foreign  lan- 
guage skills  by  taking  an  additional  semester  of  the 
language,  plus  two  culture  cluster  courses.) 
The  foreign  language  plus  culture  cluster  option  is 
open  to  students  who  entered  after  May  1980. 
Degree  programs  offering  the  culture  cluster  option 
are  as  follows: 
Anthropology 
American  Studies 
Art  (B.A.  only) 
Communication 
Communicative  Disorders 
Economics  (B.A.  only) 
Geography  (B.A.  only) 
Philosophy 
Political  Science  (B.A.  general  and  public 

management  only) 
Psychology 
Sociology 
Theatre  Arts 

C.  Some  B.S.  degree  programs  also  require  a  foreign  lan- 
guage. Students  should  see  their  advisers. 

D.The  B.M.  in  music  degree  requires  three  hours  of  a 
foreign  language  for  students  in  the  elective  studies  in 
an  outside  field  program  of  study. 

E.  The  Department  of  Foreign  Languages  handles  test- 
ing and  placement. 

F.  Course  substitutions  to  the  foreign  language  require- 
ment of  a  department  will  be  granted  if  the  student 
meets  one  of  the  following  criteria: 

1.  The  student  is  able  to  demonstrate  proficiency 
through  successful  testing  by  the  Department  of 
Foreign  Languages. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


2.  The  student  holds  a  diploma  from  a  secondary  edu- 
cation institution  in  another  country.  This  institu- 
tion must  be  at  least  the  equivalent  of  a  U.S.  high 
school,  and  instruction  must  be  in  a  language  other 
than  English. 
G.  Students  who  may  request  course  substitutions 

because  of  a  disability  should  refer  to  page  32, 

"Services  for  Students  with  Disabilities." 
H.  Students  should  take  note  of  the  poUcies  regarding 

taking  courses  out  of  sequence;  see  page  42. 

Foreign  Culture  Clusters 

Of  the  three  required  culture  cluster  courses,  students  who 
choose  that  option  may  take  no  more  than  two  in  the  same 
department,  except  that  only  one  may  be  taken  in  the  department 
in  which  they  major.  Students  are  encouraged  to  begin  taking 
their  culture  cluster  courses  as  soon  as  possible  after  completing 
the  102  level  of  the  language.  The  201  level  of  language  courses 
is  acceptable  for  use  as  one  of  the  three  culture  cluster  courses. 
Any  exceptions  to  these  conditions  must  be  petitioned.  A  student 
may  not  use  one  course  to  simultaneously  fulfill  a  general  educa- 
tion distributive  requirement  and  a  culture  cluster  requirement. 

I.  Classical  Civilization  (Latin  or  Greek) 
Approved  courses:     ARH  382,  HIS  318,  HIS  319, 

HIS  348,  PHI  270 

II.  France  and  Francophone  Area  (French) 
Approved  courses:     ARH  383,  ARH  385,  EFR  220, 

EFR  230,  EFR  250,  GEO  303, 
HIS  420,  HIS  427,  HIS  435, 
PHI  415,  PSC  342 


III.  Germany  (German) 

Approved  courses:     EGE  222,  EGE  323,  EGE  403, 
EGE  404,  EGE  405,  EGE  408, 
EGE  409,  HIS  323,  HIS  330, 
HIS  420,  HIS  423,  HIS  435, 
PHI  272,  PHI  273,  PSC  342 

IV.  Italy  (Italian) 

Approved  courses:    ARH  384,  EIT  260,  PSC  342, 
GEO  303 

V.  Spanish  (Spanish  or  Portuguese) 

Approved  courses:     ANT  224,  ANT  322,  ANT  324, 
ANT  362,  CLS  311,  CLS  335, 
ESP  219,  ESP  222,  ESP  305, 
ESP311,  ESP324,  ESP325, 
ESP  333,  ESP  335,  ESP  403, 
ESP  405,  GEO  302,  HIS  315, 
HIS  316,  HIS  317,  PSC  340 

VI.  Russia  and  Eastern  Europe  (Russian  or  an  Eastern 
European  language) 

Approved  courses:     ERU  209,  GEO  304,  HIS  324, 
HIS  425,  PSC  246 
NOTE:  A  course  may  simultaneously  meet  the  interdiscipli- 
nary' and  culture  cluster  requirements. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Degree  Classification — Definitions 

Degree  Candidates — all  undergraduates 
admitted  to  a  degree  program  or  to  the 
undeclared  major  by  the  Office  of 
Admissions  or  through  approved  inter- 
nal transfer  recorded  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar. 

Nondegree  Students — students  permitted 
to  enroll  part  time  (maximum  nine  cred- 
its per  semester)  for  course  work  toward 
professional  development,  personal 
growth,  or  certification.  Recent  high 
school  graduates  (within  the  previous 
two  years)  are  required  to  meet  the 
admission  standards  of  the  University. 
Transfer  students  may  enroll  nondegree 
if  they  have  attempted  less  than  30  cred- 
its and  have  a  2.5  grade  point  average. 
High  school  students  may  attend  on  a 
nondegree  basis  with  written  permission 
of  their  high  school  principal  or  guid- 
ance counselor.  Nondegree  students  may 


attempt  a  maximum  of  18  credits.  Upon 
reaching  18  credits,  students  must  have 
a  2.00  GPA  or  the  department's 
required  GPA  to  be  eligible  for  admis- 
sion to  a  degree  program  or  to  request 
permission  to  enroll  with  professional 
development  status. 

Student  Standing 

The  student's  standing  is  determined  by 
the  number  of  semester  hours  of  credit 
earned  as  follows: 


Freshman 

0-29.5  semester  hours  of 

credit  (inclusive) 

Sophomore 

30-59.5  semester  hours  of 

credit  (inclusive) 

Junior 

60-89.5  semester  hours  of 

credit  (inclusive) 

Senior 

90  or  more  semester 

.  hours  of  credit 

Full-Time  Status 

A  full-time  class  load  ranges  from  12  to 
18  semester  hours  of  credit.  Credits 
attempted  or  earned  through  the  process 
of  Credit  by  Examination  are  not  count- 
ed in  the  student  class  load. 

Overloads 

Students  wishing  to  carry  more  than  18 
credit  hours  in  the  fall  or  spring  semester, 
or  six  credit  hours  in  a  summer  session, 
must  secure  permission.  Permission  wiU 
not  be  granted  for  more  than  24  hours  in 
a  fall  or  spring  semester.  The  maximum 
student  load  for  summer  school  is  six 
hours  per  session.  A  student  wiU  not  be 
allowed  to  carry  an  overload  of  more  than 
18  hours  in  any  one  summer  nor  be 
allowed  to  carry'  more  than  one  additional 
course  per  summer  session. 
A  student  should  not  seek  permission  to 
carry  an  overload  if  his  or  her  cumula- 
tive average  is  below  2.75. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Permission  for  an  overload  is  granted  by 
the  chairperson  of  the  department  in 
which  the  student  is  majoring  and  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar. 

School  Assignments  for  Field 
Experiences 

Students  are  assigned  early  field  and  stu- 
dent teaching  experiences  at  schools 
with  which  the  Universit)'  has  a  formal 
agreement.  Students  will  not  be  assigned 
to  schools  that  they  attended  or  where 
members  of  their  families  are  employed 
or  attend. 

Special  requests  for  school  assignments 
■mil  be  considered  by  the  student's  major 
department. 

Effective  fall  1999,  before  an  undergrad- 
uate smdent  may  register  for  independent 
study  or  research,  practicum,  internship, 
extemship,  or  any  field  placement,  he  or 
she  must  have  an  overal  GPA  of  2.00  or 
higher,  and  a  GPA  of  2.00  or  higher  in 
his  or  her  major  courses. 
This  policy  does  not  supersede  current 
departmental  policies  that  have  estab- 
lished higher  standards.  This  policy  does 
not  prevent  departments  from  setting 
higher  GPA  standards  for  undergradu- 
ate students  within  their  major.  Depart- 
ments may  also  establish  a  minimum 
required  GPA  for  all  cognate  courses  for 
undergraduate  students  who  wish  to 
register  for  any  of  these  courses. 

Second  Degrees 

An  indi\ddual  may  pursue  a  second 
degree  at  West  Chester  Universit}'  after 
earning  the  first  degree  either  at  West 
Chester  or  some  other  instimtion.  Such 
an  indi\'idual  must  apph'  for  admission 
through  the  Office  of  Admissions  as  a 
transfer  student  and  earn  at  least  30  hours 
of  West  Chester  University  credit  beyond 
the  requirements  of  the  initial  baccalaure- 
ate program.  All  requirements  for  the 
curriculum  in  which  the  second  degree  is 
earned  must  be  satisfied.  A  given  course 
required  in  both  the  degree  programs  is 
not  repeated  for  the  second  degree. 

Dual  Degrees 

A  student  who  has  successhxUy  complet- 
ed at  least  30  credits  of  work  at  West 
Chester  Universit)'  may  petition  to  pur- 
sue a  second  undergraduate  degree  con- 
currently with  the  first,  such  as  a  B.S.  in 
computer  science  and  a  B.A.  in  art.  It 
admitted  to  a  second  degree  program, 
the  student  must,  to  receive  both 
degrees  at  graduation,  earn  at  least  30 
credits  beyond  the  requirements  of  the 


baccalaureate  program  with  the  fewest 
required  credits  for  a  minimum  of  150 
credits.  When  a  student  is  enrolled  in 
dual  degree  programs: 

a.  The  student  may  not  be  graduated 
until  both  the  degrees  are  completed. 

b.  All  requirements  for  the  curriculum 
of  each  degree  must  be  satisfied. 

c.  A  course  required  in  both  degree 
programs  does  not  have  to  be  repeat- 
ed for  the  second  degree. 

d.  All  University  requirements  such  as 
minimum  GPA  and  number  of  cred- 
its taken  at  West  Chester  Universit}' 
in  the  major  must  be  met  for  each 
degree  separately. 

Double  Major 

A  student  mav  select  two  majors  within 
the  same  degree.  In  this  case,  a  student 
must  meet  ail  of  the  requirements  for 
both  majors.  The  student  should  consult 
regularlv  with  ad\'isers  from  both  pro- 
grams. Students  wishing  to  pursue  two 
types  of  baccalaureate  degrees  (B.A., 
B.F.A.,  B.M.,  B.S.,  B.S.Ed.,  B.S.N.) 
should  see  Dual  Degree  section  above. 

Minor  Fields  of  Study 

Students  who  have  enough  flexibOit}'  in 
their  major  curriculum  to  fulfiU  the 
requirements  of  a  minor  must  fill  out 
and  submit  a  Minor  Selection 
Application  to  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  To  enroll  in  a  minor  field  of 
study,  students  must  have  the  permis- 
sion of  both  their  major  and  their  pro- 
posed minor  departments.  Admission  to 
the  minor  does  not  guarantee  admission 
to  the  major.  Smdents  must  complete 
18  to  30  hours  of  courses  selected  in 
consultation  with  the  minor  program 
adviser.  At  least  50  percent  of  minor 
course  work  must  be  taken  at  West 
Chester.  Aso,  beginning  with  students 
entering  in  the  fall  1993  semester,  stu- 
dents must  earn  a  minimum  GPA  of 
2.00  in  the  set  of  courses  taken  for  a 
minor  in  order  to  receive  transcript 
recognition  of  that  minor. 
Minors  available  at  West  Chester 
Universit}'  include  the  following: 
Accounting 

African/African-American  Literature 
American  Studies 
Anthropology 
Anthropology/Sociology 
Art  History 
Astronomy 
Athletic  Coaching 
Biology 


Business  Geographies  and  Information 

Systems 
Chemistry 

Communication  Studies 
Comparative  Literature 
Computer  Science 
Creative  Writing 
Criminal  Justice 
Dance  (Education/Therapeutic) 
Dance  (Performance) 
Early  Childhood  Education 
Earth  Sciences 
Economics 

Elementary  Education 
Elementary  School  Mathematics 
Ethnic  Studies 
Film  Criticism 
Finance 
French 
Geography 
Geology 
German 
Health  Science 
Histor}' 

Holocaust  Studies 
International  Business 
Italian 
Jazz  Studies 
Journalism 
Latin 

Latin  American  Studies 
Linguistics 
Literature 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nutrition 

Organizational  and  Technical  Writing 
Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 
Philosophy 
Physics 

PoUtical  Science 
Psychology 
Public  Management 
Religious  Studies 
Russian 

Russian  Studies 
Sociology 
Spanish 

Special  Education 
Studio  Art 
Theatre 
Translation 

Web  Technology  and  Application 
Women's  Studies 

Specific  course  requirements  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  minor  program  advisers. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Changing  Majors 

A  student  wishing  to  transfer  from  one 
program  of  study  at  the  University  to 
another  program  must  fiLe  a  Change  of 
Curriculum  form  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar.  The  smdent  must  meet  the 
standards  for  admission  to  the  desired 
program  and  must  obtain  written  permis- 
sion from  the  department  involved.  Any 
courses  that  were  initially  accepted  for 
transfer  credit  from  another  coUege  are 
subject  to  re-evaluation  by  the  department 
to  which  the  student  transfers  internally. 

Adding  a  Course 

Smdents  may  add  a  course  by  fihng  a 
schedule  change  form  in  the  Office  ot 
the  Registrar  during  the  Drop/ Add 
Period.  Students  wiU  not  be  permitted 
to  add  a  course  after  the  end  of  the  Add 
Period  (sixth  day  of  the  semester). 

Dropping  a  Course 

Students  may  drop  a  course  by  fihng  a 
schedule  change  form  in  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  during  the  Drop/ Add 
Period,  thereby  receiving  no  grade. 
Students  will  not  be  permitted  to  drop  a 
course  after  the  end  of  the  Drop/ Add 
Period  (fifth  day  of  the  semester). 

Scheduling  Courses 

Students  may  not  schedule  more  than 
one  section  of  the  same  course  in  any 
given  semester.  If  they  do  so,  they  may 
be  removed  from  one  section  by  the  chair 
of  the  department  offering  the  course. 

Withdrawing  from  a  Course 

A  grade  of  W  (Withdraw)  will  be 
entered  on  the  academic  record  of  any 
student  who  withdraws  from  a  course 
between  the  end  of  the  first  week  and  before 
the  end  of  the  ninth  class  week  or  the 
equivalent  in  summer  sessions. 
After  the  ninth  week  of  classes,  students 
may  not  withdraw  selectively  from  cours- 
es; they  must  contact  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  and  withdraw  from  the 
University.  The  University  will  record  a 
"W"  for  all  courses  in  which  the  student 
is  registered.  However,  if  the  effective 
date  of  official  withdrawal  is  during  the 
last  week  of  classes,  a  letter  grade  or  NG 
will  be  assigned  for  that  course.  A  stu- 
dent may  not  receive  a  W  during  the 
last  week  of  classes. 
STUDENTS  WHO  FAIL  TO 
WITHDRAW  FROM  OR  DROP  A 
COURSE  OFFICIALLY  CAN 
EXPECT  TO  RECEIVE  A  GRADE 
OF  F  FOR  THE  COURSE  AND 


ARE  FINANCIALLY  RESPONSI- 
BLE TO  PAY  FOR  IT. 

Withdrawal  from  the  University 

Students  wishing  to  withdraw  from  the 
University  may  go  to  the  Oftice  of  the 
Registrar  or  submit  their  withdrawal  to 
the  office  in  writing.  Written  notifica- 
tion is  required  for  all  withdrawals.  If  ill- 
ness or  some  other  emergency  interrupts 
the  student's  University  work  necessitat- 
ing withdrawal,  he  or  she  must  notify 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar  at  once. 
Unless  a  student  withdraws  officially,  F 
grades  will  be  recorded  for  unfinished 
courses. 

Taking  Courses  Out  of  Sequence 

Students  may  not  enroll  for  credit  in  a 
more  elementary  course  in  a  sequence 
after  having  satisfactorily  passed  a  more 
advanced  course  in  that  sequence.  For 
example,  a  student  may  not  enroU  for 
credit  in  French  101  after  having  satis- 
factorily passed  French  201.  Similarly, 
students  who  enroll  in  a  course  that 
requires  less  proficiency  than  placement 
or  proficiency  tests  indicate  they  possess 
may  be  denied  credit  towards  graduation. 

Repeating  Courses 

Beginning  with  the  1991  fall  semester, 
the  Repeat  Pohcy  is  divided  into  two 
sections,  i.e.,  a  pohcy  covering  develop- 
mental courses  (000-level)  that  do  not 
count  towards  graduation,  and  a  policy 
covering  college-level  courses. 
A.  Policy  covering  developmental 
courses 

Students  who  enter  the  University 
beginning  with  the  1991  fall  semester 
may  have  three  attempts  to  pass  each 
developmental  course  (000-level). 
The  repeat  privilege  for  develop- 
mental courses  wiU  not  count  within 
the  five-repeat  allotment  for  col- 
lege-level courses.  Credits  for  these 
courses  do  not  count  towards  gradua- 
tion but  are  computed  in  the  cumula- 
tive Grade  Point  Average.  Students 
may  file  two  grade  replacement 
forms,  which  result  in  eliminating 
the  grades  from  the  first  and  second 
attempts.  The  third  attempt,  how- 
ever, will  be  the  grade  of  record. 
Students  must  pass  the  developmen- 
tal basic  skiUs  courses  (Enghsh  and 
mathematics)  with  a  C-  or  better 
before  enrolling  in  a  more  advanced 
course  in  the  respective  discipUne. 
Students  enrolled  in  the  basic  skills 
developmental  course(s)  who  do  not 
pass  with  a  C-  or  better  after  three 


attempts  will  be  permanently  dis- 
missed from  the  Universit)'  regard- 
less of  overall  Grade  Point  Average. 
Students  who  fail  developmental 
courses  at  West  Chester  University 
may  not  repeat  those  courses  at 
another  university  or  transfer  in  the 
college-level  (100  or  higher)  course. 

B.  Pohcy  covering  undergraduate  col- 
lege-level courses 

Students  may  repeat  undergraduate 
college-level  courses  to  improve  a 
grade  of  F,  D,  C,  or  B  (not  A). 
Beginning  with  the  1985  fall  semester, 

1.  No  student  may  use  the  repeat 
option  more  than  five  times 
TOTAL.  For  example,  this 
means  repeating  five  DIFFER- 
ENT courses  once  each,  or  repeat- 
ing each  of  two  different  courses 
twice  (four  repeats)  and  one  addi- 
tional course  once. 

2.  A  single  course  may  not  be  repeat- 
ed more  than  twice. 

3.  A  replacement  for  the  grade  in  the 
first  attempt  occurs  automatically 
at  the  completion  of  the  second 
attempt  of  a  repeated  course.  This 
constitutes  one  of  the  five  avail- 
able repeats. 

4.  A  grade  replacement  will  only  take 
place  on  the  second  attempt  of  a 
course. 

5.  When  a  student  completes  a  third 
attempt  of  a  course,  the  grades  for 
the  second  and  third  attempts  will 
be  used  to  calculate  the  cumulative 
grade  point  average. 

6.  Smdents  may  repeat  undergradu- 
ate college-level  courses  to  improve 
a  grade  of  F,  D,  C,  or  B  (not  A). 

Smdents  will  not  be  permitted  to 
repeat  courses  for  credit  beyond  five 
repeats,  or  beyond  two  repeats  for  a 
single  course. 

Undergraduate  students  who  take  and 
complete  a  course  at  West  Chester  may 
not  repeat  the  course  at  another  instim- 
tion  and  have  the  credits  or  grade  count 
towards  a  West  Chester  degree. 

Undergraduates  who  take  a  course  tor 
graduate  credit  are  subject  to  the  gradu- 
ate repeat  policy.  See  the  Graduate 
Catalog  for  information. 

Because  all  students  must  take  and  pass 
WRT  120  to  graduate,  a  student  who 
fails  this  course  after  three  attempts  will 
be  dismissed  immediately  foUowing  the 
third  failure,  regardless  of  GPA. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Repeat  Course  Procedure 

The  first  time  a  student  completes  a 
course  for  a  grade  it  is  considered  the 
first  attempt.  The  second  time  a  student 
completes  a  course  for  a  grade  it  is  con- 
sidered the  second  attempt  and  the  first 
repeat.  The  third  time  a  student  com- 
pletes a  course  for  a  grade  it  is  consid- 
ered the  third  attempt  and  is  the  second 
repeat.  The  first  time  a  course  is  repeat- 
ed, only  the  second  grade  is  computed 
into  the  GPA.  The  repeat  is  filed  auto- 
matically when  the  second  attempt  has 
been  completed.  If  the  college-level 
course  is  repeated  a  second  time,  both 
the  second  and  third  grades  are  comput- 
ed into  the  GPA.  Students  who  com- 
plete a  course  with  a  fourth  attempt  or 
more  are  in  violation  ot  the  Repeat 
Policy  and  wiU  not  earn  credit. 

Pass/Fail  Policy 

1.  All  degree  students  who  are  sopho- 
mores, juniors,  or  seniors  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  at  least  2.00  are 
eligible  to  take  courses  Pass/Fail. 

2.  The  Pass/Fail  privilege  is  limited  to 
one  course  per  semester;  only  student 
electives  in  general  education  and 
free  electives  within  the  major/minor 
maybe  taken  on  a  Pass/Fail  basis. 
Free  electives  are  completed  at  the 
choice  of  the  student.  They  may  not 
be  used  to  satisfy  major,  core,  cognate, 
or  general  education  (including  dis- 
tributive) requirements. 

Courses  taken  to  satisfy  the  distribu- 
tive area  of  general  education  require- 
ments and  the  courses  taken  to  satisfy 
the  diverse  communities,  interdiscipli- 
nary, or  writing  emphasis  require- 
ments may  not  be  taken  Pass/Fall. 

3.  A  grade  of  Pass  carries  credit  value 
but  does  not  affect  the  cumulative 
Grade  Point  Average. 

4.  A  grade  oi  Fail  is  computed  into  the 
cumulative  Grade  Point  Average. 

5.  After  contracting  for  Pass/Fail,  the 
student  may  not  request  or  accept  any 
grade  other  than  a  P  or  an  F. 

6.  This  process  must  be  completed  by 
the  end  of  the  ninth  week  ot  the 
semester  or  the  equivalent  in  summer 
school.  Forms  are  available  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Auditing  Privileges 

Anyone  may  attend  the  University  for 
the  sole  purpose  of  auditing  courses  by 
first  scheduling  for  the  course,  paying  the 
regular  fee,  and  then  completing  an  audit 
application  form  available  from  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  An  undergradu- 


ate student  may  declare  "audit"  status  in  a 
course  through  the  end  of  the  ninth  week 
of  class  but  may  only  audit  one  course 
per  semester.  Faculty  may  refuse  to  grant 
auditor  status.  Full-time  students  have 
the  privilege  of  auditing  without  addi- 
tional charge,  provided  they  obtain 
approval  from  the  course  instructor  and 
the  course  does  not  create  an  overload 
situation.  If  an  overload  results,  students 
are  assessed  the  per-credit  rate  for  each 
credit  in  excess  of  18.  Part-time  students 
may  audit,  provided  they  obtain  the 
instructor's  approval,  enroll  in  the  course 
through  the  Office  of  the  Registrar,  and 
pay  the  regular  course  fees. 

Credit  is  never  given  to  auditors.  The 
auditor  status  may  not  be  changed  after  it 
has  been  declared.  The  grade  ot  Audit 
(AU)  is  recorded  on  the  student's  tran- 
script. An  audited  course  will  not  fUfill 
any  requirement  toward  graduation 
including  interdisciplinary,  diverse  com- 
munities, and  writing  emphasis  attributes. 

Credit  by  Examination 

Forms  to  register  for  credit  by  examina- 
tion are  available  from  the  Otfice  of  the 
Registrar.  A  fee  of  S25  is  charged  for  each 
course.  Credit  by  examination  is  a  privi- 
lege subject  to  the  following  conditions: 

1.  AppHcation  occurs  during  the 
Drop/ Add  Period.  If  the  student  has 
already  scheduled  into  the  course,  the 
course  will  be  dropped  from  the 
schedule  for  that  term.  Grade  notifi- 
cation for  credit  by  exam  will  occur  at 
the  end  of  the  semester.  Therefore,  if 
the  student  fails,  the  course  will  have 
to  be  taken  in  a  later  term. 

2.  The  student  has  a  cumulative  GPA 
of  at  least  2.00. 

3.  The  student  demonstrates  evidence 
of  satisfactory  academic  background 
for  the  course. 

4.  The  student  has  not  already  complet- 
ed a  more  advanced  course  that  pre- 
supposes knowledge  gained  in  the 
course.  For  example,  credit  by  exami- 
nation cannot  be  given  for  FRE  101 
after  the  student  passed  FRE  102. 

5.  Credits  attempted  or  earned  through 
the  process  ot  credit  by  examination  are 
not  counted  in  the  student  class  load. 

NOTE:  Students  who  have  taken  a 
course  but  have  not  achieved  a  satisfac- 
tory grade  may  not  apply  for  credit  by 
examination  for  the  same  course. 

Independent  Study 

Many  departments  offer  an  independent 
study  course  for  students  with  demon- 


strated ability  and  special  interests.  This 
course  is  appropriate  when  a  student  has 
a  specialized  and  compelling  academic 
interest  that  cannot  be  pursued  within 
the  framework  of  a  regular  course. 
Students  must  obtain  departmental  per- 
mission for  independent  study  courses. 
An  overall  GPA  of  2.00  or  higher  and  a 
minimum  GPA  of  2.00  in  a  student's 
major  courses  are  required.  The  inde- 
pendent study  form  is  available  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Individualized  Instruction 

Individualized  instruction  is  the  teaching 
of  a  regular,  listed  catalog  course  to  a  sin- 
gle student.  Individualized  instruction  is 
offered  only  when  the  University  has  can- 
celed or  failed  to  ofter  a  course  according 
to  schedule.  Students  must  obtain  depart- 
mental permission  for  individual  instruc- 
tion. The  individualized  instruction  form 
is  available  in  the  Office  ot  the  Registrar. 

Graduate  Credit 

A  senior  (90  credits  or  more)  pursuing  a 
bachelor's  degree  who  has  an  overall 
Grade  Point  Average  of  3.00,  may,  with 
the  permission  of  the  major  adviser, 
course  professor,  department  chair  of 
the  course,  the  dean  of  graduate  studies 
and  extended  education,  and  the  associ- 
ate provost,  enroll  in  up  to  six  credits  of 
graduate-level  course  work.  The  student 
must  be  at  the  senior  level  with  the  des- 
ignated Grade  Point  Average  at  the 
time  the  course  begins. 

If  the  course  is  dual  numbered,  the 
undergraduate  must  take  the  undergrad- 
uate-level course  and  apply  it  towards 
the  bachelor's  degree.  If  the  course  is 
not  dual  numbered,  but  at  the  500  level 
or  above,  the  course  may  count  either  as 
undergraduate  credit  towards  the  bache- 
lor's degree  or  as  graduate  credit. 

If  the  student  wishes  to  have  the  credits 
count  towards  the  bachelor's  degree,  the 
student  must  submit  a  completed 
"Application  for  an  Undergraduate 
Student  to  Take  a  Graduate  Course  for 
Undergraduate  Credit."  The  form  is 
available  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  If, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  student  wishes  to 
have  the  credits  count  towards  a  graduate 
degree,  he  or  she  must  submit  a  complet- 
ed "Application  for  an  Undergraduate 
Student  to  Take  a  Graduate  Course  for 
Graduate  Credit."  The  form  is  available 
in  the  Graduate  Office.  To  receive  grad- 
uate-level credit,  the  student  also  must 
submit  a  properly  completed  and 
approved  Graduate  School  Admissions 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Form  to  the  Office  of  Graduate  Studies 
before  completing  the  appropriate  form. 
Individual  departments  have  the  right  to 
implement  more  stringent  academic 
standards  for  courses  within  their 
departments.  Any  student  not  meeting 
Universit}'  or  departmental  standards 
when  the  appropriate  semester  begins 
will  not  be  permitted  to  enroll. 
If  a  course  is  taken  for  undergraduate 
credit,  no  additional  fees  will  be 
required.  If  a  course  is  taken  for  gradu- 
ate credit,  the  student  must  pay  graduate 
tuition  and  applicable  tees  tor  that 
course.  A  student  not  carrying  12  hours 
of  undergraduate  credits  wLU  be  charged 
at  the  appropriate  hourly  tuition  rates 
for  both  the  undergraduate  and  graduate 
credits.  All  other  fees  will  be  charged  at 
the  undergraduate  level. 
No  more  than  six  credits  taken  under  this 
policy  may  be  applied  to  the  master's 
degree.  Students  may  not  elect  to  change 
between  undergraduate  and  graduate  cred- 
it after  the  term  or  semester  has  begun. 

Undergraduate  students  approved  to  take 
a  graduate  course  for  undergraduate  cred- 
it are  bound  by  the  undergraduate  catalog 
polic)'  on  repeats  and  wdthdrawals. 
Undergraduate  students  approved  to  take 
a  graduate  course  for  graduate  credit  are 
bound  by  the  graduate  catalog  policy  on 
repeats  and  withdrawals. 

Undergraduate  Student 
Attendance  Policy 

Each  professor  will  determine  a  class 
attendance  polic\'  and  publish  it  in  his  or 
her  syllabus  at  the  beginning  of  each 
semester.  When  a  student  fails  to  comply 
with  the  policy,  the  professor  has  the  right 
to  assign  a  grade  consistent  with  his  or  her 
policy  as  stated  in  the  sj'llabus.  Absences 
cannot  be  used  as  the  sole  criterion  for 
assigning  a  final  grade  in  a  course. 
Excused  absences,  in  accordance  with  the 
Excused  Absences  Polio,'  for  University- 
Sanctioned  Events,  wiU  not  result  in  a 
penalty,  provided  the  student  foUovre  this 
policy.  University  departments  or  pro- 
grams may  establish  attendance  policies  to 
govern  their  sections  as  long  as  those  poli- 
cies fall  within  these  guidelines. 

Excused  Absences  Policy  for 
University- Sanctioned  Events 

Undergraduate  students  participating  in 
University-sanctioned  events  such  as, 
but  not  limited  to,  the  Marching  Band, 
musical  ensembles,  theatre  group,  ath- 
letic events,  forensics  competition,  etc., 
wUl  be  granted  an  excused  absence(s)  by 


the  respective  faculty  members  for  class 
periods  missed.  Students  will  be  granted 
the  privilege  of  taking,  at  an  alternative 
time  to  be  determined  by  the  professor, 
scheduled  examinations  or  quizzes  that 
will  be  missed.  The  professor  will  desig- 
nate such  times  prior  to  the  event. 
Professors  can  provide  a  fair  alternative 
to  taking  the  examination  or  quiz  that 
will  be  missed.  Students  must  submit 
original  documentation  on  University 
letterhead  signed  by  the  activity  director, 
coach,  or  adviser  detailing  the  specifics 
of  the  event  in  advance.  Specific 
requirements  include: 

1.  Responsibility  for  meeting  academic 
requirements  rests  with  the  student. 

2.  Students  are  expected  to  notify  their 
professors  as  soon  as  they  know  they 
will  be  missing  class  due  to  a 
University-sanctioned  event. 

3.  Students  are  expected  to  complete 
the  work  requirement  for  each  class 
and  turn  in  assignments  due  on  days 
of  the  event  prior  to  their  due  dates 
unless  other  arrangements  are  made 
with  the  professor. 

4.  If  a  scheduled  event  is  postponed  or 
canceled,  the  student  is  expected  to 
go  to  class. 

5.  Students  are  not  excused  from  classes 
for  practice  on  nonevent  days. 

The  following  are  specifics  for  the  stu- 
dent athlete: 

1.  The  student  athlete  is  expected, 
where  possible,  to  schedule  classes  on 
days  and  at  hours  that  do  not  conflict 
with  athletic  schedules. 

2.  Athletes  are  not  excused  from  classes 
for  practice  or  training-room  treat- 
ment on  nongame  days. 

Exemption  from  Final 
Examinations 

Students  who  have  attained  an  A  or  B 
prior  to  the  finals,  have  completed  all 
other  course  requirements,  and  have  the 
instructors'  permission  may  waive  final 
examinations.  This  privilege  is  subject  to 
several  reservations. 

1.  Any  unit  examinations  given  during 
the  final  examination  period  are  not 
subject  to  this  policy. 

2.  Academic  departments  as  well  as 
individual  faculty  may  adopt  a  policy 
excluding  the  final  examination 
exemption  for  certain  courses. 

3.  Mutual  agreement  between  the 
instructor  and  the  student  to  waive 
the  final  examination  should  be  deter- 
mined during  the  week  prior  to  the 
beginning  of  the  examination  period. 


The  course  grade  will  be  the  A  or  B 
earned  exclusive  of  a  final  examination 
grade. 

Grade  Reports 

After  each  semester,  a  report  of  each 
smdent's  semester  grades  is  available  on 
STUVIEW,  the  University's  web  site 
(www.wcupa.edu). 

Grading  System 


Qualin- 

Percentage 

Grade 

Points 

Equivalents 

Interpretation 

A 

4.00 

93-100 

ExceUent 

A- 

3.67 

90-92 

B* 

3.33 

87-89 

Superior 

B 

3.00 

83-86 

B- 

2.67 

80-82 

C+ 

2.33 

77-79 

Average 

C 

2.00 

73-76 

C- 

1.67 

70-72 

D+ 

1.33 

67-69 

Below  Average 

D 

1.00 

63-66 

D- 

0.67 

60-62 

F 

0. 

59  or  lower 

Failure 

NG 

No  Grade 

W 

Withdrawal 

Y 
AU 

Administrative 

Withdrawal 

Audit 

NG  (No  Grade):  Given  when  a  student 
fails  to  complete  course  requirements  by 
the  end  of  a  semester  for  a  valid  reason. 
See  "Grade  Changes." 
W  (Withdrawal):  Given  when  a  student 
withdraws  from  a  course  between  the 
end  of  the  first  and  the  end  of  the  ninth 
class  week  of  the  semester  or  the  equiva- 
lent in  summer  sessions. 
Y  (Administrative  Withdrawal):  Given 
under  appeal  when  there  is  documentation 
that  the  smdent  never,  in  fact,  attended 
class.  Other  extenuating  circumstances 
regarding  administrative  withdrawal  may 
be  reviewed  by  the  associate  provost.  No 
refiinds  are  associated  with  this  grade. 

The  grade  assigned  to  the  student  must 
reflect  the  percentage  equivalent  of  the 
plus,  minus,  and  straight  grades  earned 
in  a  course. 

Cumulative  Grade  Point  Average 

The  cumulative  Grade  Point  Average 
(GPA),  sometimes  called  the  cumulative 
index,  is  determined  by  dividing  the  total 
quality  points  earned  for  courses  by  the 
total  credit  hours  attempted.  The  follow- 
ing example  is  based  on  a  single  semester: 

Quality'  QuaUtv' 

Points  Points 

Credit  Hours  for  Earned  for 

Attempted    Grade       Grade  Course 

1st  subject        4  A  4  4x4-      16 

2nd  subject      3  B  3  3x3-9 

3rd  subject       3  C  2  2x3-6 

4th  subject       3  D  1  1x3-3 

5th  subject      J_  F  0  0x2-J) 

15  34 

34  divided  by  15  equals  a  GPA  of  2.27. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


AH  grades  received  during  a  student's 
enrollment  (except  the  grades  of  P  and 
NG,  and  except  when  a  second  attempt 
produces  a  higher  course  grade  and  a 
Grade  Replacement  takes  place)  are 
included  in  the  cumulative  GPA.  Grades 
from  other  colleges  are  excluded. 

If  a  student  repeats  a  course,  in  an  effort 
to  improve  an  F,  D,  C,  or  B  grade,  he 
or  she  must  file  a  Grade  Replacement 
Form  in  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Once  graduated,  a  student's  grades  and 
GPA  cannot  change. 

Grade  Changes 

A  grade  awarded  other  than  NG  is  final. 
Final  grades  can  be  changed  only  when 
there  is  a  clerical  or  computational  error. 
A  newly  disclosed  diagnosis  of  a  learning 
disability  may  not  be  used  as  reason  for 
requesting  a  grade  change  or  removal.  If 
the  student  thinks  there  is  an  error,  the 
student  must  report  the  alleged  error  in 
writing  to  the  professor  as  soon  as  possi- 
ble, but  no  later  than  the  end  of  the  fifth 
week  ot  the  following  semester.  If  a 
grade  change  is  warranted,  the  professor 
must  submit  a  change  of  grade  request  to 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar  not  later  than 
the  end  of  the  ninth  week  of  the  semes- 
ter. Final  grades  cannot  be  changed  after 
the  ninth  week  of  the  semester  following 
the  alleged  error. 

NG  (No  Grade)  is  given  when  a  student 
fails  to  complete  course  requirements  by 
the  end  of  a  semester  for  a  valid  reason. 
If  the  student  did  not  complete  course 
requirements  because  of  a  valid  reason, 
such  as  a  serious  illness  or  death  in  the 
family,  the  professor  may  assign  a  grade 
of  NG  and  grant  the  student  permission 
to  complete  the  requirement  within  the 
first  nine  weeks  of  the  next  semester. 

A  GRADE  OF  NG  IS  CHANGED 
TO  AN  F  AUTOMATICALLY  IF 
THE  REQUIREMENTS  HAVE 
NOT  BEEN  COMPLETED  BY 
THE  END  OF  THE  NINTH  WEEK 
OF  THE  FOLLOWING  SEMES- 
TER. (The  instructor  must  file  a  change 
of  an  NG  grade  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  by  the  middle  of  the  tenth 
week  of  the  semester.) 

A  graduating  senior  has  only  30  calen- 
dar days  after  the  end  of  the  term  in 
which  he  or  she  intends  to  graduate  to 
complete  all  degree  requirements, 
including  the  removal  of  NG. 


Grade  Appeals 

Scope  of  the  PoUcy 

The  Grade  Appeals  Policy  applies  only 
to  questions  of  student  evaluation.  Since 
appeals  involve  questions  of  judgment, 
the  Grade  Appeals  Board  will  not  rec- 
ommend that  a  grade  be  revised  in  the 
student's  favor  unless  there  is  clear  evi- 
dence that  the  original  grade  was  based 
on  prejudiced  or  capricious  judgment,  or 
was  inconsistent  with  official  University 
policy.  Please  refer  to  the  Academic 
Dishonesty  Policy  for  cases  where  the 
grade  appeal  involves  a  grade  given  for 
academic  dishonesty.  Academic  dishon- 
esty includes  but  is  not  limited  to: 

1.  Plagiarism,  that  is,  copying  another's 
work  or  portions  thereof  and/or  using 
ideas  and  concepts  of  another  and 
presenting  them  as  one's  own  with- 
out giving  proper  credit  to  the  source; 

2.  Submitting  work  that  has  been  pre- 
pared by  another  person; 

3.  Using  books  or  other  materials  with- 
out authorization  while  taking  exami- 
nations; 

4.  Taking  an  examination  for  another 
person,  or  allowing  another  person  to 
take  an  examination  in  one's  place; 

5.  Copying  from  another's  paper  during 
an  examination  or  allowing  another 
person  to  copy  from  one's  own;  and/or, 

6.  Unauthorized  access  to  an  examina- 
tion prior  to  administration. 

Procedure 

1.  (a)   A  student  must  initiate  an  appeal 

in  writing  within  20  class  days 
from  the  date  of  the  decision  or 
action  in  question.  In  case  of  an 
appeal  ot  a  final  grade,  the  appeal 
must  be  filed  no  later  than  the  first 
20  class  days  of  the  term  following 
the  one  in  which  the  grade  was 
received.  This  written  appeal 
should  be  sent  to  the  instructor 
who  awarded  the  grade  in  ques- 
tion. The  appeal  shall  be  reviewed 
by  the  student  and  the  faculty 
member.  They  shall  mutually 
attempt  to  resolve  the  appeal  with- 
in five  class  days  from  the  receipt, 
(b)  If  the  appeal  is  based  on  an  inter- 
pretation ot  departmental  or 
University  policy,  the  student's 
academic  adviser  also  may  be  pre- 
sent during  the  review  process.  In 
such  case,  there  shall  also  be  a 
limit  ot  five  class  days  in  which  to 
resolve  the  appeal. 

2.  An  appeal  not  resolved  at  Step  1  shall 
be  referred  in  writing  by  the  student 


within  five  class  days  after  the  comple- 
tion of  Step  1  to  the  chairperson  of 
the  department  of  which  the  course  in 
question  is  a  part.  If  there  is  a  depart- 
mental appeals  committee,  the  prob- 
lem shall  be  referred  directly  to  it.  The 
department  chairperson  or  the  depart- 
mental appeals  committee  shall  nor- 
mally submit  a  written  response  to  the 
student  within  10  class  days  foUowdng 
receipt  of  the  written  statement  of  the 
problem.  A  copy  of  this  response  also 
shall  be  provided  to  the  instructor. 

3.  If  no  mutually  satisfactory  decision  has 
been  reached  at  Step  2,  the  student 
may  submit  a  written  appeal  to  the 
dean  of  the  college  or  school  in  which 
the  problem  originated.  Such  an  appeal 
shall  be  made  within  five  class  days  fol- 
lowing the  receipt  of  the  written 
response  of  the  department  chairperson 
or  the  departmental  appeals  committee. 
The  dean  shall  investigate  the  problem 
as  presented  in  the  written  documenta- 
tion, review  the  recommendation  and 
provide,  in  writing,  a  proposal  for  the 
solution  of  the  problem  within  10  class 
days  following  its  referral. 

4.  If  the  problem  is  not  mutually  resolved 
by  Step  3,  the  student  may  file  an 
appeal  with  the  Grade  Appeals  Board 
within  five  class  days  of  the  receipt  of 
the  written  proposal  from  the  dean. 
The  request  for  an  appeal  must  be 
submitted  to  the  associate  provost  or, 
if  appropriate,  to  the  dean  of  graduate 
studies  who  will  convene  the  Grade 
Appeals  Board  as  soon  as  possible,  but 
no  later  than  15  class  days  after  the 
receipt  of  the  written  request. 

Grade  Appeals  Board 

1.  Membership 

A.  The  associate  provost  (or,  if  appro- 
priate, the  dean  of  graduate  stud- 
ies) serves  as  nonvoting  chairper- 
son. If  the  associate  provost  is  not 
available  to  serve,  the  administra- 
tion will  appoint  a  substitute  mutu- 
ally acceptable  to  the  student  and 
the  Association  of  Pennsylvania 
State  CoDege  and  University 
Faculties  (APSCUF). 

B.  A  faculty  dean  not  involved  in  the 
appeals  process.  A  substitute  may 
be  appointed  as  given  in  "A"  above. 

C.  Two  faculty  members.  At  the 
beginning  ot  each  academic  year, 
the  Office  of  the  Associate 
Provost  shall  randomly  select  two 
full-time  faculty  from  each  acade- 
mic department  in  order  to  consti- 
tute the  pool.  Two  faculty  mem- 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


bers  from  different  departments 
will  be  selected  randomly  from 
this  pool  for  each  Appeals  Board. 
D.  Two  undergraduate  students  or,  if 
appropriate,  two  graduate  students 
appointed  by  the  president  of  the 
Student  Government  Association 
(SGA). 

2.  Attendance 

A.  The  facult}'  member  involved  may 
be  assisted  by  an  advdser,  an 
APSCUF  representative,  or  the 
chairperson  of  the  department  in 
which  the  problem  originated. 

B.  The  student  involved  may  be 
assisted  by  an  ad\iser.  The  adviser 
may  be  another  student,  an  admin- 
istrator, or  a  faculU'  member. 

C.  Such  witnesses  as  are  called  on 
behalf  of  either  the  faculty  mem- 
ber or  the  student. 

D.  Resource  persons  or  expert  wit- 
nesses called  at  the  request  of  the 
board.  In  the  event  that  the  deci- 
sion making  involves  knowledge 
of  the  disciphne,  the  board  shall 
be  required  to  utilize  at  least  one 
resource  person  from  the  disci- 
pline, an  expert  adviser(s)  to  aid 
them  in  their  decision  making. 

3.  Procedure 

A.  Preparation  for  the  Hearing  —  All 
parties  must  be  informed  of  the 
complaint  in  writing  by  the  chair- 
person of  the  Grade  Appeals  Board 
(hereafter  referred  to  as  "chairper- 
son"), normally  within  five  class 
days  after  the  receipt  of  the  com- 
plaint. Copies  ot  documents  and 
correspondence  filed  with  respect 
to  the  complaint  shall  be  pro\'ided 
to  the  interested  parties  through 
the  chairperson.  Thereafter,  neither 
new  evidence  nor  new  charges  shall 
be  introduced  before  the  board. 
The  chairperson  shall  notify  in 
writing  the  interested  parties  of  the 
exact  time  and  place  of  the  hearing 
and  shall  provide  existing 
University  and/or  Commonwealth 
policies  relevant  to  the  appeal  at 
least  five  class  days  before  the 
beginning  of  the  proceedings. 
Throughout  these  proceedings,  the 
burden  of  proof  rests  upon  the  per- 
son bringing  the  appeal. 

B.  Hearing  Procedure  —  During  the 
hearing,  both  the  facult)'  member 
and  the  student  shall  be  accorded 
ample  time  for  statements,  testi- 
mony of  witnesses,  and  presenta- 
tion ot  documents. 


C.  Decision  of  the  Appeals  Board 

1.  The  Grade  Appeals  Board  shall 
deliberate  in  executive  session 
and  render  a  decision  by  major- 
ity vote  within  three  davs  of  the 
close  of  the  hearing.  The  chair- 
person may  participate  in  these 
deliberations  but  not  vote. 

2.  The  chairperson  shall  notify,  in 
writing,  the  student,  the  faculty 
member,  and  the  department  in 
which  the  course  in  question  is 
located  of  the  decision  within 
three  class  davs  of  the  board's 
final  action.  The  notification 
shall  include  the  basis  upon 
which  the  decision  was  reached. 

Notes 

1.  Both  facult)'  member  and  student  are 
entitied  to  the  right  of  challenge  for 
cause  of  any  member  of  the  depart- 
ment committee  (if  used)  and  the 
Grade  Appeals  Board  except  the  chair- 
person. In  the  case  of  challenge  at  the 
Appeals  Board  level,  the  chairperson 
shall  adjudicate  the  challenge.  One 
challenge  at  each  level  is  permitted. 

2.  A  "class  day"  is  defined  as  any  dav 
when  classes  are  officially  in  session 
at  West  Chester  University. 

3.  It  the  course  in  which  the  grade  dis- 
pute occurred  is  offered  under  the 
auspices  ot  a  unit  of  the  Universirv 
other  than  an  academic  department, 
the  program  director/coordinator, 
head  of  that  unit,  and/or  the  depart- 
ment chairperson  will  function  in 
Step  2  of  the  procedure.  In  Step  3, 
the  appeal  should  then  be  made  to 
the  associate  provost  rather  than  the 
dean  of  the  college/school. 

4.  If  the  professor  is  not  on  contract  or  in 
residence  on  the  campus,  he  or  she 
shall  have  the  right  to  defer  the  proce- 
dure until  his  or  her  return.  Sirrdlarlv,  if 
the  procedure  would  nonnallv  occur 
during  the  summer  and  the  student  is 
not  enrolled  in  an}'  summer  session,  the 
procedure  may  be  deferred  until  the  fall 
semester  at  the  student's  request. 

Student  Academic 
Dishonesty  Policy 
I.  Academic  Dishonesty  Process 

A.  Academic  dishonesty  is  prohibited 
and  violations  may  result  in  disci- 
pline up  to  and  including  expulsion 
from  the  Universit}'.  Academic  dis- 
honesty as  it  applies  to  students 
includes  but  is  not  limited  to  acad- 
emic cheating;  plagiarism;  the  sale, 
purchase,  or  exchange  of  term 


papers  or  research  papers;  falsifica- 
tion of  information  which  includes 
any  form  of  providing  false  or  mis- 
leading information,  written,  elec- 
tronic, or  oral;  or  of  altering  or  fal- 
sifying official  institutional  records. 
Plagiarism  is  defined  as  cop\ing 
another's  work  or  portions  thereof 
and/or  using  ideas  and  concepts  of 
another  and  presenting  them  as 
one's  own  without  gi%ing  proper 
credit  to  the  source. 

NOTE:  The  student  code  of  conduct 
covers  theft  or  attempted  theft  of 
property  or  services;  destruction;  van- 
dalism; misuse  or  abuse  of  the  real  or 
personal  property  of  the  University', 
any  organization,  or  any  individual. 

B.  Charges  of  academic  dishonesty 
against  a  student  mav  be  brought  by 
any  member  of  the  University'  com- 
munit}'.  Students  making  claims  of 
dishonesty  must  do  so  under  the 
guidance  of  the  appropriate 
involved  facultv  member  or  office 
director.  A  written  charge  must  be 
initiated  within  20  calendar  days 
from  the  date  of  the  alleged  action. 
However,  if  the  alleged  action 
occurs  during  the  last  20  calendar 
days  of  the  semester,  the  charger 
has  20  calendar  days  into  the  subse- 
quent semester  to  make  the  charge. 
The  last  day  of  a  semester  is  the  last 
day  of  final  examinations.  NOTE: 
If  the  charger  is  not  on  contract  or 
in  residence  on  the  campus,  he  or 
she  shall  have  the  right  to  defer  the 
procedure  until  his  or  her  return. 
Similarly,  it  the  procedure  would 
normally  occur  during  the  summer 
and  the  charger  is  not  enrolled  in 
any  summer  session,  the  procedure 
may  be  deferred  until  the  fall 
semester  at  the  charger's  request. 

C.  Charges  of  academic  dishonesty 
mav  be  dealt  with  informallv,  by 
mutual  agreement  of  the  person 
bringing  the  charges  and  the  stu- 
dent. A  written  agreement  of  the 
settlement  shall  be  signed  bv  both 
sides.  An  instructor  mav,  on  his/her 
own  authorit)',  apph'  a  penalt\'  to 
the  student's  grade,  including  fail- 
ure in  the  course.  If  additional 
sanctions  are  requested  h\  the 
instructor,  the  appeals  process  must 
be  employed  and  an  academic 
integrity  hearing  must  be  convened. 
A  student  may  appeal  the  instruc- 
tor's unilateral  imposition  of  a 
penalized  or  failing  grade.  A  stu- 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


dent  who  files  an  appeal  will  suffer 
no  worse  penalty  as  a  result  of  the 
appeal  than  she/he  would  have  suf- 
fered if  she/he  had  not  appealed  the 
instructor's  unilateral  sanction. 

D.  If  the  intormal  process  has  not 
been  employed  or  either  party  is 
not  satisfied  with  the  resolution 

•  under  (C)  above,  then  that  party 
shall,  vidth  10  calendar  days,  submit 
written  notification  to  the  depart- 
ment chair  or  unit  director.  The 
department  shall  then,  within  20 
calendar  days,  handle  the  matter 
according  to  its  own  written  proce- 
dures and  provide  viTitten  notifica- 
tion of  its  decision  to  all  parties. 

E.  If  either  party  is  not  satisfied  with 
the  resolution  reached  in  (D)  above, 
the  party  may,  within  20  calendar 
days  of  the  department's  decision, 
appeal  the  matter  in  writing  to  the 
dean  or,  in  the  absence  of  the  dean, 
another  appropriate  administrator. 
The  dean  or  administrator  shall 
then,  within  20  calendar  days,  han- 
dle the  matter  according  to  her/his 
written  procedures  and  provide 
written  notification  to  all  parties. 

F.  If  either  party  is  not  satisfied  with 
the  decision  of  the  dean  or  admin- 
istrator, that  party  may,  within  10 
calendar  days,  appeal  the  matter  in 
writing  to  the  Academic  Integrity 
Board. 

G.  Membership  of  the  Academic 
Integrity  Board 

1.  The  provost  (or  provost's 
designee)  shall  appoint  faculty 
and  administration  members  of 
the  Academic  Integrity  Board. 
The  associate  provost  (or,  if 
appropriate,  the  dean  of  gradu- 
ate studies)  serves  as  nonvoting 
chairperson.  If  the  associate 
provost  or  dean  of  graduate 
studies  is  not  available  to  serve, 
the  administration  will  appoint 
a  substitute. 

2.  A  faculty  dean  not  involved  in 
the  charging  process.  A  substi- 
tute may  be  appointed  as  given 
in  1  above. 

3.  Two  faculty  members.  At  the 
beginning  of  each  academic 
year,  the  Office  of  the  Associate 
Provost  shall  randomly  select 
two,  hiU-time  faculty  from  each 
academic  department  in  order  to 
constitute  the  pool.  Two  faculty 
members  from  different  depart- 
ments vioU  be  randomly  selected 


firom  this  pool  to  serve  on  each 
Academic  Integrity  Board. 
4.  Two  undergraduate  students  or, 
if  appropriate,  two  graduate  stu- 
dents, appointed  by  the  presi- 
dent of  the  Student  Government 
Association  (SGA)  or  president 
of  the  Graduate  Student 
Association  (GSA),  respectively. 
H.  A  written  recommendation  based 
on  a  preponderance  of  evidence 
arrived  at  by  majority  vote,  in  which 
the  facts  and  reasons  for  the  recom- 
mendation are  set  forth,  shall  be 
issued  within  15  calendar  days  after 
the  close  of  the  board  proceedings 
and  shall  be  sent  to  the  provost  and 
vice  president  for  academic  affairs 
with  copies  to  all  parties.  If  the  vote 
of  the  board  is  not  unanimous,  a 
minority  report  also  will  be  for- 
warded to  all  parties  within  15  cal- 
endar days  of  the  close  of  the  board 
proceedings.  Within  15  calendar 
days,  the  provost  shall  implement 
the  recommendation  of  the  board 
or  shall  provide  a  vmtten  response 
containing  his/her  decision  and 
explaining  to  all  parties  his/her  rea- 
sons for  declining  to  implement  the 
board's  recommendation. 
I.    Either  party  may  express  its  reaction 
in  writing  regarding  the  recommen- 
dation of  the  board  to  the  provost  or 
his/her  designee  within  seven  calen- 
dar days.  Any  stay  of  sanction  shall 
be  granted  only  upon  application  to 
and  at  the  sole  discretion  of  the 
provost  or  his/her  designee.  The 
decision  of  the  provost  shall  be  final. 
II.  Sanctions 

A.  At  the  conclusion  of  the  appeals 
process,  a  student  may  be  exonerat- 
ed or  subject  to  any  combination  of 
the  following  range  of  penalties: 
failure  in  the  course,  disciplinary 
probation,  suspension,  expulsion, 
financial  restitution,  or  holds  placed 
on  the  student's  records.  If  a  student 
has  a  record  of  past  violations  of  the 
Student  Academic  Dishonesty 
Policy  as  adjudicated  by  the 
Academic  Integrity  Board,  then  the 
board  will  review  that  record  and 
consider  it  when  applying  sanctions. 
The  board  shall  have  no  knowledge 
of  that  record  when  making  its  ini- 
tial adjudication  of  the  case. 

Policy  on  Disruptive  Classroom 
Behavior 

1.  Definition  of  disruptive  classroom 
behavior 


A.  Disruptive  behavior  is  defined  as 
an  act  that  is  disorderly,  that 
might  include  but  is  not  limited  to 
that  which  disrespects,  disrupts, 
harasses,  coerces,  or  abuses,  and/or 
might  threaten  or  harm  property 
or  person,  so  that  it  interferes  with 
an  orderly  classroom,  teaching 
process,  or  learning  function. 

B.  Such  behavior  originates  in  a 
classroom,  faculty  member's  office, 
or  other  site  so  long  as  it  is  related 
to  the  academic  classroom  or 
classroom  fiinction. 

2.  Limitation  of  Policy 

This  policy  addresses  only  student 
classroom  behavior  as  defined  here. 
Nonacademic  student  behavior  is 
addressed  in  the  Student  Code  of 
Conduct  and  the  Judicial  Board  process 
as  outlined  in  the  Ram's  Eye  View. 

3.  Classroom  Management 

This  policy  acknowledges  the  need 
for  protection  of  academic  freedom  in 
the  classroom,  for  faculty  authority  in 
classroom  management,  and  for  facul- 
ty and  student  safety  in  the  classroom. 

4.  Due  Process 

This  pohcy  respects  faculty  and  stu- 
dent rights  to  due  process  in  any 
event  emanating  from  disruptive  stu- 
dent behavior  in  the  classroom. 

Process 

1.  The  first  instance  of  disruptive 
behavior  shall  result  in  an  immediate 
verbal  warning  by  the  faculty  mem- 
ber. The  faculty  member  shall  advise 
the  student  of  the  existence  of  the 
Disruptive  Classroom  Behavior 
Policy  and  where  it  is  published. 
Exception:  A  first  instance  in  which 
disruptive  behavior  appears  to  com- 
promise the  safety  of  or  is  threaten- 
ing to  a  faculty  member  or  student(s) 
shall  result  in  immediate  removal  of 
the  student  from  the  classroom  by 
the  faculty  member.  In  the  event  of 
imminent  danger  to  person  or  prop- 
erty. Public  Safety  wiH  be  called  and 
immediate  removal  shall  result. 
Extreme  or  severe  behavior  can  result 
in  removal  from  the  course  and  not 
merely  from  the  immediate  class. 

2.  A  second  instance  of  disruptive 
behavior  shall  result  in  the  removal  of 
the  student  from  class  for  the 
remainder  of  the  class  period.  The 
faculty  member  should  log  the  behav- 
ior and  the  steps  taken  in  writing. 

3.  A  third  instance  of  disruptive  behav- 
ior shall  result  in  permanent  removal 
of  the  student  from  the  class. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Temporary  Removal 

1.  A  student  who  has  been  asked  to 
leave  the  classroom  must  meet  with 
the  faculty  member  prior  to  returning 
to  the  next  class. 

2.  A  student  may,  as  the  result  of 
removal  from  the  classroom  and  hav- 
ing met  or  tried  to  meet  with  the  fac- 
ulty member  without  success,  request 
a  third  party  agreeable  to  both  the  fac- 
ulty member  and  him/herself  to  assist 
in  resolving  his/her  difference  with  the 
faculty  member.  He/she  can  do  so  by 
applying  to  the  chairperson  of  the 
department  in  which  the  course  in 
which  the  event  occurred  is  housed. 

Permanent  Removal 

1.  In  the  event  of  permanent  removal 
from  the  class,  the  faculty  member 
shall  notify  the  chairperson  of  the 
department  in  which  the  course  is 
housed,  who  shall  then  notify  the 
dean  of  his/her  school/coUege,  the 
dean  of  students,  and  the  chairperson 
of  the  student's  major  department. 

2.  A  student  who  has  been  permanendy 
removed  from  the  classroom  shall  be 
assigned  a  grade  consistent  with  course 
requirements  depending  upon  the 
point  in  the  course  at  which  the 
removal  took  place.  A  written  state- 
ment of  the  reason  for  permanent 
removal  shall  be  provided  to  the  stu- 
dent by  a  review  panel,  in  the  event  of 
an  appeal  by  the  student,  or  by  the  fac- 
ulty member,  in  the  event  there  has 
been  no  appeal.  The  review  panel  shall 
be  the  only  venue  for  a  hearing  on  per- 
manent removal  from  the  classroom. 

Appeal  Process 

1.  The  student  may,  within  five 
Universit)'  calendar  days  of  removal, 
appeal  permanent  removal.  That 
appeal  shall  be  made  to  the  review 
panel  which  shall  be  constimted  and 
charged  by  the  dean  of  the  school/col- 
lege, or  his/her  designee,  in  which  the 
event  occurred.  The  panel  shall  include 
an  academic  manager,  a  faculty  mem- 
ber, and  a  student.  It  shall  within  five 
University  calendar  days  conduct  fact 
finding  and  make  a  written  recom- 
mendation to  the  dean  who  shall  pro- 
vide copies  to  the  faculty  member  and 
the  student.  Extension  based  on  com- 
pelling circumstances  may  be  granted 
by  the  dean  or  his/her  designee. 

2.  A  student  who  appeals  removal  shall 
be  given  an  opportunity  to  keep  up 
with  classroom  assignments  during 


the  time  it  takes  the  review  panel  to 
reach  its  decision. 
3.  In  the  event  that  the  student's  behav- 
ior was  perceived  as  sufficiently 
threatening  or  severe,  either  party  may 
invoke  the  right  to  a  separate  inter- 
view or  may  submit  written  testimony 
to  allow  for  fact  finding  by  the  panel. 

Dean's  List 

The  names  of  degree-seeking  students 
who  complete  12  or  more  graded  hours  in 
an  academic  semester  and  achieve  a 
semester  GPA  of  3.67  or  better  are  placed 
on  the  dean's  list.  Nondegree  students 
who  complete  a  minimum  of  nine  credits, 
have  a  GPA  of  3.67,  and  no  grade  below 
a  "B"  in  the  semester  also  will  be  recog- 
nized on  that  semester's  dean's  list. 

Maintenance  of  Academic 
Standards:  Probation  and  Dismissal 

A  student's  scholastic  standing  at  the 
University  is  indicated  by  his  or  her 
cumulative  Grade  Point  Average  (GPA). 
Three  categories  of  academic  standing 
have  been  established:  good  academic 
standing,  probation,  and  dismissal.  A  stu- 
dent remains  in  good  academic  standing 
as  long  as  he  or  she  maintains  a  mini- 
mum cumulative  GPA  of  2.00  for  all 
work  taken  at  the  University.  Probation 
and  dismissal  are  actions  taken  by  the 
University  when  a  student's  GPA  falls 
below  an  acceptable  level  at  the  end  of 
the  fall  or  spring  term.  No  student  wiU  go 
on  or  come  off  academic  probation,  or  be 
dismissed  from  the  University  for  acade- 
mic reasons,  at  the  end  of  summer  term. 
Conditions  of  Probation.  Probation  is 
defined  as  a  trial  period  during  which  a 
student  whose  cumulative  average  has 
fallen  below  acceptable  standards  must 
bring  his  or  her  average  up  to  those 
standards  or  be  dismissed  from  the 
University.  The  following  Riles  govern 
the  category  of  probation: 
A.  A  student  shall  be  placed  on  proba- 
tion if  he  or  she  has  attempted 

•  more  than  nine  and  up  to  18 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  less  than  2.00 

•  more  than  18  but  fewer  than  48 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  from  1.00  to  less 
than  2.00 

•  at  least  48  but  fewer  than  64  semes- 
ter hours  of  work  with  a  cumulative 
GPA  from  1.40  to  less  than  2.00 

•  at  least  64  or  more  semester  hours 
of  work  with  a  cumulative  GPA 
from  1.70  to  less  than  2.00 


B.  Probation  shall  commence  immediate- 
ly at  the  end  of  the  semester  in  which 
the  cumulative  GPA  falls  into  the 
range  described.  A  notice  of  probation 
shall  be  printed  on  the  student's  tran- 
script, and  the  student  shall  be  notified 
by  the  Universit)'  that  he  or  she  is  in 
danger  of  dismissal.  A  student  who 
receives  notice  of  being  placed  on  pro- 
bation shall  immediately  seek  advising, 
tutoring,  and  instruction  in  effective 
study  habits  and  efficient  use  of  time 
—  in  short,  take  every  possible  mea- 
sure to  improve  the  quality  of  his  or 
her  academic  performance. 

C.  A  student  will  be  allowed  to  continue 
on  probation  for  no  more  than  30 
attempted  semester  hours  of  work  after 
being  placed  on  probation.  If  the  GPA 
has  not  reached  an  acceptable  level  by 
that  time,  the  smdent  will  be  dismissed 
from  the  University.  A  student  is 
removed  from  probation  when  the 
cumulative  GPA  rises  to  2.00  or  above. 

D.  Those  students  who  entered  the 
University  for  the  first  time  beginning 
with  the  1989  fall  semester  and  who 
have  been  placed  on  probation  a  sec- 
ond time  will  be  allowed  to  continue 
on  probation  for  no  more  than  15 
attempted  semester  hours  of  work  after 
being  placed  on  that  second  probation. 
If  the  GPA  has  not  reached  an  accept- 
able level  by  that  time,  the  student  will 
be  dismissed  from  the  University. 
Thus,  a  student  may  be  on  probation 
no  more  than  twice,  and  placement  on 
probation  for  a  third  time  will  result  in 
immediate  dismissal. 

NOTE:  This  does  not  prevent  individ- 
ual departments  from  requiring  an  aver- 
age higher  than  2.00  as  a  condition  of 
acceptance  or  retention. 

Dismissal  from  the  University 

A.  A  student  shall  be  dismissed  from  the 
University  if  he  or  she  has  attempted 

•  more  than  18  but  fewer  than  48 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  less  than  1.00 

•  at  least  48  but  fewer  than  64 
semester  hours  of  work  with  a 
cumulative  GPA  of  less  than  1.40, 
whether  he  or  she  has  previously 
been  placed  on  probation  or  not 

•  at  least  64  or  more  semester  hours 
of  work  with  a  cumulative  GPA  of 
less  than  1.70,  whether  he  or  she 
has  previously  been  placed  on  pro- 
bation or  not 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


NOTE:  A  student  also  shall  be  dis- 
missed if  he  or  she  fails  to  meet  the 
standards  set  under  paragraph  C  above. 

B.  A  student  may  appeal  the  dismissal 
by  calling  or  writing  the  Office  of  the 
Associate  Provost. 

C.  Nothing  in  this  policy  shall  be  taken 
to  preclude  the  dismissal  of  students 
for  violations  of  other  University 
pohcies,  in  accordance  with  the  pro- 
visions of  those  policies. 

Readmission  of  Dismissed  Students 

A.  A  student  dismissed  from  the 
University  may  not  take  course  work 
at  the  University  until  he  or  she 
applies  and  is  considered  for  readmis- 
sion by  the  University.  No  student 
wiU  be  considered  tor  readmission 
earher  than  one  full  calendar  year 
after  the  time  of  dismissal. 

B.  Students  readmitted  to  the  University 
must  maintain  a  RiU  2.00  GPA  for 
each  semester  of  work  following  read- 
mission  and,  after  the  completion  of 
no  more  than  48  semester  hours  (or 
prior  to  graduation,  whichever  comes 
first),  must  obtain  an  overall  cumula- 
tive GPA  of  2.00  for  all  work  taken  at 
the  University.  A  student  who  fails  to 
meet  this  standard  shall  be  dismissed 
from  the  University  a  second  time  and 
is  not  eligible  for  future  readmission. 

If  a  student  is  approved  to  be  readmitted 
to  the  University  under  the  Academic 
Renewal  Policy  and  the  student  was,  prior 
to  separation  from  the  University,  a  candi- 
date in  a  program  leading  to  initial  teacher 
certification  (B.S.Ed.,  B.M.  in  music  edu- 
cation, or  B.S.  health  and  physical  educa- 
tion-teacher certification),  he  or  she  may 
not  be  readmitted  to  the  original  major. 
The  academic  renewal  smdent  must  re- 
enter in  a  nonteacher  certification  degree 
program  or  as  an  undeclared  student. 
If  a  student  readmitted  under  academic 
renewal  subsequently  qualifies  for  formal 
admission  to  teacher  education  based 
upon  the  provisions  ot  the  academic 
renewal  pohcy,  that  student  may  seek  a 
change  of  major  to  a  teacher  certification 
program  under  the  prevailing  internal 
transfer  policy  of  the  specific  program. 

Academic  Renewal  Policy 

The  Office  of  the  Associate  Provost,  at 
its  discretion,  offers  academic  renewal  to 
students  at  the  time  they  apply  for  read- 
mission. 

A.  The  Academic  Renewal  Policy  permits 
West  Chester  University  undergradu- 
ates whose  GPA  and  total  credits 
earned  make  it  impossible  for  them  to 


graduate  from  West  Chester 
University  under  any  other  form  of 
readmission,  even  if  they  were  granted 
five  more  repeats.  Students  can  be 
admitted  only  once  under  the 
Academic  Renewal  Policy,  and  it  is  not 
retroactive  if  a  student  has  already  been 
readmitted.  Students  who  were  previ- 
ously enrolled  in  an  education  degree 
program,  see  paragraph  B  below. 

1.  A  student  must  have  had  a  mini- 
mum of  a  five-year  absence  from 
West  Chester  University. 

2.  All  grades  for  courses  previously 
taken  wUl  remain  on  the  WCU 
academic  database;  academic 
renewal  vidU  be  noted  on  a  new 
transcript.  General  education  cours- 
es previously  taken  and  passed  with 
a  grade  of  C  or  better  will  be  main- 
tained on  the  student's  record  as 
T's.  Departments  may  require  their 
majors  and  minors  to  repeat  any  or 
all  major,  minor,  cognate,  and  sup- 
porting courses,  even  if  the  student 
had  earned  a  grade  of  C  (2.00)  or 
better  in  them,  and  even  if  the 
department  accepts  less  than  a  C  in 
the  course  tor  its  majors/minors. 

3.  Beginning  wdth  readmission,  stu- 
dents wiU  be  treated  as  first-time, 
first-year  admits;  i.e.,  granted  all 
privileges  of  that  group  (permitted 
to  use  the  repeat  policy,  eligible  for 
graduation  with  honors,  etc.). 
Because  these  students  are  consid- 
ered to  be  first-time  admits,  they 
have  the  option  to  enter  a  different 
major  than  the  one  in  which  they 
were  originally  enroOed.  The  select- 
ed department  will  be  notified  that 
this  is  an  academic  renewal  student, 
and  that  department  has  the  right 
to  refiise  admission  to  its  programs. 

4.  Academic  renewal  students  will  be 
treated  as  readmits  in  terms  of  cata- 
log academic  rulings.  General  edu- 
cation, major,  minor,  and  cognate 
areas  are  based  on  the  catalog  in  the 
year  they  were  granted  academic 
renewal.  Students  ptu'suing  an  edu- 
cation degree  need  to  refer  to  the 
paragraph  above  concerning  this. 

B.  If  a  student  is  approved  for  readmis- 
sion to  the  University  under  the  aca- 
demic renewal  policy  and  the  student 
was,  prior  to  separation  from  the 
University,  a  candidate  in  a  program 
leading  to  initial  teacher  certification 
(B.S.Ed.,  B.M.  in  music  education, 
or  B.S.  in  health  and  physical  educa- 
tion -  teacher  certification),  he  or  she 


may  not  be  readmitted  to  the  original 
major.  The  academic  renewal  student 
must  re-enter  either  in  a  program 
that  does  not  lead  to  teacher  certifi- 
cation, or  as  an  undeclared  student. 

1 .  If  a  student  readmitted  under  acad- 
emic renewal  wishes  to  apply  for 
formal  admission  to  teacher  educa- 
tion status,  that  student  may  seek  a 
change  of  major  to  a  teacher  certifi- 
cation program  under  the  prevailing 
internal  transfer  policy  of  the  specif- 
ic program.  The  student  must  meet 
all  requirements  for  formal  admis- 
sion to  the  desired  program,  includ- 
ing the  minimum  cumulative  GPA. 

2.  When  the  student  applies  to  re- 
enter a  program  leading  to  teacher 
certification,  the  qualifying  cumu- 
lative GPA  will  be  based  on  the 

a.  grades  earned  in  those  courses 
which  were  retained  in  the 
renewal  process  (even  though 
these  courses  no  longer  con- 
tribute to  the  WCU  cumulative 
GPA) 

b.  grades  of  any  transfer  courses 
and 

c.  grades  earned  at  WCU  after 
returning  under  renewal  (a 
minimum  of  15  credits) 

Taking  Courses  Off  Campus 

West  Chester  University  smdents  may 
take  courses  off  campus  and  transfer  the 
credits.  Credit  for  these  courses  will  trans- 
fer in  to  West  Chester  University  only  if 
the  student's  cumulative  GPA  from  the 
institution  where  the  courses  are  taken  is 
2.00  or  higher  on  a  4.00  grading  scale. 
Grades  received  in  courses  taken  at  other 
institutions  are  not  calculated  in  the  West 
Chester  cumulative  GPA;  only  the  credits 
may  be  transferred.  All  minimum  grade 
requirements  of  the  student's  major/minor 
program  for  individual  courses  also  must 
be  met  for  credit  to  transfer.  This  policy 
became  effective  September  1999.  The 
equivalency  of  the  desired  course  must  be 
established  before  the  student  takes  the 
course  off  campus.  Prerequisites  also  must 
be  met  before  the  courses  wiQ  be  trans- 
ferred into  the  University. 
Departments  determine  which  courses 
at  other  schools  are  equivalent  to  specif- 
ic courses  in  their  department  so  that 
they  can  evaluate  incoming  transfer 
credits.  They  must  inform  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  of  those  equivalencies,  and 
the  Registrar  must  keep  a  record  of 
those  equivalencies.  If  equivalency  has 
been  established  for  incoming  transfer 


H      Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


students,  it  also  exists  for  matriculated 
West  Chester  students  who  wish  to  take 
the  course  off  campus. 
The  student  should  contact  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  to  determine  which  course  is 
equivalent.  If  an  agreement  exists,  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  wiU  specif}'  the 
course  to  be  taken  and  sign  the  form  to 
indicate  equivalency.  If  there  is  no  record 
of  equivalency'  for  this  course  at  the  stu- 
dent's chosen  school,  the  office  cannot 
sign  the  form.  In  those  cases,  the  student 
must  contact  the  chair  ot  the  West 
Chester  University'  department  that  offers 
the  course  and  have  equivalenc}'  deter- 
mined. The  signature  of  the  registrar  or 
the  course's  department  chair  indicates 
equivalency  onlv,  it  does  not  grant  or  deny 
approval  to  take  the  course  off  campus. 
Procedure:  To  ensure  that  equivalencies 
are  current,  the  Office  of  the  Registrar 
will  establish  a  schedule  for  obtaining 
current  syllabi  and  supporting  docu- 
ments from  institutions  that  are  most 
frequendv  involved  in  transfer  credit 
evaluations.  The  Office  of  the  Registrar 
wdU  make  this  information  available  to 
department  chairs  to  assist  them  in 
updating  equivalenc}'  evalutions. 
NOTE:  Undergraduate  students  who 
take  and  complete  a  course  at  West 
Chester  Universitv  mav  not  repeat  the 
course  at  another  institution  and  have 
the  credits  or  grade  count  towards  a 
West  Chester  degree. 

Transfer  of  Credit 

Credit  mav  be  granted  for  equivalent 
courses  completed  in  accredited  institu- 
tions of  higher  education.  Credit  for  work 
completed  at  an  unaccredited  institution 
may  be  granted  on  the  recommendation 
of  the  student's  major  department  in  con- 
sultation with  the  school  or  college  dean 
and  transfer  credit  analyst.  (See  also 
"Admission  to  West  Chester"  and  the  sec- 
tion on  "Taking  Courses  Off  Campus.") 
Effective  for  students  who  entered  the 
Universitv'  after  September  1973,  D 
grades  are  accepted  for  transfer  if  the 
credit  is  for  equivalent  courses  within  the 
framework  of  general  requirements  or  free 
electives,  provided  the  transferred  course 
does  not  satisfy  a  major  field  requirement 
as  well.  The  student  also  must  have  a  2.00 
overall  GPA  from  the  institution  from 
which  they  are  transferring. 
Effective  for  students  who  enter  the 
Universit}'  as  of  fall  1996,  grades  in  a 
course  submitted  tor  transfer  as  a  major 
program  requirement  must  be  the  same 
or  higher  than  the  minimum  grade 


required  by  the  department.  For  exam- 
ple, if  a  program  requires  that  a  student 
earn  a  B  or  better  in  a  major  program 
requirement,  then  the  student  requesting 
transferring  credit  from  another  institu- 
tion must  have  earned  a  minimum  of  B 
in  the  parallel  course.  If  a  student  earns  a 
lower  grade  than  the  requirement,  the 
department  may  require  the  course  to  be 
repeated  at  West  Chester  University. 
If  a  student  changes  his  or  her  major, 
grades  originallv  approved  for  transfer 
wUl  be  re-evaluated  by  the  new  major 
department. 

Effective  fall  1998,  no  course  equivalen- 
cy transfer  credit  will  be  given  for  WCU 
courses  numbered  at  the  300  or  400 
level,  unless  the  courses  are  taken  at  an 
institution  that  grants  a  baccalaureate 
degree.  Departments  have  the  right  to 
accept  courses  for  their  majors  as  XXX 
199  or  TRN  199  credits.  An  exception 
will  be  made  for  departments  that  have 
already  established,  bv  fall  1998,  equiva- 
lenc}' with  nonbaccalaureate  institutions 
for  transferring  courses  at  the  300  level. 
Those  established  equivalency  agree- 
ments wUl  remain  in  effect. 

IN  ORDER  TO  RECEIVE  FULL 
CREDIT  FOR  COURSES 
TAKEN  ELSEWHERE  AND 
FOR  PROFICIENCIES 
DEMONSTRATED  ON 
ADVANCED  PLACEMENT  OR 
COLLEGE  LEVEL  EXAMINA- 
TION PROGRAM  (CLEP) 
EXAMINATIONS,  THE 
TRANSFER  STUDENT 
SHOULD  HAVE  THIS  WORK 
EVALUATED  PRIOR  TO 
.ENROLLING  IN  ANYPOTEN- 
TL\LLY  EQUIVALENT 
COURSE  AT  WEST  CHESTER. 

Transfer  students  should  refer  to  the 
Academic  Passport  Policy  under  "Ad- 
missions." Specifics  of  the  Academic 
Passport  Polic}'  implications  for  West 
Chester  University  students  can  be 
obtained  from  the  Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Policy  on  Correspondence  Courses 

The  Universitv'  does  not  allow  credit  tor 
courses  taken  through  correspondence. 

Advanced  Placement  Program 

Courses  taken  under  the  Advanced 
Placement  Program  offered  bv  the  College 
Entrance  Examination  Board  ma\'  be 
applied  toward  advanced  placement  in  the 
University  and/or  toward  credit  require- 
ments for  graduation.  Courses  taken 
under  the  Advanced  Placement  Program 


offered  by  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board  may  be  applied 
toward  advanced  placement  in  the 
Universitv  and/or  toward  credit  require- 
ments for  graduation.  For  information 
about  the  Advanced  Placement  Program, 
contact  the  College  Board  directiy.  For 
questions  about  West  Chester  University's 
policy,  see  the  Tacts"  section  of  the 
Registrar's  web  page. 

Experiential  Learning  Credits 
(Life  Learning  Experience) 

West  Chester  Universitv  offers  three 
programs  that  assess  learning  acquired 
outside  of  the  traditional  classroom.  The 
University  evaluates  and  awards  credits 
on  a  course  basis;  therefore,  students 
must  demonstrate  competence  in  a  par- 
ticular course,  not  a  general  body  of 
knowledge.  Students  mav  earn  a  maxi- 
mum of  32  credits  through  any  combi- 
nation of  these  three  programs. 
CLEP — the  College  Level 
Examination  Program  is  a  series  of 
standardized  tests  offered  by  the 
College  Board  in  appro.ximately  30 
different  subject  areas.  West  Chester 
Universit}'  accepts  the  examinations, 
for  degree  credit  only,  in  which  the 
score  is  in  the  50th  percentile  or 
above.  The  examinations  are  given  at 
the  Universitv  ever}'  month  but 
December.  West  Chester  University 
does  NOT  accept  the  general  exami- 
nations of  CLEP.  Information, 
including  fees,  test  dates,  available 
exams,  etc.,  is  available  through  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar. 

Portfolio  Development  and 
Assessment — Students  may  choose  to 
develop  a  portfolio  as  a  means  of 
demonstrating  competence  in  a 
course.  A  portfolio  consists  of  a  brief 
autobiographical  sketch,  and  extensive 
description  of  the  student's  learning 
ex-periences  and  supporting  documen- 
tation such  as  a  job  description,  cer- 
tificates from  training  courses,  letters 
of  recommendation,  etc.  The  portfolio 
is  evaluated  bv  an  appropriate  facult}' 
member  who  will  also  usuall}'  require 
an  interview.  The  charge  for  portfolio 
assessment  is  one-half  the  tuition  for 
the  course.  Information  describing 
portfolio  assessment  is  available 
through  the  Center  for  Adult  Studies. 

Credit  by  Ejcamination — The  third 
option  is  Credit  by  Examination  which 
is  described  earlier  in  this  catalog. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Requirements  for  Graduation 

A  student  is  recommended  for  gradua- 
tion upon  the  satisfactor)'  completion  of 
a  minimum  of  120  semester  hours  at 
the  100  level  or  above  and  upon  fulfill- 
ment of  all  categories  of  the  require- 
ments for  his  or  her  degree.  A  minimum 
cumulative  GPA  of  2.00  (C)  is  required 
for  graduation.  Specific  programs,  in 
accordance  with  University*  procedures, 
may  set  other  higher  standards  and  may 
require  more  than  120  credits  tor  com- 
pletion of  the  degree.  Degree  require- 
ments are  detailed  under  the  heading  of 
the  subject  field.  See  also  "Requirements 
for  the  Baccalaureate  Degree."  A  student 
must  file  for  graduation  no  later  than  the 
end  of  the  junior  year.  It  is  imperative 
that  the  student  meet  with  his  or  her 
academic  ad\'iser.  Students  can  obtain  a 
copy  of  the  graduation  checklist  trom  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  Effective  May 
2004  graduation,  any  student  currently 
matriculated  in  the  University  may  grad- 
uate after  completion  of  120  credits, 
PROVIDED: 

a.  He/she  has  completed  all  general 
education  requirements,  which 
include  nine  credits  ot  free/student 
electives,  that  are  specified  in  the  cat- 
alog for  the  vear  that  the  student  was 
most  recently  accepted  into  WCU. 

b.  AND  he/she  has  completed  all 
courses  required  by  the  major,  to 
include  all  supporting  (cognate) 
courses. 

c.  AND  he/she  is  only  eliminating  free 
electives  within  the  major,  but  not 
the  nine  credits  of  general  education 
free/student  electives  (needed  in  "a" 
above). 

Any  senior  who  does  not  complete  all 
degree  requirements  within  30  calendar 
days  of  the  end  of  the  term  in  which  he 
or  she  intends  to  graduate  must  pay  the 
diploma  fee  again  before  an  updated 
diploma  will  be  issued.  Such  a  student, 
however,  does  have  the  right  to  request  a 
letter  from  the  Universit)'  confirming  his 
or  her  graduation  after  all  requirements 
have  been  satisfactorily  completed. 
The  permanent  record  (transcript) 
records  all  degrees,  majors,  and  minors 
completed,  but  a  diploma  only  shows 
one  degree.  Students  who  simultaneously 
complete  two  undergraduate  degrees  and 
who  wish  to  receive  two  diplomas,  each 
printed  with  one  of  their  degrees,  may 
do  so  by  paying  a  second  diploma  fee. 


Resident  Credit  Requirement 

To  qualify  for  graduation,  a  student 
must  take  at  least  30  semester  hours  of 
credit  bevond  the  general  education 
courses  at  West  Chester.  Normally,  the 
student  will  take  the  last  30  semester 
hours  at  West  Chester.  In  addition,  a 
student  must  take  at  least  50  percent  of 
the  courses  in  his  or  her  major  or  minor 
discipline  (excluding  cognate  courses)  at 
West  Chester  University. 

Anticipated  Time  for  Degree 
Completion 

It  is  the  expectation  that  a  student  should 
anticipate  being  able  to  graduate  in 
eight  consecutive  fall/spring  semesters. 
This  expectation  would  not  apply  if  any 
of  the  following  conditions  exist: 

1 .  A  student  needs  to  complete  devel- 
opmental courses 

2.  A  student  enters  the  major  of  gradu- 
ation after  the  first  semester  of 
his/her  first  year 

3.  A  student  transfers  to  West  Chester 
Universitv'  and  has  compiled  courses 
that  do  not  fit  into  his/her  current 
program 

4.  A  student  fails  to  meet  the  minimal 
standards  of  academic  performance  of 
the  University  of  his/her  major  pro- 
gram 

5.  A  student  chooses  to  repeat  one  or 
more  courses 

6.  A  student  fails  to  follow  guidelines 
set  forth  to  meet  major  or  University 
requirements 

7.  A  student  who  selects  the  culture 
cluster  option  requires  an  extra 
semester  to  meet  that  requirement 

In  order  to  graduate  following  (or  with- 
in) the  expectation,  it  is  the  student's 
responsibility  to  consult  with  the  major 
department  for  course  scheduling  guide- 
lines in  the  major. 

The  expectation,  however,  is  invalidated 
when  the  following  conditions  exist: 

1.  A  program  requires  more  than  120 
hours  for  completion 

2.  The  sequencing  of  courses  requires 
more  than  eight  consecutive  fall/ 
spring  semesters 

3.  A  program  requires  the  completion 
of  requirements  that  can  only  be  met 
in  summer 

Nothing  in  this  polic}-  prevents  the  offer- 
ing of  a  program  that  does  not  meet 
expectations.  Such  programs,  however,  are 
so  identified  in  the  Universit)'  catalog. 
Each  department  will  determine  when 
its  courses  will  be  offered. 


Required  Notice  of  Intention  to 
Graduate 

Students  intending  to  graduate  in  May 
or  August  must  come  to  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  and  give  notice  of  inten- 
tion to  graduate  no  later  than  March  1. 
August  graduates  may  participate  in  the 
Mav  commencement  exercises  if  they 
file  their  notices  of  intention  to  graduate 
by  February  1.  Students  intending  to 
graduate  in  December  must  give  such 
notice  no  later  than  November  1.  The 
baccalaureate  degree  will  not  be  granted 
unless  this  requirement  is  met. 
After  submitting  this  notice,  the  student 
wUI  receive  a  cap  and  gown  order  form 
and  a  bill  for  the  graduation  fee.  He  or  she 
also  will  specif\'  how  his  or  her  name 
should  be  shown  on  the  diploma  and 
commencement  program.  Unless  the  dead- 
line is  met,  it  will  be  impossible  for  the 
University  to  order  a  diploma,  place  the  name 
on  the  forthcoming  commencement  program, 
or  have  the  transcript  reflect  the  appropriate 
date  of  graduation.  For  this  reason,  all  stu- 
dents are  urged  to  review  their  records  of 
progress  towards  graduation  with  their 
adviser  and  to  file  for  graduation  two 
semesters  prior  to  the  date  of  graduation. 

Graduation  Honors 

Graduation  honors  are  awarded  as  follows: 

Cumulative  GPA 

cum  laude  3.25  -  3.49 

magna  cum  laude  3.50  -  3.74 

summa  cum  laude  3.75  -  4.00 

The  honors  list  for  commencement  is 
based  on  the  GPA  from  the  next  to  last 
semester  before  a  student  graduates.  A 
transfer  student  must  have  60  hours  of 
grades  reported  at  West  Chester 
University  prior  to  that  time  to  be  so 
recognized.  Those  who  do  not  attain 
honors  distinctions  untU  the  end  of  their 
final  semester,  or  those  transfer  students 
with  honor  distinction  who  do  not  com- 
plete 60  hours  until  the  end  of  the  final 
semester,  will  have  recognition  of  their 
achievement  on  their  final  transcripts, 
where  all  honors  distinctions  are 
recorded. 

Transcripts 

Requests  for  official  transcripts  are  made 
bv  writing  to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar, 
Elsie  O.  BuU  Center.  The  fee  is  S3  for 
each  transcript.  Immediate  transcripts 
are  $5  upon  request.  Checks,  payable  to 
West  Chester  University,  must  accom- 
pany either  request. 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


Directory  Information  —  Rights 
and  Privacy  Act  of  1974 

West  Chester  University  from  time  to 
time  makes  public  certain  kinds  of  infor- 
mation about  students,  such  as  the  names 
of  those  who  receive  scholarships,  who 
hold  offices,  or  who  are  members  of  ath- 
letic teams.  Various  kinds  of  campus 
directories  are  published  throughout  the 
year  to  help  members  of  the  University 
community  locate  and  communicate  with 
each  other.  The  commencement  pro- 
grams publish  the  names  of  those  who 
have  received  degrees  during  the  year. 
The  Family  Educational  Rights  and 
Privacy  Act  of  1974  defines  the  term 
"directory  information"  to  include  the  fol- 
lowing categories  of  information:  the  stu- 
dent's name,  address,  telephone  number, 
e-mail  address,  date  and  place  of  birth, 
major  field  of  study,  class  schedule,  class 
roster,  participation  in  officially  recognized 
activities  and  sports,  weight  and  height  of 
members  of  athletic  teams,  date  of  atten- 
dance, degrees  and  awards  received,  and 
the  most  recent  pre\'ious  educational 
agency  or  institution  attended  by  the  stu- 
dent. The  University  wdU  limit  informa- 
tion that  is  made  public  to  categories  such 
as  these  but  wiU  not  necessarily  publish  all 
such  information  in  every  listing. 
Undergraduate  students  who  do  not  wish 
to  have  any  or  all  of  such  directory 
information  published  without  their 
prior  consent  must  file  notice  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar.  Graduate  stu- 
dents must  file  notice  in  the  Office  of 
Graduate  Studies  and  Extended 
Education.  The  student  must  bring  a 
signed,  dated  statement  specifying  items 
not  to  be  pubUshed  to  the  appropriate 
office  within  the  first  15  calendar  days 
after  the  beginning  of  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters. 

Student  Name  Changes 

Any  student  wishing  to  change  his/her 
name  from  that  currently  on  record 
must  provide  legal  documentation  sup- 
porting the  change.  This  must  be  the 
original  or  a  notarized  photocopy  of  a 
court-generated  document,  such  as  a  mar- 
riage license,  court  order,  divorce  decree, 
etc.  A  driver's  license  is  not  adequate. 
Requests  for  name  changes  received 
through  the  mail  will  be  acknowledged 
by  letter. 

Exception  to  Academic  PoUcies 

Students  may  file  a  petition  that 
requests  exception  to  academic  pohcies. 
Petition  forms  are  available  in  the  Office 


of  the  Registrar  and  the  Office  of  the 
Associate  Provost.  Students  who  may 
request  an  exception  because  of  a  dis- 
ability should  refer  to  page  32,  "Services 
for  Students  with  Disabilities." 

The  Family  Educational  Rights 
and  Privacy  Act 

The  Family  Educational  Rights  and 
Privacy  Act  of  1974,  as  amended,  is  a 
federal  law  which  states  (a)  that  a  writ- 
ten institutional  pohcy  must  be  estab- 
lished and  (b)  that  a  statement  of  adopt- 
ed procedures  covering  the  privacy  rights 
of  students  be  made  available.  The  law 
provides  that  the  institution  will  main- 
tain the  confidentiality  of  student  educa- 
tion records. 

West  Chester  University  accords  all 
rights  under  the  law  to  students  who  are 
in  attendance  at  the  University,  and  in 
certain  instances  to  the  parents  of 
dependent  students,  as  defined  in 
Section  152  of  the  Internal  Revenue 
Code  of  1954.  Basically,  a  dependent 
student  is  a  student  whose  parent(s) 
provides  more  than  half  of  his/her  sup- 
port. Generally,  the  University  does  not 
provide  information  to  parents  because 
of  this  act.  However,  exceptions  are 
made  if: 

1.  the  student  must  give  his  or  her  par- 
ents written  consent  if  the  student  is 
independent;  or 

2.  the  parents  must  provide  a  certified 
copy  of  their  most  recent  Federal 
Income  Tax  Form  reflecting  depen- 
dency status  of  the  son/daughter 
which  must  be  on  file  in  the  Office 
of  the  Registrar. 

No  one  outside  the  institution  shall  have 
access  to,  nor  will  the  institution  dis- 
close, any  information  from  students' 
education  records  without  the  students' 
written  consent  except  to  personnel 
within  the  institution,  to  officials  of 
other  institutions  in  which  students  seek 
to  enroU,  to  persons  or  organizations 
providing  students  financial  aid,  to 
accrediting  agencies  carrying  out  their 
accreditation  function,  to  persons  in 
comphance  with  a  judicial  order,  a  valid 
subpoena,  and  to  persons  in  an  emer- 
gency in  order  to  protect  the  health  or 
safety  of  students  or  other  persons.  All 
these  exceptions  are  permitted  under  the 
act. 

Within  the  West  Chester  University 
community,  only  those  members,  indi- 
vidually or  collectively,  acting  on  the 
student's  educational  interest  are  allowed 
access  to  student  education  records. 


These  members  include,  without  Umita- 
tion,  personnel  in  the  offices  of  the 
Registrar,  Bursar,  Financial  Ad, 
Admissions,  and  academic  personnel 
within  the  hmitations  of  their  need  to 
know. 

At  its  discretion  the  institution  may 
provide  directory  information  in  accor- 
dance with  the  provisions  of  the  act  to 
include  student  name,  address,  tele- 
phone number,  e-mail  address,  date  and 
place  of  birth,  major  field  of  study,  class 
schedules,  class  rosters,  dates  of  atten- 
dance, degrees  and  awards  received,  the 
most  recent  previous  educational  agency 
or  institution  attended  by  the  student, 
participation  in  officially  recognized 
activities  and  sports,  and  weight  and 
height  of  members  of  athletic  teams. 
Students  may  withhold  directory  infor- 
mation by  notifying  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  in  writing  within  15  calendar 
days  after  the  beginning  of  each  fall 
semester. 

Requests  for  nondisclosure  will  be  hon- 
ored by  the  institution  for  only  one  aca- 
demic year;  therefore,  authorization  to 
withhold  directory  information  must  be 
filled  annually  in  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar. 

The  law  provides  students  with  the  right 
to  inspect  and  review  information  con- 
tained in  their  education  records,  to 
challenge  the  contents  of  their  education 
records,  to  have  a  hearing  if  the  out- 
come of  the  challenge  is  unsatisfactory, 
and  to  submit  explanatory  statements  for 
inclusion  in  their  files  if  the  decisions  of 
the  hearing  panels  are  unacceptable.  The 
University  Registrar  at  West  Chester 
University  has  been  designated  by  the 
institution  to  coordinate  the  inspection 
and  review  procedures  for  student  edu- 
cation records,  which  include  admis- 
sions, personal,  and  academic.  Students 
wishing  to  review  their  education 
records  must  make  written  requests  to 
the  Office  of  the  Registrar  listing  the 
item  or  items  of  interest.  Only  records 
covered  by  the  act  will  be  made  available 
within  45  days  of  the  request.  Students 
may  have  copies  made  of  their  records 
with  certain  exceptions,  or  a  copy  of  the 
academic  record  for  which  a  financial 
hold  exists.  These  copies  will  be  made  at 
the  students'  expense  at  prevaiHng  rates 
which  are  hsted  in  the  current  catalog. 
Education  records  do  not  include 
records  of  instructional,  administrative, 
and  educational  personnel  which  are  the 
sole  possession  of  the  maker  and  are  not 
accessible  or  revealed  to  any  individual 


Academic  Policies  and  Procedures 


except  a  temporary  substitute,  records  of 
the  law  enforcement  unit,  student  health 
records,  employment  records,  or  alumni 
records.  Health  records,  however,  may 
be  reviewed  by  physicians  of  the  stu- 
dents' choosing. 

Students  may  not  inspect  and  review  the 
following  as  outlined  by  the  act:  finan- 
cial information  submitted  by  their  par- 
ents, confidential  letters  and  recommen- 
dations associated  with  admissions, 
employment  or  job  placement,  or  honors 
to  which  they  have  waived  their  rights 
of  inspection  and  review;  or  education 
records  containing  information  about 
more  than  one  student,  in  which  case 
the  institution  will  permit  access  only  to 
that  part  of  the  record  which  pertains  to 
the  inquiring  student.  The  institution  is 
not  required  to  permit  students  to 
inspect  and  review  confidential  letters 
and  recommendations  placed  in  their 
files  prior  to  January  1,  1975,  provided 
those  letters  were  collected  under  estab- 
lished policies  of  confidentiality  and 
were  used  only  for  the  purposes  for 
which  they  were  collected. 
Students  who  beheve  that  their  educa- 
tion records  contain  information  that  is 
inaccurate  or  misleading,  or  is  otherwise 
in  violation  ot  their  privacy  or  other 
rights,  may  discuss  their  problems  infor- 
mally with  the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  If 
the  decisions  are  in  agreement  with  the 
students'  requests,  the  appropriate 
records  will  be  amended.  If  not,  the  stu- 
dents will  be  notified  within  a  reason- 
able amount  of  time  that  the  records 
will  not  be  amended,  and  they  wUl  be 
informed  by  the  Office  of  the  Registrar 
of  their  right  to  a  formal  hearing. 
Student  requests  for  a  formal  hearing 
must  be  made  in  writing  to  the  associate 
provost  who,  within  a  reasonable  period 
of  time  after  receiving  such  request,  will 
inform  students  of  the  date,  place,  and 
time  of  the  hearing.  Students  may  pre- 
sent evidence  relevant  to  the  issues 
raised  and  may  be  assisted  or  represent- 
ed at  the  hearings  by  one  or  more  per- 
sons of  their  choice,  including  attorneys, 
at  the  students'  expense.  The  hearing 
panels  which  wiU  adjudicate  such  chal- 
lenges will  be  the  individuals  designated 
by  the  University. 

Decisions  of  the  hearing  panels  will  be 
final,  will  be  based  solely  on  the  evi- 
dence presented  at  the  hearing,  and  will 
consist  of  written  statements  summariz- 
ing the  evidence  and  stating  the  reasons 
for  the  decisions,  and  will  be  delivered 
to  all  parties  concerned.  Their  education 


records  will  be  corrected  or  amended  in 
accordance  with  the  decisions  of  the 
hearing  panels,  if  the  decisions  are  in 
favor  of  the  student.  If  the  decisions  are 
unsatisfactory  to  the  student,  the  student 
may  place  with  the  education  record 
statements  commenting  on  the  informa- 
tion in  the  records,  or  statements  setting 
forth  any  reasons  for  disagreeing  with 
the  decisions  of  the  hearing  panels.  The 
statements  will  be  placed  in  the  educa- 
tion records,  maintained  as  part  of  the 
students'  records,  and  released  whenever 
the  records  in  question  are  disclosed. 
Students  who  believe  adjudications  of 
their  challenges  were  unfair  or  not  in 
keeping  with  the  provisions  of  the  act 
may  request,  in  writing,  assistance  from 
the  president  of  the  institution  to  aid 
them  in  filing  complaints  with  The 
Family  Educational  Rights  and  Privacy 
Act  Office  (FERPA),  Department  of 
Education,  Room  4074,  Switzer 
Building,  Washington,  D.C.  20202. 
Revisions  and  clarifications  wUl  be  pub- 
Hshed  as  experience  with  the  law  and 
the  institution's  policy  warrants. 
This  policy  has  been  adopted  in  accor- 
dance with  the  Family  Educational 
Rights  and  Privacy  Act,  20  U.S.C. 
1232(g),  and  the  regulations  promulgat- 
ed thereunder  at  34  C.F.R.  99.1  et  seq., 
and  that  reference  should  be  made  to 
that  statute  and  regulations  for  addition- 
al information. 

Please  contact  the  Office  of  the 
Registrar  with  any  questions. 

ADA  Policy  Statement 

West  Chester  University  is  committed 
to  equality  of  opportunity  and  freedom 
from  discrimination  for  all  students, 
employees,  applicants  for  admission  or 
employment,  and  all  participants  in 
pubhc  University-sponsored  activities. 
In  keeping  with  this  commitment,  and 
in  accordance  with  the  Americans  with 
Disabihfies  Act  of  1990  and  the 
Rehabilitation  Act  of  1973,  the 
University  will  make  every  effort  to  pro- 
vide equahty  of  opportunity  and  free- 
dom from  discrimination  for  all  mem- 
bers of  the  University  community  and 
visitors  to  the  University,  regardless  ot 
any  disability  an  individual  may  have. 
Accordingly,  the  University  has  taken 
positive  steps  to  make  University  facili- 
ties accessible  to  individuals  with  dis- 
abilities and  has  established  procedures 
to  provide  reasonable  accommodations 
to  allow  individuals  with  disabiHties  to 
participate  in  University  programs. 


The  director  of  the  Office  of  Social 
Equit\'  has  been  designated  as  the  ADA 
coordinator  for  the  Universit}'.  In  this 
capacity,  the  director  of  Social  Equity 
works  with  the  University  ADA 
Committee  to  advance  University  poU- 
cies  and  procedures  that  will  provide 
equal  educational  and  employment 
opportunities  for  individuals  with  dis- 
abilities. The  Office  of  Social  Equity  has 
an  estabhshed  process  to  investigate  and 
address  any  complaints  of  discrimination 
on  the  basis  of  a  disabihty.  Any  individ- 
ual who  has  a  suggestion,  question,  or 
complaint  regarding  ADA  issues  is 
encouraged  to  contact  the  director  of 
Social  Equity,  13/15  University  Avenue, 
610-436-2433. 

West  Chester  University  has  also  estab- 
lished the  Office  of  Services  for 
Students  with  Disabilities,  which  oper- 
ates as  a  centrahzed  service  for  address- 
ing the  needs  of  students  with  disabili- 
ties and  as  a  resource  center  for  stu- 
dents, faculty,  and  staff.  A  student  who 
wants  to  request  an  accommodation 
and/or  receive  specialized  services 
should  contact  the  director  of  the 
OSSD.  The  poHcies  and  procedures 
used  by  the  OSSD  are  contained  in  the 
West  Chester  University  Handbook  on 
Disabilities,  which  is  available  in  the 
OSSD,  105  Lawrence  Center,  V/TDD 
610-436-3217. 

Various  housing  facilities  and  services 
are  available  for  resident  students  with 
disabilities.  For  this  and  other  informa- 
tion about  on-campus  housing  and  food 
service,  please  contact  the  Office  of 
Residence  Life  and  Housing,  238  Sykes 
Student  Union,  610-436-3307. 
The  ADA  specialist  of  the  Office  of 
Human  Resource  Services  has  been  des- 
ignated as  the  contact  person  for 
employees  and  applicants  seeking  to 
request  an  accommodation.  The  ADA 
specialist  is  located  at  201  Carter  Drive, 
610-436-2129. 

West  Chester  University  is  involved  in 
the  ongoing  process  of  renovating  cam- 
pus buildings  to  ensure  accessibility  for 
all  individuals.  Many  of  our  buUdings 
are  currently  accessible,  but  some  are 
awaiting  renovation.  To  find  out 
whether  a  particular  location  is  accessi- 
ble or  how  to  access  a  location,  please 
contact  the  space  manager  at  610-436- 
3348.  To  make  arrangements  for 
changes  to  a  particular  facility  to  ensure 
accessibility,  please  contact  the  manager 
of  campus  projects  at  610-436-3599. 


Structure  of  Academic  Affairs 


COLLEGE  OF  ARTS  .\ND  SCIENCES 

Charles  D.  Hurt,  Dean 

Jennie  Skerl,  Associate  Dean 

Anthropology  and  Sociology 

Art 

Biology 

Chemistry 

Communication  Studies 

Computer  Science 

English 

Foreign  Languages 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

History 

Interdisciplinary  Programs 


Liberal  Studies 
Mathematics 
Pharmaceutical  Product 

Development 
Philosophy 

Physics  and  Pre-Engineering 
Pre-Medical 
Psycholog)' 
Theatre  Arts 
Women's  Studies 


SCHOOL  OF  BUSINESS  AND  PUBLIC  AFFAIRS 

Christopher  M.  Fiorentino,  Dean 

Cynthia  Benzing,  Associate  Dean 

Accounting 

Criminal  Justice 

Economics  and  Finance 

Geography  and  Planning 

Management 


Marketing 
Political  Science 
Social  Work 
Graduate  Social  Work 


SCHOOL  OF  EDUCATION 

Tony  W.  Johnson,  Dean 
Joseph  Malak,  Associate  Dean 

Early  Childhood  and 
Special  Education 

Elementary  Education 

Counseling  and  Educational 
Psychology 


Literacy 

Professional  and 

Secondary  Education 

Teacher  Certification 


SCHOOL  OF  MUSIC 

Timothy  V.  Blair,  Dean 

Instrumental  Music 

Keyboard  Music 

Music  Education 

Music  Histon'  and  Literature 


Music  Theory  and 

Composition 
Vocal  and  Choral  Music 


OFFICE  OF  THE  ASSOCIATE  PROVOST 

SheUa  Patterson,  Associate  Provost 
Admissions 
Assessment 
Financial  Aid 
General  Education 
Graduate  Studies  and  Extended  Education 

•  Adult  Studies 

•  Center  for  International  Programs 
Honors  Program 

Registrar 

Quincy  Moore,  Dean,  Undergraduate  Studies  and  Student  Support 
Services 

Academic  Development  Program 
Office  of  Services  for  Students  with  Disabilities 
Learning  Assistance  and  Resource  Center 
Pre-Major  Academic  Advising  Program 
Educational  Development 

LIBRARY 

Richard  H.  Swain,  Director 

Mary  Anne  Burns-Duffy,  Interim  Associate  Director 


SCHOOL  OF  HEALTH  SCIENCES 

Donald  E.  Barr,  Dean 
Ann  Stowe,  Associate  Dean 
Communicative  Disorders  Nursing 

Health  Sports  Medicine 

Kinesiology 


Undergraduate  Programs  at  West  Chester 


Students  may  enroll  at  West  Chester  University  in  programs  leading  to  the  following  degrees  or  certificates: 

Bachelor  of  Arts  (B.A.)  Bachelor  of  Science  (B.S.)  Bachelor  of  Social  Work  (B.S.W.)* 


Bachelor  of  Fine  Arts  (B.F.A.) 
Bachelor  of  Music  (B.M.) 


Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education  (B.S.Ed.) 
Bachelor  of  Science  in  Nursing  (B.S.N.) 


Local  Certificate  (CERTIF) 
Teaching  Cerfificate  (TCHG  CERT) 


Accounting  B.S. 

American  Studies  B.A. 

Anthropology  B.A. 

Art  B.A. 

Athletic  Training  B.S.,  CERTIF 

Biochemistry  B.S. 

Biology  B.A.,  B.S.,  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG 
CERT 

Biology-Cell  and  Molecular,  Ecology, 
Medical  Technology,  Microbiology,  B.S. 
Medical  Technology  CERTIF 

Business  Management  B.S. 

Chemistry  B.S.,  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG  CERT 

Chemistry- Biology  B.S. 

Citizenship  Education  (formerly  Social 
Studies)  TCHG  CERT 

Clinical  Chemistry  B.S. 

Communication  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG  CERT 

Communication  Studies  B.A. 

Communicative  Disorders  B.A. 

Comparative  Literature  B.A. 

Computer  and  Information  Sciences  B.S. 

Crinunal Justice  B.S. 

Driver-Safety  Education  TCHG  CERT 

Early  Childhood  Education  B.S.Ed., 
TCHG  CERT 

Earth-Space  Science  -Astronomy  B.S.Ed. 

Earth-Space  Science  -  Geology  B.S.Ed. 

Economics  B.S. 

Elementary  Education  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG 
CERT 

English  (see  Literature)  B.S.Ed., 
TCHG  CERT 


PROGRAMS  OF  STUDY 

Environmental  Education  TCHG 
CERT 

Ethnic  Studies  CERTIF 

Finance  B.S. 

Forensic  Chemistry  B.S. 

French  B.A.,  TCHG  CERT 

General  Science  TCHG  CERT 

Geography  B.A. 

Geoscience-Earth  Systems  B.S. 

Geoscience-Geology  B.S. 

German  B.A.,  TCHG  CERT 

Health  and  Physical  Education  B.S., 
TCHG  CERT 

Health  and  Physical  Education-Exercise 
Specialist  B.S.* 

Health  Science-General  B.S. 

Health  Science-Respiratory  Care  B.S. 

History  B.A. 

Latin  B.A.,  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG  CERT 

Liberal  Studies-Arts  and  Sciences  B.A. 

Liberal  Studies-Science  and 
Mathematics  B.S. 

Liberal  Studies-Professional  Studies  B.S. 

Literature  B.A. 

Marketing  B.S. 

Mathematics  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG  CERT 

Music  Composition  B.M. 

Music  Education  B.M.,  TCHG  CERT 

Music  Performance  B.M. 

Music:  Studies  in  an  Outside  Field  B.M. 

Music  Theory  B.M. 

Nursing  B.S.N. 


Nutrition  and  Dietetics  B.S.* 

Philosophy  B.A. 

Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  B.S. 

Physical  Education  (See  Health  and 
Physical  Education) 

Physics  B.S.,  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG  CERT 

Physics-Engineering  B.S. 

Political  Science  B.A. 

Political  Science-International  Relations 

B.A. 

Political  Science-Applied  Public  Policy 

B.A. 

Pre-Medical  (see  Chemistry-Biology) 

Psychology  B.A. 

Public  Health-Environmental  B.S. 

Public  Health-Health  Promotion  B.S. 

Respiratory  Care  (See  Health  Sciences) 
B.S. 

Russian  B.A.,  TCHG  CERT 

Russian  Studies  CERTIF 

Secondary  Education  (See  individual 
concentration)  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG  CERT 

Social  Studies  (see  Citizenship  Education) 

Social  Work  B.S.W.* 

Sociology  B.A. 

Spanish  B.A.,  TCHG  CERT 

Special  Education  B.S.Ed.,  TCHG 
CERT 

Speech  Correction  TCHG  CERT 

Studio  Arts  B.F.A. 

Theatre  Arts  B.A. 

Women's  Studies  B.A. 


'Pending  Pennsylvania  State  System  of  Higher  Education  approval 


KEY 

The  following  symbols  designate  course 
attributes  in  the  course  description  sections: 
■    Culture  cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 
▲    Crosslisted  course 

•  Diverse  communities  course 


Programs  of  Study  and  Course  Offerings 


Guide  to  the  Catalog 

Departments  are  arranged  alphabetically 

CRJ 

Criminal  Justice 

KIN 

Kinesiology 

CRL 

Chemistry 

LAN 

Foreign  Languages 

within  the 

college  or  school  housing  them 

CRW 

English 

LAT 

Foreign  Languages 

(see  list  or 

1  page  54).  Interdisciplinary  pro- 

CSC 

Computer  Science 

LIN 

Foreign  Languages/Linguistics 

grams  are 
Sciences 

listed  with  the  College  of  Arts  and 

CSW 

Computer  Science 

Program 

ECE 

Early  Childhood  and  Special 

LIT 

English 

i-f  VrJ.^!  IV^^tJ  ■ 

. 

Education 

LSP 

Liberal  Studies 

Students  may  obtain  a  typical  sequence  ot 
courses  for  any  program  from  the  office 

ECO 
EDA 

Economics 
Special  Education 

MAK 
MAT 

Keyboard  Music 
Mathematics 

specified  in  this  catalog. 

EDC 

Counseling  and  Educational 

MGT 

Management 

Please  note  that  all  courses,  course  descrip- 
tions, course  sequences,  and  course  substitu- 

Psychology 

MHL 

Music  History 

EDE 

Elementary  Education 

MIS 

Management 

tions  are  subject  to  change.  Current  informa- 

EDF 

Professional  and  Secondary 

MKT 

Marketing 

tion  is  available  from  the  appropriate  depart- 

Education 

MSI 

Educational  Services 

ment  chair,  dean,  or  program  coordinator. 

EDM 

Professional  and  Secondary 

MTC 

Music  Theory  and  Composition 

Guide  to  Course  Prefixes 

Education 

MTL 

Mathematics 

Many  program  descriptions  in  this  catalog 
refer  to  courses  offered  by  other  departments 
using  a  course  abbreviation  called  a  prefix.  In 
addition,  some  course  prefixes  do  not  use  the 
logical  initials  of  the  courses  to  which  they 

EDO 
EDP 

EDR 

Professional  and  Secondary 

Education 

Counseling  and  Educational 

Psychology,  Professional  and 

Secondary  Education 

Literacy 

MUE 

MW7 

MWP 

NSG 

NSL 

OBO 

Music  Education 

Music  Theory  and  Composition 

Keyboard  Music 

Nursing 

Nursing 

Instrumental  Music 

refer  (e.g.,            

ABC  is  used  to  indicate  instru- 

EDS 

Professional  and  Secondary 

ORG 

Keyboard  Music 

mental  music  courses),  lo  assist  in  locating 

Education 

PEA 

Physical  Education/Kinesiology 

the  department  or  program  which  uses  each 

EFR 

Foreign  Languages 

PED 

Kinesiology 

prefix,  the  '  ' 

toUowing  guide  to  course  prefixes 

EGE 

Foreign  Languages 

PER 

Instrumental  Music 

is  provided. 

EIT 

Foreign  Languages 

PHI 

Philosophy 

ERU 

Foreign  Languages 
English 

PHL 

Physics 

PREFIX 

DEPARTMENT/PROGRAM 

ENG 

PHR 

Physics 

ABC 

Instrumental  Music 

ENV 

Health 

PHS 

Physics 

ACC 

Accounting 

ESP 

Foreign  Languages 

PHY 

Physics  and  Pre-Engineering 

ADM 

Administration,  Leadership  for 

ESL 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

PL\ 

Keyboard  Music 

Women 

ESS 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

PMG 

Political  Science 

AEB 

Instrumental  Music 

EXS 

Kinesiology 

POR 

Foreign  Languages 

AEO 

Instrumental  Music 

HN 

Economics  and  Finance 

PSC 

PoUtical  Science 

AER 

Educational  Services 

FLM 

English/Comparative  Literature 

PSY 

Psychology' 

AES 

Instrumental  Music 

FLU 

Instrumental  Music 

RUS 

Foreign  Languages 

AIC 

Instrumental  Music 

FRE 

Foreign  Languages 

SAX 

Instrumental  Music 

AIM 

Instrumental  Music 

FRH 

Instrumental  Music 

SCB 

Biology 

AJZ 

Instrumental  Music 

GEO 

Geography  and  Planning 

sec 

Chemistry 

ALC 

Instrumental  Music 

GER 

Foreign  Languages 

SCE 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

AMC 

Instrumental  Music 

GRE 

Foreign  Languages 

SCI 

Geology  and  Astronomy,  Physics 

AMS 

American  Studies 

GTR 

Instrumental  Music 

SMD 

Sports  Medicine 

ANT 

Anthropology  and  Sociology 

HAR 

Keyboard  Music 

SML 

Sports  Medicine 

APC 

Instrumental  Music 

HBI 

Political  Science 

SOC 

Anthropology  and  Sociology 

ARH 

Art 

HEW 

Foreign  Languages 

SPA 

Foreign  Languages 

ART 

Art 

HEA 

Healdi 

SPP 

Communicative  Disorders 

ASC 

Instrumental  Music 

HIS 

History 

SSC 

Citizenship  Education,  Ethnic 

AWC 

Instrumental  Music 

HON 

Honors  Program 

Studies,  Peace  and  Conflict 

BAR 

Instrumental  Music 

HPE 

Physical  Education 

Studies 

BAS 

Instrumental  Music 

HRP 

Instrumental  Music 

SWO 

Social  Work 

BIL 

Biology 

HTL 

Health 

TBA 

Instrumental  Music 

BIO 

Biolog>' 

INB 

Management 

THA 

Theatre  Arts 

BLA 

Marketing 

IND 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

TPT 

Instrumental  Music 

BSN 

Instrumental  Music 

INS 

Instrumental  Music 

TRB 

Instrumental  Music 

CHE 

Chemistry 

ITA 

Foreign  Languages 

VCL 

Instrumental  Music 

CHO 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

JBR 

Instrumental  Music 

VLA 

Instrumental  Music 

CLS 

Comparative  Literature  Studies, 

JRN 

English 

VLN 

Instrumental  Music 

English 

JST 

Instrumental  Music 

VOC 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

CLT 

Instrumental  Music 

JWW 

Instrumental  Music 

vol 

Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

COM 

Communication  Studies 

KEM 

Keyboard  Music 

wos 

Women's  Studies 

(previously  SPC) 

KIL 

Kinesiology 

WRT 

English 

College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Anthropolog}'  and  Sociolog}' 


Department  of  Accounting 

309A  .\nderson  Hall 

610-436-2236 

Clyde  J.  Galbraith,  Chairperson 

PROFESSOR:  A.  Naggar 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR:  LaSalle 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Hynn,  Galbraith,  Smith 

The  Department  of  Accounting  offers  a  fiill  program  of  accounting 

courses  designed  to  prepare  a  student  for  entrance  into  the  fields  ot 

public,  private,  or  governmental  accounting.  Students  successfiiUy 

completing  the  curriculum  should  be  adequate!}'  prepared  to  take  the 

Certified  Public  Accountant  (CPA)  and  Certified  Management 

Accountant  (CI\L\)  examinations. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  ACCOUNTING 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39         48  semester  hours 
Includes  COM  101  or  208  or  216  or  230, 

CSC  110  or  115  or  141,  ECO  lir,  MAT  105' 
or  107*  or  110*,  PHI  101  or  150  or  180,  and 
nine  semester  hours  of  free  electives 

2.  Business  Core  36  semester  hours 
ACC  201*,  202*;  BLA  201*;  ECO  112*, 


251*,  252*;  HN  325*;  MAT  108  or  161; 
MGT  200*,  341,  499*;  MKT  325* 

3.  Accounting  Major  Courses 
ACC  301*,  302*,  303*,  305*,  401*,  403*.  404*, 
405*,  40r 

4.  Business  Electives 
300-level  or  above  courses  in  BLA,  ECO, 
nN,  INB.  MGT,  MIS,  MKT,  or  ENG  368 

5.  Restricted  Electives 
Three  semester  hours  of  any  100-level  or  above 
nonbusiness  course 

A  minimum  of  15  credits  in  300-400  level  ACC  courses  and  a  mini- 
mum of  30  credits  in  business  courses  must  be  completed  at  WCU. 
To  enroll  in  400-level  courses,  the  followng  courses  must  have  been 
successfiilly  completed:  ACC  202,  and  ECO  251,  252. 


27  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


Accounting  Minor 

1 .  Required 

ACC  201,  202,  and  301;  ECO  111 

2.  Electives 

Any  two  of  the  tollowing  courses: 
ACC  302,  303,  305,  403,  404,  and  407 


18  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 


A  minimum  grade  of  C  must  be  attained  in  each  of  these  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ACCOUNTING 

Symbol;  ACC 

The  objective  of  the  accounting  concentration  is  to 
prepare  students  for  accounting  careers  in  business, 
for  the  CPA  examination,  and  for  the  private 
practice  of  accounting. 

201  Financial  Accounting  I  (3)  Introduction  to 
financial  accounting.  A  conceptual  approach  to 
recording,  financial  summarizing,  and  presentation 
and  e\'aluation  ot  the  financial  affairs  of  a  business 
firm. 

202  Managerial  Accounting  11  (3)  Introduction 
to  management  accounting.  Accumulating,  pro- 
cessing, and  interpreting  financial  data  to  be  used 
as  a  basis  for  making  managerial  decisions  in  a 
business  firm.  PREREQ:  ACC  201. 

205  Fraud  E.\anunation  for  Managers  (3) 
Introduction  to  tools  necessary'  to  understand  the 
prevention,  detection,  and  investigation  of 
accounting  fraud. 

301  Intermediate  Accounting  1  (3)  Anah'sis  and 
evaluation  of  assets,  liabilit)',  and  capital  account. 
Problems  of  income  measurement  and  recognition. 
PREREQ:  ACC  202. 


302  Intermediate  Accounting  II  (3) 

Continuation  of  ACC  301.  PREREQ:  ACC  301. 

303  Cost  Accounting  I  (3)  Techniques  of  product 
unit  cost  determination  and  uses  of  cost  data  in 
managerial  decisions.  PREREQ;  ACC  202. 

305  Intermediate  Accounting  III  (3)  Con- 
tinuation of  ACC  302.  PREREQ:  ACC  302. 

400  Accounting  Internship  (3-6)  The  business 
internship  for  students  in  accounting  enhances  the 
student's  educational  experience  by  proriding  a 
substantive  work  experience  in  the  business  world. 
PREREQ;  Internship  program  coordinator's 
appro\'al. 

401  Auditing  (3)  Introduction  to  auditing  as  a 
tool  for  verification  of  the  fair  representation  of 
financial  statements.  PREREQ;  ACC  302. 

403  Federal  Taxation  I  (3)  A  study  of  indiridual 
and  federal  income  taxes,  with  some  business 
application.  Emphasis  on  tax  planning  for  mini- 
mization of  tax  liability-.  PREREQ;  ACC  202. 

404  Federal  Taxation  II  (3)  A  study  of  the  princi- 
ples of  federal  income  taxation  on  corporations  and 
corporate  distributions,  partnerships,  estates,  and 
trusts.  Emphasis  is  on  tax  planning  and  researching 
complex  probkms.  PREREQ;  ACC  403. 


405  Advanced  Accounting  (3)  In-depth  study  of 
business  combinations  and  consolidations,  govern- 
ment accounting,  and  other  specialized  topics. 
PREREQ;  ACC  302. 
407  Not-for-Profit  and  Governmental 
Accounting  (3)  A  study  of  accounting  principles 
and  procedures  ot  not-tor-profit  and  governmental 
organizations.  The  course  includes  accounting  for 
the  local,  state,  and  federal  government,  hospitals, 
colleges  and  universities,  public  schools,  and  chari- 
ties. PREREQ;  ACC  202. 
♦  410  Directed  Studies  in  Accounting  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
accounting.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ; 
Permission  ot  instructor. 

415  Professional  Accounting  (3)  This  course  is 
intended  to  develop  and  implement  students' 
knowledge  currenth-  required  tor  professional 
accounting  careers.  PREREQ;  Senior  standing 
and  instructor's  approval. 
420  Accounting  Information  Systems  (3) 
Accounting  information  swtems  development, 
processing,   and  controls  mth  emphasis  on  current 
computer-based  svstems  and  programs  used  in 
accounting  fields.' PREREQ;  ACC  302  and  303. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology 

101 E  Old  Librar>- 

610-436-2556 

Edmundo  Morales,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Becker,  Berger,  Greisman,  Keith,  McConatha, 

Morales,  Shaffer,  StoUer 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Freeman-Witthoft,  Luck, 

Zumpetta 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Johnston 


The  Department  of  Anthropolog)-  and  Sociology  offers  two  programs 
leading  to  the  bachelor  of  arts  degree. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  ANTHROPOLOGY  focuses  on  human  biological 
evolution;  on  the  origin,  development,  and  integration  of  human 
cultures;  and  on  the  interrelationship  of  biological  and  cultural  fac- 
tors in  the  etiolog)'  of  human  behavior. 

2.  The  B.A.  in  SOCIOLOGY  focuses  on  understanding  the  process- 
es involved  in  the  creation,  maintenance,  and  evolution  of  social 
structure,  and  on  the  impact  of  diverse  structural  forms  on  individ- 
ual behavior. 


Anthropologv'  and  Sociology' 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Majors  in  the  two  B.A.  programs  should  consult  the  appropriate 
department  handbook  and  their  adviser  for  current  requirements. 
Students  planning  to  major  in  one  of  these  programs  are  advised  to 
take  ANT  102  and  SOC  200  no  later  than  their  sophomore  year. 
Application  for  admission  is  made  on  forms  available  from  the  depart- 
ment office. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  BJV.  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement  0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Limited  Electives  (chosen  under  advisement)      18  semester  hours 

4.  Major  Requirements  60  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  ANTHROPOLOGY 


Required  Core  Courses 

ANT  101,  102,  103,  and  495 

Specialization  Requirements 

Four  to  seven  courses  in  anthropology 

Cognate  Requirements 

LIN  230;  additional  courses  outside  of 

anthropology  approved  by  the  student's  adviser 

Free  Electives  15-24  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  SOCIOLOGY 

1.    Required  Core  Courses 

SOC  200,  300,  321,  322,  and  492 


4. 


12-21  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


12-24  semester  hours 


2.  Specialization  Requirements  18  semester  hours 
Anv  SLX  advanced  courses  in  sociology 

3.  Career  Preparation  Sequence 
Five  nonsociology  courses  approved  by  the 
student's  adviser 

4.  Free  Electives 

Minor  Programs 

Students  maj'  minor  in  the  two  following  programs.  A  minimum  of 
18  semester  hours  is  required.  Elective  courses  are  selected  in  consul- 
tation with  the  student's  minor  adviser.  Students  may  take  any  of 
these  minors  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  or  bachelor 
of  science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree  program. 


12  semester  hours  Anthropology  Minor 


Required  Courses 
ANT  102,  either  ANT  101  or  103,  and  one 
400-level  course  in  anthropology 
2.   Elective  Courses 

Three  other  courses  in  anthropology 

Sociology  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 
SOC  200,  300,  and  322 

2.  Elective  Courses 

Three  other  courses  in  sociology 


18  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 

18  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

Symbol:  ANT 

101  Introduction  to  Anthropology:  Biological 

(3)  Fundamentals  of  human  biologi',  evolution, 
and  the  prehistoric  development  of  culture. 

102  Introduction  to  Anthropology:  Cultural  (3) 
Comparative  analysis  of  culture  systems. 

103  Introduction  to  Anthropology:  Archaeology 
(3)  Interpretation  ot  culture  through  analysis  ot 
archaeological  remains. 

113  Archaeological  Field  Techniques  (3)  Imple- 
mentation of  archaeological  principles  and  theory 
in  laboratory'  and  field  studies.  PREREQ_or 
CONCURRENT:  ANT  103. 
120  Cultures  of  Ethnic  Groups  in  America  (3) 
Survey  ot  the  cultural  history  and  traditions  of  eth- 
nic groups  in  America. 

202  World  Ethnology  (3)  Survey  of  the  social 
organization,  belief  systems,  and  cultures  of  select- 
ed peoples.  PREREQi  ANT  102  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

■  224  Native  Peoples  of  South  America  (3)  This 
course  will  introduce  the  student  to  the  study  of 
native  peoples  ot  South  America  after  the 
European  contact.  Geographically,  the  course  wiU 
cover  the  cultural  characteristics,  similarities,  and 
differences  among  South  American  natives  includ- 
ing the  Amazonia. 

260  Artifacts  and  Culture  (3)  (See  also  HIS  353.) 
PREREQ:  .•\NT  102. 

♦  280  Practicum  in  Museum  Techniques  I  (3) 
Exploration  of  techniques  ot  cataloging,  conserv- 
ing objects,  and  ot  designing  and  setting  up 
exhibits.  Involvement  in  actual  museum  work. 
PREREQ^  ANT  102  or  permission  of  instructor. 

A.  Biological  Anthropology 

310  Human  Paleontology  (3)  Evolutionary' 
thought;  origin  and  antiquit\'  of  the  primates;  fossil 
man  and  living  races.  {Some  background  in  biology 
recommended.) 

B.  Ethnology:  Area  Courses 

320  American  Indian  (3)  Ethnolog)'  of  North 
America.  PREREQ^  ANT  102. 


1 321  American  Indian  Today  (3)  Native 
Americans  in  contemporar)'  Anglo-America. 
PREREQl  ANT  102  or  permission  of  instructor. 

■  322  Ethnology  of  Central  America  (3)  Survey 
of  the  modern  cultures  ot  Central  America:  rela- 
tionships to  ancient  peoples;  the  process  of  mod- 
ernization in  this  area.  PREREQ:  ANT  102, 

■  324  Native  Peoples  of  the  Andes  (3)  This 
course  provides  a  comprehensive  survey  ot  the  his- 
torical formation  and  development  of  the  Andean 
society  before  and  after  the  Spanish  conquest. 

326  Cultures  and  Peoples  of  Sub-Saharan  Africa 
(3)  Ex.imination  of  the  cultures  and  societies  of 
Black  Africa.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

327  Cultures  and  Peoples  of  India  (3)  (See  also 
HIS  302.)  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

♦  329  Problems  in  Ethnology  (3)  Survey  of  the 
ethnographic  literature  pertaining  to  specific  geo- 
graphic regions.  Area  ot  focus  to  be  announced  in 
advance.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 
C.  Ethnology:  Topical  Courses 

340  Folklore  in  Society  (3)  Survey  of  basic 
American  folklore  genres.  Emphasis  on  folklore  as 
process,  tradition,  and  as  an  element  ot  culture. 

341  Social  Organization  (3)  Study  of  social 
groups,  their  structure,  and  fiinctioning.  PRE- 
REQ: ANT  102. 

342  Political  Anthropology  (3)  Analvsis  of  tribal 
and  peasant  political  systems.  PREREQi.ANT  102. 

343  Economic  Anthropology  (3)  Analysis  of  trib- 
al and  peasant  economic  systems.  PREREQ^ 
ANT  102. 

344  Magic,  Religion,  and  Witchcraft  (3)  An 
anal\'sis  of  supernaturalistic  ideolog)'  and  ritual  in 
both  tribal  and  civil  societ>'.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

345  Culture  and  Personality  (3)  Study  of  the 
relationship  between  culture  systems  and  personal- 
ity. PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

346  Culture  Change  (3)  Empirical  and  theoretical 
study  of  culuire  change.  PREREQ;  ANT  102. 

I  347  The  Culture  of  Cities  (3)  This  seminar 
introduces  students  to  the  cultural  dynamics  of  city 
life  in  the  era  of  globalization.  Topics  ot  study 
include  globalization,  the  politics  of  urban  space, 
informal  economies,  and  immigration. 


348  Dimensions  of  Ethnographic  FilmA'ideo 

(3)  This  course  will  introduce  swdents  to  the 
study  of  ethnographic  fdm/video.  Topics  to  be 
considered  include  visual  anthropology,  ethno- 
graphic representation,  and  film  theor\'. 

350  Primitive  Art  (3)  (See  also  ARH  350).  PRE- 
REQ: ANT  102. 

D.  Archaeology 

360  Historical  Archaeology  (3)  Historical 
research  through  archaeolog)'.  Chester  County  is 
emphasized  through  local  research  projects.  PRE- 
REQ.or  CONCURRENT:  ANT  103. 

■  362  Archaeology  of  Central  America  (3)  The 

archaeological  record  ot  Central  America,  covering 
the  significant  features  of  each  culture  area  from 
modern  Mexico  to  Panama. 

ADVANCED  AND  SENIOR  COURSES 

380  Language  and  Culture  (3)  (also  LIN  380) 
See  LIN  380. 

381  Sociolinguisrics  (3)  (also  LIN  381)  The 
study  of  the  use  of  language  in  society  and  in  edu- 
cational settings;  social  dialects;  language  policy, 
black  English.  PREREQ:  ANT  102. 

383  Structurahsm:  From  Chaos  to  Order  in  the 
World  of  Ideas  (3)  This  course  is  a  general  survey  of 
structuralist  theory-  as  it  relates  to  linguistics,  anthro- 
pology, psychology,  and  literature.  The  goal  of  the 
course  is  to  demonstrate  how  structuralism  is  a  theo- 
retical orientation  in  the  social  sciences  and  the 
humanities  that  attempts  to  transform  the  chaos  of 
appearances  into  order  of  realit\'  in  the  world  of  ideas. 

♦  405  Topical  Seminar  in  Anthropology  (3) 

Selected  topics  in  the  subdisciplines  ot  anthropolo- 
g)'.  Topics  announced  in  advance.  Juniors  and 
seniors  only. 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  Anthropology 

(1-3)  Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  read- 
ings in  anthropology.  Juniors  and  seniors  only. 
PREREQi  Permission  of  department  chairperson. 


H  Culture  cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

I    Diverse  communities  course 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Art 


459  Histoiy  of  Ethnological  Theoiy  (3)  Develop- 
ment of  ethnological  theory  with  emphasis  on  the 
nature  of  explanation  in  ethnolog}'.  PREREQ;  Six 
hours  in  ethnolog)'  and  junior  or  senior  standing. 

490  Seminar  in  Social  Anthropology  (3)  Histor)- 
and  theory  of  social  anthropolog)'.  PREREQ^  Six 
hours  in  ethnolog)-  and  six  hours  in  sociology. 
Seniors  onh". 

495  Senior  Seminar  in  Anthropology  (3) 
Discussion  and  supenised  research  designed  to 
integrate  conceptual  and  methodological  skills. 
The  research  paper  for  the  seminar  must  be 
acceptable  as  a  required  departmental  senior 
research  paper.  Senior  anthropology  majors  only. 

SOCIOLOGY 

SvTObol:  SOC 

200  Introduction  to  Sociology  (3)  Fundamentals 

of  the  sociological  perspective  on  human  behavior. 

240  Sociology  of  the  Family  (3)  Comparative, 
historical,  and  cross-cultural  analysis  of  the  family 
institution. 

300  Sociological  Theory  (3)  Historical  develop- 
ment of  the  sociological  perspective  on  human 
behavior,  with  emphasis  on  the  perennial  issues  in 
sociological  explanation.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

302  Sociology  of  Everyday  Life  (3)  How  people 
interact  in  everyda%'  settings,  examined  from  the 
dramaturgical  perspectives  of  Goffman,  Douglas, 
Burke,  and  others.  PREREQi  SOC  200. 

321  Statistics  in  Sociological  Research  (3)  The 

application  ot  statistical  methods  to  sociological 
hypothesis  testing.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

322  Methods  of  Sociological  Research  (3)  The 

logic  of  social  research.  Fundamentals  of  research 
design,  data  collection  and  reduction,  and  nonsta- 
tistical  analysis.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

333  Self  and  Society  (3)  A  symbolic  interactionist 
perspective  on  social  psychology  which  focuses  on 
the  self  in  social  interaction.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

335  Racial  and  Cultural  Minorities  (3)  Analysis  of 
the  implications  of  racial  differences,  the  factors 
affecting  prejudice  and  discrimination,  and  structur- 
al aspects  ofgroup  conflicts.  PREREQ^  SOC  200. 


341  Social  Stratification  (3)  Analysis  of  inequah- 
ties  in  wealth,  power,  and  prestige  in  contempo- 
rary societies.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

342  Urban  Sociology  (3)  A  descriptive  study  of 
the  form  and  development  of  the  urban  communi- 
ty with  respect  to  demographic  structure,  sparial 
and  temporal  patterns,  and  fiinctional  organiza- 
tion. PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

343  Sociologyof  Organizations  (3)  Analysis  of 
large-scale,  formal  organizations  with  emphasis  on 
bureaucracy  as  the  dominant  form  of  social  organi- 
zation in  the  West.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

344  Sociologyof  Religion  (3)  Theoretical  analysis 
of  social  functions  of  religion,  the  history  and  inter- 
nal structure  of  religious  institutions,  and  their  rela- 
tionship to  other  institutions.  PREREQ^  SOC  200. 

345  Sociology  of  Education  (3)  Sociological 
dimensions  of  educational  institutions.  PREREQ^ 
SOC  200. 

346  Sociologyof  Gender  (3)  Analysis  and  evalua- 
tion of  sociological  research  on  sex  roles.  PRE- 
REQ: SOC  200. 

#  349  Perspectives  on  Mental  Illness  (3)  An 
interdisciplinary  examination  ot  mental  disorders  — 
their  definition,  cause,  and  treatment.  PREREQ^ 
SOC  200. 

350  Sociology  of  Mental  Illness  (3)  A  sociologi- 
cal perspective  on  mental  disorders.  PREREQ; 
SOC  200. 

351  Deviance  (3)  Causes  and  consequences  of  the 
construction  and  violation  of  social  norms.  PRE- 
REQ: SOC  200. 

352  Criminology  (3)  Sociological  analysis  of  the 
definition,  distribution,  and  causes  of  crime,  and 
of  social  response  to  it.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

353  Juvenile  Delinquency  (3)  Theories  of  delin- 
quena",  evaluation  of  programs  for  its  prevention 
and  control.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

360  Sociology  of  Culture  (3)  Analysis  of  the  major 
social  movements  that  have  shaped  the  character 
and  fliture  of  modern  man.  PREREQ:  SOC  200. 

361  Sociology  of  Medicine  (3)  A  sociological  per- 
spective on  health,  illness,  and  medical  care.  PRE- 
REQ: SOC  200. 


362  Sexuality  in  Society  (3)  The  social  dimen- 
sions of  human  se.xuaht>-.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 
364  Sociology  of  Aging  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  problems,  adaptations,  and  contributions  of 
the  aging  population.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

369  Social  Movements  (3)  ^An  introduction  to  the 
swdy  of  social  movements,  both  historical  and 
contemporar>-.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

370  Social  Problems  (3)  ^Analysis  of  current  social 
disorders:  urban  unrest,  racial  tension,  poverty', 
addictions,  crime,  and  mental  illness.  PREREQ; 
SOC  200. 

371  Applied  Social  Change  (3)  Strategy  and  tac- 
tics of  planning  and  guiding  change  in  small  and 
large-scale  social  systems. 

376  Sociology  of  War  and  Peace  (3)  Exploration 
of  the  relationship  between  social  structure  and 
war.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

377  Clinical  Sociology  (3)  Analysis  and  evaluation 
of  therapeutic  applications  of  sociology  in  group 
and  individual  settings.  PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

401  Social  Change  (3)  Critique  of  the  leading 
models  of  social  order  and  change;  analysis  of 
major  transformation  in  Western  civilization. 
PREREQ;  SOC  200. 

402  Career  Internship  in  Sociology  (6)  Field 
experience  in  agencies  involved  in  social  change. 
Majors  only  with  permission  of  instructor. 

410  Issues  in  Sociological  Thought  (3)  Analysis 
of  several  of  the  key  philosophical  issues  underly- 
ing sociological  thought.  PREREQ;  SOC  300,' or 
permission  of  the  instructor. 

♦  490  Independent  Studies  in  Sociology  (1-3) 
Individual  research  projects,  reports,  and/or  read- 
ings. Seniors  only.  PREREQ;  Permission  of 
department  chairperson.  Maiors  only. 

♦  491  Topical  Seminar  in  Sociology  (3)  Special 
topics  in  theory  or  methodology.  Topics 
announced  in  advance.  Admission  by  permission 
of  instructor.  Juniors  and  seniors  only. 

492  Senior  Seminar  in  Sociology  (3)  Preparation 
of  senior  research  paper.  Senior  sociolog}'  majors 
only. 


#  Approved  Interdisciplinary  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  tor  credit. 


Department  of  Art 

212  MitcheU  Hall 

610-436-2755 

John  Baker,  Chairpenon 

PROFESSORS:  Baker,  Blake,  Sermas 

ASSOCLATE  PROFESSORS:  HoUon,  Usher,  White 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Brody,  da  Costa,  Loustau, 

Moon,  Rumfield,  Schiff-Hill 
The  undergraduate  programs  offered  by  the  Department  of  Art  give 
students  the  opportunity  to  achieve  competence  in  studio  art,  theory, 
and  the  history'  of  art,  taking  into  consideration  both  personal  and 
vocational  needs.  Each  student's  advising  reflects  an  effort  to  relate 
the  general  requirements  to  art  subjects. 

In  addition  to  the  formal  programs  listed  below,  alternative  courses  of 
study  may  be  planned  in  conjunction  with  other  departments. 
Students  are  encouraged  to  make  connections  between  art  and  other 
subjects  where  appropriate  to  achieve  vocational  and  personal 
advancement  after  consultation  with  the  student's  adviser. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  ART 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Language  Requirement  (See  special  note         0-15  semester  hours 
below.) 

3.  Art  Department  Program  Requirements 

B  A.  Studio  Art  Sequence  (provides  a  basic  concentration  with  the 
option  of  a  second,  preprofessional  concentration) 


Studio  Foundation  (ART  106,  111 
112,  and  220) 

b.  Art  History  (ARH  103,  104,  and 
two  ARH  electives) 

c.  Other  Studio  (Elect  from  studio 
offerings  at  least  half  above  the  300 
level.  See  special  note  below.) 

d.  Preprofessional  Concentration- 
courses  to  be  selected  from  another 
discipline  (elementary  education,  special 
education,  business,  foreign  area  studies, 
or  others  under  advisement) 


12  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


21-24  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


Art 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


NOTE:  The  foreign  language  requirement  for  B.A.  studio  art  is  two 
semesters  with  three  foreign  area  study  courses  or  to  meet  the  level  of 
Intermediate  II,  202. 

Students  must  maintain  a  minimum  grade  of  C  in  all  ART  and  ARH 
courses,  required  and  elective,  within  the  major. 

BACHELOR  OF  FINE  ARTS  —  STUDIO  ARTS 

The  bachelor  of  fine  arts  is  regarded  as  the  initial  professional  degree 
in  art  bv  the  National  Association  of  Schools  of  Art.  Its  primary 
emphasis  is  on  the  development  of  skills,  concepts,  and  sensitivities 
important  to  the  professional  artist.  Concentration  in  a  major  profes- 
sional area  begins  only  with  satisfactory  completion  of  the  foundation 
requirements  and  the  approval  of  the  faculty  adviser. 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Art  Department  Program  Requirements* 

Foundation  Requirements 

a.    Studio  Art  (ART  106,  111,  112,  30  semester  hours 


206,  216,  217,  220,  221,  222,  113  or  241) 


b.  Art  History  (ARH  103,  104,  and  two 
art  history  electives) 

c.  Professional  Concentration 

(eight  art  courses  by  advisement) 

d.  Studio  Art  (or  art-related  electives 
by  advisement) 

Minor  in  Studio  Art 

1.  Required  Courses 
ART  106,  111,  and  220 

2.  Minor  Specialization  9  semester  hours 
The  student,  under  advisement,  may  select  a 

minor  speciahzation  so  that  the  emphasis  is  on 
one  of  these  groups:  drawing  and  painting,  graphic 
design,  printmaking,  sculpture,  or  crafts. 


12  semester  hours 

24  semester  hours 

6  semester  hours 

18  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 


Minor  in  Art  History  18  semester  hours 

This  program  provides  alternative  tracks  to  satisfy  a  varietv  of 
emphases  to  which  art  history  may  be  appUed.  These  include  both 
vocational  and  liberal  arts  interests,  which  range  from  a  highlv  struc- 
tured sequence  to  a  selt-designed  sequence. 

A.  Art  History  Survey  18  semester  hours 
Structured  sequence  of  courses  designed  to  provide  an  in-depth 
comprehensive  core  of  Western  art  development.  Recommended 
as  an  important  cultural  component  to  the  study  of  history,  litera- 
ture, performing  arts,  anthropology,  sociology,  and  psychology. 
(The  18  semester  hours  include  ARH  103  and  104,  and  12  credits 
of  electives  selected  at  the  200,  300,  and  400  levels.) 

B.  Art  History  and  Its  Interfaces  18  semester  hours 
According  to  interest  or  possible  vocational  application,  this  pro- 
gram provides  an  opportunirv  to  explore  either  the  various  histori- 
cal periods/styles  of  art  or  the  interfaces  of  art  history  with  studio 
art,  American  studies,  and  other  cognate  areas. 

1.  Student  must  complete  the  required  courses    6  semester  hours 
ARH  103  and  104 

2.  Student  must  also  take  two  upper-level  6  semester  hours 
art  history  courses 

3.  Student  must  take,  under  advisement  6  semester  hours 

a.  Any  two  studio  courses 

b.  Any  two  American  studies  courses 

c.  Any  two  other  art  history  courses 

d.  Any  two  cognate  courses  from  other  disciplines 

e.  Any  combination  of  the  above 

Either  of  these  minors  may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  by  students 
as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  or  bachelor  of  science 
in  Uberal  studies  general  degree  program. 


Students  must  maintain  a  grade  of  C  in  all  ART  and  ARH  courses  within 
the  major  (required  and  elective). 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ART 

Symbol:  ART 

105  Art  Workshop  (3)  An  art  workshop  for  nonart 
majors.  E.xploration  of  art  materials  and  techniques. 

106  Beginning  Drawing  (3)  Drawing  from  direct 
observation  and  an  introduction  to  ideas  of  percep- 
tion and  interpretation.  Use  of  a  variety  of  media. 

111  Basic  Design  (2-Diniensional  Design)  (3) 
Developing  a  visual  vocabulary  by  experimenting 
with  shape,  space,  light,  color,  and  texture  in  a 
variet)'  of  media. 

112  Color  and  Design  (2 -Dimensional  Design) 
(3)  Extensive  study  of  color  theory  and  its  applica- 
tion to  a  variety  of  fine  and  industrial  arts  projects. 
PREREQiARTlll. 

113  Computer  Art  I  (3)  Introduction  to  computer 
art  is  designed  to  provide  students  of  graphics  and 
fine  arts  with  the  skills  necessary  to  utilize  the  com- 
puter as  a  graphics  tool,  enabling  students  to  incor- 
porate computer  art  technology  into  their  work. 
147  Crafts:  Weaving  I  (3)  Basic  techniques  of 
weaving  are  explored  with  emphasis  on  fabric 
design  and  craftsmanship. 

206  Intermediate  Drawing  (3)  Work  in  a  variety 
of  media  and  methods  designed  to  develop  "aggres- 
sive seeing."  Emphasis  on  the  exploration  of  line  as 
boundary  to  describe  form  and  space,  as  gesture,  as 
calligraphy,  and  tor  expressive  qualities  as  a  tool  for 
working  in  other  media.  PREREQi  ART  106. 
210  Typography  I  (3)  An  introduction  to  the  use 
of  type  as  a  basic  element  of  graphic  communica- 
tion; the  use  of  different  type  faces  to  communi- 
cate visually  desired  effects,  typeform,  type  indica- 
tion, type  spacing,  comp  lettering,  and  basic 
design  with  type  for  layouts  and  comprehensives. 


211  Graphic  Design  I  (3)  The  exploration  ot  var- 
ious aspects  of  graphic  communication  through 
the  use  of  typography,  layout,  and  general  graphic 
techniques.  The  development  of  creative,  original, 
and  conceptual  ideas  for  solving  communications 
problems  utilizing  professional  studio  practices  and 
procedures.  Mechanical,  paste-up  preparation,  and 
other  methods  of  reproduction  will  be  covered. 
Use  of  the  computer  is  integrated  into  a  variet)'  of 
course  assignments.  COREQ:  ART  210;  PRE- 
REQ:  ART  111,  113,  or  permission  of  the 
instructor. 

212  Graphic  Design  11  (3)  The  continuation  of 
ART  211  with  an  emphasis  on  typographic  prob- 
lem solving.  The  further  study  of  graphic  design 
concepts  and  design  principles  used  in  solving  dif- 
ferent types  of  design  problems  within  a  given  for- 
mat. Use  of  the  computer  as  an  essential  design 
tool  is  Integrated  into  a  variet)'  of  course  assign- 
ments. PREREQi  ART  211,  or  permission  of  the 
instructor. 

213  Computer  Art  II  (3)  An  advanced  study  of  the 
computer  as  a  design  tool.  The  computer  will  be 
used  to  incorporate  typography  and  graphic  design 
solutions  utilizing  page  layout  software.  PREREQi 
ART  113  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

216  Beginning  Painting  (3)  An  introduction  to 
the  basic  materials  and  techniques  of  the  painter 
with  emphasis  on  color. 

217  Intermediate  Painting  (3)  The  course  seeks 
to  provide  a  workshop  atmosphere  in  which  the 
student  is  given  the  opportunitj'  to  explore  the 
potential  of  the  painting  media.  Use  of  standard 
materials  of  paint,  brushes,  and  canvas  is  required. 
PREREQ:  ART216. 

220  Fundamentals  of  3-Dimensional  Design  (3) 
An  introduction  to  the  theories,  processes,  and  ele- 


ments of  perception  and  visual  design  in  a  three- 
dimensional  simation.  Problems  will  be  geared  to 
problem  solving  rather  than  object  making. 

221  Advanced  3-Dimensional  Design  (3) 

Solving  problems  of  relating  visual  elements  to 
volumetric  forms  in  space  by  experimenting  with 
various  materials.  PREREQi  ART  220. 

222  Beginning  Sculpture  (3)  An  introduction  to 
the  basic  fundamentals  ot  sculpture,  including 
concepts  of  design,  knowledge  of  tools  and  tech- 
niques, and  materials  and  processes.  Project 
assignments  to  be  rendered  in  clay,  plaster,  wood, 
and  stone. 

223  Basic  Photography  (3)  A  course  dealing  with 
the  photographic  process.  The  course  will  cover 
camera  handling,  film  and  print  processing,  pho- 
tographic composition  and  presentation.  Students 
must  supply  adjustable  35mm  camera  plus  devel- 
oping and  printing  materials. 

224  Intermediate  Photography  (3)  A  course  for 
those  who  have  had  a  basic  photography  class  or  pre- 
vious photography  experience.  The  course  will  stress 
technical  and  creative  approaches  to  photography 
using  small-format  cameras.  Ad\'anced  techmques  of 
exposure,  lighting,  composition,  and  macro  photog- 
raphv  will  be  included.  Students  must  supply  their 
own  35mm  adjustable  camera  and  developing  and 
printing  materials.  PREREQ:  ART  223. 

225  Advanced  Photography  (3)  A  course  dealing 
with  professional  techniques  in  black  and  white  as 
well  as  color  photography.  Different  camera  for- 
mats will  be  considered.  Advanced  darkroom  tech- 
niques, photographic  manipulation,  and  retouch- 
ing will  also  be  covered.  PREREQ:  ART  223  and 
ART  224. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Art 


226  Water  Color  I  (3)  An  introduction  to  tiie 
basic  tools  and  techniques  of  the  water-color 
painter.  Emphasis  upon  transparent  water  color. 

227  Water  Color  II  (3)  Advanced  problems  in 
water  color,  gouache,  tempera,  and  mixed  media. 
PREREQ;  ART227. 

231  Ceramics  I:  Basic  Techniques  (3) 
Introduction  to  the  basic  techniques  of  ceramics. 
Hand  and  wheel  methods  of  construction;  knowl- 
edge of  clay  bodies,  firing,  and  glazing. 

232  Ceramics  II:  Intermediate  Techniques  (3) 
Fundamental  methods  ot  creating  clay  forms  on 
the  wheel.  Experimentation  with  clay  bodies, 
glazes,  and  kiln  operation.  Design  is  stressed. 
241  Printmaking;  Introduction  of  Relief  Print- 
making  (3)  An  introduction  to  the  medium  of 
printmaking:  linoleum  cuts,  woodcuts,  and  color- 
graphs. 

243  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Relief  Print- 
making  (3)  Continuation  of  ART  241,  emphasiz- 
ing expressive  possible  techniques  and  their  com- 
bination with  other  print  media.  PREREQ^  ART 
241,  or  permission  ot  instructor. 
245  Architectural  Drawing  (3)  Studio  experiences 
in  layout;  preparation  of  plans  and  elevations,  pre- 
sentations (renderings),  and  architectural  lettering. 
Use  of  mechanical  drawing  tools  to  help  students 
express  steps  that  occur  from  design  to  realization 
of  a  structure. 

248  Crafts:  Weaving  II  (3)  Provides  an  opportu- 
nity for  the  weaver  to  further  explore  and  develop 
skills  as  a  designer.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the 
interrelationship  between  ftinctional  materials  and 
design  processes. 

25 1  Art  in  the  Elementary  School  (3)  Workshop 
and  seminar  providing  experience  with  a  wide 
variety  of  media  appropriate  for  use  with  children. 
Investigation  into  the  philosophy  and  psychology 
of  children's  art. 

306  Drawing  III:  Life  Drawing  (3)  An  explo- 
ration of  the  abstract  dynamics  of  figure  drawing 
with  particular  application  ot  anatomical  structure 
to  expressive  design.  PREREQ^  ART  106  and 
206. 

♦  307  Drawing  IV  (3)  Individualized  instruction 
in  increasingly  complex  formal  and  expressive 
problems  in  drawing. 

310  Graphic  Design  III  (3) The  exploration  of 
developing  and  designing  logotype  S)'Tnbols  for  use 
in  corporate  and  public  agencies  and  their  applica- 
tions to  a  variety  of  print  materials.  The  use  of  the 
computer  as  an  essential  design  tool  is  integrated 
into  course  assignments.  PREREQ^  ART  212  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

311  Graphic  Design:  Independent  Project  (3) 
Individualized  instruction  in  design  problems  at  an 
advanced  level. 

312  Graphic  Design  IV  (3)  A  study  of  advanced 
concepts  and  design  principles  with  an  emphasis 
on  creative  solutions  to  problems  in  three-dimen- 
sional package  design.  The  use  of  the  computer  as 
an  essential  design  tool  is  integrated  into  course 
assignments.  PREREQ^  ART  311  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

316  Advanced  Painting  (3)  Emphasis  on 
advanced  problems  in  painting  in  a  variety  of  tech- 
niques. Individual  expression  is  encouraged.  PRE- 
REQ: ART  217. 

317  Painting:  Studio  Problems  (3)  Concentration 
on  individual  work  and  professional  competence. 
Group  critiques  and  discussions. 

318  Painting  ftom  Landscape:  Independent 
Project  (3)  Indlviduahzed  landscape  painting 


course  requiring  the  student  to  paint  on  location  In 
the  Delaware  Valley. 

319  Painting  from  Masters:  Independent  Project 
(3)  Introduces  the  student  artist  to  techniques  and 
styles  by  painring  from  master  works. 

♦  320  Painting:  Independent  Projects  (3)  The 
development  of  a  personal  st}'le  is  explored 
through  a  theme  and  its  variation.  Discipline  and 
self-criticism  are  realized  through  a  series  of  cri- 
tiques and  evaluations. 

321  Intermediate  Sculpture  (3)  More  advanced 
problems  in  sculpture  with  emphasis  on  individual 
exploration  of  form,  structure,  and  process. 
Independent  project  to  be  rendered  in  choice  ot 
materials.  Including  clav,  plaster,  wood,  and  stone. 
PREREQ:  ART  222.  ' 

322  Advanced  Sculpture  (3)  Continued  explo- 
ration and  development  ot  indrndual  form  and 
process  awareness  through  involvement  with  mod- 
eling, casting,  fabrication,  and  assemblages.  In 
addition  to  clay,  wood,  stone,  and  plaster,  metals 
and  plastics  will  be  utilized. 

323  Abstract  Painting  (3)  A  studio  exploration  of 
the  fijndamental  principles  of  abstract  painting. 

324  Life  Modeling  (3)  Figure  modeling  in  clay 
from  the  life  model.  Emphasis  on  hand-eye  coor- 
dination using  figure  studies  as  vehicles  of  expres- 
sion. Anatomy  will  not  be  stressed;  however, 
weight,  balance,  construction,  and  spatial  relation- 
ships will  be  emphasized. 

♦  325  Sculpture:  Independent  Projects  (3) 
Individualized  instruction  in  advanced  sculpture. 
Preparation  tor  senior  show. 

331  Ceramics  III:  Advanced  Techniques  (3)  An 
advanced  course  to  develop  craftsmanship  and  to 
explore  clay  as  a  means  of  individual  expression. 
PREREQi  ART  232. 

332  Ceramics:  Studio  Problems  (3)  Work  at  an 
advanced  level  in  specialized  ceramic  techniques. 

♦  335  Ceramics:  Independent  Projects  (3) 
Individualized  instruction  as  well  as  research  and 
study  in  ceramic  design. 

341  Printmaking:  Introduction  to  Intaglio 
Printmaking  (3)  Intagho  techniques,  etching,  dry 
point,  aquatint,  and  engraving. 

342  Printmaking:  Introduction  to  Lithography 
(3)  Fundamentals  of  stone  and  plate  lithography. 

343  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Etching  (3) 
Continuation  of  341  with  emphasis  on  expressive 
qualities  of  the  medium  and  its  possible  combina- 
tion with  other  print  media.  PREREQ;  ART  341, 
or  permission  ot  instructor. 

344  Printmaking:  Intermediate  Lithography  (3) 
Continuation  of  ART  342  with  emphasis  on 
expressive  qualities  of  the  medium  and  its  possible 
combination  with  other  print  media.  PREREQ; 
ART  342,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

♦  345  Printmaking:  Independent  Projects  (3) 
In-depth,  individualized  Instruction  In  a  selected 
printmaking  medium. 

350  Art  of  Papermaking  (3)  The  exploration  of 
traditional  and  contemporary  techniques  in  the  art 
of  papermaking.  An  emphasis  on  creative  and 
original  designs  in  conjunction  with  an  under- 
standing of  materials. 

351  Art  of  Papermaking  (3)  The  exploration  of 
traditional  and  contemporary  techniques  in  the  art 
of  papermaking.  An  emphasis  on  creative  and 
original  designs  In  conjunction  with  an  under- 
standing of  materials. 

359  Resources  in  Art  Education  (3)  The  use  of 
cultural  and  community  resources  in  the  schools 
with  an  emphasis  on  the  teaching  of  art  apprecia- 
tion. 


♦  450  Art-Graphic  Design  Internship  (3) 

Integration  of  classroom  study  and  lab  work  with 
specific  planned  periods  of  learning  through  job 
experience.  The  course  is  based  on  an  individual- 
ized, student-oriented,  learning  contract. 

♦  455  Introduction  to  Multimedia  (3)  A  work- 
shop for  students  with  background  in  the  studio 
arts.  To  be  taken  under  advisement. 

490  Graphic  Design  V  (3)  The  farther  study  of 
solving  advanced  visual  communication  problems 
through  the  development  of  skills  in  research, 
design,  and  the  preparation  of  comprehensives  for 
client  presentations.  The  use  of  the  computer  as  an 
essential  design  tool  is  integrated  into  course 
assignments.  PREREQ;  ART  312,  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

491  Graphic  Design  VI  (3)  The  continuation  of 
advanced  visual  communication  problem  solving 
outlined  in  ART  490  with  an  emphasis  on  fin- 
ished comprehensives  for  the  portfolio.  The  use  of 
the  computer  as  an  essential  design  tool  is  inte- 
grated into  course  assignments.  COREQ;  ART 
499;  PREREQ;  ART  490,  or  permission  of  the 
instructor. 

499  Graphic  Design  VII:  PortfoUo  (3)  Smdy 
under  the  guidance  of  the  instructor  to  prepare 
individual  portfolios  for  professional  presentation 
for  employment  or  continuation  of  studies  on  the 
graduate  level.  Spring  offering.  COREQ;  ART 
491;  PREREQ;  ART  490,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

ART  HISTORY 

Symbol:  ARH 

101  Art  Appreciation  (3)  An  introduction  to 
painting,  sculpture,  architecture,  and  the  decora- 
tive arts  with  emphasis  on  understanding  the  visu- 
al arts  as  universal  human  expression. 

102  Survey  of  Art  History  (3)  A  general  introduc- 
tion to  the  history  of  western  art  from  the  earliest 
cave  paintings  to  the  20th  centur\'. 

103  Art  History  I:  Paleolithic  through  Middle 
Ages  (3)  Survey  of  significant  art  and  architectural 
monuments  from  prehistor}'  through  the  Middle 
Ages. 

104  Art  History  II:  Renaissance  Through 
Modem  (3)  Continuation  of  ART  103.  Survey  of 
Western  and  non- Western  art  and  architecture 
from  the  Renaissance  through  the  21st  century. 

210  Non-Western  Art  (3)  Analysis  of  primitive 
art  as  determined  through  ritual  and  myth.  Focus 
Includes  ethnographic  parallels  to  prehistory  and 
the  concept  of  primltivism  In  the  West. 

211  Art  of  Egypt  (3)  The  art  and  architecture  of 
Ancient  Egypt,  Mesopotamia,  Assyria,  and 
Babylonia  from  3000-500  B.C. 

■  382  Art  of  Greece  and  Rome  (3)  The  art  and 
architecture  of  the  Greeks,  Etruscans,  and 
Romans. 

■  383  Art  of  Middle  Ages  (3)  The  art  and  archi- 
tecture of  the  European  medieval  world  and  their 
development  from  Early  Christian  and 
Romanesque  art  into  the  fiill  flowering  of  the 
Gothic  period. 

■  384  Art  of  Renaissance-Baroque  (3)  Art  and 
architecture  from  1300  through  1700  in  Europe. 
Focus  on  patronage  and  the  role  of  the  artist. 
Political,  economic,  and  religious  influences  on  the 
art  of  the  Renaissance  and  Baroque  periods. 

■  385  18th  and  19th  CentuiyArt  (3)  Major 
European  artistic  contributions  of  the  18th  and 
19th  centuries  including  Rococco,  Neoclassical, 


♦  This  course  may  he  taken  again  for  credit. 
■  Culture  cluster 


Biolog)' 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


Romanticism,  Realism,  and  Impressionism.  Art, 

architecture,  and  their  cultural  influence. 

386  Modem  Art  Seminar  (3)  Analysis  of  major 

stvles  of  20th-centurv-  art  from  Post  Impressionism 

to  Pop  Art.  Special  emphasis  on  important  artists 

and  their  contributions  to  Western  art. 

389  Art  of  Spain  (3)  Introduction  to  the  an  and 

architecture  of  Spain  and  her  colonies  from  the 

caves  of  Altamira  to  the  contemporari,'  period. 

Focus  on  specific  artists  including  Velazquez, 

Goya,  Miro,  Gaudi,  Picasso,  and  Dali. 

♦  400  Art  Seminar  (3)  Special  topics  to  be 

announced  for  studio  and  art  history.  Offered 


periodically  as  appropriate.  PREREQ^  Permission 

of  instructor. 

413  American  Art  (3)  A  survey  of  American 

paintings  and  sculpture  from  Colonial  times  to  the 

present. 

♦  415  Art  History:  Independent  Study  (3) 

Opportunin-  for  the  student  to  pursue  a  particular 

field  of  interest. 

416  American  Architecture  I  (3)  Introduction  to 

American  architecture  of  the  early  colonies  and  of 

the  repubUc  after  American  independence.  Analysis 

of  traditional  European  elements  and  American 

adaptadons  in  public  and  private  buildings. 


417  American  Architecture  II  (3)  Introduction  of 
architectural  forms  and  stvles  in  America  from 
1800  through  the  21st  centut)-.  Analysis  of  the 
social,  st}'listic,  and  technological  sources  of  the 
last  two  centuries  with  fiiture  developments  pro- 
jected for  the  21st  centur\'  environment. 
419  Women  Artists  (3)  An  introduction  to 
women  artists  in  histot)'  from  the  prehistoric  peri- 
od through  the  21st  centuri'.  Analysis  of  painting, 
sculpture,  architecture,  and  nontraditional  art 
forms  produced  by  women.  Special  focus  on  artists 
of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries. 
♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Biology 

(See  also  Pre-Medical  Program) 

Schmucker  Science  Annex  (#2) 

610-436-2538 

Judith  Greenamyer,  Chairperson 

Sharon  Began,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Began,  Beneski,  Fairchild,  Fish,  Knabb,  Slusher, 

Tiebout,  Waber,  Woodruff 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Broitman,  Casotti,  Mbuy,  Vreeland 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Artus,  Evenden,  Greenamyer 
ADJUNCT  FACULTY:  Gotkin,  Grant,  Hertel,  Lennon,  Natale, 

Warhol,  White 
The  major  in  biology  centers  on  a  core  of  courses  that  emphasize 
broad  unifying  principles.  Available  electives  provide  enriching  experi- 
ences in  many  areas  of  biologi,'. 

The  Department  of  Biology  offers  three  undergraduate  degree  programs 
with  five  concentrations  within  the  B.S.  degree: 

1.  The  B.A.  in  BIOLOGY  provides  the  liberal  education  and  the  spe- 
cial preparation  required  for  careers  in  university  teaching,  govern- 
ment service,  independent  and  industrial  research,  science-related 
sales  and  public  relations,  and  other  areas  of  business.  This  program 
also  prepares  students  for  admission  to  graduate  and  professional 
schools.  The  possibility  of  26  semester  hoiu-s  of  student  electives 
enables  the  smdent  to  obtain  a  minor  in  another  area  of  interest. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY:  GENERAL  CONCENTRATION  can 
be  individually  tailored  to  provide  the  skills  that  students  need  to 
achieve  their  career  goals.  This  program  also  provides  the  basic 
preparation  needed  for  entrv  into  graduate  or  professional  schools, 
including  phvsical  therapv  programs. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY:CELL  and  MOLECULAR  concentra- 
tion offers  the  smdent  a  strong  background  in  both  biology  and 
chemistr)\  Emphasis  on  lab-oriented  courses  prepares  the  student 
to  pursue  a  career  in  laboratory  research  in  cell  and  molecular  biol- 
ogy at  industrial,  medical,  academic,  and  government  facilities. 
This  program  also  prepares  the  smdent  for  admission  to  graduate 
and  professional  schools. 

4.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY:  MICROBIOLOGY  concentration  pre- 
pares smdents  for  careers  in  research  laboratories,  industrial  and 
academic  research,  and  government  service  in  the  areas  of  bacteri- 
olog)',  immunology,  virology,  mycology,  microbial  ecology,  and 
parasitology.  The  program  provides  extensive  laborator)-  experience 
with  the  techniques  that  are  most  usefiil  and  important  to  modem 
microbiological  science.  This  program  also  provides  the  basic 
preparation  needed  for  entry  into  graduate  or  professional  schools. 

5.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY:  ECOLOGY  concentration  provides  an 
opportunin,'  for  interested  smdents  to  obtain  a  strong  background 
in  field  biology.  The  required  core  curriculum  and  concentration 
electives  provide  opportunities  for  later  careers  as  biologists  in  state 
and  federal  environmental  agencies,  industry,  environmental  con- 


sulting firms,  and  similar  organizations.  Internships  are  strongly 
recommended  as  part  of  the  program.  Course  work  emphasizes 
skills  obtained  in  biolog}',  chemistn',  and  mathematics.  Additional 
course  work  from  other  departments  may  be  recommended  to  fijJ- 
fdl  particular  career  objectives. 

6.  The  B.S.  in  BIOLOGY;  MEDICAL  TECHNOLOGY  concen- 
tration offers  students  the  oppormnity  to  enter  the  field  of  labora- 
tory medicine  with  emphasis  on  the  techniques  and  instrumenta- 
tion used  to  evaluate  disease  processes.  This  concentration  allows 
students  to  complete  the  necessary  general  education  and  depart- 
mental requirements  in  three  years.  The  fourth  }'ear  is  spent  in  a 
hospital  internship  training  program  at  one  of  the  several  affiliated 
hospitals,  and  smdents  receive  26  semester  hours  credit  for  the 
internship  year  (BIO  407  and  408,  Internship  in  Medical 
Technology).  To  qualify  for  the  internship,  smdents  must  have  a 
2.75  GPA  and  be  accepted  by  an  accredited  hospital  medical  tech- 
nology program.  Smdents  completing  the  internship  will  receive  a 
B.S.  in  biology/medical  technology  concentration  and  the  training 
necessary  to  take  the  national  certification  exam.  Affiliated  hospi- 
tals include  Pennsylvania  Hospital,  Reading  Hospital,  and  Tenet 
hospitals. 

7.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION— BIOLOGY  is  a  program  designed 
to  prepare  the  student  for  a  career  in  teaching  in  secondary- 
schools.  Professional  certification  in  biology  is  awarded  to  the  stu- 
dent who  completes  the  program  satisfactorily.  Smdents  are 
stronglv  advised  to  seek  certification  in  a  related  area  to  enhance 
their  employment  potential.  Such  related  areas  include  general  sci- 
ence, health,  education,  athletic  training,  and  environmental  edu- 
cation. This  program  requires  126  credits  for  completion. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE 
BACCALAUREATE  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Science  requirements  are  met  by  CHE  103  and 

PHY  130. 

2.  Biolog)'  Requirements* 
BIO  110,  220,  and  230 

3.  Other  Science  Requirements 
CHE  103-104,  231;  CRL  103-104,  231; 
and  PHY  130 

4.  All  B.A./B.S.  students  must  also  take  BIO  409, 
490  or  491;  CHE  232;  and  Pm'  140. 

5.  Mathematics  Requirements  6-7  semester  hours 
MAT  121  and  one  semester  of  calculus 


9  semester  hours 


20  semester  hours 


'Biologv'  core  courses  must  be  passed  with  a  grade  of  C-  (70%)  or  better. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Biolog)' 


B.A.  IN  BIOLOGY 


1, 


Required  Biology  Courses*  21  semester  hours 

BIO  110,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270,  and  409  or 

490  or  491 

Biology  Electives  12  semester  hours 

Selected  under  advisement 

Foreign  Language  Requirement  up  to  12  semester  hours 

S.  IN  BIOLOGY— GENERAL  Concentration 

Required  Biology  Courses*  21  semester  hours 

BIO  110,  215,  217,  220,  230,  270,  and  409  or 

490  or  491 

Biology  Electives  21  semester  hours 

Selected  under  advisement 


B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY— CELL  AND  MOLECULAR 
Concentration 

1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses 
CHE  476,  491**,  and  CRL  476 

2.  Required  Biology  Courses 
BIO  110*,  214*,'215*  or  217*,  220*,  230*, 
421*,  431,  490**  or  409  or  491,  and  BIL  333 

3.  Biology  or  Chemistry  Electives 
Selected  from  courses  at  or  above  the  300  level 

B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY— ECOLOGY  Concentration 


5-6  semester  hours 


28  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


1.  Required  Biology  Courses  27  semester  hours 
BIO  110*,  215*,  217*,  220*,  230*,  270*, 

310,  470,  and  409*  or  490*  or  491* 

2.  Biology  Electives  12  semester  hours 
Selected  under  advisement  from  BIO  275,  277, 

313,  377,  471,  472,  473,  474,  475,  476,  and  485 

3.  Ecologically  Relevant  Courses  6  semester  hours 
Selected  under  advisement 

B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY— MICROBIOLOGY  Concentration 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses*  30  semester  hours 
BIO  110*,  214*,  215*  or  217*,  220*,  230*, 

270*,  464*,  465*,  and  409*  or  490*  or  491* 

2.  Microbiology  Electives  11  semester  hours 
Selected  under  advisement  from  BIO  314,  334, 

414,  452,  454,  456,  474,  480,  484  or  BIL  333 

B.S.  IN  BIOLOGY— MEDICAL  TECHNOLOGY 
Concentration 

1.    Required  Biology  Courses*  53  semester  hours 

BIO  110*,  214*,  215*  or  217*,  220*,  230*,  407*, 
408',  465*,  490* 

B.S.  IN  EDUCATION— BIOLOGY  (126  semester  hours) 

1.  Required  Biology  Courses*  25  semester  hours 
BIO  110*,  214*,  215*,  217*,  220*,  230*,  270*, 

and  311* 

2.  Biology  Electives  6  semester  hours 
Selected  under  advisement 


3.  Required  Education  Courses  30  semester  hours 

4.  Required  Earth  Systems  Course  3  semester  hours 
SCB210 

Minor  in  Biology  18  semester  hours 

The  Department  of  Biolog\'  offers  a  minor  in  biology.  The  biology 
minor  requirements  include  the  following: 

1.  Required  prerequisite:  BIO  110  (must  be  passed  with  a  C-  or  bet- 
ter), or  BIO  100  (must  be  passed  with  a  grade  of  A).  These  courses 
are  prerequisites  and  must  be  completed  before  admission  to  the 
minor.  The  grades  in  these  courses  are  not  used  in  calculating  the 
GPA  in  the  minor.  These  do  not  count  towards  the  18  semester 
hours  required  for  the  minor. 

2.  BIO  215  or  BIO  217  (must  be  passed  with  a  C-  or  better). 

3.  In  addition  to  requirements  1  and  2,  students  must  complete  15 
additional  credits  at  the  200  level  or  higher  for  the  minor.  At  least 
eight  credits  must  be  in  addition  to  the  biology  courses  required  by 
the  student's  major.  Nonmajor  courses  such  as  BIO  204,  259,  269, 
and  307  require  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 

4.  A  minimum  of  18  credits  in  biology,  exclusive  of  BIO  110,  must 
be  taken  for  a  minor  in  biology,  and  all  minor  courses  must  be  at 
the  200  level  or  above. 

5.  To  graduate  with  a  biolog)'  minor,  students  must  maintain  a  GPA 
of  2.00  in  the  minor  courses,  and  they  must  meet  with  the  minor 
adviser  at  least  once  per  semester.  At  least  nine  credits  in  biology 
must  be  taken  at  WCU. 

Internal  and  External  Transfer  Students 

For  an  internal  transfer  into  any  biology  degree  program,  a  student 
must: 

1.  Be  in  good  academic  standing  (2.00  GPA  or  better); 

2.  Have  already  passed  BIO  100  with  an  A-  or  better,  or  BIO  110 
with  a  C-  or  better; 

3.  Complete  the  application  for  change  of  major. 
For  newly  admitted  transfer  students,  a  student  must: 

1.  Meet  University  standards  for  admission  to  West  Chester 
University; 

2.  Have  a  grade  of  C-  (70%)  or  better  if  they  have  taken  a  BIO  110 
equivalent. 

3.  Interview  with  department  representatives. 

NOTE:  In  order  to  receive  a  degree  in  biology  from  West  Chester 
University,  a  transfer  student  must  successfiiUy  complete  a  minimum 
of  50  percent  of  the  required  biology  credits  in  the  West  Chester 
University  Department  of  Biology. 

Advanced  Placement  Policy 

A  score  of  three  or  better  on  the  Biology  Advanced  Placement  E.xam 
of  the  SAT  I  will  transfer  as  credit  for  BIO  110,  General  Biology. 


'Biology  core  courses  must  be  passed  with  a  grade  of  C-  (70%)  or  better. 
"CHE  491  may  be  substituted  for  BIO  490.  Students  who  choose  to  do  this 
must  take  14  credits  of  upper-level  BIO  or  CHE  electives. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
BIOLOGY 

Symbol:  BIO  unless  otherwise  shown 
(3,2)  represents  three  hours  of  lecture  and 
two  hours  of  lab. 

100  Basic  Biological  Science  (3)  Basic  principles 
of  biology.  Cell  theory,  metabolism,  genetics, 
development,  diversity  of  life  forms,  and  ecology. 
Not  open  to  biology  majors.  (2,2) 
#  102  Humans  and  the  Environment  (3)  The 
effects  of  human  population  on  earth's  resources 
are  studied  against  a  background  of  physical,  bio- 
logical, and  health  sciences.  Note:  Students  com- 
pleting BIO  102  may  not  take  ESS  102  or 


ENV102  for  credit.  May  not  be  taken  as  biology 
major  elective. 

110  General  Biology  (3)  The  concepts  general  to 
all  living  organisms  such  as  cell  structure  and  fiinc- 
tion,  genetics,  evolution,  and  ecology.  This  course 
is  designed  for  majors  in  biology  and  related  scien- 
tific areas.  (2,3) 

204  Introductory  Microbiology  (4)  The  biology 
of  medically  important  microorganisms,  their 
structure,  taxonomy,  physiology,  control,  and  host- 
parasite  interactions.  (3,2)  PREREQ:  BIO  100  or 
BIO  110  and  one  semester  ot  chemistr)'.  May  not 
be  taken  as  a  biology  major  elective. 
214  General  Microbiology  (4)  The  biology  of 
microorganisms,  their  stmcture,  physiology,  and 
control;  the  namre  and  dynamics  of  disease  and  dis- 


ease control;  principles  of  food,  industrial,  and  envi- 
ronmental microbiolog)-.  The  laboratory  will  deal 
with  microbiological  techniques,  isolation  and  iden- 
tification of  microbes,  and  water  and  food  analysis. 
This  course  is  for  biology  majors.  (3,3)  PREREQ^ 
BIO  110  and  one  semester  of  chemistry. 
215  General  Botany  (3)  A  sun'ey  of  plant  and 
plant-like  organisms  from  bacteria  to  and  includ- 
ing the  angiosperms  with  emphasis  on  anatomy, 
physiology,  reproduction,  and  economic  impor- 
tance. (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110. 
217  General  Zoology  (3)  Principles  of  animal  biol- 
ogy. Form  and  fiinction  of  vertebrate  and  inverte- 
brate animal  types  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


Biolog)' 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


220  Cell  Physiology  (3)  An  introduction  to  cellu- 
lar and  molecular  biology  with  emphasis  on  cell 
morphology,  biochemistry,  and  cell  phvsiolog\'. 
(2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110  and  CHEM  230  or  231 
(may  be  taken  concurrently). 
230  Genetics  (3)  Nature  of  genetic  material  and 
its  qualitative  and  quantitative  variation:  recombi- 
nation; interaction  of  gene  products;  regulation  of 
genetic  material;  and  its  role  in  evolution.  (3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  110  and  MAT  121. 
259  Human  Anatomy  and  Physiology  I  (4)  An 
introduction  to  human  structure  and  function. 
Skeletal,  muscular,  and  nervous  s)'stems  are 
emphasized.  Laboratory  involves  study  of  human 
development  and  gross  anatomy  of  the  skeletal, 
muscular,  and  nervous  systems.  (3,2)  May  not  be 
taken  as  a  biology  major  elective. 

269  Human  Anatomy  and  Physiology  II  (4) 
Continuation  of  BIO  259.  Endocrine,  circulatory, 
respiratory,  immune,  digestive,  and  urogenital  sys- 
tems emphasized.  (3,2)  Mav  not  be  taken  as  a 
biology  major  elective.  PREREQ:  BIO  259. 

270  General  Ecology  (3)  Relationships  between 
living  organisms  and  their  en\'ironment.  (2,3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  110.  Recommended  are  BIO  215 
and  217,  MAT  121,  or  SCI  101  and  102  and  one 
semester  of  computer  science. 

275  Field  Botany  (3)  Methods  of  studying  plants 
in  their  natural  surroundings.  Use  of  keys,  botani- 
cal manuals,  and  illustrated  floras  to  identify'  living 
specimens.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  100  or  215. 
277  Vertebrate  Ecology  (3)  Animal  life  in  the 
surrounding  localities.  Identification,  behavior, 
habitats,  feeding,  and  reproduction.  (2,3)  PRE- 
REQ; BIO  100  or  217. 

307  Pathophysiology  (3)  An  integrated  study  of  the 
processes  involved  in  the  total  body  sj'stemic  complex 
as  it  changes  from  the  ordered  homeostatic  condition 
to  the  imbalanced  diseased  state.  The  use  of  disease 
models,  with  clinical  considerations,  strengthens  the 
concepts.  (3)  PREREQi  BIO  259  and  269.  May  not 
be  taken  as  a  biolog\'  major  elective. 

310  Biometrics  (3)  The  experimental  design  and 
computer-assisted  statistical  anal\^is  of  biological 
research  problems.  (2,3)  PREREQ^BIO  110  and 
MAT  121. 

311  Contemporary  Issues  in  Biology  Teaching 
(3)  Curricular  trends  in  biology  education, 
biotechnology',  and  bioethics  are  analyzed  in  a 
social  contc-rt  through  constructive  controversy. 
The  nature  of  science  is  explored  and  experiential 
skills  are  honed  through  practical  application  via  a 
laboratorv-oriented,  facultv-student  mentoring 
program.' (2,2)  PREREQ^BIO  110,  215,  217, 
230;  EDF  100;  EDP  250,  351  (or  graduate-level 
equivalents);  or  permission  of  the  instructor.  May 
not  be  taken  as  a  biology'  elective. 

313  Marine  Biology  (3)  The  course  is  intended  to 
provide  a  general  introduction  to  the  biology  of 
marine  organisms.  Lectures  will  focus  on  the 
diversit)',  ecology,  and  adaptations  of  organisms 
living  in  the  marine  em'ironmcnt.  (3) 

314  Diagnostic  Bacteriology  (4)  Systematic  study 
of  pathogenic  bacteria  with  extensive  laboratory 
experience  in  handling  and  identiiy-ing  these 
organisms.  (3,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  214. 

BIL  333  Introduction  to  Recombinant  DNA 
Methodology  (2)  Laboratory'  techniques  for  gene 
manipulation,  restriction  endonuclease  use,  DNA 
electrophoresis,  gene  cloning  in  E.  coli,  and  poly- 
merase chain  reaction.  (0,  4)  PREREQ^  BIO  204 
or214,  BIO230,  CHE231. 
334  Microbial  Genetics  (4)  A  course  on  the  genet- 
ics of  bacteria,  their  viruses,  plasmids,  and  cranspos- 
able  elements.  Applications  of  microbial  genetics  in 


generic  engineering  and  biotechnology.  (3,3)  PRE- 
REQ, BIO  110,  214,  230,  and  CHE  231. 
357  Comparative  Vertebrate  Anatomy  (4)  Com- 
parative study  of  the  principal  organ  systems  ot 
vertebrates  as  to  their  structure,  fiinction,  and  evo- 
lutionary' relationships.  (2,4)  PREREQ^  BIO  217. 
367  Physiologyof  Drug  Interaction  (3)  An 
introduction  to  the  mechanism  of  action  of  proto- 
type drugs.  The  physiological  alterations  produced 
by  various  drugs  as  well  as  interactions  between 
drug  classes  yvill  be  emphasized.  (3)  PREREQj^ 
BIO  269  or  BIO  468  or  BIO  469. 
377  Entomology  (3)  The  structure,  function,  clas- 
sification, economic  importance,  and  biological 
significance  of  insects.  (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  110 
or  217. 

407  and  408  Internship  in  Medical  Technology 
(13  for  each  semester,  total  of  26)  A  two-semes- 
ter, work-study  appointment  yvith  an  affiliated 
hospital.  The  satisfactory  completion  of  this 
internship  is  accepted  as  the  senior  year's  yvork  by 
West  Chester  University'.  This  internship  yvill  pre- 
pare the  student  to  take  the  National  Exam  for 
Medical  Technologists.  PREREQ^  Students  yvho 
have  completed  65  credit  hours  in  the  B.S.  biolog}' 
general  concentration  should  applv  for  this  intern- 
ship in  the  summer  folloyving  their  sophomore 
year.  Students  must  have  an  overall  GPA  of  2.75 
and  approval  from  the  Department  of  Biology  and 
the  affiliated  hospital. 

♦  409  Internship  in  Biological  Sciences  (3-16)  A 
one-semester,  work-studv  appointment  with  a 
commercial,  industrial,  or  governmental  agency. 
Students  yvill  be  supervised  jointiv  by  a  profession- 
al scientist  of  the  agency  and  a  Department  of 
Biology  faculty  member.  A  maximum  of  eight 
combined  credits  from  BIO  409  and  BIO  491 
may  be  applied  to  biology'  electives.  PREREQ^ 
Biology'  major,  senior  standing,  GPA  of  2.5  over- 
all, 2.50  in  biology',  and  approval  of  biology'  cur- 
riculum committee. 

414  Applied  and  Industrial  Microbiology  (3)  This 
course  traces  both  the  historical  and  current  applica- 
tions of  microbiology'  in  industry  and  society'.  Topics 
covered  during  lectures  include  building  and  equip- 
ment design,  microbiological  safety,  fermentation, 
yvaste  treatment,  compost,  and  food  production. 
The  course  also  features  guest  lectures  from  several 
practicing  microbiologists  involved  in  industry. 
PREREQ^  BIO  214  or  permission  of  the  instructor. 
421  Cellular  and  MolecuJar  Biology  (4)  A  lecture 
and  laboratory  course  that  studies  the  molecular 
basis  of  cellular  hfe.  Eukary'otic  cell  structure  and 
function  yvill  be  emphasized.  (3,3)  PREREQ^ 
BIO  220,  BIL  333.  and  CHE  232. 
428  Animal  Histology  (3)  A  study  of  the  micro- 
scopic structure  and  frincrion  of  vertebrate  tissues 
and  organs.  (2,2)  PREREQi  BIO  110  and  217,  or 
permission  of  the  instructor. 
431  Molecular  Genetics  (3)  A  second  course  in 
genetics,  covering  the  molecular  biolog)'  of  genetic 
events.  Emphasis  yvill  be  on  the  molecular  details  of 
basic  genetic  processes,  such  as  DNA  replication 
and  transcription,  RNA  translation  and  protein 
synthesis,  the  genetic  code,  molecular  mechanisms 
of  gene  regulation,  and  an  introduction  to  "biotech- 
nology." (3)  PREREQ.  BIO  230  and  CHE  232. 

♦  435-438  Course  Topics  in  Biology'  (1-3) 
Courses  in  this  series  are  of  timely  interest  to  the 
student.  Topics  may  include  biological  terminolo- 
g)',  laboratory  techniques,  mycology,  etc.  Open 
only  to  junior  and  senior  science  majors. 

448  Animal  Development  (4)  Introduction  to 
principles  of  animal  development  with  laboratory 


study  of  vertebrate  embn'os.  (3,3)  PREREQ^  BIO 
110,  217,  220,  and  230.' 

452  Parasitology  (3)  Biology  of  the  principal  par- 
asites of  man  and  domestic  animals.  Emphasis  is 
on  life  cy'cles  of  common  parasites,  identification 
of  diagnostic  forms,  and  understanding  the  dis- 
eases associated  yvith  parasites  of  major  economic 
and  medical  importance.  (3)  PREREQ^  BIO  204 
or  214,  and  217. 

454  Mycology  (3)  An  introductory  course  includ- 
ing a  general  study  ot  the  biology'  ot  fiingi  and  a 
survey  of  the  field  of  medical  mycology'.  (3)  PRE- 
REQi  BIO  110  and  214  plus  another  three-credit- 
hour  biology'  course. 

456  Virology  (3)  Molecular  biology'  of  bacterial, 
plant,  and  animal  viruses;  virus  classification,  ultra- 
structure,  mechanisms  of  replication,  and  effects  of 
virus  infection  on  host  cell.  PREREQ;  CHE  232 
and  BIO  230  and  214. 

457  Functional  Animal  Morphology  (3)  A  study 
of  the  structure,  form,  and  function  of  morpholog- 
ical adaptations  in  animals  as  examined  through  a 
mechanical,  ecological,  and  evolutionary  perspec- 
tive. (3)  PREREQ;  BIO  217. 

464  Microbial  Physiology  (4)  Physiology  and 
biochemical  variations  seen  in  prokary'otes  and 
lower  eukan'otes.  (2,4)  PREREQ:  BIO  214  and 
230,  and  CHE  232. 

465  Immunology  (4)  Immunoglobulin  structure 
and  fiinction,  nature  of  antigens,  cell-mediated 
immunity',  hy'persensitivity,  regulation  of  immuni- 
ty, and  immunological  diseases.  Laboratory  experi- 
ence in  immunological  techniques.  (3,3)  PRE- 
REQ: BIO  214  and  CHE  232. 

466  Plant  Physiology  (3)  Physiological  processes 
of  plants.  Photosy'nthesis,  respiration,  intermediary 
metabolism,  entrance  of  solutes  into  the  plant, 
water  metabolism,  and  groyvth  regulators.  (2,3) 
PREREQ:  BIO  215  and  CHE  231. 

467  Endocrinology  (3)  An  integrative  look  at  the 
physiology'  of  the  mammalian  endocrine  system  in 
the  regulation  and  maintenance  of  homeostasis. 
The  pathology'  associated  with  hormonal  imbal- 
ance yviU  be  included.  (3)  PREREQi  BIO  217  and 
BIO  220  with  a  C  or  better  in  each,  plus  any 
300/400  level  biology-  course  yvith  a  C  or  better. 

468  Comparative  Vertebrate  Physiology  (4) 
Comparative  physiology  of  fishes,  amphibians, 
reptiles,  birds,  and  mammals,  yvith  emphasis  on 
organ-based  homeostasis.  (3,3)  PREREQ;  BIO 
217  and  BIO  220. 

469  Human  Physiology  (4)  Theoretical  and 
applied  principles  ot  the  physiology'  ot  humans  pre- 
sented from  an  org'an-sy'stem  approach.  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  homeostatic  regulaton'  mechanisms.  (3,3) 
PREREQ;  BIO  220,  BIO  230,'CHE  232.  May 
not  be  taken  as  a  biology'  major  elective. 

470  Population  Biology  (3)  A  quantitative,  sec- 
ond course  in  ecology,  emphasizing  distributional 
patterns  and  fluctuations  in  abundance  of  natural 
populations.  (2,3)  PREREQ;  BIO  270.  MAT 
121,  and  one  semester  ot  calculus. 

471  Wetlands  (3)  A  course  designed  to  provide 
practical  experience  in  wedands'  classification, 
delineation,  regulation,  management,  and  mitiga- 
tion practices.  The  abiotic  and  biotic  characteris- 
tics of  inland  and  coastal  wetlands  are  emphasized. 
(2,3)  PREREQ;  Eight  hours  of  biology'  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

472  Aquatic  Biology'  (3)  A  laboratory'  and  field- 
oriented  course  in  the  ecology'  and  biota  of  streams 
and  wetlands.  (2,3)  PREREQ;  BIO  215,  217,  270. 


'  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Chemistrv 


473  Conservation  Biology  (3)  The  application  of 
basic  biological  and  ecological  principles  for  the 
preservation  of  biological  diversity'.  Emphasis  will  be 
on  understanding  the  threats  to  biodiversity,  the  val- 
ues of  biodiversity,  and  preservation  strategies 
including  ecological  risk  assessment  and  the  man- 
agement of  endangered  species,  habitats,  and  ecosys- 
tems. PREREQ.(rcquired):  BIO  110,  215  or  217, 
and  270.  PREREQ.(recommcnded):  BIO  310. 

474  Microbial  Ecology  (4)  Theory  and  applica- 
tion ot  modern  microbial  ecolog)'.  Lectures  will 
focus  on  topics  such  as  microbial  communities, 
interactions  with  other  organisms,  biogeochem- 
istry,  and  biotechnology.  (3,3)  PREREQiBIO 
110,  214,  270,  and  CHE  103,  104. 

475  Plant  Communities  (3)  A  survey  of  ecologi- 
cal, morphological,  and  physiological  strategies  of 
plants  from  seed  through  adult  stages.  The  inte- 
gration of  these  strategies  to  explain  the  major 
plant  communities  of  North  America  will  be  cov- 
ered. (2,3)  PREREQ:  BIO  215. 

476  Limnology  (3)  The  measurement  and  analy- 
sis of  the  physical,  chemical,  and  biological  prop- 
erties of  lakes.  (2,3)  PREREQIBIO  110  and 
CHE  103,  104. 

480  Light  Microscopy  and  the  Living  Cell  (3)  A 
one-semester  lecture  and  lab  course  covering  the 
theory  and  practical  techniques  of  all  types  of  light 
microscopy  and  their  uses  in  investigating  hving 
cells.  Aso  includes  techniques  such  as  microinjec- 
tion, cell  electrophysiolog)',  and  others.  Strong 
emphasis  on  "hands-on"  work  with  equipment. 
(2,2)  PREREQ:  BIO  110,  BIO  215  or  217,  CHE 
104,  CRL  104,  or  permission  ot  instructor. 
484  Epidemiology  (3)  A  general  study  of  the  epi- 
demiology ot  both  infectious  and  noninfectious 


diseases,  including  industrial  and  environmentallv 
related  health  problems.  (3)  PREREQ:  BIO  214. 
485  Systematic  Botany  (3)  Principles  of  evolution 
as  illustrated  by  the  principles  of  plant  taxonomy. 
Modern  concepts  of  biosvstematics.  Practical 
experience  in  plant  identification.  (2,3)  PREREQ; 
BIO  215. 

490  Biology  Seminar  (3)  Reports  on  special  top- 
ics and  current  developments  in  the  biological  sci- 
ences. PREREQ:  18  hours  of  biology  courses  and 
senior  standing. 

♦  491  Special  Problems  in  Biology  (1-3)  Tutorial 
course  primarily  for  advanced  undergraduate  biolo- 
gy majors  capable  of  independent  study  and 
research  on  a  problem  approved  by  the  supervising 
instructor.  A  maximum  of  eight  combined  credits 
from  BIO  409  and  BIO  491  may  be  applied  to 
biology  electives.  PREREQ;  Permission  ot  instruc- 
tor, 2.50  GPA  overall,  2.50  GPA  in  biology. 
IND  401  Environmental  Applications  of  GIS 
(3)  Students  are  introduced  to  regional  problem 
solving  based  on  interdisciplinary,  scientific  data 
using  Geographic  Information  Systems  (GIS). 
Background  in  one  of  the  natural  or  applied  sci- 
ences is  presumed,  and  students  without  such 
background  should  contact  one  of  the  instructors 
before  scheduling.  Most  relevant  lecture  material  is 
handled  as  readings  outside  of  class,  and  class  time 
is  devoted  largely  to  environmental  analysis  using 
ArcViewGIS.  One  half-day  field  trip  is  required. 
(1,2)  PREREQ:  Minimum  of  64  credits  earned, 
major  in  BIO,  CHE,  ENV,  ESS,  GEO,  or  PHY, 
with  at  least  15  credits  earned  in  one  of  these  dis- 
ciplines, or  permission  of  the  instructor. 

#  SCB  210  The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 
(3)  An  interdisciplinary  course  that  presents  the 


theory  and  evidence  for  the  first  three  minutes  of 
the  universe  and  tormation  of  the  stars,  galaxies, 
planets,  organic  molecules,  and  the  genetic  basis  of 
organic  evolution.  May  not  be  taken  as  a  biology 
major  elective. 

SCB  350  Science  Education  in  the  Secondary' 
School  (3)  A  methods  course  emphasizing  knowl- 
edge of  curricular  development  and  skill  in  plan- 
ning, involving  the  design  and  execution  of  learn- 
ing activities  for  all  instructional  modes.  (2,2) 
PREREQ:  Required  core  courses  in  science  disci- 
pline and  EDS  306  (or  graduate-level  equivalent), 
or  permission  of  instructor. 

SCI  101  The  Carbon  Cycle  (3)  An  exploration  of 
how  the  carbon  cycle  connects  earth  and  life, 
through  photosynthesis,  respiration,  decay,  rock 
formation  and  weathering,  and  plate  tectonics. 
Humans  have  altered  the  carbon  cycle  by  burning 
fossil  tuels.  Students  investigate  the  carbon  cycle 
on  the  WCU  campus  and  consider  the  implica- 
tions for  global  warming.  For  elementary  educa- 
tion majors  only.  Team  taught  with  the 
Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy. 
SCI  102  Electricity  with  Physical  and  Biological 
Applications  (3)  An  exploration  of  the  physics  of 
electrical  circuits,  the  chemical  basis  of  electricity 
as  the  flow  of  electrons,  acid-base  and  oxidation- 
reduction  reactions  in  chemical  and  in  living  sys- 
tems, the  electrical  actiNity  in  the  human  netN'ous 
system,  and  connections  between  electricit)'  and 
sensation  and  locomotion  in  humans.  For  elemen- 
tary education  majors  only.  Team  taught  with  the 
departments  of  Physics  and  Chemistry. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Chemistry 

(See  also  Pre-Medical  Program) 

119  Schmucker  Science  Center  II 

610-436-2631 

James  S.  Falcone,  Jr.  Chairperson 

Michael  J.  Moran,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Fenton,  Ghoroghchian,  Moran 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Ahmad,  Barth,  Cichowicz, 

Frost,  Reid,  Ressner 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Caffo,  Falcone,  Goodson,  Starn, 

Townsend 
The  Department  of  Chemistry  is  approved  by  the  American  Chemical 
Society's  Committee  on  Professional  Training.  Graduates  ot  the  B.S. 
in  chemistry  program  and  the  B.S.  in  biochemistry  program  receive 
certification  it  they  complete  the  program. 
The  Department  of  Chemistr)'  offers  five  undergraduate  degree 
programs: 

(1)  The  B.S.  in  CHEMISTRY  program  (approved  by  the  American 
Chemical  Society  [ACS])  provides  a  rigorous  scientific  foundation  in 
all  major  areas  of  chemistry.  This  degree  prepares  the  graduate  for  a 
career  in  a  wide  variety  of  chemically  related  areas  including  the 
chemical,  petroleum,  environmental,  and  pharmaceutical  sectors.  In 
addition,  it  serves  as  a  basis  for  graduate  and  professional  smdy  lead- 
ing to  higher  level  industrial  positions,  teaching  at  the  college  level, 
or  involvement  in  technical  aspects  of  related  fields  such  as  law. 

(2)  The  B.S.  in  BIOCHEMISTRY  program  (approved  by  the 
American  Chemical  Society  [ACS])  provides  a  comprehensive 
background  in  the  major  areas  of  chemistry  with  an  emphasis  in 


biochemistiy.  Students  awarded  this  degree  will  be  qualified  for 
employment  opportunities  in  chemistry  and  biochemistry.  The 
program  also  prepares  students  for  graduate  study  in  chemistry 
and  in  biochemistry. 

(3)  The  B.S.  in  CHEMISTRY-BIOLOGY  (Pre-Medical)  provides 
the  core  courses  required  for  admission  to  schools  ot  medicine, 
dentistry,  and  veterinary  medicine  as  well  as  schools  of  optometry, 
podiatry,  chiropractic,  and  physical  therapy.  It  also  enables  the 
student  to  pursue  a  career  in  biochemistry  and  molecular  biology. 

(4)  The  B.S.  in  FORENSIC  CHEMISTRY  is  a  program  that  pre- 
pares students  for  careers  in  crimalistics  and  toxicology.  The  pro- 
gram also  serves  as  a  basis  for  graduate  study  and  specialization  in 
these  fields.  A  one-semester  internship  in  a  police  or  toxicology 
forensic-chemistry  laborator)'  is  mandatory. 

(5)  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  CHEMISTRY  program  prepares 
the  student  for  a  career  in  teaching  chemistry  in  secondary 
schools.  The  program  gives  the  student  experience  in  the  major 
branches  of  chemistry  so  that,  with  proper  selection  of  electives, 
graduate  work  in  either  pure  chemistr)'  or  chemistry  education  can 
be  pursued.  Sufficient  flexibility  is  provided  so  that  the  student 
also  may  become  certified  in  general  science.  This  program 
requires  126  credits  for  completion. 

Majors  in  the  five  B.S.  programs  should  consult  the  Department  of 
Chemistry  handbook  and  their  adviser  for  current  requirements.  A  grade 
of  C-  or  better  is  necessary  in  all  required  science  and  math  courses. 


Chemistry 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


Undergraduate  Research  and  Internship  Programs 

Although  internships  are  not  a  mandatory  part  of  all  chemistry  pro- 
grams, they  are  available  to  majors  on  a  selective  basis.  Students  receive 
varying  amounts  of  credit  based  on  the  number  of  hours  spent  in  a 
work  situation  and  on  the  nature  of  the  academic  work  during  the 
internship  or  research.  Credit  varies  from  one  to  12  semester  hours. 
The  maximum  number  of  research  or  internship  credits  that  can  be 
taken  may  be  limited  by  the  department. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  DEGREE 
PROGRAMS  IN  CHEMISTRY,  BIOCHEMISTRY, 
FORENSIC  CHEMISTRY,  AND  EDUCATION  - 
CHEMISTRY 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Note;  Certain  programs  have  individualized 

requirements;  see  below. 

2.  Chemistry  Requirements 
CHE  103-104,  231-232,  321,  418,  476,  491. 
CRL  103-104,  231,  321 

Lab  safety  exam  to  be  passed  before  completing 
70  credits.  See  adviser  for  more  information. 

3.  Other  Science  Requirements 
PHY  170-180;  BIO  110  (B.S.  chemistry 
majors  may  substitute  CSC  141) 
PHY  170  and  BIO  110  (or  CSC  141)  fiilfill 
science  general  education  requirements. 

4.  Mathematics  Requirements 
MAT  161-162  (MAT  161  flilfills  a  general 
education  math  requirement) 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  CHEMISTRY 

1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  26  semester  hours 
CHE  341,  342,  409,  411,  424 

CRL  232,  341,  342,  411,  and  424 

2.  Chemistry  Electives  9  semester  hours 
Group  A  electives:  CHE  333  or  CHE  477 

(3  semester  hours) 

Group  B  electives:  selected  from  upper-division 

chemistry  courses  (6  semester  hours) 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  BIOCHEMISTRY 

1.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  28  semester  hours 
CHE341,  342,  4li,424,  477 

CRL  232,  341,  342,  411,  424,  and  476 

2.  Other  Required  Courses  3  semester  hours 
One  of  these  courses;  BIO  214,  220,  or  230 

3.  Biochemistry  Elective  4  semester  hours 
Students  must  select  from  among  the  following: 

CHE  381,  479,  480,  or  CRL  477 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  FORENSIC  CHEMISTRY 

1.    Required  Chemistry  Courses  20  semester  hours 

CHE  341,  371,  45i,  479 
CRL  341,  371,  476,  and  a  300-400  level 
chemistry  elective 


27  semester  hours 


11  semester  hours 


11  semester  hours 


2.   Other  Required  Courses  15  semester  hours 

BIO  204,  230;  BIL  333;  CRJ  110;  and  MAT  121 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  — 
CHEMISTRY 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 
Note;  Students  in  this  program  must  register  for 
LIT  165  and  PHI  180  as  humanities  general 
education  courses,  and  for  PSY  100  as  a 
behavioral/social  science  general  education  course. 

2.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  9-10  semester  hours 
CHE  341  or  345,  409  or  411,  417 

CRL  341 

3.  Required  Education  Courses  33  semester  hours 
EDA/EDR  341,  EDF  100;  EDM  300; 

EDP  250,  351;  EDS  306,  411,  412;  and  SCE  350 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  CHEMISTRY-BIOLOGY 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39  48  semester  hours 
Note:  Students  in  the  chemistry-biology 

curriculum  must  take  PHI  470  as  a  humanities  or 
interdisciplinary  general  education  requirement. 

2.  Required  Chemistry  Courses  32  semester  hours 
CHE  103,  104,  231,  232,  321,  345,  418*,  476,  491 

CRL  103,  104,  231,  321*,  and  476 

3.  Required  Biology  Courses 
BIO  110,  217,  220,  230,  357,  448,  and  468 

4.  Required  Courses 
PHY  130-140  or  170-180 

5.  Required  Mathematics  Courses 
MAT  121  and  161 

6.  Concentration  Electives* 
Selected  from  upper-division  chemistry  and 
biology  courses 

Minor  in  Chemistry 

The  Department  of  Chemistry  offers  a  minor  in  chemistry.  The 
requirements  are  as  follows; 

1.  Required  courses;  Completion  of  CHE  231,  CHE  232,  CRL  231, 
CHE  321,  CRL  321,  and  three  credits  of  300-level  or  higher 
chemistry  elective(s).  These  electives  must  be  chemistry  courses 
(CHE)  that  satisfy  the  chemistry  requirements  of  the  ACS  chem- 
istry major  program.  Each  of  these  courses  must  be  passed  with  a 
grade  of  C-  or  better. 

2.  Completion  of  the  prerequisites  for  these  courses  including  CHE 
103,  CHE  104,  CRL  103,  CRL  104.  Each  of  these  courses  must 
be  passed  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 

3.  GPA  of  at  least  a  2.00  in  the  minor. 

4.  Interview  with  the  Department  of  Chemistry  minor  adviser  and 
chair  at  least  once  a  semester. 


24  semester  hours 


8  semester  hours 


7  semester  hours 


9-10  semester  hours 


17  semester  hours 


'  Students  may,  with  the  permission  of  the  department  chair  and  the  coordina- 
tor of  the  pre-medical  program,  substitute  an  approved  6-12  credit  internship 
for  selected  requirements  and  concentration  electives.  The  courses  with  aster- 
isks would  be  replaced  by  the  internship  (12  credits). 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
CHEMISTRY 

Symbols:  CHE,  CRL 

100  Concepts  of  Chemistry  (3)  A  broad  survey 
course  with  a  laboratory  experience  that  seeks  to 
develop  an  understanding  ot  the  field  of  chemistry 
through  inquiry.  Basic  competence  in  scientific 
methods  and  procedures  will  be  obtained  by 
observing  chemical  reactions  and  studying  the 
chemical  and  physical  properties  of  a  variety  of 
compounds.  (2  hours  lecture,  2  hours  lab) 

101  Fundamentals  of  Chemistiy  (3)  A  mathe- 
matically oriented  course  for  students  who  intend 
later  to  take  CHE  103  but  whose  science  and 


mathematics  backgrounds  are  judged  by  a  pretest 
to  need  remediation. 

103-104  General  Chemistry  MI  (3)  (3)  Basic 
laws  and  theories  ot  chemistry,  including  atomic 
structure,  chemical  bonding,  oxidation-reduction, 
solutions,  and  ionic  equilibria.  Correlations  ot 
chemical  principles  and  their  application  to  mod- 
ern descripfive  chemistry.  CHE  103  must  precede 
CHE  104.  PREREQ.(for  CHE  103):  Successfol 
completion  of  high  school  chemistry  OR  passing 
grades  in  CHE  101. 

CRL  103-104  Experimental  General  Chemistry 
I-ll  (1)  (1)  Basic  laborator)'  studies  in  college 
chemistry  utilizing  the  quantitative  approach. 
Semimicro  qualitative  analysis  and  inorganic 


preparations.  CONCURRENT  or  PREREQ: 
CHE  103-104.  CRL  103  must  precede  CRL  104. 
107  General  Chemistry  for  the  Allied  Health 
Sciences  (4)  A  one-semester  treatment  ot  the  hin- 
damentals  ot  chemistr\',  including  atomic  structure 
and  bonding,  types  ot  reactions,  kinetics,  equilibri- 
um, and  thermodynamics.  May  not  be  taken  as  a 
chemistry  major  elecrive.  CRL  107  may  be  taken 
concurrently  or  alter  CHE  107. 
CRL  107  General  Chemistry  Lab  for  Allied 
Health  Science  (1)  A  one-semester  laboratory 
course  to  complement  CHE  107.  Basic  laboratory 
techniques,  both  qualitative  and  quantitative,  will 
be  used  to  illustrate  principles  from  the  lecture. 
CONCURRENT  or  PREREQ:  CHE  107. 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


Chemistry 


230  Introduction  to  Organic  and  Biological 
Chemistry  (3)  A  course  in  the  fundamentals  of 
organic  chemistry.  Structural  theory  of  organic  mol- 
ecules, organic  synthesis,  and  biological  applica- 
tions. PREREQ:  C-  or  better  in  CHE  104  or  107. 
231-232  Organic  Chemistry  I-II  (4)  (3)  A  survey 
of  the  classes  of  organic  reactions  from  a  mechanis- 
tic deductive  approach.  Preparatory  topics  will 
include  atomic  structure,  bonding  theories,  reso- 
nance,, and  acid-base  concepts.  CHE  231  wtU  focus 
on  classes  of  organic  molecules,  organic  nomencla- 
ture, stereochemistry,  nucleophilic  substitution,  and 
elimination  reactions  applied  to  the  chemistry  of 
hydrocarbons,  alkyl  halides,  alcohols,  and  simple 
systems.  CHE  232  will  include  reactions  of  car- 
bonyl  compounds,  the  chemistry  of  aromatic  com- 
pounds, molecular  rearrangements,  oxidation  and 
reduction  reactions,  carbanion  and  amine  chem- 
istry, and  spectroscopy.  PREREQ.(for  CHE  231): 
CHE  104.  PREREa(for  CHE  232):  CHE  231. 
CRL  231-232  Experimental  Organic  Chemistry 
l-II  (2)  (2)  Basic  laboratory  skiUs  in  organic  chem- 
istry including  classical  as  well  as  instrumental 
techniques.  Organic  synthesis  and  modern  spec- 
trophotometric  methods  of  identification.  CON- 
CURRENT or  PREREQ:  CRL  104  and  CHE 
231-232.  CRL  231  must  precede  CRL  232. 
300  Fundamentals  of  Radioisotope  Techniques 
(3)  (Also  PHY  340)  Biological,  chemical,  environ- 
mental, and  physical  effects  of  nuclear  radiation. 
Radiation  detection  instrumentation  and  radio 
tracer  methodology.  (2  hours  lecture,  2  hours  lab) 
PREREQ;.  CHE  104  and  PHY  140  or  180. 
310  Introductoiy  Biochemistry  (3)  The  chemical 
nature  of  biological  phenomena  is  presented. 
Particular  emphasis  is  placed  on  the  metabolic 
pathways  and  the  enzymes  responsible  for  these 
processes  with  applications  to  nutrition.  PREREQ^ 
CHE  230  or  231.  (Not  for  chemistry  majors.) 
321  Analytical  Chemistry  (3)  Fundamental  prin- 
ciples of  analytical  chemistry.  Theory  of  gravimet- 
ric and  volumetric  methods  of  analysis.  PREREQ; 
CHE  104. 

CRL  321  Experimental  Analytical  Chemistry  (2) 
Practical  experience  in  modern  techniques  of 
chemical  analysis  with  emphasis  on  volumetric  and 
gravimetric  methods.  CONCURRENT  or  PRE- 
REQ: CHE  321. 

333  Organic  Chemistry  III  (3)  An  advanced 
mechanistic  study  ot  organic  compounds,  fiinc- 
tional  groups,  and  their  reaction.  Spectroscopic 
characterization  of  organic  molecules  will  also  be 
covered.  PREREQ:  C-  or  better  in  CHE  232. 

341  Physical  Chemistry  I  (4)  An  introduction  to 
physical  chemistry  including  ideal  gases,  kinetic 
theory,  three  laws  of  thermodynamics,  introduction 
to  phase  equilibrium,  chemical  equilibrium,  applica- 
tion of  the  fiindamental  equation  of  thermodynam- 
ics, transport  phenomena,  chemical  kinetics,  intro- 
ductory spectroscopy.  X-ray  diffraction,  and  the 
strucm're  of  solids.  PREREQ:  CHE  103,  CHE 
104,  MAT  161  and  162  all  with  a  C-  or  better. 
CONCURRENT  or  PREREQ:  PHY  180. 
CRL  341  Experimental  Physical  Chemistry  I  (2) 
Laboratory  course  in  physical  chemistry  including 
computer  applications,  thermodynamics,  chemical 
kinetics,  structure,  and  spectroscopy.  PREREQ;. 
CHE  104,  MAT  162,  PHY  170.  COREQ;  CHE 
341,  PHY  180. 

342  Physical  Chemistry  II  (3)  Advanced  thermody- 
namics including  nonideal  gases,  nonideal  systems, 
and  thermodynamics  at  surfaces;  introduction  to  sta- 
tistical mechanics;  quanmm  chemistry;  advanced 
chemical  kinetics,  including  kinetics  near  equilibri- 
um, catalytic  kinetics,  and  activated  complex  theory; 


and  dynamic  electrochemistry.  PREREQ;^  CHE 
341  and  PHY  180,  both  with  a  C-  or  better. 
CRL  342  Experimental  Physical  Chemistry  II 

(2)  Experiments  and  projects  in  advanced  physical 
chemistry.  PREREQ:  CHE/CRL  341.  COREQ; 
CHE  342. 

345  Fundamentals  of  Physical  Chemistry  (3)  A 
survey  of  the  fiindamental  topics  in  physical  chem- 
istry with  applications  to  biology  and  medicine. 
Primarily  for  biology  and  chemistry-biology 
majors.  PREREQ:  CHE  232,  MAT  161,  and 
PHY  140  or  180. 

371  Forensic  Chemistry  (3)  Introduction  to  crim- 
inahstics  (chemical,  forensic,  analytical  techniques) 
with  the  role,  fiinctions,  operations,  and  organiza- 
tion of  a  scientific  police  laboratory.  PREREQ; 
CHE  104,  CHE  232,  and  CHE  321. 
CRL  371  Forensic  Chemistry  Lab  (2)  Principles 
of  microscopy,  screening  methods,  and  instrumen- 
tal methods  of  chemical  analysis  applied  to  crimi- 
nalistics and  toxicological  samples.  CONCUR- 
RENT or  PREREQ:  CHE  371. 
381  Clinical  Chemistry  (3)  Analysis  of  biological 
fluids.  Chnical  significance  of  enzyme,  electrolyte, 
protein,  and  carbohydrate  analysis.  Requires  per- 
mission of  instructor  or  preparation  in  organic 
chemistry  and  quantitative  analysis.  CONCUR- 
RENT or  PREREQ:  CHE  321  and  CHE  476. 
403  Chemistryof  the  Environment  (3)  The 
chemistry  ot  the  atmosphere,  hydrosphere,  and 
biosphere;  human  impact  on  these  areas.  PRE- 
REQ; CHE  104.  May  also  be  offered  with  lab.  (2 
hours  lecture,  2  hours  lab) 
409  Descriptive  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3) 
Emphasis  is  on  the  periodic  properties  of  the  rep- 
resentative elements,  the  structure  of  inorganic 
soUds,  the  chemistry  of  aqueous  and  nonaqueous 
solutions,  and  the  study  of  some  transition  metals. 
Lanthanides  and  actinides  also  are  studied.  PRE- 
REQ: CHE/CRL  104. 
♦  410  Advanced  Independent  Study  or 
Chemical  Research  (3-6)  Taken  under  the  direct 
supervision  ot  a  faculty  member.  May  be  taken  for 
two  semesters  for  a  total  of  six  credits.  PREREQ; 
Senior  standing  or  permission  of  department 
chairperson. 

411  Advanced  Inorganic  Chemistry  (3)  Structure 
and  properties  of  the  elements  and  inorganic  com- 
pounds from  a  theoretical  point  of  view.  Atomic 
structure  and  the  periodic  law;  molecular  structure 
and  bonding,  including  symmetry  and  MO  theory; 
structure,  bonding,  and  reactivity  of  transition-ele- 
ment compounds  and  main  group  compounds; 
acid-base  chemistry.  PREREQ;  CHE  341.  CON- 
CURRENT: CHE  342. 

CRL  411  Inorganic  Syntheses  (2)  A  four-hour  lab- 
oratory course  in  the  synthesis  and  characterization 
of  inorganic  compounds  of  the  main  group  and  the 
transition  elements.  PREREQ;  CHE  409  or  411. 

417  History  of  Chemistry  (1)  The  history  of 
chemistry  and  its  predecessors  from  earUest  times 
to  the  present  day.  PREREQ;  CHE  104. 

418  Chemical  Information  (1)  Instruction  in  the 
use  of  a  modern  chemical  hbrary,  reference  and 
data  acquisition,  synthetic  procedures,  and  com- 
puter data  bases.  PREREQ;  CHE  231. 

424  Advanced  Analytical  Chemistry  (3)  Basic 
principles  of  apphed  instrumental  analysis.  Special 
emphasis  on  the  use  of  spectrophotometric  and 
electroanalytical  instrumentation.  PREREQ; 
CHE  321  and  341.  CONCURRENT:  CHE  342. 
CRL  424  Advanced  Analytical  Chemistry 
Laboratory  (2)  Practical  experience  in  the  choice 
and  apphcation  of  instrumental  methods  of  analy- 


sis to  chemical  systems.  CONCURRENT  or 
PREREQ;  CHE  424. 

436  Polymer  Chemistry  (3)  Polymerization  kinet- 
ics, rheology  of  polymer  melts,  crystallization  para- 
meters, and  monomer  reactivity  in  copolymeriza- 
tion.  PREREQ;  CHE  232. 

CRL  436  Polymer  Chemistry  Laboratory  (2) 

Synthesis  of  poljnmers;  molecular,  physical,  and 
thermal  characterization  of  polymers.  Instrumental 
methods  include  X-rays,  IR,  electron  microscopy, 
and  thermal  analysis.  CONCURRENT:  CHE  436. 

443  Quantum  Chemistry  (3)  Basic  quantum 

chemistry  including  the  properties  of  wave  func- 
tions, the  hydrogen  atom  problem,  chemical  bond- 
ing, angular  momentum,  eigenvalues  and  eigen- 
fiinctions,  and  spectroscopic  concepts.  PREREQ; 
CHE  342. 

♦  450  Internship  in  Chemistry  (1-12)  A  tiill-  or 
part-time  work-study  appointment  in  a  clinical, 
commercial,  governmental,  or  industrial  laboratory 
supervised  joindy  by  an  on-site  supervisor  and 
Department  of  Chemistry  faculty  member.  PRE- 
REQ; GPA  of  2.00  or  above  and  permission  of 
the  Chemistry  Internship  Committee  (CIC). 

451  Internship  in  Forensic  Chemistry  (1)  A  fiill- 
or  part-time  work-smdy  appointment  in  a  clinical, 
commercial,  governmental,  or  industrial  laboratory 
supervised  joindy  by  an  on-site  supervisor  and  a 
Department  of  Chemistry  faculty  member.  The  ana- 
lytical methodology  in  the  laboratory  will  include 
techniques  applicable  to  forensic  toxicology  and/or 
criminalistics  samples.  PREREQ;  Permission  of  the 
Forensic  Chemistry  Intemship  Committee. 

452  Intemship  in  Chemistry-Biology  (6-12) 

This  course  gives  the  student  exposure  to  and 
hands-on  experience  in  the  field  of  biomedical 
research.  Intended  to  be  a  full-time  appointment 
in  a  hospital,  medical  school,  or  research  institute, 
it  may  be  modified  to  be  part-time  to  better  meet 
a  student's  needs.  Supervised  jointly  by  an  on-site 
supervisor  and  a  Department  of  Chemistry  faculty 
member.  The  analytical  methodology  in  the  labo- 
ratory will  include  techniques  applicable  to  bio- 
medical research.  PREREQ;  Permission  of  the 
Chemistry-Biology  Internship  Committee. 
460  Advanced  Organic  Spectroscopy  (3)  An 
advanced  course  in  organic  spectroscopy  dealing  with 
IR,  NMR,  and  MS  techniques.  Other  techniques 
also  may  be  covered.  PREREQ;  CHE  232  with  a 
C-  or  better.  CONCURRENT:  CHE  341  or  345. 

476  Biochemistry  I  (3)  This  course  examines  the 
physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of  proteins, 
carbohydrates,  lipids,  and  nucleic  acids.  The 
bioenergetics  of  carbohydrate  and  fat  metabolism 
and  the  enzymatic  control  of  these  processes  is  a 
focal  point.  The  role  of  nucleic  acids  in  protein 
synthesis  is  also  covered.  PREREQ;  CHE  232. 

CRL  476  Experimental  Biochemistry  I  (2)  Labo- 
ratory exercises  in  the  tiindamentals  of  biochem- 
istry. CONCURRENT  or  PREREQ;  CHE  476. 

477  Biochemistry  II  (3)  This  course  is  an  exten- 
sion of  CHE  476  and  considers  the  biosynthesis 
and  degradation  of  proteins,  carbohydrates,  hpids, 
and  nucleic  acids.  The  primary  focus  is  on  the 
interrelationship  of  these  molecules  and  the  path- 
ways involving  their  metabohsm.  PREREQ;  CHE 
345  (or  equivalent)  and  CHE  476,  or  permission 
ot  instructor. 

CRL  477  Experimental  Biochemistry  II  (2)  A 

second-semester  laboratory  course  in  biochemistry 
that  stresses  the  use  of  advanced  analytical  instru- 
ments to  characterize  biologically  important  mole- 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Citizenship  Education 


School  ot  Education 


cules  and  to  elucidate  their  mechanism  of  action. 
PREREQ;  CHE  476  and  CRL  476. 
479  Chemical  Toxicology  (3)  A  one-semester 
course  in  the  environmental  and  physiological 
aspects  of  chemical  toxicity.  Special  emphasis  will 
be  placed  on  documentation,  sampling,  and  verifi- 
cation of  materials.  PREREQ;  CHE  232. 
^  480  Introduction  to  Chemical  Research 
(2-6)  j\n  independent  chemical  research  project 
under  the  direction  of  a  faculty  member.  The  fac- 
ulty member  assigns  the  research  topic  and  back- 
ground Uterature  readings  and  works  closely  with 
the  student  in  the  research  laboratory  giving 
instruction  in  laboratory  techniques.  The  student 
is  required  to  write  a  final  research  report.  PRE- 


REQl  Senior  standing  or  permission  of  depart- 
ment chairperson. 

491  Seminar  in  Chemistiy  (1)  Oral  presentation 
ot  papers  based  on  laboratory  or  hbrary  research. 
PREREQi  Permission  of  department  chairperson. 
#  SCB  210  The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 
(3)  An  interdisciplinary  course  that  presents  the 
theory  and  evidence  for  the  first  three  minutes  of 
the  universe  and  formation  of  the  stars,  galaxies, 
planets,  organic  molecules,  and  the  genetic  basis  of 
organic  evolution.  (3)  PREREQ;  High  school  or 
college  courses  in  at  least  two  sciences. 
sec  370  Science  and  Human  Values  (3)  A  one- 
semester  course  illustrating  the  impact  of  science 
on  human  thought,  values,  and  institutions. 


Ethical,  sociological,  and  psychological  aspects  of 
science-mediated  change  are  covered  in  depth. 
#  SCI  102  Electricity  With  Physical  and 
Biological  Applications  (3)  An  exploration  of  the 
physics  of  electrical  circuits,  the  chemical  basis  of 
electricity  as  the  flow  of  electrons,  acid-base  and 
oxidation  reactions  in  chemical  and  in  living  sys- 
tems, the  electrical  activity  in  the  human  nervous 
system,  and  connections  between  electricity  and 
sensation  and  locomotion  in  humans.  For  elemen- 
tary education  majors  only.  Team  taught  with  the 
departments  of  Biology  and  Physics. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


Citizenship  Education  Program 
(formerly  Social  Studies) 

For  additional  information  consult  the  major  department  or  the 
Teacher  Education  Advisement  Center,  Room  251,  Francis 
Harvey  Green  Librar}'. 

ELECTIVE  CITIZENSHIP  EDUCATION  PROGRAM 

The  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  grants  a  secondary  citizenship  edu- 
cation certificate  enabling  the  holder  to  teach  geography,  history,  or  polit- 
ical science  in  public  school.  West  Chester  University's  program  is 
accredited  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education,  the  National 
Council  for  the  Social  Studies,  and  the  National  Council  for 
Accreditation  of  Teacher  Education.  Certification  programs  are  offered  in 
conjunction  with  the  B.A.  programs  in  geography,  history,  and  political 
science.  (Certification-only  programs  are  available  for  those  already  hold- 
ing a  baccalaureate  degree.)  For  information,  contact  the  appropriate 
department  or  the  Teacher  Ekiucation  Advisement  Center,  Room  251, 
Francis  Harvey  Green  Library. 

Program  of  Study 

This  program  is  designed  to  assure  that  prospective  citizenship  educa- 
tion teachers  possess  the  knowledge,  capabilities,  and  dispositions  asso- 
ciated with  the  concepts,  tools  of  inquiry,  and  structures  of  the  disci- 
plines that  make  up  citizenship  education,  and  that  they  are  able  to  cre- 


ate learning  experiences  which  make  these  aspects  of  the  subject  matter 
meaningfiil  tor  learners.  The  course  of  study  emphasizes  ten  thematic 
strands: 

•  Culture  and  culmral  diversity 

•  Time,  continuity,  and  change 

•  People,  places,  and  environment 

•  Individuals,  groups,  and  institutions 

•  Power,  authority,  and  government 

•  Production,  distribution,  and  consumption 

•  Science,  technolog}',  and  society 

•  Global  connections 

•  Civic  ideals  and  practices 

•  Individual  development  and  identity 

Prospective  teachers  must  complete  subject-matter  courses  in  history 
and  social  sciences  that  make  up  no  less  than  40  percent  of  a  total 
four-year  or  extended  preparation  program  with  a  major  of  21  hours 
in  either  geography,  history,  or  political  science. 

COMMON  REQUIREMENTS 

For  details,  see  "Teaching  Certification  Programs"  on  pages  145-147. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
CITIZENSHIP  EDUCATION 

(formerly  Social  Studies) 

SSC  331  Teaching  Citizenship  Education  in 

Secondary  Schools  (3)  Methods  and  materials  of 


teaching  citizenship  education  for  prospective  sec- 
ondary school  teachers.  Emphasis  is  on  combining 
educational  theory  with  citizenship  education  con- 
tent for  effective  teaching.  Exercises  and  practical 
apphcation.  Enrollment  is  restricted  to  students 


who  will  be  student  teaching  the  next  semester. 
Permission  to  waive  this  polic}'  may  be  granted  by 
the  Department  of  Histon'  chairperson.  PRE- 
REQ: EDS  306. 


Department  of  Communication  Studies 

512  Main  HaU 

610-436-2500 

Dennis  R.  Klinzing,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Dean,  Foeman,  Klinzing,  McCullough,  Orr 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Brown,  Jenks,  Levasseur,  NeweU, 

Pearson,  Remland,  Thompsen 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Hickman,  Lordan,  MiUhous,  Reed 


The  Department  of  Communication  Smdies  offers  two  programs. 
One  program  leads  to  the  bachelor  ot  arts  degree  and  the  other  leads 
to  the  bachelor  of  science  in  education. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  COMMUNICATION  STUDIES  focuses  on  oral 
communication  as  the  core  of  a  liberal  education  that  can  be 
applied  to  a  number  of  specializations. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION— COMMUNICATION  is  for  stu- 
dents who  wish  to  meet  the  state  of  Pennsylvania  requirements  for 
teacher  certification  in  communication. 


College  ot"  Arts  and  Sciences 


Communication  Studies 


Majors  are  expected  to  meet  \vith  their  advisers  to  plan  a  course  of 
study,  to  select  courses  prior  to  scheduling,  to  discuss  career  opportu- 
nities, and  to  keep  abreast  of  departmental  cocurricular  activities. 
Handbooks  are  provided  to  help  students  be  aware  of  requirements 
for  each  program  in  the  department.  Students  who  wish  to  transfer 
into  the  communication  studies  program  must  have  a  2.0  GPA  or 
better.  Also  see  Program  Admission  Requirements  below. 

Departmental  Student  Activities 

The  Forensic  Society,  the  radio  station,  the  TV  Club,  and  Women  in 
Communication  are  student  organizations  that  involve  department 
faculty  and  resources.  The  activities  of  these  organizations  are  open  to 
all  students.  For  more  information  see  the  "Student  Affairs"  section. 

Department  Internships 

Internship  experiences  are  available  in  all  areas  related  to  students' 
vocational  and  academic  interests.  Students  have  been  placed  in 
offices  of  congressmen,  radio  and  television  stations,  and  local  indus- 
tries. Students  and  their  placements  are  screened  to  assure  mutual  sat- 
isfaction for  all  parties  involved.  For  details,  students  should  check 
with  the  department's  internship  coordinator. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B  A.  AND  B.S. 
PROGRAMS 

General  Education  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39   48  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS— COMMUNICATION  STUDIES 

1.  Required  Lower-Division  Courses  18  semester  hours 
COM  204    Dyadic  Communication  (3) 

COM  212    Mass  Communication  (3) 

COM  216    Small  Group  Communication  (3) 

COM 219    Communication  Concepts  (3) 

COM  224    Communication  Research  (3) 
Three  of  the  required  lower-division  courses  (COM  208,  219,  and 
224)  are  prerequisites  for  all  communication  studies  courses  except  for 
COM  310  and  COM  315.  In  addition,  COM  216  is  a  prerequisite 
for  COM  304.  Also,  COM  208  must  be  taken  to  satisfy  the  general 
education  communication  requirement. 

2.  Upper-Division  Courses  18  semester  hours 
Students  will  work  with  their  advisers  to  select  six  appropriate  cours- 
es at  the  300  and/or  400  level  from  the  listing  of  department  course 
offerings.  In  order  to  facilitate  student/adviser  selection  of  upper- 
division  courses,  a  listing  of  those  courses  that  the  department  plans 
to  offer  wUl  be  posted  and  distributed  to  advisers.  This  hsting  will 
project  two  years  into  the  ftiture  and  will  be  updated  at  the  begin- 
ning of  each  academic  year.  COM  300  and  COM  400  may  not  be 
used  to  satisfy  the  upper-division  course  requirements. 
Additional  Notes 

a.  Limited  substitutions  may  be  made  to  the  required  lower-divi- 
sion courses  with  the  adviser's  written  consent. 

b.  A  grade  of  C  or  better  must  be  earned  in  a  COM  course  in 
order  for  it  to  meet  a  department  requirement.  Also,  a  2.5 
average  or  better  must  be  earned  in  the  aggregate  of  lower-  and 
upper-division  courses  before  graduation  will  be  recommended. 

c.  To  encourage  B.A.  communication  studies  majors  to  develop 
communication  competence  that  extends  beyond  oral  English, 
a  grade  of  C  or  better  is  required  in  WRT  120  and  121,  and  a 
grade  of  C-  or  better  is  required  in  the  202-level  course  of  a 
foreign  language.  If  a  major  employs  the  culture  cluster  option 
to  fiilfill  his/her  language  requirement,  a  C-  or  better  is 


required  in  the  102  level  of  the  foreign  language  course  and  in 
each  of  the  culture  cluster  courses, 
d.   Students  who  exhaust  their  course  repeat  options  and  have  not 
earned  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  all  the  prerequisite  communi- 
cation courses  will  be  advised  that  they  will  not  be  able  to  com- 
plete the  requirements  for  a  B.A.  in  communication  studies. 
The  department  chair  will  offer  an  exit  interview  and  help  them 
to  identify  available  alternatives. 

3.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement         0-15  semester  hours 
See  pages  39-40. 

4.  Apphed  Area  24-27  semester  hours 
Courses  are  to  be  selected  in  consultation 

with  an  adviser  to  meet  career  objectives. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION- 
COMMUNICATION 

1.  Core  Requirements  30  semester  hours 
COM  201*,  208*,  219,  and  224;  ENG  230,  331, 

and  392;  LIT  200  or  201*;  CLS  260*;  and  LIN  330* 

2.  Emphasis  Area  Requirements  30  semester  hours 
Choose  two  areas: 

a.  Speech  Emphasis  (15  credits) 

COM  204,  216,  307,  and  405;  THA  102**. 
Participation  in  forensics  activities  is  required. 

b.  Theater  Emphasis  (15  credits) 

THA  103**,  104,  210,  301,  and  306  or  307. 
Participation  in  theater  productions  is  required. 

c.  Media  Emphasis  (15  credits) 

COM  212,  217  or  317,  320,  355,  and  CSW  131 

3.  Professional  Education  Requirements  30  semester  hours 
EDF  100,  EDP  250  and  351,  EDR/EDA  341, 

EDS  306,  411-412,  and  COM  402/ENG  390 

Program  Admission  Requirements 
(BA.,  B.S.Ed.,  and  Minor  Programs) 

Applicants  who  have  completed  the  prerequisite  core  (COM  208, 
219,  224)  will  be  ranked  by  grade  point  average  in  the  core.  Selection 
for  admission  will  be  based  on  these  rankings  at  the  conclusion  of 
each  semester,  after  grades  are  posted.  Students  who  do  not  gain 
admission  may  reapply,  but  they  must  compete  with  the  group  of 
appUcants  in  that  semester. 

Minor  in  Communication  Studies  18  semester  hours 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts 
or  bachelor  of  science  in  the  liberal  studies  general  degree  program.  A 
minor  in  communication  studies  requires  students  to  complete  three 
prerequisite  courses:  COM  208,  COM  219,  and  COM  224,  and  to 
earn  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  each  of  these  courses.  Students  are  also 
required  to  earn  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  WRT  120  and  WRT  121. 
Three  elective  courses  may  then  be  selected  from  any  300-  or  400- 
level  courses  offered  in  communication  studies,  but  a  C  grade  or  bet- 
ter must  be  earned  in  each  of  these  courses,  and  a  2.5  average  must  be 
achieved  in  the  minor  before  clearance  for  graduation  with  a  minor 
will  be  granted.  A  student  must  have  a  2.0  cumulative  average  or  bet- 
ter to  gain  admission  to  the  minor  in  communication  studies  as  well 
as  meeting  program  entrance  requirements. 


'  Courses  used  as  general  education  requirements. 

"  Can  be  used  for  either  general  education  arts  requirements  or  free  electives. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMMUNICATION  STUDIES 

Symbol:  COM 

101  Speech  Fundamentals:  Interpersonal 
Communication  (3)  Development  ot  competen- 
cies for  purposeful  speech  communication. 
Awareness  of  the  eftects  of  language  on  communi- 
cations. Recognition  of  the  types  and  purposes  of  a 


selected  number  of  communications.  Grasp  of  the 
role  of  evidence  and  organization  in  spoken  mes- 
sages. 

105  Voice  Dynamics  (3)  Training  in  the  creative- 
esthetic  production  of  speech;  includes  respiration, 
phonation,  articulation,  and  resonation. 
200  Communication  Careers  Planning  1(1)  This 
course  is  designed  to  introduce  the  first  oi  a  two- 
phase,  career-planning  process.  Self-assessment 


and  exploration  is  provided  through  assigned  read- 
ings, mini-lectures,  reflective  exercises,  and  small 
group  activities. 

201  Fundamentals  of  Communication 
Technology  (3)  Examination  of  the  use  of  com- 
puters and  other  technologies  to  create,  organize, 
store,  Wsuiilize,  and  present  messages. 

202  Scripts  and  Formats  for  Mass  Media  (3) 
Students  are  required  to  analyze,  evaluate,  and 


Communication  Studies 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


produce  scripts  for  a  variety  of  mass  media  for- 
mats. The  course  emphasis  is  on  radio,  television, 
and  film. 

204  Interpersonal  Communication  (3)  One-on- 
one  communication  to  give  the  student  a  fiinda- 
mental  understanding  of  the  processes  and  experi- 
ences of  the  most  basic  t\'pe  of  human  communi- 
cation. 

208  Public  Speaking  (3)  Development  of  skills 
necessary  to  understand  the  theorv'  of  communica- 
tion as  a  problem-sohing  tool  in  the  community. 
Special  emphasis  is  on  the  student's  performance 
as  a  sender  and  receiver  of  messages  directed  at 
social  action. 

210  Photo  Communication  I  (3)  A  basic  course 
in  the  use  of  creative  techniques  available  to  the 
beginning  photographer  for  the  production  of 
high-quaht)'  slides. 

212  Mass  Communication  (3)  A  survey  course 
designed  to  identify,  analyze,  and  evaluate  the 
pragmatic,  persuasive,  creaDve,  and  technical 
dimensions  of  mass  media. 

216  Small  Group  Communication  (3)  Intro- 
duction to  and  practice  in  the  structured  small 
group.  Emphasis  on  preparation  for,  analysis  ot, 
and  participation  in  problem-solving  oriented 
groups. 

217  Directing  and  Producing  the  Documentary 
Television  Program  (3)  Planning  and  producing 
the  nondramatic  tele\'ision  production. 

219  Communication  Theory  (3)  A  study  of 
human  communication  that  includes  a  historical 
view  of  the  field,  examinations  of  definitions  of 
communication,  analyses  ot  the  nature  of  theon,- 
and  the  process  of  theorizing,  assessment  of  per- 
spectives of  communication,  and  construction  of 
models  of  communication. 

220  Multi-media  Communication  (3)  The  prac- 
tical apphcation  of  communication  theon'  through 
experiences  in  photography  and  multi-media  pro- 
ductions. The  creative  potential  of  combining 
sound  and  various  photographic  elements  %vill  be 
explored  with  special  attention  given  to  photojour- 
naiism  as  used  in  advertising,  public  relations,  the- 
ater, and  related  mass  communication  fields. 

221  Photo  Communication  11  (3)  This  course 
will  give  the  student  a  chance  to  develop  a  person- 
al photographic  communication  st)'le.  The  student 
will  be  encouraged  to  explore  and  express  his  or 
her  personal  perceptions  through  photography. 

222  Successful  Web  Publishing  (3)  Examination 
of  problems  and  solutions  tor  successful  Web  pub- 
lishing. 

224  Communication  Research  (3)  .\n  examina- 
tion of  the  nature  of  inquin'  and  research  in  com- 
munication. Emphasis  on  understanding  and 
appreciating  the  strengths  and  weaknesses  of  vari- 
ous methods  of  research  in  communication. 

230  Business  and  Professional  Speech  Communi- 
cation (3)  Practice  in  effective  speaking  and  listen- 
ing. Interpersonal  communication  in  the  business 
and  professional  setting,  including  reports  and  sales 
presentations,  policy  speeches,  conference  leader- 
ship techniques,  group  d\Tiamics,  and  speaking. 

231  Interviewing  in  Organizations  (3)  An  intro- 
duction to  the  skills  necessar)'  for  a  variet)'  of  orga- 
nizational inter\'iew  settings.  Students  will  act  as 
inteniewers  and  interviewees  in  many  t\pes  of 
interviews,  work  in  groups,  and  give  performance 
feedback  to  peers. 


292  Effects  of  Computer-Mediated  Commun- 
ication (3)  .A.n  examination  ot  the  manv  effects  of 
computer-mediated  communication. 
300  Communication  Careers  Planning  11  (1) 

This  second  phase  of  the  careers  planning  course 
series  examines  the  initial  steps  required  for  find- 
ing emplo\'ment.  Topics  covered  include  the  job- 
hunting  process,  resume  development,  networking, 
and  the  transition  from  college  to  employment. 

303  Modem  Trends  in  Argument  (3)  Study  of 
the  new  thinking  in  argumentation  theory.  De- 
emphasizes  classic  vahdity  and  centers  on  the 
building  of  arguments  that  are  acceptable  to  the 
listeners.  Course  focuses  on  the  work  of  Stephen 
Toulmin  and  Chaim  Perehnan.  PREREQ:  COM 
208,  219,  224. 

304  Organizational  Communication  (3)  An  in- 
depth  analysis  of  the  dynamic  process  of  commu- 
nication as  it  occurs  in  organizational  networks. 
PREREQ:  COM  208,  216,  219,  224. 

307  Nonverbal  Communication  (3)  A  study  of 
the  verbal  and  sensory  messages  we  are  constandy 
receiWng.  Bodv  language  and  the  uses  of  space, 
time,  touch,  objects,  and  color  inherent  in  the  sen- 
sory messages  we  receive.  PREREQ^  COM  208, 
219,224. 

309  Advanced  Public  Speaking  (3)  Designing 
personal  strategies,  adapting  delivery  to  large  audi- 
ences, developing  oral  use  of  language,  and  speak- 
ing to  live  or  simulated  communit\'  groups.  PRE- 
REQ: COM  208,  219,  224. 

310  Field  E.\perience  in  Photographic  Com- 
munication (3)  This  course  in  slide  photography 
wiU  build  on  the  student's  previous  experiences  in 
photography.  The  student  will  develop  the  techni- 
cal, visual,  and  photo  communication  skills  neces- 
sar\'  to  explore,  record,  and  interpret  his  or  her 
surroundings  through  photographic  essays  and 
related  photo  communication  projects.  These  skills 
will  be  achieved  through  field  experiences  and 
classroom  instruction. 

312  Intercultural  Communication  (3)  A  study  of 
factors  that  contribute  to  communication  break- 
downs between  diverse  cultures  and  between  frag- 
mented segments  mthin  the  same  society-.  PRE- 
REQ: COM  208,  219,  224. 
315  Structure  of  Meetings  (3)  This  course  pre- 
pares students  to  plan  formal  agenda,  vmte  and 
interpret  organizational  by-laws  and  constitutions, 
and  participate  in  and  preside  over  meetings 
according  to  parliamentary  procedures. 

317  Directing  and  Producing  the  Dramatic 
Television  Program  (3)  Planning  the  program. 
Preparing  the  shooting  script.  Practice  in  rehears- 
ing with  actors  and  cameras.  PREREQ^  COM 
208,219,224. 

318  Forensics  (3)  Swdy  in  the  philosophy  and 
practice  of  forensics.  Initiating,  developing,  and 
administrating  a  forensic  program.  Coaching  and 
judging  debate  and  individual  events.  PREREQ^ 
COM  208,  219,  224. 

320  Communicating  on  Television  and  Radio 
(3)  For  the  smdent  who,  by  career  or  circumstance, 
will  be  required  to  be  on  radio  and  television.  The 
focus  of  the  course  will  be  on  three  major  areas: 
interyiewer/interviewee  techniques;  acting  tor  tele- 
vision, including  working  in  commercials;  and 
news  reporting,  including  studio  and  remote  loca- 
tions. PREREQ,  COM  208,  219,  224,  THA  103. 
330  Oral  Communication  for  Technical  Profes- 
sionals (3)  The  student  will  explore  the  oral  com- 


ponent of  effective  communication  as  it  applies  to 
the  business  and  professional  world  of  mathemat- 
ics, engineering,  and  science.  PREREQ^  COM 
208,  219,  224. 

340  Political  Communication  (3)  This  course 
examines  the  fiinctions  and  effects  of  political 
messages  in  poUcymaking  and  in  campaigns. 
Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  flow  of  messages 
between  pohticians,  the  media,  and  the  electorate. 
355  Public  Relations  Principles  (3)  An  introduc- 
tion to  the  role  of  the  public  relations  practitioner 
in  the  formation  of  public  opinion.  Communica- 
tions theory  will  be  combined  with  specific  tech- 
niques for  working  with  the  press,  producing 
printed  material,  and  conducting  special  events. 
PREREQi  com  208,  219,  224. 

♦  399  Directed  Studies  in  Speech  Communi- 
cation (1-3)  Research,  creative  projects,  reports, 
and  readings  in  speech  communication.  Students 
must  apply  to  advisers  one  semester  in  advance  of 
registration.  Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  only. 
PREREQ:  COM  208,  219,  224,  and  approval  of 
department  chairperson. 

♦  400  Internship  in  Speech  Communication  (3- 
6-9-12-15)  This  course  provides  a  structured  and 
supervised  work  experience  in  communication. 
Credits  earned  are  based  on  amount  of  time  spent 
on  the  job.  Students  must  apply  to  the  department 
internship  coordinator  and  receive  approval  of  the 
department  internship  faculty  committee  to  be 
admitted.  PREREQ:  COM'208,  219,  224. 

402  Teaching  Communications  (3)  Theory  and 
practice  in  teaching  junior  and  senior  high  school 
communication  and  drama  courses,  and  in  direct- 
ing cocurricular  programs  in  junior  and  senior 
high  school.  PREREQi  COM  208,  219,  224. 

403  Persuasion  (3)  Current  theories  of  attitude 
and  attitude  change.  Practice  in  speaking  to  modi- 
fy behavior  through  appeals  to  the  drives  and 
motives  of  the  Ustener.  PREREQ:  COM  208, 
219,  224. 

405  Argumentation  and  Debate  (3)  Functions 
and  principles  of  argumentation  and  debate, 
including  anal^-sis,  cadence,  reasoning,  and  refiita- 
tion.  Class  debates  on  \ital  issues.  PREREQ^ 
COM  208,  219,  224. 

410  Conflict  Resolution  (3)  This  course  explores 
the  means  of  resolving  conflict  through  argument, 
negotiation,  mediation,  and  arbitration.  PRE- 
REQ: COM  208,  219,  224. 
415  (also  LIN  415)  Language,  Thought,  and 
Behavior  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to  help  stu- 
dents understand  the  way  language  fiinctions  in 
the  communication  process.  To  accomplish  this 
purpose,  various  language  systems  will  be  exam- 
ined and  one  will  be  selected  for  in-depth  analysis. 
PREREQ:  COM  208,  219,  224. 
455  PubUc  Relations  Campaigns  (3)  This  course 
is  for  students  who  have  completed  COM  355  and 
want  to  learn  strategic  planning  and  program 
implementation.  Students  use  case  studies  and 
social  science  research  to  evaluate  PR  program 
effectiveness.  PREREQ;  COM  208,  212,  219, 
224,  and  355. 

♦  499  Communication  Seminar  (3)  Intensive 
examination  of  a  selected  area  ot  stud)-  in  the  field 
of  communication  studies.  Topics  will  be 
announced  in  advance.  PREREQ:  COM  208, 
219,  224. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Health  Sciences 


Communicative  Disorders 


Department  of  Communicative  Disorders 

201  Carter  Drive 
610-436-3401 
Elena  Stuart,  Chairperson 
PROFESSOR:  Weiss 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Gunter,  Koenig 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Stuart 
INSTRUCTOR:  Curtin 

The  Department  of  Communicative  Disorders  offers  a  program  lead- 
ing to  a  B.A.  in  communicative  disorders.  It  is  a  preprofessional  pro- 
gram that  provides  students  with  basic  knowledge  of  human  commu- 
nication and  communication  disorders  in  preparation  for  graduate 
study  in  audiology,  speech-language  pathology,  speech  and  hearing 
science,  or  related  health  science  or  communication  fields. 
Students  will  be  provided  with  the  opportunity  to  complete  much  of 
the  undergraduate  preparation  that  is  applicable  to  fulfilling  the 
requirements  for  the  Certificate  of  CUnical  Competence  (CCC)  from 
the  American  Speech-Language-Hearing  Association  (ASHA). 
The  department  operates  a  Speech  and  Hearing  Chnic  that  serves  as  a 
teaching  and  training  facihty  for  the  academic  program.  The  clinic 
provides  diagnostic  and  therapeutic  services  for  children  and  adults 


vidth  speech,  language,  and  hearing  problems.  These  services  are  avail 
able  to  individuals  from  the  University  as  well  as  from  the  surround- 
ing communities. 

Academic  Policies 

1.  Grades  of  "C-,"  "D,"  or  "F"  earned  in  major  (SPP)  courses  must 
be  raised  to  "C"  or  better.  A  failed  major  course  must  be  repeated 
the  next  time  the  course  is  offered. 

2.  A  minimum  2.5  cumulative  GPA  and  2.5  major  average  is 
required  for  all  communicative  disorders  majors  in  order  to  com- 
plete the  degree  program. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  — 
COMMUNICATIVE  DISORDERS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 

2.  Foreign  Language  and  Culture 

3.  Related  Areas 
These  courses  are  to  be  selected  under 
advisement  from  a  department-approved  list 

4.  Communicative  Disorders  Concentration 
SPP  101,  106,  163,  166,  203,  204,  207,  263, 
306,  323,  333,  346,  347,  350,  363,  366,  and  463 

5.  Electives  up  to  17  semester  hours 


48  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 
18  semester  hours 


34  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMMUNICATIVE  DISORDERS 

Symbol:  SPP 

101  Introduction  to  Communicative  Disorders 

(3)  An  introductory  survey  of  normal  processes 
and  disorders  of  speech,  language,  and  hearing. 
Suitable  for  nonmajors. 
106  Anatomy  of  Speech  and  Hearing 
Mechanisms  (3)  A  study  of  embryology,  normal 
development,  neurology,  and  physiology  of 
anatomical  structures  of  the  speech  and  hearing 
mechanisms,  PREREQ:  SPP  101. 
163  Seminar  I  in  Communicative  Disorders  (.5) 
The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate  experi- 
ential and  theoretical  information.  The  seminar 
will  focus  on  career/professional  awareness,  orien- 
tation to  the  department,  and  individual  studies. 
166  Seminar  II  in  Communicative  Disorders  (.5) 
The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  integrate  experi- 
ential and  theoretical  information.  The  seminar 
will  focus  on  personal  adjustment,  assertiveness, 
and  active  listening. 

203  Speech  and  Hearing  Science  (3)  This  course 
presents  students  with  the  fiindamental  knowledge 
of  acoustics  related  to  speech  production  and  speech 
perception.  It  also  provides  an  opportunity  for  stu- 
dents to  engage  in  laboratory  experiences  related  to 
acoustic  and  psychoacoustic  measurement. 

204  Speech  and  Language  Development  (3) 
Examination  of  normal  communication  develop- 
ment: biological,  cognitive,  social,  and  ecological 
bases  ot  language.  Developmental  milestones  from 
prelinguistic  communication  to  oral  language  and 
literacy.  Normal  variations  in  development  associ- 
ated with  cultural  diversity  and  bilingualism.  PRE- 
REQ: ENG/LIN  230,  SPP  101. 

207  Introduction  to  Phonetics  (3)  Introduction 
to  the  International  Phonetic  Alphabet  and  its  use 
in  transcribing  normal  and  disordered  speech. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  broad  and  narrow  transcrip- 
tion skills. 

240  Development  and  Disorders  of  Language  (3) 
An  examination  ot  normal  language  development 


and  its  psycholinguistic,  neurological,  and  social 
dimensions.  Special  education  considerations  for 
children  with  language  disorders.  PREREQ^  EDA 
104  is  required;  SPP  101  is  recommended. 
266  Seminar  III  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  Is  designed  to  help  Integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  information.  The  sem- 
inar will  focus  on  implications  of  disabilities  and 
on  cultural  diversity. 

306  Articulation  and  Phonological  Disorders  (3) 
The  symptomatology,  etiology,  assessment,  and 
remediation  of  articulatory  and  phonological  disor- 
ders. Includes  study  of  standard  and  variant  sounds 
of  the  English  language.  PREREQ:  SPP  101, 
106,  203,  204,  and  207. 

323  Fluency  and  Voice  Disorders  (3)  The  symp- 
tomatology, etiology,  diagnosis,  and  treatment  of 
communicative  disorders  associated  with  fluency 
and  voice.  PREREQ:  SPP  106. 
333  Language  Disorders  (3)  Clinical  manage- 
ment issues  associated  with  developmental  and 
acquired  language  disorders  in  children  and  adults. 
Linguistic  patterns  observed  in  the  performance  of 
individuals  with  various  etiological  conditions 
(e.g.,  mental  retardation,  autism,  hearing  loss, 
neurological  impairment,  craniofacial  anomalies, 
learning  disability).  Factors  indicating  risk  for  and 
maintenance  of  language  disorders.  Protocols  for 
evaluation  and  treatment  indicated  by  develop- 
mental theories,  processing  models,  and  sensitivity 
to  normal  variations  among  culturally  diverse  pop- 
ulations. PREREQ:  SPP  204. 
346  Hearing  Disorders  (3)  An  introduction  to 
audiology  and  its  relationship  to  other  medical  and 
educational  fields  concerned  with  hearing  impair- 
ments. Developmental,  medical,  social,  physical, 
and  psychological  properties  of  hearing  and  sound 
are  explored.  Evaluative  techniques  are  Introduced 
with  opportunity  for  limited  practical  experience. 
PREREQ:  SPP  106  and  203. 
348  Hearing  Disorders  Laboratory  (1) 
Laboratory  experience  to  become  familiar  with 


most  common  hearing  testing  and  remediation 
equipment.  Taken  concurrently  with  SPP  346. 
350  Clinical  Principles  in  Communicative 
Disorders  (3)  A  study  of  evaluative  and  therapeutic 
materials  and  methods  applicable  to  the  profession- 
al setting.  PREREQi  SPP  207,  306,  323,  and  333. 
363  Seminar  IV  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(.5)  The  seminar  Is  designed  to  help  integrate 
experiential  and  theoretical  Information,  focusing 
on  principles  and  applications  of  counseling. 
366  Seminar  V  in  Communicative  Disorders  (.5) 
The  seminar  is  designed  to  help  Integrate  experi- 
ential and  theoretical  information,  focusing  on 
professional  resources  and  the  legal,  ethical,  and 
pohtical  responsibilities  of  the  professional. 

♦  410  Independent  Study  (1-3)  Research,  cre- 
ative projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  speech 
pathology  and  audiology.  Application  must  be 
made  to  advisers  by  students  one  semester  in 
advance  of  registration.  Open  to  juniors  and 
seniors  only.  PREREQ;  Approval  of  department 
chairperson.  Offered  on  demand. 

45 1  Clinical  Practicum  in  Communicative 
Disorders  (3)  Supervised  practice  In  the  Speech 
and  Hearing  Clinic.  Designed  to  prepare  students 
to  evaluate  and  provide  therapy  for  children  and 
adults  who  have  communication  problems.  PRE- 
REQ; Overall  GPA  of  2.75  and  major  GPA  of 
3.0;  permission  of  the  department. 
463  Seminar  VI  in  Communicative  Disorders  (.5) 
The  seminar  Is  designed  to  help  Integrate  experien- 
tial and  theoretical  information,  focusing  on 
employment  opportunities  and  graduate  education. 
469  Clinical  Instrumentation  (3)  Evaluation, 
selection,  use,  and  maintenance  of  electronic  aids 
for  the  speech  and  hearing  clinician.  Emphasis  on 
demonstrations  and  practical  experience.  Open  to 
speech  pathology  and  audiology  students  with 
senior  standing.  Also  offered  as  SPP  569  for  grad- 
uate credit. 

♦  498  Workshop  in  Communicative  Disorders 
(3) 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Computer  Science 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Department  of  Computer  Science 

404  Anderson  Hall 
610-436-2204 
www.cs.wcupa.edu 
James  D.  Fabrey,  Chairperson 
PROFESSORS:  Epstein,  Fabrey,  Milito,  Weaver 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  .\lilbom,  KHne,  Wyatt,  Yang 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Edelman 
INSTRUCTORS:  Perry,  Townsend 

The  Department  of  Computer  Science  offers  a  program  leading  to  the 
bachelor  of  science  degree.  The  B.S.  in  computer  science  prepares  the 
student  for  a  career  in  the  field  of  computer  science  and  its  applica- 
tions and/or  additional  study  in  computer  science  at  the  graduate 
level.  Students  gain  valuable  on-the-job  experience  through  an  intern- 
ship program  with  local  industry  or  business.  Normally,  the  computer 
science  degree  requires  attendance  during  eight  academic  semesters 
plus  one  summer  session.  It  is  important  the  major  consult  with 
his/her  adviser  to  ensure  that  all  requirements  are  being  met. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  COMPUTER  SCIENCE 
AND  INFORMATION  SCIENCES 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
MAT  151* 

2.  Core  Curriculum 

Computer  Science  Requirements  21  semester  hours 

CSC  141,  142,  220,  240,  241,  242,  402 

Communication  Skills  Requirements  3  semester  hours 

COM  lOr  or  230*  and  ENG  368  or  371 

Mathematics  Requirement  8  semester  hours 

MAT  161,  162 

Cooperative  Experience  (i.e..  Internship)  9  semester  hours 

CSC  400 

3.  Additional  Requirements  31  semester  hours 
In  addition  to  completing  the  core  curriculum  (requirements  in 
computer  science,  communication  skills,  and  mathematics),  the 
student  must  complete  27  credits  consisting  of  any  combination  of 

A.  approved  electives  in  computer  science, 

B.  approved  electives  in  business, 

C.  approved  electives  in  mathematics,  or 

D.  courses  which  have  been  taken  as  part  of  the  completion  of  a 
minor. 

At  least  15  of  these  credits  must  be  from  approved  electives  in 
computer  science. 

For  guidance  in  the  selection  of  courses  to  fulfill  these  additional 
requirements,  see  the  web  page  for  the  Department  of  Computer 
Science  at  www.cs.wcupa.edu. 

4.  Approved  Electives 

A.  Computer  Science  Courses: 

Any  CSC  major  elective  course  at  or  above  the  300  level 
NOTE:  CSC  350  is  not  a  CSC  major  elective. 

B.  Business  Courses: 

ACC  201,  ACC  202,  ECO  340,  ECO  348,  MGT  200,  MIS 
300,  MIS  451,  MKT  200 

C.  Mathematics  Courses: 

Any  MAT  major  elective  course  at  or  above  the  200  level 

5.  Special  Entrance  Requirements 

Students  who  enter  WCU  as  freshman  computer  science  majors 
should  meet  the  following  high  school  criteria: 
•     Rank  in  the  top  two-fifths  of  graduating  class 


•  Pass  Algebra  I,  Algebra  II/Trigonometry,  Geometry,  and  a 
senior  year  math  course 

•  Earn  a  math  SAT  original  score  of  500  (or  recentered  score  of 
520)  or  better 

•  Earn  a  combined  SAT  original  score  of  950  (or  recentered 
score  of  1020)  or  better 

6.   Advanced  Placement  Credit 

The  following  guidelines  will  be  used  to  determine  college  credit 
when  evaluating  Advanced  Placement  scores  in  computer  science. 
Examination AP  Score     Policy 


Computer  Science  AB       1,  2 
3 
4,5 


Computer  Science  A 


no  credit 

3  credits  for  CSC  141 
6  credits  for  CSC  141  and 
CSC  142 
1,2  no  credit 

3,  4,  5       3  credits  for  CSC  141 

7.  Transfer  and  Continuation  Requirements 

Students  who  seek  to  transfer  to  the  computer  science  major  from 

another  college  or  from  another  major  within  WCU  must  first 

earn  a  grade  of  B  or  better  in  CSC  141  (or  equivalent  course,  or 

CSC  142  or  CSC  240)  and  earn  a  grade  of  C-  or  better  in  MAT 

161  (or  equivalent  or  higher-level  mathematics  course)  before 

being  admitted  to  the  major. 

All  computer  science  majors  at  WCU  must  satisfy  the  same 

requirements  as  stated  above  before  being  permitted  to  take  any 

300  or  higher-level  computer  science  major  course. 

Exceptions  to  this  transfer  and  continuation  policy  can  be  made  on 

a  case-by-case  basis  by  the  department  chairperson. 

8.  Graduation  Requirements 

In  order  to  graduate,  a  computer  science  major  must  earn  a  grade 
of  C-  or  better  in  each  course  taken  to  fiiltill  the  core  requirements 
(listed  above)  and  the  additional  requirements  (Usted  above). 
Furthermore,  a  computer  science  major  must  earn  a  2.5  GPA 
overall  in  CSC  courses  and  a  2.0  GPA  overall  in  MAT  courses 
taken  to  complete  the  core  or  additional  requirements. 
This  policy  does  not  apply  to  courses  that  are  taken  as  free  electives. 

Minor  in  Computer  Science  19  semester  hours 

Baccalaureate  students  may  receive  transcript  recognition  for  a  minor 

area  of  study  in  computer  science  by  completing  the  following  six 

required  courses: 

CSC  141,  142,  240.  241;  MAT  151,  161 

In  addition,  at  least  one  300-level  CSC  classroom  course  is  strongly 

recommended.  A  student  must  earn  a  minimum  grade  of  C-  in  each 

course  and  a  minimum  overall  GPA  of  2.0  tor  all  courses  taken  for 

the  minor. 

Minor  in  Web  Technology  and  Applications      18  semester  hours 

The  minor  in  web  technology'  and  applications  introduces  smdents  to 
fundamental  principles  of  Web  design,  including  the  underlying  tech- 
nology and  principles  of  aesthetics  and  effective  communications.  All 
students  in  the  minor  must  complete  three  core  courses  (ART  113, 
COM  201,  CSW  131)  and  three  electives  (chosen  from  ART  111, 
ART  210,  ART  211,  ART  212,  ART  213,  COM  222**,  COM 
292**,  CSC  231,  EDM  300,  ENG  320,  ESS  435",  HIS  390-,  HIS 
480**,  or  an  approved  independent  project*).  Students  must  complete 
their  18  semester  hours  in  the  minor  with  an  overall  GPA  of  2.5  or 
higher.  Only  grades  of  C-  or  higher  will  count  towards  the  comple- 
tion of  the  minor. 


'Required  courses  that  will  count  towards  the  general  education  requirements. 
**  At  least  one  of  these  electives  must  be  a  designated  capstone  project  course. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Computer  Science 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMPUTER  SCIENCE 

Symbol:  CSW 

101  Introduction  to  Computers  (3)  (nonmajors) 

This  course  is  for  nonmajors  dealing  with  what 
computers  are,  what  thev  can  do,  and  how  they  are 
used.  A  brief  history  of  computers  and  the  societal 
implications  of  computer  usage.  A  brief  introduc- 
tion to  the  Internet  is  provided  along  with  hands- 
on  experience  using  word  processing,  database, 
and  spreadsheet  software. 
131  Introduction  to  Web  Design  (3)  (nonma- 
jors) This  course  will  cover  HTML  and  introduc- 
tor\' JavaScript  programming  to  provide  students 
with  a  basic  technology  skill  set  for  pursuing  other 
topics  in  web  technology.  Use  of  some  simple  web 
authoring  and  graphics  paclcages,  but  a  focus  on 
the  structure  and  semantics  of  HTML  and 
JavaScript.  One  ot  three  core  requirement  courses 
for  the  web  technology  and  applications  minor. 
PREREQ^  Familiarity  with  basic  graphical  user 
interface  and  systems  concepts  such  as  files,  fold- 
ers, and  use  of  an  editor,  and  web  browsers. 

SYMBOL:  CSC 

110  Fundamentals  of  Computer  Science  (3) 
(nonmajors)  Introduction  to  the  fiandamentals  of 
computing.  Topics  include  surveys  ot  the  follow- 
ing sub-areas  of  computer  science:  artificial  intelli- 
gence, hardware/operating  systems,  programming 
languages/software,  ethics/social  issues,  history, 
electronic  communications,  problem  solving,  and 
programming.  The  course  includes  laboratory  pro- 
jects in  application  software,  programming,  and 
electronic  communication,  as  well  as  a  report  on 
one  of  the  first  four  areas  above. 
115  Introduction  to  Computer  Programming  (3) 
(nonmajors)  The  art  and  science  of  computing  are 
introduced  using  a  structured  programming  language, 
such  as  Stmctured  BASIC.  Topics  include  looping, 
branching,  arrays,  and  program  development. 

141  Computer  Science  I  (3)  The  art  and  science 
of  computing  and  its  apphcations  are  introduced 
using  an  object-oriented  programming  language, 
such  as  C++.  Topics  include  structured  program- 
ming, algorithmic  development,  decisions,  loops, 
functions,  parameter  passing,  and  classes.  PRE- 
REQi  Math  SAT  of  550  or  better  or  a  B  or  bet- 
ter in  CSC  115. 

142  Computer  Science  II  (3)  Techniques  of  pro- 
gram design,  documentation,  and  implementation 
are  studied  using  an  object-oriented  language, 
such  as  C++.  Topics  include  classes,  multidimen- 
sion^d  arrays,  records,  pointers  and  dynamic  data, 
pointer  arithmetic,  internal  storage  of  simple  and 
compound  data  types,  text  and  binary  files,  and 
introduction  to  recursion.  PREREQ;,  CSC  141. 
220  Foundations  of  Computer  Science  (3)  Topics 
include  regular  and  context  free  grammars  and  lan- 
guages, computational  logic,  finite  state  machines, 
and  parsing.  PREREQ:  NL\T  151  and  161. 

231  Introduction  to  Web  Programming  (3)  This 
course  builds  on  web  design  skills  developed  in 
CSW  131.  Web  programming  languages/s)'stems 
will  be  introduced,  and  one  will  be  emphasized. 
The  choice  of  these  will  be  dictated  by  the  latest 
developments  in  web  technology.  A  major  pro- 
gramming project  will  be  required.  A  capstone  elec- 
tive in  the  web  technology  and  applications  minor. 
240  Computer  Science  III  (3)  The  object-orient- 
ed paradigm  is  studied  using  a  computer  language, 
such  as  C++.  Topics  include  class  hierarchies  and 
inheritance,  function  and  operator  overloading, 
object-oriented  design  and  implementation. 


streams,  templates,  and  class  libraries.  PREREQ^ 
CSC  142,  MAT  151. 

241  Data  Structures  (3)  Data  structures  and  relat- 
ed algorithms  are  studied  using  object-oriented 
programming,  such  as  C++.  Topics  include  data 
abstraction,  recursion,  Usts,  stacks,  queues,  hnked 
lists,  trees,  hashing,  searching  and  sorting  algo- 
rithms, and  the  evaluation  ot  algorithm  efficiency. 
PREREQiCSC  240,  MAT  151  and  161. 

242  Computer  Organization  (3)  This  course  teach- 
es introductory  topics  in  computer  architecture  and 
hardware  design  as  well  as  the  basics  of  assembly 
language.  Software  is  provided  to  assemble,  run,  and 
debug  assembly  language  programs.  Additionally,  a 
compiler  for  a  high-level  language,  such  as  C++ 
demonstrates  the  realistic  usage  of  assemblv  lan- 
guage. PREREQiCSC  142,  MAT  151. 

300  Cooperative  Programming  (3)  The  student 
works  for  an  organization  involved  in  the  comput- 
er field.  The  student  may  do  work  in  various  areas 
of  the  discipline  such  as  programming,  network- 
ing, or  customer  support.  PREREQ;  Written 
approval  of  the  internship  director  and  a  minimum 
grade  of  C-  in  each  of  the  following  courses:  CSC 
141,  142,  240,  and  241  with  a  2.50  GPA  in  CSC; 
MAT  151  and  161  with  a  2.00  GPA  in  MAT. 
317  Visual  Programming  (3)  Techniques  for  pro- 
gramming in  a  visual  eniironment  are  studied. 
Languages  such  as  Visual  BASIC  and  Java  will  be 
covered.  PREREQi  CSC  240. 
321  Database  Management  Systems  (3) 
Characteristics  of  generalized  database  management 
systems.  Surveys  of  different  database  models  that 
are  currently  used.  The  design  and  implementation 
of  a  database  system.  PREREQiCSC  240  and  241. 
331  Operating  Systems  (3)  This  course  is  a  general 
survey  of  elements  of  operating  systems  with  in-depth 
smdies  of  certain  features  of  specific  operating  sys- 
tems. Elements  of  concurrent  programming  are  stud- 
ied, such  as  the  mutual  exclusion  problem,  sema- 
phores, and  monitors.  Additionally,  the  following 
topics  are  covered:  process  scheduling  and  deadlock 
avoidance;  memory  management  issues  such  as  pag- 
ing and  segmentation;  organization  and  protection  of 
file  systems.  PREREQ;  CSC  220,  240,  241,  and  242. 

335  Data  Communications  and  Networking  I  (3) 
An  overview  of  the  various  aspects  of  modern  data 
and  telecommunications.  Discussion  of  the  hard- 
ware and  software  facets  of  the  transmission  of 
information  in  the  forms  of  voice,  data,  text,  and 
image.  Topics  include  communication  protocols, 
transmission  technologies,  analog/digital  transmis- 
sion, communications  media,  public  data  networks, 
LANs,  and  ISDN.  PREREQ:  CSC  240  and  241. 

336  Data  Communications  and  Networking  II  (3) 
Ai  in-depth  study  of  various  aspects  of  modem  data 
communication  systems.  Discussion  of  serial  port 
communications,  network  performance  and  design, 
and  Internet  protocols.  Topics  include  PC  serial 
port  hardware  (RS-232,  UART)  and  software 
(XMODEM  protocol),  queuing  theory,  X.25,  frame 
relay,  SMDS,  BISDN,  ATM,  TCP/IP,  sockets, 
and  Internet  applications.  PREREQ^CSC  335. 
341  Compiler  (3)  Covers  the  basic  topics  in  com- 
piler design  including  lexical  analysis,  syntax  analy- 
sis, error  handhng,  symbol  tables,  intermediate 
code  generation,  and  some  optimization. 
Programming  assignments  will  build  various  pieces 
of  a  compiler  for  a  small  language.  PREREQ;^ 
CSC  220,  240,  241,  and  242. 

345  Programming  Language  Concepts  and 
Paradigms  (3)  An  examination  of  the  conceptual 
underpinning  of  programming  languages  and  of  the 
paradigms  into  which  they  fall.  Topics  will  be  drawn 
fi"om  those  comprising  the  field  of  programming  lan- 


guage such  as  abstraction,  bindings,  concurrency, 
design,  encapsulation,  history,  representation,  storage, 
and  types.  Programming  projects  will  focus  on  lan- 
guages within  the  fimctional,  declarative,  and  object- 
oriented  paradigms  -  such  as  Common  Lisp,  ML, 
Prolog,  CLOS  -  rather  than  the  familiar  imperative 
paradigm.  PREREQiCSC  220,  240,  and  241. 
350  Computers  in  Education  (3)  (noimiajors) 
Technical  knowledge  and  skills  for  successfiil  use  of 
the  computer  as  a  supportive  tool  for  education  in 
the  elementary  and  secondary  school  classes.  Includes 
hands-on  experience  using  word  processing,  data- 
base, spreadsheet,  and  elementary  desktop  publish- 
ing. Software  evaluation  techniques  are  learned  using 
both  utility  and  subject-matter  software. 
361  Simulation  of  Discrete  Systems  (3)  Com- 
puter simulation  using  logical  and  numerical  mod- 
ehng  to  represent  discrete  systems.  Detailed  analy- 
sis of  the  foundation  upon  which  all  discrete  simu- 
lation languages  are  built.  Use  of  a  special  lan- 
guage, such  as  GPSS,  to  simulate  actual  systems. 
PREREQ:  CSC  220,  240,  241,  and  MAT  221. 
371  Computer  Graphics  (3)  A  mathematical  ap- 
proach to  the  construction  and  manipulation  of  proto- 
types for  graphical  display  purposes,  taking  into  con- 
sideration light  source,  reflexivity  of  surfaces,  and  color 
palates.  Includes  an  elementary  treatment  of  anima- 
tion. PREREQiCSC  220, 240, 241,  and  MAT  211. 
400  Cooperative  Specialty  (9)  The  student  works 
in  the  area  of  computer  science  that  is  his  or  her 
specialty.  PREREQi  Written  approval  of  the 
internship  director  and  a  minimum  grade  of  C-  in 
each  of  the  following  courses:  CSC  141,  142,  240, 
and  241  with  a  2.50  GPA  in  CSC;  MAT  151  and 
161  with  a  2.00  GPA  in  MAT. 
402  Software  Engineering  (3)  This  course 
explores  the  technical,  ethical,  organizational,  and 
social  imphcations  of  computing.  In  addition  to 
assigned  readings,  including  software  engineering 
literature,  students  develop  a  moderately  large  soft- 
ware team  project.  PREREQ.  CSC  240  and  241. 
417  User  Interfaces  (3)  This  course  covers  design- 
ing and  creating  graphical  user  interface  (GLJI)  pro- 
grams. Window  tool  kit  sets  are  presented  in  several 
programming  languages  to  illustrate  variation  in 
styles  of  GUI  programming.  PREREQICSC  240, 
241,  and  317,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
481  Artificial  Intelligence  (3)  Artificial 
Intelligence  (AI)  is  concerned  with  the  replication 
or  simulation  on  a  machine  of  the  complex  behav- 
iors associated  with  intelligence.  Topics  wUl  be 
drawn  from  any  of  those  comprising  the  field  of  Al 
such  as  agent  architectures,  automatic  truth  main- 
tenance, constraint  satisfaction,  expert  systems, 
frizzy  logic,  games,  genetic  algorithms,  knowledge 
representation,  machine  learning,  neural  networks 
and  connectionism,  natural  language  processing, 
planning,  reasoning,  robotics,  search,  theorem 
proving,  and  vision.  Projects  requiring  coding  will 
focus  on  an  AI  language  such  as  Common  Lisp  or 
Prolog.  PREREQ:  CSC  220  and  241. 
490  Independent  Project  in  Computer  Science  (3) 
The  swdent  designs  and  implements  a  software  sys- 
tem. Project  problems  are  drawn  from  local  industry 
and  university  departments.  A  computer  science 
faculty  member  supervises  each  project.  PREREQ^ 
Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  495  Topics  in  Computer  Science  (3)  Topic 
announced  at  time  of  offering.  PREREQ^ 
Permission  of  instructor. 

499  Independent  Study  in  Computer  Science  (3) 
In  conjunction  with  the  instructor,  the  student 
selects  study  topics  via  hterature  search.  PRE- 
REQi  Permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Criminal  Justice 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Department  of  Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 


201  Recitation  Hall 
610-436-2559 

Angelo  F.  Gadaleto,  Chairperson 
Stephanie  L.  Hinson,  Assistant  Chairperson 
PROFESSORS:  D.  Brown,  Gadaleto,  Kahn,  Parsons 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Broderick,  Hinson,  Napierkowski, 
Spradlin 


ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Zhang 

The  Department  of  Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology  provides 
courses  such  as  educational  psychology,  adolescent  development,  and 
essentials  of  the  helping  relationship.  Educational  psychology  is  a 
required  professional  care  course  of  the  University  teacher  certification 
program.  Adolescent  development  and  essentials  of  the  helping  rela- 
tionship are  popular  elective  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COUNSELOR  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  EDC 

462  Essentials  of  the  Helping  Relationship  (3) 

This  course  sun'evs  the  concepts  and  skills 
involved  in  helping  others  through  individual 
interviewing,  problem  soKing.  decision  making, 
and  svstematic  behavior  change. 
♦  498  Counselor  Education  Workshop  (3) 


499  Peer  Helper  Workshop  (1-3)  A  workshop 
that  focuses  on  acquisition  of  specific  knowledge 
and  skills  necessary  for  working  in  a  college  setting. 

EDUCATIONAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

Symbol:  EDP 

249  Adolescent  Development  (3)  This  course 
focuses  on  the  emotional,  social,  intellectual, 
moral,  physical,  and  self-concept  factors  shaping 


human  behavior  with  emphasis  on  adolescent 
behavior. 

250  Educational  Psychology  (3)  A  study  of  learn- 
ing in  relation  to  the  physical,  social,  emotional, 
and  intellectual  aspects  of  personality. 
467  Group  Dynamics  (3)  A  group  process  course 
designed  to  help  students  develop  their  personal 
effectiveness  in  group  situations. 


♦  This  course 


may 


be  taken 


again 


for  credit. 


Department  of  Criminal  Justice 

200  Rubv  Jones  Hall 

610-436-2647 

Jana  Nestlerode,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Brev^'ster,  Nestlerode 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Kauffman,  McVey,  Nealy, 

O'Neill 
West  Chester  University's  Department  of  Criminal  Justice  offers  a 
broad-based,  interdiscipUnar\'  program  that  combines  theory  with 
appUcation.  Courses  that  teach  applied  knowledge  complement  a  solid 
core  curriculum  ot  theory,  philosophy,  and  analysis.  The  program  is 
designed  to  fiilfdl  the  needs  of  four  categories  of  students: 

1.  Those  who  desire  a  carefiiUy  planned  four-year  program  of  study 
to  prepare  for  careers  in  criminal  justice; 

2.  Sttidents  from  two-vear  colleges  who  desire  to  continue  their  edu- 
cations and  obtain  bachelor's  degrees; 

3.  Criminal  justice  professionals  who  seek  to  increase  their  profes- 
sional competencies  by  strengthening  their  educational  back- 
grounds; 

4.  Those  who  wish  to  pursue  master's  degrees  or  law  degrees. 
The  program  provides  1)  a  core  curriculum  of  required  courses  to 
ensure  a  solid  working  knowledge  of  the  major  systems  within  the 
discipline;  2)  a  variety  of  elective  courses  that  permits  students  to  tai- 
lor their  academic  careers  to  their  professional  goals;  3)  a  venue  for 
the  development  of  critical  analysis  and  communication  sldlls;  and  4) 
practical  experience  in  a  criminal  justice  setting.  These  primary  pro- 
grammatic qualities  advantageously  position  the  successful  undergrad- 
uate student  for  entry-level  positions  in  criminal  justice  agencies  or 
postgraduate  studies. 

A  primary  feature  of  the  program  is  the  summer  practicum  served  at  a 
criminal  justice  agency.  It  is  designed  to  give  the  student  the  opportu- 
nity to  apply  acquired  theoretical  knowledge  and  receive  direct  profes- 
sional experience  in  the  field. 

Related  Student  Activities 

The  Criminal  Justice  Club  (Sigma  Tau  Omicron)  is  the  local  chapter 
of  the  American  Criminal  Justice  Association  (Lambda  Alpha 


18  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 

27  semester  hours 


Epsilon).  The  acti\ities  of  this  organization  are  open  to  all  students. 
The  Law  Society  is  an  organization  also  open  to  all  students,  but  may 
be  of  particular  interest  to  those  students  aspiring  to  law  school. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Required  Courses  15  semester  hours 
CRJ  110*,  210*,  300*,  38r,  and  400* 

3.  Criminal  Justice  Electives 

4.  Summer  Practicum  (required) 
CRJ  490* 

5.  Related  Areas  (minor  or  electives  taken 
under  advisement) 

Enrollment  in  CRJ  110  and  CRJ  210  is  open  to  all  students. 
However,  enrollment  in  all  other  criminal  justice  courses  is  limited  to 
criminal  justice  majors,  criminal  justice  minors,  and  to  those  students 
who  have  received  special  permission  from  the  department  chairper- 
son. Admission  to  the  program  is  competitive,  and  enrollment  in  such 
restricted  courses  is  no  assurance  of  admission  into  the  major  (nor  is 
acceptance  into  the  minor  program  assurance  of  firture  acceptance  into 
the  major).  Students  wishing  to  change  their  majors  to  criminal  justice 
must  apply  to  the  department.  Evaluation  of  applications  is  based  on 
academic  performance,  writing  abilit)',  and  other  relevant  data. 
NOTE:  This  program  deviates  from  the  "Anticipated  Time  for  Degree 
Completion,"  which  is  outlined  on  page  51,  since  the  program  requires 
the  completion  of  requirements  that  can  only  be  met  in  the  summer. 
Students  must  have  a  GPA  of  at  least  2.3  for  admission  to  the  pro- 
gram. 
Minor  in  Criminal  Justice  18  semester  hours 

1.  Required  Courses  15  semester  hours 
CRJ  110*,  210',  300*,  387*,  and  400* 

2.  Criminal  Justice  Electives  3  semester  hours 
This  minor  may  be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts 
or  bachelor  of  science  in  hberal  studies  general  degree  program.  All 
students  who  wish  to  enter  the  minor  must  have  a  minimum  overall 
2.00  GPA. 


A  minimum  grade  of  C  is  required  in  this  course. 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Criminal  Justice 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
CRIMINAL  JUSTICE 

Symbol:  CRJ 

110  IntToducrion  to  the  Criminal  Justice  System 

(3)  This  course  is  designed  to  describe  the  criminal 
justice  system  from  arrest  through  trial,  appeal, 
sentencing,  correction,  and  parole.  The  object  of 
this  course  is  to  provide  the  student  with  a  proce- 
dural framework  ot  the  criminal  justice  process. 
210  Theories  in  Criminal  Justice  (3)  This  course 
is  a  survey  of  the  historical  and  contemporary 
attempts  to  explain  the  phenomena  of  crime  and 
criminal  behavior  from  the  perspectives  ot  sociolo- 
gy, psychology,  economics,  biology,  and  law. 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  contemporary  theory 
and  the  analysis  of  evidence  supportive  of  various 
theoretical  positions. 

215  GIS  for  Criminal  Justice  Careers  (3)  A 
course  in  crime  mapping  and  the  analysis  of  maps 
of  crime  patterns,  police  services,  locations  of 
criminal  incidents,  offenders'  geographical  behav- 
iors, and  spatial  trends  in  crime.  This  course  is 
cross-hsted  with  GEO  215. 

220  Corrections  (3)  The  purpose  of  this  course  is 
to  provide  the  student  with  a  survey  and  analysis 
of  the  correctional  system  and  its  processes  trom 
both  a  historical  and  geographical  perspective. 
Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  relating  this  survey 
and  analysis  to  contemporary'  practice  and  future 
trends  in  the  area  of  corrections. 
240  Criminal  Investigation  (3)  Criminal  investi- 
gation tiinctions  of  police  involving  crimes  of  vio- 
lence, crimes  against  property,  and  organized 
crime.  Police  operational  techniques  and  applica- 
ble court  decisions  in  the  areas  of  interview, 
search,  seizure,  and  arrest. 

268  Private  Security  (3)  This  course  will  provide 
an  in-depth  examination  of  the  various  facets  and 
interests  of  the  private  sector  of  security'.  A  review 
of  the  histor\',  organization,  management,  and 
safet)'  issues  pertaining  to  the  private  security  pro- 
fession will  be  addressed.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
policy  and  decision  making,  personnel,  and  bud- 
geting, as  well  as  an  examination  of  security  pro- 
gramming that  responds  to  the  private  sector. 
300  Criminal  Law  (3)  This  course  will  cover  the 
principles  of  criminal  rcsponsibiliU',  the  purposes 
and  limitations  of  criminal  law,  and  the  elements  of 
various  criminal  offenses.  Substantive  criminal  law 
will  cover  the  conduct,  acts,  and  omissions  that  have 
been  designated  as  crimes.  These  acts  (or  omissions) 
plus  the  mental  state  and  other  essential  elements 
that  make  up  criminal  action  will  be  examined. 
PREREQ;  Students  must  have  earned  a  grade  of  C 
or  bener  in  CRJ  110,  CRJ  210,  and  WRT  121. 
304  History  and  Philosophy  of  Law  and  Justice 
(3)  This  course  is  intended  to  aid  the  beginning  stu- 
dent in  understanding  the  historical  and  philosophi- 
cal influences  on  the  American  criminal  justice  sys- 
tem; introduce  the  student  to  a  broad  range  ot  indi- 
viduals who,  over  a  period  of  2,000  years,  have 
made  significant  contributions  to  the  formulation 
and  process  of  justice;  and  analyze  various  other  sys- 
tems of  criminal  justice  found  in  dissimilar  cultures. 
310  Juvenile  Justice  Administration  (3)  A  survey 
of  both  the  formal  (police/courts/corrections)  and 
the  informal  (diversion)  means  of  dealing  with  the 
problem  of  juvenile  crime.  Emphasis  is  not  on  the 
behavior  but  on  society's  response  to  it.  Emphasis 
also  wiU  be  placed  on  the  legal  rights  of  juveniles. 
312  White-CoUar  Crime  (3)  This  course  analyzes 
the  usually  nonviolent  criminal  conduct  described 
as  official  corruption,  systematic  crime,  or  viola- 
tions of  trust  that  are  characterized  by  calculation. 


deceit,  and  personal  enrichment.  The  influence  of 
organized  crime  also  is  explored. 
314  Organized  Crime  (3)  Organized  crime  is 
examined  as  an  American  phenomenon,  then 
compared  to  organized  criminal  acrivitv'  in  Europe 
and  Asia.  The  student  wiU  place  in  perspective  the 
current  organizations  in  the  U.S.  and  their  histori- 
cal development  over  the  last  centur}'.  European 
groupings  are  examined  as  precursors/models  of 
U.S.  transplants  with  insights  into  the  prohfera- 
tion  of  such  groups  in  the  Far  East. 
330  Criminal  Behavior  (3)  This  course  e.xposes  stu- 
dents to  broad,  theoretical  positions  on  crime  and  to 
observable  criminal  offenses.  Students  will  learn  to 
avoid  oversimplified,  dogmatic  answers.  Research 
findings  on  understanding  and  controlling  crime  will 
be  discussed.  The  course  will  help  a  student  appreci- 
ate the  need  to  integrate  contemporar)'  psychology 
into  an  understanding  of  criminal  behavior. 
340  Victimless  Crimes  (3)  This  course  is  designed 
to  familiarize  the  student  with  the  ramifications  of 
vice  control.  It  will  cover  such  topics  as  prosfitution, 
homosex"ualitv,  pornography,  gambling,  and  book- 
making,  as  well  as  historical  perspecrives,  statutes  and 
interpretations,  a  comparison  of  illegal  operations, 
enforcement  techniques,  and  legalization  efforts. 
350  Scientific  Crime  Detection  (3)  This  course 
will  engender  an  appreciation  of  what  is  entailed 
for  an  indix'idual  to  understand  current  scientific 
methods  of  detection  in  the  criminal  justice  system. 
387  Criminal  Justice  Research  (3)  This  course  is 
designed  to  provide  an  overview  of  research  meth- 
ods used  in  criminal  justice  research,  including 
data  collection  methods,  sampling  techniques,  and 
basic  statistical  analyses.  The  course  will  provide 
hands-on  appUcation  of  research  methods  as  well 
as  critical  analyses  of  research  studies  conducted  by 
others  in  the  field  of  criminal  justice.  PREREQ^ 
Students  must  have  earned  a  grade  ot  C  or  better 
in  CRJ  110,  CRJ  210,  and  WRT  121. 
400  Criminal  Procedure  (3)  This  course  is  an 
examination  of  the  theory  and  application  of  the  law 
and  rules  of  cNndence  for  the  criminal  justice  student. 
It  will  develop  an  understanding  ot  the  reasons  for 
the  rules  of  evidence  and  a  grasp  of  the  application 
of  the  rules  in  case  investigation  and  for  presentation 
in  court  through  a  study  of  selected  cases,  statutes, 
and  the  an;Jysis  of  hypothetical  cases  and  situations. 
PREREQ;  Students  must  have  earned  a  grade  of  C 
or  better  in  CRJ  300  and  CRJ  387. 
♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  Criminal  Justice 
(1-3)  Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
criminal  justice.  PREREQi  Permission  of  depart- 
ment chairperson. 

430  Interviewing  and  Counseling  the  Offender 
(3)  Techniques  of  interviexving  and  counsehng 
applicable  to  law  enforcement  and  corrections  offi- 
cers. Areas  ot  study  include  the  initial  interview, 
interrogation,  informant-handling  techniques, 
manipulative  behavior  of  offenders,  and  exit  inter- 
views. Role  plaj-ing  and  sociodrama  are  used. 
435  Assessment  of  the  Oflfender  (3)  This  course 
will  develop  students'  abilities  to  describe,  recognize, 
and  understand  psychometric  measures  on  adult  and 
juvenile  offenders.  Topics  include  understanding  the 
selection  of  psychometric  measurements,  observing 
and  drawing  from  life  histories,  and  understanding 
how  violent  behavior  may  be  predicted. 
440  Violent  Crime  (3)  This  course  seeks  to  survey 
the  incidence  of  violent  crime,  to  analyze  the  violent 
criminal,  and  to  study  the  variety  of  means  that 
have  been  developed  to  control  criminal  violence. 
450  Criminalistics  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to 
follow  CRJ  240  and  CRJ  350.  It  buUds  on  the 
principles  learned  in  those  courses  and  permits 


students  to  apply  those  principles.  The  course 
involves  demonstrations  of  examinations  and 
analyses  of  physical  evidence.  Students  actively 
participate  in  several  of  those  examinations  and 
experiments.  Materials  will  be  provided;  field  trips 
may  be  made.  Course  enrollment  is  limited. 
♦  455  Topical  Seminar  in  Criminal  Justice  (3) 
Intensive  examination  ot  a  selected  area  of  study  in 
the  field  of  criminal  justice.  Topics  will  be 
announced  at  the  time  of  offering.  Course  may  be 
taken  more  than  once  when  different  topics  are 
presented.  PREREC^Junior  or  senior  CRJ  major 
or  with  permission  of  instructor. 

460  Evidence  and  Trial  Advocacy  (3)  This  course 
moves  a  step  beyond  basic  criminal  law  and  criminal 
procedure  studies  and  takes  the  student  into  the 
courtroom.  The  student  wiU  learn  basic  rules  of  evi- 
dence presentation  and  court  procedure  and  discover 
how  the  trial  process  works  by  actively  participating 
in  it.  The  student  will  learn  how  to  distill  the  issues, 
and  to  present  concise,  well-reasoned  arguments 
supporting  a  given  position.  It  is  in  this  manner  that 
the  student  will  learn  critical  anal\'sis  and  practical 
presentation.  (This  course  is  designed  for  those  stu- 
dents who  have  completed  CRJ  300  and  CRJ  400.) 

461  Notable  Criminal  Cases  (3)  Selected  factual 
accounts  of  criminality'  and  criminal  behavior  over 
the  past  75  years  are  analyzed.  Selection  is  based 
on  notoriety  and  continued  dispute.  Course  is 
designed  to  illuminate,  through  reading  and  class 
analysis,  a  wide  spectrum  of  criminal  conduct  and 
the  related  investigative  and  judicial  response. 

462  Management  Problems  and  Practices  (3)  This 
course  is  intended  to  aid  in  the  instruction  of  stu- 
dents who  are  potential  candidates  for  administrative 
positions.  Its  objective  is  neither  to  present  a  new 
approach  to  the  field  nor  to  support  an  existing  one; 
rather,  it  is  to  provide  the  student  with  a  well-round- 
ed view  of  the  subject  and  to  lay  the  groundwork  for 
flirther  study.  This  is  done  by  bringing  together  the 
most  appropriate  concepts  and  practices  in  managing 
an  organization;  e.g.,  purpose  defining,  planning, 
decision  making,  staffing,  motivating,  communicat- 
ing, collective  bargaining,  and  controlling. 

470  Interpersonal  Relations  (3)  This  course  is 
designed  to  aid  a  student's  self  analysis  in  terms  of 
behavior  patterns  or  changes  affecting  his  or  her 
life.  This  self  knowledge  often  leads  to  under- 
standing relationships  with  others,  which  can 
assist  students  in  relating  to  other  persons  in  their 
personal,  social,  and  professional  lives. 
482  Contemporary  Legal  Issues  (3)  This  course 
encompasses  a  brief  review  of  the  general  princi- 
ples of  law  and  procedure,  followed  by  an  in-depth 
study  of  the  more  controversial  legal  dilemmas  fac- 
ing today's  criminal  justice  system.  The  course  is 
designed  to  shed  light  on  each  side  of  the  issue,  to 
enable  the  student  to  see  beyond  the  superficial 
aspects  of  the  conffict,  and  to  understand  its  more 
profound  nature. 

487  Ethical  Issues  in  Criminal  Justice  (3)  This 
course  is  designed  to  identify  and  examine  ethical 
issues  among  practitioners  and  students  in  the 
criminal  justice  field.  Such  issues  may  include  the 
discretionary  power  of  arrest,  the  use  of  deadly 
force,  the  decision  to  prosecute,  participation  in 
plea  bargaining,  representation  of  the  guilty,  and 
the  imposition  of  punishment.  Such  a  course  will 
promote  inquiry  that  combines  ethical  analysis 
with  a  practical  awareness  of  the  reaUties  of  the 
criminal  justice  system. 

490  Practicum  (3-12)  Full-time  12-week  struc- 
tured work  experience  at  a  department-approved 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 


School  ot  Education 


criminal  justice  agency  under  the  joint  supervision 
of  the  facultv  instructor  and  the  ageno.'.  The 
course  includes  periodic  reports,  a  final  paper,  and 
attendance  at  classes  held  on  campus.  Offered  pri- 


marily in  the  summer.  PREREQ;  84  earned  cred- 
its, GPA  at  WCU  of  at  least  2.0,  C  or  better  in 
CRJ  300  and  CRJ  387.  Note:  Any  student  termi- 
nated for  cause  by  the  professional  agency-  may  not 


retake  the  course  unless  special  approval  to  do  so  is 
obtained  from  the  department. 


Department  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 


309  Recitation  Hall 

610-436-2579 

Judith  S.  Finkel,  Chairperson 

Catherine  Prudhoe,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Finkel,  Maggitti 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Drake,  McGinley,  Prudhoe, 

Zlotowski 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Bell,  DeLuca,  OzeUs,  Qi,  Wandry 
The  Department  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education  stands 
out  in  the  southeastern  Pennsylvania  and  tri-state  region  with  its 
extensive  early  practicum  opportunities  for  its  students;  its  small,  pro- 
fessionally diverse  facudts",  a  high  rate  ot  employment  opportunities;  a 
heightened  sense  of  collegialiu'  and  volunteerism  among  its  students; 
and  finally,  national  (National  Council  for  Accreditation  of  Teacher 
Education),  regional  (Middle  States  Association  ot  Colleges  and 
Secondary  Schools),  and  state  (Pennsylvania  Department  ot 
Education)  accreditation. 

The  Department  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education  offers  pro- 
grams of  study  leading  to  a  bachelor  of  science  in  early  childhood  edu- 
cation or  a  bachelor  of  science  in  special  education.  Dual  certification 
programs  are  available  in  early  childhood  and  special  education,  early 
childhood  and  elementary  education,  and  special  education  and  elemen- 
tary education.  Minor  concentrations  are  available  in  either  area. 
The  B.S.Ed,  in  EARLY  CHILDHOOD  EDUCATION  curriculum 
is  designed  to  provide  both  the  liberal  education  and  special  prepara- 
tion required  for  careers  in  public  and  private  school  as  teachers  and 
directors,  as  well  as  supervisory  work  in  early  childhood  programs  in 
public  schools  and  other  venues.  Upon  satistacton'  completion  of  the 
program,  the  student  will  quality  for  a  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I 
Teaching  Certificate  valid  for  six  years  of  teaching  in  preschool, 
kindergarten,  and  grades  one  through  three. 

The  B.S.Ed,  in  SPECIAL  EDUCATION  prepares  teachers  who  can 
provide  diverse  student  populations  with  the  knowledge,  skills,  and  val- 
ues considered  essential  for  effective  participation  in  society.  It  provides 
relevant  and  comprehensive  education  for  those  who  desire  to  support 
the  educational,  emotional,  and  physical  needs  of  students  with  disabili- 
ties in  the  public  schools  of  Pennsylvania.  Upon  satisfactory'  completion 
of  the  program,  the  student  will  quality'  for  a  Pennsylvania  Instructional 
I  Teacher  Certificate,  valid  for  sLx  years  of  teaching. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION— EARLY 
CHILDHOOD  EDUCATION 
(Curriculum  NK-3) 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Includes  LIT  352,  MAT  101,  and  SOC  240; 

requirements  in  art,  humanities,  social  sciences, 
and  sciences;  and  a  second  math  course  as  a 
student  elective. 

2.  Professional  Education  12  semester  hours 
EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250+  and  351+ 

3.  Specialized  Preparation  60  semester  hours 
ECE  100,  225+,  231+,  232,  308,  321+,  404, 

405+,  407,  410+,  411+;  EDA  230;  EDR  309, 

325;  MAT  349+;  MUE  232 
NOTE:  MUE  232  may  count  toward  the  general  education  require- 
ments. 


12  semester  hours 


45  semester  bom's 


12  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION— SPECLVL 
EDUCATION 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Student  electives  selected  under  advisement 

(suggested  general  education  student  elective 
MAT  102) 

2.  Professional  Education 
Required:  EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250 
and  351 

3.  Special  Education^: 
NOTE;  Special  education  requirements  are 
structured  in  the  following  distinct  blocks: 
High  incidence: 

EDA  302,  350,  360 
Low  incidence: 

EDA  301,  329,  349 
Introducton'  and  major  courses: 

EDA  104,  EDA  230  or  EDA/EDR  341, 

EDA  380,  and  EDA  416/417 
One  program  elective  from  the  folio-wing: 

EDA  200,  230,  280,  or  341 

4.  Required  Supporting  Courses^: 
EDR  311,  HEA  206,  MAT  357,  and  SPP  240 

Minor  Programs 

Students  who  desire  admission  to  the  minor  in  early  childhood  or 
special  education  must  have  achieved  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA 
required  for  their  earned  credits:  2.65  for  students  with  27-47  credits, 
and  2.80  for  students  with  48  or  more  credits.  Students  admitted  to 
either  of  these  minors  must  maintain  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA 
required  of  them  at  admission  to  the  minor  in  order  to  continue. 
Students  who  fall  below  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA  required  are 
permitted  to  retake,  in  accordance  with  University  policy,  course  work 
in  the  minor  that  contributed  to  their  fall  below  the  required  mini- 
mum cumulative  GPA.  Such  students  will  not  be  permitted  to  take 
additional  course  work  in  the  minor  untd  they  achieve  the  required 
minimum  cumulative  GPA. 

The  minors  do  not  lead  to  Instructional  I  teacher  certification  by  the 
Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education. 

Minor  in  Early  Childhood  Education         15-18  semester  hours 
Required  Courses 

ECE  100,  ECE  231,  ECE  232,  PSY  100,  and  one  of  the  foUow- 

ing:  ECE  404  or  ECE  405 

Minor  in  Special  Education  18  semester  hours 

Current  trends,  enforced  by  recent  litigation,  have  increased  the  need  for 
a  general  understanding  of  the  individuals  with  disabilities  in  our  culture. 
The  program  is  designed  to  introduce  students  to  individuals  with 
mild  disabihties  through  course  work  and  field  practicums. 
Required  special  education  courses  are  EDA  104,  EDA  200,  and 
EDA  302/350/360  (as  a  block). 


+     Courses  requiring  prerequisites — check  catalog  course  descriptions  below. 
:):     Minimum  grade  of  C-  is  required  in  all  special  education  and  the 

following  supporting  courses:  EDR  311,  HEA  206,  MAT  357,  and 

SPP  240. 


School  of  Education 


Earlv  Childhood  and  Special  Education 


Admission  to  Early  Childhood  Education  and  Special  Education 
Degree  Programs 

For  formal  admission  to  early  childhood  education  and  special  educa- 
tion degree  programs,  see  "Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education" 
in  the  "Teaching  Certification  Programs"  section  of  this  catalog. 
REQUIREMENTS  FOR  TRANSFER  TO  THE  MAJORS  IN 
EARLY  CHILDHOOD  AND  SPECIAL  EDUCATION. 
Students  may  apply  for  "external  transfer"  (see  below)  when  transfer- 
ring from  another  post-secondar\'  institution.  Students  already  admit- 
ted to  West  Chester  University  as  premajors  or  in  another  major  may 
apply  for  "internal  transfer." 

Students  seeking  external  or  internal  transfer  must  have  earned  a  min- 
imum of  12  college-level  credits.  Students  with  12-47  credits  must 
also  have  a  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of  2.65.  The  required  mini- 
mum cumulative  GPA  for  students  with  48-59  earned  credits  is  2.80. 
Students  with  60  or  more  earned  credits  must  have  a  minimum  cumu- 
lative GPA  of  2.80;  have  achie\'ed  the  following  passing  scores  (in 
parentheses)  as  established  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education  on  the  Praxis  I  PPST  examinations  in  Reading  (172), 
Writing  (173),  and  Mathematics  (173);  and  completed  college-level 
studies  in  EngUsh  composition  (three  credits),  Uterature  taught  in 
EngUsh  (three  credits),  and  mathematics  (six  credits). 
External  or  internal  transfer  to  the  majors  in  early  childhood  and  spe- 
cial education  does  not  represent  nor  confer  formal  admission  to 
teacher  education.  (See  "Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in 
the  "Teaching  Certification  Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.) 
INTERNAL  TRANSFER  STUDENTS.  There  is  an  announced  time 
for  internal  admission  at  the  beginning  of  each  semester. 
EXTERNAL  TRANSFER  STUDENTS.  Transfer  credit  will  be 
granted  for  100-  and  200-level  courses  if  the  course  descriptions  are 
equivalent  and  in  accordance  with  University  poUcy.  All  other 
required  courses  in  the  professional  education  and  specialized  prepara- 
tion areas  will  be  evaluated  and  approved  on  an  individual  basis. 


Application  and  Approval  for  Student  Teaching 

Students  must  apply  through  the  department  for  approv-al  for  student 
teaching  in  earl)-  childhood  education  or  special  education.  To  apply,  the 
student  must  have  completed  90  semester  hours.  (See  "Formal 
Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in  the  "Teaching  Certification 
Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.)  As  part  of  the  90  credits,  the  student 
must  complete  all  professional  education  courses  and  all  specialized 
preparation  courses  with  the  minimum  required  GPA.  (See  also  student 
teaching,  page  146.) 

An  appUcation  for  student  teaching  must  be  filed  in  November  prior 
to  the  academic  year  in  which  student  teaching  is  to  be  scheduled. 
Application  meetings  will  be  announced  at  the  beginning  of  the  fall 
semester  each  year.  Students  register  for  student  teaching  as  they 
would  for  any  other  University  courses. 

Field  Placement  In  Schools 

AH  field  placements,  including  student  teaching,  are  arranged  by  the 
department.  Students  are  not  to  soUcit  placements.  While  student 
needs  are  considered  in  assigning  placements,  no  particular  placement 
can  be  guaranteed.  Transportation  to  and  from  field  placements  is  the 
responsibiht)'  of  the  individual  student. 

West  Chester  Universitv'  does  not  place  students  at  reUgiously  affihat- 
ed  schools  when  public  school  placements  are  available  if  that  place- 
ment results  in  the  students'  receiving  academic  credit  (e.g.,  student 
teaching).  In  addition,  the  University'  will  make  every  attempt  to  first 
place  students  into  public  (vs.  private)  schools  for  student  teaching 
and  related  activities.  Further,  students  will  not  be  assigned  student 
teaching  or  other  related  duties  at  nonsectarian  private  schools  or 
agencies  unless  they  specifically  request  such  placement.  Each  request 
will  be  considered  individually  to  ensure  that  the  private  entity  does 
not  receive  special  benefit  from  the  arrangement  that  outweighs  the 
benefit  to  the  University  and  its  students. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 

EARLY  CHILDHOOD  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  ECE 

"  100  Orientation  to  Early  Childhood  (3)  An 

introduction  to  the  histon'  and  philosophy  of  early 
childhood  education.  Field  obsen'ations  in  a  vari- 
ety' of  settings  provide  the  student  with  an  oppor- 
tunitv'  for  career  decision  making. 
"  225  Infant  Learning  Environment  and  Field 
Experience  (6)  The  study  of  infant/toddler  devel- 
opment and  appropriate  programming.  The  rela- 
tionship ot  the  developmental  level  to  the  structur- 
ing of  learning  environment  is  fostered  as  students 
interact  with  infants  in  child  care  settings  for  four 
hours  per  week. 

•  231  Child  Development  (2-5  years)  (3) 
Physical,  social,  emotional,  intellectual,  and  moral 
deyelopment  of  the  child,  2-5  years  of  age. 
Parallels  are  drawn  from  this  phase  of  child  devel- 
opment to  students'  self-development. 

*  232  Preschool  Learning  Environment  (3-6) 
Methods  and  materials  for  structuring  the  class- 
room environment  for  the  child  2-5  years  of  age. 
Readiness  skills  and  concepts  in  all  curricular  areas 
are  addressed. 

308  Social  Studies  and  Sciences  in  Primaiy 
Grades  (3)  A  consideration  of  methods  of  instruc- 
tion for  social  studies  and  science  in  K-3  grade 
classrooms. 

**  321  Middle  Childhood  and  Adolescent 
Development  (5-8  years)  (3)  Physical,  social, 
emotional,  intellectual,  and  moral  development  of 
the  child  5-8  years  ot  age.  Parallels  are  drawn  from 
this  phase  of  child  development  to  students'  self- 
development. 


A*  325  Teaching  Reading  and  Field  Experience 
(Primaiy  Grades)  (6)  The  teaching  of  reading  and 
its  masten'  is  the  focus  of  this  course.  Students  apply 
knowledge  of  theories  and  practices  in  supervised 
field  placements  in  schools  with  children  5-8  years  of 
age.  Tutoring  of  individual  children  and  small  groups 
is  Integrated  with  planning  and  evaluation  of  lessons 
and  activities  as  well  as  remediation.  Crosslisted  as 
EDR  325.  PREREQ:  ECE  310  or  EDR  309. 
404  Integrated  Learning  in  Kindergarten  (3-6) 
The  focus  of  this  course  is  on  curricular  content 
and  developmentally  appropriate  ex-periences  in 
various  kindergarten  programs. 
*  405  Administration  and  Supervision  of  Early 
Childhood  Programs  (3)  Principles  of  administra- 
tion and  supervision  of  programs  for  young  chil- 
dren. Includes  parent  education  and  community 
relarions.  PREREQ;  ECE  232. 
>  407  Diversity  Issues  in  Early  Childhood  (3) 
This  seminar  will  address  the  rewards  and  chal- 
lenges of  teaching  in  America's  diverse  classrooms. 
**  410  Student  Teaching  (6)  (First  halt  of  semester) 
"411  Student  Teaching  (6)  (Second  half  of  semes- 
ter) Two  separate  student  teaching  experiences  are 
required:  one  in  nursery  or  kindergarten  and  one  in 
grades  1-3.  Weekly  practicum  sessions  are  required. 
PREREQ;  See  "Application  and  Approval  for 
Student  Teaching"  earEer  in  this  section. 

Symbol:  EDR 

'  309  Introduction  to  the  Language  Arts  (3)  The 

areas  of  listening,  speaking,  and  writing  are  stud- 
ied in  depth.  Knowledge,  teaching,  and  evaluative 
techniques  arc  addressed.  Introduction  to  the 
reading  process  and  the  relationship  of  language  to 
reading  also  will  be  studied. 


SPECLVL  EDUCATION 

Sv-mbol:  EDA 

104  Introduction  to  Special  Education  (6)  This 
course  is  designed  to  acquaint  the  prospective  spe- 
cial education  teacher  with  the  historical  and  legal 
evolution  of  the  field,  as  well  as  the  characteristics 
of  individuals  with  high-  and  low-incidence  disabil- 
ities with  a  focus  on  mental  retardation,  emotional 
disturbance,  learning  disabilities,  and  phwical  and 
other  health  impairments.  In  addition,  this  course  is 
designed  to  have  the  prospective  teacher  observe 
and  reflect  upon  the  characteristics  of  these  students 
with  disabilities  within  the  context  of  school  and 
clinical  settings.  The  content  will  focus  on  issues 
relative  to  special  education  in  a  diverse  society  and 
will  rely  heavily  on  reflective  teaching  and  learning. 
200  Practicum  (3)  This  course  is  an  integral  part 
of  the  program  for  minors.  Field  experience  in  an 
integrated  environment  consisting  of  collaborative 
training  with  regular  and  special  educators.  PRE- 
REQ: EDA  104. 

►  230  Inclusive  Classrooms  (3)  The  purpose  of 
this  course  is  to  prepare  preservice  early  childhood, 
elementarj',  and  special  education  students  to 
teach  smdents  with  disabilities  effectively  in  gener- 
al education  settings.  The  course  will  be  co-taught 
by  special  education  and  early  childhood  education 
faculty.  PREREQ:  EDE  200. 


"  Open  to  early  childhood  and  elementary  education 

majors  only 
**  Open  to  earlv  childhood  majors  only 
A  Crosslisted  course.  Students  completing  ECE 

325  may  not  take  EDR  325  for  credit. 
^    Diverse  communities  course 


Economics  and  Finance 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


250  Inclusive  Practices  in  Music  Education  (1) 

Designed  to  acquaint  music  educators  with  the 
philosophy  of  inclusive  education  and  provide  them 
with  skills  to  accommodate  students  with  disabili- 
ties in  music  classes  (for  music  educators  only). 
280  Integrating  the  Arts  (3)  Fine  art,  music,  pup- 
petrj',  and  dance  are  combined  as  creative  process- 
es to  be  adapted  for  use  with  children  with  disabil- 
ities. This  course  can  be  used  to  fidfill  general 
education  requirements. 

301  Field  Experience  and  Seminar:  Low- 
Incidence  Disabilities  (3)  A  weekly  one-and-a- 
half-hour  seminar  and  three-hour  field  placement 
with  individuals  with  low-incidence  disabihties. 
This  course  will  be  taken  the  same  semester  as 
EDA  320  and  EDA  349.  This  course  will  give 
students  experience  designing  and  implementing 
instruction  for  individuals  with  low-incidence  dis- 
abihties and  time  to  share  and  reflect  on  their 
experience.  The  readings  will  focus  on  issues  of 
assessment,  curriculum,  and  instruction  of  individ- 
uals with  low-incidence  disabilities.  PREREQ; 
Formal  admission  to  teacher  education. 

302  Field  Experience  and  Seminar.  Hi^- 
Inddence  Disabilities  (3)  A  weekly  one-and-a-half- 
hour  seminar  and  three-hour  field  placement  with 
individuals  with  high-incidence  disabilities.  This 
course  will  be  taken  the  same  semester  as  EDA  350 
and  EDA  360.  The  goal  is  to  experience  inclusive 
classrooms,  with  culturally  diverse  populations, 
implementing  best  practices  for  teaching  all  children 


integrating  theory  and  practice.  The  reading  and  dis- 
cussions will  focus  on  special  education  in  a  diverse 
society  and  will  include  reflective  teaching  and  the 
reflective  teaching  model.  PREREQi  EDA  104. 
320  Behavior  Management  (3)  This  course  is  an 
exploration  of  current  practices  in  behavior  man- 
agement with  emphasis  on  teacher-dehvered  sys- 
tems. PREREQ:  EDA  104  and  formal  admission 
to  teacher  education. 

1 341  Inclusion  and  Reading  in  the  Content  Area 
(3)  This  course  is  co-taught  b\'  special  education 
and  Uteracy  faciJty.  It  will  help  prepare  secondary 
education  and  special  education  majors  to  teach  all 
students  effectively,  including  those  with  disabili- 
ties in  general-education,  content-specific  settings. 
Practical  guidehnes,  content  literac)-  strategies,  and 
adaptations  will  be  emphasized  to  prepare  pre-edu- 
cators  to  meet  the  academic  social,  and  affective 
needs  of  all  students  in  the  inclusive  secondary 
classroom.  PREREQ:  EDF  100,  EDP  250.  ' 

349  Methods  for  Low-Incidence  Disabilities  (3) 
This  course  is  designed  to  prepare  students  to 
teach  children  with  low-incidence  disabihties. 
Provides  an  understanding  of  curriculum  prepara- 
tion, methods,  materials,  and  curricular  areas 
unique  to  learners  with  low-incidence  disabihties. 
PREREQi  EDA  104  and  formal  admission  to 
teacher  education. 

350  Methods  for  High-Incidence  Disabilities  (3) 
The  course  is  designed  to  prepare  students  to 
teach  children  with  high-incidence  disabihties.  It 


provides  an  understanding  ot  learning  problems. 
The  focus  is  on  instruction  in  academic  areas. 
PREREQ:  EDA  104. 

360  Assessment  in  Special  Education  (3)  This 
course  is  designed  to  introduce  students  to  instruc- 
tional assessment  in  special  education  and  the 
development  of  relevant  education  plans  to  meet 
federal  regulations.  PREREQ:  EDA  104. 
380  Life  Transitions  With  Individuals  With 
Disabilities  (3)  This  course  is  a  study  of  hfe-span 
issues  for  individuals  with  disabilities.  It  stresses 
curriculum  content  and  instructional  strategies  that 
are  sensitive  to  human  diversity  and  promote  career 
development  and  transition.  PREREQ^  EDA  104. 
♦  410  Independent  Study  (1-3)  Special  topics  or 
projects  initiated  by  the  student  that  will  enable 
her  or  him  to  do  extensive  and  intensive  study  in 
an  area  of  special  education.  PREREQi 
Permission  of  chairperson. 

416  Student  Teaching  (6)  Participation  in  teaching 
and  all  other  activities  in  the  student  teaching  role 
related  to  the  teacher's  work.  PREREQi  Formal 
admission  to  teacher  education  and  Pennsylvania- 
mandated  GPA,  90  semester  hours  including  all  pro- 
fessional education  courses,  and  all  specialized  prepa- 
ration courses  with  standards  as  shown  above  (*). 

417  Student  Teaching  (6)  See  EDA  416  for 
description  and  requirements. 


I  Diverse  communities  course 
♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Economics  and  Finance 

309A  Anderson  Hall 

610-436-2217 

Cynthia  Benzing,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Benzing,  DeMoss,  T.  Naggar 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Bove,  Mohan 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Andrews,  Buchenroth, 

DurJeavy,  Schini,  Tolin 
The  primary  objective  of  the  Department  of  Economics  and  Finance 
is  to  provide  a  learning  experience  that  wiU  permit  each  student  to 
achieve  maximum  intellectual  development  in  his  or  her  chosen  area 
of  study  and  to  prepare  for  a  satisfying  career  in  that  field. 
As  an  aid  to  the  achievement  of  this  purpose,  the  Department  of 
Economics  and  Finance  strives: 

1.  To  assist  students  in  acquiring  a  fiindamental  knowledge  and 
understanding  of  the  framework  within  which  our  business  and 
industrial  system  operates; 

2.  To  acquaint  students  with  the  modern  techniques  used  by  business 
and  industry  that  enables  them  to  deal  effectively  with  the  chang- 
ing environment;  and 

3.  To  encourage  smdents  in  developing  the  ablliry  to  analyze  situa- 
tions, to  relate  and  classify  pertinent  factors,  and  to  derive  alterna- 
tives for  solving  problems. 

The  Department  of  Economics  and  Finance  coordinates  its  courses 
with  the  departments  of  Accounring,  Management,  and  Marketing. 
Majors  in  the  department  must  consult  the  departmental  handbook 
and  their  adviser  annually  for  current  requirements. 
Two  degree  programs  are  offered: 

1.  The  B.S.  in  ECONOMICS  focuses  on  a  business  orientation  of 
economic  analysis. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  FINANCE  focuses  on  investment,  internarional 
finance,  and  financial  markets. 


All  freshmen  and  those  transfer  students  who  have  not  completed 
the  required  courses  will  be  admitted  to  the  pre-business  program. 
BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— ECONOMICS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
(includes  COM  101  or  208  or  216  or  230, 

CSC  110  or  115  or  141,  MAT  105*  or  107* 

or  110*,  PHI  101  or  150  or  180,  and  nine  credits 

of  free  electives) 

2.  Business  Core  39  semester  hours 
ACC  20r,  202*;  BLA  201*;  ECO  111*,  112*, 

251*,  252*;  FIN  325*;  MAT  108;  MOT  200*, 
341*,  499*;  and  MKT  325* 

3.  Major  Concentradon  Courses  27  semester  hours 
ECO  335*,  340*,  348*,  400*,  and  ECO  409*  or 

FIN  375*;  and  two  electives  in  economics 

300  level  or  above*,  ECO  337*  or  338*  or 

PSC  318*,  and  ENG  368* 

Business  Electives 

300-level  or  above  courses  in  ACC,  BLA, 

ECO,  FIN,  INB,  MGT,  MIS,  MKT; 

GEO  325,  425;  or  PSC  318 

Restricted  Electives 

Three  semester  hours  or  any  100-level  or  above 

nonbusiness  course. 
A  minimum  of  15  credits  in  300-400  level  ECO  courses  and  a  minimum 
of  30  credits  in  business  courses  must  be  completed  at  WCU. 
Only  students  accepted  into  the  accounting,  economics,  finance,  man- 
agement, and  marketing  majors  or  minors  may  register  for  300-level 
business  classes. 


4. 


5. 


3  semester  hours 


3  semeter  hours 


*A  minimum  grade  of  C  must  be  attained  in  these  courses. 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Economics 


36  semester  hours 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— FINANCE 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
(includes  COM  101  or  208  or  216  or  230, 

CSC  110  or  115  or  141,  ECO  111*, 
MAT  105'  or  107*  or  110*,  PHI  101  or 
150  or  180,  and  nine  credits  of  free  electives) 

2.  Business  Core 
ACC  201*,  202*;  BLA  201';  ECO  112*, 

251*,  and  252*;  FIN  325*;  MAT  108;  MOT  200*, 
341,  499*;  and  MKT  325* 

3.  Major  Concentration  Courses  24  semester  hours 
HN  326*,  337*,  344*,  372*,  375*;  mo 

electives  in  finance  or  accounting  300-level 
or  above*;  and  ENG  368* 

4.  Business  Electives  9  semester  hours 
300-level  or  above  courses  in  ACC,  BLA,  ECO, 

INB,  MGT,  MIS,  MKT;  GEO  325,  425;  or 
PSC  318 

5.  Restricted  Electives  3  semester  hours 
Three  semester  hours  of  any  100-level  or  above 

nonbusiness  course 
A  minimum  of  15  credits  in  300-400  level  FIN  courses  and  a  minimum  of 
30  credits  in  business  courses  must  be  completed  at  WCU. 
Onlv  students  accepted  into  the  accounting,  economics,  finance,  man- 
agement, and  marketing  majors  or  minors  ma)'  register  for  300-level 
business  classes. 

Minor  in  Economics  27  semester  hours 

To  be  admitted  into  the  minor  in  economics,  students  must  ha\-e  an 
overall  GPA  of  2.5  and  ha\e  completed  the  following  classes  wth  a  C 


orbetter:^L\Tl05or  107or  110,  andECO  111,  112,  and  251. 
Once  admitted  to  the  minor,  students  must  maintain  an  overall  GPA 
of  2.5  to  continue  in  the  minor. 

Course  requirements  are  ^L\T  108,  ECO  340'  and  348*,  and  two 
economics  electives  at  the  300  level.  Only  business  majors  and  stu- 
dents who  have  been  accepted  into  the  minor  may  register  for  300- 
level  economics  classes. 

Minor  in  Finance  30  semester  hours 

To  be  admitted  into  the  minor  in  finance,  students  must  have  an 
overall  GPA  of  2.5  and  have  completed  the  follo\ving  classes  vsith  a  C 
or  better:  M\l  105  or  107  or  110,  and  ECO  111,  112,  and  251 
Once  admitted  to  the  minor,  students  must  maintain  an  overall  GPA 
of  2.5  to  continue  in  the  minor. 

Course  requirements  are  ACC  201*,  AL\T  108,  and  HN  325*,  344*, 
and  372*.  Only  business  majors  and  smdents  who  have  been  accepted 
into  the  minor  may  register  for  300-level  fmance  classes. 

Prebusiness  Status 

AU  prebusiness  students  (internal  and  external  transfers)  may  apply  for 
the  major  or  minor  after  completion  of  45  credits  with  a  minimum 
overall  GPA  of  2.50.  In  addition,  thev  must  have  completed  the  fol- 
lowing courses  with  a  C  or  better:  ACC  201;  ECO  111,  112,  251; 
NL\T  105  (or  higher);  and  MGT  200;  as  well  as  a  passing  grade  in 
^L■VT  108.  To  progress  in  the  finance  or  economics  major  program, 
students  must  maintain  a  2.50  overall  GPA.  To  graduate,  students 
must  have  a  2.50  overall  GPA  and  a  2.50  GPA  in  their  major  course 
work  (as  defined  by  each  program). 


'A  minimum  grade  of  C  must  be  attained  in  these  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ECONOMICS 

S>-mbol:  ECO 

101  Principles  of  Economics — Survey  (3)  Basic 

principles  underhing  production  and  consumption 
acn\'ities  in  our  modified,  capitalistic  economic 
system,  from  the  aggregate  as  well  as  indiWdual 
and  sectoral  standpoints.  Issues  include  competi- 
tion, unemplojTiient,  inflation,  economic  growth, 
and  alternative  svstems. 

111  Principles  of  Economics  I  (Macro)  (3) 
National  income  and  its  measurement.  The  deter- 
mination of  price  levels,  output,  and  emploiiTnent. 
Money  and  credit,  evpenditures,  and  economic 
stability.  Government  fiscal  and  monetar)'  policy. 
PREREQ;  Working  knowledge  of  high  school 
mathematics  is  required. 

112  Principles  of  Economics  II  (Micro)  (3) 
Principles  undcrh-ing  use  and  allocation  of  scarce 
productive  resources.  Consumption  and  produc- 
tion acti\ities.  Value,  price,  and  income  distribu- 
tion. Considerations  of  economic  efficiency'  and 
welfare.  PREREQ^  Working  knowledge  of  high 
school  mathematics. 

251  Quantitative  Business  Analysis  I  (3)  Teaches 
swdents  to  analra  data  and  solve  problems  using 
descriptive  statistics  and  probabilitii'  theorj'.  Discrete 
and  continuous  probability'  distributions,  and  sam- 
pling distributions.  Stresses  practical  business  appli- 
cations of  statistical  theon.-  as  well  as  obtaining  and 
interpreting  descriptive  statistics  using  Excel  and 
Minitab.  Use  of  a  spreadsheet  program  (such  as 
Excel)  necessarv'  to  manipulate  data  and  formulas. 
PRERE(i.\L4T  105  or  107  or  110,  and  ECO  111 
and  112. 

252  Quantitative  Business  Analysis  II  (3)  Teaches 
students  how  to  develop  testable  h\'potheses  and  use 
them  to  anal\"ze  data  and  answer  questions.  Co\'ers 
confidence  inten'als,  analras  ot  \'ariance,  simple 


r^ression,  multiple  regression,  and  correlation. 
Stresses  practical  business  \'ariance  using  Excel  and 
another  statistical  package  and  interpret  the  results. 
Use  of  a  spreadsheet  program  (such  as  Excel)  neces- 
sai)'  to  manipulate  data  and  formulas.  PREREQ^ 
MAT  105  or  107  or  110;  and  ECO  111,  112;  and 
ECO  251  or  MAT  121. 

334  Labor  Economics  (3)  Application  of  eco- 
nomic theory-  to  the  operation  of  labor  markets 
and  the  collective  bargaining  process.  Considera- 
tion is  given  to  the  development  of  the  labor 
movement  and  public  policv  toward  labor  and 
emplo>-ment.  PREREQ:  ECO  111  and  112. 

335  Money  and  Banking  (3)  A  survey  of  money, 
credit,  and  prices,  emphasizing  their  effects  on 
economic  stabilit)'.  The  Federal  Reserve  S\"stem 
and  its  effect  on  credit  control.  PREREQ^  ECO 
111  and  112. 

336  Regulation  of  Competition  (3)  Background  and 
de\'elopment  of  public  policies  that  directly  modify 
the  free  enterprise  economy  ot  the  United  States. 
E\'aluation  of  policies  that  change  the  nature  and 
extent  of  competition.  PREREQ^  ECO  111  and  112. 

337  Economic  Growth  and  Development  (3)  A 
survev  and  critical  evaluation  ot  alternative  theories 
of  capitalist  economic  development.  Analv-sis  and 
comparison  of  alternative  public  policies  applicable 
to  underdeveloped  countries  and  regions.  PRE- 
REQ: ECO  111  and  112. 

338  International  Economics  (3)  A  descriptive, 
analnical  e.xammation  of  International  trade, 
finance,  and  other  economic  relationships.  The 
effects  of  public  policies  on  these  relationships. 
PREREQiECO  111  and  112. 

340  Intermediate  Microeconomics  (3)  A  continu- 
ation and  extension  of  the  price-sj'stem  anal)-sis  in 
ECO  112.  Emphasis  on  the  need  for  efficienc)'  in 
the  economv's  use  of  scarce  productive  resources. 
PREREQ^  ECO  111  and  112,  and  ^L\T  108. 


341  Public  Finance  (3)  Government's  influence  on 
stabilitv'  of  national  income.  Nature  of  taxes  and 
expenditures  at  the  v'arious  levels  of  government  and 
their  effect  on  the  allocation  of  resources  and  the  dis- 
tribution of  income.  PREREQ.  ECO  111  and  112. 
343  Comparative  Economic  Systems  (3)  Basic 
ideas  and  economic  institutions  of  socialism,  com- 
munism, and  capitalism  in  the  20th  centur)-.  Prob- 
lems created  bv  the  emergence  of  competing  sw- 
tems.  PREREQ:  ECO  111  and  112. 
#  3-t4  American  Economic  E.\perience  (3)  This 
course  examines  the  U.S.  economy  from  the  Ci\Tl 
War  to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  economic  theo- 
r\'  and  analras.  The  sociological  ramifications  of  eco- 
nomic conditions  will  be  examined  through  the  litera- 
ture of  the  era.  PREREQ^ECO  101  or  111  or  112. 
345  Histort'  of  Economic  Thou^t  (3)  Origins  of 
economic  thought  and  comparison  of  the  major 
schook  of  economic  doctrine.  Current  economic  and 
sodo-poUtical  factors.  PREREQ^ECO  111  and  112. 

347  Managerial  Economics  (3)  A  course  that  seeks 
to  develop  managerial  judgment.  The  premise  is  that 
technical  application,  to  be  successful,  must  proceed 
from  economic  feasibilitii-.  One  plan  is  weighed 
against  another  in  terms  of  comparative  costs  and 
rev'enues,  return  on  investment,  plant-replacement 
problems,  obsolescence,  and  depredation.  PRE- 
REQ: .A.CC  202,  ECO  111.  112.  and  252. 

348  Intermediate  Macroeconomics  (3)  Introduc- 
tion to  the  theor\'  ot  income,  employment,  and 
growth.  Prov'ides  the  analvric  tools  necessar)'  for 
dealing  with  aggregate  economic  problems.  PRE- 
REQ; ECO  111  and  112,  and  MAT  108. 

350  Urban  Economics  (3)  Economic  aspects  of 
such  urban  problems  as  poverri',  housing,  taxation, 
income  distribution,  and  discrimination.  Analj-sis  of 
economic  aspects  of  various  proposed  remedies, 


#   Appro\'ed  Lnterdisciplinan*  course 


ij^l      Educational  Development 


Office  of  the  Associate  Provost 


including  urban  renewal,  tamilv  allowances,  cooper- 
atives, and  others.  PREREQ:  ECO  111  and  112. 
385  Environmental  and  Resource  Economics  (3) 
The  role  of  the  environment  in  an  economic  system. 
Topics  include  energy  economics,  the  economics  of 
renewable  and  nonrenewable  resources,  and  the  eco- 
nomics of  pollution.  PREREQiECO  111  and  112. 

400  Research  Methods  for  Business  and 
Economics  (3)  Provides  the  skills  and  tools 
required  in  business  and  economic  research.  Covers 
research  ethics,  hypothesis  development,  sampling 
methodology,  experimental  design,  survey  method- 
ology, data  collection,  multivariate  analysis,  and 
regression.  Research  project  required.  PREREQ: 
ECO  252,  and  MAT  108  or  161. 

401  Introduction  to  Econometrics  (3)  Statistical  and 
mathcniatic.J  techniques  applied  to  economic  situa- 
tions. Use  of  empirical  data  in  economic  analysis. 
PREREQi  ECO  111,  112,  and  252,  and  MAT  108. 

409  Senior  Seminar  (3)  Students  are  expected  to 
prepare  a  research  paper  that  describes  and  ana- 
lyzes a  current  topic  in  economics.  PREREQ^ 
Senior  standing,  ECO  252,  340,  and  348. 

410  Independent  Studies  in  Economics  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
economics.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ^ 
Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  411-412  Internship  (3  or  6)  The  internship  is 
open  to  majors  in  economics  only.  It  is  intended  to 
enhance  the  student's  educational  experience  by 
providing  substantive,  professional  work  experience. 
PREREQi  Permission  of  department  chairperson. 

FINANCE 

Symbol:  FIN 

200  Personal  Finance  (3)  This  course  addresses 
all  of  the  major  personal  financial  planning  prob- 
lems that  individuals  and  fimilies  encounter.  It 
presents  a  model  of  the  major  elements  of  effective 
money  management.  All  of  the  latest  financial 
planning  tools  and  techniques  are  discussed. 
325  Corporate  Finance  (3)  Fundamental  financial 
management  course  introduces  students  to  essen- 
tial financial  concepts,  including  the  analysis  of 
financial  statements,  time  value  of  money,  stock 
and  bond  valuation,  risk  and  return,  capital  bud- 


geting, and  cost  of  capital.  PREREQ^  ACC  201; 
ECO  111  and  112;  ECO  251  or  MAT  121;  and 
MAT  108  or  161. 
326  Intermediate  Financial  Management  (3) 

Emphasizes  the  theoretical  understanding  and 
practical  application  of  concepts  introduced  in 
FIN  325.  Students  perform  a  fmancial  analysis  of 
one  or  more  companies  including  current  trends  in 
the  economy  and  industry,  as  well  as  ratio, 
DuPont,  and  operating  capital  analyses.  Use  of 
spreadsheet  analysis  to  value  stocks  and  bonds; 
determine  the  cost  of  capital,  NPV,  and  IRR;  and 
calculate  beta.  PREREQi  FIN  325,  and  MAT 
108  or  161. 

330  Principles  of  Insurance  (3)  Designed  to  give  stu- 
dents a  sound  foundation  for  persona]  risk  manage- 
ment ;Jong  with  a  basic  understanding  of  the  insur- 
ance industry.  Covers  insurance  pricing,  industt}'  regu- 
lation, risk  management,  and  contract  law;  homeown- 
er's, personal  auto,  life,  and  health  insurance;  and 
retirement  products.  A  paper  is  required.  PREREQ; 
nN  325. 

332  Real  Estate  Finance  (3)  Covers  different 
types  of  real  estate,  forms  of  ownership,  real  prop- 
erty rights,  and  land  use  policies;  how  to  perform  a 
feasibilit)'  analysis  and  value  real  estate  using  the 
income  capitalization,  sales  comparison,  and  cost 
approaches;  various  types  of  residential  mortgages; 
and  how  to  finance  a  commercial  property  pur- 
chase. How  to  lease,  buy,  sell,  and  mortgage  a 
propert}',  anal\'ze  the  market,  examine  risk  factors, 
and  determine  the  best  financing  technique.  PRE- 
REQ: FIN  325. 

337  Financial  Markets  and  Institutions  (3) 
Covers  a  variety  of  domestic  and  international 
fmancial  markets  and  institutions,  including  the 
mutual  fiind  industry,  banking  institutions,  insur- 
ance companies,  savings  institutions,  credit  unions, 
and  pension  funds,  as  well  as  their  regulation, 
operation,  and  management.  Reviews  macroeco- 
nomic  principles  and  monev  and  banking  theory. 
Written  and  oral  presentation  of  a  fmancial  insti- 
tution required.  PREREQ:  RN  325. 
344  Investments  (3)  Covers  key  concepts  in  the 
investment  process  with  an  introduction  to  stocks, 
bonds,  options,  and  fiitures.  Discusses  valuation  of 


fmancial  assets,  market  efficiency,  interest  rates, 
risk  management,  and  asset  allocation.  Financial 
analysis  required  that  emphasizes  economic  and 
industrj-  forecasts  and  trends.  PREREQ;  FIN  325. 
350  Investment  Analysis  and  Portfolio 
Management  (3)  Emphasizes  portfolio  construc- 
tion and  importance  of  diversity  and  asset  alloca- 
tion rather  than  security  selection.  How  to  set 
portfolio  objectives,  develop  investment  policy, 
construct  a  portfolio,  and  manage  it.  Importance  of 
using  options  and  fiitures,  periodic  review  and 
portfolio  revision,  benchmarking,  and  duration 
analysis.  Interview  a  client,  develop  an  investment 
portfoho  based  on  needs  assessment,  and  present 
the  results.  PREPJ;Q;  FIN  344. 
370  Problems  in  Financial  Management  (3)  Case 
problems  in  corporate  financial  management. 
Includes  cases  on  managing  current  assets,  obtain- 
ing short-term  loans,  raising  long-term  capital, 
budgeting  capital,  and  handling  divided  policy. 
PREREQ:  FIN  326. 

372  International  Pmance  (3)  Introduces  global 
financial  markets  and  financial  risk  management. 
Covers  foreign  exchange  markets,  money  markets, 
bond  markets,  and  equity  markets,  of  which  each 
market  is  developed  to  consider  the  needs  of  a  multi- 
national corporation,  thus  providing  a  meaningfiil 
integrarion  of  international  markets  and  institutions. 
PREREQ,  nN  325. 

375  Contemporary  Issues  in  Finance  (3) 
Students  will  think,  speak,  and  write  about  com- 
plex financial  and  economic  issues,  including 
ethics,  efficient  markets,  data  analysis  and  fore- 
casting, globahzation,  behavioral  finance,  and 
portfoho  analysis.  Thesis,  PowerPoint  presenta- 
tion, and  portfoho  analysis  required.  Senior 
finance  majors  only.  PREREQ:  FIN  326,  344, 
and  337. 

410  Special  Topics  in  Finance  (3)  Pro\'ides  in- 
depth  coverage  of  a  major  current  topic  in  finance. 
The  topic  will  change  each  semester.  Topics  to  be 
covered  include  capital  budgeting,  valuation, 
financial  derivatives,  and  financial  modeUng. 
PREREQ:  FIN  325. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Educational  Development 

132  Lawrence  Center 

610-436-3505 

Herbert  Lee,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Dinniman,  Egan,  K)'per 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Casciato,  Corbett,  Giangiulio, 

Jenkins,  Lee,  Patwell 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  AUen,  Grice,  Hill 
INSTRUCTOR:  Guy 

The  Department  of  Educational  Development  is  a  cadre  of  University 
facult)'  who  have  specific  and  specialized  administrative  and/or  teach- 
ing assignments  at  the  University.  While  much  of  the  assigned 
rcsponsibilit)'  is  to  facilitate  students'  out-of-class  learning  and  devel- 


opment, regular  and  nonclassroom  teaching  are  still  included.  Areas 
within  the  Department  of  Educational  Development  include  pre- 
major  academic  advising,  career  advising,  academic  administration, 
tutoring,  services  for  students  with  disabilities,  and  other  articulated 
teaching  and/or  administrative  assignments. 
The  department  administers  the  following  credit-bearing  course: 
WCJ  100  Introduction  to  American  Culture  (3)  This  course  is 
designed  for  the  orientation  of  international  students  and  new  resi- 
dents to  life  and  study  in  the  United  States.  A  study  of  American 
higher  education,  personal  values,  attitudes,  and  cultural  patterns,  the 
emphasis  is  on  the  diversity  of  peoples  and  lifestyles.  This  course  is 
not  open  to  U.S.  citizens  for  graduation  credits. 


Office  ot  the  Associate  Provost 


Educational  Services:  Air  Force  ROTC 


Military  Science  (Army  ROTC) 

West  Chester  University  students  are  eligible  to  participate  in  the  Army 
Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps  (ROTC)  Program  through  a  formal 
cross-enrollment  agreement  with  the  Widener  University  Department  of 
Military  Science.  Army  ROTC  offers  Univesity  smdents  the  opportunity 
to  graduate  with  a  college  degree  and  a  commission  in  the  United  States 
army,  Army  National  Guard,  or  United  States  Army  Reserve.  All  Army 
ROTC  classes  are  conducted  on  the  Widener  campus. 
The  Army  ROTC  Program  consists  of  a  basic  course  taken  during  the 
freshman  and  sophomore  years,  and  an  advanced  course  taken  during 
junior  and  senior  years.  Successfiol  completion  of  the  basic  course  is 
required  before  placement  in  the  advanced  course.  Students  who  partici- 
pated in  Junior  ROTC  in  high  school  or  who  have  prior  military  service 
may  receive  placement  in  the  advanced  courses,  which  is  determined  by 
the  army  professor  of  military  science.  The  basic  course  requirement  also 
may  be  satisfied  through  attendance  at  a  five-week  Army  ROTC  Basic 
Camp  at  the  end  of  the  sophomore  year.  Students  enrolled  in  the 
advanced  course  receive  a  stipend  of  $350  for  juniors  and  $400  for 
seniors  per  month.  Guaranteed  National  Guard  and  Reserve  Forces 
options  also  are  available. 

Nursing  students  who  complete  the  four-year  or  two-year  program, 
obtain  their  nursing  degree,  and  pass  their  Nursing  Board 
Examinations  are  commissioned  into  the  Army  Nurse  Corps.  Two- 
year  (limited)  and  three-year  Army  ROTC  scholarships  are  available 
on  a  competitive  basis.  These  scholarships  pay  100  percent  of  the  stu- 
dent's tuition  up  to  $10,000  and  include  payment  of  certain  University 
fees,  a  book  and  school  supplies  subsidy,  and  a  monthly  stipend  of 


$250  for  freshmen,  $300  for  sophomores,  $350  for  juniors,  and  $400 
for  seniors. 

Application  for  two-  and  three-year  Army  ROTC  scholarships  must 
be  submitted  early  in  the  spring  semester  of  the  freshman  or  sopho- 
more year  (respectively).  AppUcations  for  attendance  at  the  Army 
ROTC  Basic  Camp  must  be  submitted  early  in  the  spring  semester  of 
the  sophomore  year. 

Military  science  students  also  participate  in  orientation  and  field 
training  activities  as  part  of  the  military  science  curriculum.  These 
activities  are  explorations  of  historical,  organizational,  and  fiinctional 
activities  of  the  U.S.  Army,  conducted  in  conjunction  with  the  Army 
Officer  Education  Program,  and  are  recognized  as  a  pan  of  the 
process  for  preparation  of  cadets  for  commissioning. 
Activities  are  conducted  off  campus  through  tours,  field  trips,  laborato- 
ry sessions,  and  practical  field  applications.  Practical  field  appUcation 
activities  include  marksmanship,  land  navigation,  small  units  opera- 
tions, rappelling,  water  survival,  color  guard,  drill  team,  rifle  team, 
organized  athletics,  and  other  military  skills.  Varying  degrees  of  health 
and  body  risk  are  involved  in  these  activities.  The  government  of  the 
United  States,  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania,  West  Chester 
University,  its  officers,  trustees,  employees,  agents,  or  students  assume 
no  liability  for  any  injury  caused  during  the  above  activities. 
For  further  information  on  scholarship  and  career  opportunities,  con- 
tact the  professor  of  military  science,  Widener  University,  Chester, 
PA  19013,  610-499-4097. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MILITARY  SCIENCE 

Symbol:  MSI 

101  Introduction  to  ROTC  I  (1)  This  course  is 
designed  to  teach  self-confidence  through  team 
study  and  activities  in  basic  drill,  physical  fitness, 
rappelling,  leadership  reaction  course,  first  aid, 
making  presentations,  and  basic  marksmanship. 
Includes  fundamental  concepts  of  professional 
leadership  in  both  classroom  and  outdoor  labora- 
tory environments.  One  hour  and  a  required  lead- 
ership lab,  plus  participation  in  three,  one-hour 
sessions  for  physical  fitness.  Participation  in  a 
weekend  exercise  also  is  required. 

102  Introduction  to  Leadership  (1)  Learn/apply 
principles  of  effective  leading.  Reinforce  self-con- 
fidence through  participation  in  physically  and 
mentally  challenging  exercises  with  upper-division 
ROTC  students.  Develop  communication  skills  to 
improve  individual  performance  and  group  inter- 
action. Relate  organizational  ethical  values  to  the 
effectiveness  of  a  leader.  One  hour  and  a  required 
leadership  lab,  plus  participation  in  three,  one- 
hour  sessions  for  physical  fitness.  Participation  in  a 
weekend  exercise  also  is  required. 

201  Self'Team  Development  (2)  Learn/apply 
ethics-based  leadership  skills  that  develop  individual 
abilities  and  contribute  to  effective  team  building. 
Develop  skills  in  oral  presentations,  writing  concise- 
ly, planning  events,  coordinating  group  efforts, 
advanced  first  aid,  land  navigation,  and  basic  mili- 
tary tactics.  Learn  fiindamentals  of  ROTC's 
Leadership  Development  Program.  Two  hours  and 
a  required  leadership  lab,  plus  required  participation 


in  three,  one-hour  sessions  for  physical  fitness. 
Participation  in  a  weekend  exercise  also  is  required. 
202  Individual/Team  Military  Tactics  (2) 
Introduction  to  individual  and  team  aspects  of  mili- 
tary tactics  in  small-unit  operations.  Includes  use  of 
radio  communications,  making  safety  assessments, 
movement  techniques,  planning  for  team  safety/secu- 
rity, and  methods  of  pre-execution  checks.  Practical 
exercises  with  upper-division  ROTC  students.  Learn 
techniques  for  training  others  as  an  aspect  of  contin- 
ued leadership  development.  Two  hours  and  a 
required  leadership  lab,  plus  required  participation  in 
three,  one-hour  sessions  for  physical  fitness. 
Participation  in  a  weekend  exercise  also  is  required. 

301  Leading  Small  Organizations  I  (3)  Series  of 
practical  opportunities  to  lead  small  groups,  receive 
personal  assessments  and  encouragement,  and  lead 
again  in  situations  of  increasing  complexity.  Uses 
small-unit  defensive  tactics  and  opportunities  to 
plan  and  conduct  training  for  lower-division  stu- 
dents to  develop  these  skills  as  vehicles  to  practice 
leading.  Three  hours  and  a  required  leadership  lab, 
plus  required  participation  in  three,  one-hour  ses- 
sions for  physical  fitness.  Participation  in  one  week- 
end exercise  also  is  required,  and  one  or  two  more 
weekend  exercises  may  be  offered  for  participation. 
PRERECi.  Army  ROTC  advanced  course  standing 
or  approval  of  the  professor  of  military  science. 

302  Leading  Small  Organizations  II  (3)  Continues 
methodolog)-  of  JVISl  301.  Analyze  tasks,  prepare 
written  or  oral  guidance  for  team  members  to  accom- 
plish tasks,  delegate  tasks,  and  supervise.  Plan  for  and 
adapt  to  the  unexpected  in  organizations  under 
stress.  Examine  and  apply  lessons  from  leadership 
case  studies  as  well  as  the  importance  ot  ethical  deci- 
sion making  in  setting  a  positive  climate  that 


enhances  team  performance.  Three  hours  and  a 
required  leadership  lab,  plus  required  participation  in 
three,  one-hour  sessions  for  physical  fimess. 
Participation  in  one  weekend  exercise  and  three  other 
one-day  exercises  is  required.  PRER£Q;.MSI  301. 

401  Leadership  Challenges  and  Goal  Setting  (2) 

Plan,  conduct,  and  evaluate  activities  of  the 
ROTC  cadet  organization.  Articulate  goals  and 
put  plans  into  action  to  attain  them.  Assess  orga- 
nizational cohesion  and  develop  strategies  to 
improve  it.  Develop  confidence  in  skills  to  lead 
people  and  manage  resources.  Learn/apply  various 
Army  policies  and  programs  in  this  effort.  Three 
hours  and  a  required  leadership  lab,  plus  required 
participation  in  three,  one-hour  sessions  for  physi- 
cal fitness.  Participation  in  one  weekend  exercise 
also  is  required,  and  one  or  two  more  weekend 
exercises  mav  be  offered  for  optional  participation. 
PREREQ:  MSI  301  and  MSI  302. 

402  Transition  to  Lieutenant  (2)  Continues  the 
methodology  from  MSI  401.  Identify  and  resolve 
ethical  dilemmas.  Refine  counseling  and  motivat- 
ing techniques.  Examine  aspects  of  tradition  and 
law  as  related  to  leading  as  an  officer  in  the  Army. 
Prepare  for  a  fliture  as  a  successful  Army  lieu- 
tenant. Three  hours  and  a  required  leadership  lab, 
plus  required  participation  in  three,  one-hour  ses- 
sions for  physical  fitness.  Participation  in  one 
weekend  exercise  also  is  required,  and  one  or  two 
more  weekend  exercises  may  be  offered  for  option- 
al participation.  PREREQ:  MSI  401. 

Additional  Requirements.  Students  enrolled  in 
the  Army  ROTC  Program  are  required  to  com- 
plete communications,  computer  literacy,  and  mil- 
itary history  courses  prior  to  commissioning. 


Elementan'  Education 


School  of  Education 


Air  Force  ROTC 

West  Chester  University  students  are  eligible  to  participate  in  the  i'Mr 
Force  Reserve  OiEcer  Training  Corps  (AFROTC)  through  an  agreement 
with  Saint  Joseph's  Universit\-.  All  aerospace  studies  courses  wiD  be  held 
on  the  Saint  Joseph's  campus.  Credits  can  be  transferred  to  WCU  and 
appear  on  the  official  transcript.  The  AFROTC  program  enables  a  college 
student  to  earn  a  commission  as  an  Air  Force  officer  while  concurrendy 
satisfVing  requirements  for  his  or  her  baccalaureate  degree. 
The  program  of  aerospace  studies  at  Saint  Joseph's  University  offers 
two-,  three-,  and  four-year  curricula  leading  to  a  commission  as  a  sec- 
ond Ueutenant  in  the  Air  Force.  In  the  tour-year  curriculum,  students 
take  classes  as  part  of  the  General  MiHtary  Corps  (CMC)  during  the 
freshman  and  sophomore  years.  Students  will  also  attend  a  four-week 
summer  training  program  following  the  spring  semester  of  the  sopho- 
more year.  Upon  their  remrn,  smdents  then  progress  to  the  remaining 
two-year  curricula,  taking  courses  corresponding  to  the  Professional 
Officer  Corps  (POC)  during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  Students 
who  enter  as  sophomores  are  part  of  the  three-year  curriculum  and 
take  the  second  half  of  GMC  courses.  They  attend  a  six-week  sum- 
mer training  program.  Those  who  begin  the  program  as  juniors  enroll 
in  the  two-year  POC  curriculum  and  attend  a  sbc-week  summer  train- 
ing program  following  the  spring  semester  of  the  junior  year.  Students 
are  under  no  contracmal  obUgation  to  the  Air  Force  until  they  accept 
an  Air  Force  scholarship  or  enter  the  POC. 


The  subject  matter  of  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years  is  developed 
from  a  historical  perspective  and  focuses  on  the  scope,  structure,  and 
histor)-  of  military  power  with  an  emphasis  on  the  development  of  air 
power.  During  the  junior  and  senior  years,  the  curriculum  concentrates 
on  the  concepts  and  practices  of  leadership  and  management,  and  the 
role  of  national  security  forces  in  contemporary  American  society. 
In  addition  to  the  academic  portion  of  the  curricula,  students  partici- 
pate in  a  two-hour  leadership  laboratory  (LLAB)  each  week.  During 
this  period,  the  day-to-day  skills  and  working  environment  of  the  Air 
Force  are  discussed,  explained,  and  simulated.  The  leadership  lab  is 
structured  to  allow  students  to  practice  leadership  and  management 
techniques  through  various  methods. 

Air  Force  ROTC  offers  two-,  three-,  and  four-year  scholarships  on  a 
competitive  basis  to  qualified  applicants.  All  scholarships  cover  tuition, 
application  fees,  lab  fees,  and  $45O-S510  per  year  for  te.xtbooks,  as  well 
as  provide  a  $250,  S300,  S350,  or  S400  tax-free  monthly  stipend. 
For  fiirther  information  on  the  program,  scholarships,  and  career 
opportunities,  contact  the  professor  of  aerospace  studies,  AFROTC 
Det  750,  Saint  Joseph's  University,  5600  City  Avenue,  Philadelphia, 
PA  19131-1399,  610-660-3190/3191.  Information  also  is  available  on 
the  Det  750  web  site  at  http://www.sju.edu/admin/afrotc. 


COURSES  FOR  AFROTC 

Symbol:  AER,  AEL 


AER  100  The  Foundations  of  the  United  States 
Air  Force  (1) 

AER  200  The  Evolution  of  USAF  Aerospace 
Power  (1) 


AER  300  Air  Force  Leadership  Studies  (3) 
AER  400  National  Security  Affairs  (3) 
AEL  200  Leadership  Laboratory  (Pass/Fail) 


Department  of  Elementary  Education 

106B  Recitation  Hall 

610-436-2944 

Martha  Drobnak,  Chairperson 

Linda  Baloche,  Assistant  Chairperson 

Frances  A.  Slostad,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Baloche,  Brown,  Maxim,  Radich 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Bollin,  Cai,  Drobnak,  Slostad 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Corrody,  Hoyle,  Sanderson, 

Winterton 
The  Department  of  Elementary  Education  offers  programs  leading  to 
certification  by  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania  for  elementary 
education  teachers  (K-6). 

The  B.S.  Ed.  in  ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION  curriculum  is 
designed  to  provide  a  broad  background  of  general  education,  an 
understanding  of  children,  and  the  knowledge  and  skills  needed  to 
teach  all  aspects  of  the  elementar)'  school  program.  Upon  satisfactory 
completion  of  the  approved  program,  the  smdent  will  qualify  for  a 
Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Certificate,  valid  for  sbt  years  of  teaching 
in  kindergarten  and  grades  one  through  six. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  — 
ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 
(Curriculum  K-6) 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Includes  GEO  101,  LIT  395,  MAT  101, 

SCI  101,  SCI  102,  and  American  history 

2.  Professional  Education  12  semester  hours 
EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250,  and  351  + 

3.  Specialized  Preparation  57  semester  hours 
EDE  200,  251+,  332+',  352+*,  401+',  406+*, 


410+*,  and  411+*;  EDR/EDE  302+*,  311+*,  312+*; 
EDA/EDE/ECE  230+,  HEA  301*;  MAT  102+ 
and  351++*;  MUE  231;  and  SCE  310+* 


4.   Elective  Area 


3  semester  hours 


Application  and  Approval  for  Student  Teaching 

Students  are  eligible  to  student  teach  if  they  have  (a)  achieved  fiill-admis- 
sion  stams  to  teacher  education,  (b)  met  the  professional  preparation 
requirements  (exception:  EDE  406  may  be  taken  concurrend}'  with  sm- 
dent teaching),  (c)  earned  at  least  90  credits  prior  to  the  student  teaching 
semester,  and  (d)  maintained  the  Pennsylvania-mandated  GPA  of  2.80. 
(See  "Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in  the  "Teaching 
Certification  Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.)  Student  teaching  is  typi- 
cally scheduled  for  a  smdent's  final  semester  at  the  University. 
Students  must  file  an  application  through  the  Department  of 
Elementary  Education  for  smdent  teaching;  apphcation  for  smdent 
teaching  must  be  made  one  semester  prior  to  smdent  teaching  through 
the  Teacher  Education  Center,  Francis  Harvey  Green  Library-  251. 
Following  application,  students  register  for  student  teaching  (EDE  410 
and  411)  as  the\-  would  for  other  Universit}'  courses. 

Field  Placement  in  Schools 

AH  field  placements  for  EDE  courses,  including  smdent  teaching,  are 
arranged  in  conjunction  with  the  Department  of  Elementan' 
Education.  Students  are  not  to  solicit  placements.  While  smdent 
needs  are  considered  in  assigning  placements,  no  particular  placement 
can  be  guaranteed.  Transportation  to  and  from  field  placements  is  the 
responsibiht}'  of  the  individual  smdent.  Students  must  have  their 


+   Courses  requiring  prerequisites  -  check  catalog  course  descriptions  below. 
++  Prerequisites  are  MAT  101  and  MAT  102  (unless  waived  by  examination). 
*    Advanced  program  courses  that  require  formal  admission  to  teacher 
certification  to  enroll. 


School  of  Education 


Elementan-  Education 


criminal,  child  abuse,  and  TB  clearance  bv  the  first  day  of  class  for 
EDE  200,  EDR  312,  and  EDE  410/411.' 

West  Chester  University-  does  not  place  students  at  religiously  affiliat- 
ed schools  when  pubUc  school  placements  are  available  and  when  that 
placement  results  in  the  students'  recei\ing  academic  credit. 

Admission  and  Progression  Requirements  in  Elementary 
Education  B.S.  Ed.  Program 

Students  must  meet  Uni\'ersit)'  admission  requirements.  AH  students 
who  enter  the  Universit}'  as  elementar}-  education  majors  are  designated 
as  probationary  teacher  education  students  until  they  achieve  formal  admis- 
sion to  teacher  education.  All  students  seeking  a  bachelor  of  science  in 
education  in  elementan-  education  must  formally  apph'  for  admission  to 
teacher  education.  (See  "Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in 
the  "Teaching  Certification  Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.) 
Only  students  formallv  admitted  to  teacher  education  vnH  be  eligible 
to  take  advanced  professional  education  course  work.  For  elementary 
education  majors,  the  advanced  professional  course  work  includes 
300-  and  400-level  EDE  courses  and  EDE/EDR  312  plus  HEA  301, 
MAT  351,  and  SCE  310.  Students  formally  admitted  to  teacher  edu- 
cation must  maintain  the  required  minimum  GPA  in  order  to  contin- 
ue taking  advanced  professional  course  work.  If  a  student  falls  below 
the  required  minimum  GPA,  he  or  she  will  be  permitted  to  retake  - 
in  accordance  with  Universirv  polic\'  -  professional  course  work  that 
contributed  to  the  fall  below  the  minimum  GPA  but  will  not  be  per- 
mitted to  take  additional  work  until  the  minimum  is  met. 
REQUIREMENTS  FOR  TR.\iNSFER  TO  THE  MAJOR  IN  ELE- 
MENTARY EDUCATION.  Students  may  apph-  for  "external  trans- 
fer" (see  below)  when  transferring  from  another  post-secondan'  institu- 
tion. Students  •alread\-  admitted  to  West  Chester  Universit)'  as  prema- 
jors  or  in  another  major  may  apply  for  "internal  transfer"  (see  below). 
Students  seeking  e.\ternal  or  internal  transfer  must  have  earned  a  min- 
imum of  27  college-level  credits.  Students  with  27-47  credits  must 
also  have  a  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of  2.65.  the  required  mini- 
mum cumulative  GPA  for  students  with  48-59  earned  credits  is  2.80. 
Students  with  60  or  more  earned  credits  must  have  minimum  cumula- 
tive GPA  of  2.80;  have  achieved  the  following  passing  scores  (in 
parentheses)  as  established  by  the  Penns)h'ania  Department  ot 
Eduation  on  Praxis  I  PPST  examinations  in  Reading  (172),  Writing 
(173),  and  Mathematics  (173);  and  completed  college-level  studies  in 


English  composition  (three  credits),  hterature  taught  in  English  (three 
credits),  and  mathematics  (six  credits).  If  admission  availabiliri-  is  lim- 
ited, applicants  \vill  be  ranked  bv  cumulative  GPA,  and  selection  will 
be  based  on  these  rankings. 

E.x-temal  or  internal  transfer  to  the  major  in  elementary  education 
does  not  confer  formal  admission  to  teacher  education.  (See  "Formal 
Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in  the  "Teaching  Certification 
Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.) 

EXTERNAL  TR.ANSFER  STUDENTS.  Transfer  credit  for  fresh- 
man- and  sophomore-level  courses  will  be  granted  in  accordance  with 
LTniversit^•  poUcy.  Professional  and  specialized  preparation  courses  wiU 
be  evaluated  and  approved  on  an  individual  basis.  Application  for  the 
major  is  made  through  the  Office  of  Admissions.  (See  "Formal 
Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in  the  "Teaching  Certification 
Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.) 

INTERNAL  TRANSFER  STUDENTS.  AppUcarion  is  made  directiy 
to  the  Department  of  Elementan-  Education.  The  department  admits 
internal  transfer  students  twice  a  vear  -  for  two  weeks  early  in  the  fall  term 
and  again  for  two  weeks  earlv  in  the  spring  term.  Call  the  department  for 
dates  and  details.  (See  "Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education"  in  the 
"Teaching  Certification  Programs"  section  of  this  catalog.) 
Minor  in  Elementary  Education  18  semester  hours 

Required  Courses 

EDE  251,  40U,  406-f,  EDR/EDE  302+, 

31 1+;  and  one  EDE  elective  approved  by 

the  department 

Admission  to  the  Minor  in  Elementary  Education 

Students  seeking  a  minor  in  elementar)-  education  must  have  complet- 
ed 27  credits  and  must  have  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA  required 
for  their  earned  credits:  2.65  for  students  with  27-47  credits  and  2.80 
for  students  with  48  or  more  credits.  Students  admitted  to  the  minor 
must  maintain  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA  required  of  them  at 
admission  to  the  minor  in  order  to  continue.  Students  who  tall  below 
the  minimum  cumulative  GPA  required  are  permitted  to  retake,  in 
accordance  with  Universin'  poUc\-,  course  work  in  the  minor  that  con- 
tributed to  their  fall  below  the  required  minimum  cumulative  GPA. 
Such  students  will  not  be  permitted  to  take  additional  course  work  in 
the  minor  until  thev  achieve  the  required  minimum  cumulative  GPA. 


+   Courses  requiring  prerequisites  -  check  catalog  course  descriptions  below. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ELEMENTARY  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  EDE 

**  200  Theory  and  Field  Experiences  in 
Elementaiy  Education  (3)  Orientation  to  the  cur- 
ricula, processes,  and  structures  ot  elementan-  educa- 
tion todav.  Field  experiences  related  to  course  topics. 
t  ▲  230  Inclusive  Classroom  (3)  The  purpose  of 
this  course  is  to  prepare  preser\'ice  early  childhood, 
elementary-,  and  special  education  students  to  teach 
students  with  disabilities  etfectively  in  general  edu- 
cation settings.  The  course  will  be  co-taught  by  spe- 
cial education,  early  childhood  education,  and  ele- 
mentan- education  faculty-.  PREREQi  EDE  200. 
**251  Child  Development  and  Behavior  (3) 
Emotional,  social,  mental,  moral,  physical,  and  self 
factors  shaping  human  beharior  with  emphasis  on 
child  and  early  adolescent  development.  Specific 
application  to  classroom  settings. 

253  Human  Development  and  Behav-ior  (3) 
Ph)-sical,  mental,  emotional,  social,  moral,  and  self 
factors  shaping  human  behav-ior  throughout  the 
life  cycle;  specific  application  to  work  with  indi- 
v-iduals  and  groups  in  educational  settings.  PRE- 
REQ:  PSY  100. 

254  Development  in  the  Middle  School  Child 
(3)  Characteristic  development  and  behavior  of 


children  between  10  and  15  years  of  age;  under- 
standing and  working  \\-ith  these  children  in  edu- 
cational senings.  PREREQ:  EDE  251  and  253  or 
their  equiv-alent. 

A  •*  302  Teaching  the  Language  Arts  (3)  Study 
of  teaching  language  skills  in  the  elementarj- 
school:  listening,  speaking,  and  writing. 
CrossHsted  as  EDR  302.  PREREQ:  EDE  251. 
A  311  Introduction  to  Reading  Instruction  (3) 
An  exploratory  course  investigating  the  reading 
process,  language  and  learning  theories,  and  their 
relation  to  reading.  Historical  scope  and  various 
programs  of  reading  are  studied  and  evaluated. 
Crosslisted  as  EDR  311.  PREREQ;  EDE  251. 
A  **  312  Reading  Instniction  and  Practicum  (6) 
Focus  is  on  mastery-  of  the  teaching  of  develop- 
mental reading,  early  reading,  and  prereading 
experiences.  The  students  learn  how  to  plan, 
teach,  and  evaluate  reading/thinking  skUls  related 
to  the  instruction  of  reading  in  the  elementary 
classroom.  Students  work  in  the  public  schools 
with  small  and  large  reading  groups  teaching  vari- 
ous aspects  of  the  reading  lesson.  Students  also 
learn  how  to  evaluate  pupil  performance  and 
remediate  minor  reading  problems.  Crosslisted  as 
EDR  312.  PREREQ:  EDE  200  and  311. 
A  315  Developmental  Reading  for  the 
Handicapped  Child  (3)  The  focus  of  this  course  is 


the  study  of  the  nature  of  the  reading  process  and 
its  relation  to  language  development,  motivation 
and  methodology  for  developmental  reading  skills, 
reading  programs  and  materials,  problems  in  deal- 
ing with  handicapped  children,  and  practicum  in 
reading  instruction.  Special  education  majors  only. 
CrossUsted  as  EDR  315. 

330  Instructional  Programs  and  Strategies  (3) 
Introduction  to  principles  underlring  the  develop- 
ment of  instructional  programs  in  the  schools. 
Strategies  include  cognitive  and  skill  learning,  and 
modes  of  teaching. 

**  332  Teaching  Social  Studies  in  the 
Elementary  School  (3)  Methods  of  teaching  social 

studies  and  geograph\-  in  the  elementary  curricu- 
lum. Techniques,  current  research  projects,  read- 
ing materials,  audio  \-isual  aids,  resource  persons, 
and  field  trips  used  as  tools  of  learning.  The  orga- 
nization, development,  and  use  ot  resource  units 
are  stressed.  PREREQ:  EDE  200  and  251. 
**  352  Self  and  Group  Processes  in  the  Diverse 
Classroom  (3)  Study  of  the  classroom  as  a  unique 

**  Open  to  elementar)-  education  majors  onl\- 
A  CrossUsted  course.  Students  completing  the 

EDE  course  mav  not  take  the  EDR  or  EDA 

course  for  credit. 
I    Diverse  communities  course 


English 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


social  system  and  Intentional  community. 
Application  ot  interpersonal,  social  learning,  and  eco- 
logical theor\'  in  light  of  diverse  sociocultural  con- 
texts. Attention  directed  at  the  dynamics  of  racism, 
ethnocentrism,  sexism,  dassism,  and  heterosexism  in 
the  classroom.  Analysis  and  practice  ot  group  process 
skills  shaping  teacher-student  and  student-student 
relationships.  Enhancement  of  knowledge  and  skills 
essential  in  facilitating  collaborative  norms  in  the 
classroom  learning  system.  PREREQl  EDE  251. 
"  401  Creativity  in  the  Classroom  (3) 
Exploration  of  materials  and  processes  of  chil- 
dren's perceptions  and  behavior,  aimed  at  encour- 
aging the  development  of  their  critical  and  creative 
potentials.  PREREQ:  EDE  312. 
**  406  Classroom  Management  (3)  Detailed 
investigation  of  the  elementat)'  teacher's  role  in 
classroom  management.  Teacher  influence,  person- 
ality, and  class  interaction;  class  roles  and  expecta- 
tion; seating  plans;  discipUne;  referral;  and  the 
teacher's  role  in  evaluating  and  identifting  poten- 
tial problems  in  chUdren.  PREREQ:  EDE  312. 
409  Independent  Study  (1-3)  Special  topics  or 
projects  initiated  bv  the  student  that  will  enable 
her  or  him  to  do  extensive  and  intensive  studv  in 


an  area  of  elementary  education.  PREREQ^ 
Permission  of  department  chairperson. 
**410  Student  Teaching  (6)  (First  half  of  semester) 
**  411  Student  Teaching  (6)  (Second  halt  of 
semester)  Two  separate  student  teaching  experi- 
ences are  required:  one  in  grades  K-3  and  one  in 
grades  4—6.  Weekly  practicum  sessions  are  required. 
PREREQ;  See  'AppUcation  and  Approval  for 
Student  Teaching"  earher  in  this  section. 
**  412  Work-Study  in  the  Elementary  School  (6) 
Limited  practicum  tor  preser\'ice  teachers  who 
have  taken  EDE  200,  251,  311,  312,  and  406. 
Students  work  for  a  fuU  term  in  one  school  district 
under  supervision.  Six  credits  may  be  granted 
toward  student  teaching  requirements  (EDE  411). 
PREREQ;  Permission  of  department. 
♦  421  Seminar  in  Elementary  Education  (3)  An 
Intensive  study  of  some  current,  major  develop- 
ments in  elementary  education.  Topics  announced 
in  advance.  PREREQ;  Senior  standing  and  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

A  **  ♦  423  Seminar  in  Communications  Skills 
(3)  Intensive  study  of  some  current,  major  devel- 
opments in  communications  skills  (language  arts) 
related  to  elementary  education.  Topics  announced 


in  advance.  CrossUsted  as  EDR  423.  PREREQ; 
Permission  ot  instructor. 

A**  458  Language  Arts/Reading  for  the  Unique 
Child  (3)  An  open-ended  course  to  help  students 
understand  and  plan  instructional  programs  for  the 
linguistically  different,  the  gifted,  and  those  with 
special  needs.  The  students  will  examine  various 
strategies,  techniques,  management,  and  viable 
programs  tor  teaching  these  children  language  arts 
and  reading.  Crosslisted  as  EDR  458. 
489  Teaching  Skills  to  Combat  Sexism  (3)  This 
course  is  oftered  to  create  awareness  in  prospective 
teachers  of  the  extent  and  consequences  of  sex  role 
stereotyping  at  all  levels  of  educational  experience. 
It  will  develop  specific  skills,  behaviors,  and  class- 
room strategies  that  can  ehminate  effects  of  sexism 
in  classrooms  and  on  students.  Teaches  how  to 
deal  effectively  with  the  emotion-laden  issue  of 
combating  sex-role  stereotypes. 


"  Open  to  elementary  education  majors  only 
♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
A  Crosslisted  course.  Students  completing  the 

EDE  course  may  not  take  the  EDR  or  EDA 

course  for  credit. 


Department  of  English 


532  Main  Hall 

610-436-2822 

Chen'l  Wanko,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Brooks,  Echewa,  Fishman,  Green,  Larsen, 

Maltbv,  Molholt,  K.  Myrsiades,  L.  Myrsiades,  Peich, 

Ramanathan,  Shloss,  Trotman 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Awuyah,  Fletcher,  Godfrey, 

Herzog,  Jeffrey,  Johnson,  Kelly,  Lalicker,  Micheau,  Newcomb, 

Scheffler,  Smith,  Teutsch,  Wanko,  Ward 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Ashley,  Bacon,  Bauerlein, 

Buckelew,  Comfort,  Huff,  Kahn,  Mader,  Northrop,  Perry, 

Pflieger,  Pollard,  Shevlin,  Sorisio,  Tischio,  Verderame,  Yoon 
The  Department  of  English  offers  three  degree  programs:  the  bachelor 
of  arts  in  literature,  the  bachelor  of  science  in  education  (in  coopera- 
tion with  the  School  of  Education),  and  the  bachelor  of  arts  in  com- 
parative literature  (in  cooperation  with  the  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages).  Each  program  is  planned  in  consultation  with  an  adviser. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  LITERATURE  provides  a  broad  background  in 
English  and  American  literamre;  valuable  training  in  the  critical 
skills  of  reading,  interpretation,  and  analysis;  intensive  practice  in 
writing;  and  an  understanding  of  the  workings  of  the  language. 
This  extremely  versatile  degree  prepares  smdents  for  graduate 
studies  and  law  school,  and  careers  in  journalism,  radio  and  televi- 
sion, publishing,  public  relations,  and  other  professions  in  which 
skills  in  reading,  writing,  and  processing  information  at  a  sophisti- 
cated level  are  required. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  ENGLISH  prepares  smdents  to 
teach  in  the  secondat)-  schools  in  Pennsylvania  under  an 
Instmctional  I  Certificate.  These  students  will  in  large  part  satisfy 
the  requirements  for  a  B.A.  in  literamre,  deriving  extensive  bene- 
fits from  participation  in  a  carefully  constructed  program  that 
emphasizes  literamre  as  a  culmral  product  and  smdents  as  active 
learners.  Before  receiving  permission  to  smdent  teach,  smdents  in 
this  program  must  satisfy  the  prerequisites  for  smdent  teaching 
listed  on  page  146  as  well  as  specific  Department  of  English 
requirements  listed  on  this  page. 


3.  The  B.A.  in  COMPARATIVE  LITERATURE  provides  a  curricu- 
lum option  for  smdents  with  an  interest  in  international  smdies  by 
offering  a  broad  background  in  European  and  non-Westem  culture 
and  literature.  See  Comparative  Literature  Smdies  on  pages  107-109. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B  A./B.S.  ED. 
PROGRAMS 

General  Education  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39  48  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  LITERATURE 


0- 


12  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


1.  Foreign  Language  Requirement 

2.  Departmental  Preparatorv  Requirement 
LIT  168,  295,  and  296 

3.  Departmental  Intermediate  Requirements* 
ENG  230;  two  American  literamre  courses, 
one  before  1860  (A)  and  one  after  (B);  two 
British  literamre  courses,  one  before  1800  (C) 
and  one  after  (D);  and  one  departmental  elective 

4.  Departmental  Advanced  Requirements  9  semester  hours 
Three  seminars  from  a  selection  focusing  on 

topic,  author,  or  theme  (LIT  400) 

5.  Professional  Electives  or  Minor  18  semester  hours 

6.  Additional  Electives  (to  complete  120  semester  hours) 
BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  IN 
ENGLISH 


1. 


39  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


Professional  Education  Requirements, 

see  page  138. 

Departmental  Preparatory  Requirements 

LIT  168,  295,  and  296 

Departmental  Intermediate  Requirements" 

ENG  230  and  331;  two  American  literamre 

courses,  one  before  1860  (A)  and  one  after  (B); 

two  British  literamre  courses,  one  before  1800  (C) 

and  one  after  (D);  two  world  Uteramrc  courses,  one 

through  the  Renaissance  (E)  and  one  after  (F) 

Departmental  Advanced  Requirements  9  semester  hours 

Three  seminars  from  a  selection  focusing  on 

topic,  author,  or  theme  (LIT  400) 


See  the  department  handbook  for  group  descriptions. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


English 


Student  Teaching  Prerequisites 

Students  should  apply  during  their  sophomore  year  for  acceptance  as 
candidates  for  teaching  certification.  Transfer  students  should  apply  as 
sophomores  or  after  completing  a  year  at  West  Chester. 

Grades  on  Required  Courses 

Anyone  attempting  to  qualify  for  student  teaching  must  pass  each  of  the 
following  courses  with  a  grade  of  C  or  higher:  CLS  260,  261,  361,  362, 
or  367;  EDF  100;  EDM  300;  EDP  250  and  351;  EDS  306;  ENG  230, 
331,  390,  and  392;  LIT  168,  295,  296,  and  398;  PSY  100;  and  WRT 
120,  121  or  204,  205,  206,  208,  or  220. 

A  student  receiving  a  grade  of  C-  or  lower  for  any  of  these  courses 
should  retake  the  course  immediately,  before  attempting  courses  in 
the  English  or  education  sequence.  A  student  having  difficulty  with 
several  of  the  courses  listed  above  should  recognize  that  he  or  she  may 
not  be  able  to  meet  the  competency  requirements  for  student  teaching 
and  should  consider  withdrawing  from  the  B.S.  program. 

Grade  Point  Average 

Before  receiving  approval  to  student  teach,  a  student  must  attain  an 
overall  GPA  of  2.8  or  better,  including  a  minimum  GPA  of  2.75  for 
all  English  courses  attempted.  Students  must  also  achieve  a  GPA  of 
3.0  by  the  end  of  their  student  teaching. 

Competency  Elxantination 

A  student  must  pass  the  test  of  vmting  competency  given  by  the 
Department  of  English  before  the  application  for  approval  to  student 
teach  will  be  considered.  This  examination  is  scheduled  each  semester 
and  announced  in  advance  by  both  the  Department  of  English  and 
the  Department  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education.  Smdents 
are  urged  to  take  the  exam  as  early  in  their  program  as  possible. 

Portfolio 

A  student  in  the  B.S.Ed.  English  program  must  also  pass  a  portfolio 
requirement.  Before  student  teaching,  students  submit  their  portfolio 
to  the  Department  of  English  for  evaluation.  Specific  requirements  of 
the  portfolio  are  listed  in  the  English  Majors'  Handbook. 

Minor  Programs 

The  Department  of  English  offers  the  following  seven  programs.  Elective 
courses  are  selected  in  consultation  with  the  student's  minor  adviser. 

African/ Alirican-American  Literature  18  semester  hours 

Minor 

1.  Required  Courses  6  semester  hours 
CLS  351  and  LIT  202  or  203 

2.  Elective  Courses  12  semester  hours 
Any  four  courses  from  the  following: 

LIT  202  or  203,  204,  205,  206,  309,  or  CLS  365, 
CLS/LIT  400 
Literature  Minor  18  semester  hours 

1 .  Required  Courses  6  semester  hours 
LIT  200  or  201,  and  LIT  230  or  231 

2.  Elective  Courses  12  semester  hours 
One  in  American  literature  and  one  in  English 

literature  (in  a  period  other  than  those  covered 
in  requirement  1),  and  any  two  other  LIT  courses 
Creative  Writing  Minor  18  semester  hours 

1.  Required  Course  3  semester  hours 
CRW201 

2.  Elective  Courses  15  semester  hours 
Any  five  courses  selected  from  the  following: 

CRW  202,  203,  301,  302,  303,  304,  400,  490, 

and  491 
Comparative  Literature  Minor  18  semester  hours 

See  pages  107-109. 
Film  Criticism  Minor  18  semester  hours 

1.  Required  Course  3  semester  hours 
FLM  200 

2.  Elective  Courses  15  semester  hours 
Any  15  credits  selected  from  the  following 


list  with  the  approval  of  the  adviser: 

CLS  304,  363,  364,  368,  369,  400,  and  410; 

COM  217  and  317;  EFR  250;  EGE  404,  409; 

EGE  405  or  KIT  260;  FLM  201,  202,  300,  301, 

and  400;  FRE  350;  GER  404/EGE  404;  GER  405; 

ITA  360;  SPA  305/ESP315 
This  minor  is  also  listed  in  the  section  in  comparative  literature  studies. 
Journalism  Minor  18  semester  hours 

1.  Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 
JRN  200,  225,  226,  and  250 

(Minimum  grade  of  C-) 

2.  Elective  Course  3  semester  hours 
One  of  the  following:  JRN  312,  315,  325,  or  355 

3.  An  additional  three  credit  hours  are  to  be  3  semester  hours 
earned  through  a  supervised  internship  (ENG  395) 

in  the  communications  area  or  through  a  practicum 
(JRN  411)  based  on  one  semester's  supervised 
service  on  the  University's  student  newspaper. 

Business  and  Technical  Writing  Minor  18  semester  hours 

1.  Prerequisites 

WRT  121,  204,  205,  206,  208,  or  220 

2.  Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 
ENG320,  368,  371,and375 

3.  Elective  Course  3  semester  hours 
Choice  of  ART  113,  COM  220,  COM  230, 

CSC  141  or  higher,  ENG  270,  JRN  355, 

MGT  100,  MIS  300,  MKT  200  (or  other  elective 

approved  by  the  program  director  for  the  minor) 

4.  Internship  3  semester  hours 
An  additional  three  semester  hours  are  to  be  earned 

through  a  supervised  internship  in  business  and 

technical  writing,  ENG  395. 
Linguistics  Minor 

The  Department  of  English  is  one  of  several  departments  participat- 
ing in  the  linguistics  minor.  The  description  of  the  linguistics  minor 
and  its  requirements  are  found  in  the  section  describing  interdiscipli- 
nary programs  on  page  1 10. 

The  literature  and  viriting  minors  may  be  taken  among  the  minors  in 
the  bachelor  of  arts  or  bachelor  of  science  in  the  liberal  studies  general 
degree  program. 

Internships 

A  student  will  be  permitted  to  take  an  internship  under  the  supervision 
of  the  Department  of  English  only  if  he  or  she  is  enrolled  in  a  depart- 
mental major  or  minor  program  and  has  met  the  following  requirements: 

1.  an  accumulation  of  at  least  80  semester  hours 

2.  an  overall  Grade  Point  Average  of  at  least  2.75 

3.  an  overall  Grade  Point  Average  of  at  least  3.0  in  the  major  or 
minor  program 

4.  completion  of  12  semester  hours  in  courses  in  the  major  or  minor 
program  (not  counting  WRT  120,  121,  or  WRT  200-level  courses) 

5.  a  letter  of  application  to  the  Internship  Committee  of  the  Department 
of  English  accompanied  by  a  resume  and  two  faculty  references 

A  student  will  be  limited  to  15  hours  of  internship  credit.  Students 
who  wdsh  to  take  more  than  nine  hours  of  internship  credit  in  one 
semester  must  obtain  approval  from  the  full  committee  after  submit- 
ting an  application  and  an  academic  transcript  in  the  preceding 
semester.  'The  Internship  Committee  will  determine  the  number  of 
credits  to  be  earned  during  an  internship  by  applying  a  ratio  of  40 
hours  of  work  for  each  hour  of  academic  credit.  The  internship  credits 
for  English  majors  may  be  applied  to  the  student/adviser-designed 
program.  Only  under  exceptional  circumstances,  and  entirely  at  its 
discretion,  will  the  Internship  Committee  consider  applications  from 
students  not  meeting  the  departmental  requirements. 
NOTE:  It  is  the  student's  responsibility  to  demonstrate  that  he  or  she 
has  met  the  academic  requirements  for  an  internship. 


English 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ENGLISH 

Symbol:  WRT 

120  Effective  Writing  I  (3)  jAji  intensive  course 
in  writing  that  emphasizes  skill  in  organization 
and  awareness  ot  stj'les  of  writing  and  levels  of 
usage  as  ways  of  expressing  and  communicating 
experiences. 

121  Effective  Writing  II  (3)  Continues  the 
expositor)'  writing  experience  offered  in  Effective 
Writing  I  and  explores  techniques  of  gathering, 
evaluating,  and  selecting  materials  to  be  used  in 
writing  research  papers. 

204  Critical  Writing:  Approaches  to  Popular 
Culture  (3)  The  strategies  of  critical  theor\-  and  crit- 
ical wnting  will  be  used  to  examine  and  explain  pop- 
ular culture.  The  course  will  explore  multiple  media 
-  such  as  print,  television,  film,  music,  and  various 
visual  and  electronic  formats  -  as  representations  of 
humanities,  arts,  and  sciences,  about  which  students 
will  write  researched,  critical  cultural  analyses. 

205  Critical  Writing:  Investigating  Experience 
(3)  This  course  emphasizes  writing  as  a  means  of 
critically  reflecting  on  and  communicating  personal 
experience  and  representations  of  the  self  It 
includes  instruction  in  traditional  forms  of  personal 
wnting  (such  as  autobiography),  as  well  as  less 
familiar  forms  (such  as  Web  pages).  These  critical 
self-representations  will  be  set  within  larger  histori- 
cal and  cultural  contexts  through  academic  research. 

206  Critical  Writing:  The  Multidisciplinary 
Imagination  (3)  Imagination  becomes  a  vehicle 
for  students  to  explore  a  variety  of  disciplinarv  and 
social  perspectives  on  issues  of  relevance  to  society. 
Assignments  cover  writerly  issues,  such  as  genre, 
style,  and  language,  and  related  issues,  such  as  the 
role  of  imagination,  innovations,  and  discovery  in 
the  sciences,  arts,  social  sciences,  and  humanities, 
through  documented  research. 

208  Critical  Writing:  Entering  the  Public  Sphere 
(3)  Publication  is  a  goal  for  many  writers. 
Reporters,  scientists,  poets,  academics,  and  others 
vvrite  for  pubhcation.  This  class  will  require  stu- 
dents to  write  for  professional  and/or  class-pro- 
duced print  forums  appropriate  for  humanities, 
arts,  social  sciences,  and  scientific  fields,  examining 
those  forums  in  order  to  analyze  and  critique  their 
discourse  conventions.  The  course  will  provide 
opportunities  for  students  to  submit  their  work  to 
such  torums  for  publication.  The  class  may  also 
produce  its  own  publication  about  writing-related 
news  and  events  that  students  will  learn  about  by 
conducting  documented  research  projects. 
220  Critical  Writing:  Special  Topics  (3)  Each 
section  will  have  a  special  topic  that  focuses  on 
current  (inter)discipHnary  issues  of  importance  in 
the  humanities,  arts,  social  sciences,  and/or  sci- 
ences. In  these  courses  students  will  investigate, 
research,  critique,  and  practice  rhetorical  strategies 
focusing  on  each  section's  topic. 

Symbol:  ENG 

020  Basic  Writing  (3)  A  preparatory  course  of 
study  emphasizing  the  basic  grammatical,  logical, 
and  rhetorical  skills  that  produce  effective  themes. 
NOTE:  This  course  is  a  prerequisite  to  WRT  120 for 
students  who  have  been  placed  in  ENG  020.  Credits 
earned  in  0-level  courses  do  not  count  toward  the  120 
hours  of  credit  needed  for  graduation. 
030  English  for  Non-Native  Speakers  (3) 
Individualized  instruction  for  the  non-native 
speaker;  conversational  EngUsh,  formal  written 
English,  reading  and  listening  comprehension,  and 
grammar.  (Students  should  seek  placement  advice 


from  the  ESL  program  staff  before  registering.) 
Also,  see  note  under  ENG  020. 

130  Effective  Writing  I  for  Non-Native 
Speakers  (3)  An  intensive  course  in  writing  for  the 
non-native  speaker  of  Enghsh,  emphasizing  skill 
in  organization  and  awareness  of  snies  of  writing 
and  levels  of  usage  as  wavs  of  expressing  and  com- 
municating experiences.  For  non-native  speakers  of 
English.  ENG  130  is  comparable  to  lVRT120for 
international  students  only.  (Students  should  seek 
placement  advice  from  the  ESL  program  staff  before 
registering.) 

131  Effective  Writing  II  for  Non-Native 
Speakers  (3)  Continues  the  expository  writing 
experience  offered  to  non-nati\'c  speakers  in 
English  130,  and  explores  techniques  of  gathering, 
evaluating,  and  selecting  materials  to  be  used  in 
writing  research  papers.  For  non-native  speakers  of 
English.  ENG  131  k  comparable  to  WRT  121  for 
international  students  only.  (Students  should  seek 
placement  advice  from  the  ESL  program  staff  before 
registering.) 

132  Effective  Speaking  I  for  Non-Native 
Speakers  (3)  After  a  brief  introduction  to  the  dif- 
ferences between  writing  and  speaking,  this  course 
focuses  on  giving  directions,  explaining  concepts, 
asking  questions,  giving  presentations,  and  engag- 
ing in  small  talk,  inteniewing,  and  extensive  pro- 
nunciation drills. 

134  Idioms  in  the  Context  of  American  Culture 
(3)  Through  the  use  ot  modern  American  movies, 
this  course  helps  students  learn  the  meanings  of 
idioms  in  context.  Students  practice  using  these 
idioms  in  drills  and  exercises. 
200  Intermediate  Composition  (3)  A  workshop 
that  provides  intensive  instruction  for  students 
who  experience  difficulty  in  writing.  Not  open  to 
freshmen. 

204  Critical  Writing:  Approaches  to  Popular 
Culture  (3)  The  strategies  of  critical  theor\-  and  crit- 
ical writing  will  be  used  to  examine  and  explain  pop- 
ular culture.  The  course  will  explore  multiple  media 
-  such  as  print,  television,  film,  music,  and  various 
visual  and  electronic  formats  -  as  representations  of 
humanities,  arts,  and  sciences,  about  which  students 
will  write  researched,  critical  cultural  analyses. 
215  Views  on  Literacy  (3)  The  historical  and 
social  contexts  of  EngUsh  literacy.  Emphasis  on 
writing. 

230  (Also  LIN  230)  Introduction  to  Linguistics 
(3)  Basic  concepts  ot  language  description,  classifi- 
cation, change,  reconstruction,  dialectology,  and 
sociolinguistics.  (Prerequisite  for  all  courses  in 
English.) 

270  Publishing  (3)  A  practical  examination  of  the 
general  components  of  the  pubUshing  field  with 
emphasis  on  book  production. 

271  Typography  (3)  This  course  provides  students 
with  experience  in  production  of  books,  using  his- 
torical and  modern  methods  of  design.  PREREQ^ 
ENG  270. 

275  Literary  Editing  and  Publishing  (3) 
Experience  in  pubUshing  the  student  Uterary  mag- 
azine Daedalus:  editing,  proofing,  photographic 
selection  and  layout,  and  printing. 
304  Essay  Workshop  (3)  Experience  in  reading 
and  writing  essays,  with  focus  on  revision,  on  the 
use  of  the  pubUc  "I,"  and  on  appropriate  voice. 
Attention  to  invention. 

320  Writing  and  Computers  (3)  Introduction  to 
document  design  and  production,  desktop  publish- 
ing, and  issues  of  technological  impact  on  written 
communication. 

330  English  Phonology  (3)  Phonemics  and  mor- 
phophonemics in  EngUsh.  Writing  systems  and 


phonemic-graphemic  relationships  in  EngUsh. 
Historical  development  of  EngUsh  sounds.  PRE- 
REQ:  ENG  230. 

331  Structure  of  Modem  English  (3)  A  detailed 
analysis  of  the  modem  descriptive  approach  to  the 
study  of  EngUsh  grammar  and  how  it  compares  with 
the  traditional  approach.  PREREQ^  ENG  230. 
335  History  of  the  English  Language  (3)  Review 
of  the  influences  on  the  development  of  the 
EngUsh  language.  PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

339  History  and  Dialects  of  American  English 
(3)  Development  of  the  EngUsh  language  in 
America  since  colonial  setriement.  American  and 
British  EngUsh.  Pronunciation,  vocabulary,  and 
grammar  of  the  regional  and  social  dialects  of 
American  EngUsh.  PREREQ;  EXG  230. 

340  Sociolinguistic  Aspects  of  English  (3)  The 
study  of  language  in  its  social  context;  the  ethnog- 
raphy of  communication;  language  and  society, 
social  classes,  ethnic  groups,  poUtics,  sex,  and  edu- 
cation. PREREQ:  ENG  230. 

350  Introduction  to  English  as  a  Second  Lan- 
guage (3)  Exploration  of  the  scope  of  the  field, 
tvpes  of  programs,  and  general  approaches  to 
instruction. 

368  Business  and  Organizational  Writing  (3) 
The  nature  of  communication  within  business  and 
organizations.  Theoretical  basis  and  practical 
appUcation. 

371  Technical  Writing  (3)  Instruction  in  the 
forms  and  techniques  of  written,  oral,  and  visual 
communication  currendy  practiced  in  the  scientific 
and  technical  professions.  A  series  of  coordinated 
assignments  leads  to  a  final  project  in  the  student's 
field  of  professional  study. 

375  Strategies  for  Writing  in  the  Workplace  (3) 
Strategy  and  poUtics  of  cUent-centered  and  com- 
petitive writing  that  achieves  objectives  for  the 
professions  and  organizations. 
390  Teaching  English  in  Secondary  Schools  (3) 
Review  ot  language  arts  requirements  in  secondary 
schools.  Special  reference  to  grade-placement  with 
adoption  of  materials,  appraisal  of  results,  and 
development  of  programs  of  study.  PREREQ^ 
ENG  230  and  331;  EDM  300;  EDS  306;  and 
EDP351. 

392  Writing  and  Teaching  Writing  in  Secondary 
EngUsh  (3)  The  course  wiU  introduce  students  to 
major  theorists  in  composition  and  Uterac}'  theor\', 
including  Britton,  Emgi,  Heath,  Murray,  Moffett, 
Perl,  and  Graves.  It  wiU  provide  oppormnities  to 
write  in  aU  the  modes  -  for  all  the  purposes  and 
audiences  —  required  by  most  secondary  school  cur- 
ricula, and  to  analyze  these  writing  experiences  in 
terms  ot  sociocultural,  cognitive,  and  other  psycho- 
logical theory  and  research.  PREREQ:  ENG'230 
and  331;  EDM  300;  EDS  306;  and  EDP  351. 

♦  395  Internship  (3-12)  Intensive  practical  expe- 
rience with  selected  businesses,  media,  and  pubUc 
agencies.  Limited  to  quaUfied  students  who  have 
earned  a  minimum  of  80  credit  hours.  See  page  85 
for  specific  requirements. 

397  Writing  Tutoring  (3)  Theory  and  practice  of 
writing  tutoring,  especiaUy  for  those  who  plan  a 
career  in  teaching  or  who  are  focusing  on  the 
remediation  or  development  of  language  and  writ- 
ing skills. 

♦  410  Independent  Study  (3) 

411-413  Yearbook  Practicum  I,  II,  III  (1)  Prac- 
tical yearbook  production  experience  in  a  closely 
supenised  firamework.  PREREQ:  ENG  270  or 
permission  of  the  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


English 


414  Tutoring  Practicum  (1)  Supervised  experi- 
ence as  an  undergraduate  tutor  for  any  of  the 
English  tutoring  programs  (e.g.,  Department  of 
Enghsh  or  academic  development  program  [ADP] 
tutoring,  etc.). 

♦  430  Language  Seminar  (3)  Studies  in  English 
language  and  Ungulstics.  PREREQ:  ENG  230 
and  at  least  junior  standing. 

445  Women  Writing:  Autobiography  (3)  A  virit- 
ing  seminar  directed  toward  the  reading  of  wom- 
en's autobiographies  and  the  writing  of  personal 
autobiographical  narratives.  A  writing-emphasis 
course. 

♦  450  Prose  Writing  Seminar  (3)  This  variable- 
topic  seminar  concentrates  on  problems  in 
advanced  writing,  focusing  on  prose  analysis  and 
its  application  to  student  writing  and  revision. 

LITERATURE 

Symbol:  LIT 

♦  162  Literature  of  the  Apocalypse  (3)  An  inter- 
disciplinary study  of  ancient  rehgions,  apocalyptic 
writing,  and  modern  interpretations  of  that  writ- 
ing. An  investigation  of  the  pohtical,  economic, 
moral,  and  artistic  ramifications  of  the  nuclear 
arms  race  on  modern  society. 

165  Introduction  to  Literature  (3)  A  course 
designed  to  develop  awareness  of  literature  as 
being  central  to  all  the  arts,  to  increase  levels  of 
Uteracy  and  critical  faculties,  and  to  broaden 
understanding  of  the  human  condition. 
168  Conventions  of  Reading  (3)  An  introduction 
to  the  study  of  textual  genres — fiction,  drama,  poet- 
ry, essay,  autobiography,  and  film — and  to  method- 
ologies of  reading.  Various  cognitive  and  cultural 
influences  on  the  reading  process  will  be  analyzed. 

200  American  Literature  I  (3)  Survey  of  represen- 
tative American  writers  from  Colonial  times  to 
1860,  including  Bradstreet,  Taylor,  Franldin,  Foe, 
Thoreau,  Hawthorne,  and  Melville.  (A)* 

201  American  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of  repre- 
sentative American  writers  from  1860  to  the  pre- 
sent, including  Whitman,  Twain,  James,  Crane, 
Eliot,  Frost,  Hemingway,  and  Faulkner.  (B)* 

202  African-American  Literature  I  (3)  Survey  of 
African-American  authors  from  the  antebellum  era 
through  the  first  quarter  of  the  20th  century.  (A)* 

203  African-American  Literature  II  (3)  Con- 
tinuation of  LIT  202.  Second  quarter  of  the  20th 
century  to  the  present.  (B)* 

204  Black  Women  Writers  of  America  (3)  Survey 
of  black  women  writers  of  America.  Examines 
themes  and  influences  on  American  and  African- 
American  literary  contexts.  (B)' 

205  Harlem  Renaissance  (3)  This  course  exam- 
ines the  historical  and  cultural  movement  of  the 
1920's  known  as  the  Harlem  Renaissance. 

206  African-American  Literature  and  Literary 
Theory  (3)  This  course  will  examine  the  relation- 
ship between  Afro-American  hterature  and  the 
theories  serving  to  explain  it. 

207  Life  and  Times  of  Frederick  Douglass  (3) 
This  course  examines  the  courageous  Ufe  and 
times  of  an  American  reformer  and  his  influence 
on  slavery,  abohtionism,  suffrage,  and  temperance 
movements  in  the  development  of  America. 

230  English  Literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of  Enghsh 
hterature  from  Anglo-Saxon  writing  through  the 
18th  century.  (C)* 

231  English  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of  English 
literature  of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries.  (D)* 

#  245  Medieval  Women's  Culture  (3)  This  is  an 
interdisciphnary  study  of  writings  by  medieval 


women  and  their  contribution  to  the  development 
of  medieval  culture.  (C)* 

250  Victorian  Attitudes  (3)  A  study  of  19th-cen- 
turv  attitudes  toward  social  changes  as  expressed  in 
art,  architecture,  hterature,  and  nonfiction  prose. 
265  Literatiire  and  Psychology  (3)  Examines  var- 
ious hterary  works  and  characters  as  case  studies 
illustrating  such  psychological  conditions  as 
depression,  anxiety,  bipolar  disorder,  schizophre- 
nia, child  abuse,  sexual  abuse,  drug  and  alcohol 
dependence,  and  personaHty  disorders. 
269  The  Literature  of  Roguery  (3)  A  historical 
study  of  the  rogue  in  fiction  with  emphasis  on  the 
satiric  view  of  society.  Among  writers  studied  are 
Defoe,  Thackeray,  Donleavey,  and  Kerouac. 
#  270  Urbanism  and  Modem  Imagination  (3) 
Covers  a  variety  of  responses  ot  contemporary 
wnriters,  artists,  and  planners  to  the  rise  ot  the 
modern  city. 

271  Drama  Since  1970  (3)  A  selective  survey  of 
American  and  British  drama  since  1970.  The  play- 
wrights studied  will  be  drawn  from  a  wide  and 
expanding  group,  including  Sam  Shepard,  David 
Rabe,  Lanford  Wilson,  Tom  Stoppard,  Peter 
Shaffer,  Caryl  Churchill,  and  others. 

272  New  Fiction  (3)  Fiction  pubhshed  in  the  last 
10  years. 

274  Feminist  Poetry  (3)  A  study  of  poetry 
espousing  the  feminist  cause  and  exploring  the 
feminist  response.  Techniques  and  attitudes  of 
such  poets  as  Plath,  Sexton,  Rich,  Morgan, 
Wakoski,  and  Kumin. 

295  Historical  Contexts  (3)  A  study  of  a  repre- 
sentative number  of  hterary  texts  and  the  ways 
they  interact  historically,  socially,  intellectually, 
and  politically  with  their  own  cultures  as  well  as 
with  the  culture  of  the  20th-century  reader. 
Literary  and  nonliterary  texts  will  be  studied  as 
indicators  of  cultural  and  discursive  shifts  from 
one  historical  moment  to  another. 

296  Theory,  Meaning,  Value  (3)  An  introduction 
to  the  different  theoretical  positions  that  condition 
the  ways  in  which  we  read  a  text  and  assign  mean- 
ing to  it. 

297  Themes  in  Contemporary  Literature  (3) 
Literary  topic  or  theme  in  contemporary 
American,  English,  or  world  hterature  to  be 
announced  each  time  the  course  is  offered. 
300  Colonial  and  Revolutionary  American 
Literature  (3)  Writers  of  Colonial  and 
Revolutionary  America.  (A)* 

302  Development  of  the  American  Novel  (3) 
Beginnings  of  the  American  novel  to  Frank 
Norns.  (A)* 

>303  Introduction  to  Multiethnic  American 
Literature  (3)  American  ethnic,  racial,  and  nation- 
al groups  in  American  Uterawre  and  the  contribu- 
tions of  creative  literary  artists  representing  these 
cultures.  (B)* 

304  American  Jevrish  Novel  (3)  A  swdy  of  major 
American  Jewish  noveUsts:  Cahan,  Singer,  Roth, 
Potok,  Bellow,  Malamud,  WaUant,  and  Wiesel.  No 
knowledge  of  Yiddish  or  Hebrew  necessary.  (B)* 

305  Modem  American  Drama  (3)  American 
drama  from  the  early  1900's  to  the  present,  with 
emphasis  on  the  development  of  the  American 
theater  as  seen  in  such  major  dramatists  as 
O'NeiU,  Odets,  Wilder,  Miller,  WiUiams,  and 
Albee.  (B)* 

306  Modem  American  Novel  (3)  The  novel  in 
America  from  Dreiser  to  the  present.  (B)* 

307  Modern  American  Poetry  (3)  Major  20th- 
century  American  poets.  (B)* 


308  The  Sin  of  Success  (3)  An  investigation  of 
the  rise  of  democratic  capitalism  in  America  from 
Biblical  influences  in  colonial  times  to  the  begin- 
nings of  the  merchant  class  and  the  tall  ot  modern 
"big  business."  A  study  of  the  entrepreneur  and 
the  "robber  baron,"  the  success  ethic,  and  morality 
in  the  large  corporation  through  history,  econom- 
ics, and  hterature. 

#  309  Martin  Luther  King  (3)  Examines  and  ana- 
lyzes the  writings  of  Dr.  King  and  their  relation- 
ship to  the  themes  he  pursued  and  the  leadership 
role  he  achieved. 

334  Milton  (3)  A  survey  of  his  major  poetry  and 
prose. 

335  Shakespeare  I  (3)  Reading,  analysis,  and  dis- 
cussion of  selected  histories  and  tragedies. 
Discussion  of  critical  approaches  to  the  plays  and 
of  the  historical  and  intellectual  chmate  of  the 
times.  (C)' 

336  Shakespeare  II  (3)  Reading,  analysis,  and 
discussion  of  selected  comedies  and  nondramatic 
poems.  Discussion  of  critical  approaches  to  the 
works  and  of  the  historical  and  intellectual  chmate 
of  the  times.  Either  LIT  335  or  336  may  be  taken 
first.  (O* 

337  Literature  of  the  Enlightenment  (3)  A  criti- 
cal consideration  of  the  18th-century  writers, 
exclusive  of  the  dramatists.  (C)* 

338  Restoration  and  18th-Century  Drama  (3) 
The  drama  from  the  reopening  of  the  theaters  in 
1660  to  1800.  (C)* 

339  18th-Centuty  British  Novel  (3)  The  British 
novel  from  Defoe  to  Austen.  (C)' 

340  The  Romantic  Movement  (3)  Wordsworth, 
Coleridge,  BjTon,  Shelley,  Keats,  and  their  con- 
temporaries in  the  light  of  social  background  and 
critical  doctrine.  (D)* 

341  19th-century  British  Novel  (3)  The  British 
novel  from  Austen  to  Hardy.  (D)* 

342  Victorian  Literature  (3)  Victorian  thought 
and  culture  in  poetry  and  nonfiction  prose.  (D)' 

343  Modem  British  Drama  (3)  British  drama  trom 
Wilde  to  the  present,  with  emphasis  on  the  rebirth 
of  the  British  drama  and  its  major  writers.  (D)* 

344  Modem  British  Novel  (3)  The  novel  in 
England  from  Conrad  to  the  present.  (D)' 

345  Modem  British  Poetry  (3)  Major  British 
poets  from  1890  to  the  present.  (D)* 

352  Literature  for  Young  Children  (3)  A  critical 
study  of  the  literature  for  young  children  for 
prospective  speciaUsts  in  early  childhood. 

364  Modem  Irish  Literature  (3)  Major  hterary 
writers  of  Ireland  from  1840  to  the  present:  George 
Moore,  Synge,  Yeats,  Joyce,  Shaw,  O'Casey, 
Beckett,  Boland,  and  Seamus  Heaney.  (D)* 

365  Short  Fiction  (3)  Analysis  and  intepretation 
of  short  fiction. 

366  Criticism  (3)  A  study  of  die  theories  of  classical 
antiquity,  England,  and  the  United  States,  with 
emphasis  on  the  relevance  of  these  theories  to 
EngUsh  and  American  literature  of  the  moment. 
395  Children's  Literature  (3)  A  critical  study  of 
hterature  for  children,  setting  standards  for  evalua- 
tion and  appreciation. 

398  Young  Adult  Literature  (3)  A  critical  study 
of  hterature,  including  nonprint  media,  for  young 
adults,  focusing  on  helping  prospective  teachers 
develop  familiarity  with  young  adult  literature  and 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciphnary  course 

'    See  the  department  handbook  for  group 

descriptions. 
t    Diverse  communities  course 


Foreign  Languages 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


how  it  may  be  used  in  the  middle  school  and  high 
school  classroom,  stressing  gender  roles  and  multi- 
cultural issues.  PREREQ:  LIT  168,  295,  and  296. 
♦  400  Literature  Seminar  (3)  Required  for 
EngUsh  majors  in  the  junior  or  senior  year.  Topics 
oftered  periodicallv;  Beckett/Joyce,  Byron, 
Dickens,  Donne,  Fitzgerald,  Greek  Comedy, 
Greek  Tragedy,  Hawthorne,  Homer,  Resistance 
Poetry,  Shakespeare's  Major  Tragedies,  and 
Thomas  Hardy. 

430  Old  English  Lang^iage  and  Literature  (3) 
An  introductor)'  study  of  the  language  (450-1150 
A.D.)  through  a  reading  ot  rehgious  and  secular 
poetiy  and  prose.  (C)* 

431  Middle  English  Language  and  Literature  (3) 
An  introductory  study  of  the  language  (1150-1450 
A.D.)  through  a  reading  of  selected  literary  texts. 

(cr 

432  English  Drama  to  1642  (3)  Enghsh  drama 
from  the  early  liturgical  tropes  to  1642,  exclusive 
of  Shakespeare.  (C)* 

434  Early  Modem  Poetiy  and  Prose  (3)  Poetry 
and  prose  of  the  16th  and  early  17th  centuries. 

(cr 

435  Chaucer  (3)  An  interpretation  of  Canterbury 
Tales  and  Troilm  and  Criseyde.  (C)* 

The  Enghsh  department  accepts  certain  humani- 
ties courses  as  major  electives.  Consult  the  English 
Majors'  Handbook  for  a  hst  of  approved  humanities 
courses. 

JOURNALISM 

Symbol:  JRN 

200  Communications  Media  (3)  An  introduction 
to  the  media  of  communications,  emphasizing  the 
development  and  characteristics  of  print  and  elec- 
tronic media  forms  and  their  impact  on  American 
society. 

225  Newswriting  (3)  A  course  designed  to  devel- 
op proficiency  in  the  writing  ot  news  stories  for 
daily  and  weekly  newspapers.  News  values,  the 
structure  and  style  of  news,  and  the  preparation  of 
copy  in  accordance  with  professional  standards  will 
be  stressed. 

226  News  Reporting  (3)  Instruction  and  practice 
in  basic  news  reporting  techniques  coupled  with 
an  introduction  to  newspaper  feature  writing. 
Outside  assignments  will  include  coverage  of 
speeches,  local  government  meetings,  and  the 
courts.  PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 

250  News  Editing  (3)  A  course  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  the  skills  involved  in  the 
preparation  ot  copy  for  pubhcation  in  newspapers 
and  magazines.  Instruction  and  practice  in  the 
mechanics  of  copy  editing,  headline  writing,  lay- 
out, and  photo  ediring.  PREREQ;  JRN  225  or 
equivalent. 


312  Sports  Reporting  and  Writing  (3)  Instruc- 
tion and  practice  in  basic  sports  reporting  tech- 
niques, including  live-event  coverage  and  feature 
writing,  as  well  as  an  introduction  to  routine 
duties  associated  with  working  on  the  sports  desk. 
PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 
315  Magazine  Article  Writing  (3)  Practical 
instruction  in  the  skills  required  for  successtiil 
freelance  magazine  writing  with  emphasis  on 
research,  interviewing,  writing  techniques,  and 
marketing.  Students  will  write  and  submit  for 
publication  short  features  and  a  fiiU-length  maga- 
zine article.  PREREQ;  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 
325  History  of  Journalism  (3)  A  historical  survey  of 
the  American  press  from  Colonial  times  to  the  pre- 
sent, with  special  emphasis  on  the  continuing  strug- 
gle for  press  freedom  and  the  new  journalistic  envi- 
ronment created  by  the  emergence  of  mass  media. 
335  Ethical  Issues  in  Mass  Media  (3)  A  course 
designed  to  investigate  how  mass  media  shape  the 
pubhc's  perceptions  of  pohtical,  economic,  and 
social  power  structures  and  how  it  shapes  moral 
standards.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  freedom  of 
speech  issues  and  professional  ethics  of  journalists. 
355  Public  Relations  Principles  (3)  An  introduc- 
tion to  the  role  of  the  pubUc  relations  practitioner 
in  the  formation  of  public  opinion.  Communica- 
tions theory  will  be  combined  with  specific  tech- 
niques for  worlcing  with  the  press,  producing 
printed  material,  and  conducting  special  events. 
PREREQ:  JRN  225  or  equivalent. 
411  Journalism  Practicum  (3)  One  semester  of 
supervised  experience  as  an  editor  or  reporter  on 
the  University's  student  newspaper.  See  journahsm 
coordinator  for  specific  requirements.  PREREQ; 
JRN  225  ««(/ either  JRN  226  or  JRN  250. 

CREATIVE  WRITING 

Symbol:  CRW 

201  Introduction  to  Creative  Writing  (3)  Intro- 
duction to  the  craft  of  writing  poetiy  and  fiction. 
Basic  discussion  of  terms,  strategies,  and  profes- 
sional models  in  each  genre.  Practice  in  writing 
and  critiquing  each  genre. 
202-203  Creative  Writing  I-II  (3)  (3)  Writing 
experience  in  the  crafts  of  fiction,  poetry,  nonfic- 
tion,  and  drama. 

♦  301-302  Poetry  Workshop  Ml  (3)  (3)  The 
theory  and  practice  of  poetry  and  the  exploration 
of  verse  forms.  Practice  in  critical  and  interpreta- 
tive analysis  of  poems  written  by  feUow  students 
and  professional  poets. 

♦  303-304  Short  Story  Workshop  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Crafting  the  modern  short  story  with  reterence  to 
American  and  British  models.  The  significance  of 
setting,  atmosphere,  characterization,  and  theme. 
Discussion  and  some  exploration  of  experimental 
ideas  in  the  genre. 


305  Essay  Workshop  (3)  Practice  in  writing  the 
essay.  Conventions  and  techniques  of  this  literary 
form  -  creative  nonfiction  -  as  it  appears  in  com- 
mercial and  quality  magazines. 

313  Playwriting  Workshop  (3)  Writing  the  play: 
possibihties  and  limitations  of  the  stage.  Attention 
to  sets  and  costuming  where  relevant.  Characteriza- 
tion bv  action  and  dialogue.  Problems  of  estabhsh- 
ing  motivation.  The  play's  totahty  in  theme,  charac- 
ter, and  action.  Informal  readings  of  student  work. 

♦  400  Writing  Seminar  (3)  Special  topics,  such 
as  fantasy,  science  fiction,  longer  prose  works,  or 
the  antistory.  To  be  announced. 

490-491  Writing  Seminar  in  the  Novel  I-II  (3) 

(3)  A  course  in  the  writing  and  preparing  of  book- 
length  manuscripts  (novel,  novella,  and  the  "non- 
fictional"  novel)  with  the  intention  of  submission 
for  pubhcation.  Also  includes  coverage  of  fictional 
aspects  and  techniques  used  in  writing  memoirs, 
biography,  and  current  history. 

FILM  THEORY  AND  CRITICISM 

Symbol:  FLM 

200  Introduction  to  Film  (3)  A  survey  of  the 
principal  elements  of  film  including  photography, 
editing,  sound,  acting,  and  narrative. 

201  American  Film  (3)  The  hinction  of  cinema  in 
contemporary  society  as  a  socio-cultural,  economic 
and  pohtical  object,  as  seen  through  critical  analy- 
sis of  American  films. 

202  American  Themes  (3)  An  introduction  to 
contemporary  critical  and  theoretical  principles  for 
interpreting  American  films  which  concentrates  on 
a  single  theme. 

300  Private  Screening  (1)  Eight  to  12  narrative 
film  classics  per  semester  on  a  specific  topic  or 
theme. 

301  Documentary  Film  (3)  Understanding  and 
enjoNing  the  social,  philosophic,  economic,  and 
pohtical  aspects  of  documentary  film. 

400  Film  Seminar  (3)  A  seminar  which  offers 
students  practice  in  applying  contemporary  critical 
and  theoretical  principles  to  films  in  an  advanced 
context.  PREREQ;  FLM  200  or  permission  of 
the  instructor. 

COMPARATIVE  LITERATURE 
STUDIES 

See  course  hstings  under  comparative  hterature 
studies,  pages  107-109.  This  listing  includes 
courses  that  meet  (E)  and  (F)  requirements  for 
B.S.Ed,  students. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

*  See  the  department  handbook  for  group 
descriptions. 


Department  of  Foreign  Languages 

109  Main  Hall 

610-436-2700 

Jerome  M.  Williams,  Chairperson 

Frederick  Patton  and  Anne-Marie  MoscateUi,  Assistant  Chairpersons 

PROFESSORS:  Braidotti,  Patton,  Pauly,  Schlau,  Williams 


ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Escorcia,  Esplugas, 

Garcia-Barrio,  Gougher,  Landwehr,  MoscateUi,  Sage,  Speh, 
Varricchio 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Brown,  Garofalo,  Grove, 
Van  Liew 

INSTRUCTOR:  Rosso 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Foreign  Languages 


Programs  Offered 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS:  French,  German,  Latin,  Russian,  and 

Spanish 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  WITH  ELECTIVE 

CERTIFICATION:  French,  German,  Latin,  Russian,  and 

Spanish 
The  Instructional  I  Certificate  in  a  foreign  language  quaUfies  the 
holder  to  teach  his  or  her  major  language  in  the  public  schools 
(kindergarten  through  12th  grade)  of  Pennsylvania. 
Minors:  French,  German,  Italian,  Latin,  Russian,  and  Spanish 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B  JV. 
PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36—39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Major  Language  Courses  30  semester  hours 
FRENCH  —  FRE  102*,  201-202,  301,  302, 

303,  and  304.  Additional  courses  to  complete 
the  30  credits,  taken  under  advisement. 
GERMAN—  GER  101-102*,  201-202,  221, 
303  and/or  304,  307  and/or  308.  GER  221 
and  GER  405  and  additional  courses  to  com- 
plete the  30  credits,  taken  under  advisement. 
LATIN—  LAT  101-102*,  201,  202,  303,  and 
406.  Additional  Latin  and  Classical  language 
courses  to  complete  the  30  credits,  taken  under 
advisement. 

RUSSUVN  —  RUS  101-102*  or  103*,  201- 
202  or  203,  301-302,  303,  304,  305,  306,  and 
307-308.  Additional  courses  to  complete  the 
30  credits,  taken  under  advisement. 
SPANISH  —  SPA  201-202  or  205,  301-302, 
315,  320  or  321,  330-331,  365,  and  any  one 
400-level  course.  Additional  courses  to  com- 
plete the  30  credits,  taken  under  advisement. 

3.  Demonstration  of  proficiency  in  a  second        3-12  semester  hours 
language  through  the  intermediate  II  level 

4.  Two  cognate  courses  6  semester  hours 

A.  LIN  230  or  ENG  230  or  LAN  327  (3) 

B.  LAT  101  or  history  or  political  science  or 
geography,  or  any  other  approved  course  (see 
student  handbook) 

5    Electives  to  complete  120  semester  hours 

The  number  of  hours  available  depends  on  the  student's  level  of  sec- 
ond language  proficiency.  They  may  choose  to  apply  some  of  these  to 
additional  advanced  courses  in  their  major  area  or  to  continue  second 
or  third  language  studv. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  ELECTIVE 
CERTIFICATION  PROGRAMS  (formerly  B.S.Ed.) 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
ANT  102  and  PSY  100  are  required  and 

will  count  toward  the  general  education 
requirements. 

2.  Foreign  Language  Concentration  30  semester  hours 
(specialized  preparation) 

FRENCH  —  FRE  102*,  201-202,  301,  302, 

303,  and  304.  Additional  French  courses  to 
complete  the  30  credits. 

GERMAN  —  GER  101-102*,  201-202,  303- 

304,  305-306,  and  307-308.  Additional 
German  courses  to  complete  the  30  credits. 
LATIN  —  LAT  101-102*,  201,  202,  301, 
303,  and  406.  Additional  Latin  and  Classical 
language  courses  to  complete  the  30  credits. 
RUSSIAN  —  RUS  101-102*  or  103*,  201- 
202  or  203,  301-302,  303-304,  305-306,  and 
307-308. 


SPANISH  —  SPA  201-202  or  205,  301-302, 
315,  320  or  321,  330-331,  and  365.  One  400- 
level  Spanish  course  to  complete  the  30  credits. 

3.  Pennsylvania  Certification  in  Foreign  33  semester  hours 
Languages  K-12 

Student  must  complete  professional  education 
sequence  of  EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250, 
EDP  351,  PSY  382  or  EDP  249,  EDS  306, 
EDS  411,  EDS  412,  and  LAN  401.  Students 
must  pass  the  Praxis  exams  before  formal 
admission  to  certification  and  student  teaching. 
Students  must  take  an  additional  three  credits  of 
anv  mathematics  course. 

4.  Electives  to  complete  120  hours  at  the  300  and 
400  level. 

The  student  is  advised  to  use  electives  in  areas 

that  will  contribute  to  his  or  her  profession. 
Minor  in  Language  18  semester  hours 

Minors  are  available  in  French,  German,  Italian,  Latin,  Spanish,  and 
Russian. 

A.  The  minor  concentration  begins  v\dth  the  language  sequence  of 
101-102  (or  103),  201-202  (or  205),  unless  the  student  tests  at  a 
higher  level  through  the  on-line  placement  exam.  Students  placing 
out  ot  beginning  courses  must  still  complete  18  hours. 

B.  A  minimum  grade  of  B  is  required  in  both  101  and  102  in  order  to 
pursue  the  minor. 

C.  Beyond  the  202  sequence,  courses  at  the  300  and  400  levels  in  the 
same  language  must  be  taken  under  advisement.  Courses  in 
English  are  not  acceptable. 

ADDITIONAL  LANGUAGES 

Greek  and  Portuguese 

Courses  in  Greek  and  Portuguese  may  be  offered,  but  no  major  or 
minor  field  is  available. 

Greek  and  Hebrew  —  Classical  and  New  Testament 

Elementary  Greek  I-II  (GRE  101-102)  and  Intermediate  Greek  I-II 
(GRE  101-102).  Part  of  Classical  language  program. 

Portuguese 

Elementary  Portuguese  I-II  (POR  101-102)  and  Intermediate 
Portuguese  I-II  (POR  201-202). 

ADDITIONAL  OFFERINGS—  CONVERSATIONAL 
LANGUAGE  COURSES 

Selected  critical  or  uncommonly  taught  languages  such  as  Chinese, 
Japanese,  Modern  Greek,  Modern  Hebrew,  Polish,  Portuguese,  and 
Serbo-Croatian,  on  a  conversational  basis  only. 

The  Junior  Year  Abroad  Program 

Courses  in  French  are  offered  at  the  Universite  Paul  Valer\'  in 
Montpellier,  France,  through  Junior  Year  Abroad  Program  sponsored 
by  the  Office  of  International  Smdies  of  West  Chester  University. 
The  program  is  designed  to  give  persons  interested  in  France  a  first- 
hand acquaintance  with  French  life  and  enable  them  to  achieve  an 
active  command  of  the  language. 

The  program  is  open  to  any  student  enrolled  at  West  Chester 
University  who  has  completed  the  equivalent  of  two  years  ot  college 
French  and  is  able  to  follow  lectures  in  French.  Students  enrolled  in 
the  program  may  receive  up  to  30  credits  for  a  fiill  two  semesters  of 
the  year  abroad  program  of  study.  Courses  are  conducted  entirely  in 
French  by  French  professors. 

Study  abroad  programs  are  also  available  in  Germany,  Italy,  Russia, 
and  in  most  Spanish-speaking  countries  (including  summer  study  in 
Guadalajara,  Mexico). 


Foreign  language  maiors  receive  no  credit  toward  a  major,  or  certification 
for  101  and/or  102  in  their  majors.  If  101  and/or  102  in  another  language 
are  taken  as  free  electives,  they  will  be  credited  toward  graduation. 


^M       Foreign  Languages 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Foreign  Language  Testing  and  Placement 

The  Department  of  Foreign  Languages  provides  on-line  placement 
testing  service  for  students  entering  the  University.  Based  on  the 
results  of  the  tests  given  and  an  analysis  of  past  experience,  the 
Department  of  Foreign  Languages  will  suggest  the  level  of  language  a 
student  should  enter.  After  students  take  part  in  anv  given  course  for  a 


short  period  of  time,  their  placement  could  be  changed  if  consultation 
between  a  student  and  an  adviser  results  in  a  decision  to  change  the 
placement. 

If  a  student  wishes  to  take  an  exam  to  complete  the  language  require- 
ment or  receive  credit  for  a  course,  he  or  she  must  take  a  special  exam 
other  than  those  given  for  placement.  Arrangements  can  be  made 
with  the  chairperson  of  the  Department  of  Foreign  Languages. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
FRENCH 

Symbol:  FRE 

101-102  Elementary  French  I-II  (3)  (3)  Funda- 
mentals of  French  grammar,  syntax,  and  pronunci- 
ation at  the  novice  and  low  intermediate  levels, 
with  emphasis  on  acquiring  skills  in  reading  and 
listening,  speaking  and  writing.  Language  labora- 
tory work  is  required.  Taught  in  French. 
201-202  Intermediate  French  Ml  (3)  (3) 
Development  of  intermediate  level  skills  in  the 
language,  using  dialogues,  compositions,  samples 
of  language  structure,  readings,  and  other  cultural 
source  materials,  including  fdm,  the  media,  and 
the  Internet.  Language  laboratorv  work  is 
required.  Taught  in  French.  PREREQ;  FRE  102 
or  placement. 

301  Advanced  Grammar  and  Stylistics  (3)  The 
more  complex  grammatical  and  s\Titactical  struc- 
tures of  the  language,  with  particular  attention  to 
stylistics.  Practice  in  writing  compositions  on  a 
more  sophisticated  and  advanced  level  with 
emphasis  on  correct  usage.  PREREQi  FRE  202 
or  placement. 

302  Phonetics  and  Advanced  Oral  French  (3) 
Intensive  practice  in  spoken  French  to  develop 
skills  in  pronunciation  and  in  listening  compre- 
hension. Introduction  to  French  phonetics.  PRE- 
REQ; FRE  202  or  placement. 

303  French  Civilization  (3)  (In  French)  A  survey  of 
the  social,  political,  economic,  and  educational  struc- 
mres  of  France,  along  with  an  introduction  to  the 
artistic  contributions  of  the  French,  particularlv  in 
the  20th  centur)-.  PREREQi  FRE  202  or  placement. 

304  Readings  in  French  Literature  (3)  The  reading 
and  analysis  of  representative  selections  of  French 
prose  (fiction  and  nonflction),  poetrv,  essays,  and 
plays.  PREREQi  FRE  202  or  placement.' 

311  French  for  Oral  Proficiency  (3)  Total  immer- 
sion course  intended  for  students  with  a  hinctional 
knowledge  of  French.  Emphasis  on  oral  and  aural 
communication  using  real-life  situations  to  develop 
fluenc}'.  PREREQ:  FRE  202  or  placement. 
350  French  Cinema  (3)  A  study  of  French  films  as 
they  reflect  culture,  language,  and  ideology,  as  well 
as  film  as  art.  PREREQi  FRE  202  or  placement. 
401  Commercial  French  (3)  A  study  of  the 
French  economic  and  business  systems,  and  exten- 
sive practice  in  using  forms  and  expressions  fre- 
quently used  in  French  business  correspondence. 

409  Women  and  Men  in  French  Literature  (3) 
(In  English)  Works  by  women  and  men  novelists, 
poets,  or  dramatists  that  present  striking  images  of 
love  and  conflict  between  the  se.xes.  Also  a  wom- 
en's studies  course. 

410  French  Theater  to  1900:  In  Context  (3)  A 
study  of  the  French  theater  from  its  beginnings  to 
the  19th  century  in  the  contexts  of  their  times. 
Reading  and  analysis  of  representative  plays  from 
the  various  periods. 

411  Modem  French  Literature  in  Context  (3)  A 
study  of  the  evolution  of  modern  literary  genres, 
beginning  with  the  revolt  of  the  generation  of 


1900,  through  Dada  and  Surreahsm  and  the  writ- 
ers of  the  absurd  to  the  present. 

412  Narrative  Prose  (3)  An  examination  of  the 
evolution  of  French  prose  in  the  nouvelle,  the 
conte,  the  recit  and  the  novel  from  their  earliest 
beginnings  to  the  present. 

413  French  Poetry  (3)  A  history  of  French  poetry 
and  a  study  of  its  versification.  Practice  in  the 
recitation  of  French  poems  and  close  te.xtual  analy- 
sis, and  discussion  of  selected  works. 

♦  420-421-422  Topics  in  French  Literature  (3)  (3) 
(3)  Each  topics  course  provides  an  in-depth  smdy  of 
a  significant  aspect  of  French  culture,  art,  or  litera- 
ture, its  history  and  influences,  and/or  its  principal 
e.\ponents,  creative  artists,  and  advocates.  Topics  will 
be  announced  annually  by  the  French  facult}'. 
Offerings  in  English  (EFR):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture-Cluster  Courses 

■  #  EFR  220  French  Civilization  (3)  (In 
English)  A  studv  of  France's  political  and  educa- 
tional systems  and  economic  and  religious  institu- 
tions with  emphasis  on  contemporary  aspects. 

■  #  EFR  230  Francophone  Civilization  (3)  A  mul- 
tidisciplinarv'  approach  to  the  cultures  and  civiliza- 
tions of  Francophone  countries  in  West  Africa  and 
the  Caribbean,  including  historical  and  geographical 
factors,  religious  and  sociological  structures,  and  liter- 
ar\'  and  artistic  productions.  Taught  in  English. 

■  #  EFR  250  French  Civilization  on  Film  (3)  (In 
English)  A  study  of  French  history  and  culture  as 
reflected  in  French  and  French-speaking  cinema. 

GERMAN 

Symbol:  GER 

101-102  ElementaryGermanI-II(3)(3) 

Fundamentals  of  German  grammar,  s)'ntax,  and 
pronunciation.  Introduction  to  German  culture 
through  easy-reading  texts.  The  audio-lingual 
method  is  employed.  Language  laboratory  drill  is 
required. 

201-202  Intermediate  German  111  (3)  (3) 
Review  of  grammar  and  syntax.  Readings  in 
German  literature  as  a  basis  for  class  discussion  in 
German  and  practice  in  composition.  Language 
laboratory  drill  required  for  remedial  work  only. 
PREREQ:  GER  102  or  placement. 
NOTE:  All  advanced  literarure  and  civilization 
courses  include  lectures  and  discussion  in  the  for- 
eign language,  and  all  student  papers  and  exami- 
nations must  be  written  in  the  foreign  language. 
#221  German  Civilization  (3)  (In  German)  An 
analysis  of  the  major  contributions  of  German  civ- 
ilization to  western  culture  in  the  areas  of  art, 
music,  science,  and  literature.  PREREQ;  GER 
202  or  equivalent. 

222  Austrian  Civilization  (3)  This  course  is 
almost  identical  to  EGE  323;  slightly  different 
readings  in  German  will  be  offered.   Discussions 
are  in  German. 

303-304  Advanced  German  Grammar  and 
Composition  1-11  (3)  (3)  The  more  complex 
grammatical  and  STOtacrical  structures  of  the  lan- 
guage with  particular  attention  to  stylistics. 
Practice  in  writing  compositions  on  a  more 


advanced  level  with  emphasis  on  correct  usage. 
PREREQ;  GER  202  or  equivalent. 

305  Survey  of  German  Literature  I  (3)  German 
literature  from  its  earliest  beginnings  to  1800. 
PREREQ:  GER  202  or  equivalent. 

306  Survey  of  German  Literature  II  (3)  German 
literature  from  1800  to  the  present.  PREREQ; 
GER  202  or  equivalent. 

307-308  Advanced  Oral  German  l-Il  (3)  (3)  In- 
tensive drill  in  the  oral  use  of  the  language  and 
phonetics  to  develop  proficiency  in  listening  com- 
prehension and  speaking.  PREREQ;  GER  303  or 
equivalent. 

400  20th-century  German  Literature  in 
Translation  (3)  (In  English)  A  study  of  selected 
novels,  short  stories,  and  plays  from  the  German 
literature  of  the  20th  century.  An  introduction  to 
some  of  the  modern  writers  of  the  German-speak- 
ing world  from  the  perspective  of  the  social  and 
political  developments  in  modern  Germany. 

401  The  Age  of  Goethe  (3)  German  hterary  doc- 
trines and  masterpieces  of  the  periods  of  En- 
lightenment, Storm  and  Stress,  and  Classicism. 
PREREQ;  GER  202  or  equivalent. 

402  Contemporary  German  Literatiu'e  (3) 
Works  of  the  principal  German  writers  of  the  20th 
cenniry.  PREREQ;  GER  202  or  equivalent. 

403  20th-century  German  Masterpieces  (3)  An 
in-depth  analysis  of  the  prose  works  of  three  major 
20th-century  German  writers,  including  Katlca, 
Mann,  Hesse,  Anna  Segbers,  and  Christa  Wolf.  A 
close  reading  of  these  works  will  consider  such 
narrative  techniques  as  point-of-view,  ambiguity, 
and  irony  as  well  as  such  German  intellectual  and 
artistic  contributions  as  E.xpressionism,  psycho- 
analysis, and  the  Bildungsroman.  Taught  in  con- 
junction with  EGE  403. 

404  German  Artists  as  Social  Conscience: 
Postwar  German  Literature  and  Film  (3)  An 
examination  of  the  political  and  social  issues  of 
contemporary  German)'  through  an  analysis  of  lit- 
erary and  cinematic  texts.  Discussion  topics 
include  the  Holocaust,  Nazism,  the  Second  World 
War,  the  Economic  Miracle,  the  Cold  War,  ter- 
rorism, the  feminist  and  peace  movements,  atomic 
warfare,  and  German  reunification  and  its  after- 
math. Taught  in  conjunction  with  EGE  404. 

405  A  Survey  of  German  Film  (3)  An  analysis  of 
German  films  from  Expressionism  to  the  present. 
We  shall  e-xamine  the  films  in  terms  of  their  polit- 
ical and  social  context  and  as  works  of  art. 
Directors  include  Fritz  Lang,  Murnau,  Wiene, 
Fassbinder,  Herzog,  Schlondorft,  von  Trotta,  and 
Wenders.  Taught  in  conjunction  with  EGE  405. 

407  German  Lyric  Poetry  (3)  Modern  German 
poetn'  of  pre-  and  post-World  War  II. 

408  Modem  German  Drama  (3)  A  study  of  the 
various  trends  of  20th  century  German  drama  in 
the  Federal  Republic,  the  former  GDR, 
Switzerland,  and  Austria,  with  a  focus  on  e.xpres- 


♦  Tfiis  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
B  Culmre  cluster 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Foreign  Languages 


sionism,  epic  theater,  and  documentary  theater. 
Taught  in  conjunction  with  EGE  408. 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  German 
Language  and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for 
advanced  students  only.  PREREQ;  Permission  of 
instructor. 

♦  411  Seminar  in  German  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  German  faculty.  PRE- 
REQ^  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412  Seminar  in  German  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topic 
announced  annually  by  the  German  faculty.  PRE- 
REQ;  Permission  of  instructor. 

413  Impact  of  the  Holocaust  on  Literature  and 
Film  (3)  This  course  studies  causes  and  effects  ot 
the  Holocaust  through  literary,  philosophical,  and 
cinematic  works  of  post-war  Europe  and  America. 
Taught  in  coniunction  with  EGE  409. 
Offerings  in  English  (EGE):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture  Cluster  Courses 

■  #  EGE  222  German  Civilization  (3)  An  analy- 
sis of  the  major  contributions  of  German  civiliza- 
tion to  western  culture  in  the  areas  ot  art,  music, 
science,  and  literature.  No  knowledge  of  German 
required. 

■  #  EGE  323  Austrian  Civilization  1848-1938 
(3)  An  interdisciplinary  study  of  Austrian  civiUza- 
tion,  focusing  on  Vienna  1848-1938.  The  relation- 
ship of  selected  cultural  and  intellectual  develop- 
ments to  their  pohtical  and  social  contexts.  This 
course  employs  the  perspective  of  many  disciphnes 
but  is  specifically  concerned  with  the  humanities 
and  visual  arts. 

■  #  EGE  403  20th-Centuiy  German  Master- 
pieces (3)  An  in-depth  analysis  of  the  prose  works 
of  three  major  20th-century  German  writers, 
including  Kafka,  Mann,  Hesse,  Anna  Seghers,  and 
Christa  Wolf  A  close  reading  of  these  works  will 
consider  such  narrative  techniques  as  point-of- 
view,  ambiguity,  and  irony  as  well  as  such  German 
intellecmal  and  artistic  contributions  as 
E.xpressionism,  psychoanalysis,  and  the  Bil- 
dungsroman.  No  knowledge  of  German  required. 

■  #  EGE  404    German  Artists  as  Social 
Conscience:  Postwar  German  Literature  and 
Film  (3)  An  examination  of  the  political  and  social 
issues  of  contemporary  Germany  through  an  analy- 
sis of  literary  and  cinematic  texts.  Discussion  topics 
include  the  Holocaust,  Nazism,  the  Second  World 
War,  the  Economic  Miracle,  the  Cold  War,  terror- 
ism, the  feminist  and  peace  movements,  atomic 
warfare,  and  German  reunification  and  its  after- 
math. No  knowledge  of  German  required. 

■  #  EGE  405  A  Survey  of  German  Fihn  (3)  (arts 
elective  course)  An  analysis  of  German  films  from 
Expressionism  to  the  present.  We  shall  examine 
the  films  in  terms  of  their  political  and  social  con- 
text and  as  works  of  art.  Directors  include  Fritz 
Lang,  Murnau,  Wiene,  Fassbinder,  Herzog, 
Schlondorff,  von  Trotta,  and  Wenders.  No  knowl- 
edge of  German  required. 

#  EGE  408  Modem  German  Drama  (3)  A  study 
of  the  various  trends  of  20th  century  German 
drama  in  the  Federal  Republic,  the  former  GDR, 
Switzerland,  and  Austria,  with  a  focus  on  expres- 
sionism, epic  theater,  and  documentary  theater. 
Taught  in  English.  No  knowledge  of  German 
required. 

#  EGE  409  Impact  of  the  Holocaust  on 
Literature  and  Film  (3)  This  course  studies  the 
causes  and  effects  of  the  Holocaust  through  liter- 
ary, philosophical,  and  cinematic  works  of  post- 
war Europe  and  America.  No  knowledge  of 
German  required. 


GREEK 

Symbol:  GRE 

101-102  Elementary  Greek  Ml  (3)  (3)  Forms, 
grammar,  and  idioms  of  Attic  and  Koine  Greek. 
Readings  in  Septuagint  and  New  Testament 
Greek. 

201  Intermediate  Greek  I  (3)  Readings  in 
Socratic  dialogues  of  Plato. 

202  Intermediate  Greek  II  (3)  Homeric  prosody 
and  grammar.  Reading  of  selected  portions  of  the 
Homeric  Poems. 

♦  301-302  Greek  Reading  I-II  (3)  (3)  Readings 
in  prose  and  verse.  Authors  usually  selected  by 
genre. 

HEBREW 

Symbol:  HBW 

101-102  Elementary  Biblical  Hebrew  III  (3)  (3) 

Forms,  grammar,  and  idioms  ot  Biblical  Hebrew. 

Selected  readings. 

201-202  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew  III  (3) 

(3)  Readings  in  the  prose  and  poetic  documents  of 
the  Bihlia  Hebraica. 

ITALIAN 

Symbol:  ITA 

101-102  Elementary  Italian  I-II  (3)  (3)  Intensive 
drill,  in  class  and  in  the  language  laboratory,  with 
pronunciation,  intonation,  and  basic  linguistic  pat- 
terns. Introduction  to  Italian  culture  through  basic 
dialogues  and  easy-reading  texts. 
201-202  Intermediate  Italian  I-ll  (3)  (3)  Review 
of  Italian  grammar  and  syntax.  Introduction  to 
Italian  literature  through  short  readings  ot  inter- 
mediate difficulty.  Composition  and  conversation 
in  Italian  based  on  reading  assignments.  Language 
laboratory  for  remedial  drill.  PREREQ:  ITA  102 
or  equivalent. 

301-302  Advanced  Italian  Grammar  and 
Conversation  I-II  (3)  (3)  Review  and  mastery  of 
Itahan  grammar,  with  special  emphasis  on  syntac- 
tic structure  and  stylistics,  along  with  intensive 
oral  drills  to  develop  proficiency  in  hstening  com- 
prehension and  speaking  abihty. 
321  Italian  Culture  (3)  An  overview  of  Itahan 
geography,  history,  and  regional  cultures,  along 
with  its  literary,  philosophical,  scientific,  and  artis- 
tic manifestations  and  contributions  to  the  world. 
360  Italian  Cinema  (3)  A  history  of  Itahan  cine- 
ma, as  seen  through  representative  works  of  each 
period/movement. 

400  Survey  of  Italian  Literatiu-e  (3)  High  points 
in  Itahan  literature,  touching  upon  the  most 
important  writers  from  the  beginning  to  the  pre- 
sent day. 

401  Introduction  to  Dante,  Petrarca,  and 
Boccaccio  (3)  A  general  discussion  on  the  impor- 
tance and  influence  of  these  writers  on  Italian  and 
European  literature  and  thought,  as  seen  through 
some  of  their  representative  works. 

402  Contemporary  Italian  Literature  (3)  A  sur- 
vey of  contemporary  Italian  authors  through  some 
representative  selections  of  their  works. 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  Italian  Language 
and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for  advanced  stu- 
dents only.  PREREQ;  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  411  Seminar  in  Italian  I  (3)  Independent  smdy 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  Italian  faculn'.  PRE- 
REQ; Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412  Seminar  in  Italian  II  (3)  Independent 
study  and  research  for  upper-division  students. 
Topics  announced  annually  by  the  Italian  faculty. 
PREREQ;  Permission  of  instructor. 


EIT  221  Italian  Culture  (3)  (In  EngUsh)  An 
overview  of  Itahan  geography,  history,  and  region- 
al culmres,  along  with  its  literary,  philosophical, 
scientific,  and  artistic  manifestations  and  contribu- 
tions to  the  world. 

■  EIT  260  Italian  Cinema  (3)  (In  English)  A 
history  of  Itahan  cinema,  as  seen  through  repre- 
sentative works  of  each  period/movement. 

LATIN 

Symbol:  LAT 

101-102  Elementary  Latin  I-II  (3)  (3)  Forms, 

syntax,  and  Idioms  of  classical  Latin.  Selected 

readings. 

201  Cicero  (3)  Selections  from  the  orations,  let- 
ters, and  essays.  PREREQ;  LAT  101  and  102,  or 
two  years  of  secondary  school  Latin. 

202  Vergil  (3)  Reading  and  analysis  of  celebrated 
portions  of  the  Aeneid.  The  nature  of  Latin  epic 
poetry.  PREREQ;  LAT  201  or  three  years  of  sec- 
ondary school  Latin. 

NOTE:  LAT  202  or  four  years  of  secondary 
school  Latin  is  a  prerequisite  for  all  following 
courses  in  Latin. 

301  Teaching  of  Latin  (3)  Introduction  to  the 
problems,  methods,  and  materials  in  the  teaching 
of  Latin. 

302  The  Latin  Lyric  Poets  (3)  Latin  lyric  poetry 
through  readings  in  Catullus,  the  Odes,  and 
Epodes  of  Horace.  Practice  in  the  composition  of 
l\Tic  poetry. 

303  Advanced  Latin  Prose  Composition  (3) 
Required  of  Latin  majors;  open  to  other  students 
accepted  by  the  instructor.  The  complex  syntacti- 
cal strucmres  of  Latin  of  classical  style. 
Translations  of  Enghsh  into  classical  Latin. 

304  The  Latin  Elegiac  Poets  (3)  Latin  elegiac 
poetry  through  readings  in  Ovid,  Tibullus, 
Lygdamus,  Sulpicia,  and  Propertius.  Practice  in 
the  composition  of  elegiac  poetry. 

♦  305  Reading  Course  in  Latin  (3)  Open  to 
Latin  majors  onlv.  Area  and  content  to  be  deter- 
mined by  the  student's  needs. 
306  Roman  Historians  (3)  Introduction  to 
Roman  historiography.  Readings  in  Livy,  Sallust, 
and  Tacitus. 

401  Roman  Drama  (3)  Origins  and  development 
of  Roman  drama.  Selected  plays  of  Plautus, 
Terence,  and  Seneca. 

402  Roman  Philosophy  (3)  Introduction  to 
Greek  and  Roman  philosophy.  Readings  in 
Cicero,  "Tusculan  Disputations,"  and  Lucretius, 
"De  Rerum  Natura." 

403  Roman  Satire  (3)  Origins  and  development 
of  Roman  satire.  Readings  in  Horace,  Persius,  and 
Juvenal. 

404  The  Latin  Novel  (3)  Readings  in  Petronius, 
Satyncon,  and  Apuleius,  The  Golden  Ass.  Lectures 
and  discussions  of  the  emergence  of  the  novel  as  a 
hterary  form. 

405  Medieval  Latin  (3)  Prose  and  poetry  from 
the  fourth  to  the  17th  centuries. 

406  Latin  Tutorial  Course  (3)  Required  of 
majors  in  Latin  or  Classics;  open  to  other  students 
accepted  by  the  instructor.  Introduction  to  the  his- 
tory of  the  alphabet;  principles  of  historical  and 
comparative  linguistics,  especially  as  apphed  to 
Greek  and  Latin;  and  history  of  the  Latin  lan- 
guage as  seen  in  ancient  authors  and  inscriptions. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
■  Culture  cluster 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


Foreign  Languages 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


^  410  Independent  Studies  in  Latin  Language 
and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for  advanced  stu- 
dents only.  PREREQ^  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  411  Seminar  in  Latin  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  tor  upper-division  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  Latin  faculty.  PRE- 
RE(i  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412  Seminar  in  Latin  (3)  Independent  studv 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  Latin  faculty.  PRE- 
REQi  Permission  of  instructor. 

PORTUGUESE 

Symbol:  FOR 

101-102  Elementary'  Portuguese  I-II  (3)  (3) 

Fundamentals  of  Portuguese  grammar,  syntax,  and 
pronunciation.  Introduction  to  Brazilian  heritage 
and  culture  through  graded  reading  selections. 
201-202  Intermediate  Portuguese  LII  (3)  (3) 
Review  and  continuation  of  basic  Portuguese  with 
emphasis  on  vocabulary  expansion  and  cultural 
insights  through  increased  reading.  Introduction 
to  selected  Portuguese  and  Brazilian  authors. 
PREREQ:  POR  102. 

RUSSL\N 

Symbol:  RUS 

101-102  Elementary  Russian  MI  (3)  (3) 

Fundamentals  of  Russian  language.  Intensive  prac- 
tice in  speaking,  listening,  reading,  and  writing  to 
develop  basic  communication  skills.  Introduction 
to  Russian  culture  through  film  and  multimedia. 
No  previous  knowledge  of  Russian  is  required. 
103  Intensive  Elementary  Russian  I-II  (6) 
Fundamentals  of  Russian  language.  Intensive  prac- 
tice in  speaking,  listening,  reading,  and  writing  to 
develop  basic  communication  skills.  This  acceler- 
ated course  meets  five  daj's  per  week  and  com- 
pletes the  101-102  elementan'  sequence  in  a  single 
semester.  Introduction  to  Russian  culture  through 
film  and  multimedia.  No  previous  knowledge  of 
Russian  is  required. 

201-202  Intermediate  Russian  I-II  (3)  (3)  Review 
and  refinement  of  communicative  skills  through  con- 
tinuing study  of  grammatical  structures  and  vocabu- 
lary expansion.  Composition  and  conversation  based 
on  writings  of  intermediate  difficult)'  and  film  sources. 
Continuing  smdy  of  Russian  culture  through  film  and 
mudimedia.  PREREQ;  RUS  102  or  103. 
203  Intensive  Intermediate  Russian  I-II  (6) 
Reinforcement  and  refinement  of  communicative 
skills  through  the  continuing  study  and  review  of 
grammatical  strucrures.  Extensive  language  labora- 
tory work  is  essential.  The  intermediate  sequence, 
equivalent  to  201-202,  will  be  completed  in  one 
semester.  PREREQ:  RUS  101-102  or  103. 
NOTE:  All  advanced  Uterature  and  civilization 
courses  include  lectures  and  discussion  in  the  for- 
eign language,  and  all  student  papers  and  exami- 
nations must  be  written  in  the  foreign  language. 
301-302  Advanced  Russian  Granunarand 
Composition  I-II  (3)  (3)  The  more  complex 
grammatical  and  syntactical  structures  of  the  lan- 
guage, with  particular  attention  to  stylistics. 
Practice  in  writing  compositions  on  a  more 
advanced  level,  with  emphasis  on  current  usage. 
Regular  use  of  the  tape  program  is  essential.  PRE- 
REQ: RUS  202,  203,  or  equivalent. 
303-304  Advanced  Readings  in  Russian  Literature 
l-II  (3)  (3)  Works  ot  Russian  literature  are  read  and 
analyzed.  PREREQ:  RUS  202,  203,  or  equivalent. 
305-306  Russian  Civilization  I-II  (3)  (3)  (In 
Russian)  A  study  of  the  cultural,  philosophical, 
religious,  political,  and  artistic  contributions  of 
Russia.  PREREQ;  RUS  202,  203,  or  equivalent. 


310  Russian  Literature  in  English  (3)  Survey  of 

Russian  literature  from  its  origin  to  the  present. 
All  works  read  in  Enghsh.  No  knowledge  of 
Russian  required. 

401  The  Russian  Novel  (3)  The  Russian  novel 
and  hterarv  trends  of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries. 
PREREQ:  RUS  202,  203,  or  equivalent. 

402  The  Russian  Drama  (3)  Works  of  the  major 
dramatists  of  the  19th  and  20th  centuries.  PRE- 
REQl  RUS  202,  203,  or  equivalent. 

403  Russian  Poetry  of  the  20th  Century  (3)  A 
study  ot  the  principal  Russian  poets  of  the  20th 
century.  PREREQl  RUS  202,  203,  or  equivalent. 
407-408  Advanced  Oral  Russian  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Intensive  drill  in  the  oral  use  of  the  language  and 
phonetics  to  develop  proficiencv'  in  listening  compre- 
hension and  speaking.  Regular  use  of  the  tape  pro- 
gram is  essential.  PREREQ;  RUS  301  or  equivalent. 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  Russian  Language 
and  Literature  (3)  Special  topics  for  advanced  stu- 
dents only.  PREREQ;  Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  411  Seminar  in  Russian  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  tor  upper-chvision  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  Russian  faculty.  PRE- 
REQ; Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  412  Seminar  in  Russian  (3)  Independent  study 
and  research  for  upper-division  students.  Topics 
announced  annually  by  the  Russian  faculty.  PRE- 
REQ; Permission  of  instructor. 

Offerings  in  English  (ERU):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture  Cluster  Courses 
■  #  ERU  209  Soviet  and  Russian  Culture  (3)  (In 
English)  An  interdisciplinary  course  designed  to 
acquaint  students  with  Russian  culture  and  life  in 
Russia  today.  No  knowledge  of  Russian  required. 

SPANISH 

Symbol:  SPA 

101-102  Elementary  Spanish  MI  (3)  (3) 

Fundamentals  ot  Spanish  geared  to  tacihtate  the 
development  of  functional  proficiencv  at  the 
novice  levels  in  Ustening,  speaking,  reading,  and 
writing  skills.  Introduction  to  Spanish  and  Latin 
.American  culture  through  readings  and  discussion. 
103  Intensive  Elementary  Spanish  (6)  Funda- 
mentals ot  Spanish  grammar,  svntax,  pronuncia- 
tion, and  communication  skills.  This  is  an  acceler- 
ated course  that  meets  five  davs  per  week  and  cov- 
ers the  equivalent  of  SPA  101—102  in  a  single 
semester.  No  prerequisite. 

201-202  Intermediate  Spanish  I-II  (3)  (3)  Spanish 
with  an  emphasis  on  proficiency  development  at  the 
intermediate  level.  Elements  ot  grammar  and  pro- 
nunciation are  introduced  in  class  and  via  laboratory 
work.  Literar\'  and  journalistic  readings  are  utilized 
as  a  basis  for  writing  assignments  and  class  discus- 
sions in  Spanish.  PREREQ;  SPA  102  or  placement. 
NOTE:  All  advanced  courses  above  202  include 
lectures  and  discussion  in  the  foreign  language, 
and  all  student  papers  and  examinations  must  be 
written  in  the  foreign  language. 
205  Intensive  Intermediate  Spanish  (3) 
Reinforcement  of  communication  skills  through 
practice  and  review  ot  grammatical  structures. 
Composition  and  conversation,  reading  trom  a 
variety  of  genres.  This  is  an  accelerated  course  that 
meets  five  times  per  week  and  covers  the  equiva- 
lent of  SP.A  201-202  in  a  single  semester.  PRE- 
REQ; SPA  102  or  103  or  placement. 
301-302  -Advanced  Spanish  Grammar  and 
Conversation  I-II  (3)  (3)  Review  and  mastery  of 
Spanish  grammar,  with  special  emphasis  on  syn- 
tactic structures  and  stylistics,  along  with  intensive 
interaction  to  develop  proficiency  in  listening 


comprehension  and  speaking  ability.  PREREQ; 
SPA  202  or  placement. 

303  Business  Spanish  (3)  Introduction  to  basic 
business  concepts  in  Spanish  in  fields  of  manage- 
ment, banking,  finance,  accounting,  marketing, 
and  international  business.  No  prior  knowledge  of 
business  required.  Practical  course  in  oral  commu- 
nication. Some  interpretation,  translation,  and 
writing  of  business  documents.  PREREQ;  SPA 
301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 

304  Spanish  for  the  Professional  (3)  Spanish  for 
the  professional  in  fields  such  as  social  work, 
immigration,  criminal  justice,  law,  and  medicine. 
Emphasis  on  oral  communication  in  specific,  real- 
life  situations.  Some  interpretations,  translation, 
and  vniting  or  professional  documents.  PREREQ; 
SPA  301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 

305  Spanish  Cinema:  Nation  and  Gender  (3) 
This  course  investigates  the  ways  in  which  films 
participate  in  and  create  debates  about  the  relation- 
ship between  national  identitv  and  gender.  Topics 
include  what  it  means  to  speak  of  a  "national  cine- 
ma," and  where  and  how  issues  of  gender,  sexuali- 
ty, class,  and  ethnicity  interface  in  cinematic  cre- 
ation of  national  identit)'  and  histon,'.  PREREQ; 
SP.A  301-302,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

315  Advanced  Readings  in  Spanish  (3) 
Introductorv'  readings  of  Spanish  and  Spanish- 
American  works  from  a  varietv'  of  sources,  includ- 
ing literary  texts.  Special  attention  to  improvement 
of  grammar,  and  oral  and  written  e.xpression.  PRE- 
REQ; SPA  301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 

320  Civilization  of  Spain  (3)  Major  contributions  of 
Spain.  Cultural,  geographic,  literary,  philosophical, 
and  artistic  manifestations  of  the  Hispanic  world. 
PREREQ;  SPA  301-302  or  penmission  of  instructor. 

321  Civilization  of  Spanish  America  (3)  Cultural, 
geographic,  literary,  philosophical,  and  artistic 
manifestations  of  the  Hispanic -American  world. 
PREREQ;  SP.•^  315  or  permission  of  instructor. 
323  Language  and  Culture  of  Puerto  Rico  (3)  (In 
Spanish)  A  smdy  ot  the  language  and  culture  of 
Puerto  Rico.  Includes  geography,  history,  immigra- 
tion, and  emigration.  Emphasis  on  Puerto  Rican 
Spanish  language  patterns  and  literature.  Study  of 
the  mid-Adantic  Puerto  Rican  community.  PRE- 
REQ; SPA  301-302  or  permission  of  instructor. 

330  Survey  of  Spanish  Literature  (3)  Represen- 
tative selections  of  Spanish  literature  from  its 
beginning  to  the  present.  PREREQ;  SPA  315  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

331  Survey  of  Spanish-American  Literature  (3) 
Representative  selections  of  Spanish-American  lit- 
erawre  from  1492  to  the  present.  PREREQ:  SPA 
315  or  permission  of  instructor. 

365  Spanish  Phonetics  (3)  Description  and  prac- 
tice in  the  sounds  of  the  Spanish  language  and  its 
major  dialectical  differences.  Comparative  analysis 
with  English.  PREREQ;  LIN  230  and  SPA  302. 

400  Spanish  Literattire  to  1550  (3)  Spanish  liter- 
ature of  the  Middle  Ages  and  Renaissance,  includ- 
ing epic,  early  lyric,  prose,  and  theater.  PREREQ; 
SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 

401  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Golden  Age  (3) 
Spanish  Uteramre  of  the  16th  and  17th  centuries: 
mpticism,  drama,  poetry,  and  the  novel.  PRE- 
REQ; SP.A  330  or  permission  ot  instmctor. 

402  Spanish  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age  (3) 
Themes  and  traditions  of  the  comedia.  PREREQ; 
SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
H  Culture  cluster 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Foreign  Languages 


404  Cervantes  (3)  Study  oi  Don  Quixote  and 
Cervantes'  contributions  to  world  literature.  PRE- 
REQi  SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 

405  Modem  Hispanic  Literature  (18th  and  19th 
Centuries)  (3)  Spanish  and  Spanish-American 
thought,  literature,  and  culture  as  revealed  in  out- 
standing works  from  the  neo-Classical  period  to 
the  end  of  the  19th  cenmry.  PREREQ:  SPA  330 
or  331  or  permission  of  instructor. 

406  The  Generation  of  1898  (3)  A  reading  and 
evaluation  of  the  hterary  and  philosophical  contri- 
butions of  writers  such  as  Unamuno,  Baroja, 
Benavente,  and  Valle-lnclan.  PREREQ:  SPA  330 
or  permission  ot  instructor. 

407  Spanish  Literature  Since  the  Civil  War  Period 
(3)  Introduction  to  works  that  represent  Spanish  Ut- 
erawre  from  the  Civil  War  period  to  the  present. 
Authors  studied  include  Arrabal,  Cela,  Delibes, 
Garcia  Lorca,  Goytisolo,  Matute,  Sender,  and  oth- 
ers. PREREQi  SPA  330  or  permission  of  instructor. 

408  Modem  Hispanic  Poetry  (3)  A  survey  of 
major  authors  and  movements  in  Spanish  and 
Spanish-American  poetry  of  the  19th  and  20th  cen- 
turies. Authors  include  Vicente  Aleixandre,  Gustavo 
Adolfo  Becquer,  Ruben  Dario,  Jose  Espronceda, 
Federico  Garcia  Lorca,  Gabriela  Mistral,  and  Pablo 
Nemda.  Movements  include  Romanticism, 
Modernism,  and  the  avant-garde.  PREREQi  SPA 
330  or  331  or  permission  ot  instructor. 

409  Contemporary  Spanish-American  Literature 
(3)  A  study  of  major  authors  and  literary  move- 
ments in  contemporary  Spanish  America,  including 
magical  realism  in  prose  fiction,  theater  of  the 
absurd,  avant-garde  poetry,  and  modern  essays. 
PREREQi  SPA  331  or  permission  of  instructor. 

410  Contemporary  Spanish-American  Prose 
Fiction  (3)  A  focus  on  20th-century  prose  fiction  in 
Spanish  America.  The  works  of  narratists  such  as 
Borges,  Carpentier,  Cortazar,  Fuentes,  and  Garcia 
Marquez  will  be  examined  closely,  in  light  of 
Spanish- American  cultural  and  literary  modalities. 
PREREQi  SPA  331  or  permission  of  instructor. 

411  Modem  Spanish-American  Theater  (3)  A 
study  of  the  theater  as  a  reflection  of  social  reali- 
ties including  the  theater  of  the  absurd;  the 
dynamic  of  play  and  audience.  The  Spanish- 
American  stage  will  be  analyzed  through  its  cul- 
tural, historical,  and  religious  contexts.  PREREQ^ 
SPA  331  or  permission  of  instructor. 

412  Literature  of  the  Hispanic  Caribbean  (3)  An 
analysis  of  the  literature  of  the  Hispanic 
Caribbean,  placing  it  in  its  historical,  geographical, 
and  culmral  context  through  a  survey  of  major 
authors  and  movements.  PREREQ;  SPA  331  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

413  Hispanic  Women  Writers  (3)  An  examina- 
tion of  the  tradition  of  women  writers  and  their 
works  in  Spain  and  Spanish  America  from  the 
17th  centur\'  to  the  present.  Includes  fiction,  poet- 
ry, and  theater.  PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  331  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

415  Film  and  Fiction  of  Post-Civil  War  and 
Post-Franco  Spain  (3)  Fictionalized  perspectives 
of  20th  century  social  realities  since  the  Civd  War. 
Discussion  topics  include  social  criticism,  the  situ- 
ation of  girls  and  women,  the  psychology  of  ado- 
lescence, forms  of  alienation,  and  traumatic  experi- 
ences of  the  war.  PREREQ:  SPA  330  or  331  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

♦  456-457  Hispanic  Literature  Seminar  I-II  (3)  (3) 
Special  topics  for  advanced  students  only,  such  as  pol- 
itics and  literature  in  contemporary  Latin  America, 
the  literature  of  discovery  and  conquest,  the  novel  of 
the  dictator,  and  Spanish  literamre  during  and  after 
Franco.  PRERECL  Permission  of  instructor. 


Offerings  in  English  (ESP):  Interdisciplinary 
and  Culture  Cluster  Courses 

■  #  ESP  219  Culture  and  Civilization  of  Spain 

(3)  A  study  of  the  origins  and  evolution  of  Spanish 
character,  tradition,  and  thought.  The  interrela- 
tionship of  its  history  and  arts.  The  scope  of  its 
contribution  to  Western  culture.  No  knowledge  of 
Spanish  is  required. 

■  #  ESP  222  Culture  and  Civilization  of  Latin 
America  (3)  Cultural,  geographic,  literary,  philo- 
sophical, and  artistic  manifestations  of  the 
Hispanic-American  world.  No  knowledge  of 
Spanish  is  required. 

ESP  305  Spanish  Cinema:  Nation  and  Gender 
(3)  This  course  will  investigate  the  ways  in  which 
films  participate  in  and  create  debates  about  the 
relationship  between  national  identification  and 
gender.  No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 

■  ESP/CLS  311  Contemporary  Latin  American 
Narrative  (3)  An  examination  of  Latin  American 
narrative  (short  story,  novella,  novel,  and  testimo- 
nial literature).  Spanish-  and  Portuguese-language 
writers  from  South  and  Central  America,  Mexico, 
and  the  Caribbean  will  be  studied,  from  the  period 
of  magical  realism  (1950's  and  1960's)  through  the 
present.  They  may  include  Isabel  Allende,  Jorge 
Amado,  Miguel  Angel  Asturias,  Jorge  Luis 
Borges,  Gabriel  Garcia  Marquez,  Clarice 
Lispector,  Elena  Poniatowska,  and  Luis  Rafael 
Sanchez.  No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 

#  ESP  324  Language  and  Culture  of  Puerto  Rico 
(3)  A  study  of  the  language  and  culture  of  Puerto 
Rico.  Includes  geography,  history,  immigration, 
and  emigration.  Emphasis  on  Puerto  Rican 
Spanish  language  patterns  and  literature.  Study  of 
the  mid-Atlantic  Puerto  Rican  community.  No 
knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 

ESP  333  Latina  Writing  (3)  An  examination  of 
the  literary  works  produced  by  Latinas  in  the  20th 
century.  The  smdy  of  this  Uterature  will  include  a 
cross-cultural  approach  that  vnll  elucidate  sociopo- 
litical themes  emerging  from  the  texts.  No  knowl- 
edge of  Spanish  is  required. 
ESP  334  Politics  and  Economics  in  the 
Literatures  of  the  Modem  Americas  (3)  A  com- 
parative historical  and  literary  examination  of 
political  and  economic  issues  reflected  in  20th 
century  U.S.  and  Latin  American  literature.  The 
study  of  representative  texts  of  various  genres  will 
also  elucidate  issues  of  race,  class,  and  gender.  No 
knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 

#  ESP  362  New  World:  America  (3)  The  impact 
the  discovery,  conquest,  and  colonization  of  the 
New  World  had  on  Europe  is  seen  through  diverse 
sources  in  literature,  history,  the  arts,  and  related 
disciplines.  Topics  include  the  trans-Atlantic 
exchange  of  ideas  and  cultures,  indigenous  reli- 
gions, ethic  of  conquest,  evangelization,  cartogra- 
phy, colonial  science,  changing  views  of  humanity, 
and  nature.  Course  includes  a  field  trip  and  guest 
lecturers.  No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 
ESP  403  Introduction  to  Cervantes  and  Don 
Quixote  (3)  Reading  the  ftiU  text  of  Don  Quixote. 
Important  chapters  and  topics  will  be  analyzed. 
Special  emphasis  given  to  problems  of  translation. 
No  knowledge  of  Spanish  is  required. 

ADDITIONAL  LANGUAGES 

191-192  Critical  Language  I-II  (3)  (3)  Self- 
instructional  program  in  one  of  the  seldom-taught 
languages:  Arabic,  Chinese,  Dutch,  Finnish, 
Gaelic,  Japanese,  Korean,  Modern  Greek,  Modern 
Hebrew,  Polish,  Portuguese,  Serbo-Croatian, 
Swedish,  and  Vietnamese.  The  student  works  with 
an  integrated  text  and  tape  program,  and  a  tutor. 


By  permission  of  the  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages.  Not  for  language  requirement. 
193-194  Critical  Language  Ill-rV  (3)  (3) 

Continuation  of  LAN  191-192. 

COURSES  COMMON  TO  ALL 
LANGUAGES 

LAN  305  Introduction  to  Bilingual/Bicultural 
Education  (3)  Introduction  to  the  history,  philoso- 
phy, current  staws,  and  fiiture  directions  of  bUin- 
gual/bicultural  education.  Survey  of  materials,  tech- 
niques, instructional  processes,  and  instructional 
patterns.  Overview  of  testing,  placement,  and  pupd 
evaluation.  PREREQ;  Intermediate  level  proficien- 
cy in  a  second  language  and  LIN  250  or  equivalent. 
LAN  327  Introduction  to  Applied  Linguistics 
for  Foreign  Language  Majors  (3)  An  introduction 
to  applied  hnguistics  structured  to  meet  the  needs 
of  foreign  language  majors  and  fiiture  world  lan- 
guage teachers.  Examples  are  drawn  from  the  lan- 
guage(s)  expertise  of  the  students. 
LAN  401  Teaching  of  Modem  Languages:  K-12 
(3)  Problems,  methods,  and  materials  of  second 
language  acquisition  and  teaching  across  levels. 
Observation  and  participation  in  K-12  classrooms. 
PREREQ;  Completion  of  language  courses 
through  the  advanced  level  and  LIN  230. 
LAN  403  Second  Languages  in  the  Elementary 
School  (3)  Techniques  and  materials  used  in 
teaching  second  languages  in  the  elementary 
school.  Practice  in  the  apphcation  of  these  tech- 
niques and  observation  of  foreign  language  classes. 
PREREQ;  Completion  of  intermediate  level  in 
the  chosen  foreign  language. 

♦  LAN  411  Topical  Seminar  (3)  Specialized 
studies  in  language  and  the  teaching  of  foreign 
languages. 

I  LIN  211  Language  Communities  in  the  United 
States  and  Canada  (3)  Exploration  and  analysis  of 
how  aspects  of  language  usage  (dialect,  "accent," 
bihngualism)  relate  to  language-based  discrimina- 
tion in  the  U.S.  and  Canada  generally.  Emphasis 
is  on  bias,  discrimination,  and  profiling  based  on 
race,  class,  gender,  reUgious  affiliation,  and  ethnic- 
ity. Examples  will  be  drawn  from  mainstream 
media,  including  popular  film  and  television. 
LIN  230  (also  ENG  230)  Introduction  to 
Linguistics  (3)  See  ENG  230. 
LIN  250  Psycholinguistics  (3)  Introduction  to 
the  study  of  relationships  between  language,  gen- 
erative models,  communication  theory,  and  learn- 
ing theory.  Major  emphasis  on  natural  language 
development  and  bdingualism. 

♦  LIN  330  (also  PHI  330)  Introduction  to 
Meaning  (3)  See  PHI  330. 

LIN  360  (also  PHI  360)  Philosophy  of 
Language  (3)  See  PHI  360. 
LIN  380  Language  and  Culture  (3)  Language  as 
an  aspect  of  culture,  using  linguistic-perceptual- 
cognitive  categories;  social  and  psychological 
aspects  of  language.  PREREQ;  LIN  230  or  LIN 
327,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

♦  LIN  411-412  Seminar  in  Linguistics  (3)  (3) 
Specialized  studies  in  linguistics.  Topics 
announced  annually.  PREREQ;  LIN  230  or  LIN 
372,  or  at  least  junior  standing. 

LIN  415  (also  COM  415)  General  Semantics  (3) 
See  COM  415. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
H  Culture  cluster 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 
I    Diverse  communities  course 


Geography  and  Plannning 


School  of  Business  and  Pubhc  Affairs 


Department  of  Geography  and  Planning 

103  Rubv  Jones  HaU 
610-436-2343 
Joan  M.  Welch,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Lewandowski,  Rengert,  Tachovsky,  Welch 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR:  Grassel 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Fasic,  Liu 

Geography  and  Planning  is  an  academic  discipline  that  integrates  the 
physical  and  social  sciences.  Students  study  the  patterns  and  processes 
of  human  and  physical  phenomena  in  relationship  to  each  other. 
Students  gain  knowledge  that  can  be  applied  to  solving  societal,  eco- 
nomic, and  environmental  problems  and  to  planning  for  the  fiiture, 
whether  they  are  taking  general  education  or  elective  courses,  acquir- 
ing specialized  preparation  needed  for  working  in  geography  and 
planning  and  related  fields,  or  meeting  particular  needs  in  combina- 
tion with  other  majors  in  arts  and  sciences  or  professional  fields. 
The  field  of  geography  assists  students  in  comprehending  the  broad 
scope  of  the  physical,  cultural,  demographic,  and  economic  environ- 
ments on  local,  national,  and  global  scales.  Geography  courses  develop 
skills  and  organize  knowledge  from  various  disciplines,  and  enable  sm- 
dents  to  examine  the  integrated  whole  of  a  people  with  reference  to 
habitat  and  interspatial  relationships.  Specialized  skills,  which  utilize 
geographic  information  systems  technology,  provide  salable  skills  for 
students  interested  in  technical  careers  and  complement  courses  that 
teach  knowledge  of  environmental  and  human  situations  and  problems. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  GEOGRAPHY 

The  bachelor  ot  arts  in  geography  offers  a  choice  of  four  emphases 
(called  "tracks"):  traditional  geography  (cultural,  environmental,  and 
economic  geography  including  an  international  perspective),  geo- 
graphic analysis,  urban/regional  planning,  and  elective  teacher  certifi- 
cation (citizenship  education,  formerly  social  studies).  The  geographic 
analysis  and  urban/regional  planning  areas  emphasize  speciaUzed  skill 
development.  Internships  are  available  and  are  recommended  for  qual- 
ified students. 

Geography  majors,  as  part  of  their  general  education  requirements, 
must  take  GEO  101  or  103  and  achieve  a  grade  of  2.0  or  better.  Thev 
also  must  pass  WRT  120  and  121  with  a  grade  of  2.0  or  better. 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement         0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Additional  Social  Science  Courses  9  semester  hours 

4.  Geography  Core  Requirements  33  semester  hours 
Required:'GEO  102,  225,  310,  326,  400,  and 

404  (18  credits) 

Track  requirements  taken  under  advisement 

For  geography  track:  five  courses  from  specified 

groups,  selected  under  ad\isement  (15  credits) 

OR 

For  urban/regional  planning  track:  GEO  214,  and 

two  other  planning  or  GIS  courses  (GEO  320, 

322,  324,  331,  336,  or  403)  and  an  additional 

two  courses  from  a  specified  list,  selected  under 

advisement  (15  credits) 

OR 

For  geographic  analysis  track:  three  courses, 

GEO  324,  328,  and  424,  plus  two  courses 

from  specified  lists  of  courses,  selected  under 

advisement  (15  credits) 

OR 

For  elective  teacher  certification  track  (citizenship 

education,  formerly  social  studies):  GEO  204 

(interdisciplinary),  GEO  301,  GEO  312  (diverse 

communities),  plus  two  additional  geography 

courses.  Most  recommended  are  GEO  101,  213, 

214,  220,  230,  232,  302,  303,  324  (15  credits). 

Under  advisement,  cognates  and  free  electives  are 

selected  to  complete  remaining  teacher  certifica- 


tion requirements  and  prepare  for  standardized 
examination. 

5.  Cognate  Courses  15  semester  hours 
Courses  (taken  under  advisement)  that  are 

specifically  related  to  identified  career 
aspirations,  and  chosen  outside  general 
requirements,  or  geography  core 
Required  of  all  majors:  ENG  368  or  371 
Required  for  urban/regional  planning  track: 
Three  courses  selected  from  PSC  201,  202, 
373,  375  or  other  related  pubhc  management 
or  geography  course,  plus  one  CSC  course 
above  110  level 

Required  of  geographic  analysis  track:  CSC 
110  or  above  and  three  additional  courses 
selected  under  advisement 

6.  Free  Electives  4-19  semester  hours 
Elective  Citizenship  Education  Teacher  Certification  Program 
This  degree  track  (formerly  social  smdies)  allows  students  to  elect 
courses  toward  teacher  certification  requirements  that  also  quahfy  as 
general  education,  cognate,  and  free  elective  selections. 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Recommended  selections  for  this  track  include 

COM  230,  GEO  204  (interdisciplinary  requirement), 
GEO  312  (diverse  communities  requirement), 
CLS  165  and  HIS  101  (humanities  requirement), 
MAT  103,  PSC  100  and  ECO  101  (behavioral 
and  social  sciences  requirement),  and  art  history 
or  music  histor)-  (arts  requirement).  Recommended 
free  electives:  EDF  100,  EDP  250,  MAT  104. 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement  1-15  semester  hours 

3.  Geography  Core  (see  above)  18  semester  hours 

4.  Additional  Geography  Courses  9  semester  hours 
GEO  301  and  two  additional  courses  from 

recommended  list 

5.  Additional  Cognates  33  semester  hours 
EDP  351,  EDS  306,  SSC  331,  EDA  341, 

EDS  411,  EDS  412,  HIS  102,  HIS  150,  SOC  200 

Minor  in  Geography  18  semester  hours 

The  geography  minor  provides  a  flexible  geography  focus  that  com- 
bines well  with  other  majors. 

It  consists  of  18  semester  hours  of  geography  courses,  no  more  than 
six  hours  of  which  may  be  at  the  100  level.  The  department  will 
advise  students  on  selection  of  courses  appropriate  to  their  needs. 
Clusters  of  courses  mav  involve  environmental  geograph}',  spatial 
technology,  international  courses,  or  courses  especially  suitable  as 
preparation  for  social  studies  education,  for  example. 

Minor  in  Business  Geographies  and  18  semester  hours 

Information  Systems 

The  minor  program  in  planning  allows  smdents  from  other  majors  to 
acquire  geography  and  planning  skills  and  to  expand  their  career  pos- 
sibilities to  include  such  areas  as  land  planning  and  management,  con- 
servation of  resources,  location  of  commerce  and  industry,  and  county 
or  other  local  government. 

1.  Required  Courses:  15  semester  hours 
ECO  251,  252;  GEO  325,  425;  MIS  300 

2.  Elective  Courses  (taken  under  advisement  3  semester  hours 
from  the  department) 

Usually  recommended  courses  include  GEO  324, 
415,  424,  and  427. 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Geography  and  Planning 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
GEOGRAPHY 

Symbol:  GEO 

101  World  Geography  (3)  The  scope  of  geography 
and  understanding  of  the  world's  regions  generated 
by  it.  fiuman  societ)'  is  examined  in  a  frame  of  spa- 
tial, environmental,  and  resource  factors.  Map  skills 
and  other  "tools"  of  geography  are  introduced. 

102  Physical  Geography  (3)  The  study  of  basic 
principles  of  physical  geography  and  of  relation- 
ships between  components  of  the  total  earth  envi- 
ronment. 

103  Human  Geography  (3)  An  inquiry  into  the 
theoretical  and  applied  approaches  to  the  study  ot 
human  spatial  behavior  and  the  distribution  of 
social  problems. 

200  Patterns  of  World  Cultures  (3)  An  examina- 
tion of  selected,  non-Western  areas,  representing 
different  stages  of  development,  in  the  contempo- 
raneous world.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  cultural 
adaptation,  innovation,  and  achievement  of  human 
occupants  of  these  areas. 

t  #  204  Introduction  to  Urban  Studies  (3)  An 
examination  of  the  breadth  of  urban  studies  from 
the  perspectives  of  many  social  science  disciplines. 
Philadelphia  is  emphasized  as  an  object  of  percep- 
tion, as  a  place  of  life  and  livelihood,  and  as  an 
example  of  continual  change  in  the  urban  environ- 
ment. PREREQiWRT  121. 
205  Geographic  Influences  in  American  History 
(3)  Geographic  characteristics  that  figure  promi- 
nently in  the  discover)'  and  colonization  of 
America,  and  on  the  progressive  development  of 
the  United  States  up  to  the  20th  century. 

213  GIS  for  the  Social  Sciences  (3)  A  course  in 
mapping  in  the  political,  economic,  and  social 
featuers  of  places  and  the  analysis  of  those  maps 
using  the  Arc  View  component  of  ESRI's  ARC 
GIS.  Introductory  course  but  with  hands-on  tech- 
nology experience;  sutable  for  majors  in  political 
science,  social  work,  eocnomics,  and  other  social 
science  disciplines. 

214  Introduction  to  Planning  (3)  The  methods  of 
analyzing  problems  of  urban  and  regional  planning. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  systems  of  housing,  recre- 
ation, transportation,  industry,  and  commerce. 

215  GIS  for  Criminal  Justice  (3)  A  course  in 
crime  mapping  and  the  analysis  of  maps  of  crime 
patterns,  police  services,  locations  of  criminal  inci- 
dents, offenders'  geographical  behaviors,  and  spa- 
tial trends  in  crime. 

216  Planning  for  Public  Services  (3)  A  study  of  the 
quality  of  individual  life.  Analj-sis  of  geographic  vari- 
ation in  social  weU  being,  problems  of  social  systems 
monitoring,  and  social  indicators  used  in  planning. 
220  Economic  Geography  (3)  This  course  is  con- 
cerned with  the  spatial  patterns  ot  economic  activ- 
ities, including  production,  consumption,  and  set- 
dement.  It  provides  an  understanding  of  their 
location  and  the  processes  of  change.  The  course  is 
international  in  scope,  with  an  emphasis  on  the 
global  economy. 

225  Introduction  to  Maps  and  Remote  Sensing 
(3)  Introduction  to  mapping  and  remote  sensing. 
Thorough  exposure  to  grid  coordinate  systems, 
representative  fractions/scale,  map  projections,  and 
mapping  systems.  Also,  aerial  photographs,  digital 
orthophotos,  satelUte  images,  and  computers  as 
tools. 

230  Conservation  of  Natural  Resources  (3)  An 
inquiry  into  the  type,  size,  and  distribution  of  natur- 
al resources,  and  into  the  problems  of  resource  man- 
agement. Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  United  States. 


232  Environmental  Crises  (3)  The  nature  and 
dimensions  of  environmental  problems  with  an 
emphasis  on  endangered  life-support  systems. 
Aspects  of  natural  and  social  environment  systems 
and  their  mutual  interrelationships. 
236  Climatology  (3)  Climatic  variations  on  the 
earth  and  their  classification  into  regional  types. 
Relationships  of  plants,  soils,  and  cultures  to  types 
of  climate.  PREREQ^  GEO  102  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

252  Political  Geography  (3)  A  study  of  selected 
major  themes  in  political  geography  at  the  regional 
and  international  levels. 

301  United  States  and  Canada  (3)  An  examina- 
tion of  the  complexity  and  diversity  of  the  physical 
and  human  landscapes  of  the  U.S.  and  Canada. 
Both  rural  and  urban  geography  are  studied  with 
an  emphasis  on  recent  geographic  changes  ot 
influence — such  as  the  shift  from  an  emphasis  on 
production  to  one  on  service  and  consumption,  the 
growing  importance  of  ciries,  and  increasing  racial 
and  ethnic  diversity. 

■  302  Latin  America  (3)  Central  and  South 
America  are  studied  with  emphasis  on  geographic 
understanding  of  the  major  sources  of  change  in 
recent  times.  The  course  focuses  on  selected  indi- 
vidual countries  in  addition  to  presentation  of  the 
region  as  a  whole. 

■  303  Europe  (3)  A  regional  study  of  Europe, 
excluding  the  former  U.S.S.R.  Includes  a  macro- 
study  of  the  continent  and  sequential  microstudies 
of  culturalized  landscapes. 

■  304  The  Former  Soviet  Union  (3)  A  regional 
study  of  European  and  Asiatic  U.S.S.R.  with 
analysis  of  geographic  factors  that  contribute  to  its 
strengths  and  weaknesses  as  a  major  world  power. 
PREREQiGEO  101  or  permission  of  instructor. 
310  Population  Problems  (3)  The  dynamic 
processes  of  population  change  (fertility,  mortality, 
and  migration)  and  the  resultant  changes  in  popu- 
lation distribution  and  composition.  In  addition  to 
a  substantive  study  of  these  topics,  students  are 
introduced  to  the  use  of  primary  data  sources  for 
demographic  description  and  policy  recommenda- 
tion. 

I  312  Urban  Geography  (3)  Analysis  qf  patterns, 
processes,  and  consequences  of  urban  growth  and 
development.  Theory  of  systems,  size,  spacing,  and 
functions  of  cities.  Students  wlU  conduct  outside 
analysis  using  real  data. 

320  Land  Use  Planning  (3)  An  inquiry  into  the 
development  of  comprehensive  land  use  studies  by 
governmental  and  private  agencies,  emphasizing 
the  development  of  skills  in  problem  identification 
and  resolurion.  PREREQi  GEO  214  or  permis- 
sion of  instructor. 

322  Land  Development  Controls  (3)  An  insight 
into  the  "why"  and  "how"  of  land  development, 
emphasizing  the  role  of  local  government  in  zon- 
ing, subdivision  regulation,  and  other  land  regula- 
tions. PREREQi  GEO  214  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

324  Introduction  to  Geographic  Information 
Systems  (3)  Data  sources  and  analysis  techniques 
used  in  the  planning  process,  with  emphasis  on 
appropriate  applications.  Students  receive  consid- 
erable experience  in  using  geographic  information 
systems  technology  to  solve  real-world  problems. 

325  Business  Geographies  (3)  This  course  pro- 
vides a  conceptual  overview  of  geographical  infor- 
mation systems  as  well  as  hands-on  experience  of 
software  systems  used  in  developing  business  man- 
agement and  marketing  strategies.  Attention  is 
focused  on  using  GIS  technology  as  an  analysis 


tool  to  improve  decision  making.  Designed  pri- . 
marily  for  marketing  majors. 
326  Geographical  Analysis  (3)  Applications  of 
basic  statistical  techniques  to  problems  of  spatial  sig- 
nificance, emphasizing  the  adaptation  of  technique 
to  problem,  and  the  understanding  and  interpreta- 
tion of  specific  analytical  methods  as  applied  to  real- 
world  simarions.  PREREQ:  MAT  103  or  higher- 
level  mathematics  course  must  he  passed  with  a  2.0 
or  better  prior  to  enrollment  in  GEO  326. 
328  Computer  Graphics  (3)  Structured  to  devel- 
op skills  in  the  design  and  use  ot  analytical  and 
computer-mapping  systems,  the  course  emphasizes 
the  techniques  of  spatial  problem  resolution  and 
display. 

330  Population  Analysis  (3)  A  course  designed  to 
develop  skills  in  demographic  research,  emphasiz- 
ing interrelationships  of  population  processes,  use 
and  limitation  of  data  sources,  and  the  under- 
standing and  interpretation  of  specific  demograph- 
ic and  related  analnical  methods.  PREREQi 
GEO  310  or  permission  of  instructor. 

331  Transportation  Planning  (3)  Important  issues, 
descriptive  and  analytical,  facing  urban  and  subur- 
ban transportation  are  studied.  Emplovment  ot  the 
planning  process  emphasizes  use  ot  analytical  tools. 
336  Environmental  Planning  (3)  Introduction  to 
the  concepts  and  tools  of  environmental  planning 
which  include  landscape  form  and  function  in 
planning.  Applications  to  local  and  regional  issues 
are  stressed. 

338  Computer  Applications  in  Social  Research 
(3)  The  use  of  e.xisring  and  student-generated  pro- 
gramming software  in  the  design  and  execution  ot 
social  research. 

341  Landscape  Analysis  (3)  The  study  of  contem- 
porary geographiciJ  patterns  of  plants  and  animals, 
and  the  overall  processes  which  influence  landscape 
development  and  characteristics,  such  as  climatic  and 
geomorphic  events,  and  anthropogenic  activities. 

400  Senior  Seminar  in  Geography  (3)  The  study 
of  historical  and  contemporary  trends  in  geogra- 
phy, the  design,  preparation,  and  defense  of  a 
research  proposal. 

401  Cartography  (4)  A  laboratory  course  to  devel- 
op proficiency  in  the  design,  construction,  and 
appropriate  application  of  maps  and  map-related 
graphics.  PREREQ^  GEO  225  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

♦  402  Topical  Seminar  in  Geography  (3) 
Intensive  examination  of  a  selected  area  ot  study  in 
the  field  of  geography.  Topics  will  be  announced 
at  the  time  of  offering.  Course  may  be  taken  more 
than  once  when  different  topics  are  presented. 
PREREQi  Junior  or  senior  geography  major  or 
consent  of  instructor. 

403  Planning  Design  (3)  Selected  experiences 
designed  to  assist  the  student  (either  as  an  individ- 
ual or  as  a  member  of  a  group)  in  developing  pro- 
ficiency in  information-providing  techniques. 

404  Senior  Project  in  Geography  (3)  The  execu- 
tion of  the  research  proposal  (designed  in  GEO 
400)  as  an  acceptable  departmental  senior  research 
paper.  PREREQ:  GEO  400. 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  Geography  (3) 
Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  geogra- 
phy. PREREQ;  Permission  of  department  chair- 
person. 

♦  415  Internship  in  Geography  and  Planning 
(1-12)  Practical  job  experience  in  applying  geo- 


I  Diverse  communities  course 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 
■  Culture  cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  tor  credit. 


Geology  and  Astronomy 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


graphic  theor\',  executing  substantive  research,  and 
engaging  in  community  service  in  selected  off- 
campus  situations.  Open  only  to  upper-division 
B.A.  majors  and  minors  in  geography/  planning 
with  permission  of  department  chairperson. 

424  Geographic  Information  Systems  Applica- 
tions (3)  A  course  to  advance  the  student's  knowl- 
edge ot  the  design  and  implementation  of  geo- 
graphic information  systems.  PREREQ^  GEO 
324  or  permission  of  instructor. 

425  GIS:  Business  Applications  (3)  Intensive  use 
of  Geographical  Information  Systems  (GIS)  in  the 
business  emironment  to  aid  in  better  sales  and 
marketing  decisions.  Course  provides  a  conceptual 
overview  of  database  management  systems  from 
MIS  to  geodatabases  and  their  integration  with  a 
GIS.  Case  studies  draw  numerous  examples  from 
various  businesses.  Student  tutorials  provide 
hands-on  opportunities  for  students  to  experience 


and  learn  how  to  use  GIS  within  a  business  prob- 
lem-solving framework.  PREREQ^  GEO  325  or 
permission  ot  instructor. 

427  Geodatabase  Systems  (3)  The  course  teaches 
students  the  concepts  and  design  of  geographic 
database  systems  in  the  process  of  geographic 
analysis. 

#  IND  401  Environmental  Applications  of  GIS 
(3)  Students  are  introduced  to  regional  environ- 
mental problem  solving  based  on  interdisciplinary, 
scientific  data  using  Geographic  Information 
Systems  (GIS).  Background  in  one  of  the  natural 
or  applied  sciences  is  presumed,  and  students 
without  such  backgrounds  should  contact  one  of 
the  instructors  before  scheduling.  Most  relevant 
lecture  material  is  handled  as  readings  outside  of 
class,  and  class  time  is  devoted  largely  to  environ- 
mental analysis  using  ArcViewGIS.  One  half  day 
field  trip  is  required  (1,2)  PREREQi  Major  in 


BIO,  CHE,  ENV,  ESS,  GEO,  or  PHY,  with  at 
least  15  college  credits  earned  in  one  of  these  dis- 
ciphnes,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
IND  405  Modeling  of  Earth  Systems  (3)  The 

course  focuses  on  the  use  of  models  to  understand 
global  environmental  change.  It  offers  an  in-depth 
exposure  to  the  principles  of  modeling  as  well  as  an 
introduction  to  various  models  that  represent  com- 
ponents of  the  earth's  systems.  The  elements  of 
model  construction  are  examined  including  princi- 
ples of  simlification,  data  collection,  variable  identi- 
fication, and  parameter  specifications.  Team  taught 
with  the  Department  ot  Geology  and  Astronomy. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 

207  Boucher  Hall 

610-436-2727 

C.  Gil  Wiswall,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Busch,  Srogi,  Stolar,  Wiswall 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Good,  Johnson,  Lutz,  Smith 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Fisher,  Gagne,  Pandya 

The  Department  ot  Geology  and  Astronomy  prepares  students  for 
careers  in  geoscience  and  geoscience  education.  Geoscience  is  an  inte- 
grated study  of  the  Earth,  its  geologic  history,  composition  and  struc- 
ture, resources,  natural  hazards,  atmosphere  and  oceans,  and  its  envi- 
ronment in  space.  Geoscientists  study  such  phenomena  as  earth- 
quakes, landshdes,  floods,  volcanoes,  coastal  erosion,  and  how  these 
natural  hazards  impact  humans.  Geoscientists  explore  for  mineral, 
energy,  and  water  supplies.  Geoscientists  also  attempt  to  make  predic- 
tions about  Earth's  future  based  on  the  past.  Since  most  human  activi- 
ties are  related  to  interaction  with  the  physical  components  of  Earth, 
geoscience  plays  a  unique  and  essential  role  in  today's  rapidly  chang- 
ing world.  The  Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy  offers  two 
bachelor  of  science  degree  programs  and  a  certification  program  in 
general  science.  (A  degree  in  astronomy  is  not  available.)  AH  programs 
emphasize  analytical  skills  and  build  on  course  work  in  mathematics, 
chemistry,  physics,  and  statistics.  Written  and  oral  communication  is 
emphasized  in  a  majorit)'  of  the  course  work. 

1.  The  B.S.  in  GEOSCIENCE  program  offers  two  areas  of  concen- 
tration and  prepares  recipients  for  a  career  as  a  professional  geosci- 
entist.  Students  completing  either  bachelor  of  science  degree  pro- 
gram possess  the  educational  requirements  to  seek  licensure  as  cer- 
tified professional  geologists.  The  geology  concentration  leads  to 
occupations  in  geology,  geochemistry,  and  the  environmental 
industry  as  well  as  for  studies  toward  advanced  degrees.  Its  curricu- 
lum emphasizes  depth  in  the  traditional  disciphnes  of  geology 
including  mineralogy,  rock  formation,  paleontology,  structural 
geology,  and  surface  and  tectonic  processes.  The  earth  systems 
concentration  is  intended  for  students  who  want  to  concentrate 
on  a  broader  understanding  of  geoscience  and  human  interaction 
with  the  environment.  This  concentration  is  excellent  preparation 
for  students  pursuing  careers  in  fields  such  as  resource  manage- 
ment or  environmental  law.  In  addition  to  the  geology  core,  stu- 
dents take  required  courses  in  oceanography,  meteorolog)',  and 
astronomy. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  EDUCATION  in  EARTH  AND  SPACE  SCI- 
ENCES is  a  professional  degree  program  designed  to  prepare  cer- 
tified secondary  school  teachers  with  an  overall  science  exposure 


and  specialization  in  the  earth  and  space  sciences.  The  program 
meets  all  guidelines  established  by  the  National  Council  for 
Accreditation  of  Teacher  Education  (NCATE),  the  Pennsylvania 
Department  of  Education  (PDE),  and  the  National  Science 
Teachers'  Association  (NSTA)  for  earth  and  space  science  certifi- 
cation. 
3.  The  certification  program  in  GENERAL  SCIENCE  enables 
recipients  to  teach  science  in  grades  6-9.  The  certification  program 
meets  all  guidelines  established  by  the  National  Council  for 
Accreditation  of  Teacher  Education  (NCATE)  and  the 
Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education  (PDE). 
A  cooperative  five-year  program  with  Pennsylvania  State  University 
leading  to  a  degree  in  engineering  with  several  geoscience  specialties  is 
available.  For  further  information  about  this  program,  refer  to  the 
Physics  and  Pre-Engineering  section  of  this  catalog. 
All  students  must  consult  with  their  adviser  regularly  to  ensure  timely 
completion  of  the  degree.  Those  in  the  B.S.  in  education  program  will 
have  a  second  adviser  in  the  School  of  Education  to  help  the  student 
meet  the  secondary  education  requirements. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  ALL  BACHELOR 
DEGREE  PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36—39 

2.  Math  Requirement 
MAT  121 

3.  Science  Cognate  Requirements 
CHE  103  and  CRL  103,  PHi'  130  or  170 

4.  Geoscience  Courses 
ESS  101,  201,  204,  213,  302,  331,  343,  405, 
420,  and  450 

5.  A  grade  of  C-  or  bener  must  be  achieved  for  all  required  courses 
within  the  department  including  the  required  electives,  as  well  as 
those  in  biology,  chemistry,  computer  science,  math,  and  physics. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  GEOSCIENCE 

Concentration  in  Geology 

1.  Additional  Math  and  Computer  Science 
Requirements 

MAT  108  or  161  and  ESS  321  or  IND  401 
or  GEO  324  or  325  or  CSC  115  or  higher 

2.  Required  Courses 
ESS  201,  439,  and  ESS/BIO/EN V  102 

3.  Geolog}-  and  Astronomy  Electives 
Any  three  ESS  courses  at  the  200,  300,  or 
40()  level 


48  semester  hours 
3  semester  hours 

8  semester  hours 

27  semester  hours 


6-7  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Geology  and  Astronomy 


Concentration  in  Earth  Systems 

1.  Additional  Alath  Requirement 
MAT  105  or  no 

2.  Required  Courses 

ESS  111,  201  or  355,  270,  330,  and 

ESS/BIO/ENV  102 

Geology  and  Astronomy  Electives 


3  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


Any  nvo  ESS  courses  at  the  200,  300,  or  400  level 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  IN  EARTH 
AND  SPACE  SCIENCES 

All  students  seeidng  a  B.S.Ed,  must  formally  apply  for  admission  to 
teacher  education.  (See  "Teaching  Certification  Programs'"  in  this  cat- 
alog.) Only  those  students  formally  admitted  to  teacher  education  will 
be  eligible  to  enroU  in  SCE/SCB  350.  Once  admitted  to  teacher  edu- 
cation, students  must  maintain  the  minimum  GPA  specified  by  the 
School  of  Education  in  order  to  continue  taking  advanced  professional 
course  work.  If  a  student  falls  below  the  minimum  GPA,  he  or  she 
will  be  permitted  to  retake  -  in  accordance  with  Universit)'  policy  - 
professional  course  work  that  contributed  to  the  tall  below  the  mini- 
mum GPA  but  will  not  be  permitted  to  take  additional  work  until  the 
minimum  is  met. 

1.  Secondare  Education  Requirements,  30  semester  hours 
EDF  100,  EDP  250  and  351,  EDA/EDR  341, 

EDS  306,  SCE  or  SCB  350,  EDS  411  and  412 

2.  Additional  Math  Requirements  3  semester  hours 
MAT  105  or  110 

3.  Additional  Science  Cognates  3  semester  hours 
BIO  110  (or  BIO  100  OTth  a  grade  of  A-  or 

better) 

4.  Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 
ESS  111,  201  or  355,  270,  and  330 

5.  Students  are  encouraged  to  obtain  certification  in  general  science 
and/or  environmental  education  in  addition  to  earth  and  space  sci- 
ence. See  pages  145-147  for  requirements. 


Minor  Programs  15  semester  hours 

Students  may  choose  to  minor  in  any  of  the  following  programs. 
Courses  are  selected  with  the  approval  of  the  department  chairperson. 

1 .  Astronomy 

ESS  111  plus  four  other  astronomy  courses  (15) 

2.  Earth  Science 

ESS  101,  111,  230,  and  270,  plus  one  course  in  earth  science  (15) 

3.  Geology 

ESS  101  plus  four  other  geology  courses  (15) 

CERTIFICATION  IN  GENERAL  SCIENCE 

Students  seeking  certification  in  general  science  must  either  be 
enrolled  in  a  B.S.Ed,  program  or  hold  a  teaching  certificate. 

1.  Math  Requirements,  9-10  semester  hours 
CSW  101  (Internet  emphasis  only),  CSC  115, 

or  CSC  141;  JkL^T  121,  and  lOS'or  161  or  above 

2.  Science  Core  Requirements  40  semester  hours 
BIO  110,  215,  217;  CHE/CRL  103,  104; 

ESS  101,  111,  230,  270;  PHY  130  or  170, 
140  or  180 

3.  Interdisciplinarv  Requirements 
One  of  the  foUowing:  BIO  102  or  ENV  102 
or  ESS  102;  SCB  210 

4.  Field,  Research,  Technology  Requirements 
Students  must  take  a  minimum  of  12  additional 
semester  hours  in  biolog}',  chemistr\',  earth  and 
space  science,  health,  or  physics  from  the 
approved  list  obtained  from  the  adviser.  Courses 
must  be  taken  in  at  least  two  departments.  The 
sequence  of  courses  must  be  approved  in  advance 
by  the  ad\iser  of  the  certification  program  and 
should  be  based  on  the  student's  interests  and 
choice  of  certification  examinations.  Students  must 
select  courses  to  include  field  work,  research,  and 
technolog}'  components. 


3  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
GEOLOGY  AND  ASTRONOMY 

S\-mbol:  ESS  unless  otherwise  shown 

101  Introduction  to  Geology  (3)  The  earth's 
composition  and  history-  the  processes  that  occur 
on  and  within  the  earth.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and 
two  hours  of  lab. 

#  102  Humans  and  the  Environment  (3)  A  study 
of  the  abilit\'  ot  humans  to  survive  and  maintain 
their  life  qualit)",  considering  the  limited  resources 
and  recjxling  capacity  of  planet  Earth.  Note: 
Students  completing  ESS  102  may  not  take  BIO 

102  or  ENV  102  for  credit. 

Ill  General  Astronomy  (3)  A  descriptive  course, 
including  the  composition  and  evolution  of  solar 
and  stellar  sj'stems.  Two  hours  of  lecture  and  two 
hours  of  lab. 

130  Our  Coastal  Oceans  (3)  This  course  exam- 
ines the  phwical  and  biological  processes  at  work 
in  the  coastal  oceans.  The  content  will  be  dis- 
cussed in  the  framework  of  regional  examples. 
170  Introduction  to  Our  Atmosphere  (3)  WTiy  is 
the  sk\'  blue?  What  will  the  weather  be  tomorrow? 
What  makes  tornadoes?  How  did  the  ozone  hole 
develop?  What  is  the  greenhouse  eftect?  This  class 
will  use  these  questions  and  others  to  investigate 
the  basic  physical  processes  that  determine  the 
weather  and  climate  on  earth.  A  student  who  has 
successfiilly  completed  ESS  270  may  not  subse- 
quently receive  credit  for  ESS  170. 
201  Fundamentals  of  Techniques  in  Geology  (3) 
An  introduction  to  the  basic  methods  of  geologic 
data  collection,  analysis,  and  presentation;  litera- 


ture research;  and  report  \vriting.  One  weekend 
field  trip  is  required.  PREREQi  ESS  101. 
204  Historical  Geology  (3)  The  geologic  history 
of  Earth  inferred  hv  analraing  and  evaluating  the 
geologic  record  ot  its  phv'sical  and  biological 
changes  on  local,  regional,  and  global  scales. 
Laboratory'  included.  PREREC^  ESS  101. 
206  Gemstones  (3)  A  survey  of  gem  formation, 
identification,  fashioning,  and  evaluation.  For  the 
general  student.  Demonstrations,  specimens,  and 
field  trips  complement  lecture  topics.  No  science 
background  is  assumed. 

213  Environmental  Geochemistry  (3)  An  intro- 
duction to  principles  and  applications  of  geochem- 
istT)'  to  geologic  systems,  including  surface  and 
ground  waters,  soils,  and  rocks.  PREREQi  CHE 
103,  ESS  101. 

236  Envirorunental  Geology  (3)  TTie  application  of 
geological  information  to  human  problems  encoun- 
tered in  natural  phenomena,  such  as  flooding,  earth- 
quakes, coastal  hazards,  and  man-made  concerns, 
including  waste  disposal,  land  use,  and  global  change. 
PREREQi  ESS  101  or  permission  of  insttuctor. 
270  Introduction  to  Meteorology  (3)  A  study  of 
the  principles  governing  the  earth's  atmosphere 
and  how  these  principles  determine  weather  con- 
ditions. PREREQi  Six  hours  of  science  and  MAT 
105  or  higher. 

302  Mineralogy  (3)  In-depth  survey  of  the  forma- 
tion, identification,  classification,  and  uses  of  miner- 
als. Principles  of  symmetr)-,  cr\'stallography,  crj'stal 
chemistry,  and  optical  mineralogy.  Laboratory  and 
field  examination  and  analysis  of  minerals.  PRE- 
REQi ESS  101,  204,  and  CHE  103  or  equivalent. 


307  Geologj'  of  the  Solar  System  (3)  The  geolo- 
gy, origin,  evolution,  and  properties  of  planets, 
comets,  asteroids,  moons,  and  meteorites. 
313  Geochemistry  (3)  The  chemistry  of  the  earth 
and  its  relation  to  geologic  processes. 
321  Geometries  (3)  Application  ot  computational 
and  statistical  methods  to  geologic  problems. 
Geologic  sampling,  data  comparisons  in  environ- 
mental, petrologic,  paleontologic,  and  geochemical 
problems. 

323  General  Geologic  Field  Studies  of  South- 
eastern Pennsylvania  (3)  Occurrence,  relation- 
ships, and  geologic  histon'  ot  the  rocks,  minerals, 
and  soils  of  this  area,  studied  at  representative 
locations.  PREREQi  ESS  202. 
ESL  327  Electron  Microscopy  I  (3)  A  one- 
semester  lecture/laboratorv"  course  in  theorv  opera- 
tion and  applications  of  electron  beam  technolog)' 
in  scientific  research. 

330  Introduction  to  Oceanography  (3)  A  survey 
of  our  present  knowledge  ot  the  waters  and  floors 
of  the  ocean.  PREREQ:  ESS  101. 

331  Introduction  to  Paleontology  (3)  Identifica- 
tion and  study  ot  common  fossils  in  order  to 
understand  their  life  processes  and  geologic  signif- 
icance. PREREQi  One  course  in  geologj-. 

332  Advanced  Oceanography  (3)  An  advanced 
course  in  oceanography  covering  marine  resources, 
oceanographic  literature,  animal-sediment  relation- 
ships, field  techniques,  estuaries,  salt  marshes,  sea 
level  changes,  and  pollution.  PREREQi  ESS  230. 


#    Approved  tnterdisciplinar}'  course 


Geologv'  and  Astronomy 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


343  Geomorphology  (3)  Constructional  and 
degradationa)  forces  that  have  shaped  present 
landforms  and  are  constantly  reshaping  and  modi- 
fying landforms.  Interpretation  of  geologic  and 
topographic  maps;  field  studies.  PREREQi  ESS 
101  and  204. 

355  Intermediate  Astronomy  (3)  An  analytical 
and  quahtative  analysis  of  selected  astronomical 
phenomena.  Topics  include  telescope  optics 
(including  photographic  and  photoelectric  attach- 
ments), lunar  and  planetary  orbits,  stellar  motions 
and  magnitudes,  galactic  classifications,  and  dis- 
tances. Two  hours  of  lecwre  and  two  hours  of  lab. 
PREREQiESSin. 

362  History  of  Astronomy  (3)  Development  of 
astronomical  theories  from  the  ancient  Greeks 
untU  the  20th  century.  PREREQ:  ESS  111. 
371  Advanced  Meteorology  (3)  A  continuation  of 
the  study  of  the  principles  governing  the  earth's 
atmosphere  and  how  these  principles  determine 
weather  conditions.  PREREQ:  ESS  270. 
405  Igneous  and  Metamorphic  Petrology  (3) 
Theories  of  the  formation  of  igneous  and  meta- 
morphic rocks  based  on  field  occurrence,  physical 
properties,  geochemistry,  thermodynamics,  and 
petrography.  Classification  and  identification  of 
rocks.  Laboratory  and  field  examination  and 
analysis  of  rocks'  PREREQ:  ESS  302  and  333. 
420  Structural  Geology  (3)  Determination  of  the 
sequential  development  and  the  forces  involved  in 
the  various  structural  fcawres  of  the  earth.  PRE- 
REQi  ESS  201  and  302. 

435  Remote  Sensing  (3)  An  introduction  to  the 
science  and  technology  of  remote  sensing  and  the 
applications  of  remote  sensing  data  to  geology, 
oceanography,  meteorology,  and  the  environment. 
Includes  a  discussion  of  the  history  and  principles 
of  remote  sensing;  fundamentals  of  electromagnet- 
ic radiation;  theory  and  types  of  active  and  passive 
remote  sensing  systems;  firndamentals  of  image 
interpretation;  digital  analysis  of  LANDSAT  and 
AVHRR  data;  operation  of  environmental  satel- 
lites; and  ftiture  imaging  systems. 


439  Hydrogeology  (3)  The  factors  that  control 
the  distribution,  occurrence,  and  recoverability  of 
groundwater;  techniques  for  locating  and  estimat- 
ing recoverable  water;  groundwater  pollution  and 
waste  water  disposal.  Familiarity  with  calculus  is 
recommended.  PREREQ^  ESS'213. 
442  Geophysics  (3)  Gravitational,  magnetic,  seis- 
mic (refraction  and  reflection),  and  electrical  prop- 
erties of  rocks  and  minerals  in  the  earth.  Physical 
principles  of  the  earth;  geophysics  in  relation  to 
economic  deposits.  PREREQ;  MAT  162  and 
PHY  140  or  180. 

450  Sedimentation  and  Stratigraphy  (3)  Class, 
laboratory,  and  field  studies  of  sediments,  sedi- 
mentary rocks,  depositional  processes  and  environ- 
ments, and  diagenesis.  Description,  mapping,  and 
correlation  of  strata  to  infer  temporal-spatial  rela- 
tionships, locate  resources,  and  interpret  Earth 
history.  PREREQ:  ESS  213,  302,  331,  and  343. 

♦  460  Internship  (1-18)  Work  with  industry,  or 
local,  state,  or  federal  government  agencies  under 
faculty  supervision. 

475  Introduction  to  the  Planetarium  (3)  Princi- 
ples and  use  ot  the  planetarium  in  a  teaching  situ- 
ation. Specific  projects  are  assigned.  PREREQ; 
ESS  111. 

♦  480  Special  Problems  (1-3)  Reports  on  special 
topics  and  current  developments  in  the  earth  and 
space  sciences.  PREREQ;  Permission  of  instruc- 
tor. 

490  Fundamentals  of  Soil  (3)  The  properties  of 
soils,  edaphology,  and  pedology:  chemical,  physi- 
cal, and  biological  factors.  Soil  genesis  and  classifi- 
cation. 

♦  491  Independent  Study  (1-3) 

♦  IND  401  Applied  Environmental  Science  (3) 
Students  are  introduced  to  regional  environmental 
problem  solving  based  on  interdisciplinary,  science 
data  using  GIS.  Background  in  one  of  namral  or 
apphed  sciences  is  presumed,  and  students  without 
such  background  should  contact  an  instructor 
before  scheduUng.  Most  relevant  lecwre  material  is 
handled  as  readings  outside  of  class  time  which  is 


devoted  largely  to  environmental  analysis  using 
Arc  View  GIS.  One  half-da)'  field  trip  is  required. 
IND  405  ModeUng  of  Earth  Systems  (3)  The 
course  focuses  on  the  use  of  models  to  understand 
global  ennronmental  change.  It  offers  an  in-depth 
exposure  to  the  principles  of  modeling  as  well  as 
an  introduction  to  various  models  that  represent 
components  of  the  earth's  systems.  The  elements 
of  model  construcrion  are  examined  including 
principles  of  simphfication,  data  collection,  vari- 
able identification,  and  parameter  specillcations. 
#  SCB  210  The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 
(3)  An  interdisciplinar)-  course  that  presents  the 
theor\'  and  evidence  of  the  first  three  minutes  of 
the  universe  and  formation  of  the  stars,  galaxies, 
planets,  organic  molecules,  and  the  genetic  basis  of 
organic  evolution.  PREREQ;  High  school  or  col- 
lege courses  in  at  least  t\vo  sciences. 
SCE  310  Science  for  the  Elementary  Grades  (3) 
A  course  to  prepare  the  elementan'  teacher  for 
teaching  science.  Selected  units  or  problems  that 
cut  across  various  fields  of  science.  Methods  and 
processes  of  science  and  available  resources.  PRE- 
REQ; Completion  of  science  and  mathematics 
general  education  requirements  and  formal  admis- 
sion to  teacher  education.  Must  reach  junior  status 
by  the  end  of  the  previous  semester. 
►  SCE  350  Science  Education  in  the  Secondary 
School  (3)  Philosophy,  objecri\-es,  and  methods  of 
teaching  science.  Practical  experience  provided. 
PREREQ;  Formal  admission  to  teacher  education. 
SCI  101  The  Carbon  Cycle  (3)  An  explorauon  of 
how  the  carbon  ck'cle  connects  earth  and  Ufe,  tho- 
rugh  photosynthesis,  respiration,  decay,  rock  for- 
mation and  weathering,  and  plate  tectonics. 
Humans  have  altered  the  carbon  cycle  by  burning 
fossil  fliels.  Students  investigate  the  carbon  cycle 
on  the  WCU  campus  and  consider  the  implica- 
tions for  global  warming.  For  elementary  educa- 
tion majors  only.  Team  taught  with  the 
Department  of  Biology. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 
►    Diverse  communities  course 


Department  of  Health 


207  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences  Center 

610-436-2931 

Roger  Mustalish,  Chairperson 

Bethann  Cinelli,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Cinelli,  Mustalish,  Nye,  Sankaran,  Sheehan, 
Shorten 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Carson,  Harris,  James,  Lacey 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Bill,  Gross,  Morgan 
ADJUNCT  PROFESSORS:  FeUows,  KeUar,  Killian,  Wix 
The  Department  of  Health  offers  four  programs  leading  to  a  bachelor 
of  science  degree. 

1.   The  B.S.  in  PUBLIC  HEALTH  is  designed  to  provide  students 
with  the  competencies  needed  for  a  career  in  public  health. 
Students  selecting  this  program  vyill  take  a  public  health  core  of 
courses  and  select  one  of  the  concentrations  from  the  following: 
a.   PUBLIC  HEALTH— HEALTH  PROMOTION  prepares 
students  for  a  career  as  a  public  health  practitioner  in  hospitals, 
health  departments,  health  agencies,  and  industry.  The  pro- 
gram provides  a  comprehensive  basic  science  background  as 


well  as  a  strong  public  health  foundation.  This  is  an  approved 
program  by  the  Society  for  Public  Health  Education  (SOPHE) 
and  AAHE. 
b.  PUBLIC  HEALTH— ENVIRONMENTAL  HEALTH  pre- 
pares students  for  careers  as  environmental  scientists  in  indus- 
try, consulting  firms,  government,  and  academia.  The  program 
synthesizes  a  rigorous  general  scientific  preparation  with  spe- 
cialized applied  courses  in  a  wide  range  of  environmental  health 
science  discipUnes,  such  as  industrial  hygiene,  hazardous  waste 
management,  and  water  qualit^■. 
The  B.S.  m  NUTRITION  AND  DIETETICS  prepares  students 
for  careers  in  dietetics,  which  include  community  nutrition,  food 
service  management,  and  clinical  nutrition.  This  program  meets 
the  American  Dietetic  Association's  (ADA)  knowledge  require- 
ments for  entry-level  dietitians.  Graduates  of  the  program  will 
have  tiilfilled  these  requirements.  However,  following  graduation 
students  must  successfiilly  complete  an  ADA-accredited  intern- 
ship to  qualify  to  take  the  registration  examination  for  dietitians. 
Graduates  who  pass  this  examination  are  recognized  by  the  ADA 
as  registered  dietitians.  Facult)'  advisers  provide  assistance  to  stu- 


School  of"  Health  Sciences 


Health 


dents  in  identifying  and  submitting  apphcations  to  these  postgrad- 
uate internships. 

3.  The  B.S.  in  HEALTH  SCIENCE  is  for  students  who  have  com- 
pleted a  certificate,  diploma,  or  associate's  degree  program  in  such 
health  science  areas  as  dental  hygiene,  respiratory  therapy,  occupa- 
tional therapy,  medical  technology,  alternative/complementary 
medicine,  and  cardiovascular  technology.  The  program  gives  pro- 
fessionals the  chance  to  build  on  their  technical  education  already 
received  and  to  develop  academic  competency  in  a  related  field. 
General  education  requirements  and  health  courses  are  needed  for 
completion  of  the  B.S.  in  health  science.  A  school  dental  hygiene 
certification  ot  18  credits  is  offered  under  this  degree. 

4.  The  B.S.  in  RESPIRATORY  CARE  is  offered  in  association  with 
Bryn  Mawr  Hospital.  Graduation  from  the  program  satisfies  the 
entrance  requirement  for  the  Written  Registry  Examination  and  the 
CUnical  Simulation  Examination  given  by  the  National  Board  for 
Respiratory  Care.  Successfiil  completion  of  these  examinations  quali- 
fies the  candidate  as  a  registered  respiratory  therapist.  Most  respirato- 
ry therapists  are  employed  by  hospitals  and  home  health  care  agencies. 

Academic  Policies 

1.  Repeating  Courses 

Department  of  Health  majors  who  earn  less  than  a  C  (2.0)  in 
selected  program  requirements  may  be  required  to  repeat  such 
courses.  Students  should  discuss  these  requirements  with  their 
advisers. 

2.  Overall  GPAs  for  internships  and  field  experiences 

a.  A  minimum  2.5  cumulative  GPA  is  required  of  environmental 
health  and  nutrition  majors  for  internships  or  field  experience 
assignments. 

b.  A  minimum  2.5  cumulative  GPA  is  required  for  health  promo- 
tion majors  for  internships. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B.S.  PROGRAMS 

General  Education  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39     48  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  PUBLIC  HEALTH 

All  pubhc  health  students  are  required  to  complete  one  of  three  con- 
centrations: 
A.  Public  Health  —  Health  Promotion 

1.  Cognate  Requirements  30  semester  hours 
BIO  100,  259,  269;  CHE  102*;  COM  101*; 

CSW  101;  PSY  100*;  SOC  200* 

2.  Public  Health  Core  Requirements  45  semester  hours 
HEA  100,  240,  242,  306,  330,  341,  342,  419, 

420,  421,  and  436 

3.  Elective  Requirements 

Students  select  one  ot  the  following  options: 

a.  General  Health  Promotion  18  semester  hours 
SLx  health  electives  selected  under  advisement 

with  no  more  than  six  credits  at  the  HEA  100 
level  and  no  more  than  six  credits  of  HEA  435 

b.  Worksite  Health  Promorion  Group  Electives   18  semester  hours 
HEA  331;  KIN  185,  245,  348,  352,  361; 

and  PEA  137 

NOTE:  Students  who  are  interested  in  taking 
the  certification  exam  for  Group  Exercise 
Leader  I  from  the  American  College  of  Sports 
Medicine  will  need  to  take  all  of  the  kinesiology 
and  PEA  courses  hsted  above.  If  a  student  would 
Uke  a  higher  level  certification  as  an  exercise  group 
leader,  additional  course  work  is  required.  This 
additional  course  work  is  optional,  and  it  is  highly 
recommended  that  smdents  consider  taking  the 
additional  course  credits  as  part  of  their  free  electives. 

4.  Grade  Requirements 

A  cumulative  GPA  of  2.5  is  needed  before  the 
start  of  the  internship,  HEA  421. 


In  order  to  count  towards  the  bachelor  of  science  in 
pubhc  health/health  promotion,  pubhc  health  core, 
and  health  elective  classes  require  a  minimum  grade  of  C. 
B.  Public  Health  —  Environmental  Health 

1.  Cognate  Requirements  36  semester  hours 
BIO  110*,  204,  270;  CHE/CRL  107,  CHE  230; 

ESS  101;  MAT  107,  121*;  PHY  130*-140*; 
SMD211 

2.  Environmental  Health  Core  Requirements  45  semester  hours 
ENV  102,  230,  250,  445,  447,  451,  452,  455, 

456,  460;  HEA  110,  341 

3.  Environmental  Health  Elective  Requirements      6  semester  hours 
(Two  courses  selected  under  advisement) 

ENV  360,  435,  450,  453,  462,  470,  475 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  NUTRITION  AND 
DIETETICS 

1.  Nutrition  Core:  46  semester  hours 
HEA  200,  205,  303,  309,  312,  314,  409, 

411,  412,  413,  414,  415,  416,  417;  HTL  205 

2.  Cognates:  38  semester  hours 
BIO  100*,  204,  259,  269;  CHE  107*,  230, 

310;  CRL  107;  HEA  306;  MAT  121*; 
PSY  100*;  SOC  200* 

3.  General  Education  (courses  selected  under 
advisement) 

4.  All  required  HEA  courses  require  a  minimum 
grade  of  C. 

5.  A  minimum  GPA  of  2.00  is  required  for  BIO 
100,  204,  259,  269,  CHE/CRL  107,  CHE 
230,  and  310. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  HEALTH  SCIENCE  - 
GENERAL 

1.  Satisfactory  completion  of  an  allied  health  certificate,  diploma,  or 
A.S.  degree  program 

2.  Satisfactory  completion  of  120  semester  hours,  including 

a.  General  education  requirements 

b.  A  minimum  of  24  semester  hours  earning  a  C  or  better  for 
each  course.  Students  must  take  HEA  242,  341,  and  419,  and 
15  credits  as  approved  by  an  adviser.  (Health  concentration 
courses  require  a  grade  of  C  or  better.) 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  HEALTH  SCIENCE  - 
RESPIRATORY  CARE 

1.  Complete  a  minimum  of  120  credits  including  the  following 
required  courses  (all  courses  require  a  C  or  better): 

a.  Cognate  Requirements  26  semester  hours 
BIO  100*,  204,  259,  269;  CHE  100*; 

MAT  107*;  PSY  100*;  PHI  180* 

b.  Major  Requirements  63  semester  hours 
HEA  210,  370,  371,  372,  373,  374,  375,  376, 

377,  378,  379,  380,  435,  472,  473,  474,  475, 
476,  477,  478,  479 

2.  Complete  all  general  education  requirements 

Minor  in  Health  Sciences  18  semester  hours 

Required  course  HEA  100  and  15  hours  of  other  health  courses 
selected  under  advisement.  Nine  credits  must  be  at  the  300  and  400 
level.  A  grade  of  C-  or  better  is  required  in  each  course. 

Minor  in  Nutrition  18  semester  hours 

Required  courses:  HEA  205,  303,  309;  HTL  205 

Electives:  Select  three  from  among  HEA  307,  415,  422;  KIN  245, 

352;  PSY  481;  SMD  454.  A  grade  of  C  or  better  is  required  in  each 

course. 


These  required  courses  also  satisfy  genera!  education  requirements. 


Health 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ENVIRONMENTAL 

Symbol:  ENV 

#  102  Humans  and  the  Environment  (3)  A  study 
ot  the  abilit)'  ot  humans  to  survive  and  maintain 
their  life  qualit)'  considering  the  limited  resources 
and  recycling  capacity-  of  planet  Earth.  Note:  Only 
one  of  the  following  courses  can  be  completed  for 
credit:  BIO  102,  ENV  102,  or  ESS  102. 
230  Hazardous  Waste  Operations  and  Emer- 
gencj'  Response  (3)  Provides  students  with  the 
training  required  by  the  Occupational  Safety'  and 
Health  Administration  and  the  Environmental 
Protection  Agency  to  work  at  sites  where  haz- 
ardous wastes  and/or  hazardous  materials  may  be 
stored,  spilled,  transported,  or  used. 
250  Environmental  Health  Laboratory  (3) 
Practical  field  and  laboratorv'  experience  in  envi- 
ronmental sample  collection  and  analysis.  PRE- 
REQ:  CHE/CRL  107,  ENV  102,  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

360  Air  Quality  and  Health  (4)  A  consideration 
of  the  t)'pes  and  amounts  ot  air  contaminants,  the 
atmospheric  processes  that  transport  them,  and  the 
role  of  air  qualit\'  in  human  health.  PREREQ^ 
ENV  102,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
435  Environmental  Health  Workshop  (1-6) 
Special  workshops  on  contemporary'  environmental 
health  issues.  Topics  announced  at  time  of  offering. 
445  Risk  Assessment  (3)  An  examination  of 
human  health  and  ecological  risk  assessment  with 
emphasis  on  exposure  estimation.  PREREQ^ 
ENV  102. 

447  Environmental  Regulations  (3)  Prepares  stu- 
dents for  working  with  federal  and  Pennsylvania 
environmental  regulations.  Emphasizes  use  and 
development  of  Internet  reguIator>'  resources. 
Specific  discussions  and  exercises  related  to  various 
regulator)'  agencies  are  included.  PREREQ^  ENV 
102,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

450  Hazardous  and  Solid  Wastes  (3)  Sources, 
characteristics,  and  amounts  of  solid  and  haz- 
ardous wastes  and  their  implications  for  human 
health.  Methods  of  collection,  handling,  disposal, 
and  recycling.  PREREQ^  ENV  102,  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

451  Toxic  Substances  (3)  An  investigation  of  the 
health  problems  caused  by  toxic  substances  in  the 
workplace  and  in  the  general  environment.  PRE- 
REQ:  BIO  204,  CHE  230  (concurrent),  ENV 
102,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

452  Industrial  Hygiene  (3)  A  study  of  the  antici- 
pation, recognition,  evaluation,  and  control  of 
health  hazards  in  the  work  environment.  PRE- 
REQ^  ENV  102,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

453  Occupational  Safety  (3)  A  study  of  the 
recognition,  evaluation,  and  control  of  safet)'  haz- 
ards in  the  work  environment.  PREREQl  ENV 
102,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

455  Environmental  Health  Seminar  (3)  In-depth 
investigation  and  discussions  on  topics  of  particu- 
lar concern  or  significance  to  the  environmental 
health  field.  Topics  will  be  varied  from  year  to 
year.  PREREQ^  Senior  environmental  health 
major. 

456  Environmental  Health  Internship  (12)  Field 
placement  with  an  environmental  health  depart- 
ment in  an  industry,  consulting  firm,  or  government 
agency.  PREREQ^  Senior  environmental  health 
major  and  a  cumulative  GPA  of  2.50  or  above. 
460  Industrial  Hygiene  Techniques  (3)  Students 
will  learn  evaluation  techniques  for  monitoring  the 
industrial  environment  in  a  laboratory  setting  as 
well  as  in  the  field,  such  as  checking  air  quality,  air 


flow,  noise,  heat  stress,  and  radiation.  Evaluation 
of  personal  protective  equipment,  and  pulmonary 
function  and  audiometric  testing  also  will  be 
investigated.  PREREQ;  ENV  102,  or  permission 
of  instructor. 

462  Water  Quality  and  Health  (3)  ."^n  examina- 
tion of  the  qualit)-  and  quantity  requirements  of 
surface  and  subsurface  water  resources  used  for 
drinking  water  supplies.  Laboratory  included. 
PREREQ^  ENV  102,  or  permission  of  instructor 
470  Emergency  Preparedness  (3)  This  course 
addresses  emergenq-  preparedness  for  schools, 
businesses,  communities,  and  counties.  T\'pes  of 
emergencies  considered  include  natural  disasters, 
failures  of  technology  (spills,  accidents,  and  explo- 
sions), and  acts  ot  war  or  terrorism. 
475  Bioterrorism  and  Public  Health  (3)  This 
course  addresses  the  protection  of  the  public's 
health  and  the  health  of  workers  such  as  first 
responders  from  biological  agents  that  cause  dis- 
ease and/or  death.  Communication  and  coping 
strategies,  group  interaction,  case  studies,  and  the 
use  of  Internet  resources  will  be  integrated  with 
response  strategies,  measurement  techniques,  per- 
sonal protection,  and  decontamination  procedures. 

HEALTH 

Symbol:  HEA 

Symbol  for  health  labs:  HTL 

100  Dimensions  of  Wellness  (3)  Fundamental 
concepts  of  health  and  wellness  exploring  several 
health-related  areas  with  an  opportunity  for  per- 
sonal lifestyle  change  conducive  to  better  health. 

103  Drugs  and  Society  (3)  Provide  knowledge 
regarding  the  use  and  abuse  of  substances  in  our 
society  and  the  impact  on  the  individual,  family, 
and  community.  Teaching  strategies  also  will  be 
incorporated. 

104  Human  Sexuality  (3)  Study  ot  sex-uality  as  it 
relates  to  self;  the  interrelationships  with  people. 
106  Death  and  Dying  (3)  Current  controversial 
issues  concerning  death  and  d^ing.  How  involved 
persons  cope  with  death. 

109  Health  Issues  of  Women  (3)  The  needs  and 
concerns  of  women  as  consumers  in  our  present 
health  care  system.  Various  biological,  psychologi- 
cal, and  social  topics  will  be  discussed. 
>  110  Transcultural  Health:  Principles  and  Prac- 
tices (3)  This  course  examines  the  health  beliefs 
and  practices  of  a  variety  of  subcultural  groups  in 
the  United  States.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  appli- 
cation of  multicultural  health  beliefs  and  practices. 
It  utilizes  the  cross-cultural  approach  in  meeting 
the  health  needs  of  clients  and  families.  It  is  open 
to  all  University  students,  regardless  of  major. 
200  Nutrition  and  Culture  (3)  The  U.S.  is 
becoming  a  plurahstic,  diverse  population  whose 
food  patterns  are  influenced  by  ethnic,  religious, 
and  regional  groups.  This  course  will  provide  an 
overview  of  world  wide  dietary  patterns,  examine 
various  factors  affecting  individual  and  regional 
food  choices,  and  discuss  cultural  and  historical 
perspectives  of  dietary  patterns.  Course  includes 
food  sampling  from  different  cultures. 
205  Principles  of  Food  Selection  and  Prepa- 
ration (3)  Nutritionally  based  study  ot  the  basic 
principles  of  food  selection  and  preparation  with 
an  emphasis  on  food  safet)'.  Comparative  study 
and  integration  of  convenience  food  and  tradition- 
ally prcp'ared  food.  CONCURRENT:  HTL  205. 
HTL  205  Principles  of  Food  Selection  and 
Preparation  Laboratory  (2)  Nutritionally  based 
experience.  Planning  and  preparation  of  conve- 
nience and  traditionally  prepared  food.  PREREQ; 
HEA  205  or  concurrent. 


206  Human  Development  (3)  A  lifespan 
approach  to  the  study  of  human  development  in 
the  physical,  cognitive,  and  psychosocial  domains. 
210  Introduction  to  Respiratory  Care  (3) 
Consists  ot  topics  related  to  general  health  care 
issues  as  well  as  those  of  specific  interest  to  the 
respirator)'  care  profession. 

220  Field  Experience  in  Health  (1)  Opportunities 
for  observation  and  field  experience  in  health  sci- 
ence settings. 

230  Health  Issues  of  School-Aged  Youth  (3)  This 
course  investigates  current  health  issues  relevant  to 
students  K— 12  such  as  drug,  alcohol,  and  tobacco 
use;  diseases;  and  mental  emotional  health. 
240  Foundationsof  Health  (3)  Introductory 
course  tor  undergraduate  majors  in  health  promo- 
tion/education. Primaly  emphasis  on  the  philo- 
sophical, historical,  and  theoretical  foundations  of 
the  profession. 

242  Introduction  to  Public  and  Community 
Health  (3)  This  course  is  intended  to  provide  the 
student  with  an  overview  of  public  and  community 
health  concepts  in  the  United  States. 
245  Psycho-Social  Issues  of  School-Aged  Youth 
(3)  An  overview  of  fundamental  concepts  and  con- 
tent in  the  following  health  areas:  mental/emo- 
tional health,  stress  management,  the  aging 
process,  violence  and  conflict  resolution,  forcible 
behaviors,  and  death  education. 

300  Professional  Ethics  and  the  Health  Profes- 
sions (3)  This  course  examines  ethical  issues  rele- 
vant to  the  professional  roles  of  health  profession- 
als. Students  will  examine  ethical  principles  and 
apply  a  model  of  ethical  decision  making  to  case 
studies.  Other  areas  addressed  include  professional 
codes  of  ethics,  ethical  concerns  in  health  behavior 
change,  health  communications,  and  health  educa- 
tion research. 

301  Health  for  the  Elementary  Grades  (3) 
Provides  basic  health  content  and  instructional 
methodolog)'  for  presenice  elementary  teachers. 

303  Introductory  Principles  of  Human  Nutri- 
tion (3)  Practical  approach  to  the  role  nutrition 
and  dietetics  play  in  improving  the  quality  of  our 
hves — socially,  physically,  mentally,  and  emotion- 
ally. DispeUing  of  fads  and  fallacies. 

304  Family  Life  and  Sex  Education  (3)  The  pur- 
pose of  this  course  is  to  prepare  the  health  profes- 
sional to  develop  and  teach  appropriate  K-12  fam- 
ily Ufe  education  curricula. 

305  Contraceptive  Technology  and  Health 
Issues  (3)  The  course  will  teach  contraceptive 
methods,  reasons  for  a  societ)''s  acceptance  or 
rejection  of  certain  methods,  and  the  effect  on  the 
health  care  deUverv  system. 

306  Curriculum  and  Instruction  in  Health  (3) 
This  course  provides  the  knowledge  and  skills  for 
the  development,  implementation,  and  evaluation 
of  K-12  comprehensive  school  health  curriculums. 

307  Consumer  Nutrition  (3)  Consumer  approach 
to  the  roles  foods  and  nutrition  play  in  improving 
the  quaUty  of  our  Uves — socially,  physically,  men- 
tally, and  emotionally  PREREQ;.  HEA  303  or 
equivalent. 

309  Nutrition  Through  the  Life  Cycle  (3)  A 
studv  of  nutritional  needs  and  dietary'  concerns  of 
people  from  conception  to  old  age.  PREREQ^ 
HEA  303. 

310  Love  and  Marriage  (3)  Defines  love  and  mar- 
riage for  the  student  and  teaches  the  skills  essential 
to  fulfilling  those  needs. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 
I    Diverse  communities  course 


School  of  Health  Sciences 


Health 


312  Experimental  Foods  (3)  A  study  of  the 
chemical,  physical,  and  biological  effects  of  pro- 
cessing, storage,  and  food  preservation  on  the 
structure,  composition,  palatability,  and  nutritive 
value  of  food.  Includes  one  credit  hour  of  labora- 
xon:  PREREQ:  CHE  107,  310;  CRL  107;  HEA 
205;  BIO  204  may  be  taken  concurrendy. 

314  Quantity  Food  Production  (5)  A  basic  course 
in  quantity  food  production.  Emphasis  is  placed 
on  the  essentials  of  operating  a  foodservice  facili- 
t)' — menu  planning,  purchasing,  storage,  issuing, 
food  production,  service,  distribution,  and  quaht)' 
control.  Includes  two  credit  hours  of  quantit}- 
foods  laboraton-.  PREREQ;  HEA  205. 

315  Mind,  Body,  and  Health  (3)  Theories  and 
practice  of  health  and  healing  through  the  mind/ 
body  connection.  Emphasis  on  learning/practicing 
techniques  for  health  promotion. 

316  Minority  Health  Issues  (3)  The  purpose  of 
this  course  is  to  promote  discussion  and  awareness 
among  students  regarding  the  cultural  aspects  of 
health  issues. 

320  Positive  Aspects  of  Aging  (3)  Describes  past, 
present,  and  proiected  information  concerning  the 
aging  process  in  normal  human  development. 
325  Stress  Management  (3)  Comprehensive  survey 
of  stress  concepts,  theories,  and  management  tech- 
niques. Emphasis  is  placed  on  personal  application. 

330  Health  Behavior  (3)  Indi\idual  and  group 
health  behavior  of  children  and  adults  at  different 
levels  of  wellness  and  in  various  settings.  Past  and 
current  theories  of  health  behavior  with  methods  of 
application  bv  health  professionals  will  be  included. 

331  Health  Promotion  in  the  Workplace  (3)  A 
studv  of  current  health  promotion  efforts  and  pro- 
grams for  employees  and  management  personnel 
at  the  worksite. 

333  Alternative  and  Complementary  Medicine 
(3)  Exploration  of  alternative,  complementan,-, 
and/or  integrative  medical  swtems  and  healing 
practices,  such  as  homeopathy,  Chinese  medicine, 
herbal  medicine,  therapeutic  touch,  from  a  con- 
sumer and  personal  viewpoint. 
335  Botanical  Medicine  (3)  A  comprehensive, 
evidence-based  assessment  ot  botanical  medicines 
in  health  promotion,  disease  prevention,  and 
sjTnptom  management. 

341  Chronic  and  Communicable  Diseases  (3)  A 
study  of  the  disease  process,  including  causes, 
effects,  and  control  of  selected  diseases  with  an 
emphasis  on  disease  prevention  and  health  promo- 
tion. PREREQ:  BIO  259/269. 

342  Program  Planning  and  Evaluation  (3) 
Provides  an  in-depth  swdy  of  the  program  plan- 
ning process  and  evaluation  methods.  Needed 
skills  are  developed  and  experience  given  in  writ- 
ing programs  from  assessment  through  evaluation 
with  both  hvpothetical  and  real  populations.  PRE- 
REQ. HEA  240,  341. 

370  Medical  Terminology  (1)  An  Introduction  to 
medical  terminologv'  using  a  programmed  instruc- 
tion, sell-learning  technique.  Includes  chart  for- 
mat, word  parts,  pulmonary  terminology  abbrevia- 
tions, and  an  overview  of  respirator)'  anatomy. 

371  Aspects  of  Respiratory  Therapy  I  (2)  A  dis- 
cussion of  topics  essential  to  the  provision  of  com- 
prehensive respiratory  therapy.  Topics  include 
patient  care,  CPR,  and  psychosocial  issues. 

372  Respiratory  Phvsiologj-  (3)  An  in-depth 
studv  of  breathing  mechanics,  pulmonary  circula- 
tion, ventilation/perfusion  ratios,  regulation  of 
ventilation,  and  gas  transport. 

373  Bronchopulmonary  Hygiene  (3)  .Aji  in- 
depth  studv-  of  respiratory  care  modahties  used  in 
the  maintenance  of  bronchopulmonary  hygiene. 


including  humiditv  and  aerosol  therapy,  sustained 
maximal  inspiration,  IPPB  therapy,  chest  physical 
therapv,  and  airway  maintenance. 

374  Oxygen  Therapy  (2)  .A.n  overview  of  basic 
science  relevant  to  respirator,'  therapy  is  followed 
by  the  studv  of  the  manufacture,  storage,  and 
transport  of  medical  gases,  regulators,  and  meter- 
ing devices,  oxvgen  therapv,  and  ox)'gen  anaivsis. 

375  Cardiopulmonary  Diseases  (3)  A  comprehen- 
sive study  of  cardiopulmonary  diseases  and  treat- 
ment. Includes  pulmonary  diagnostic  procedures. 

376  Aspects  of  Respiratory  Therapy  II  (2)  A 
continuation  of  HEA  371.  Topics  include  rehabil- 
itation, home  care,  administration  and  organiza- 
tion, respiratorv  pharmacologv',  and  infection-con- 
trol techniques. 

377  Pharmacology  (2)  An  in-depth  study  of  vari- 
ous drug  categories  including  drug-dose  response 
and  principles  of  absorption,  distribution,  metabo- 
Usm,  and  excretion. 

378  Respiratory  Technology  (3)  Study  of  the 
equipment  utilized  in  the  delivery  of  respiratory 
care. 

379  Hemodj-namics  I  (3)  An  in-depth  study  of 
monitoring  and  evaluation  techniques  including 
modules  on  cardiopulmonarv  phwiology,  elecrocar- 
diographic  monitoring,  and  hemodj-namic  monitor- 
ing. Interpretation  and  application  data  is  empha- 
sized. Appropriate  lab  experience  is  included. 

380  Clinical  Practice  I  (6)  An  introduction  to 
clinical  respiratorv  care  consisting  of  rotations 
through  patient  care  areas  followed  by  discussion 
of  experiences  and  correlation  to  didactic  work. 

403  Student  Teaching:  Elementary  School  (3) 
Practical  classroom  experience  m  teaching  health 
education  at  the  elementary  level.  PREREQ;  Must 
have  flill  admission  status  in  teacher  education  cer- 
tification and  completed  a  minimum  ot  28  credits 
of  the  required  health  courses  including  HEA  306. 

404  Student  Teaching:  Middle  School  (6) 
Practical  classroom  experience  in  teaching  health 
education.  PREREQ;  Must  have  hill  admission 
status  in  teacher  education  certification  and  com- 
pleted 34  credits  of  the  required  health  courses 
including  HEA  306. 

405  Student  Teaching:  Secondary  School  (6) 
Practical  classroom  teaching  in  health  education. 
PREREQ;  Must  have  full  admission  status  in 
teacher  education  certification  and  completed  34 
credits  of  the  required  health  courses  including 
HEA  306. 

408  Dental  Hygiene:  Field  Experience  (6)  Field 
experiences  for  dental  h)gienists  who  are  working 
towards  certification  as  public  school  dental 
hygienists.  PREREQ;  EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP 
250  and  351,  and  HEA  306. 

409  Professional  Skills  in  Dietetics  (3)  A  focus 
on  the  development  of  nutrition  counsehng  and 
communication/media  technology  skills.  An  appre- 
ciation of  multiculturalism  will  be  promoted.  A 
familiarization  with  dietetics-related  professional 
organizations,  graduate  school  opportunities,  and 
dietetic  internships  will  be  provided.  Assistance 
with  the  dietetic  internship  and  graduate  school 
application  process  will  be  given.  PREREQ;  All 
professional  courses  except  HEA  414,  415,  416. 

410  Mental  Health  (3)  Designed  to  aid  persons  in 
improving  their  understanding  of  themselves  and 
others.  Emphasis  on  wavs  to  recognize  mental 
health  problems. 

411  Advanced  Human  Nutrition  I  (3)  In-depth 
examination  of  the  digestion,  transport,  and  metab- 
olism of  carbohvdrates,  lipids,  and  proteins.  Special 
emphasis  is  placed  on  metabolic  interrelationships 
and  hormonal  control  of  the  three  processes  men- 


tioned above.  PREREQ,  BIO  110,  259,  269;  CHE 
103,  104,  230,  310;  CRL  103,  104;  HEA  303; 
HEA  309  mav  be  taken  concurrentlv'. 

412  Advanced  Human  Nutrition  II  (3)  In-depth 
examination  of  the  digestion,  transport,  and 
metabolism  of  vitamins,  minerals,  and  water. 
Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  digestive  and  meta- 
boUc  interrelationships  and  hormonal  control. 
PREREQ;  HEA  411. 

413  Medical  Nutrition  Therapy  1  (3)  This  course 
covers  nutritional  assessment,  drug-nutrient  inter- 
actions, nutritional  therapy  in  diseases  of  infancy 
and  childhood,  gastrointestinal  diseases,  diseases 
of  the  Uver  and  gallbladder,  and  surgerv.  PRE- 
REQ: HEA  341,  412. 

414  Medical  Nutrition  Therapy  11  (3)  This  course 
covers  nutritional  therapy  in  coronary  heart  disease 
and  hvpertension,  diabetes  meUitus,  renal  disease, 
cancer,  and  disabling  diseases.  PREREQ;  HEA  413. 

415  Community  Nutrition  (3)  A  study  of  the 
communit)'  nutrition  programs  and  services  at  all 
levels  of  development.  Course  covers  nutrition 
program  planning,  implementation,  and  evalua- 
tion; socioeconomic  and  cultural  context  of  pro- 
grams and  services;  an  examination  of  the  poUtical 
and  legislative  process  as  it  relates  to  nutrition  leg- 
islation; and  the  role  of  the  communin'  nutrition- 
ist. PREREQ;  HEA  242,  303,  309. 

416  Foodservice  and  Nutrition  Systems  Manage- 
ment (3)  A  smdy  of  the  organization  and  adminis- 
tration of  foodservice  systems  and  the  fiinctions 
and  responsibilities  specific  to  management:  deci- 
sion making,  planning,  organizing,  staffing,  lead- 
ing, and  controUing.  Management  of  human 
resources,  food,  materials,  capital,  facihties,  and 
markets  as  related  to  various  hospitalitv  svstems 
will  be  examined.  PREREQ;  HEA  306  and  314. 

417  Foodserves  and  Nutrition  Systems 
Management  II  (3)  A  study  of  the  organization 
and  administration  of  foodservice  and  nutrition 
systems  as  well  as  the  functions  and  responsibili- 
ties specific  to  management;  controUing  facilities, 
budgeting,  facilities  planning  and  design,  buving 
and  instalhng  foodsenice  equipment,  and  market- 
ing. Management  of  human  resources,  food,  mate- 
rials, capital,  facihties,  and  markets  as  related  to 
various  hospitahtv  svstems  will  be  examined. 
PREREQ;  HEA  4i6. 

419  Research  Methods  in  Health  (3)  This  course 
will  give  students  an  introduction  to  research 
issues  in  the  health  professions.  Students  will  gain 
an  understanding  of  the  reasons  for  research, 
designing  research  studies,  research  techniques, 
principles  of  instmmentation,  data  interpretation, 
and  data  presentation.  PREREQ;  Successful  com- 
pletion of  a  WCU  (or  equivalent)  math  course  at 
the  100  level  or  above. 

420  Health  Marketing  and  Communications  (3) 
The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  prepare  students  tor 
work  experiences  as  a  health  educator.  Major 
emphasis  will  be  placed  on  marketing  and  health 
communication  strategies.  PREREQ;  HEA  341, 
342,  and  all  required  chemistrv'  and  biologv'  courses. 

421  Public  Health  Internship  (12)  A  practical, 
hill-time  work  experience  in  a  hospital,  pubUc 
health  agencv',  or  company,  ioindy  supervised  by 
an  on-site  supervisor  and  a  public  health  faculty 
member.  PREREQ.  HEA  419,  420,  and  a  cumu- 
lative GPA  of  2.5  or  above. 

422  Nutrition  for  Health,  Fitness,  and  Sport  (3) 
Studv  of  nutrition  and  its  effects  on  health,  devel- 
opment, and  performance;  sound  nutrition  guide- 
lines for  optimal  health  and  physical  performance; 
energv'  and  energv'  pathways  as  kevs  to  physical 
activity;  nutrients  relative  to  health  and  physical 


Histon* 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


performance;  dining  away  from  home;  substances 
proposed  to  enhance  performace;  body  composi- 
tion and  weight  control.  PREREQ;  HEA  303  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

♦  425  Independent  Study  (1-3)  The  student  will 
initiate  a  health-related  research  study  or  project 
under  faculty  supervision. 

♦  435  Health  Workshop  (1-6)  Special  workshops 
on  contemporary  health  problems  and  issues. 
Topics  announced  at  time  of  offering. 

436  Health  Care  Delivery:  Trends,  Challenges, 
and  Opportunities  (3)  This  course  will  provide  an 
overview  ot  the  organization  and  financing  ot  the 
current  U.S.  health  care  system,  the  need  for 
reform,  and  initiatives  to  meet  the  health  needs  of 
all  Americans. 

438  UnderstandingAIDS/HIV  Infection  (3) 

Students  will  learn  basic  information  about  the  dis- 
ease process,  transmission  and  risk  behaviors,  treat- 
ment options,  and  legal  and  ethical  issues  surround- 
ing HIV  infection.  Primary  emphasis  will  address 
the  impact  of  .\IDS/HIV  on  those  with  the  dis- 
ease, as  well  as  the  psychosocial  factors  influencing 
partners,  family  members,  and  health  care  profes- 


sionals. Societal  responses  to  the  AIDS/HIV  epi- 
demic also  will  be  interwoven  throughout  the  top- 
ics. Course  format  will  include  lecture  and  discus- 
sions, viewing  of  videos,  interacuon  with  guest 
speakers,  and  individual  areas  ot  interest.  No  pre- 
requisites needed.  Open  to  all  majors. 

440  School  Health  Programs  (3)  This  course 
provides  an  overview  of  comprehensive  school 
health  programs.  Specific  focus  is  on  program 
development,  implementation,  and  evaluation. 

472  Mechanical  Ventilation  (3)  A  comprehensive 
study  ot  mechanical  ventilation,  including  the  physi- 
ologi,'  ot  positive  pressure  breathing,  techniques  of 
ventilation,  characteristics  of  commonly  used  ventila- 
tors, and  monitoring  of  the  ventilator-patient  system. 

473  Life  Support  System  (3)  An  in-depth,  com- 
prehensive study  of  mechanical  ventilators  and 
other  hfe  support  equipment. 

474  Pulmonary  Function  Evaluation  (2)  A  com- 
prehensive study  of  various  pulmonary  fiinction 
evaluation  techniques.  Includes  bronchoscopy  and 
arterial  blood  gas  analysis. 

475  Pediatric/Neonatal  Respiratory  Care  (2)  A 

comprehensive  study  of  neonatal  and  pediatric  res- 


piratory care,  including  fetal  lung  development, 
pathophysiology  of  the  neonate  and  pediatric 
patient,  and  related  respiratory  care  procedures. 

476  Clinical  Practice  II  (4)  An  introduction  to  crit- 
ical and  specialized  respiratory  care  areas  followed  by 
discussions  and  correlation  to  didactic  work. 

477  Hemodynamics  II  (3)  An  advanced  continua- 
tion of  the  topics  addressed  in  HEA  379  hemody- 
namics I. 

478  Respiratory  Therapy  Seminar  I  (3)  Includes 
critical,  written  analysis,  and  discussion  of  perti- 
nent respiratory  care  hterawre  as  well  as  elements 
of  research  relevant  to  the  respiratorv  care  profes- 
sion. The  students  culminate  their  study  of  respi- 
ratorv care  by  designing  and  implementing  a 
miniresearch  project. 

479  Clinical  Practice  III  (8)  An  intensive  expo- 
sure to  critical  care  and  speciaHzed  areas  of  respira- 
tory care.  Performance  evaluation  of  therapies  and 
procedures  to  include  mechanical  ventilator  set-up 
and  evaluation,  neonatal  ventilator  set-up,  pul- 
monary function  assessment,  arterial  hne  set-up, 
and  arterial  hne  blood  withdrawal. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  History 

506  Main  HaU 

610-436-2201 

Richard  J.  Webster,  Chairperson 

Thomas  J.  Heston,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Davidson,  Foster,  Hardy,  Heston,  Hewitt, 

Peters,  Webster 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Boes,  Friedman,  Hewin,  Jones, 

Kirschenbaum 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Gedge,  Hanley,  Legg, 

O'Connor,  Thames-Leonard 
The  student  of  history  seeks  to  re-create  the  past  (or,  more  precisely, 
as  much  of  it  as  possible)  in  a  rational  manner,  not  only  to  explain  and 
understand  the  past  for  its  own  sake,  but  also  to  identify  our  age  with 
earlier  times.  The  smdent  is  concerned  with  the  origins,  development, 
and  relationships  between  past  people  and  events  and,  from  the  multi- 
plicity of  credible  and  sometimes  conflicting  evidence,  renders  judg- 
ments on  causation  and  consequences.  He  or  she  seeks  to  achieve  a 
sense  of  the  past.  Among  the  careers  open  to  history  majors  are  the 
law,  government  service,  teaching,  research,  journalism,  and  business. 
Indeed,  a  strong  preparation  in  history  can  lead  to  possibilities  in  vir- 
tually every  field  of  endeavor. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  HISTORY 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement  0-12  semester  hours 

3.  Required  Histor\'  Courses  15  semester  hours 
HIS  101,  HIS  102,  HIS  151,  HIS  152,  HIS  200 

Two  100-level  courses  may  fiiltill  general  requirements. 

4.  History  Concentrations 
Students  choose  one  of  three  concentrations. 
American  History  Concentration 
United  States  Histon,- 
European  History 
World/Regional  History 
HIS  400  Seminar 
European  History  Concentration 
European  Histon' 
United  States  History 


24  semester  hours 


9  semester 
6  semester 
6  semester 
3  semester 

9  semester 
6  semester 


hours 
hours 
hours 
hours 

hours 
hours 


World/Regional  History 
HIS  400  Seminar 


6  semester  hours 
3  semester  hours 


World/Regional  History  Concentration 

World/Regional  History  9  semester  hours 

European  History  6  semester  hours 

United  States  History  6  semester  hours 

HIS  400  Seminar  3  semester  hours 

United  States  History  Courses: 

HIS  329,  344,  352,  356,  357,  358,  360,  361,  362, 

364,  365,  366,  367,  368,  369,  370,  371,  373,  380, 

390,  399,  445,  450,  451,  455,  458,  460,  462,  474,  480 

European  History  Courses 

HIS  318,  319,  320,  321,  322,  323,  324,  329,  330, 

331,  332,  333,  390,  398,  415,  416,  420,  421,  422, 

423,  425,  427,  428,  435,  445,  450,  460,  480 

World/Regional  Courses 

HIS  301,  302,  305,  306,  308,  311,  312,  314,  315, 

316,  317,  318,  348,  349,  375,  380,  390,  397,  406, 

407,  411,  412,  415,  445,  450,  460,  480 

5.  Cognate  Courses  9  semester  hours 
Three  cognate  courses  selected  from  art  history-, 

literature,  music  history,  or  philosophy,  or 
another  selection  of  courses  under  advisement 

6.  Additional  free  electives  to  complete  120  semester  hours 
Students  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  in  histor\'  program  can  complete  an 
elective  course  of  studies  that  will  lead  to  teacher  certification  in  sec- 
ondary ccitizenship  education  (formerly  social  studies).  See  department 
adviser  for  details. 

ELECTIVE  CITIZENSHIP  EDUCATION  TEACHER 
CERTIFICATION  PROGRAM  (formerly  Social  Studies) 

The  program  of  study  is  designed  to  assure  that  prospective  citizen- 
ship education  teachers  possess  the  knowledge,  capabilities,  and  dis- 
positions associated  with  the  concepts,  tools  of  inquir)',  and  structures 
of  the  disciplines  that  make  up  citizenship  education,  and  that  they 
are  able  to  create  learning  experiences  which  make  these  aspects  of  the 
subject  matter  meaningful  for  learners.  The  course  of  study  empha- 
sizes ten  thematic  strands: 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Histon' 


•  Culture  and  cultural  diversity 

•  Time,  continuity,  and  change 

•  People,  places,  and  environment 

•  Individuals,  groups,  and  institutions 

•  Power,  authority,  and  government 

•  Production,  distribution,  and  consumption 

•  Science,  technology,  and  society 

•  Global  connections 

•  Civic  ideals  and  practices 

•  Individual  development  and  identity 
Program  of  Study 

Students  interested  in  teaching  citizenship  education  in  secondary 
schools  may  pursue  a  bachelor  of  arts  in  history  while  earning  state  cer- 
tification in  citizenship  education  (formerly  social  studies).  West 
Chester  Universit}''s  program  is  accredited  by  the  Pennsylvania 
Department  of  Education,  the  National  Council  for  the  Social  Studies, 
and  the  National  Council  for  Accreditation  of  Teacher  Education. 
Requirements 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 

2.  Professional  Education,  see  page  138 

3.  History  Requirement 
See  above.  Bachelor  of  Arts  -  Histor)' 

4.  Foreign  Language  Requirement 

5.  Cognate  Courses 
Selected  under  advisement 


48  semester  hours 
33  semester  hours 
39  semester  hours 

0-12  semester  hours 
9  semester  hours 


6.  Elective 

Selected  under  advisement 
This  is  an  elective  program  that  is  pursued  in 
conjunction  -with  the  bachelor  of  arts  in  history. 
Close  advisement  is  encouraged.  NOTE:  Some 
of  the  above  courses  meet  two  requirements. 

7.  Satisft'  Universitv'  and  department  requirements 
for  admission  to  teacher  education,  see  page  145. 

8.  Satisfy  Universit)'  and  Pennsylvania  Department 

of  Education  requirements  to  complete  certification, 
see  pages  145-147. 

History  Minor  18  semester  hours 

Students  may  obtain  minor  recognition  on  their  transcript  so  that 
their  concentrated  choice  of  free  electives  will  be  recognized. 

1.  Required  Courses  6  semester  hours 
One  course  between  HIS  101  or  102,  and 

one  course  among  HIS  150,  151,  or  152 

2.  Electives  12  semester  hours 
Choose  under  advisement  tour  300-  and/or 

400-level  courses  from  three  groups: 

United  States,  European,  World/Regional 

History  (six  semester  hours  in  one  group;  three 

semester  hours  in  each  of  the  others) 
This  minor  may  be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts 
or  bachelor  of  science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
HISTORY 

Symbol:  HIS  unless  otherwise  shown 

101  History  of  Civilization  I  (3)  Cultural  ele- 
ments and  social  institutions  in  the  West  and  the 
East  from  earliest  times  through  the  Renaissance. 

102  History  of  Civilization  II  (3)  Developments 
in  civilizations  from  1500  to  the  present,  with 
emphasis  on  Western  civilization  and  its  interrela- 
tionships with  the  non-Western  world. 

150  The  American  Experience  (3)  The  histor\'  of 
the  United  States,  with  emphasis  on  major 
themes,  ideas,  and  developments  —  nationalism, 
sectionalism,  imperialism,  industrialism,  and  oth- 
ers. 

151  History  of  United  States  I  (3)  The  social, 
economic,  political,  and  intellectual  development 
of  the  United  States  from  the  beginning  of  the 
Colonial  period  through  Reconstruction, 

152  History  of  United  States  II  (3)  A  compre- 
hensive history  of  the  United  States  from  1865  to 
the  present,  examining  the  economic,  political, 
and  cultural  development  of  American  society,  and 
the  evolution  of  American  foreign  policy. 

200  Varieties  of  History  (3)  Historical  research 
techniques.  Methodolog)',  historiography,  and 
varieties  of  history.  Required  of  all  history  majors. 
PREREQ;  Two  iOO-level  HIS  courses. 
301  History  of  South  Asia  (3)  A  historical  study 
of  developments  on  the  Indian  subcontinent  (India 
and  Pakistan),  the  course  also  considers  those 
areas  of  Southeast  Asia  (Burma  and  Thailand)  that 
have  been  traditionally  influenced  by  the  course  of 
Indian  events. 

#  302  Modem  India  (3)  Social,  religious,  and  cul- 
tural underpinnings  ot  modern  India  against  a 
backdrop  of  the  subcontinent's  chronological 
development.  Hindu  and  Muslim  traditions  dis- 
cussed in  terms  oi  their  own  social,  religious,  and 
historical  dynamics  and  as  examples  of  complexi- 
ties of  national  integration. 
305  Modem  China  (3)  Sun'ey  of  the  historical 
and  cultural  background  of  China.  Emphasis  is 


given  to  the  significance  ot  China's  modern  period 
and  its  impact  on  world  affairs. 

#  306  Chinese  Civilization  (3)  Study  of  dominant 
cultural,  philosophical,  and  historical  patterns  that 
have  influenced  the  development  of  China  as  it  is 
today  and  the  traditional  way  in  which  Chinese 
approach  their  own  histon-. 

#  308  Introduction  to  the  Islamic  World  (3) 
Study  of  the  religio-cultural  heritage  ot  the  Islamic 
world  against  a  historical  background.  Selected 
areas  of  Middle,  South,  and  Southeast  Asia  will  be 
utilized  to  illustrate  the  flowering  ot  Islamic  arts, 
architecture,  and  poetry.  Includes  geography  com- 
ponent. 

311  History  of  Africa  to  1875  (3)  A  survey  of 
African  history'  to  1875,  providing  regional  cover- 
age of  the  entire  continent,  and  an  examination  of 
African  oral  traditions. 

312  History  of  Africa  Since  1875  (3)  A  survey  of 
African  history  since  1875,  focusing  on  European 
colonialism,  African  resistance,  and  contemporary 
developments. 

314  Latin  American  Women's  History  (3) 
Examines  Latin  American  women  1500  -  present. 
Focuses  on  intersections  of  class,  race,  and  gender; 
relations  between  private  and  public  spheres; 
changing  women's  experiences  over  time. 

■  315  Colonial  Latin  America  (3)  Pre- 
Columbian  period,  colonial  Latin  America,  and 
movements  for  independence;  Indian,  European, 
and  African  backgrounds;  government,  economy, 
society,  religion,  culture,  and  enlightenment. 
Interaction  of  diverse  cultures  in  the  New  World. 

■  316  Modem  Latin  America  (3)  Latin  America 
in  the  19th  and  20th  centuries;  liberalism,  conser- 
vatism, dictatorship,  revolution,  socialism,  indus- 
trialization, agrarian  reform,  cultural-intellectual 
achievements,  and  international  relations.  Topical 
approach,  using  individual  countries  as  case  history' 
illustrations. 

■  317  History  of  Mexico  (3)  Mexico  from  Pre- 
Columbian  period  to  present,  including  civiliza- 
tions of  Mayas  and  Aztecs,  Spanish  conquest. 
Colonial  period,  movement  for  independence  era 


of  Santa  Ana,  La  Reforma,  Diaz  dictatorship, 
Mexican  Revolution,  cultural-intellectual  achieve- 
ments, international  relations,  and  modernization 
of  Mexico  since  the  Revolution. 

■  318  The  Ancient  World  (3)  Classical  Greece 
and  Rome  with  consideration  of  economic,  social, 
intellectual,  and  political  history.  Selected  writings 
of  the  ancients. 

■  319  Medieval  Europe  (3)  Western  Europe 
from  the  fall  of  Rome  to  approximately  1300. 
Economic,  social,  political,  and  intellectual  devel- 
opments in  the  major  kingdoms  of  the  West;  the 
histon'  of  the  Universal  Church. 

320  Renaissance  and  Reformation  (3)  Political, 
economic,  social,  and  cultural  forces  that  emerged 
in  Europe  from  1300  to  1650.  The  evolution  of 
modern  states  and  the  rise  of  the  middle  class. 

321  Everyday  Life  in  Early  Modem  Europe  (3) 
An  examination  ot  the  daily  lives  ot  Europeans  ot 
various  social  backgrounds  from  the  15th  to  18th 
centuries.  Topics  will  include  dress,  diet,  recre- 
ation, labor,  and  medicine. 

322  Family  and  Women  in  Europe:  Renaissance 
to  Industrial  Revolution  (3)  Focuses  on  private 
and  public  aspects  of  the  family  in  various 
European  countries,  and  the  role  and  everydaj-  life 
of  women  of  diverse  social  backgrounds.  Special 
attention  is  given  to  changes  over  time. 

■  #  323  Austrian  Civilization  (3)  An  interdisci- 
plinary study  of  Austrian  civ'ilization,  1848-1938. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  fin-de-siecle  Vienna,  not 
only  as  its  pivotal  role  in  Austrian  culture  but  also 
as  a  testing  ground  for  modernism  in  the  West. 

■  324  Imperial  Russia  (3)  Russian  history  from 
from  Peter  the  Great  to  the  February  revolution  of 
1917.  Emphasis  on  issues  ot  modernity  and  ethnic 
identit^^ 

329  Gender  and  Peace  (3)  Examination  of  the 
ways  in  which  social  constructions  of  gender  inter- 
sect with  perceptions  of  war  and  peace. 


#   Approved  interdisciplinar)'  course 
H  Culuire  cluster 


H 


istory 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


■  330  Conflicts  in  Modem  Europe  (3)  Power 
politics  in  Europe;  alliances  and  counteralliances; 
imperialism;  First  World  War  and  Versailles  peace 
settlements;  emergence  of  totalitarian  ideologies. 

331  20th-century  Europe  (3)  European  fascism 
and  communism;  totalitarianism  confronts  liberal- 
ism; interaction  between  domestic  politics  and  for- 
eign policy;  polarization  of  European  politics;  dis- 
integration of  the  political  institutions  of  the  tradi- 
tional state. 

332  The  Holocaust  (3)  Focuses  on  ethnic, 
nationalistic,  economic,  and  religious  causes  of  the 
Holocaust,  including  20th-century  Nazism, 
racism,  and  anti-Semitism;  study  of  the 
Nuremburg  trials. 

333  European  Economic  History  (3)  European 
demographic  and  technological  change;  trade 
unions;  agriculture;  trade;  the  entrepreneur;  distri- 
bution of  income  and  welfare  from  the  10th  cen- 
tury to  the  present. 

343  Colonial  America  (3)  Examination  of  the 
colonial  experience  of  Europeans  in  the  parts  of 
America  that  became  the  United  States,  from 
Columbus's  voyage  in  1492  to  the  eve  of  the 
Revolutionary  War. 

344  History  of  Pennsylvania  (3)  The  founding 
and  development  of  Pennsylvania  from  its 
Colonial  beginnings  to  the  present  with  emphasis 
on  the  relation  of  the  past  to  the  present. 

■  348  The  Bible  in  History  (3)  The  Bible  as  a 
historical  record.  From  the  Pentateuch  through 
the  prophetic  literature,  the  Apocrypha,  the 
Pseudepigrapha,  and  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls  to  the 
New  Testament.  Historical  records  of  the  ancient 
Near  Eastern  civiUzations  will  be  compared  with 
Biblical  sources. 

349  The  Jew  in  History  (3)  Review  of  the  4,000 
years  and  five  civilizations  that  have  welcomed  the 
Jewish  people.  Emphasis  on  the  Jews  in  contem- 
porary society. 

352  Modem  American  Military  History  (3)  The 
role  of  the  American  mihtary  in  shaping  the 
course  of  the  nation  in  the  20th  century. 

356  U.S.  Environmental  History  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  the  transformation  of  the  American 
landscape,  the  history  of  American  environmental 
pohcy,  and  the  development  of  today's  environ- 
mental crisis. 

357  Diplomatic  History  of  the  United  States  (3) 
The  theory  and  practice  of  American  diplomacy 
from  Colonial  times  to  the  present  with  emphasis 
on  the  20th  century. 

358  Economic  History  of  the  United  States  (3) 
The  economic  development  of  the  American 
nation  as  it  evolved  from  a  frontier,  agricultural 
countn,-  into  an  urban,  industrial  power. 

360  Technology  and  American  Life  (3)  Promises 
and  practices  of  American  life  in  response  to  the 
interaction  of  American  forms,  values,  and  scien- 
tific-technological change  from  the  Colonial  peri- 
od to  the  present. 

361  Constitutional  History  of  the  United  States 
(3)  The  development  of  the  Constitution  ot  the 
United  States  from  the  Philadelphia  convenfion  to 
the  present  with  emphasis  on  major  Supreme 
Court  decisions. 

362  Violence  in  America  (3)  A  study  of  Molence 
in  American  society  as  an  instrument  of  change 
and  a  method  of  social  control. 

364  U.S.  Urban  History  (3)  A  survey  of  the  rise 
of  the  American  city  from  early  Philadelphia  to 
the  modern  metropolis.  The  recurring  themes  of 
growth,  immigration,  social  mobiUty,  city  politics, 
city  planning,  urbanism,  and  suburbanism. 


365  Popular  Culture  in  20th-century  America 

(3)  An  examination  of  the  rise  of  American  mass 
consumer  culture,  commercialization  of  leisure, 
development  of  the  mass  media,  and  redefinition 
of  normal  and  deviant  behaviors. 

366  The  Turbulent  Sixties  (3)  Examination  of 
the  stress  and  conflict  in  American  politics,  arts, 
literature,  and  society  of  the  1960s. 

367  American  Material  Culture  (3)  An  interdis- 
ciphnary  study  of  American  civilization  through 
the  examination  of  its  built  environment  and  craft- 
ed and  manufactured  artifacts  from  the  colonial 
period  to  the  mid-twentieth  century. 

368  Gay  America  (3)  Encompasses  four  himdred 
years  of  gay  and  lesbian  histon',  culture,  and  politics, 
from  colonial  settlers  and  Native  American  cultures 
to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  the  20th  century. 

369  American  West  (3)  Exploration  of  the  histor- 
ical and  mythical  American  West,  from  pre- 
Columbian  America  to  the  present. 

370  American  Indians  (3)  A  survey  of  Indian  civ- 
ilization on  the  continent  of  North  America  and 
the  confrontation  of  this  civiUzation  vnth  white 
culture. 

371  Manhood  in  America  (3)  Examines 
American  manhood  from  1600  -  present.  Focuses 
on  intersections  of  class,  race,  and  gender;  rela- 
tions between  private  and  public  spheres;  changing 
men's  experiences  over  time. 

1 373  African- American  History  (3)  A  survey  of 
African-American  history  from  15th  century  West 
Africa  to  the  present  that  focuses  on  the  evolution 
of  African-American  culture  and  identity,  and  the 
struggle  for  freedom  and  racial  equality. 
375  A  History  of  the  Arab-Israeli  Conflict  (3) 
This  course  will  examine  the  history  of  the  Arab- 
Israeli  conflict  and  the  factors  that  both  encourage 
and  impede  resolution.  Consideration  will  also  be 
given  to  the  history  of  the  U.S.  involvement  in  the 
conflict. 

380  The  History  of  U.S.  Involvement  in  the 
Middle  East  (3)  Examines  U.S.  involvement  in 
the  Middle  East  in  the  19th  and  20th  centuries. 
Consideration  will  be  given  to  rehgious,  economic, 
and  diplomatic  activities  as  well  as  involvement  in 
the  Arab-Israeh  conflict. 

390  Historical  Controversy  on  the  World-Wide 
Web  (3)  Students  evaluate  Web  presentations  of  a 
major  historical  controversy.  PREREQ:  One 
University-level  history  course,  preferably  HIS  102. 

♦  397  Topics  in  World  History  (3)  Topics  may 
vary  each  semester.  Emphasis  on  student  research 
and  discussions. 

♦  398  Topics  in  European  History  (3)  Topics 
may  vary  each  semester.  Emphasis  on  student 
research  and  discussions. 

♦  399  Topics  in  U.S.  History  (3)  Topics  may 
vary  each  semester.  Emphasis  on  student  research 
and  discussions. 

400  Seminar  (3)  In-depth  research,  swdy,  and  dis- 
cussion of  a  selected  historical  topic.  Topics  will  vary. 
Recommended  for  seniors.  PREREQ:  HIS  200. 

406  20th-century  Japan  (3)  The  course  deals  with 
Japan's  role  in  Asian  and  world  affairs  from  the 
Meiji  Restoration  of  1868  through  the  World  War 
II  period.  Concludes  with  an  assessment  of  Japan's 
post-World  War  II  role  as  an  economic  power 
positioned  to  re-emerge  as  a  major  political  entity. 

407  History  of  Brazil  (3)  A  general  survey  of 
Brazil  from  1500  to  the  present.  Emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  economic  and  political  issues,  slavery 
and  race  relations,  literature,  and  current  ecological 
problems  relative  to  the  Amazon  Basin. 


♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  History  (1-3) 

Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  history. 
Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ^  Permission  of 
department  chairperson. 

411  Middle  East  to  1700  (3)  The  historical  evolu- 
tion of  the  Middle  East  from  just  before  the  time 
of  Muhammad  until  1700.  The  course  seeks  to 
promote  an  understanding  of  the  nature  and  rise 
of  the  rehgion  of  Islam,  the  spread  of  Islamic  civi- 
lization, and  the  evolution  of  the  Arab  and 
Ottoman  empires. 

412  Middle  East  Since  1600  (3)  The  historical 
evolution  of  the  Middle  East  from  1600  to  the 
present.  The  course  seeks  to  promote  a  historically 
sound  understanding  of  the  conflicts  and  differ- 
ences between  Western  and  Middle  Eastern  soci- 
eties, as  well  as  the  continuing  interplay  of  secular 
and  religious  forces  in  the  history  of  the  region. 

1 415  Science  in  History  (3)  This  course  offers  an 
introduction  to  the  historical  evolution  of  modern 
science.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  life  and 
achievements  of  noted  scientists  against  the  back- 
drop of  their  time  and  culture.  Consideration  is 
also  given  to  the  Impact  of  developing  science  on 
the  shaping  of  Western  values. 
416  Crime  and  Punishment  in  Europe,  1450- 
1789  (3)  Focuses  on  the  historical  development  of 
criminal  law,  criminalization  processes,  court  pro- 
cedures, the  use  of  judicial  torture,  crime  rates, 
personal  characteristics  of  the  sentenced  criminals, 
and  the  punishments  they  received. 

■  420  Biography  ofModem  European  Women 
(3)  A  discussion  of  biography  as  a  form  of  histori- 
cal writing  and  vniting  about  women. 

421  History  of  England  to  1688  (3)  The  British 
people  and  their  mores,  instimtions,  and  achieve- 
ments from  the  earhest  times  to  the  Glorious 
Revolution. 

422  History  of  England  Since  1688  (3)  England 
as  a  world  leader  during  the  Commercial  and 
Industrial  revolutions,  the  evolution  of  the  democ- 
ratic process,  and  the  emergence  of  liberaUsm  fol- 
lowed by  the  democractic  welfare  state. 

■  423  Modem  Germany  (3)  Germany  m  the 
19th  and  20th  centuries:  Napoleonic  era,  rise  of 
Prussia,  nationalism  and  unification,  imperialism 
and  World  War  I,  National  Socialism,  World  War 
II,  and  divided  Germany. 

■  425  Twentieth-Century  Russia  (3)  Its  rise  and 
fall  in  light  of  traditional  Russian  patterns  and  the 
communist  experiment. 

■  427  Modem  France:  1789  to  Present  (3)  A 
survey  of  modern  France  from  the  Revolutionary 
era  through  the  ttu-bulent  19th  century  to  the 
post-Worid  War  II  recovery.  Major  themes 
include  the  social  cultural  pohtical,  and  economic 
aspects  of  modem  and  contemporary'  France. 
428  History  of  Spain  (3)  Focuses  on  political, 
religious,  economic,  and  social  aspects  of  Spain 
from  the  Roman  period  to  the  present.  Special 
attention  is  given  to  the  "Reconquista  spirit"  and 
the  Spanish  civil  war. 

■  435  European  Intellectual  History  Since  1800 
(3)  A  cultural  history  of  ideas  in  19th-  and  early 
20th-centuni-  Europe. 

445  Oral  History  (3)  Students  select,  design,  and 
earn'  out  a  project  of  original  historical  research, 
recording  broadcast-quality  oral  history  interviews 
with  elderly  informants. 
♦  450  Intemship  in  History  (1-3) 


■  Culture  cluster 

>    Diverse  communities  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Honors  Program 


451  Women  in  America  (3)  American  women's 
daily  routines,  social  roles,  and  search  for  rights 
and  identit)'  since  Colonial  days.  Recent  goals,  val- 
ues, and  conflicts. 

455  American  Intellectual  History  (3)  Political 
and  economic  thought,  theologi,',  science,  philoso- 
phy, and  hterature. 

458  History  of  the  Cold  War  (3)  Origins  and 
evolution  of  the  Cold  War  with  emphasis  on  the 
rationale  for,  and  objectives  of,  American  foreign 


policy  since  1945.  Includes  an  examination  ot  the 
historical  interpretations  ot  the  era. 
460  Field  Studies  in  History  (3)  A  fiiUy  super- 
vised learning  experience  designed  to  expose  stu- 
dents to  the  culture,  artifacts,  and  research  facili- 
ties of  a  given  country'  or  area. 
462  Social  and  Cultural  History  of  the  United 
States  (3)  The  evolution  of  American  society'  with 
emphasis  on  the  impact  of  improwng  material 
conditions  in  labor,  the  arts,  education,  religion, 


social  mores,  and  family  life.  The  changing  status 
of  women,  blacks,  and  immigrants. 

474  American  Religions  (3)  The  changes  of 
American  religion  from  the  Pilgrims  of  New 
England  to  the  cults  of  Cahfornia. 

480  Computer  Applications  in  Historical 
Research  (3)  Methods  of  historical  research  and 
analysis  based  on  the  use  of  personal  computers. 


Honors  Program 

131  Francis  Harvey  Green  Library 

610-436-2996 

610-436-2620  (fax) 

honors@wcupa.edu  (e-mail) 

Kevin  W.  Dean,  Director 

Elizabeth  M.  Nollen,  Assistant  Director 

HONORS  COUNCIL 

Dena  Beeghly,  Literacy 
Mehssa  Cichowicz,  Chemistry 
Diane  DeVestern,  Student  Affairs 
Sandra  Fowkes  Godek,  Sports  Medicine 
Benjamin  Goldsborough,  Student  Representative 
Charles  Hardy,  History 

Marsha  Haug,  Director  of  Admissions,  ex-officio 
Eugene  Klein,  Music 
David  Levasseur,  Communications  Studies 
Anne-Marie  MoscateUi,  Foreign  Languages 
Frauke  Schnell,  Political  Science 
Bree  Simmons,  Student  Representative 
Program  Design 

We  believe  that  an  honors  education  should  instill  in  students  the 
desire  to  be  active,  contributing  members  of  their  societies.  Our  mis- 
sion is  summarized  best  in  our  motto:  "To  be  honorable  is  to  serve." 
The  aim  of  the  honors  program  is  to  provide  an  inviting  environment  for 
academically  gifted  and  highlv  motivated  students  to  Interact  and  form  a 
learning  communit)'  of  peers,  faculty',  administrators,  and  staft  that  will 
challenge  and  enrich  the  students'  college  experience.  Grounded  in  the 
liberal  arts  tradition,  the  honors  program  seeks  cross-disciplinary'  connec- 
tions in  order  to  develop  students'  natural  intellectual  abilities  and  to 
challenge  them  to  emplov  those  gifts  on  behalt  ot  the  larger  community. 
For  this  reason,  the  West  Chester  University  honors  program  considers 
"honors"  to  be  more  than  a  matter  of  strong  grades.  Honors  implies  a 
decision  to  use  the  gift  of  knowledge  as  an  active  problem  solver  in  both 
the  campus  community  and  in  the  world.  To  that  end,  the  honors  pro- 
gram seeks  to  build  character  and  foster  a  commitment  to  lifelong  learn- 
ing that  prepares  leaders  for  the  21st  century.  The  Honors  Council, 
composed  of  representative  faailty,  staft,  and  students,  assists  the  direc- 
tor in  formulating  and  making  recommendations  about  the  program. 
Honors  program  membership  comprises  students  with  outstanding 
achievements  in  scholarship,  community  service,  the  arts,  and/or  leader- 
ship. Membership  in  honors  is  competitive  with  a  maximum  of  40  addi- 
tional seats  open  each  fall.  Current  membership  includes  students  from 
39  different  academic  majors.  Incoming  freshman  and  transfer  students 
normally  are  invited  to  apply  to  the  program  if  they  demonstrate  at  least 
two  of  the  following:  a)  minimum  high  school  GPA  of  3.5;  b)  minimum 
SAT  score  of  1200;  c)  top  20  percent  of  graduating  class;  d)  record  of 
achievement  in  high  school  honors/ AP  courses.  Candidates  are  reviewed 
and  selected  on  the  basis  of  commitment  to  service,  leadership  potential, 
and  fit  with  the  program's  philosophy.  Currendy  enrolled  students,  who 
have  a  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  3.25  or  higher,  may  apply  tor 


membership  through  the  Honors  OflSce.  Honors  seminars  at  the 
300/400  level  are  open  to  all  students  with  a  minimum  of  3.25  GPA. 
Membership  in  the  honors  program  enables  students  to  enhance  their 
strengths  through  a  specially  designed  27-hour  core  of  cross-disciplinary 
courses  that,  with  an  additional  mathematics  or  science  course,  meet 
general  education  requirements  for  honors  students.  Cross-disciplinary 
means  that  all  courses  in  the  core  will  contain  information  dra^vn  from  a 
minimum  of  two  academic  disciplines.  The  27-hour  honors  core  incor- 
porates 100-  and  200-level  courses.  The  three  courses  at  the  100  level,  to 
be  completed  during  the  student's  first  year  in  the  program,  focus  on 
personal  development,  including  physical  and  psychological  well  being, 
communication,  and  ethics  and  moralit}'  in  a  technological  age.  Courses 
at  the  200  level,  completed  by  the  middle  of  the  student's  third  year, 
build  upon  the  learner's  knowledge  of  self  and  address  broader  perspec- 
tives of  community  and  social  change.  Learners  study  significant  histori- 
cal and  contemporary  figures,  literary  works,  and  the  context  in  which 
they  helped  model  society'.  Students  become  aware  of  the  economic  real- 
ities that  impact  change  and  discover  how  educational  and  political 
stmcture,  science,  and  the  fine  arts  influence  society.  Honors  certification 
is  awarded  upon  completion  of  the  core  27  hoiu-s,  two  upper-level,  cross- 
disciplinarv  honors  seminars,  and  a  capstone  project.  Students  complet- 
ing the  tUl  honors  program  receive  designation  on  their  University  tran- 
script and  the  right  to  wear  a  medallion  of  achievement  at  commence- 
ment. Recognition  at  commencement  is  based  on  the  student's  academic 
record  as  of  the  completed  semester  prior  to  commencement. 
In  order  to  be  in  good  standing  with  the  honors  program,  students 
must  maintain  a  3.25  cumulative  grade  point  average,  be  active  in  a 
minimum  of  one  campus  co-curricular  activity,  and  regularly  register  for 
the  sequence  of  honors  core  courses  and  seminars.  Failure  to  maintain 
these  requirements  will  cause  the  student  to  be  placed  on  probation 
from  honors  and  may  lead  to  the  student's  dismissal  from  the  program. 
Program  probation  and  dismissal  foUow  these  procedures:  Once  a  stu- 
dent in  the  honors  program  has  earned  3 1  credit  hours,  his  or  her  cumu- 
lative grade  point  average  will  be  reviewed.  If  the  student's  average  is 
below  a  3.0,  the  student  will  be  dropped  from  the  program.  It  a  smdent's 
■average  is  below  a  3.25  but  not  below  a  3.0,  the  smdent  will  be  placed  on 
program  probation  for  two  semesters  during  which  time  the  student  is 
expected  to  raise  his  or  her  cumulative  average  to  a  3.25.  If  at  the  end  of 
the  two  semesters  the  cumulative  average  is  not  a  3.25  or  higher,  the  stu- 
dent will  be  dismissed  from  the  program.  Students  also  may  be  placed 
on  probation  if  they  are  not  actively  participating  in  a  minimum  of  one 
campus  co-curricular  activity  or  if  the)'  are  not  regularly  registering  for 
and  completing  the  sequence  of  honors  core  courses  'and  seminars. 
While  riie  student  is  on  program  probation,  his  or  her  rights  to  priority 
scheduling  ■will  be  suspended.  No  student  wiU  be  eligible  for  honors  cer- 
tification without  maintaining  a  3.25  cumulative  average  by  the  time  of 
completion  of  the  honors  program's  required  elements. 
Students  dismissed  from  the  honors  program  may  seek  reinstatement 
by  contacting  the  honors  program  director.  Smdents  may  appeal  the 
dismissal  or  probationary'  action  for  extraordinary'  circumstances  by 
contacting  the  honors  director  who  will  take  the  appeal  before  the 
Honors  Council  for  final  decision. 


Honors  Program 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Honors  Supplemental  Certification  Program.  Nonhonors  program 
students  who  have  earned  a  minimum  of  45  credits  and  a  minimum  3.25 
cumulative  GPA  may  apply  for  the  supplemental  certification  program, 
which  affords  all  benefits  of  fiill  program  membership.  To  receive  certifi- 
cation, students  need  to  complete  a  minimum  ot  12  hours  of  honors 
course  work  at  the  300/400  level  and  demonstrate  active  contributions 
and  service  to  co-curricular  elements  of  the  campus  community.  It  is  the 
general  practice  for  a  minimum  of  two  300-level  or  above  courses  to  be 
offered  each  semester.  These  are  small  group  (10-20  students)  seminar 
offerings  that  are  interdisciplinary  vnth  writing  emphasis  and  have  no 


prerequisites.  Students  may  petition,  on  special  circumstances,  to  substi- 
tute an  HON  400-level  independent  studv  for  three  hours  of  credit. 
The  Bonner  AmeriCorps  Leaders  Program.  Honors  students  who 
have  successfully  completed  their  first  year  in  the  program  may  qualify 
for  a  Bonner  AmeriCorps  service-learning  scholarship.  An  education 
voucher  of  $1,000  will  be  awarded  to  students  who  verify  300  hours  of 
community  service  during  a  calendar  year.  After  the  successful  com- 
pletion of  an  initial  year,  students  may  be  eligible  for  a  second  schol- 
arship opportunity.  Applications  are  available  in  the  Honors  Office. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
HONORS  PROGRAMS 

Symbol:  HON 

100  Self- Awareness  and  Development  (3)  Focus 
on  methods  individuals  use  to  develop  skills  in  the 
physical,  cognitive,  emotional,  and  social  aspect  of 
life.  A  holistic  approach  to  both  physical  and  men- 
tal aspects  will  be  addressed.  Methods  for  en- 
hancement and  maintenance  of  strengths  will  be 
discussed  as  well  as  approaches  to  risk  taking. 

101  Decision  Making  and  Public  Discourse  (3) 
Examination  of  the  role  of  ethical  dialogue  and 
debate  in  public  polic\'  making  of  rotating  topics 
such  as  the  environment  or  health  care.  Emphasis 
on  logic  and  critical  thinking  as  key  roles  in  identi- 
fying problems,  devising  solutions,  and  evaluating 
proposed  policies.  Consistent  with  the  emphasis 
on  the  public  forum,  students  will  develop  public 
speaking  and  critical  listening  skills. 

102  Ethics  and  Moral  Choice  in  a  Technological 
Age  (3)  Approaches  to  ethical  recommendation 
and  moral  decision-making  processes.  Engage- 
ment of  the  scientific  approach  by  using  case  stud- 
ies from  genetics,  ecology,  physics,  chemistry,  and 
computer  science  to  allow  students  to  confiront 
ways  traditional  views  of  ethics  and  moral  decision 
making  apply  to  a  contemporary  world. 

200  Theories  and  Strategies  of  Community 
Change  (3)  Spectrum  of  approaches  to  social  change 
and  significant  figures  who  make  these  changes  pos- 
sible. Works  of  historical  and  sociological  literamre. 
Including  biographies  and  autobiographies  of  key 
figures,  will  be  identified  as  a  basis  for  observation  of 
how  thinkers  of  the  past  identified  key  issues  and 
articulated  solutions  to  those  problems. 

201  Economic  Themes  in  Literature  (3) 
Foundations  of  market  and  nonmarket  economies 
as  they  relate  to  good  stewardship  and  civic 
responsibility.  Fusing  literature  and  economics,  the 
values  and  limitations  of  market  capitalism  and 
command  socialism  will  be  addressed. 


202  Educational  Systems  and  Social  Influence 

(3)  An  introducrion  to  philosophy,  history,  and 
sociology  of  American  education.  The  evolution  of 
the  school  as  an  institution  in  a  democratic  society; 
its  relationships  to  issues  dealing  with  race,  class, 
gender  and  ethnicity,  the  geographical  implica- 
tions the  school  has  for  the  community  and  vice 
versa;  the  degree  to  which  school  should  and/or 
can  serve  as  agents  for  social  change. 

203  American  Government,  Democracy  and  Public 
Opinion  (3)  Influence  of  the  role  of  public  opinion 
in  a  democracy  by  examination  of  how  individuals 
form  their  opinions  and  how  those  opinions  influ- 
ence goverrunent  and  public  polic)'  making.  Such 
areas  as  government  structure,  political  thought,  and 
sociologic  and  geographic  influences  will  be  covered. 

204  Science,  Technology,  and  Environmental 
Systems  (3)  Impact  of  technology  and  the  envi- 
ronment as  forces  of  Influence  on  communities. 
The  lab  course  will  combine  a  historical  overview 
with  a  contemporary  focus  on  ways  the  science 
community  is  developing  and  regulating  ideas  for 
the  fiiture.  Laboratory  field  experiences  will 
involve  data  collection  and  observation  in  a  variety 
of  environmental  contexts  (2,3). 

205  Community  and  the  Arts  (3)  Investigation  of 
the  arts  as  agents  of  social  change  and  influence. 
Significant  historical  and.contemporary  works 
from  art,  dance,  music,  and  theatre  will  be  identi- 
fied for  case  analysis. 

301  Seminar  (3)  First  of  two  special  topics  offered 
fall  semester.  Subject  matter  rotates  and  is  deter- 
mined by  the  honors  director  and  the  Honors 
Council  through  competitive  submission  from 
University  faculty.  Seminars  are  designed  to  be 
interdisciplinary  and  to  have  a  writing  emphasis. 

302  Seminar  (3)  First  of  two  special  topics  offered 
spring  semester.  Subject  matter  rotates  and  is 
determined  by  the  honors  director  and  the  Honors 
Council  through  competitive  submission  from 


University  faculty.  Seminars  are  designed  to  be 
interdisciplinari'  and  to  have  a  writing  emphasis. 

381  Symposium  in  Arts  and  Humanities  (3) 
Investigation  of  leadership  issues  as  they  are  found 
within  special  topics  in  the  arts  and  humanities. 

382  Symposium  in  Social  and  Behavioral 
Sciences  (3)  Investigation  of  leadership  issues  as 
they  are  found  within  special  topics  in  the  social 
and  behavioral  sciences. 

383  Symposium  in  the  Sciences  (3)  Investigation 
of  leadership  issues  as  they  are  found  within  spe- 
cial topics  in  the  sciences. 

401  Seminar  (3)  Second  of  two  special  topics 
offered  fall  semester.  Subject  matter  rotates  and  is 
determined  by  the  honors  director  and  the  Honors 
Council  through  competitive  submission  from 
University  faculty.  Seminars  are  designed  to  be 
interdisciplinary  and  to  have  a  writing  emphasis. 

402  Seminar  (3)  Second  of  two  special  topics 
offered  spring  semester.  Subject  matter  rotates  and 
is  determined  by  the  honors  director  and  the 
Honors  Council  through  competitive  submission 
from  University  faculty.  Seminars  are  designed  to 
be  interdisciplinan,'  and  to  have  a  writing  emphasis. 
480  Senior  Project  (3)  Swdents  identify  and/or 
investigate  a  topic  for  in-depth  study  that  involves 
a  crossdiscipUnan'  inquirv  approach. 

490  Capstone  Project  (3)  Students  will  identify 
and  investigate  a  problem  in  a  community  business, 
nonprofit  agency,  or  research  laboratory,  and  then 
work  to  solve  the  problem.  Smdents  will  be  expect- 
ed to  play  an  active  role  in  the  problem-solving 
effort  and  contribute  a  minimum  ot  ten  hours  each 
week  to  help  solve  the  problem.  Students  will  seek 
interaction  with  the  CEO,  senior  officer(s),  and/or 
senior  investigators  of  the  business,  agency,  or  lab- 
orator)',  who  will  serve  as  leader  models  for  student 
studv.  While  projects  are  generally  completed  in 
the  senior  year,  students  may  register  for  this 
course  upon  completion  of  the  27-hour  core  or  by 
special  permission  of  the  honors  program  director. 


Interdisciplinary  Programs 

West  Chester  University  offers  three  interdisciplinary  programs 
leading  to  a  bachelor  of  arts  degree: 

American  Studies 

Comparative  Literature  Studies 

Women's  Studies 
West  Chester  also  offers  five  interdisciplinary  programs  leading  to 
transcript  recognition: 


Ethnic  Studies  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 

Latin  American  Studies  Russian  Studies 

Linguistics 
These  programs  give  students  the  opportunity  to  develop  a  syn- 
thesis of  knowledge  from  several  disciplines.  See  individual  pro- 
grams for  course  sequences. 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


Interdisciplinary'  Programs:  American  Studies 


American  Studies  Program 

500  xMain  Hall 
610-436-2681 

AMERICAN  STUDIES  COMMITTEE 

Karin  E.  Gedge,  History 

Charles  A.  Hard\',  History 

Sterling  E.  Murray,  Music  History 

C.  James  Trotman,  English 

Richard  J.  Webster,  History,  Coordinator 

Students  are  introduced  to  a  broad  spectrum  ot  ^"Vmerican  culture,  and  are 

encouraged  to  %xud\  an  area  in  depth  and  to  develop  career  interests 

through  concentrations  in  American  art  histon',  African-American  studies, 

historic  presen-ation,  environmental  studies,  journalism  and  editing,  and 

museum  studies.  An  optional  internship  provides  on-the-job  experience. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  AMERICAN  STUDIES 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirements        0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Required  Core  21-30  semester  hours 
AMS  200  (3) 

AMS  367  (3) 

AMS  400  (3)  or  AMS  415  (1-15) 

HIS  151-152  (6) 

LIT  200-201  (6) 


4.  Elective  Core  18  semester  hours 
Six  American-topic  courses  are  to  be  taken  in 
anthropolog)',  art  history,  geography,  histor)', 

literature,  music  historv-  and  literature,  philosophy, 
political  science,  and  sociology',  with  no  more 
than  two  courses  from  one  discipline. 

5.  Elective  Concentration 

A  smdent  must  take  enough  courses  to  ensure  that  a  minimum  of 
120  semester  hours  are  completed  successflillv.  Each  American 
smdies  major  must  submit  for  approval  a  proposed  course  of  smdy 
at  the  beginning  ot  the  junior  vear.  For  guidance  consult  the 
^Ajnerican  studies  program  coordinator. 

Minor  in  American  Studies  18  semester  hours 

For  transcript  recognition  of  an  American  studies  minor,  a  student 
must  take  18  semester  hours  allocated  in  the  foUo\%ing  areas: 
American  Smdies  (6) 

American  Histon-,  preferably  HIS  151  or  HIS  152  (3) 
American  Literature,  preferabl)'  LIT  200  or  LIT  201  (3) 
American  topics:  One  course  from  the  arts,  literature,  or  philosophy, 
and  one  course  from  histon,-  or  social  and  behavioral  sciences,  or 
other  courses  approved  by  the  adviser.  (6) 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
AMERICAN  STUDIES 

Sv-mbol:  AMS 

#  200  American  Civilization  (3)  An  interdiscipli- 
narv-  study  ot  the  forces,  forms,  and  values  that 
have  contributed  to  the  making  of  American  civi- 
lization. Sev-eral  academic  discipUnes  are  drawn 
upon  in  exploring  the  "Americaness"  of  American 
institutions,  thought,  behavior,  and  material  cul- 
ture. 

#210  Mass  Media  and  Popular  Culture  (3)  An 
e.vploration  of  the  role  ot  media  in  the  develop- 
ment of  American  popular  culture.  Particular 
emphasis  will  be  given  to  the  transformations 
brought  about  bv  mass  media  after  1880  and  the 


increasing  corporate  involvement  in  mass  media 
during  the  20th  centurj-. 

#  250  Myths  and  Modernization  (3)  An  interdis- 
ciplinarv-  exploration  ot  American  ci\ilization  dur- 
ing three  stages  of  development  from  Columbus  to 
the  present.  Focuses  on  anal)-sis  of  civic  and  popu- 
lar culture  to  decode  mvths  ot  national  idenritv' 
and  the  media  in  which  they  are  disseminated. 
367  American  Material  Culture  (3)  An  interdis- 
ciplinarv-  study  of  .'\merican  civilization  through 
the  examination  of  its  buUt  environment  and  craft- 
ed and  manufactured  artifacts  from  the  Colonial 
period  to  the  mid-20th  centurv-. 
371  Manhood  in  America  (3)  Examines 
American  manhood  from  1600  present.  Focuses 


on  intersections  of  class,  race,  and  gender;  rela- 
tions between  private  and  public  spheres;  changing 
men's  experiences  over  time. 

400  Senior  Thesis  or  Project  (3)  A  concluding 
"statement"  incorporating  the  interdisciplinary 
generalist  approach. 

401  Independent  Study  (1-3)  An  opportunitv'  to 
pursue  altemativ-e  study  projects  outside  the  class- 
room; field  work  in  communitv-  resources,  etc. 

♦  415  American  Studies  Internship  (1-15) 
Cooperative,  service/learning  experience  at  a  com- 
munitv- agencv-,  business,  or  institution. 

♦  .Approved  interdisciplinan-  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Comparative  Literature  Studies  Program 

537  Main  HaU 

610-436-3101/2822 

Geetha  Ramanathan,  Coordinator 

gramanatha@vvcupa.edu 

PROFESSORS:  K.  Myrsiades,  L.  MjTsiades,  Ramanathan, 

Schlau 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Awuyah,  Ward 
PROGRAM  FACULTY:  Esplugas,  Larsen,  Maltby,  Verderame 
This  program  provides  a  curricidum  option  for  students  with  an  inter- 
est in  international  studies  bv  offering  a  broad  background  in 
European  and  non- Western  cidture  and  literamre. 
This  program  is  responsive  to  recent  developments  in  professional 
business,  law,  and  medical  schools,  which  stress  admission  of  smdents 
with  humanities  backgrounds  or  humanities  complements  to  their  sci- 
entific or  technical  backgrounds,  and  it  reflects  the  growth  of  profes- 
sional school  programs  that  include  more  options  in  the  humanities. 
More  specifically,  this  program  is  designed  to  answer  student  requests 
for  a  program  that  supplies  a  greater  breadth  of  literature  than  is  com- 
monly offered  in  a  language  program  and  a  greater  variet)'  than  that 
offered  in  an  English  department. 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  —  COMPARATIVE 
LITERATURE  STUDIES 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 

2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement  3- 
(Culture  cluster  option  cannot  be  substituted 
for  foreign  language  requirement.) 

3.  Concentration  or  Minor  Electives 

4.  Cognate  Requirements 
Under  advisement 

5.  Comparative  Literamre  Core 
CLS  200  or  equivalent,  201  or  367  or  368,  261, 
310  or  equivalent,  and  400 

6.  Comparative  Literamre  Electives 
Five  electives  that  reflect  a  variety  of  genres, 
periods,  traditions,  approaches,  and  theoretical 
concerns,  selected  from  those  courses  listed 
below.  Students  wishing  to  take  courses  other 
than  those  courses  listed  below  must  have  the 
written  approval  of  the  Comparative  Literature 
Committee. 


48  semester  hours 
12  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 
6  semester  hotu-s 

15  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


Interdisciplinary  Programs;  Comparative  Literature  Studies 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


7.   Literature  in  the  Original  Language  6  semester  hours 

Two  courses  in  the  literature  of  a  language 
other  than  English. 

Minor  in  Comparative  Literature  18  semester  hours 

'Select  ONE  course  in  each  of  the  areas  hsted  below. 

1.  Literature  and  the  other  arts 
CLS  201,  304,  365,  368,  or  370 

2.  Theory,  intellectual  history,  or  literary  criticism 
CLS  310  or  352 

3.  Theme,  genre,  or  movement 
CLS  258,  259,  361,  or  362 

4.  Relationship,  influence,  or  intertextuality 
CLS  304,  309,  363,  367,  or  400 

5.  Non- Western  literature  or  literature  in  a  language 
other  than  English 

CLS255,  400,  411 


6.   Women's  Literature 

CLS  258,  259,  or  304 
NOTE:  Not  all  course  numbers  available  for  each  categor)'  above  are 
listed.  Please  check  with  the  comparative  literature  studies  coordinator 
in  537  Main  Hall  (610-436-2915)  for  other  possible  substitutions. 

Minor  in  Film  Criticism  18  semester  hours 

1.  Required  Course  3  semester  hours 
ELM  200 

2.  Elective  Courses  15  semester  hours 
Any  15  credits  selected  from  the  follovvdng  list  with  approval  of  the 
adviser: 

CLS  304,  363,  364,  368,  369,  400,  and  410;  COM  217  and  317; 
EGE  404,  405;  EIT  260;  ELM  201,  202,  300,  301,  and  400 


For  course  descriptions,  see  English  and  Foreign  Language  sections  in  this 
catalog.  For  related  departments  other  than  English  or  Foreign  Languages, 
consult  the  Handbook  for  Comparative  Literature  Studies  available  from  the 
program  coordinator. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
COMPARATIVE  LITERATURE 
STUDIES 

Symbol:  CLS 

►  165  Introduction  to  World  Literature  (3)  This 
course  is  designed  to  introduce  students  to  litera- 
ture representative  of  both  Western  and  non- 
Western  cultures  and  can  be  taken  as  an  alterna- 
tive to  LIT  165.  Not  open  to  English  majors. 

#  201  Classical  Mythology  in  the  20th  Century 
(3)  Classical  myths  and  their  significance  in  select- 
ed works  of  literature,  film,  and  art. 

t  203  African  Studies  (3)  This  course  studies 
African  culture  through  literature,  anthropology, 
and  history.  It  focuses  on  the  socio-cultural  and 
historical  contexts  of  African  writing  through  the 
colonial  and  postcolonial  periods. 
225  Twentieth  Century  Native  American 
Literature  (3)  This  course  investigates  the  struggle 
of  the  Native  American  author  to  represent  his/her 
own  cultural  experience  as  a  voice. 
1 258  Women's  Literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of  world 
women's  literature  from  800  B.C.  -  1800. 
Readings  are  chosen  from  the  works  of  Sappho, 
Diotima,  Mutta,  Auvaiyar,  Sei  Shonagan,  Sule 
Sankavya,  Murasaki,  Hildegard,  von  Bingen, 
Mirabai,  Marguerite  de  Navarre,  Phillis  Wheatley, 
Aphra  Behn,  Madame  de  Stael,  Jane  Austen,  and 
Fanny  Burney  among  others. 

►  259  Women's  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of  wom- 
en's literature  &om  1 800  to  the  present.  Readings 
are  chosen  from  the  works  of  Harriet  Jacobs,  Ida  B. 
Wells,  Charlotte  Bronte,  Jean  Rhys,  Virginia  Woolf, 
Marguerite  Duras,  Christa  Wolf,  Merce  Rodoreda, 
Jamaica  Kincaid,  Tsitsi  Dangarembga,  Alifa  Rifaat, 
Louise  Erdrich,  Cherrie  Moraga,  Maxine  Hong 
Kingston,  and  Arundati  Roy  among  others. 

1 260  World  Literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of  world 
literary  texts  from  pre-classical  times  to  1600. 
261  World  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of  world  lit- 
erary texts  from  1600  to  the  present. 

#  270  Life,  Death,  and  Disease  (3)  A  course  treat- 
ing the  study  of  literary  works,  film,  and  selected 
readings  from  other  areas  (history,  science,  fiction, 
and  nonfiction)  to  generate  an  understanding  of 
the  relationship  of  human  values  to  medicine,  ill- 
ness, and  issues  ot  related  importance  to  physicians. 

#  297  Themes  in  Contemporary  Literature  (3) 
Topics  to  be  announced  each  time  course  is  offered. 
304  Women  and  Film  (3)  An  examination  of  the 
role  of  women  in  contemporary  world  cinema  and 
the  feminist  film. 


309  Literature  Translation  Workshop  (3)  A 

writing  workshop  on  the  theory  and  practice  of  lit- 
erary translation. 
H311  Contemporary  Latin-American  Narrative 

(3)  An  examination  ot  Latin-American  narrative 
(short  story,  novella,  novel,  and  testimonial  litera- 
ture). Spanish-  and  Portuguese-language  writers 
from  South  and  Central  America,  Mexico,  and  the 
Caribbean  will  be  studied,  from  the  period  of 
magical  realism  (1950's  and  1960's)  through  the 
present.  They  may  include  Isabel  Allende,  Jorge 
Amado,  Miguel  Angel  Asturias,  Jorg  Luis  Borges, 
Gabriel  Garcia  Marquez,  Clarice  Lispector,  Elena 
Poniatowska,  and  Luis  Rafael  Sanchez. 

#  329  Gender  and  Peace  (3)  An  examination  of  the 
ways  in  which  social  constructions  of  gender  intersect 
wath  perceptions  and  experiences  of  war  and  peace. 

333  Latina  Writing  (3)  An  examination  of  the  lit- 
erary works  produced  by  Latinas  in  the  20th  cen- 
tury. The  study  ot  this  literature  will  include  a 
cross-cultural  approach  that  will  elucidate  socipo- 
Utical  themes  emerging  from  the  texts. 

334  Politics  and  Economics  in  the  Literature  of 
the  Modem  Americas  (3)  A  comparative  historical 
and  literary  examination  of  poUucal  and  economic 
issues  reflected  in  20th  century  U.S.  and  Latin 
American  literature.  The  study  of  representative 
texts  of  various  genres  will  also  elucidate  issues  of 
race,  class,  and  gender. 

350  Computer  Applications  in  the  Humanities 
(3)  This  course  is  designed  to  provide  an  introduc- 
tion to  the  computer  and  its  applications  in  a  num- 
ber of  humanistic  disciplines  (literature,  history, 
and  writing,  but  some  attention  also  will  be  given 
to  foreign  languages,  linguistics,  music,  and  art). 

351  African  Literature  (3)  A  study  of  the  repre- 
sentation of  Africa  through  the  perspectives  of 
African  and  non-African  writers. 

#  352  Modemity/Postmodemity  (3)  A  critical 
analysis  ot  the  modernity/postmodernity  debates 
from  the  integrated  perspectives  of  literature,  phi- 
losophy, history,  and  politics. 

361  Modem  World  Drama  (3)  This  course  seeks 
to  develop  and  to  extend  an  understanding  of  the 
basic  elements  of  drama.  The  student  will  be 
exposed  to  a  range  of  theatrical  practices  and 
diverse  traditions  of  world  drama. 

362  Modem  World  Fiction  (3)  This  course  seeks 
to  develop  and  to  extend  an  understanding  of  the 
basic  elements  of  fiction.  The  student  will  be 
exposed  to  a  range  of  fictional  practices  and 
diverse  traditions  of  world  fiction. 


363  Soviet  Literature  and  Film  (3)  A  compara- 
tive approach  to  selected  20th  century  Soviet 
works  of  fiction,  poetry,  drama,  and  film. 
365  African-American  Film  (3)  This  course  will 
study  the  history,  form,  and  content  of  African- 
American  film.  The  fdms  chosen  are  from  various 
genres  and  cover  older  and  contemporary  films. 
I  367  Classical  Mythology  (3)  An  examination  of 
Greek  mythology  through  the  works  of  Homer, 
Hesiod,  the  Greek  tragedians,  and  Greek  lyric  poets. 

#  368  Culture,  Myth,  and  Society  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  how  the  culture,  mythology,  and  politics 
of  ancient  Greece  from  Homer  to  Plato  determine 
how  a  period  is  represented  through  its  literary, 
historical,  and  philosophical  te.xts  and  how  con- 
temporary culture  rewrites  these  te.xts. 

369  Literature  and  Film  (3)  The  interrelationship 
between  selected  works  of  world  fiction  and  their 
film  adaptations. 

#  371  Law,  Literature,  and  Conununication  (3) 
A  look  at  the  presentational  aspects  of  law —  legal 
writing  and  oral  argument — its  constructions  in 
narrative — law  as  literature  and  literature  as  law — 
and  the  relationship  of  law  to  anthropologj',  psy- 
chology, history,  and  sociology. 

^  400  Comparative  Literature  Seminar  (3) 
Topics  such  as  Homer  and  the  modern  Western 
race  and  legal  narrative,  interrelations  of  African 
and  African-American  literature,  sexual  politics  in 
modern  drama,  and  visual  culture  in  Third  World 
fdm  are  offered.  Required  of  comparative  literature 
majors  in  their  junior  or  senior  year. 

♦  410  Independent  Study  in  Comparative 
Literature  (3) 

♦  411  Foreign  Study  in  Comparative 
Literature  (3) 

FILM  THEORY  AND  CRITICISM 

Symbol:  ELM 

200  Introduction  to  Film  (3)  A  critical  and  ana- 
lytical approach  to  world  cinema  covering  film 
theory  and  the  major  fdm  movements  (Soviet 
Realism,  German  Expressionism,  Italian  Neo- 
Realism,  French  New  Wave,  Cinema  Nuovo,  New 
German  Cinema,  and  Surrealism)  from  the  begin- 
ning to  present.  (Group  E)** 

201  American  Film  (3)  The  function  of  cinema  in 
contemporary  society  as  a  socio-cultural,  econom- 


I    Diverse  communities  course 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 
■  Culture  cluster 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Interdisciplinary  Programs:  Latin-American  Studies 


ic,  and  political  object  as  seen  through  critical 
analysis  of  American  films.  (Group  E)** 
300  Private  Screening  (1)  Eight  to  12  narrative  film 
classics  per  semester  on  a  specific  topic  or  theme. 


301  Documentary  Film  (3)  Understanding  and 
enjoying  the  social,  philosophic,  economic,  and 
poUtical  aspects  of  documentary  film.  (Group  E)* 


See  the  department  handbook  for  group  descriptions. 


Ethnic  Studies  Program 


201  Old  Library 

610-436-2725 

Bonita  Freeman-Witthoft,  Director  and  Native-American  Coordinator 

William  I.  Guy,  Assistant  Director  and  Program  Coordinator 

C.  James  Trotman,  African-American  Coordinator 

Stacey  Schlau,  Hispanic-American  Coordinator 

Jonathan  Friedman,  Jewish-American  Coordinator 

STEERING  COMMITTEE 

Marshall  J.  Becker,  Anthropology 

Erminio  Braidotti,  Foreign  Languages 

Andrew  E.  Dinniman,  Educational  Services 

Charles  Hardy,  History 

William  L.  Hewitt,  History 

Frank  J.  Hoffman,  Philosophy 

Mildred  C.  Joyner,  Social  Work 

Deborah  Malstedt,  Psychology 

Bhim  Sandhu,  Political  Science 

Richard  W.  Voss,  Social  Work 

Jerome  M.  Williams,  Foreign  Languages 

The  Ethnic  Studies  Institute  (ESI)  offers  a  minor  and  a  certificate  to  any 

student,  regardless  ot  major,  who  satisfactorily  completes  18  semester 

hours  of  work  in  ethnic  studies.  Study  may  lead  to  a  general  certificate  in 

ethnic  studies  or  to  a  specialized  certificate  in  one  ot  the  following  areas: 

•  African-American  Studies  •   Jewish-American  Studies 

•  Hispanic-American  Studies        •    Native-American  Studies 
For  current  requirements  and  a  list  of  approved  courses  in  each  spe- 
cialization, consult  the  director  or  assistant  director  of  ethnic  studies. 
For  each  option  currently  offered  there  are,  in  addition  to  the  relevant 
ethnic  studies  core  courses,  certain  cognate  courses.  These  cognate 


courses  do  not  necessarily  deal  directly  with  ethnic  group  life  but  give 
an  added  dimension  of  social  and  historical  background. 
As  soon  as  possible,  students  should  register  their  intent  to  earn  the 
minor  with  the  assistant  director  of  the  ESI.  At  the  end  of  each  semes- 
ter, students  should  report  the  ethnic-related  courses  completed  during 
the  semester  and  the  courses  planned  for  the  following  semester  to  the 
assistant  director.  An  updated  list  of  courses  approved  for  credit  is 
available  each  semester  from  the  ESI  before  the  advising  and  schedul- 
ing period.  Students  can  use  an  approved  ethnic-related  course  toward 
the  completion  of  the  minor  in  Ethnic  Studies  at  the  same  time  it  is 
being  used  to  fulfdl  their  major,  other  minor,  or  elective  requirements. 
Students  are  encouraged  to  attend  at  least  two  cultural  ethnic  events  - 
speakers,  musical  programs,  art  shows,  theatre  productions,  or  films  - 
each  year. 

For  advising  in  ethnic  studies,  contact  William  I.  Guy,  610-436-2698, 
or  wguy#wcupa.edu. 

Minor  in  Holocaust  Studies  18  semester  hours 

The  program  in  Holocaust  Studies  deals  not  only  with  historical 

aspects  of  the  Holocaust,  but  also  with  moral  and  political  issues 

involved  in  the  prevention  of  future  holocausts. 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts 

or  bachelor  of  science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree  program.  For 

advising  in  Holocaust  studies,  contact  Dr.  Jonathan  Friedman,  610- 

436-2972. 


1. 


9  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


Required  Courses 

HIS  332,  349,  and  PHI  180 

Elective  Courses 

Any  three  courses  selected  from  the  following: 

ANT  120;  GER  221/EGE  222;  HIS  423;  LIT  304;  PSC  252, 

322;  PSY  254;  SOC  335;  SSC  385,  480;  or  SWO  225 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ETHNIC  STUDIES 

Symbol:  SSC 

#201  Global  Perspectives  (3)  This  course  is 
intended  to  help  students  develop  the  competencies 


needed  for  the  understanding  of,  and  meaningfiil 
participation  in,  the  world  issues  of  the  1990's. 
♦  480  Ethnic  Cultures  Workshop  (3)  This  work- 
shop considers  the  history,  traditions,  customs,  and 
contributions  to  American  life  of  various  ethnic 
groups.  The  lectures  and  special  programs  are 


designed  to  increase  the  student's  knowledge  of  the 
multicultural  nature  of  American  society.  Projects, 
specifically  tailored  to  individual  needs,  are  directed 
by  a  faculty  member  of  the  Ethnic  Studies  Institute. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Latin-American  Studies  Program 

111  Main  Hall 
610-436-2372 

Erminio  Braidotti,  Coordinator 

Any  student  in  the  University,  regardless  of  his  or  her  area  of  specializa- 
tion, may  earn  a  minor  and  a  letter  of  verification  in  Latin- American 
studies  after  satisfactory  completion  of  18  semester  hours  of  work,  dis- 
tributed as  follows: 

Minor  in  Latin-American  Studies 

Required:  Either  A  or  B  18  semester  hours 

A.  1.   Spanish  or  Portuguese  6  semester  hours 
(Intermediate  level  or  above) 

2.  Latin-American  history  6  semester  hours 

3.  Electives  6  semester  hours 


OR 
B.  1.   Latin-American  history  6  semester  hours 

2.  Latin-American  culture,  politics,  geography    6  semester  hours 

3.  Electives  6  semester  hours 
Selected  under  advisement  from  Latin- American-oriented  courses 
offered  by  the  departments  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology, 
Geography  and  Planning,  Political  Science,  Economics,  Art,  or  oth- 
ers. In  track  A,  one  three-credit  course  must  be  devoted  to  literature, 
art  history,  or  music. 

For  advising,  see  Dr.  Braidotti  in  the  Department  of  Foreign 

Languages. 

A  student  should  maintain  a  2.5  average  in  area-studies  courses  to  be 

recommended  for  graduate  work  in  the  area-studies  concentration. 


U      Interdisciplinary'  Programs:  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Linguistics  Program 


538  Main  Hall 

610-436-2269 

Dennis  L.  Godfrey,  Coordinator 

CONTRIBUTING  FACULTY 

W.  Stephen  Croddy,  Philosophy 

Stephen  D.  Gilmour,  Foreign  Languages 

Charles  E.  Grove,  Foreign  Languages 

Jane  E.  Jeffrey,  English 

Cheri  L.  Micheau,  English 

Garrett  G.  Molholt,  English 

Frederick  R.  Fatten,  Foreign  Languages 

Paul  A.  StoUer,  Anthropology  and  Sociology 

Andrea  Varricchio,  Foreign  Languages 

Michael  S.  Weiss,  Communicative  Disorders 

The  minor  in  linguistics  is  an  interdisciplinary  program  offered  by  the 

departments  of  Anthropolog}'  and  Sociology,  Communicative  Disorders, 

Communication  Studies,  English,  Foreign  Languages,  and  Philosophy. 

Its  purpose  is  to  provide  the  student  with  a  foundation  in  the  analysis  of 

the  various  aspects  of  language.  Students  wishing  to  enter  the  program 

must  consult  the  program  coordinator.  To  receive  credit  for  the  minor  in 

linguistics,  a  student  must  complete  18  semester  hours  of  course  work. 

The  program  coordinator  must  approve  all  courses. 


Minor  in  Linguistics 


1 


18  semester  hours 

9  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 


Required  Courses 

ENG/LIN  230,  ENG  331  (or  any  other 

structural  grammar  course),  ENG  335  (or 

any  other  historical  linguistics  course) 

Electives 

A.  Choose  one  of  the  following: 

ENG  330,  ERE  365,  GER  365,  RUS  365, 
SPA  365,  SPP  106,  or  any  other  approved 
course  in  phonology  or  phonetics 
Choose  one  of  the  following: 
ANT/LIN  380;  COM/LIN  415;  ENG  339, 
340;  LIN  250;  PHyLIN  330,  360;  or  any 
other  approved  comparable  course 
Choose  an  additional  course  from  either 
Group  A  or  B  above,  or  choose  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing: 

COM  307;  ENG  430;  LIN  411,  412;  LIT 
430,  431;  PHI  190,  436;  PHY  110;  SPP  204; 
or  any  other  approved  linguistics  course 
For  course  descriptions,  see  anthropology  and  sociology  (ANT),  com- 
municative disorders  (SPP),  communication  studies  (COM),  English 
(ENG  or  LIT),  foreign  languages  (LAN,  LIN,  ERE,  GER,  RUS,  or 
SPA),  philosophy  (PHI),  or  physics  (PHY). 


B. 


C. 


Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  Program 

101  Main  Hall 

610-436-2754 

Frederick  R.  Struckmeyer,  Coordinator 

ADVISORY  COMMITTEE 

Charles  Bauerlein,  English 

Roger  Bove,  Economics  and  Finance 

Robin  Garrett,  Nursing  and  Director,  Women's  Center 

Harvey  Greisman,  Sociology 

Tom  Heston,  History 

Barbara  Kauffman,  Criminal  Justice 

Carol  Radich,  Elementary  Education 

Bhim  Sandhu,  Political  Science 

Stacey  Schlau,  Foreign  Languages 

Peace  and  conflict  studies  examines  social  conflict,  conflict  resolution, 

and  cooperation  at  the  group,  national,  and  international  levels.  This 

process  involves  understanding  factors  that  contribute  to  peace  with 

justice,  various  functions  of  conflict,  and  processes  by  which  conflict 

may  be  managed.  The  minor  fosters  skills  for  both  study  and  action. 

Though  primarily  an  enrichment  to  liberal  education,  this  minor  is 

relevant  to  a  variety  of  careers,  both  traditional  and  emerging.  The 

former  include  law,  communications,  education,  and  government. 

However,  there  are  also  many  career  opportunities  with  a  wide  range 

of  public  interest  and  advocacy  organizations. 


The  peace  and  conflict  studies  minor  consists  of  18  credit  hours,  some 
of  which  also  may  be  used  to  ftilfiU  other  degree  requirements.  This 
minor  may  be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  or 
bachelor  of  science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree  program. 

Minor  in  Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  18  semester  hours 


1. 


3  semester  hours 


4. 


5. 


3  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


Required  Course 
SSC  200 

Either  of  the  following 
SSC  201,  or  PSC  316 
Either  of  the  following 
HISAVOS  329,  or 
PHI  207 

Either  of  the  following 
COM  204,  or 
COM  216 

Electives  6  semester  hours 

Must  be  from  different  departments  or  disciplines.  These  include 
BIO  102;  COM  312  and  499;  CRJ  470;  GEO  232;  HIS  332,  352, 
and  362;  LIT  162  and  309;  PHI  210,  482;  PSC  315;  PSY  254; 
SOC  335,  341,  and  376;  SWO  225;  WOS  315.  Other  courses, 
under  advisement,  also  may  satisfy  the  elective  requirement,  as  well 
as  substitute  for  the  PSC  316  option  in  #2  above.  (PHI  is  recom- 
mended.) 


COURSE  DESCRIPTION 

PEACE  AND  CONFLICT  STUDIES 

SjTnbol:  SSC 


#  SSC  200  Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict 
Studies  (3)  An  interdisciplinary  study  of  the  caus- 
es and  functions  of  societal  conflict  and  processes 


of  controlling  conflict,  witfi  major  attention  given 
to  the  problem  of  violence. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


Kinesiology' 


Russian  Studies  Program 

114  Main  Hall 
610-436-2585 

Frederick  Patton,  Coordinator 

This  program  is  offered  joindy  by  the  faculty  of  arts  and  sciences  and 
the  faculty  ot  professional  studies. 

Any  student  in  the  University,  regardless  of  his  or  her  area  of  special- 
ization, may  earn  a  minor  specialization  in  Russian  studies  after  satis- 
factory completion  of  18  semester  hours  of  work,  distributed  as  fol- 
lows: 

Minor  in  Russian  Studies  18  semester  hours 

Required:  Either  A  or  B 

A.  1.   Russian  language  (intermediate  level  6  semester  hours 

or  above) 
2.   Russian  histor\'  and/or  politics  6  semester  hours 

OR 


B.  1.  Russian  history  and/or  politics  6  semester  hours 
2.   Russian  civihzation,  culture  6  semester  hours 

and/or  poUtics 
To  fixLfiU  requirements  for  the  Russian  studies  minor,  students  may 
choose  from  the  following  courses:  CLS  363,  364;  ERU  209;  GEO 
304;  HIS  324,  425;  PSC  246,  311,  349;  and  RUS  201-412,  310. 

C.  Electives  6  semester  hours 
Selected  under  ad\isement  from  Russian-oriented  courses  offered 
by  the  departments  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology,  Art,  English, 
Pohtical  Science,  or  other  departments  of  WCU. 

For  advising,  see  Professor  Patton  in  the  Department  of  Foreign 

Languages. 

A  student  should  maintain  a  3.0  average  in  area-studies  courses  to  be 

recommended  for  graduate  work  in  the  area-studies  concentration. 


Women's  Studies  Program  —  See  Women's  Studies 


Department  of  Kinesiology 

206  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences  Center 

610-436-2260 

Emlyn  Jones,  Chairperson 

Frances  E.  Clehnd,  Assistant  Chairperson — Health  and  Physical 

Education  -  Teacher  Certification 
W.  Craig  Stevens,  Assistant  Chairperson — Exercise  Science, 

Coordinator  of  Graduate  Studies 
Barbara  Lappano,  Coordinator  of  Dance 
PROFESSOR:  Lepore 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Cleland,  Fry,  HeHon, 

Koehler,  Smith,  Stevens,  V^olkwein,  Williams 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Jones,  Lappano,  Melton,  Ottley, 

Ray,  Studlien-Webb,  Thielz,  Zetts 
INSTRUCTOR:  Ranck 

The  Department  ot  Kinesiolog}-  offers  two  programs  leading  to  the 
bachelor  of  science  degree. 

1.  The  B.S.  in  HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION- 
TEACHER  CERTinCATION.  This  program  prepares  students 
to  teach  health  and  physical  education  in  preschool  through  grade  12. 

2.  The  B.S.  in  HE.\LTH  AND  PHYSICAL  EDUCATION- 
EXERCISE  SCIENCE.  The  purpose  of  the  exercise  science  spe- 
cialist (ESS)  program  is  to  prepare  students  for  positions  in  the 
growing  and  multifaceted  tield  of  health  and  fitness  or  to  gain 
admission  into  various  professional  and  graduate  programs.  In  addi- 
tion, students  will  be  prepared  for  success  in  appropriate  certification 
e.xaminations.  The  primary  focus  ot  the  ESS  program  is  for  each 
student  to  develop  abilities  and  master  knowledge  and  skills  neces- 
sary to  provide  leadership  on  the  health  and  fitness  fields  as  well  as 
be  a  successftil  member  of  society. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— HEALTH  AND  PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION— TEACHER  CERTIFICATION 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Kinesiology  Foundations  6  semester  hours 
KIN  103,  285 

3.  Pedagog}'  Core  12  semester  hours 
KIN  205,  300*,  302*,  402* 

4.  Applied  Sciences  9  semester  hours 
KIN  241,  361,  363 


10  semester  hours 


5  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


12  semester  hours 


5.  Activity  Modules 
KIN  102,  201,  301,  303,  401 

6.  Related  PDE  Requirements 
SMD  271,  KIN  347 

7.  Health  Education 
HEA  230,  303,  304,  306*,  440* 

8.  Capstone  Courses 
KIN  489*,  490* 

9.  One  extracurricular  credit  experience  required  for  formal  admis- 
sion; two  additional  experiences  required  prior  to  student  teaching. 

10.  GPA  Requirement 

Students  must  maintain  the  required  GPA  in  accordance  with  the 
criteria  for  formal  admission  to  teacher  education  program.  See  the 
"Teaching  Certification  Programs"  section  in  this  catalog,  pages 
145-147. 

11.  Certification  granted  when  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education  requirements  are  met. 

Please  be  advised  that  the  required  course  work  for  a  degree  in  health 
and  physical  education  at  West  Chester  University  consists  of  120 
semester  hours  ot  study. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— EXERCISE  SCIENCE 
SPECIALIST* 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Related  Requirements  13  semester  hours 
BIO  259,  269;  HEA  303;  SMD  271 

3.  Exercise  Science  Requirements  57  semester  hours 
Exercise  Science  Core  (24  semester  hours) 

EXS  100,  180,  251,  261,  270,  282,  375 
Adaptations  in  Exercise  Science  (15  semester  hours) 

EXS  381,  382,  486,  489 
Applications  in  E.xercise  Science  (9  semester  hours) 

EXS  384,  490 
Electives  in  Exercise  Science 

Nine  or  more  semester  hours  to  complete 

120  semester  hours 


'Students  entering  in  the  fall  of  2003  or  later  as  an  exercise  science  specialist 
should  refer  to  the  courses  identified  by  the  EXS  prefix.  Students  who  entered 
prior  to  the  fall  of  2003  arc  in  the  fitness  specialist  program  and  should  choose 
from  the  courses  identified  by  the  KIN  prefix. 


Kinesiolog)- 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


4.   One  extracurricular  experience  required  by  the  completion  of  60 
credits;  two  additional  experiences  required  prior  to  internship. 

AREAS  OF  SPECIALIZATION 

Adapted  Physical  Activity 

Required:  KIL  362  and  KIN  360,  362,  and  457 

Driver-Safety  Education  12  semester  hours 

(State  Certification) 

West  Chester  offers  certification  in  Driver  and  Traffic  Safety 
Education  through  the  Chester  County  Intermediate  Unit. 
Completion  of  the  following  program  will  enable  teachers  to  endorse 
their  teaching  certificates  within  this  area.  Upon  completion  of  course 
requirements,  the  student  must  apply  for  the  endorsement  through 
the  office  of  the  dean  of  the  School  of  Education. 
Required:  KIN  355,  KIN  356,  KIN  450,  and  KIN  456.  NOTE:  This 
program  meets  state  certification  requirements  for  driver  and  traffic 
safety  education. 

Minor  in  Coaching  15-18  semester  hours 

Those  students  who  successfully  complete  the  program  at  West 
Chester  earn  a  transcript  and  written  endorsement  from  the  School  of 
Health  Sciences  attesting  to  school  administrators  that  recipients  have 
attained  basic  preparation  for  coaching. 

Behavioral  competencies  in  the  theoretical  foundations  of  coaching, 
skill  acquisition,  and  management  techniques  also  are  required. 
Course  offerings  at  the  undergraduate  and  graduate  levels  are  avail- 
able. The  program  is  open  to  any  person  who  applied  for  admission 
through  the  program  adviser.  Dr.  John  Helion.  Applicants  should 
direct  inquiries  to  that  office  for  a  coaching  minor  brochure. 
Minor  in  Dance  21  semester  hours 

To  fulfill  this  program  of  study,  all  dance  minor  students  are  required 
to  take  21  credits  in  the  dance  curriculum.  Students  should  follow 
requirements  as  listed  under  core,  technique,  and  performance  courses. 
Further  requirements  include  the  following:  1)  involvement  in  the  per- 
formance area  for  a  minimum  of  two  years  which  can  be  accomplished 
for  credit  as  a  dancer,  choreographer,  officer,  or  production  assistant; 
2)  serving  as  a  teaching  assistant  in  a  Level  I  technique  class  with 
assignment  from  the  dance  coordinator;  3)  recording  all  course  work  in 


a  portfolio  that  will  be  presented  to  the  dance  coordinator  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  course  of  study.  Auditions  are  not  required  for  admit- 
tance into  the  program;  however,  each  applicant  has  the  responsibility 
of  meeting  with  the  dance  coordinator  each  semester  before  registra- 
tion begins.  Applicants  must  obtain  and  complete  a  minor  registration 
form  through  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  for  transcript  recognition. 
NOTE:  Students  who  choose  to  fulfill  their  art  requirement 
through  the  dance  curriculum  must  do  so  as  follows: 
Core  and  Performance  Courses 

Required: 

KIN  344  History  of  Dance  (3) 

Elective  -  choose  six  semester  hours 

KIN  215  Dance  Pedagogy  (3) 

KIN  346  Repertory  Development  (2) 

KIN  441  Dance  Composirion  (3) 

KIN  442  Musical  Theatre  Dance  and  Choreography  (3) 
Technique  Courses  (choose  a  minimum  of  eight  semester  hours) 

PEA  232  Modern  Dance  II  (2) 

PEA233JazzDanceII(2) 

PEA234BaUetII(2) 

PEA  235  Tap  Dance  II  (2) 

PEA  332  Modern  Dance  III  (2) 

PEA  334  Ballet  III  (Pointe)  (2) 
Performance  Courses  (choose  a  minimum  of  four  semester  hours) 

KIN  345  Dance  Production  Workshop  (2) 

KIN  346  Repertory  Development  (2) 

KIN  446  Repertory  Development  (2) 

Facilities 

The  department  is  housed  on  West  Chester  University's  South 
Campus  in  the  Russell  L.  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences  Center.  The 
SHSC  features  the  following  indoor  facilities:  four  fiiU-size,  multipur- 
pose gymnasiums;  two  fiillv  equipped  gymnastics  g}'ms;  dance  studio; 
wrestling  room;  strength  training  facUit}';  human  performance  labora- 
tory; climbing  wall;  17  classrooms;  aquatics  center  featuring  two  pools 
and  a  14.5-foot  diving  well.  Outdoor  facilities  include  multipurpose 
playing  fields,  tennis  courts,  Softball  fields/baseball  fields,  quarter-mile 
track,  and  two  outdoor  ropes  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PHYSICAL  EDUCATION 
ACTIVITY  COURSES 

Symbol:  PEA  (2)  (2) 

The  following  courses  incorporate  the  compo- 
nents of  fitness  with  specific  activities  designed 
to  provide  students  with  the  knowledge  and 
participatory  skills  necessary  to  achieve  and 
enjoy  keeping  fit  and  well  for  life.  These  PEA 
courses  will  meet  the  general  education  elec- 
tive requirement.  The  first  number  in  paren- 
theses shows  the  number  of  class  meetings  per 
week;  the  second  number  shows  the  semester 
hours  of  credit.  Courses  with  only  one  number 
show  semester  hours  of  credit. 

100  Basic  Swimming  (nonswimmers)  (2)  (2) 

101  Swim  for  Fitness  (2)  (2) 

106  Canoeing  (2)  (2) 

107  Orienteering  (2)  (1) 
110  Cycle  Touring  (2)  (1) 

♦  1 15  Physical  Conditioning  (2)  (2) 

116  Personal  Defense  (2)  (2) 

117  Karate  (2)  (2) 

120  Fitness  Through  Badminton  (2)  (2) 
123  Fitness  Through  Golf  (2)  (2) 
125  Fitness  Through  Gymnastics  (2)  (2) 
128  Fitness  Through  Tennis  (2)  (2) 


129  Fitness  Through  Basketball  (2)  (2) 

130  Softball  as  a  Lifetime  Activity  (2)  (2) 

131  VoUeybaU  and  a  Fitness  Lifestyle  (2)  (2) 

132  Modem  Dance  I  (3)  (3) 

133  Jazz  Dance  I  (3)  (3) 

134  Ballet  I  (3)  (3) 

135  Tap  Dance  I  (2)  (2) 

136  Fitness  for  Life  (2)  (2) 

137  Strength  Training  (2)  (2) 

140  Aerobic  Dance  Fitness  (2)  (2) 

141  Water  Fitness  (2)  (2) 

142  Yoga  (2)  (2) 

228  Advanced  Tennis  (2)  (2) 

232  Modem  Dance  II  (2)  (2) 

233  Jazz  Dance  II  (2)  (2) 

234  Ballet  II  (2)  (2) 

235  Tap  Dance  11  (2)  (2) 

236  Developing  Personal  Fitness  Programs  (1) 
(2)  This  course,  designed  for  nontraditional  stu- 
dents and  students  with  disabilities,  provides  an 
understanding  of  the  scientific  basis  ot  physical  fit- 
ness. The  course  is  intended  to  help  each  student 
develop  a  personal  fitness  profile  and  subsequent 
program  of  physical  activity  that  will  result  in 
healthful  living.  The  course  will  make  use  of  prac- 
tical experience  and  actual  participation  in  fitness 
activities.  Individual  programs  will  be  emphasized. 
332  Modem  Dance  III  (2)  (2) 


334  BaUetlll— Pointe(2)(2) 

COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
KINESIOLOGY 

These  courses  are  for  kinesiology  majors  only,  with 
the  followfing  exceptions:  elementary  education 
majors,  early  childhood  education  majors,  sports 
medicine  majors,  and  special  education  majors. 

The  first  number  in  parentheses  shows  the  number 
of  class  meetings  per  week;  the  second  one  shows 
the  semester  hours  of  credit.  Courses  with  only 
one  number  show  semester  hours  of  credit. 

EXERCISE  SCIENCE 

Symbol:  EXS 

100  Foundations  of  Exercise  Science  (3)  (3)  An 

introductory  course  to  the  disciplines  and  profes- 
sions within  exercise  science  enabling  students  to 
understand  and  appreciate  the  discipline,  help  guide 
their  career  choices,  and  prepare  them  for  faculty 
expectations,  program  demands,  and  professional 
responsibilities  of  an  e.xercise  science  specialist. 
180  Lifetime  Fitness  Concepts  (3)  (3)  Designed  to 
teach  students  key  elements  involved  in  achieving  a 
healthy  lifestyle.  Taught  from  a  holistic  view  that 
total  or  optimal  health  is  comprised  ot  a  healthy 
body,  mind,  and  spirit  which  is  accomplished 
through  a  combination  of  techmques. 


♦  This  course  may  be  talten  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Health  Sciences 


Kinesiology 


251  Measurement  and  Evaluation  (3)  (4)  Covers 

the  fundamentals  ot  measurement  and  evaluation 
emphasizing  the  link  between  valid  assessments  and 
decision  making  in  exercise  science,  health,  and 
physical  education.  Application  in  each  learning 
domain  is  covered,  with  an  emphasis  on  health-relat- 
ed physical  fimess  assessment.  PREREQ^  EXS  282. 
261  Kinesiology  (3)  (4)  Students  will  develop  a 
fundamental  understanding  of  selected  mechanical 
and  anatomical  laws  ot  motion,  actions  caused  by 
forces,  and  their  apphcation  to  the  study  of 
mechanical  structure  and  analysis  of  motion. 
Students  will  be  able  to  use  and  apply  these  princi- 
ples to  various  forms  of  movement.  PREREQi 
PHY  100,  BIO  259,  269. 
270  Motor  Development  and  Learning  (3)  (3) 
An  introduction  to  human  hfespan  development 
within  the  motor  domain.  The  content  specifically 
addresses  the  American  College  ot  Sports 
Medicine  (ACSM)  competency  and  institutional 
requirements. 

282  Exercise  Physiology  (3)  (4)  Introduces  stu- 
dents to  the  theorj'  and  apphcation  of  exercise  sci- 
ence ph>"siologTr'  through  lectures,  class  discussions, 
and  lab  experiences. 

362  Introduction  to  Exercise  Physiology  (3)  (3) 
Builds  on  the  physiological  concepts  introduced  in 
KIN  241.  Students  will  be  required  to  apply  these 
physiological  principles  to  ph\'5ical  education,  exer- 
cise, and  sport.  E.\amines  how  the  human  body 
fiinctions  in  relationship  to  health,  fitness,  and  per- 
formance, as  well  as  the  impact  (response  and 
adaptation)  that  physical  work  and  exercise  has  on 
the  human  body. 

375  Exercise  Psychology  (3)  (3)  An  introduction 
to  psychological  aspects  ot  exercise  designed  to 
complement  the  anatomical  and  physiological  sub- 
stance of  the  physical  fitness  speciahst  curriculum. 
Content  specifically  addresses  ACSM  organiza- 
tional evaluation  and  knowledge,  skills,  and  abih- 
ties  that  are  set  out  in  the  competency'  require- 
ments ot  the  Guidelines  for  Exercise  Testing  and 
prescription.  PREREQ^  EXS  270,  PSY  100. 
CONCURRENT:  EXS  251. 

381  Fitness  Assessment  and  Exercise  Prescrip- 
tion (3)  (4)  Designed  to  prepare  students  to  assess 
health-related  physical  fitness  using  laboratory  and 
field  tests.  Test  results  used  to  prepare  individual- 
ized exercise  prescriptions  to  improve  cardio-vas- 
cular  endurance,  muscular  fitness,  body  composi- 
tion, and  fle.xibihtv.  Skill  application  and  practice 
required.  ACSM  guidehnes  emphasized.  PRE- 
REQ:  EXS  251,  375. 

382  Exercise  Technique  and  Physical 
Conditioning  (3)  (4)  Builds  on  the  exercise  sci- 
ence concepts  in  EXS  251,  261,  282,  and  375. 
Students  will  apply  these  principles  to  exercise, 
sports,  and  physical  education.  Analysis  of  various 
exercise  techniques  and  dences,  and  systems 
emphasizing  their  use  and  safety.  Clinical  ex-peri- 
ence  in  strength  and  range  of  motion  testing  and 
prescription.  Emphasis  on  various  exercise  tech- 
niques and  movements  and  the  abiUty'  to  apply 
theories  and  principles  to  improve  health,  fitness, 
and  performance.  PREREQi  EXS  261.  CON- 
CURRENT: EXS  381. 

384  Organization  and  Management  of  Adult 
Fitness  Programs  Clinic/Seminar  (3)  (3) 
Designed  to  pro\ide  students  with  practical  expe- 
rience m  organizing  and  managing  physical  fitness 
programs  for  adults.  PREREQ:  EXS  282,  375. 
486  Exercise  Prescription  for  Special  Populations 
(3)  (3)  Designed  to  provide  students  with  a  trame- 
work  in  which  to  develop  safe  exercise  programs  for 


individuals  with  disabilities,  chronic  diseases,  or 
multiple  conditions.  CONCURRENT:  EXS  489. 

489  Clinical  Exercise  Testing  and  Prescription 
(3)  (3)  Prepares  students  to  administer  exercise  tests 
in  the  clinical  arena  and  to  prepare  for  ACSM  cer- 
tification exams.  Covers  basic  electrocardiography 
and  interpretation,  risk  factor  threshold  assessment, 
CV  exercise  testing  procedures  and  interpretation, 
and  CV  exercise  prescription  -  all  relevant  to  the 
cUnical  adult  population.  Includes  lectures,  class 
discussions,  project  assignments,  and  group/indi- 
\'idual  lab  ex-periences.  PREREQi  EXS  381. 

490  Internship  I  (6)  A  capstone  experience  meant  to 
tie  together  previous  course  work  into  a  "hands-on" 
application  in  a  job  setting.  A  minimum  of  250 
hours  of  actual  work  site  experience  may  be  in  any 
vocational  avenue  available  including  cardiac  rehabili- 
tation, strength  and  conditioning  coaching,  commer- 
cial fimess,  corporate  fimess,  and  personal  training. 
PREREQ:  EXS  382.  CONCURRENT:  EXS  489. 

491  Internship  II  (3)  (6)  A  supplemental  experi- 
ence to  EXS  490  which  will  enable  students  to 
explore  other  internship  or  work  settings  including 
cardiac  rehabihtation,  strength  and  conditioning 
coaching,  commercial  fitness,  corporate  fitness, 
and  personal  training.  The  experience  can  be  at 
the  same  site  as  EXS  490.  Hours  required  range 
between  125  (for  three  credits)  to  250  hours  (for 
six  credits).  PREREQ:  EXS  382.  CONCUR- 
RENT: EXS  489  and  490. 

KINESIOLOGY 

Symbols:  KIN;  KIL  indicates  lab  course 

100  Foundations  of  Health,  Physical  Education, 
and  Sport  (2)  (2)  An  introduction  to  the  discipUne 
and  profession  of  health,  ph)'sical  education  and 
sport  with  an  emphasis  on  career  guidance.  The 
historj'  and  tradition  of  the  field  will  be  traced  to 
pronde  perspective  for  student  choices  during  their 
undergraduate  education.  Field  experiences  and 
advice  will  expose  students  to  the  current  opportu- 
nities and  methods  for  achie\ing  professional  goals. 

101  Introduction  to  Adventure-Based  Education 
(3)  (3)  A  course  designed  for  the  student  to  under- 
stand the  adventure  approach  to  experiential  educa- 
tion in  various  enwonments.  The  students  will 
have  the  opportunity'  to  experience  an  adventure 
curriculum  including  initiatives,  problem-solving 
activities,  and  low/high  ropes  course  elements. 

102  Contemporary  Activities  (2)  (2)  Provides  stu- 
dents with  insight  through  practical  experiences  in 
a  variety  of  "alternative"  physical  education  activi- 
ties to  gain  an  expanded  awareness  of  the  K-12 
physical  education  curriculum  and  possibly  become 
agents  for  change. 

103  Historical  and  Philosophical  Foundations  of 
Physical  Education,  Fitness,  and  Sport  (3)  (3) 
Helps  smdents  understand  the  past,  present,  and 
future  concems  and  concepts  of  ph\'sical  education 
and  sport  as  professional  fields  in  relationship  to 
sodet)'.  Historical,  philosophical,  and  sociological 
approaches  will  be  used  to  critically  examine  the  roles 
of  phj-sical  education  and  sport  as  they'  have  evolved 
through  the  years  and  gain  insight  into  what  lies 
ahead.  Examines  the  \'aried  disciplines  within  the 
field  ot  kinesiolog)'  and  how  they  are  interrelated  so 
students  will  understand  what  is  necessary'  to  become 
a  health  and  ph\'sical  education  teacher.  Practical 
experiences  will  provide  swdents  with  information 
and  insights  into  "real  world"  phy'sical  education. 
109  Wrestling  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching  the 
basic  skills  of  wTesthng.  Tactics,  rules,  and  com- 
bative, lead-up  activities  for  presentation  to  ph)'si- 
cal  education  classes  in  the  public  schools. 


110  Soccer  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching  the 
basic  skills  ot  soccer.  Tactics,  rules,  and  lead-up 
games  are  presented  for  all  school  ages. 

111  Basketball  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Emphasis  is 
placed  on  tlindamental  skills,  rules,  and  tactics  of 
the  sport,  as  accomplished  through  drills  and  game 
situations. 

112  G}-mnasrics  I  (3)  (1)  Stunts,  tumbUng,  and 
gy'mnastics-related  activities  for  teaching  all  age 
levels. 

113  Physical  Conditioning  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5) 
Teaching  acti\ities  to  help  develop  total  health, 
especially  ph)'sical  fitness.  Circuits  ot  exercises, 
weight  training,  running,  and  rope  jumping  are 
included  for  all  ages. 

140  Aquatic  Fundamentals  and  Emergency 
Water  Safety  (3)  (1)  Review  of  basic  aquatic  skills 
with  advanced  stroke  techniques,  safety,  and  sur- 
\'iyal  techniques. 

141  Fundamental  Movement  (3)  (1)  Fundamen- 
tal locomotor  and  nonlocomotor  patterns  and 
rhythmic  acti\'ities  related  to  teaching  children 
creative  dance. 

142  Tennis  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  An  explanation 
of  the  mechanics  and  specific  skills  of  tennis. 
Emphasis  is  placed  on  conceptual  understanding, 
teaching  progressions,  and  methods. 

143  Golf  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching  the  basic 
skills  of  golf.  Includes  class  management,  tech- 
niques, rules,  and  safety  procedures  to  present  to 
physical  education  classes. 

144  Badminton  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching 
the  basic  skills  of  badminton.  Class  management, 
techniques,  rules,  and  safety  procedures  to  present 
to  ph)'sical  education  classes. 

185  Exercise,  Play,  and  Development  (3)  (3) 
Students  will  gain  an  understanding  ot  hfe-span 
development  relati\'e  to  cognitive  affective  and 
psychomotor  domains.  Apphcation  to  teaching 
physical  education  and  in  exercise  programs  will  be 
highlighted. 

200  Elementary  School  Physical  Education  (3) 
(2)  Theoretical  and  practical  approach  for  the 
teaching  ot  physical  acti\'ities  to  elementary  school 
children  by  the  classroom  teacher. 

201  Educational  Dance  and  Gymnastics  (2)  (2) 
Pro\'ides  students  with  the  appropriate  methods, 
materials,  and  skills  needed  for  demonstrrating, 
teaching,  and  anal\'zing  K— 12  dance,  expressive 
movement,  and  educational  gyrrmasdcs.  Will 
include  skill  assessment,  peer  teaching,  and  lesson 
plan  development. 

205  Curriculum  and  Instruction:  Adapted 
Physical  Education  (3)  (3)  Prepares  phy-sical  educa- 
tion majors  to  have  the  skilk,  knowledge,  and  atti- 
tudes necessary  in  teaching  people  with  disabilities: 
providing  them  with  appropriate  phj'sical  acri\ities, 
helping  them  with  lifetime  fimess  pursuits  in  com- 
munity' and  vocational  settings,  advocating  for 
appropriate  phj'sical  acti\ities  in  fimess  centers  and 
the  community'  at  large,  and  modifying  the  emiron- 
ment  to  make  it  less  restrictive.  PREREQ^  KIN 
103,  285. 

208  Self  Defense  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching  the 
basic  skills  ot  self  defense.  Fundamental  skills,  tactics, 
and  methods  of  presentation  to  school-age  groups. 

209  Track  and  Field  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Principles 
ot  mnning,  throwing,  and  jumping.  Modification 
needed  for  phj'sical  education  classes.  Selt-testing. 

210  Softball/Baseball  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5) 
Teaching  the  basic  skills  of  Softball  and  baseball. 
Fundamental  skills,  tactics,  rules,  and  lead-up 
games  for  presentation  to  all  ages. 


Kinesiology 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


211  Reld  Hockey  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Basic  fiin- 
damentals,  tactics,  and  rules.  Modified  active  games. 
Geared  to  teaching  physical  education  classes. 

212  Football  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching  the 
basic  skills  ot  touch  (noncontact)  tootbaJl.  Fun- 
damental skills,  tactics,  rules,  and  lead-up  games 
for  all  school  ages. 

213  Lacrosse  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Basic  funda- 
mentals, tactics,  and  both  women's  and  men's 
rules.  Modified  active  games.  Geared  to  teaching 
physical  education  classes. 

214  Volleyball  (nine  weeks)  (3)  (.5)  Teaching  the 
basic  skills  of  volleyball.  Fundamental  skills,  tac- 
tics, rules,  and  lead-up  games  for  all  school  ages. 

215  Dance  Pedagogy  (3)  (3)  Basic  course  offering 
methods  and  materials  for  teaching  dance  technique. 

241  Body  Systems  and  Kinesiology  (3)  (3) 
Introduces  basic  anatomical  and  physiological  con- 
cepts critical  to  understanding  human  movement, 
exercise,  physical  education,  and  how  the  human 
body  flinctions.  Students  will  be  required  to  apply 
these  anatomical  and  physiological  principles  to 
physical  education,  exercise,  and  sport. 

242  Contemporaiy  and  Traditional  Dance 
Forms  (3)  (1)  The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  pro- 
vide the  student  with  the  appropriate  methods, 
materials,  and  skills  for  teaching  both  contempo- 
rary and  traditional  dance  forms,  including  folk, 
square,  line,  and  social.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on 
the  secondary'  teaching  level.  PREREQ^  KIN  141. 

243  Teaching  Elementary  Physical  Education  (3) 
(1)  Curriculum  and  methods  of  teaching  K-5 
physical  education.  PREREQ:  KIN  185. 

245  Lifetime  Fitness  Concepts  (3)  (3)  Designed 
to  provide  an  interdisciphnary  understanding  of 
the  relationship  between  hfestyle,  physical  fitness, 
health,  and  well-being. 

►  246  Sport,  Culture,  and  Society  (3)  (3)  Current 
theories  and  research  in  the  area  of  sport  and  soci- 
ety will  be  introduced.  Focus  of  the  course  is  inter- 
disciphnary, incorporating  sociological,  psycholog- 
ical, historical,  anthropological,  philosophical,  and 
economic  perspectives.  Topics  include  moral,  ethi- 
cal, racial,  and  gender  issues  in  sport  in  relation  to 
the  North  American  culmre. 

250  Introduction  to  the  Art  of  Dance  (3)  The  pur- 
pose of  this  course  is  to  provide  the  student  with  an 
introduction  to  dance  as  an  art  form  as  well  as  relate 
information  regarding  various  aspects  of  dance. 
Topics  include  a  brief  histor\'  of  dance,  dance  styles, 
dance  in  education,  and  dance  production. 

252  Physical  Education  and  Individuals  with 
Disabilities  (3)  (3)  To  acquaint  special  education 
majors  with  concepts  ot  appropriate  physical  edu- 
cation for  students  with  disabilities. 

253  Adapted  Aquatics,  Lifetime  Sport,  and 
Fitness  (3)  Course  designed  to  increase  knowledge 
and  skills  in  providing  appropriate  and  safe  adapt- 
ed aquatics,  sports,  and  fitness  activities  to  individ- 
uals with  disabilities.  Outside  hours  required. 

>  254  Psychological  Aspects  of  Physical 
Disability  (3)  A  study  of  the  psvchological  and 
social  implications  of  physical  disabilities. 

275  Lifeguarding  (3)  (2)  Thcorv  and  techniques 
relative  to  preventive  lifeguarding,  emergencies  in 
and  around  water,  water  rescues,  search  and  recov- 
ery operations,  types  and  uses  of  equipment, 
records  and  reports,  health  and  sanitation,  and 
supervision  of  waterfront  areas.  Possibhty  of 
American  Red  Cross  certification. 
285  Motor  Development  and  Learning  (3)  (3)  An 
introduction  to  human  motor  development  and 
motor  learning.  Principles  and  concepts  related  to 
these  areas  will  be  examined  as  they  relate  to  human 
motor  performance  and  the  development  of  motor 


skills  across  the  lifespan.  Motor  development  topics 
including  growth,  maturation,  fitness  development, 
self-concept  development,  gender,  and  age  will  be 
explored  from  a  dynamical  systems  theoretical  fi"ame- 
work.  Motor  learning  topics  include  information 
processing,  schema  theory,  transfer  of  learning,  reac- 
tion time,  and  levels  of  movement  skill  learning.  The 
interrelationships  among  the  topics  will  be  addressed. 

300  Curriculum  and  Instruction:  Elementary  (3) 
(3)  Students  in  this  course  will  examine  the  design, 
implementation,  and  assessment  of  an  elementary 
physical  education  program.  PREREQ^  KIN  102, 
103,  201,  285,  and  formal  admission  to  teacher 
education. 

301  Fitness  and  Wellness  (3)  (3)  Prepares  preservice 
teachers  to  address  health-  and  skill-related  compo- 
nents of  fitness  as  well  as  the  dimensions  of  wellness, 
through  developmentally  appropriate  content  with 
the  K-12  physical  education  program.  Preservice 
teachers  will  assess  and  monitor  their  personal  fitness 
development,  as  well  as  participate  in,  design,  imple- 
ment, and  assess  a  variety  of  activities  that  focus  on 
one  or  more  components  of  fimess  and  wellness. 

302  Curricultun  and  Instruction:  Middle  and 
Secondary  Physical  Education  (3)  (3)  This  third 
course  in  pedagog>'  will  relate  all  topics  to  the  mid- 
dle and  secondary  physical  education  setting. 
Intended  to  give  students  a  comprehensive  overview 
of  topics  that  relate  to  the  planning,  execution,  and 
reflection  of  lessons  presented  in  the  physical  edu- 
cation setting.  PREREQ;  KIN  102,  201,  205,  300, 
303,  and  formal  admission  to  teacher  education. 

303  Invasion  Games  (2)  (2)  Invasion,  a  concept 
common  to  team  sports,  will  be  used  to  develop  a 
generic  teaching  approach.  Individual,  skill-related 
aspects  of  specific  sports,  such  as  basketball,  soccer, 
lacrosse,  and  hockey,  will  be  introduced.  Students 
will  be  exposed  to  specific  aspects  of  sport  and  game 
skill  using  the  teaching  games  for  understanding 
approach  that  they  subsequently  will  teach. 

310  Preparation  for  Teaching  Secondary 
Physical  Education  (3)  (2)  Each  student  develops 
a  physical  education  activit)'  unit  and  teaches  one 
lesson  from  that  unit.  Further  opportunities  for 
familiarization  with  curricular  designs  in  secondary 
education;  teaching  methods/styles  through  obser- 
vation, demonstration  lessons,  and  actual  practice 
are  included.  PREREQi  KIN  100  and  185;  full 
admission  to  teacher  education  program. 

311  Coaching  Racquet  Sports  (3)  (3)  Advanced 
coaching  and  teaching  techniques  for  the  racquet 
sports,  including  tennis,  badminton,  racquetball, 
and  squash. 

314  Track  and  Field  II  (3)  (2) 
316  Basketball  II  (3)  (2) 

318  Lacrosse  II  (women's  equipment)  (3)  (2) 
Individual  and  team  tactics  and  special  situations. 
Basic  knowledge  and  skills  needed. 

319  Lacrosse  II  (men's  equipment)  (3)  (2) 

321  VoUeybaU  II  (3)  (2) 

322  Soccer  II (3) (2) 

323  Field  Hockey  II  (3)  (2)  Individual  and  team 
tactics  and  special  situations.  Basic  knowledge  and 
skills  needed  for  coaching  hockey. 

324  Football  II  (3)  (2)  Skills,  tactics,  and  strate- 
gies for  coaching  contact  football. 

326  WrestUng  II  (3)  (2)  PREREQ:  KIN  109. 
331  Water  Safety  Instruction  (3)  (2)  This  course 
is  designed  to  prepare  individuals  to  become  swim 
instructors.  Testing  during  the  first  week  includes 
a  500-yard  swim,  basic  rescue  procedures,  and  a 
written  community  water  safety  test.  Opportunity 
exists  to  become  an  American  Red  Cross  water 
safety  instructor. 


344  History  of  Dance  (3)  (3)  The  purpose  of  this 
course  is  to  provide  the  student  with  a  thorough 
background  of  dance  as  a  fiindamental  form  of 
human  expression.  Topics  shall  include  the  histor- 
ical roots  and  recent  status  of  theatrical  dance 
forms,  dance  education,  recent  trends,  and  evalua- 
tion of  dance  as  an  art  form  in  relation  to  man  and 
his  society.  Physiological,  sociological,  and  psycho- 
logical imphcations;  dance  forms  and  types.  Film 
and  other  materials  focus  on  parallel  developments 
in  related  arts. 

♦  345  Dance  Production  Workshop  (3)  (2) 

Study  ot  the  various  elements  ot  performance  and 
dance  production.  All  are  integrated  into  a  final 
performance  that  is  created  and  directed  by  the 
students.  Admittance  is  by  auditions  during  the 
fall  semester. 

346  Repertory  Development  (2)  (2)  This  course 
is  designed  to  give  the  students  experience  learn- 
ing new  and/or  e.\isting  facult}'  and  guest  artist 
choreography  in  a  professional  rehearsal  setting. 

347  Software  Applications  and  Assessment  in 
Health  and  Physical  Education  (3)  (3)  An  introduc- 
torv  course  that  pro\adcs  a  hands-on  look  at  uses  ot 
computer  technology  in  teaching  and  assessment  in 
health  and  physical  education.  The  goal  is  tor  preser- 
vice teachers  to  use  a  variety  of  computer-based  tech- 
nology and  software  applications  (e.g.,  grading  soft- 
ware) for  both  professional  and  instructional  use. 
Current  assessment  strategies  (e.g.,  purpose,  design, 
implementation  o{)  will  also  be  smdied. 

348  Instructional  Skills  for  Aerobic  Dance 
Fitness  (2)  (1)  The  purpose  ot  this  course  is  to 
teach  various  dance  exercises,  dance  movements, 
and  aerobic  dance  routines  to  music  with  the  Intent 
of  promoting  cardiovascular  fitness  and  endurance, 
and  improving  muscle  tone  and  coordination. 
PREREQ;  Prior  aerobic  experience  or  PEA  140. 

351  Evaluation  in  Health  and  Physical  Education 

(3)  (3)  Selecting,  administering,  scoring,  and  evalu- 
ating tests  of  physical  fitness,  general  motor  ability, 
motor  educabihry,  and  skill  and  knowledge. 

352  Applied  Exercise  Physiology  (3)  (3)  The  ap- 

phcation  of  physiological  principles  to  ph\'sical 
education,  exercise,  and  sport.  PREREQ;  BIO 
259  and  269. 

353  Organization  and  Administration  of 
Physical  Education,  Health,  and  Athletics  (3)  (3) 

Principles  ot  program  building  in  curricular  and 
extracurricular  programs;  risk  management,  orga- 
nizing, administering,  and  supervising  physical 
education,  health,  intramural,  and  interscholastic 
programs.  PREREQ:  KIN  100. 

355  Accident  Causation  and  Prevention  (3)  (3) 

Survey  of  safety  education  and  the  history,  philos- 
ophy, and  psychology  of  accident  prevention. 

356  Critical  Problems  in  the  Highway  Trans- 
portation System  (3)  (3)  Techniques  ot  assessing 
the  knowledge,  skill,  and  psycho-physical  charac- 
teristics of  a  beginning  driver;  the  relation  ot  these 
to  the  safe  operation  ot  a  motor  vehicle. 

360  Pathology  for  Adapted  Physical  Education 
Activities  (3)  (2)  Study  of  common  disabhng  con- 
ditions with  regard  to  anatomical  and  physiologi- 
cal changes. 

361  Kinesiology  (3)  (3)  Basic  fijndamentals  of 
movement,  articulation,  and  muscular  actions; 
analysis  of  the  related  principles  of  mechanics. 
PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  269. 


I    Diverse  communities  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  tor  credit. 


School  of  Health  Sciences 


Kinesiology 


KIL  362  Adapted  Physical  Activity  Practicum 

(1)  Practicum  experience  working  in  an  adapted 
physical  activit)'  setting.  Includes  writing  and 
implementing  lessons  and  individual  goals.  PRE- 
REQ:KJN251  or  252. 

363  Assessment  and  Prograimning  for  Adapted 
Physical  Activity  (3)  (3)  For  students  who  want  to 
specialize  in  adapted  phvsical  education.  To  improve 
students'  understanding  of  evaluation  and  program- 
ming in  the  psychomotor  domain  for  special  popula- 
tions. Principles  of  therapeutic  exercise,  and  guide- 
lines for  exercise  programs  for  those  disabilities  com- 
morJy  seen  in  schools  and  fitness  centers. 

364  Introduction  to  Exercise  Physiology  (3) 
Builds  on  the  physiological  concepts  introduced  in 
KIN  241.  Students  will  be  required  to  apply  these 
physiological  principles  to  physical  education, 
exercise,  and  sport. 

♦  378  Field  Experience  (3)  (3)  Practical  experi- 
ence for  the  student  who  must  solicit  approval  of 
the  appropriate  agency,  develop  a  proposal  for  the 
on-site  experience,  and  secure  agreement  from  the 
facult}'  adviser. 

380  Women  and  Sport  (3)  (3)  An  examination  of 
women's  participation  in  sport  from  historical,  cul- 
tural, psychological,  physical,  and  legal  perspec- 
tives; emphasis  placed  on  women  in  sport  in 
American  society'  today. 

400  Professional  Seminar  in  Adapted  Physical 
Activity  (3)  Issues  and  current  events  in  the  pro- 
fessional development  of  adapted  physical  activity 
specialists. 

401  NetAVall  Games  (2)  (2)  Provides  future  phys- 
ical educators  with  the  knowledge  and  skills  neces- 
sary to  instruct,  demonstrate,  and  assess  lifetime  fit- 
ness activities  that  fall  within  the  net/wall  games 
classification  system.  Students  will  be  introduced  to 
teaching  methodologies,  skill  production  and  pro- 
gressions, class  management  techniques,  and  assess- 
ment strategies.  Addresses  the  net/wall  games  of 
tennis,  badminton,  pickleball,  and  vollej-ball. 

402  Physical  Education  Practicum  (3)  (3)  This 
course  applies  pedagogical  content  knowledge  by 
planning,  implementing,  assessing,  and  reflecting 
upon  teaching  experiences  in  a  phvsical  education 
setting.  PREREQ:  KIN  205,  300',  302,  and  formal 
admission  to  teacher  education. 

429  Electrocardiography  and  Stress  Testing  (3) 
Designed  to  prepare  the  prospective  fitness 
instructor  in  exercise  testing  protocols  as  well  as 
how  to  record,  label,  and  calculate  data  with 
stress-testing  exercise  equipment  and  a  standard, 
12-lead  electrocardiogram.  PREREQ:  BIO  259 
and  269;  KIN  352;  CPR  certification. 

430  Planning  Facilities  for  Athletics,  Physical 
Education,  and  Recreation  (3)  (3)  Management 
and  planning  ot  the  taciliues  tor  athletics,  school 
physical  education,  and  recreational  programs,  play- 
fields,  playgrounds,  buildings,  and  aaxiliary  struc- 
tures as  well  as  the  maintenance  ot  these  facilities. 

431  Physical  Fitness  Assessment  and  Exercise 
Program  (3)  (3)  Designed  to  prepare  students  to 
assess  the  phvsical  fitness  levels  of  healthy  but  seden- 


tary adults  and  prescribe  individualized  exercise  pro- 
grams. PRERECi  BIO  259  and  269;  KIN  351,  352, 
and  429;  EKG  and  stress  testing;  CPR  certification. 
432  Exercise  Techniques/Theory  and  Practice 
(3)  (3)  Analysis  ot  various  exercise  techniques,  and 
devices  and  systems  emphasizing  their  use  and 
safety.  Clinical  experience  in  strength  and  range  of 
morion  (ROM)  tesring  and  prescription.  PRE- 
REQ: BIO  259  and  KIN  361. 

434  Organization  and  Management  of  Adult 
Fitness  Programs  Clinic/Seminar  (3)  (3) 
Designed  to  provide  students  with  practical  expe- 
rience in  organizing  and  managing  physical  fitness 
programs  for  adults.  PREREQ.  BIO  259  and  269; 
KIN  352  and  361. 

435  Physical  Fitness  Specialist  Internship  (12)  (6) 
(6)  Experience  working  in  a  cardiovascular  rehabili- 
tation center  or  similar  clinical  setting  under  the 
supervision  of  qualified  personnel  or  practical  expe- 
rience in  an  adult  phir'sical  fitness  center  under  the 
supervision  of  qualified  personnel.  PREREQ^  BIO 
259  and  269;  KIN  352,  361,  and  431. 

436  Advanced  Clinical  Exercise  Testing  and 
Prescription  (3)  An  in-depth  study  ot  how  exer- 
cise is  used  in  clinical  settings  for  diagnostic  and 
rehabihtative  purposes  with  emphasis  on  cardiac  or 
pulmonar)'  rehab.  Also  designed  to  help  students 
prepare  for  ACSM  certification. 

441  Dance  Composition  (3)  (3)  An  introduction 
to  choreography  and  the  creative  process,  students 
will  develop  original  movement  phases  progressing 
from  simple  to  complex  solo  and  group  forms. 

442  Musical  Theater  Dance  and  Choreography 
(3)  (3)  This  course  covers  the  appropriate  methods, 
materials,  and  skills  needed  tor  preparing  and  stag- 
ing dance  in  a  musical  production.  Special  empha- 
sis will  be  given  to  the  choreographic  process  as 
well  as  the  role  of  the  choreographer. 

445  Dance/Movement  for  Special  Groups  (2)  (2) 
Adaptation  ot  dance  movement  with  emphasis  on 
methods,  techniques,  and  activities  suitable  for 
special  groups  (elderly,  people  with  disabihties, 
and  other  special  groups). 

♦  446  Repertory  Performance  (2)  The  purpose  of 
this  course  is  to  otfer  dance  students  invaluable  expe- 
rience that  can  only  be  gained  firom  performance.  To 
ensure  maximum  benefit,  the  objectives  are  thorough 
studio  rehearsal  ot  dances,  thorough  lighting  and 
staging  rehe;irsals,  and  well-directed  pertormances. 

449  Learning  on  the  Move  (3)  (3)  A  combination 
of  preschool  and  primary  grade  movement  educa- 
tion activities  are  included  to  maximize  children's 
overall  development.  Preschool,  nursery,  and 
kindergarten  ages. 

450  High  School  Driver  Education  Program 
Management  (3)  (3)  A  study  of  the  total  safety 
program  with  emphasis  on  the  teaching  of  safety. 
Each  student  prepares  a  practice  lesson. 

451  History  and  Philosophy  of  Health  and 
Physical  Education  (2)  (2)  A  study  of  past  and  pre- 
sent concepts  of  phvsical  education;  philosophy  and 
principles  ot  modem  physical  education  programs. 


452  Principles  of  Coaching  (2)  (2)  Principles  and 
methods  of  coaching  sports  in  the  school  program. 

453  Motor  Learning  (3)  (3)  A  study  of  the  theo- 
ries ot  learning  in  relation  to  the  acquisition  of 
motor  skills. 

456  Introduction  to  the  Driving  Tasks  (3)  (3)  An 
advanced  course  to  prepare  students  to  teach  in- 
car  driver  education  in  the  secondary'  schools. 
458  Physical  Disabilities  of  Childhood  (2)  (2) 
Common  orthopedic  and  neurological  disabilities 
of  childhood,  especially  chronic  deviations. 
Emphasis  is  on  understanding  the  medical  aspects 
and  problems  of  rehabilitation. 
465  Mechanical  Analysis  of  Motor  Skills  (3)  A 
problem-solving  approach  to  skill  analysis  using 
qualitative  and  quantitative  video  and  cinemato- 
graphic analysis  as  well  as  elementary  force-time 
and  accelerometry  techniques.  Usefiil  for  teachers, 
trainers,  coaches,  and  exercise  professionals. 
470  Leadership  in  Recreational  Outdoor 
Pursuits  (3)  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to  provide 
instruction  that  would  help  persons  desiring  a 
career  in  recreational  outdoor  pursuits  education,  or 
develop  an  outdoor  education  or  physical  education 
program  using  activities,  processes,  and  educational 
methodolog)'  in  a  sate  and  meaningtiil  manner. 
473  Independent  Study  and  Special  Projects  (1-3) 
Provide  an  opportunity  for  selected  students  to  pur- 
sue areas  of  special  interest  and  talent  or  to  take 
advantage  of  special  conferences  or  seminars.  PRE- 
REQ^ Permission  of  department  chairperson. 
475  Mental  Training  in  Sport  (3)  (3)  Techniques 
of  mental  training  for  sport  and  physical  activity, 
including  relaxation  training,  concentration  skills, 
breathing  regulation,  positive  imagery,  autogenic 
training,  and  meditation. 

489  Student  Teaching  (6)  Health  and  physical 
education  teaching  situations  in  elementary,  junior, 
and  senior  high  schools  under  qualified  cooperating 
teachers  and  college  supervisors.  PREREQ^  HEA 
304,  306,  and  440;  KIN  350;  extracurricular  credits 
documentation;  valid  clearances  and  TB  test;  for- 
mal admission  to  teacher  education. 

490  Student  Teaching  (6)  Observation  and  partic- 
ipation in  health  and  physical  education  teaching 
situations  in  elementary,  junior,  and  senior  high 
schools  under  qualified  cooperating  teachers  and 
college  supervisors.  PREREQ^  HEA  306,  440; 
KIN  402;  three  extracurricular  credits  documenta- 
tion; vahd  clearances  and  TB  test;  formal  admis- 
sion to  teacher  education. 

492  Student  Teaching  Seminar  (0)  Deals  with  the 
professional  preparation  of  the  health  and  physical 
education  teacher  certification  student.  It  is  offered 
concurrendy  with  the  student  teaching  experience 
and  is  designed  to  assist  the  student  in  the  public 
school  setting.  An  examination  ot  current  problems 
and  issues  in  the  profession  and  in  the  schools  leads 
to  discussion  of  problem  prevention  and  solution. 
Lectures  on  job  procurement  skills  are  included. 

♦  498  Physical  Educaton  Workshop  (1-3) 

♦  This  course  ma\'  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Liberal  Sudies 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Liberal  Studies  Program 

B.A.  Liberal  Studies;  B.S.  Liberal  Studies  -  Science  and 
Mathematics 

144  Main  Hall 

610-436-1096 

Alice  Speh,  Director 

B.S.  Liberal  Studies  -  Professional  Studies 

143  E.O.  Bull  Center 
610-436-3486 
Bruce  Norris,  Director 

The  liberal  studies  program  offers  student-designed,  interdisciplinary 
majors  that  provide  an  alternative  to  traditional  baccalaureate  degrees 
in  specific  academic  areas.  The  liberal  studies  majors  are  intended  to 
broaden  the  student's  intellectual  understanding  and  professional  skills 
through  a  well-rounded,  yet  flexible  degree  program  that  combines 
courses  in  the  areas  of  science,  humanities,  behavioral  science,  and  the 
arts.  The  result  is  a  curriculum  that  is  suited  to  the  individual  student's 
personal  academic  and  career  goals. 

After  completing  at  least  32  semester  hours,  and  after  achieving  a 
minimum  Grade  Point  Average  of  2.0,  the  student  may  request  an 
interview  with  the  director  of  liberal  studies  for  the  purpose  of  plan- 
ning a  curriculum  in  one  of  the  available  tracks.  Students  may  enter 
the  hberal  studies  program  from  other  majors  of  the  University,  or  as 
transfers  from  other  colleges,  by  the  same  process  and  by  meeting  the 
same  requirements.  It  is  University  policy  that  no  student,  whether 
presendy  enrolled  at  West  Chester  or  attempting  to  be  admitted  from 
another  university,  is  permitted  to  enroll  in  the  liberal  studies  program 
after  earning  80  semester  hours. 

Three  separate  baccalaureate  programs  are  available.  The  bachelor  of 
arts  in  liberal  studies  is  designed  for  students  interested  in  a  well- 
rounded  education  emphasizing  courses  in  the  Hberal  arts.  The  bache- 
lor of  science  in  liberal  studies  -  science  and  mathematics  allows 
students  to  pursue  courses  in  four  different  scientific  disciplines,  while 
also  incorporating  liberal  arts  courses  to  create  a  broad  curriculum. 
The  bachelor  of  science  in  liberal  studies  -  professional  studies  pro- 
vides students  the  capability  to  design  a  career-centered  curriculum 
that  may  not  be  available  at  the  University.  The  course  ot  study 
includes  the  student's  selection  of  two  academic  minors,  one  of  which 
must  be  a  program  offered  by  one  of  the  four  professional  schools 
(Business  and  Public  Affairs,  Education,  Health  Sciences,  or  Music). 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  LIBERAL  STUDIES  —ARTS 
AND  SCIENCES  TRACK 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  language  (Students  must  0-12  semester  hours 
show  competencv  through  the  202  level.) 


3.  Liberal  studies  breadth  requirements  24  semester  hours 
(natural  and  computer  sciences,  behavioral 

and  social  sciences,  humanities  and 
communications,  and  the  arts) 

4.  Liberal  studies  electives  of  the  student's  30  semester  hours 
choice  at  the  300  and  400  level 

5.  At  least  one  minor  offered  by  the  College  of 
Arts  and  Sciences,  the  School  of  Music,  or  by 
the  departments  of  Economics,  Geography,  or 
PoUtical  Science 

6.  Electives  to  total  120  semester  hours. 

Students  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  track  have  the  option  of  using  up  to 
six  semester  hours  of  their  liberal  electives  as  senior  thesis  (LST  490) 
credits.  Interested  students  should  consult  with  the  program  director 
well  before  earning  80  semester  hours  about  procedures  for  pursuing 
the  senior  thesis. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  LIBERAL  STUDIES  — 
SCIENCE  AND  MATHEMATICS  TRACK 

1. 
2. 


48  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 


32  semester  hours 


20  semester  hours 


General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 
Liberal  studies  breadth  requirements 
(behavioral  and  social  sciences,  humanities  and 
communications,  and  the  arts) 

3.  Science  and  mathematics  cognate 
requirements.  Seven  to  nine  semester  hours  in 
any  four  of  the  following  areas:  biology  (BIO 
110  or  above),  chemistry  (CHE  103  and  CRL 
103  or  above),  geology/astronomy  (above 
ESS  111),  mathematics  or  computer  science 
(MAT  110  or  above,  or  CSC  110  or  above), 
and  physics  (PHY  130  or  above) 

4.  Liberal  studies  electives  of  the 
student's  choice  at  the  300  and  400  level 

5.  At  least  one  minor  selected  from  the  departments 

of  Biology,  Chemistry,  Computer  Science,  Geology  and 
Astronomy,  Mathematics,  or  Physics 

6.  Electives  to  total  120  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  LIBERAL  STUDIES  — 
PROFESSIONAL  STUDIES  TRACK 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 

2.  Two  minors: 
Minor  A 
Minor  B 

3.  Professional  Studies  Breadth  Courses 

4.  Professional  Studies  Electives 
Student's  choice  at  the  300  level  or  higher 

5.  Electives  to  total  120  semester  hours 


48  semester  hours 

18  semester  hours 
18  semester  hours 
15  semester  hours 
30  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTION 
LIBERAL  STUDIES 

Symbol:  LSP 


490  Senior  Thesis  (3-6)  Directed  research  in  an 
interdisciplinary  subject  of  the  arts  and  sciences. 
For  students  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  and  bachelor 
of  science  tracks.  PREREQ^  Permission  of  the 
director  of  liberal  studies. 


School  ot  Education 


LiteraCT' 


Department  of  Literacy 

105B  Recitation  HaU 
610-436-2877 

Sharon  B.  Kletzien,  Chairperson 
Dena  Beeghly,  Assistant  Chairperson 
PROFESSORS:  Darigan,  Gill,  Kletzien 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Beeghly,  Caroff,  Szabo 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Greenwood,  Mayor,  Nolan, 
Yaworski 

The  Department  of  Literaq'  offers  literacy  courses  required  in  the 
early  childhood,  elementary  education,  and  special  education  pro- 
grams. Students  desiring  a  more  thorough  background  in  reading 
instruction  may  choose  a  reading  minor.  The  department  also  offers 
courses  in  college  reading  and  study  skills  for  any  University  student. 
AH  field  placements  for  courses  are  arranged  in  conjunction  with  the 
Department  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education  or  the 
Department  of  Elementary  Education.  Students  are  not  to  solicit 
placements.  While  student  needs  are  considered  in  assigning  place- 
ments, no  particular  placement  can  be  guaranteed.  West  Chester 
University  does  not  place  students  at  religiously  affiliated  schools 


when  public  school  placements  are  available.  Transportation  to  and 
from  field  placements  is  the  responsibUit)'  of  the  individual  student. 

Minor  in  Reading  21  semester  hours 

Students  who  wish  to  minor  in  reading  must  have  completed  30  credits 
and  must  have  earned  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA  required  for  their 
earned  credits:  2.65  for  students  with  30-47  credits,  and  2.80  for  stu- 
dents with  48  or  more  credits.  Smdents  admitted  to  the  minor  must 
maintain  the  mirumum  cumulative  GPA  required  of  them  at  admission 
to  the  minor  in  order  to  continue.  Students  who  fall  below  the  mini- 
mum cumulative  GPA  required  are  permitted  to  retake,  in  accordance 
with  Universit)'  polic)',  course  work  in  the  minor  that  contributed  to 
their  fall  below  the  required  minimum  cumulative  GPA.  Such  students 
will  not  be  permitted  to  take  additional  course  work  in  the  minor  until 
thev  achieve  the  required  minimum  cumulative  GPA. 

1.  Required  courses  18  semester  hours 
EDR/ECE  309  or  EDR/EDE  311+,  EDR/ECE  325+  or 
EDR/EDE  312+,  EDR  321+,  EDR  420,  EDR  422 

2.  Electives  3  semester  hours 
Three  semester  hours  of  electives  under  advisement. 


+  Courses  requiring  prerequisites  -  check  catalog  course  description  below. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
LITERACY 

Symbol:  EDR 

010  Developmental  Reading  and  Study  Skills  (1) 

A  course  designed  to  improve  vocabulary'  and 
study  skills.  Major  attention  is  given  to  vocabulary 
expansion,  textbook  reading,  test  taking,  and 
methods  of  organizing  information. 
020  Intermediate  Level  Reading  (3)  The  interme- 
diate level  workshop  will  emphasize  the  develop- 
ment and  improvement  of  college-level  reading 
competencies.  The  course  is  designed  to  help  the 
students  improve  their  reading  comprehension  as 
well  as  effective  study  techniques  and  strategies. 
Additionally,  vocabular)-  development,  flexible 
reading  rate,  and  critical  reading  will  be  taught  in 
this  course. 

100  College  Reading  and  Study  Skills  (3)  A  course 
to  develop  reading  and  study  skills  such  as  compre- 
hension, vocabulary,  speed,  remembering,  concen- 
tration, taking  notes,  mastering  a  text  assignment, 
and  preparing  for  and  taking  examinations. 
110  Developing  Learning  Skills  (1)  A  course  that 
reviews  and  develops  specialized  learning  skills  such 
as  concentrating  when  studying,  reading  a  textbook 
assignment,  taking  notes,  and  preparing  for  and 
taking  examinations.  Students  who  wish  to  review 
their  study  habits  or  who  have  special  needs  in  the 
area  ot  study  skills  should  enroll  in  this  course. 
A  302  Teaching  the  Language  Arts  (3)  Study  of 
teaching  language  skills  in  the  elementary  schools; 
listening,  speaking,  and  writing.  PREREQ^  EDE 
251.  Crosslisted  as  EDE  302. 
▲  309  Introduction  to  Language  Arts  (3)  The 
areas  of  listening,  speaking,  and  writing  are  studied 
in  depth.  lOiowledge,  teaching,  and  evaluative  tech- 
niques are  addressed.  Introduction  to  the  reading 
process  and  the  relationship  of  language  to  reading 
also  will  be  studied.  Crosslisted  as  ECE  309. 
A  **  311  Introduction  to  Reading  Instruction  (3) 
An  exploraton,'  course  investigating  the  reading 
process,  language  and  learning  theories,  and  their 
relation  to  reading.  Historical  scope  and  various 
programs  of  reading  are  studied  and  evaluated. 
Crosslisted  as  EDE  311.  PREREQi  EDE  251. 


A  *  312  Reading  Instruction  and  Practicum  (6) 

Focus  is  on  mastery  of  the  teaching  of  develop- 
mental reading,  early  reading,  and  prereading  expe- 
riences. The  students  learn  how  to  plan,  teach,  and 
evaluate  reading/thinking  skills  related  to  the  in- 
struction of  reading  in  the  elementar)'  classroom. 
Students  work  in  the  public  schools  with  small  and 
large  reading  groups  teaching  various  aspects  ot  the 
reading  lesson.  Students  also  learn  how  to  evaluate 
pupil  performance  and  remediate  minor  reading 
problems.  CrossUsted  as  EDE  312.  PREREQ: 
EDE  200  and  EDR/EDE  311. 
313  Reading  Instruction  and  Practicum  in  the 
Secondary  Schools  (6)  Focus  is  on  the  master)'  of 
teaching  reading  in  the  middle  and  secondary 
schools.  Students  will  study  the  role  of  the  teacher 
as  well  as  learn  how  to  sequence  both  develop- 
mental and  content  area  readings. 
A  315  Developmental  Reading  for  the 
Handicapped  Child  (3)  The  focus  of  this  course  is 
the  study  of  the  reading  process  and  its  relation  to 
language  development,  motivation  and  methodol- 
ogy for  developmental  reading  skills,  reading  pro- 
grams and  materials,  problems  in  dealing  with 
handicapped  children,  and  practicum  in  reading 
instruction.  Special  education  majors  only. 
Crosslisted  as  EDE  315. 

**  321  Diagnosis  and  Remediation  of  Reading 
Problems  (3)  Identifying  the  nature  and  causes  of 
reading  disabilities;  experience  in  helping  a  child 
with  reading  problems.  PREREQ:  EDR/EDE 
311  or  permission  of  instructor. 
323  Reading  for  the  Handicapped:  Diagnosis 
and  Remediation  (3)  Reading  materials,  pro- 
grams, evaluations,  and  teaching  strategies  for  the 
mentally  or  physically  handicapped  are  examined 
and  discussed.  Students  develop  and  utilize  read- 
ing materials  in  a  classroom  situation.  PREREQ^ 
Permission  of  instructor.  Special  education  majors 
and  reading  minors  only. 

A  *  325  Teaching  Reading  and  Field  Experience 
(Primaiy  Grades)  (6)  The  teaching  of  reading  and 
its  mastery  is  the  focus  ot  this  course.  Students  apply 
knowledge  of  theories  and  practices  in  supervised 
field  placements  in  schools  with  children  5-8  years  of 
age.  Tutoring  of  individual  children  and  small  groups 


is  integrated  with  planning  and  evaluation  of  lessons 
and  activities  as  well  as  remediation.  Crosslisted  as 
ECE  325.  PREREQ:  EDR/ECE  309. 
A  341  Inclusion  and  Reading  in  the  Content  Area 
(3)  The  course  is  co-taught  by  special  education  and 
literacy  faculty.  It  will  help  prepare  secondary  educa- 
tion and  special  education  to  teach  all  students  effec- 
tively, Including  those  with  disabilities,  in  general- 
education,  content-specific  settings.  Practical  guide- 
lines, content  literary  strategies,  and  adaptations  will 
be  emphasized  to  prepare  pre-educators  to  meet  the 
academic,  social,  and  affective  needs  of  all  students 
in  the  inclusive  secondarv  classroom.  Crosslisted  as 
EDA  341.  PREREQ:  EDF  100  and  EDP  250. 
420  Reading  in  the  Content  Areas  (3)  Under- 
standing the  reading  process  and  the  need  for 
reading  instruction  at  the  middle  and  secondary 
school  levels.  Specific  skill  development,  reading 
in  the  content  areas,  readability,  and  evaluation. 
♦  '  422  Seminar  in  Reading  (3)  Intensive  study 
of  some  current,  major  developments  in  reading 
related  to  elementary  education.  Topics  announced 
in  advance.  PREREQ;  Permission  of  instructor. 
A  *  ^  423  Seminar  in  Communications  Skills 
(3)  Intensive  study  of  some  current,  major  devel- 
opments in  communications  skills  (language  arts) 
related  to  elementary  education.  Topics  announced 
in  advance.  Crosslisted  as  EDE  423.  PREREQ; 
Permission  of  instructor. 

A  *  458  Language  Arts/Reading  for  the  Unique 
Child  (3)  An  open-ended  course  to  help  students 
understand  and  plan  instructional  programs  for  the 
linguistically  different,  the  gifted,  and  those  with 
special  needs.  The  students  will  examine  various 
strategies,  techniques,  management,  and  viable 
programs  for  teaching  these  children  language  arts 
and  reading.  Crosslisted  as  EDE  458. 


A  Crosslisted  course.  Students  completing  the 
EDR  course  may  not  take  the  ECE/EDE/EDA 
course  for  credit. 

*  Open  to  early  childhood  and  elementary 
education  majors  or  reading  minors 

**  Open  to  elementary  education  and  special 
education  majors  and  reading  minors 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Management 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Department  of  Management 

312B  Anderson  Hall 

610-436-2304 

Charles  McGee,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Chu,  Snow,  Thomas 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Callanan,  Leach,  McGee, 

Selvanathan 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Rodriguez 

The  primary  objective  of  the  Department  of  Management  is  to  pro- 
vide students  \vixh  the  skills  required  to  manage  business  and  public 
organizations  effectively. 

To  accomplish  this  objective,  the  faculty  of  the  Department  of 
Management  will  strive 

(1)  to  inculcate  in  the  student  the  abilit\'  to  reason  analytically  and 
critically'; 

(2)  to  make  the  student  sensitive  to  the  human  relations  aspect  of 
managing  others; 

(3)  to  increase  the  student's  awareness  of  the  concepts  and  terms  used 
in  current  managerial  practice; 

(4)  to  increase  the  student's  awareness  ot  the  international  dimension 
of  business; 

(5)  to  increase  the  student's  skills  in  written  and  verbal  communication; 

(6)  to  foster  the  student's  ability  to  sjTithesize  the  knowledge  acquired 
firom  various  disciplines  in  order  to  focus  on  managerial  problems. 

The  Department  of  Management  offers  a  B.S.  in  business  manage- 
ment, which  focuses  on  functions  required  to  make  a  group  of  people 
work  effectively  together  as  a  unit.  These  functions  include  planning, 
organizing,  staffing,  directing,  and  controlling. 
All  freshmen  and  those  transfer  students  who  have  not  completed 
the  required  courses  will  be  admitted  to  the  pre-business  program. 
BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  BUSINESS  MANAGEMENT 
1.   General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

(includes  COM  101  or  208  or  216  or  230,  CSC 

110  or  115  or  141,  ECO  111*,  MAT  105*  or  107* 

or  110*  or  161*,  PHI  101  or  150  or  180  and 

nine  semester  hours  of  free  electives) 


3  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


9  semester  hours 
3  semester  hours 


3  semester  hours 


2.  Business  Core  36  semester  hours 
ACC  201*,  202*;  BLA  201*;  ECO  112*,  251*, 

252*;  HN  325*;  AL^T  108;  MGT  200*,  341*, 
499*;  and  MKT  325* 

3.  Other  course  required 
ENG  368* 

4.  Management  Major  Courses 
MGT  313*,  321*,  431*,  441*,  and  498*; 
MIS  300* 

5.  Business  Electives 

6.  Restricted  Electives 
Three  semester  hours  of  any  100-level  or  above 
nonbusiness  course 

7.  Free  Electives 

A  minimum  of  15  credits  in  300-^00-le-uel  MGT  courses  and  a  minimum 
30  credits  in  business  courses  must  be  completed  at  WCU. 

Minor  in  International  Business  24  semester  hours 

1.  Required  Courses  15  semester  hours 
Three  courses  from  the  Department  of  Foreign 

Languages  (two  at  the  200  level  and  one  more 
advanced  foreign  language) 

2.  Electives  9  semester  hours 
Students  mav  choose  three  courses  from  the  list 

approved  bv  the  department.  See  ad\'iser  for 

course  selection. 
Only  smdents  accepted  into  the  accounting,  economics,  finance,  man- 
agement, and  marketing  majors  or  departmental  minors  may  register 
for  300-level  business  classes. 

All  pre-business  students  (internal  and  external  transfers)  may  apply  for 
the  major  or  minor  after  completion  of  45  credits  with  a  minimum  over- 
all GPA  of  2.50.  In  addition,  thev  must  have  completed  the  following 
courses  with  a  C  or  better:  ACC  201;  ECO  111,  112,  and  251;  \L\T 
105  (or  higher);  and  MGT  200;  and  passed  ^L\T  108.  To  progress  in 
the  management  major  program,  smdents  must  maintain  a  2.50  overall 
GPA.  To  graduate,  students  must  have  a  2.50  overall  GPA  and  a  2.50 
GPA  in  their  major  course  work  (as  defined  by  each  program). 


'A  minimum  grade  of  C  must  be  attained  in  each  of  these  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MANAGEMENT 

Symbol:  MGT 

100  Introduction  to  Business  (3)  Suri-ey  of  the 
structure  and  ftinction  of  the  American  business 
sj-stem.  Topics  covered  include  forms  of  business 
organization,  fiindamentals  ot  management,  fun- 
damentals of  marketing,  basic  accounting  princi- 
ples and  practices,  elements  of  finance,  money  and 
banking,  business  and  government,  and  careers  in 
business.  Open  to  nonbusiness  majors. 
200  Principles  of  Management  (3)  Introduction 
to  the  principles  and  functions  of  management. 
Examines  the  management  process,  organizational 
theory',  planning,  decision  making,  motivation, 
and  leadership  in  supervisory  contexts.  PREREQ^ 
ECO  111. 

313  Business  and  Society  (3)  An  analysis  of  the 
social,  political,  legal,  ennronmental,  and  ethical 
problems  faced  by  business  firms.  PREREQi 
MGT  200. 

321  Organization  Theoiy  and  Behavior  (3)  Study 
of  the  theoretical  foundations  of  organization  and 
management.  The  system  of  roles  and  fiinctional 
relationships.  Practical  application  of  the  theory 
through  case  analysis.  PREREQi  MGT  200.  ' 
333  Labor  Relations  (3)  Rise  of  the  American 
labor  movement.  Labor  legislation.  Collective  bar- 


gaining arrangements.  Procedures  in  settling  labor 
disputes.  Organized  labor's  policies  and  practices. 
PREREQ:  MGT  200. 

341  Production  and  Operations  \Ianagement 
(3)  Methods  analysis,  work  measurement,  and 
wage  incentives.  Production  process  and  sj'stem 
design.  Plant  location,  layout,  sales  forecasting, 
inventorv,  production,  and  quality  control,  to 
include  statistical  aspects  of  tolerances,  acceptance 
sampling,  development  of  control  charts,  PERT, 
and  cost  factors.  PREREQ:  CSC  110  or  141; 
ECO  252;  and  MGT  200  or  300. 
431  Human  Resource  Adininistration  (3)  Study 
of  a  weU-planned,  properly  executed,  and  efficient- 
ly evaluated  approach  to  manpower  recruitment, 
screening,  usage,  and  development.  Case  analv-sis 
and/or  experiential  exercises  to  illustrate  the  con- 
cepts used.  PREREQ:  MGT  200  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

441  Introduction  to  Management  Science  (3) 
Business  problems  in  production,  inventor\'. 
finance,  marketing,  and  transportation  translated 
into  application  of  scientific  methods,  techmques, 
and  tools  to  provide  those  in  control  of  the  system 
with  optimum  solutions.  PREREQ:  MGT  341  or 
permission  of  instructor. 

451  SystemsManagement(3)  Application  of  sys- 
tems theorv  and  principles  to  the  operation  of  con- 


temporan-  organizations  with  emphasis  on  nonquan- 
titative  methods  of  analpis.  PREREQ:  MGT  321. 
471  Entrepreneurship  (3)  Organization  of  a  busi- 
ness venture  with  emphasis  on  risk,  requirements, 
roles,  and  rewards.  Students  develop  a  simulated 
venture,  with  oral  and  written  report.  PREREQ: 
ACC  201  and  202,  HN  325,  MGT  200,  MKT 
325,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

♦  483  Management  Internship  (3)  The  manage- 
ment internship  is  designed  to  enhance  the  studen- 
t's educational  experience  by  pro\'iding  a  substan- 
tive work  experience  in  the  business  world.  PRE- 
REQ: Internship  program  coordinator's  approval. 

486  Management  Internship  (6)  The  management 
internship  is  designed  to  enhance  the  smdents  edu- 
cational experience  by  pro\iding  a  substantive  work 
experience  in  the  business  world.  PREREQ: 
Internship  program  coordinator's  approval. 

487  Special  Topics  in  Management  (3)  This 
course  deals  with  current  concepts  in  management 
not  covered  by  existing  courses.  The  course  con- 
tent is  determined  at  the  beginning  of  each  semes- 
ter. PREREQ:  MGT  200. 

♦  488  Independent  Studies  in  Management  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
management.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ: 
Instructor's  approval. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Marketing 


498  Senior  Seminar  in  Management  (3)  Students 
are  engaged  in  reading  and  research  on  current 
developments  in  management.  Research  project  is 
required  to  help  expand  and  deepen  the  horizons 
of  the  participants.  PREREQ;^  Senior  standing, 
MGT  200.  Seniors  eligible  for  graduation  at  the 
end  of  the  coming  semester  take  priority  for  regis- 
tration during  the  preregistration  period. 

499  Business  Policy  and  Strategy  (3)  A  capstone 
course  for  all  business  majors,  requiring  students 
to  integrate  and  apply  multidisciplinary  knowledge 
and  skills  in  actively  formulating  improved  busi- 
ness strategies  and  plans.  Case  method  predomi- 
nates. Written  reports.  PREREQ:  BLA  201,  RN 
325,  MGT  200,  and  MKT  325. 


MANAGEMENT  INFORMATION 
SYSTEMS 
Symbol:  MIS 

300  Introduction  to  Management  Information 
Systems  (3)  A  comprehensive  introduction  to  the 
role  of  information  systems  in  an  organizational  envi- 
ronment. This  course  focuses  on  transforming  manu- 
al and  automated  data  into  useftJ  information  for 
managerial  decision  making.  PREREQ^  MGT  200. 
451  Systems  Analysis  and  Design  (3)  The  course 
develops  the  necessar\'  skills  for  analysis  of  organi- 
zational environments  in  light  of  information  sys- 
tem needs,  as  well  as  the  skill  to  design  such  sys- 
tems. PREREQ:  MIS  300. 

453  Decision  Support  Systems  (3)  This  course  is 
an  advanced  presentation  of  the  role  of  manage- 
ment information  systems  in  the  special  support 


needs  of  managers  for  aiding  decision  making. 
PREREQ;  MGT  441,  MIS  300  and  451. 

INTERNATIONAL  BUSINESS 

Symbol;  INB 

300  Introduction  to  International  Business  (3) 

Analysis  of  international  business  transactions  in 
large  and  small  businesses,  multinational  and 
domestic.  Functional  emphasis  on  multinational 
environment,  managerial  processes,  and  business 
strategies.  PREREQ^MGT  200. 
469  International  Management  Seminar  (3) 
Study  of  issues  confronting  executives  as  they  plan, 
organize,  staff,  and  control  a  multinational  organi- 
zation. Lectures,  case  analyses,  and  outside  pro- 
jects with  local  firms  engaged  in,  or  entering, 
international  business  will  be  utilized.  PREREQ; 
INB  300  and  MGT  200. 


Department  of  Marketing 

312B  Anderson  HaU 

610-436-2304 

John  Redington,  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Christ,  Gault,  Redington, 

Tomkowicz 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Arsenault,  Phillips 
The  primary  focus  of  the  Department  of  Marketing  is  to  prepare  stu- 
dents to  compete  successfully  in  today's  fast-paced,  high-tech  business 
environment. 

To  accomplish  this,  the  faculty  of  the  Department  of  Marketing  will 
emphasize 

(1)  understanding  the  strategies  related  to  the  design,  promotion,  pric- 
ing, and  distribution  of  goods  and  services  that  meet  customer  needs; 

(2)  teaching  methods  that  allow  students  to  assume  the  role  of  a  mar- 
keting decision  maker  to  develop  an  appreciation  of  the  challenges 
that  face  today's  marketers; 

(3)  exposing  students  to  the  latest  technological  developments  that 
are  changing  the  way  marketing  is  undertaken; 

(4)  both  individual  and  teamwork  approaches  to  prepare  students  for 
the  realities  of  the  work  environment; 

(5)  creating  an  understanding  of  the  legal  and  ethical  framework  of 
marketing,  competition,  and  other  business  activity. 

All  freshmen  and  those  transfer  students  who  have  not  completed 
the  required  courses  will  be  admitted  to  the  pre-business  program. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  -  MARKETING 

1.   General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
(Includes  COM  101  or  208  or  216  or  230; 


CSC  110  or  115  or  141;  ECO  111';  MAT  105* 
or  107*  or  108*  or  110*  or  161*;  PHI  101  or  150 
or  180) 

2.  Business  Core  33  semester  hours 
ACC  201*,  202*;  BLA  201*;  ECO  112*,  251*, 

and  252;  FIN  325;  MGT  200*,  341,  499*; 
MKT  325* 

3.  Other  courses  required  6  semester  hours 
GEO  325 

MAT  108  or  161  (if  either  of  these  NLA.T  courses 
are  completed  with  a  grade  of  C  or  better  to 
fiilfill  general  requirements,  then  a  free  elective 
may  be  substituted) 

4.  Major  Concentration  Courses  18  semester  hours 
MKT  330*,  340*,  360*,  425*,  440*,  and  one 

additional  300-level  or  above  MKT*  course 

5.  Business  Electives  6  semester  hours 
300-level  or  above  courses  in  ACC,  BLA,  ECO, 

HN,  INB,  MGT,  MIS,  MKT,  ENG  368  or  GEO  425 

6.  Student  Electives  9  semester  hours 
A  minimum  of  15  credits  in  300-400  level  MKT  courses  and  a  minimum 
of  30  credits  in  business  courses  must  be  completed  at  WCU. 

Only  students  accepted  into  the  accounting,  economics,  finance,  man- 
agement, and  marketing  majors  or  minors  may  register  for  300-level 
business  classes. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
LAW 

Symbol:  BLA 

201  The  Legal  Environment  of  Business  (3) 

Examines  the  framework  of  the  American  legal 
system  and  its  impact  on  the  environment  in 
which  business  operates.  Sources  of  law,  including 
constitutional,  statutory,  administrative,  and  com- 
mon law  principles,  that  define  the  relationships 
between  government  and  business;  buyers  and  sell- 
ers of  goods  and  services;  and  employers  and 
employees  are  discussed. 

302  Special  Subjects  in  Business  Law  (3)  In-depth 
coverage  ot  the  legal  topics  of  contracts  and  sales.  It 
is  intended  as  a  partial  preparation  for  the  uniform 


Certified  Public  Accountant  (CPA)  examination 
and  thus  provides  students  with  an  adequate  knowl- 
edge of  the  most  widely  examined  subjects.  Provides 
marketing  students  with  a  detailed  knowledge  of  the 
legal  topics  that  they  will  use  in  their  careers  and 
covers  basic  legal  topics  highly  useful  to  manage- 
ment majors  and  all  persons  engaged  in  business. 
♦  303  Legal  Problems  in  Business  (3)  Special 
legal  problems  in  business  will  be  considered  at 
length,  such  as  consumer  credit  regulation,  insur- 
ance, personal  law  relating  to  decedent's  estates 
and  Social  Security,  preparation  for  the  CPA 
examination,  etc.  This  course  may  be  taken  more 
than  once  (but  not  more  than  three  times)  for 
credit  if  the  subject  matter  of  the  course  is  not 
duplicated. 


MARKETING 

Symbol:  MKT 

200  Survey  of  Marketing  (3)  Examines  the  impact 
of  marketing  systems  in  producing  a  standard  ot 
living  in  local  and  global  economies.  Topics 
include  the  structure  and  fiinctions  of  marketing 
within  an  organization,  the  role  of  customers,  and 
the  competitive,  political/legal/regulatory,  econom- 
ic, social-cultural,  and  technological  environments 
in  which  these  systems  operate.  May  not  be  taken 
for  credit  after  completion  of  any  other  marketing 
course.  Open  to  nonbusiness  majors. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Mathematics 


College  ot  Arts  and  Sciences 


325  Marketing  Management  (3)  Study  of  the 
processes  involved  in  planning  and  managing  mar- 
keting activities  in  organizations.  Emphasis  on 
case  studies  and  applications  of  the  decision-mak- 
ing process.  PREREQ:  ACC  201,  BLA  201, 
CSC  110  or  equivalent,  ECO  112  and  251,  MAT 
105  or  107  or  108  or  161. 
330  (formerly  303)  Consumer  Behavior  (3) 
Foundations  of  consumer  behavior.  Market  struc- 
ture and  consumer  behavior,  purchase  strategy  and 
tactics,  determinants  and  patterns  of  consumer 
behavior.  An  integrated  theorv  of  consumer 
behavior  is  sought",  PREREQi  MKT  200  or  325 
and  permission  of  instructor. 
340  (formerly  321)  Personal  Selling  (3)  Analysis 
of  the  selling  process  applied  to  sales  calls  and 
sales  strategies,  communication,  persuasion,  moti- 
vation, ethics,  interpersonal  relationships,  negotia- 
tions, and  professionalism.  Emphasis  on  case  stud- 
ies. PREREQi  MKT  200  or  325  and  permission 
of  instructor. 

350  (formerly  322)  Advertising  and  Sales 
Promotion  (3)  A  study  of  advertising  and  sales 
promotion  management  with  a  major  focus  on 
organization,  media,  strategy,  campaigns,  legal 
control,  consumer  behavior,  budgeting,  and  the 
coordination  of  these  activities  with  overall  mar- 
keting programs.  PREREQ:  MKT  200  or  325 
and  permission  of  instructor. 
360  (formerly  408)  Marketing  Research  (3) 
Systematic  definition  ot  marketing  problems, 


strategies  for  data  collection,  model  building,  and 
interpretation  of  results  to  improve  marketing  deci- 
sion making  and  control.  PREREQi  MKT  325. 
370  Marketing  and  Technology  (3)  The  purpose 
of  this  course  is  to  tamiliarize  students  with  the 
role  technology  now  plays  in  the  field  of  marketing. 
VLrtuaUy  ever\'  area  of  marketing  from  identifying 
customers  to  designing  products  to  promotion  to 
delivery  is  now  affected  by  technolog)-.  Moreover, 
marketing  managers  must  not  only  be  aware  and 
understand  these  technological  factors,  but  they 
must  also  know  how  to  use  them  to  gain  competi- 
tive advantage.  PREREQi  MKT  200  or  325. 
404  International  Marketing  (3)  Historical  and 
theoretical  background  ot  foreign  trade,  world 
marketing  environment  and  world  market  pat- 
terns, marketing  organization  in  its  international 
setting,  and  international  marketing  management. 
PREREQ:  MKT  325. 

406  (formerly  320)  Managing  Sales  (3)  Source, 
technique,  and  theories  applied  to  problems  encoun- 
tered in  managing  a  sales  force  in  the  areas  of 
administration,  policy,  organizational  structure,  per- 
sonnel selection  and  evaluation,  sales  training,  com- 
pensation, forecasting,  establishing  territories  and 
quotas,  and  sales  analysis.  Emphasis  on  case  studies. 
PREREQi  MKT  340  or  permission  of  instrurtor. 
410  Independent  Studies  in  Marketing  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in 
marketing.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQi 
Permission  of  instructor. 


425  Marketing  Strategy  and  Planning  (3) 

Application  of  the  skills  required  for  effective  man- 
agerial decision  making  and  communication  using  a 
team  approach.  Emphasis  on  case  studies,  computer 
simulations,  and  the  development  of  a  marketing 
plan;  oral  and  written  presentation  of  results.  PRE- 
REQi MKT  325,  360,  and  senior  standing. 
440  (formerly  400)  Senior  Seminar  in  Marketing 
(3)  Team  research  projects  that  require  an  in- 
depth  investigation  of  a  current  topic  m  market- 
ing, and  the  preparation  and  presentation  of  an 
oral  and  written  professional  report.  PREREQi 
Senior  standing  and  12  credits  in  marketing, 
including  MKT  325  and  360. 
♦  460  (formerly  450)  Marketing  Internship  (3) 
The  marketing  internship  is  designed  to  enhance 
the  student's  educational  experience  by  providing  a 
substantive  work  experience  in  the  business  world. 
PREREQi  Permission  of  instructor  and  depart- 
ment chair. 

461  (formerly  451)  Marketing  Internship  (6)  The 
marketing  internship  is  designed  to  enhance  the 
student's  educational  experience  by  providing  a 
substantive  work  experience  in  the  business  world. 
PREREQi  Permission  of  instructor  and  depart- 
ment chair. 

490  Special  Topics  in  Marketing  (3)  Special  top- 
ics in  marketing  not  covered  under  existing,  regu- 
larly offered  courses.  PREREQi  MKT  325  and 
permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Mathematics 

323  C  Andereon  Hall 

610-436-2440 

Richard  Branton,  Chairperson 

Frank  Milliman,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Branton,  Grosshans,  Kerrigan,  Szymanski,  Tan 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Gallitano,  Glidden,  Gupta, 

Johnston,  Milliman,  Moser,  Rieger,  Wolfson 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Gallop,  Jackson,  Marano,  Nitica, 

Smith,  Zimmer 
INSTRUCTORS:  GysUng,  Matus 

The  Department  of  Mathematics  offers  a  program  leading  to  the 
bachelor  of  arts  degree  in  mathematics  and  a  program  leading  to  the 
bachelor  of  science  in  education. 

1.  The  B.A.  in  MATHENL\TICS  enables  each  student  to  receive 
the  basic  preparation  for  the  career  of  his/her  choice,  such  as  col- 
lege teaching,  research,  and  service  in  industry'  and  government.  In 
all  cases,  the  student  receives  a  sound  preparation  for  graduate 
study  in  the  field  of  mathematics. 

2.  TheB.S.  in  EDUCATION  -  MATHEMATICS  focuses  on  a 
heavy  concentration  in  mathematics  while  the  student  earns  state 
certification  to  teach  mathematics  on  the  middle,  junior  high,  or 
senior  high  school  levels. 

Majors  in  these  areas  should  consult  the  department  handbook  and 
review  with  their  advisers  current  requirements  listed  on  the  guidance 
record  sheets. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  -  MATHEMATICS 

1.   General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
MAT  211  (three  semester  hours)  satisfies 
general  education  mathematics  requirement. 
CSC  141  and  PHY  170  (six  semester  hours) 
satisfy  the  general  education  science  requirement. 


2.  Foreign  Language  Requirement  0-6  semester  hours 
At  the  200  level 

3.  Related  Requirements  1 1  semester  hours 
CSC  141  and  PHY  170-180 

(CSC  141  and  three  semester  horn's  of  PIT\'  170 
satisfy  the  general  education  science  distributive 
requirement.) 

4.  Major  Requirements  23  semester  hours 
MAT  161,  162,  200,  211,  261,  411,  421,  and  441 

5.  Electives  in  Mathematics  21  semester  hours 
Selected  from  upper-di\ision  mathematics  courses, 

one  in  each  of  the  areas  of  analysis,  and  applied 
mathematics 

Requirement  of  a  Minor 

Students  in  the  B.A.  degree  program  are  required  to  complete  either  a 
minor  or,  with  the  approval  of  the  student's  adviser  and  the 
Department  of  Mathematics  chairperson,  an  additional  nine  credit 
hours  of  upper-division  mathematics.  The  discipline  chosen  for  the 
minor  will  reflect  a  student's  post-baccalaureate  goals.  The  depart- 
ment recommends  completing  a  minor  in  the  natiual  sciences  (astron- 
omy, biology,  chemistry,  earth  sciences,  geolog)',  and  ph>'sics),  com- 
puter science,  economics,  or  finance,  but  other  minors  may  be  selected 
with  the  approval  of  the  student's  adviser  and  the  mathematics  chair- 
person. When  departmental  approvals  are  necessar)',  documentation 
will  be  kept  in  the  student's  ad\ising  folder. 
BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION  - 
MATHEMATICS 
1.   General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

MAT  211  (three  semester  hours)  satisfies  the 

genera]  education  mathematics  requirement. 

CSC  141  and  PHY  170  (sbc  semester  hours) 

satisfy  the  general  education  science  requirement. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Mathematics 


PHY  180  (three  semester  hours)  satisfy  the 
general  education  student  electives. 

2.  Mathematics  Requirements  40  semester  hours 
MAT  161,  162,  200,  211,  231,  261,  350 

(credited  to  professional  education),  354,  401, 
411,414,  421,  and  441 

3.  Professional  Education  Requirements  27  semester  hours 
EDA/EDR  341;  EDF  100;  EDP  250  and  351; 

EDS  306  and  411-412 

4.  Related  Requirements  11  semester  hours 
CSC  141  and  PHY  170-180 

5.  Electives  in  Mathematics  6  semester  hours 
Selected  from  upper-division  mathematics  courses;  at  least  one 
course  in  both  algebra  and  analysis 

All  math  major  courses  must  be  passed  with  C-  or  better. 

Minor  in  Mathematics*  18  semester  hours 

Baccalaureate  students  may  receive  transcript  recognition  for  a  minor 
area  of  study  in'  mathematics  by  completing  four  required  courses  and 
two  electives  selected  from  the  approved  list. 

1.  Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 
MAT161,  162,  211,  and261 

2.  Approved  Electives  6  semester  hours 
Any  two  courses  in  mathematics  with  course 


numbers  above  211  with  the  exception  of  those 
courses  with  a  primary  focus  on  teacher  training 
or  those  courses  restricted  to  students  majoring  in 
elementar\'  education 

Minor  in  Elementary  School  18  semester  hours 

Mathematics  (K-8)* 

Required  Courses 

MAT  102,  121,  212,  233,  352,  and  CSC  350 

Advanced  Placement  Policy 

Course  credit  for  success  on  AP  exams  in  mathematics  is  awarded  as 

follows: 

APTest  Score  on  AP  Test 

3  4  5 


Calculus  AB 
Calculus  BC 
Statistics 


MAT  108 
MAT  161 
MAT  121 


MAT  161 
MAT  162 
MAT  121 


MAT  161 
MAT  162 
MAT  121 


If  placed  in  a  calculus  class  because  of  an  SAT  score,  the  student  must 
stiU  pass  a  departmental  examination  administered  during  the  fu^st  day 
of  classes  before  being  allowed  to  continue. 


*In  the  above  minors,  a  student  must  earn  a  minimum  grade  of  C-  in  each 
course  and  have  an  average  of  at  least  2.0  over  all  the  courses  taken  in  the  minor. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MATHEMATICS 

Symbol:  MAT 

000  Fundamentals  of  Algebra  (3)  This  course 
aims  at  strengthening  basic  algebraic  skills.  A  stu- 
dent (other  than  an  early  childhood,  elementary, 
and  special  education  major)  with  a  math  SAT 
score  greater  than  or  equal  to  440  and  less  than 
480  must  successftilly  complete  this  course  with  a 
grade  of  at  least  C-  before  enrolling  in  a  100-level 
mathematics  course.  Credits  earned  in  000-level 
courses  do  not  count  toward  the  120  hours  of 
credit  needed  for  graduation. 

001  Fundamental  Skills  in  Arithmetic  (3)  A 
course  designed  to  strengthen  basic  arithmetic 
skills  and  to  introduce  the  elements  of  algebra. 
Students,  in  general,  are  placed  in  MAT  001  if 
their  math  SAT  is  less  than  440.  A  student  (other 
than  an  early  childhood,  elementary,  or  special 
education  major)  must  complete  this  course  and 
the  subsequent  course  MAT  000  with  a  grade  of 
C-  before  enrolling  in  a  100-level  mathematics 
course.  An  early  childhood,  elementary,  or  special 
education  major  with  a  math  SAT  score  less  than 
480  must  complete  this  course  with  a  grade  of  at 
least  C-  before  enrolling  in  MAT  101. 

101  Mathematics  for  Elementary  Teachers  I  (3) 
Sets;  fiinctions;  logic;  development  of  whole  num- 
bers, integers,  and  rationals  (including  ratios,  pro- 
portions, and  percents);  number  theory;  problem 
solving.  For  early  childhood,  elementary  educa- 
tion, and  special  education  majors  only. 

102  Mathematics  for  Elementary  Teachers  II  (3) 
Development  of  real  numbers;  geometry;  measure- 
ment; probability  and  statistics;  problem  solving. 
For  elementary  education  and  special  education 
majors  only.  PREREQ^MAT  101. 

103  Introduction  to  Mathematics  (3)  This  course  is 
a  liberal  arts  introduction  to  the  nature  of  mathemat- 
ics. Topics  are  chosen  from  among  logic,  graph  the- 
orj',  number  theory,  symmetry  (group  theory),  prob- 
ability, statistics,  infinite  sets,  geometry,  game  theo- 
r\',  and  linear  programming.  These  topics  are  inde- 
pendent of  each  other  and  have  as  prerequisite  the 
ability  to  read,  reason,  and  follow  a  logical  argument. 


105  College  Algebra  and  Trigonometry  (3)  A 

unified  course  in  algebra  and  trigonometry.  PRE- 
REQ;  High  school  algebra. 

107  College  Algebra  (3)  A  thorough  treatment  of 
college  algebra.  Topics  covered  include  the  study 
of  polynomial,  exponential,  and  logarithmic  fiinc- 
tions, plus  systems  of  linear  equations. 

108  Brief  Calculus  (3)  An  intuitive  approach  to 
the  calculus  of  one  and  several  variables  with 
emphasis  on  conceptual  understanding  and  practi- 
cal appUcation.  PREREQ^MAT  107. 

110  Precalculus  (3)  A  preparation  for  MAT  161, 
Calculus  1. 1  opics  include  pol\Tiomial  and  rational 
fiinctions,  algebra  of  fiinctions,  graphs  of  fiinc- 
tions, transcendental  fiinctions,  trigonometry, 
series,  induction,  and  complex  numbers. 

121  Statistics  I  (3)  Basic  concepts  of  statistics. 
Frequency  distributions,  measures  of  central  ten- 
dency and  variability,  probability  and  theoretical 
distribution,  significance  of  differences,  and 
hypothesis  testing.  For  nonmathematics  majors. 
MTL  121  Statistics  Lab  1  (1)  Introduces  the  stu- 
dent to  using  and  programming  the  computer  to 
solve  statistical  problems  and  to  aid  the  student  in 
understanding  statistical  concepts. 

122  Statistics  II  (3)  Continuation  of  MAT  121. 
Inference  about  the  means,  standard  deviations 
and  proportions,  goodness  ot  fit,  analysis  of  vari- 
ance, regression  analysis,  correlation,  and  nonpara- 
menic  tests.  PREREQ:  MAT  121. 

151  Introduction  to  Discrete  Mathematics  (3)  Set 
theory.  Boolean  logic,  elementary  combinatorics, 
proofs,  simple  graph  theor\',  and  simple  probability. 

161  Calculus  I  (4)  Differential  and  integral  calcu- 
lus of  real-valued  fiinctions  of  a  single  real  variable, 
with  applications.  PREREQ^  Good  working 
knowledge  of  high  school  algebra  and  trigonometry 
demonstrated  by  a  math  SAT  score  of  590  or 
above  and  a  passing  score  on  the  departmental 
examination,  or  a  C-  or  above  in  MAT  105  or  110. 

162  Calculus  II  (4)  Continuation  of  MAT  161 
including  the  study  of  series,  methods  of  integra- 
tion, transcendental  fiinctions,  and  applications  to 
the  sciences.  PREREQ:  MAT  161. 

200  The  Nature  of  Mathematics  (2)  Topics 
include  the  role  of  mathematics  in  contemporary 


society,  career  opportunities,  mathematical  nota- 
tion and  argument,  structure  of  proofs,  basic  facts 
about  logic,  mathematical  proofs,  problem-solving 
techniques,  and  introductions  to  mathematical 
software  packages.  PREREQiMAT  161.  Course 
should  be  taken  by  end  of  sophomore  year  and 
passed  with  a  grade  of  at  least  a  C  before  enrolling 
in  higher-level  mathematics  courses. 
209  Topics  in  Mathematics  for  the  Elementary 
Teacher  (3)  Introduction  to  programming  in 
BASIC;  computer  uses  for  the  classroom  teacher; 
descriptive  statistics  with  applications  for  teaching; 
and  measurements  of  length,  area,  volume,  and 
temperature  that  focus  on  the  SI  metric  system 
with  practice  in  the  classroom.  Additional  topics 
in  applied  mathematics  will  be  considered.  PRE- 
REQ: MAT  102. 

211  Linear  Algebra  (3)  An  introduction  to  linear 
algebra.  Topics  covered  include  matrices,  systems 
of  linear  equations,  vector  spaces,  Unear  transfor- 
mation, determinants,  eigenvalues,  spectral  theo- 
rem, and  triangulation. 

212  Algebra  for  Elementary  Teachers  (3)  Formal 
structure  of  groups,  rings,  and  fields  with  examples 
from  the  elementary  curriculum.  Topics  from  lin- 
ear algebra  including  matrices,  determinants,  and 
Unear  programming.  PREREQ;  MAT  102. 

221  Applied  Statistics  (3)  Probabilities,  discrete  and 
continuous  probability  distributions,  methods  of 
estimation,  and  hypothesis  testing.  PREREQ;  CSC 
141  (or  equivalent)  and  MAT  162  (or  equivalent). 

231  Foundations  of  Geometry  (3)  Geometric  foun- 
dations from  an  advanced  viewpoint.  Topics  are 
chosen  from  euclidean  and  noneudidean  geometries. 

232  Differential  Geometry  (3)  Classical  differen- 
tial geometry  from  a  modem  viewpoint.  Curves 
and  surfaces  and  shape  operators.  Introduction  to 
Riemann  geometry.  PREREQ;  MAT  261. 

233  Geometry  for  Elementary  Teachers  (3) 
Modern  informal  approach  to  two-  and  three- 
dimensional  geometric  figures,  measurement,  sim- 
ilarity, congruence,  coordinate  geometry,  and  the 
posmlational  method.  PREREQ.  MAT  102. 

261  Calculus  III  (3)  The  calculus  of  several  vari- 
ables. Topics  include  polar  coordinates,  vectors 
and  three-dimensional  analytic  geometr)-,  differen- 


Music 


School  of  Music 


tiation  of  functions  of  several  variables,  multiple 
integrals,  and  line  and  surface  integrals.  PRE- 
REQ;.MAT161  and  162. 
262  Calculus  IV  (3)  The  calculus  of  vector-valued 
ftinctions  of  a  vector  variable.  Derivatives  and  proper- 
ties of  the  derivative  including  the  chain  mle,  fields 
and  conservative  fields,  integration,  and  Green's, 
Stokes',  and  Gauss'  theorems.  PREREQ^MAT  261. 
281  Discrete  Mathematics  (4)  This  course  is 
designed  to  provide  a  foundation  for  the  mathe- 
matics used  in  the  theori.'  and  application  of  com- 
puter science.  Topics  include  mathematical  reason- 
ing, the  notion  of  proof,  logic,  sets,  relations  and 
flinctions,  counting  techniques,  algorithmic  analy- 
sis, modelling,  cardinality,  recursions  and  induc- 
tion, graphs,  and  algebra.  PREREQ:  MAT  162. 
321  Combinatorics  and  Graph  Theory  (3) 
Introduction  to  set  theon,',  graph  theory,  and  com- 
binatorial analysis.  Includes  relations,  cardinality, 
elementary  combinatorics,  principles  of  inclusion 
and  exclusion,  recurrence  relations,  zero-one  matri- 
ces, partitions,  and  Polya's  Theorem.  PREREQi 
CSC  141  or  CSW  101,  and  MAT  261  or  281. 
343  Differential  Equations  (3)  The  general  theory 
of  nth  order,  and  Enear  differential  equations 
including  existence  and  uniqueness  criteria  and  lin- 
earity ot  the  solution  space.  General  solution  tech- 
niques for  variable  coefficient  equations,  series  solu- 
tions for  variable  coefficient  equations,  and  study  of 
systems  of  linear  equations.  PREREQi  MAT  261. 

349  Teaching  Mathematics  in  Early  Childhood 
(3)  Concepts,  learning  aids,  syllabi,  texts,  and 
methods  in  early  childhood  mathematical  teach- 
ing. PREREQ:' MAT  101. 

350  Foundations  of  Mathematics  Education  (3) 
Historical  oveniew  of  mathematics  education  with 
emphasis  on  influential  curricular  programs,  pro- 
grams for  exceptional  students,  implications  of 
learning  theory,  significance  of  research,  identifi- 
cation of  current  issues,  organizational  alternatives 
for  the  classroom,  and  evaluation  resources.  PRE- 
REQ: MAT  261. 

351  Teaching  Mathematics  in  Elementary 
Schools  I  (3)  Concepts,  learning  aids,  syllabi, 
te.xts,  and  methods  in  elementary  school  mathe- 
matics. PREREQ:  MAT  101-102. 

352  Teaching  Mathematics  in  Elementary 
Schools  II  (3)  Techniques  for  teaching  children 
concepts  such  as  geometry  in  two  and  three  dimen- 
sions, number  sentences,  graphing,  ratios  and  per- 


centages, quantifiers,  etc.  Use  of  laboratory  materi- 
als will  be  emphasized.  PREREQ.  MAT  351. 
354  Techniques  of  Teaching  Secondary  School 
Mathematics  (3)  Techniques  used  in  the  presenta- 
tion of  specific  mathematical  concepts,  associated 
materials,  including  methods  for  exceptional  stu- 
dents; levels  of  questioning,  and  motivational 
devices.  Scope  and  sequence  of  secondary  mathe- 
matics topics.  Criteria  for  text  evaluation.  Preview 
of  student  teaching.  PREREQ;  MAT  350. 
357  Teaching  Mathematics  to  Diverse 
Populations  (3)  Methods  and  materials  associated 
with  the  presentation  of  mathematics  to  the  hand- 
icapped. Emphasis  on  individualization  and 
involving  thinking  skills  at  the  concrete  level. 
Evaluative  and  interpretive  techniques  are  includ- 
ed. PREREQ.  MAT  101-102. 
^  390  Seminar  in  Mathematics  Education  (3) 
T)pical  topics  are  remedial  programs,  low  achiever 
programs,  materials  for  mathematics  education, 
methodology  in  mathematics  education,  mathe- 
matics and  the  computer,  theories  of  mathematics 
education,  and  analysis  of  research  in  mathematics 
education.  PREREQ.  MAT  351. 

400  History  of  Mathematics  for  Elementary 
Teachers  (3)  Historv  and  development  of  elemen- 
tary mathematics  from  primitive  times  to  the  dis- 
cover}' of  calculus.  Problems  of  the  period  are  con- 
sidered. PREREQ;  MAT  212  and  233. 

401  History  of  Mathematics  (3)  Development  of 
mathematics  from  the  Babylonian  era  to  the  18th 
centurv.  Some  modern  topics  included.  PREREQ; 
MAT  261. 

♦  405  Special  Topics  in  Mathematics  (3)  Topics 
announced  at  the  time  of  offering. 
411-412  Algebra  I-Il  (3)  (3)  Abstract  algebra. 
Algebraic  systems,  groups,  rings,  integral  domains, 
and  fields.  PREREQ.  MAT  261.  MAT  411  must 
precede  412. 

414  Theory  of  Numbers  (3)  Properties  of  inte- 
gers; primes,  factorization,  congruences,  and  qua- 
dratic reciprocity.  PREREQ:  MAT  261. 
421-422  Mathematical  Statistics  MI  (3)  (3) 
ProbabUit)'  theory,  discrete  and  continuous  ran- 
dom variables,  distributions,  and  moment  generat- 
ing ftinctions.  Statistical  sampling  theory,  joint 
and  interval  estimation,  test  of  hypothesis,  regres- 
sion, and  correlation.  PREREQ;  MAT  261; 
MAT  421  must  precede  422. 
425  Ntunetical  Analysis  (3)  Numerical  methods  for 
the  approximate  solution  of  applied  problems.  Inter- 


polation theory,  curve  fitting,  approximate  integra- 
tion, and  numerical  solution  of  differential  equa- 
tions. PREREQ.  CSC  115  or  141,  and  MAT  262. 
427  Introduction  to  Optimization  Techniques 
(3)  Nature  of  optimization  problems:  deterministic 
and  stochastic,  and  discrete  and  continuous. 
Computer  methods  of  solution,  systematic  and 
random  search,  linear  quadratic,  d}'namic  pro- 
gramming, and  others.  PREREQ;  CSC  115  or 
141,  and  MAT  261. 

432  Topology  (3)  Elements  of  point  set  topology. 
Separation  axioms.  Connectedness,  compactness, 
and  metrizability.  PREREQ;  MAT  261. 
441-442  Advanced  Calculus  I-II  (3)  (3)  A  rigor- 
ous treatment  of  the  calculus  ot  a  single  real  vari- 
able. Topics  in  several  real  variables  and  an  intro- 
duction to  Lebesque  integration.  PREREQ;  MAT 
261;  ^L^T  441  must  precede  442. 
443-444  AppUed  Analysis  I-II  (3)  (3)  The  tech- 
niques of  analysis  appUed  to  problems  in  the  phys- 
ical sciences.  Topics  include  partial  differential 
equations,  orthogonal  ftinctions,  complex  integra- 
tion, and  conformal  mapping.  PREREQ;  MAT 
261;  ^L^^  443  must  precede  444. 
445  Complex  Variables  (3)  Introduction  to  ftinc- 
tions of  a  complex  variable.  Analytic  functions,  map- 
pings, differentiation  and  integration,  power  series, 
and  conformal  mappings.  PREREQ;  MAT  261. 
♦  490  Seminar  in  Mathematics  (3)  Topics  in 
mathematics  selected  for  their  significance  and  sw- 
dent-instructor  interest.  Independent  study  and  stu- 
dent reports,  oral  and  written.  PREREQ;  Senior 
standing  and  consent  of  department  chairperson. 
493  Mathematical  Modeling  (3)  The  idea  of  a 
mathematical  model  of  a  real  siwation. 
Techniques  and  rationales  of  model  building. 
Examples  from  the  life,  ph.ysical,  and  social  sci- 
ences. PREREQ;  MAT  261  and  343. 
499  Independent  Study  in  Mathematics  (1-3) 
Independent  investigation  of  an  area  ot  mathemat- 
ics not  covered  in  the  department's  course  offerings. 
PREREQ;  Written  permission  of  the  instructor. 

Symbol:  STA 

311  Introduction  to  Statistical  Computing  and 
Data  Management  (3)  Course  will  give  students 
the  abilit)'  to  manage  and  manipulate  data  effec- 
tively, conduct  basic  statistical  analysis,  and  gener- 
ate reports  and  graphics  primarily  using  the  SAS 
Statistical  Software  Program. 


♦  This  course  ma)'  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Music 

1 1  Swope  H-all  (Office  of  the  Dean) 

610-436-2739 

PROFESSORS:  Balthazar,  Bedford,  Burton,  Friday,  Klein, 

Laudermilch,  McVoy,  Murray,  L.  Nelson,  Newbold, 

Pennington,  Price,  Schmidt,  Southall,  Veleta,  Voois,  Wagner 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Ahramjian,  Chilcote, 

DeV'enney,  Dorminv,  Grabb,  Hanning,  Ludeker, 

Maggio,  Sprenklc,  Villella,  Wyss 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Albert,  BriseUi,  Cranmer, 

Greenlee,  Klinefelter,  Lyons,  McFarland,  Metcalf,  Onderdonk, 

Pippart-Brown,  Richter,  Rimple,  Winters 
INSTRUCTORS:  CuUen,  Galante,  Hanna,  Kaderabek, 

P.  Nelson,  Paulsen 


The  mission  of  the  School  of  Music  at  West  Chester  Universit)'  is  to  cre- 
ate a  learning  environment  that  provides  the  highest  order  of  education  in 
all  major  aspects  of  music,  to  establish  a  foundation  for  life-long  growth 
in  music,  and  to  offer  programs  and  degrees  that  are  tradition  based  but 
future  oriented.  In  pursuing  this  mission,  we  reaffirm  our  commitment  to 
diversity  within  the  School  of  Music.  Our  faculty  members  strive  to  be 
inspiring  teachers  as  well  as  musical  and  intellectual  leaders.  Further,  we 
endeavor  to  expand  the  music  opportunities  available  to  all  University 
students  and  to  enhance  the  quality  of  our  community's  musical  life. 

MUSIC  TESTS  —  BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC 
IN  MUSIC  EDUCATION 

1 .    Each  candidate  must  demonstrate  skill  in  at  least  one  performance 
medium  in  which  he  or  she  excels:  piano,  organ,  voice,  classical 
guitar,  or  a  band  or  orchestra  instrument.  It  is  preferable,  although 


School  ot  Music 


Music 


not  required,  for  pianists  and  vocalists  to  perform  at  least  part  of 
their  audition  from  memory. 

2.  AH  candidates  are  tested  in  voice  and  piano. 

3.  Piano,  organ,  or  voice  majors  with  band  or  orchestra  instrument  expe- 
rience are  urged  to  demonstrate  their  ability  on  their  instruments. 

NOTE:  All  candidates  must  bring  music  for  the  vocal,  piano,  and 
instrumental  compositions  they  intend  to  perform,  and  should  come 
prepared  with  a  song  that  will  demonstrate  vocal  range  and  quality. 

MUSIC  TESTS  —  BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC  IN  THEORY 
AND  COMPOSITION,  PERFORMANCE,  OR  ELECTIVE 
STUDIES  IN  AN  OUTSIDE  FIELD 

Each  candidate  in  performance  must  demonstrate  an  advanced  level  of 
proficiency  in  the  major  area  of  performance  as  evidenced  by  the  abili- 
ty to  perform  compositions  representing  a  variety  ot  musical  periods 
and  styles,  and  must  show  potential  as  a  professional  performer. 
Memorization  is  required  tor  pianists  and  vocahsts.  Each  candidate  in 
theory  and  composition  or  elective  studies  in  an  outside  field  must 
demonstrate  an  acceptable  background  in  a  major  performing  area; 
candidates  in  theory  and  composition  must  interview  with  the 
Department  of  Music  Theory  and  Composition. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  ALL  MUSIC 
PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Theorv  Requirements  20  semester  hours 
MTC'll2,  113,  114,  115,  212,  213,  214,  and  215 

3.  Music  History  Requirements  9  semester  hours 
MHL210,  211,  and212 

4.  Recital  Attendance 

BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC— MUSIC  EDUCATION 

The  B.M.  in  MUSIC  EDUCATION  is  a  balanced  program  of  general, 
specialized,  and  professional  courses  leading  to  qualification  for  a 
Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Certificate  to  teach  general,  instrumental,  and 
choral  music  in  the  elementary  and  secondary  schools  of  Pennsylvania. 
The  Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  -  Undergraduate  Division  should  be 
consulted  for  the  current  general  and  music  requirements. 

1.  Required  Music  Education  Courses  23  semester  hours 
Professional  qualifying  test,  MUE  101,  201, 

331,  332,  333,  335,  431,  and  432 

2.  Other  Music  Requirements  35-38  semester  hours 
Major  performing  instrument,  applied  music 

courses,  conducting,  music  organizations, 
or  repertoire  classes 

3.  Education  Courses  7  semester  hours 
EDA  250,  EDF  100,  and  EDP  250 

BACHELOR  OF  MUSIC  IN  THEORY  AND 
COMPOSITION,  PERFORMANCE,  OR  ELECTIVE 
STUDIES  IN  AN  OUTSIDE  FIELD 
The  B.M.  in  THEORY  AND  COMPOSITION  offers  extensive 

training  to  develop  analytical  skills  leading  to  the  comprehension  of 
the  structure  and  form  of  music  ot  all  styles  and  periods,  and  to  devel- 
op creative  skills  enabhng  the  smdent  to  write  in  a  contemporary 
idiom  and  to  develop  an  individual  style. 

1.  Required  Theory/Composition  Courses  24  semester  hours 
MTC  312,  313,  341,  342,  344,  417;  485  and 

486  or  487  or  488 

2.  Other  Music  Requirements  31  semester  hours 
Conducting,  performance  area,  music 

organizations,  music  electives,  piano  competency 
The  B.M.  in  PERFORMANCE  is  for  students  who  demonstrate  a 
high  degree  ot  ability  on  their  chosen  instrument  and  who  desire  to 
concentrate  on  developing  that  abiUty.  Majors  in  the  program  should 
consult  the  Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  -  Undergraduate  Division 
for  the  current  general  and  music  requirements. 

1.  Foreign  Language  (for  vocal  track  only)  0-3  semester  hours 

2.  Private  Lessons  24  semester  hours 

3.  Required  Music  Courses  8-21  semester  hours 
Conducting,  minor  lessons,  ensembles,  music  electives 


4.   Other  Music  Requirements 

a.  For  Instrumentahsts  4  semester  hours 
Music  hterature,  small  ensemble,  piano  competency 

b.  For  Vocalists  1 1  semester  hours 
VOC  329,  411,  412,  413,  414,  416,  424,  491 

c.  For  Pianists  19  semester  hours 
MAK  311,  312,  313,  314;  PIA  405  and  406; 

two  courses  from  PIA  423,  424,  425,  426,  or 
427;  one  course  from  PIA  451,  452,  or  453 
(Pedagogy  Emphasis:  MAK  311,  312,  313,  314; 
PIA  405,  406,  450,  452;  PIA  451  or  453;  one 
course  from  PIA  423,  424,  425,  426,  427) 

d.  For  Organists  19  semester  hours 
MAK  311,  312,  313,  314;  ORG  351,  352, 

353,  451,  452 
The  B.M.  in  MUSIC  —  ELECTIVE  STUDIES  IN  AN  OUT- 
SIDE FIELD  is  designed  for  those  students  who  desire  a  general 
music  program  while  at  the  same  time  pursuing  a  secondary  interest 
outside  of  the  School  of  Music.  The  Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  - 
Undergraduate  Division  should  be  consulted  for  the  current  general 
and  music  requirements. 

1.  Required  Music  Courses  34  semester  hours 
Applied  lessons,  conducting,  ensemble,  music  electives 

2.  The  Outside  Field  21  semester  hours 
These  courses  are  taken  under  advisement  of  the  outside  field 
department  chairperson.  See  page  41  for  a  listing  of  choices  (in 
most  cases,  the  curriculum  for  a  minor  will  be  used  to  determine 
the  course  work  for  the  outside  field). 

Minor  in  Music  19  semester  hours 

This  program  is  geared  toward  liberal  arts  students  -mth  an  interest  in 
music.  The  Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  -  Undergraduate  Division 
should  be  consulted  for  current  requirements  and  placement  testing. 

1.  Required  Courses  11-12  semester  hours 
MTC  112  and  114,  MHL  course,  music 

organizations,  and  PIA  181  and  182 

2.  Music  Electives  7  semester  hours 

Minor  in  Jazz  Studies  18-21  semester  hours 

This  program  is  designed  primarily  for  students  currently  enrolled  in  a 
music  degree  program.  Students  in  other  degree  programs  will  be 
admitted  if  qualified.  Students  must  have  the  permission  of  both  their 
major  adviser  and  the  chairperson  of  the  Department  of  Instrumental 
Music.  The  Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  -  Undergraduate  Division 
should  be  consulted  for  current  requirements. 

1.  Required  Courses  18  semester  hours 
AES  151,  152;  AJZ  361,  362,  365;  MHL  322; 

MTC  361,  362 

2.  Music  Electives  0-3  semester  hours 
AEO  121;  AES  151,  152;  APC  193 

Minor  in  Music  History  18  semester  hours 

This  program  is  designed  primarily  for  students  currentiy  enrolled  in  a 
music  degree  program.  Students  in  other  degree  programs  will  be  admit- 
ted if  they  qualify.  Students  must  have  the  permission  of  both  their 
major  adviser  and  the  chairperson  of  the  Department  of  Music  History. 
Required  Courses  12  semester  hours 

MHL  201,  210,  211,212 
Any  two  of  the  following  6  semester  hours 

MHL  220,  320,  325,  451,  454,  455,  458,  462, 

479,  480;  MHW  401-410 

Equivalency  in  Music  Therapy 

Music  majors  may  pursue  courses  toward  a  certification  in  music  thera- 
py through  a  cooperative  program  with  Immaculata  College,  located 
ten  mUes  from  West  Chester.  The  Handbook  for  Students  in  Music  - 
Undergraduate  Division  should  be  consulted  for  current  requirements. 


Music:  Applied  Music 


School  ot  Music 


Department  of  Applied  Music 

John  Villella,  Chairperson 
FACULTY: 

Instrumental:  Ahramjian,  Briselli,  Galante,  Grabb,  Guidetti, 
Hanna,  Manning,  Kaderabek,  Klein,  Laudermilch,  Lyons, 
Metcalf,  P.  Nelson,  Newbold,  Paulsen,  Richter,  SouthaU 


Keyboard:  Bedford,  Cranmer,  Greenlee,  Klinefelter,  Pennington, 

Veleta,  Voois 
Vocal  and  Choral:  Q\iAcoX.t,  DeVenney,  Dorminy,  Friday,  Wagner, 

Wyss 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
INSTRUMENTAL  MUSIC 
NUMBERING  SYSTEM 

Private  and  class  lessons  are  shown  by  the 
foUowing  numbers,  together  with  the 
appropriate  prefix: 


BAR 

Baritone 

HAS 

Bass 

ESN 

Bassoon 

CLT 

Clarinet 

FLU 

Flute 

FRH 

French  Horn 

GTR 

Guitar 

HRP 

Harp 

JBR 

Jazz  Brass 

JPR 

Jazz  Percussion 

JST 

Jazz  Strings 

JWW 

Jazz  Woodwinds 

OBO 

Oboe 

PER 

Percussion 

SAX 

Saxophone 

TBA 

Tuba 

TPT 

Trumpet 

TRB 

Trombone 

VCL 

CeUo 

VLA 

\riola 

VLN 

Violin 

101-402  Private  instrucrion  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area(l) 

111-412  Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area,  music  education  program  (1.5) 
141-442  Private  instruction  in  advanced  perfor- 
mance area,  B.M.  program  (3) 
171-472  Private  instruction  in  performance 
area,  theory/composition,  and  elective  studies 
programs  (1.5) 

INS  471-474  Advanced  Instrumental  Lesson  (2) 
(Elective) 

AIM  311  Marching  Band  Techniques  (1)  A  sur- 
vey of  the  function  of  the  total  marching  band  and 
each  component  within  it. 
AIM  429  Special  Subject  Seminar  (1-2-3) 
AJZ  331  Electronic  Instruments  (2)  A  study  of 
the  MIDI  implementation  of  synthesizers,  sam- 
plers, sequencers,  signal  processors,  and  rhythm 
processors  as  related  to  real-time  performance. 

♦  AJZ  361  Jazz  Musicianship  and  Improvisa- 
tion I  (3)  A  basic  course  in  jazz  improvisation  that 
emphasizes  the  learning  and  discovery  ot  improvi- 
sational  techniques  through  playing  and  hstening. 

♦  AJZ  362  Jazz  Musicianship  and  Improvisa- 
tion II  (3)  A  continuation  of  AJZ  361. 

AJZ  365  Jazz  Ensemble  Techniques  (.5)  Tech- 
niques and  methods  for  organizing,  rehearsing, 
programming,  and  operating  jazz  ensembles. 

♦  AWM  429  Special  Subjects  Seminar-Work- 
shop (1-2-3)  Topics  in  the  area  of  instnmiental 
music  presented  by  faculty  members  and/or  visit- 
ing specialists. 


ALC  A  Literature  Class  A  historical  survey  of 
the  music  written  for  instrumental  solo  and 
ensemble,  including  current  teaching  materials. 
ALC  312  Brass  Literature  I  (1) 
ALC  313  Brass  Literature  II  (1) 
ALC  314  Brass  Literature  III  (1) 
ALC  322  Guitar  Literature  1(1) 
ALC  323  Guitar  Literature  II  (1) 
*  ALC  324  Guitar  Literature  III  (1) 
ALC  332  String  Literature  1(1) 
ALC  333  String  Literature  11(1) 
ALC  334  String  Literature  III  (1) 
ALC  342  Woodwind  Literature  1(1) 
ALC  343  Woodwind  Literature  II  (1) 
ALC  344  Woodwind  Literature  III  (1) 
ALC  352  Percussion  Literature  I  (1) 
ALC  353  Percussion  Literature  11(1) 
ALC  354  Percussion  Literature  III  (1) 
ARC  A  Repertoire  Class: 
ARC  391  Woodwind  Repertoire  Class  (.5) 
ARC  392  Brass  Repertoire  Class  (.5) 
ARC  393  String  Repertoire  Class  (.5) 
ARC  394  Percussion  Repertoire  Class  (.5) 
AMC  A  Master  Class  Solo  and  ensemble  instru- 
mental repertoire  is  performed  and  critiqued  by 
the  teacher  and  students. 

♦  AMC  311-314  Master  Class  Brass  (1) 

♦  AMC  321-324  Master  Class  Percussion  (1) 

♦  AMC  331-334        Master  Class  Strings  (1) 

♦  AMC  341-344  Master  Class  Woodwinds  (1) 
ABC  Brass  Classes  (at  the  beginning  level)  for 
music  education  major? 

ABC  191  Brass  Class  (.5) 

ABC  192  French  Horn  Class  (.5) 

ABC  193  Trombone  Class  (.5) 

APC  Percussion  Classes  (at  the  beginning  level) 

for  music  education  majors 

APC  191  Nonpitched  Percussion  Class  (.5) 

APC  192  Pitched  Percussion  Class  (.5) 

APC  193  Drum  Set  Class  (.5) 

ASC  Strings  Classes  (at  the  beginning  level)  for 

music  education  majors 

ASC  191  VioIinAlola  Class  (1) 

ASC  194  Cello  Class  (.5) 

ASC  195  Bass  Class  (.5) 

ASC  196  Guitar  Class  (.5) 

AWC  Woodwinds  Classes  (at  the  beginning 

level)  for  music  education  majors 

AWC  191  Single  Reed  Class  (.5) 

AWC  192  Flute/Recorder  Class  (.5) 

AWC  193  Double  Reed  Class  (.5) 

AWC  194  Reed  Making  Class  (.5) 

AEB  \n  Ensemble:  Band 

♦  AEBlOl   Elementary  Band  (.5) 

♦  AEB  1 12  Marching  Band  Front  (1) 

♦  AEB  31 1  Marching  Band  (1) 

♦  AEB  321  Concert  Band  (.5) 

♦  AEB  331  Symphonic  Band  (.5) 

♦  AEB  341  Wind  Ensemble  (.5) 
AEO  An  Ensemble:  Orchestra 


♦  AEO  101  Elementary  Orchestra  (.5)  PRE- 
REQ:  ASC  191. 

♦  AEO  1 1 1  Chamber  Orchestra  ( .5 ) 

♦  AEO  121  Studio/Pit  Orchestra  (.5) 

♦  AEO  341  Symphony  Orchestra  (.5) 
AES  An  Ensemble:  Small 

♦  AES  111  Brass  Ensemble  (.5) 

♦  AES  121  Percussion  Ensemble  (.5) 

♦  AES  131  String  Ensemble  (.5) 

♦  AES  141  Woodwind  Ensemble  (.5) 

♦  AES  151  Jazz  Ensemble 
(Criterions/Statesmen)  (.5) 

♦  AES  152  Jazz  Ensemble  (Combo)  (.5) 
AIC  A  Class  in  Instrumental  Conducting 
AIC  311  Instrumental  Conducting  I  (2) 

AIC  312  Instrumental  Conducting  II  (2)  PRE- 
REQ:AIC311orVOC311. 

KEYBOARD  MUSIC 
NUMBERING  SYSTEM 

Private  and  class  lessons  are  shown  by  the  follow- 
ing numbers,  together  with  the  appropriate  prefix: 
HAR-Harpsichord,  PIA-Piano,  ORG-Organ 
PIA  181  Class  instruction  in  keyboard  skills  for 
nonmusic  majors.  (1)  Prior  score  reading  ability  is 
not  required- 

PIA  182  Class  instruction  in  keyboard  skills  for 
nonmusic  majors.  (1)  PREREc£  PIA  181  or  pre- 
\'ioush'  acquired  score  readmg  abdirv'. 
191-192  Class  instruction  in  minor  performance 
area  (.5) 

♦  100  Private  elective  instruction  (1) 
101-402  Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area  (1) 

103-104  Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area  (1) 

105-106  Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area,  elementary-  education  students  with 
a  concentration  in  music  (1) 
107-109  Private  instruction  in  a  major  perfor- 
mance area,  elementary  education  students  with 
a  concentration  in  music  ( 1 ) 
111-412  Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area,  music  education  program  (1.5) 
141-442  Private  instruction  in  advanced  perfor- 
mance area,  B.M.  program  (3) 
171-472  Private  instruction  in  performance  area, 
theory/composition,  and  elective  studies  pro- 
gram (1.5) 

413  Elective  credit  for  senior  recital,  accompa- 
nying, or  other  participation  in  concerts  or 
recitals,  or  extra  studv  of  literature.  Available  to 
music  education  seniors  only  during  the  nonstu- 
dent-teaching  semester  by  permission  of  the 
department  (1) 

473-474  Advanced  Keyboard  Lesson  (2) 
(Elective) 

Pl/\  403  Harpsichord  and  Continuo  Realization 
(1)  .'\n  introduction  to  harpsichord  pla)ing  and 
the  principles  of  continuo  accompaniment  as  a 
Baroque  st^le. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Music 


Music;  Applied  Music 


♦  MAK  311-314  Master  Class  (Keyboard)  (1) 

For  keyboard  majors.  Experience  in  performing 
memorized  literature.  Class  members  also  play  two 
piano  compositions  and  ensemble  music  for  piano 
and  other  instruments. 

ORG  351  Organ  Literature  I  (3)  A  survey  of  lit- 
erature for  the  organ  from  the  13th  century  to  the 
Baroque  period;  influence  of  the  organ  on  the  Ut- 
erature. 

ORG  352  Organ  Literature  II  (3)  A  survey  of  lit- 
erature for  the  organ  from  J.  S.  Bach  to  the  present; 
influence  of  the  organ  on  the  literature.  Recordings 
and  performances  by  organ  majors  will  be  evaluated. 
ORG  353  Organ  Pedagogy  (3)  Dynamics  of  the 
one-to-one  teacher-student  relationship.  An  in- 
depth  study  of  standard  teaching  materials. 
Practical  experience  in  individual  instruction. 
ORG  451  Accompanying  (3)  Performance  of  the 
vocal  and  instrumental  accompanying  literature  for 
organ  from  all  periods;  performance  and  reading 
sessions. 

ORG  452  Service  Playing  (3)  A  study  of  problems 
in  service  plajang  for  the  organist.  Included  will  be 
hymn  accompaniment,  improvisation,  conducting 
from  the  organ,  and  literature  tor  the  service. 
PIA 130  Music  for  Piano  (3)  An  introductory 
course  in  the  history  and  appreciation  of  keyboard 
literature  from  the  1 6th  to  the  20th  century.  This  is 
a  basic  course  for  nonmusic  majors  designed  for  the 
general  requirements.  Not  open  to  music  majors. 

♦  PIA  213  Studio  Lessons  in  Accompanying  (1) 
Studio  instruction  in  accompanying  for  pianists  in 
any  music  program. 

PIA  223  Classroom  Piano  Skills  (.5)  Class 
instruction  once  per  week  in  minor  performance 
area  for  instrumental  and  vocal  music  education 
majors. 

PL\  233  Classroom  Piano  Skills  (1)  Class 
instruction  once  per  week  in  rote  song  harmoniza- 
tion, transposition,  patriotic  songs,  and  sight  read- 
ing on  electronic  keyboards  for  music  education 
piano  majors. 

♦  PIA  235  Keyboard  Repertoire  (.5)  A  weekly 
performance  class  for  sophomore  music  education 
keyboard  majors. 

♦  PIA  250  Accompanying,  Ensemble,  and  Sight 
Reading  (1)  Class  instruction  in  accompanying, 
ensembles,  and  sight  reading. 

PIA  330  Jazz  Keyboard  Improvisation  (1)  Class 
instruction  in  jazz  keyboard  improvisation  once 
per  week.  Piano  experience  on  at  least  an  interme- 
diate level  is  required. 

PIA.  334  Keyboard  Accompanying  (Minor)  (1) 
Class  instruction  once  per  week  in  accompanving, 
score  reading,  popular  music,  and  sight  reading  for 
vocal  music  education  majors. 
PIA  335  Keyboard  Accompanying  (Major)  (1) 
Class  instruction  once  per  week  in  accompanying, 
score  reading,  popular  music,  improvisation,  and 
sight  reading  for  piano  music  education  majors. 
PIA  340  Advanced  Jazz  Keyboard  Improvisation 
(1)  Class  instruction  in  advanced  jazz  keyboard 
Improvisation  once  per  week.  Piano  experience  in 
jazz  improvisation  required. 
PIA  404  Transposition  and  Score  Reading  (2) 
Emphasizing  the  needs  of  the  keyboard  accompa- 
nist. Techniques  include  clet  reading,  harmonic 
analysis,  interval  transposition,  solfege  steps,  and 
enharmonic  changes. 

PIA  405  Accompanying — Vocal  (3)  Performance 
of  the  vocal  accompanying  literature  from  all  peri- 
ods; performance  and  reading  sessions  in  class. 
PIA  406  Accompanying — Instrumental  (3) 
Performance  of  the  instrumental  accompanying  lit- 


erature from  all  periods;  emphasis  on  the  sonata  lit- 
erature; performance  and  reading  sessions  in  class. 
PIA  410  Independent  Studies  in  Keyboard 
Music  (1-3)  Special  research  projects,  reports,  or 
readings  in  keyboard  music.  Permission  ot  depart- 
ment chairperson  required. 
PIA  423  Baroque  Keyboard  Literature  (3)  The 
Renaissance  through  development  of  variation 
form  and  dance  suite.  Performance  practices,  orna- 
mentation, and  figured  bass.  In-depth  study  of 
works  of  Handel,  Bach,  and  Scarlatti.  Some  stu- 
dent performance  required. 
PIA  424  Classical  Piano  Literature  (3)  Origin 
and  development  ot  the  sonata  and  performance 
practices  of  homophonic  style.  Music  of  Bach's 
sons,  Haydn,  Mozart,  and  Beethoven.  Some  stu- 
dent performance  required. 
PIA  425  Romantic  Piano  Literature  (3)  Analysis 
of  piano  styles  of  Schubert,  Chopin,  Mendelssohn, 
Schumann,  Liszt,  Brahms,  Faure,  and  Tchaikovsky. 
Performance  practices.  The  virtuoso  etude  and 
problems  of  technical  execution.  Some  student  per- 
formance required. 

PIA  426  20th-Centiuy  Piano  Literature  (3) 
Seminal  works  and  stj-les  of  this  century.  Albeniz, 
Rachmaninoff,  Debussy,  Ravel,  Prokofiev, 
Hindemith,  Schoenberg,  Bartok,  and  American 
composers.  Some  student  performance  required. 
PREREQ:MTC213. 

PIA  427  The  Concerto  (3)  A  chronological  pre- 
sentation of  the  development  of  the  piano  concer- 
to emphasizing  performance  practices  and  prob- 
lems. PREREQ:MTC  213. 
PIA  429  Special  Subjects  Seminar  (1-3)  Sig- 
nificant topics  presented  by  facult}'  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  the 
specific  needs  of  undergraduate  keyboard  majors. 
PIA  443  Keyboard  Ensemble  (.5)  The  class  will 
focus  on  a  variety  of  ensemble  experiences,  includ- 
ing duets  and  accompanying  choral  groups. 
PIA  450  Group  Piano  Pedagogy  I  (3)  Procedures 
and  materials  for  group  piano  instruction. 
Emphasis  on  developing  comprehensive  musician- 
ship through  an  interwoven  study  ot  literature, 
musical  analysis,  technique,  improvisation,  ear 
training,  harmony,  transposition,  and  sight  read- 
ing. Includes  practicum  in  group  piano  instruction. 
PIA  451  Piano  Pedagogy  I  (3)  An  in-depth  smdy  of 
materials  available  to  the  smdio  piano  teacher  for  the 
elementary  levels.  Discussions  include  different 
methods,  technique,  harmony,  ear  training,  and  sight 
reading.  Includes  practicum  in  individual  instruction. 
PIA  452  Piano  Pedagogy  II  (3)  An  in-depth  study 
of  repertoire  and  materials  available  to  the  studio 
piano  teacher  for  the  intermediate  levels.  Discussion 
of  related  concerns  such  as  memorization,  pracrice 
techniques,  developing  technique  through  literamre, 
principles  of  fingering,  and  sight  reading.  Includes 
practicum  in  individual  instruction. 
PIA  453  Selected  Topics  in  Piano  Pedagogy  (3) 
Further  exploration  of  the  goals  and  objectives  of 
piano  study  through  presentation  of  selected  topics 
and  continued  practicum  in  individual  instruction. 

VOCAL  AND  CHORAL  MUSIC 
NUMBERING  SYSTEM 

Private  lessons  are  shown  by  the  following  num- 
bers, together  with  this  prefix:  VOI-Voice 
♦  100  Private  instruction  for  nonmusic  majors. 
Permission  of  the  chairperson  required  (1) 
101-402  Private  instrucrion  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area(l) 

111-412  Private  instruction  in  major  perfor- 
mance area,  music  education  program  (1.5) 


141-442  Private  instruction  in  advanced  B.M. 
performance  program  (3) 

171-472  Private  instruction  in  performance  area, 
theory/composition,  and  elective  studies  pro- 
gram (1.5) 

473-474  Advanced  Voice  Lesson  (2)  (Elective) 
151-452  Private  instruction  in  minor  perfor- 
mance area,  Bj\.  theatre:  musical  theatre  (1) 

♦  CHO  211  Men's  Chorus  (.5)  A  chorus  pre- 
senting the  choral  Uterature  for  male  voices.  Open 
to  all  male  swdents  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  212  Women's  Chorus  (.5)  A  chorus  pre- 
senting the  choral  hterature  for  female  voices. 
Open  to  all  female  students  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  311  Mastersingers  Chorus  (.5)  A  chorus 
presenting  oratorios,  masses,  and  more  difficult 
mixed  choral  literature.  Open  to  all  students  by 
audition. 

♦  CHO  312  Women's  Ensemble  (.5)  A  select 
choir  speciahzing  in  chamber  music  for  women's 
voices.  Open  to  all  female  students  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  410  Opera  Chorus  (1)  An  elective 
course  devoted  to  the  training  of  a  choral  group 
that  participates  in  opera  or  operetta  productions. 
May  not  be  used  to  satisfy  choral  requirements. 
Membership  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  411  Chamber  Choir  (.5)  Small  group  of 
singers  specializing  in  the  performance  of 
Renaissance/Baroque,  sacred,  and  secular  htera- 
wre.  Membership  by  audition. 

♦  CHO  412  Concert  Choir  (.5)  Devoted  to 
acquiring  a  tine  technique  in  choral  singing 
through  the  preparation  of  programs  for  perfor- 
mance. Membership  by  audition. 

VOC  111  Madrigal  Class  (1)  A  survey  of  madri- 
gal literature  through  records,  tapes,  and  class  per- 
formance with  emphasis  on  materials  suitable  for 
use  in  secondary'  schools. 

VOC  135  IPA  (.5)  The  study  of  the  Internarional 
Phonetic  Alphabet  (IPA). 

VOC  211  Performance  Preparation  (2)  A  course 
designed  to  teach  the  student  performer  how  to 
prepare  a  dramatic  score.  PREREQ;  MTC  110  or 
equivalent  and  VOl  181. 

VOC  227  Literature  of  the  Musical  Theater  (2) 
The  literature  of  the  musical  theater  from 
Singspiel  to  Broadway  musical.  Changes  in  style 
are  observed  and  analyzed. 

♦  VOC  235  Vocal  Repertoire  Class  (.5)  A  week- 
ly performance  class  for  music  education  vocal 
majors. 

VOC  311  Choral  Conducting  I  (2)  A  practical 
application  of  conducting  and  vocal  techniques  in 
choral  direction  through  practice  in  conducting  a 
choral  group. 

VOC  312  Choral  Conducting  II  (2)  Continued 
development  of  the  conducting  techniques  with 
emphasis  on  conducting  of  polyphonic  choral 
music  and  on  the  musical  styles  of  the  various 
choral  periods.  PREREQ:  VOC  311. 
VOC  315  English-Italian  Diction  (2)  English, 
Itahan,  and  Latin  diction  for  singers.  Use  of  pho- 
netics with  application  to  singing  of  selected  songs. 
VOC  329  Art  Song  (3)  Origins  and  development 
of  the  art  song. 

VOC  411  Master  Class  (Voice):  Baroque 
Period  (1) 

VOC  412  Master  Class  (Voice):  German 
Lied(l) 

VOC  413  Master  Class  (Voice):  French 
Melodie  (1) 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Music  Education 


School  of  Music 


VOC  414  Master  Class  (Voice):  20th-century 
Art  Song  (1) 

VOC  416  French-German  Diction  (3)  French 
and  German  diction  for  singers.  Use  of  phonetics 
with  application  to  singing  of  selected  songs. 

♦  VOC  421  Opera  Workshop  (2)  The  prepara- 
tion of  a  musical  production;  coaching  of  scenes, 
stage  movement,  and  costuming.  Permission  of 
instructor  required. 

♦  VOC  424  Musico-Dramatic  Production  (1-3) 
Major  roles  and/or  major  responsibilities  in 
extended  productions.  B)'  audition. 

VOC  426  Choral  Literature  (2)  The  development 
and  performance  style  of  the  choral  repertoire. 


♦  VOC  429  Special  Subjects  Seminar  (1-3) 

Significant  topics  presented  by  faculty  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  the 
specific  needs  of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  VOC  436  Vocal-Choral  Music  Workshop  (1-3) 

Specialized  workshops  in  the  area  ot  vocal  and/or 
choral  music.  Subject  to  be  announced  at  the  time 
of  the  offering. 

VOC  491  Vocal  Pedagogy  (2)  Principles  and 
techniques  of  teaching  voice.  PREREQ^  Four 
semesters  ot  private  instruction  or  permission  of 
instructor. 


vol  181  Voice  Class  (1)  Class  instruction  in 
singing  skills  tor  nonmusic  majors.  Previous  voice 
study  not  required. 

VOI  182  Voice  Class  (.5)  Class  instruction  in 
singing  skills  for  nonmusic  majors.  PREREQ^ 
VOI  181  or  permission  ot  instructor. 

vol  191  Voice  Class  (.5)  Class  Instruction  in  a 
minor  performance  area.  Open  to  nonmusic 
majors  with  permission  ot  the  department  chair- 
person. 

VOI  192  Voice  Class  (.5)  Continuation  of  VOI 
191.  PREREQ:  VOI  191. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Music  Education 

Jane  Pippart-Brown,  Chairperson 

FACULTY:  Albert,  Burton,  Ludeker,  McFarland 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MUSIC  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  MUE 

001  Professional  Qualifying  Remediation  (.5) 

Designed  to  present  musicianship  skills  for  stu- 
dents who  have  failed  the  professional  qualifying 
examination. 

101  Dalcroze  in  Music  Education  I  (.5)  A  study 
of  integrating  eurhythmies,  solfege,  and  improvisa- 
tion to  enhance  students'  listening,  performing, 
and  creating  skills. 

102  Dalcroze  in  Music  Education  II  (.5) 
Continuation  of  MUE  101  Dalcroze  in  Music 
Education  I.  PREREQ:  iMUE  101. 

201  Music  Education  Seminar  (.5)  A  seminar 
introducing  the  philosophical  foundations  of  music 
education  and  the  structure  of  the  school  music 
program.  Required  for  all  music  education  majors 
prior  to  MUE  331. 

231  Music  for  the  Classroom  Teacher  (3) 
Designed  to  equip  the  elementary  classroom 
teacher  to  participate  in  a  music  program. 
Emphasis  on  teaching  procedures  and  materials. 

232  Music  in  Early  Childhood  (3)  Designed  to 
equip  the  teacher  ot  early  childhood  to  develop 
specific  concepts  utihzing  singing,  rhythmic,  and 
melodic  activities.  Emphasis  on  listening  and 
movement  to  music. 

331  Music  Methods  and  Materials  (3)  The  study 
of  music  and  the  learning  process  at  the  elemen- 
tarv  level  to  include  Dalcroze,  Kodaly,  and  Orff 
PREREQ:  MUE  201  and  AIC  311  or  VOC  311, 
and  performance  qualifying  test. 
1 332  Music  Methods  and  Materials  II  (3)  The 
study  of  music  and  the  learning  process  at  the  sec- 
ondary level  to  include  technology,  listening  skills, 


multicultural  diversitv,  general  music  programs, 
and  administrative  skills.  PREREQ.  MUE  331. 
333  Instrumental  Methods  and  Materials  (3) 
Fundamentals  underlying  the  development  of  instru- 
mental programs  in  the  public  schools.  Emphasis  on 
program  organization  and  administration,  teaching 
procedures,  and  materials.  PREREQ;  VOC  311  or 
MC  311-.  COREQ:  MUE  331  or  332. 
335  Choral  Methods  and  Materials  (2)  Designed 
to  acquaint  the  student  with  a  variety  of  choral 
music  suitable  for  school  use.  Program  planning 
and  rehearsal  techniques  are  demonstrated. 
NOTE:  The  sequence  for  these  REQUIRED  music 
education  courses  is  consecutive  semesters:  MUE  331 
and  333  (or  335)  followed  by  MUE  332  and  335  (or 
333)  followed  by  MUE  431  and  432.  Enrollment  for 
these  courses  is  limited  on  a  yearly  basis  and  is  planned 
at  a  meetingfor  sophomores  in  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters.  See  coordinator  ofprofssional  sequence. 

337  Instrumental  Techniques  and  Materials  (2) 
For  juniors  and  seniors  who  desire  to  specialize  in 
instrumental  music.  Considers  rehearsal  proce- 
dures, effective  materials,  minor  repairs  of  instru- 
ments, competitions  and  festivals,  and  marching 
band  procedures.  PREREQ:  MUE  333. 

338  Comprehensive  Musicianship/Leadership 
Training  in  Music  Education  (2)  A  course 
designed  to  help  future  professionals  develop  lead- 
ership qualities  and  pragmatic  instructional  skills. 
Motivational  strategies  as  advocated  by  leading 
authorities  will  be  emphasized.  Content  includes 
visionary  leadership,  time  management,  and  prin- 
ciples in  self-discipline,  sell-confidence,  and  prob- 
lem solving.  Teaching  assignments  will  include 
methodologies  in  comprehensive  musicianship  and 
a  variety  of  teacher/leader  concepts. 

412  Teaching  Music  Listening  at  the  Elemen- 
tary Level  (3)  Analysis  of  musical  concepts  within 


selected  compositions  with  subsequent  design  of 
sequential  teaching-learning  strategies  for  all  lev- 
els, K-12.  Music  majors  only. 
422  Music  in  the  Middle  School  (3)  Review  and 
critical  analysis  of  music  education  m  the  middle 
school:  philosophies,  curriculum,  practices,  and 
personnel. 

428  Music  in  Special  Education  (3)  Charac- 
teristics of  special  pupils;  adaptation  of  teaching 
techniques,  materials,  and  curriculum.  PREREQ; 
MUE231.  232,  or331. 

430  Related  Arts  Pedagogy  in  Music  Education 
(3)  Principles  of  related-arts  teaching  appUcable  to 
musical  elements,  art,  and  creative  movement, 
with  appropriate  teaching  techniques  at  specified 
grade  levels.  Materials  for  school  music  programs; 
basal  music  series,  other  texts  and  literature,  and 
resources  in  related  arts.  Demonstration  lessons 
and  unit  planning. 

431  Student  Teaching  I  (6)  Observation  and  par- 
ticipation in  teaching  vocal  and  instrumental 
music  at  the  elementary  level.  Undertaken  in  con- 
junction with  qualified  cooperating  teachers.  Pro- 
fessional conferences  and  visits  are  an  integral  part 
of  the  experience.  PREREQ:  See  MUE  432. 

432  Student  Teaching  II  (6)  Observation  and 
teaching  general,  vocal,  and/or  instrumental  music 
at  the  secondary  level.  Professional  conferences  and 
visits  are  an  integral  part  of  the  experience.  PRE- 
REQ.for  MUE  431/432:  Satisfy-  requirements 
under  "Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education." 
GPA  2.8.  Grades  of  C  or  better  in  required  meth- 
ods classes  and  final  required  keyboard  minor  and 
voice  minor.  Complete  music  theory  and  aurals, 
music  history,  conducting,  and  all  instrument  class- 
es. Completion  of  90  semester  hours. 


I    Diverse  communities  course 


School  of  Music 


Music  Theory  and  Composition 


Department  of  Music  History  and  Literature 

Sterling  E.  Murray,  Chairperson 

FACULTY:  Balthazar,  Onderdonk,  Price,  Schmidt,  Winters 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MUSIC  HISTORY 

S>'mbol:  MHL 

121  Fine  Arts  (Music)  (3)  Designed  for  the  gen- 
eral requirements.  An  introductory  course  in  the 
history  and  appreciation  of  music  from  the  Middle 
Ages  through  the  contemporary  period.  Not  open 
to  music  majors. 

NOTE:  Other  courses  are  available  to  the  nonmusic 
major  for  general  requirements.  Particularly  suitable  is 
MHL  125. 

k  125  Perspectives  in  Jazz  (3)  For  nonmusic 
majors.  Guided  listening  to  improve  understand- 
ing and  enjoyment  of  jazz  with  emphasis  on  jazz 
heritages,  chronological  development,  and  socio- 
logical considerations,  culminating  in  an  analysis 
of  the  eclectic  styles  of  the  1960's  and  1970's.  Not 
open  to  music  majors. 

♦  179  Special  Subjects  Seminar  (3)  Significant 
topics  in  music  histor)'  and  literature  presented  by 
faculty  members  and/or  visiting  lecturers. 
Designed  for  the  nonmusic  major  who  has  had  Ht- 
tle  or  no  previous  musical  experience.  Fulfills  the 
general  requirements.  Not  open  to  music  majors. 

#  201  Form  and  Style  in  the  Arts  (3)  Relation- 
ships between  the  arts  (music,  literature,  fine  arts, 
and  dance)  stressed  through  common  principles  ot 
form  and  style.  Concentration  on  the  development 
of  skills  of  critical  perception  through  practical 
application  with  reference  to  various  arts.  Fulfills 
the  interdisciplinary  requirement. 

210  Music  History  I  (3)  An  introduction  to  musi- 
cal style  and  listening  techniques  within  a  histori- 
cal context:  (1)  an  introduction  to  st\'le  periods, 
music  Ustening  skills,  concepts  ot  form,  and  style 
analj'sis  in  both  Western  and  non-Western  music; 
(2)  historical  survey  of  music  beginning  with  the 
music  of  the  early  Church  and  continuing  through 
the  end  of  the  16th  century. 


211  Music  Histoiy  II  (3)  A  historical  survey  of 
music  from  1600  to  1825.  Analysis  of  appropriate 
genres,  styles,  forms,  social  contexts,  aesthetics,  and 
performance  practices  %vill  be  considered.  PRE- 
REQi  MHL  210,  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 

212  Music  History  III  (3)  A  historical  survey  of 
music  from  1825  to  the  present.  Analysis  of 
appropriate  genre,  st}'les,  forms,  social  contexts, 
aestethic  concepts,  and  performance  practices  will 
be  considered.  PREREQ:  MHL  211,  with  a  grade 
ofC-  or  better. 

220  Women  in  Music  (3)  A  survey  of  the  role 
that  women  plaved  in  the  history'  of  music  from 
the  Middle  Ages  to  the  present.  Open  to  nonmu- 
sic majors  and  music  majors  without  prerequisites. 
♦  310  Collegium  Musicum  (1)  A  chamber 
ensemble  speciahzing  in  the  use  of  authentic 
instruments  and  performance  techniques  in  the 
music  of  the  Medieval,  Renaissance,  and  Baroque 
eras.  Membership  by  audition. 
320  World  Music  (3)  An  introduction  to  the  smdy 
of  tribal,  folk,  popular,  and  oriental  music  and  eth- 
nomusicolog}'  methodolog)-.  Open  to  music  majors 
and  nonmusic  majors  without  prerequisites. 
322  History  of  Jazz  (3)  A  survey  of  the  history  of 
jazz,  including  representative  performers  and  their 
music.  PRERECi  MHL  212,  or  permission  of  the 
chairperson. 

325  History  of  Rock  (3)  This  course  traces  the 
development  of  1950s  rock  and  roll  firom  its  rh\lhm 
and  blues,  and  country-  and  westem  sources  through 
the  world  music  influences  of  the  1970s  and  beyond. 
451  Music  in  the  United  States  (3)  Sun'ey  of  the 
development  of  music  and  musical  styles  from 
1620  to  the  present,  .\nalysis  of  styles,  forms,  aes- 
thetic concepts,  and  practices. 
454  History  of  Opera  (3)  A  basic  course  in  the 
origin  and  development  of  opera  and  its  dissemi- 


nation throughout  the  Westem  world.  PREREQ; 
MHL  212,  or  permission  of  chairperson. 
455  History  of  Orchestral  Music  (3)  A  study  of 
representative  orchestral  works:  symphonies,  con- 
certi,  suites,  overtures,  and  others,  from  the 
Baroque  Period  to  the  present.  PREREQ;.MHL 
212,  or  permission  of  chairperson. 
458  Performance  Practices  (3)  A  consideration  of 
the  special  problems  encountered  in  the  st)'listic 
reahzation  and  performance  of  music  from  the 
Medieval  through  the  Romantic  eras.  Particular 
attention  will  be  focused  on  original  sources,  peri- 
od instruments,  and  performance  practices.  PRE- 
REQi  MHL  212,  or  permission  of  chairperson. 
462  Mozart  and  His  Works  (3)  A  study  of  the 
life  and  music  of  Wolfgang  A.  Mozart  with  special 
reference  to  the  period  in  which  he  hved.  PRE- 
REQ^  MHL  212,  or  permission  of  chairperson. 
This  course  is  offered  in  Salzburg,  Austria. 

♦  479  Topics  in  Music  History  I  (1-3)  Signifi- 
cant topics  presented  by  faculty  members  and/or 
visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  specific  needs 
of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  480  Topics  in  Music  History  11(1-3) 
Significant  topics  presented  by  faculty  members 
and/or  visiting  lecturers.  Designed  to  meet  specific 
needs  of  undergraduate  music  majors. 

♦  481  Independent  Study (1) 

♦  482  Independent  Study  (2) 

♦  483  Independent  Study (3) 

♦  MHW  401-410  Workshops  in  Music  History 
(1-3)  Participation-oriented  workshops  designed 
to  meet  specific  needs  in  music  history  and  to 
develop  skills  for  practical  apphcation  in  teaching 
and  professional  settings. 


I    Diverse  communities  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


Department  of  Music  Theory  and  Composition 

Robert  Maggie,  Chairperson 

FACULTY:  Maggio,  L.  Nelson,  Rimple,  Rozin 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
MUSIC  THEORY  AND 
COMPOSITION 

Symbol:  MTC 

014  Basic  Dictation  and  Sight  Singing  (2)  A 

preparatory  course  for  music  majors  emphasizing 
basic  aural  perception  and  sight-singing  skills 
needed  for  effective  music  study. 
110  Fundamentals  of  Music  (3)  A  study  of  basic 
elements  of  music  for  those  without  previous 
musical  e.xpericnce.  For  nonmusic  majors  only. 
112  Theory  of  Music  I  (3)  Introduction  to  music 
theory,  music  writing,  and  keyboard  harmony. 
Elements  of  musical  form;  binary  and  ternary 


forms.  Primary  triads  and  their  inversions. 
Analysis  and  creative  activity. 

113  Theory  of  Music  II  (3)  Supertonic  and  other 
secondarv  triads  and  their  inversions;  diatonic  sev- 
enth chords;  modulation;  compound  ternary,  rondo, 
and  variation  forms.  Analysis  and  creative  activity. 
PREREQ^MTC  112,  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 

114  Aural  Activities  I  (2)  Development  of  basic 
hearing  skills,  chiefly  through  sight  singing  and 
dictation  activities  based  on  the  subject  matter  of 
MTC  112. 

115  Aural  Activities  II  (2)  Continued  develop- 
ment of  basic  hearing  skills.  PREREQ:  MTC  112 
and  114,  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better  in  both. 
212  Theory  of  Music  III  (3)  Diatonic  and  chro- 
matic seventh  chords  and  their  inversions. 


Modulation.  Invention  and  fiigue,  sonata-allegro 
forms.  Analysis  and  creative  activity.  PREREQi 
MTC  113,  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better 

213  Theory  of  Music  IV  (3)  Harmonic  and  con- 
trapuntal techniques  of  the  20th  century.  Form  in 
contemporarv  music.  Analysis  and  creative  activity. 
PREREQ;  MTC  212. 

214  Aural  Activities  III  (2)  Material  of  advanced 
difficulty  involving  chromatic  alteration,  foreign 
modulation,  and  intricate  rhythms.  PREREQ; 
MTC  113  and  115,  with  a  grade  of  C-  or  better. 

215  Aural  Activities  IV  (2)  Continuation  of 
MTC  214  and  activities  invohing  nontonal  music. 
PREREQ:  MTC  212  and  214. 

261  Fundamentals  of  Jazz  (2)  A  basic  course  in 
jazz  theory. 


Nursins; 


School  of  Health  Sciences 


271  Radio  and  Television  Music  (2)  Techniques 
used  in  composing  and  arranging  music  for  radio 
and  television;  practical  writing  experience. 

312  Composition  I  (3)  Creative  writing  in  the 
forms,  styles,  and  media  best  suited  to  the  capabili- 
ties and  needs  of  the  student.  PREREQ;  MTC  212. 

313  Composition  II  (3)  Further  application  of 
MTC  312,  stressing  contemporary'  techniques. 
PREREQ:  MTC  312. 

341  Orchestration  (3)  The  orchestra;  use  of 
instruments  indi\'iduallv  and  in  combinarion. 
PREREQ:  MTC  212.' 

342  Musical  Form  (3)  The  standard  forms  of  tonal 
and  contemporan-  music.  PREREQ;  MTC  212. 

344  Counterpoint  I  (3)  The  contrapuntal  tech- 
niques ot  tonal  music.  Chorale  prelude  and  inven- 
tion. PREREQiMTC212. 

345  Counterpoint  II  (3)  Advanced  contrapuntal 
forms  including  canon  and  fiigue.  PREREQ; 
MTC  344. 

346  Techniques  of  Early  20th-century  Music 

(3)  A  study  of  compositional  techniques  in  repre- 
sentative vocal  and  instrumental  works  of  the  first 
two  decades  of  the  century. 


♦  361  Jazz  Harmony  and  Arranging  I  (3)  A  basic 
course  in  jazz/popular  harmony  and  arranging 
techniques,  including  contemporary  chord  symbols 
and  terminology,  and  basic  voicing  for  brass,  reed, 
and  rhythm  sections. 

♦  362  Jazz  Harmony  and  Arranging  II  (3)  An 

intermediate  course  in  jazz/popular  harmony  and 
arranging  techniques,  including  more  advanced 
harmonic  techniques.  Writing  for  strings,  wood- 
winds, and  electronic  instruments  is  introduced. 

364  Performance  Practices  in  Contemporary 
Music  (3)  Technical  problems  of  understanding  new 
notation  (e.g.,  graphic,  proportional,  mulriphonics, 
microtones,  metric  modulation,  asymmetrical 
rh\thm  groupings,  prose  scores,  etc.)  and  facility  in 
performing  scores  that  include  these  techniques. 
PREREQ;  MTC  213  or  permission  of  mstmctor. 

412  Composition  III  (3)  Composition  in  larger 
forms.  Open  to  composition  majors  only.  PRE- 
REQ: MTC  313. 

413  Composition  IV  (3)  Advanced  composition 
involving  major  projects  in  a  contemporary  idiom. 
PREREQ:  MTC  412. 

415  Serialism  and  Atonality  (3)  Compositional 

procedures  and  theoretical  concepts  in  atonal  and 


serial  works  of  Schoenberg,  Berg,  Webern,  Bartok, 
Stravinsk\',  and  more  recent  composers.  PRE- 
REQ: MTC  213. 

416  Jazz  Practices  (2-3)  Jazz  history,  writing,  and 
performance.  Survey  of  basic  jazz  Uterature;  fiinda- 
mental  techniques  in  arranging  and  improvising. 
PREREQ:  MTC  213  or  equivalent. 

417  Computer  Music  I  (3)  Materials  and  tech- 
niques of  computer  music.  Laboratory  experience 
in  the  composition  of  computer  music.  PREREQ; 
MTC  312  or  permission  of  instructor. 

418  Composition  V  (3)  Advanced  composition 
lessons  for  theorv/composition  majors.  PREREQ; 
MTC  413. 

450  Acoustics  of  Music  (3)  The  study  of  sound; 
its  production,  transmission,  and  reception. 
Musical  instruments,  the  acoustics  of  rooms,  and 
the  physical  basis  of  scales. 

♦  MTC  479  Seminar  in  Music  Theory/ 
Composition  (3)  Special  topics  in  specialized  areas 
of  music  theory  and  composition. 

♦  MTC  481  Independent  Study  (1) 

♦  MTC  482  Independent  Study  (2) 

♦  MTC  483  Independent  Study  (3) 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Nursing 

105  Nursing  Building 

610-436-2219 

Ann  Coghlan  Stowe,  Chairperson 

Susan  C.  Slaninka,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Hickman,  Slaninka 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Conroy,  Coghlan  Stowe, 

Devlin-Kelly,  Garrett,  Mackey,  Nester,  Thomas,  Thompson, 

Tucker,  Wanta,  Zabat 
INSTRUCTORS:  Schlamb,  Stabler-Haas 

The  Department  of  Nursing  is  accredited  by  the  National  League  for 
Nursing  Accrediting  Commission  (61  Broadway,  New  York,  NY 
10006,  212-363-5555)  and  approved  by  the  State  Board  of  Nursing  of 
the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 

Admission  Criteria 

Applicants  for  nursing  must  have  completed  work  equal  to  a  standard 
high  school  course,  including  a  minimum  of  16  units:  four  units  of 
EngUsh,  three  units  of  social  studies,  two  units  of  mathematics  (one  of 
which  must  be  algebra),  and  two  units  of  science  with  a  related  labo- 
ratory course  or  the  equivalent.  A  combined  score  of  1000  is  expected 
on  the  SAT. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  NURSING 

The  bachelor  of  science  degree  program  in  nursing  is  offered  by  the 
Department  of  Nursing,  which  is  an  integral  part  of  the  School  of 
Health  Sciences.  The  family-centered  program  is  based  on  the  con- 
cept that  the  person  is  a  biopsychosocial  being  with  basic  health 
needs.  The  Department  of  Nursing  beUeves  that  high-quality  health 
care  is  a  basic  right  of  all  people  and  that  health  care  needs  can  be  met 
through  the  practice  of  the  professional  nurse  who  has  completed  a 
systematic  program  of  courses  in  the  social  and  natural  sciences, 
humanities,  and  the  nursing  major. 

Characteristics  of  the  graduate  include:  1)  an  awareness  of,  and  sense 
of  responsibility  for,  social  issues  as  they  affect  diverse  populations;  2) 
leadership  through  professional  and  civic  activities  to  advocate  for  the 
improvement  of  health  care;  3)  accountabilit)'  and  competency  in  uti- 
lizing the  nursing  process  to  assist  clients  at  various  levels  of  health  in 


54  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 


a  variety  of  settings;  4)  collaboration,  coordination,  and  consultation 
as  a  colleague  in  the  interdisciplinar\'  health  team;  5)  belief  in  learning 
as  a  life-long  process;  6)  nursing  theory  and  research  to  support  nurs- 
ing practice. 

DEGREE  REQUIREMENTS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
Can  include  BIO  100;  CHE/CRL  103-104  or 

CHE/CRL  107; 

MAT  121;  PSY  100;  and  SOC  200. 

2.  Nursing  Core  Requirements 
NSG  212,  311-312,  and  411-412;  NSL  212, 
311-312,  411-412;  and  two  nursing  electives 

3.  Cognate  Requirements' 
BIO  204,  259,  269,  and  307;  HEA  206  or 
PSY  210;  and  HEA  303 

A  total  of  120  credits  is  required  for  graduation. 

Academic  Promotion  Policy 
Failures,  D  Grades,  or  NG  (No  Grade) 

AH  nursing  students  who  have  a  grade  of  D,  F,  or  NG  (no  grade)  in 
required  courses  during  the  freshman  and  sophomore  years  must  repeat 
these  courses  and  achieve  a  satisfactory  grade  (C-  or  above)  before 
entering  the  junior-level  nursing  major  courses.  Nursing  students  must 
have  a  2.0  GPA  before  entering  the  clinical  courses  at  the  junior  year. 
A  student  must  achieve  a  grade  of  C-  or  better  in  the  nursing  major 
in  the  junior  year  for  promotion  to  the  senior  year  and  achieve  at  least 
a  C-  in  the  senior  year  for  graduation.  Students  also  must  achieve  at 
least  a  C-  in  BIO  307  and  MAT  121. 

If  a  student  must  repeat  a  nursing  course,  a  grade  of  C-  or  better  in 
both  the  theory  and  laborator)'  (clinical  practicum)  components  must 
be  achieved.  The  theory  and  clinical  portions  of  a  nursing  course  must 
be  taken  concurrendy. 

Other  poUcies  are  explained  in  detail  in  the  current  issue  of  the 
department  handbook. 


Some  of  these  courses  may  be  used  to  satisfy  distributive  requirements. 


School  of  Health  Sciences 


Nursing 


Special  Requirements 

Generic  nursing  candidates  are  admitted  once  a  year,  in  September. 
Transfer  students  can  be  admitted  in  spring  and  fall. 
Nursing  students  are  required  to  supply  their  own  transportation  to 
clinical  facilities. 

Insurance.  Students  are  required  to  carry  liability  insurance  coverage 
in  the  amount  of  $l,000,000/$3,000,000  during  the  junior  and  senior 
year  at  a  yearly  cost  of  approximately  $30.  Students  also  are  required 
to  carry  health  insurance. 

Uniforms.  Students  are  required  to  wear  white  uniforms  to  some  of  the 
clinical  experiences  during  the  junior  and  senior  years.  Uniform  policies 
are  presented  in  detaU  in  the  current  issue  of  the  department  handbook. 
CPR  Certification.  Students  enrolled  in  nursing  courses  with  a  cUni- 
cal  component  are  required  to  be  currently  certified  by  the  American 
Red  Cross,  American  Heart  Association,  or  other  acceptable  resource 
in  Life  Support  (two-person)  Cardiopulmonary  Resuscitation.  The 
CPR  course  must  include  resuscitation  of  children  and  infants. 
Calculations  exam.  Competency  in  calculation  of  dosages  is  a  prereq- 
uisite to  NSG/NSL  311.  The  student  is  required  to  have  attained  90 
percent  proficiency  in  calculating  dosages  as  measured  by  a  paper  and 
pencil  test.  The  nursing  laboratory  coordinator  administers  the  calcu- 
lations exam  in  the  spring  semester  immediately  prior  to  enrolling  in 
the  cUnical  courses. 

Mosby  Assess  Test.  All  senior  students  must  complete  the  Mosby 
Assess  Test  prior  to  graduation.  Cost  is  assumed  by  the  student. 

Health  Requirements 

Nursing  candidates  must  meet  the  general  health  requirements  of  all 
students  at  West  Chester  University  for  the  freshman  and  sophomore 
years.  Candidates  must  meet  the  following  health  requirements  during 
the  summer  prior  to  the  junior  year:  inoculations  against  diphtheria, 
tetanus,  measles,  mumps,  Rubella,  rubeola,  poUomyeUtis  (a  series  of 
four).  Hepatitis  B,  and  varicella;  a  complete  physical  examination,  TB 
skin  test,  eye  examination,  and  any  other  diagnostic  tests  deemed  nec- 
essary. Prior  to  the  senior  year,  students  must  repeat  the  TB  skin  test. 

Nursing  Laboratory 

The  nursing  laboratory  in  the  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences  Center  is 
available  as  a  resource  to  help  the  nursing  student  in  the  learning 
process.  There  are  four  sections  of  the  laboratory.  One  area  contains 
hospital  beds,  examination  tables,  and  other  equipment  found  in  clini- 
cal care  settings.  This  area  is  used  for  the  teaching  and  learning  of 
nursing  skills.  The  second  area  is  a  separate  computer  laboratory  for 
students  to  study  and  review  nursing  theoretical  and  chnical  skills,  and 
to  complete  required  computer  software  programs.  The  third  area  is  a 
conference  room  for  student  and  faculty  meetings  and  seminars.  The 
fourth  section  of  the  lab  is  a  student-centered  gathering  and  study  area. 
Every  student  is  required  to  use  the  learning  laboratory  at  specified 
times.  In  addition,  students  are  expected  to  spend  time  using  this  re- 
source for  independent  learning  based  on  their  individual  needs.  The 
laboratory  is  staffed  by  a  full-time  nursing  laboratory  coordinator  who 
is  a  registered  nurse. 
Transfer  Policy 

Both  internal  and  external  transfer  students  are  accepted  into  the 
nursing  major  each  semester.  The  number  accepted  each  semester  is 
based  on  the  number  that  the  department  can  accommodate  in  a 
sound  educational  experience. 

Students  currently  enrolled  at  West  Chester  University  who  wish  to 
transfer  in  to  the  Department  of  Nursing  should  attend  a  transfer 
information  session  to  begin  the  process  and  subsequently  submit  an 
application  packet  to  the  department.  All  application  procedures  must 
be  completed  in  order  for  the  candidate  to  be  considered  for  entrance 
into  the  nursing  major. 


All  students  who  wish  to  transfer  into  the  Department  ot  Nursing  must: 

1.  Show  evidence  of  satisfactory  completion  (70  percent  or  better)  in 
BIO  100,  110,  or  259,  CHE  103  and  CRL  103,  or  CHE  107  and 
CRL  107,  PSY  100  or  SOC  200,  and  WRT  120;  and 

2.  Meet  with  the  adviser  in  the  Department  of  Nursing  to  sign  an 
individualized  agreement  that  reserves  placement  in  clinical  nurs- 
ing courses  during  the  academic  year  identified. 

Degree  Program  for  Registered  Nurses 

The  department  offers  an  innovative  and  flexible  program  for  regis- 
tered nurses  who  wish  to  earn  a  baccalaureate  degree  in  nursing.  The 
Curriculum  Committee  of  the  Department  of  Nursing  unanimously 
approved  the  Pennsylvania  Higher  Education  Nursing  Schools 
Association  (PHENSA)  Articulation  Model  for  registered  nurse  stu- 
dents in  spring  1997.  This  model  allows  for  transfer  of  nursing  credits 
if  the  student  has  graduated  from  a  National  League  for  Nursing 
Accrediting  Commission  (NLNAC)  accredited  program  in  the  last  10 
years  or  has  practiced  nursing  a  minimum  of  1000  hours  in  the  last 
three  years.  Using  the  PHENSA  model,  the  following  courses  may  be 
transferred  in  and  credit  awarded: 

•  NSG  212,  312,  and  411;  NSL  212,  312,  and  411  (28  credits) 

•  The  RN  student  is  required  to  take  NSG  311  and  412,  and  NSL 
311  and  412. 

Other  requirements: 

•  Most  RN  students  may  also  transfer  in  basic  biology,  anatomy  and 
physiology,  chemistry,  microbiolog)',  and  any  other  college  credits 
that  they  have. 

•  RN  students  are  not  required  to  take  BIO  307  (pathophysiology) 
as  the  student's  nursing  courses  and/or  clinical  practice  validate  a 
knowledge  base  in  this  area. 

Detailed  information  about  this  program  may  be  obtained  from  the 
department  office. 

Licensing  Eligibility  in  Pennsylvania 

In  order  to  be  employed  in  professional  nursing,  students  must  apply 
for  a  temporary  practice  permit  through  the  State  Board  of  Nursing. 
Students  must  meet  all  program  requirements  to  be  eligible  for  the 
National  Council  Licensure  Examination  (NCLEX)  upon  graduation. 
Passing  this  examination  designates  Registered  Nurse  (RN)  status.  In 
accordance  with  the  Professional  Nurse  Law,  felonious  acts  prohibit 
Ucensure  in  Pennsylvania  as  indicated  by  the  following: 
"The  Board  shall  not  issue  a  Ucense  or  certificate  to  an  applicant  who 
has  been  conviceted  of  a  felonious  act  prohibited  by  the  act  of  April 
14,  1972  (P.L.  233,  No.  64),  known  as  'The  Controlled  Substance, 
Drug,  Device  and  Cosmetic  Act,'  or  convicted  of  a  felony  relating  to  a 
controlled  substance  in  a  court  of  law  of  the  United  States  or  any 
other  state,  territory,  or  country  unless: 

(1)  At  least  ten  (10)  years  have  elapsed  from  the  date  of  the  con- 
viction; 

(2)  the  appUcant  satisfactorily  demonstrates  to  the  board  significant 
progress  in  personal  rehabiUtation  since  the  conviction  such 
that  Ucensure  of  the  apphcant  should  not  create  a  substantial 
risk  of  harm  to  the  health  and  safety  of  patients  or  the  public  or 
a  substantial  risk  of  fiirther  criminal  violations;  and 

(3)  the  appUcant  otherwise  satisfies  the  quaUfications  contained  in 
or  authorized  by  the  act. 

As  used  in  the  subsection,  the  term  'convicted'  shall  include  a  judg- 
ment, an  admission  of  guilt  or  a  plea  of  nolo  contendere.  An  appU- 
cant's  statement  on  the  appUcation  declaring  the  absence  of  a  convic- 
tion shall  be  deemed  satisfactory  evidence  of  the  absence  of  a  convic- 
tion, unless  the  Board  has  some  evidence  to  the  contrary." 
(Pennsylvania  State  Board  of  Nursing,  Professional  Nurse  Law,  print- 
ed, September  1999) 


Nursing 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
NURSING 

Symbol:  NSG 

»  109  Health  Issues  of  Women  (3)  (Offered 
jointly  with  Department  of  Health,  as  NSG/HEA 
109)  This  course  encompasses  the  needs  and  con- 
cerns of  women  as  consumers  in  our  present 
health  care  system.  It  examines  various  biological, 
psychological,  and  social  topics  related  to  women's 
health  care,  including  medical  abuses,  sexuality, 
sex  roles,  and  women's  health  in  the  workplace. 
This  course  is  an  enrichment  to  hberal  education, 
encouraging  inquiry'  into  previously  neglected  areas 
of  women  and  health.  It  is  offered  in  the  Women's 
Studies  Program  and  is  open  to  all  University  stu- 
dents, regardless  of  major,  as  an  elective. 
110  Transcultural  Health:  Principles  and 
Practices  (3)  (Offered  jointly  with  Department  of 
Health,  as  NSG/HEA  110)  This  course  examines 
the  health  beliefs  and  practices  ot  a  variet\'  of  sub- 
cultural  groups  in  the  U.S.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
the  apphcation  of  multicultural  health  beliefs  to 
the  caring  process.  It  utilizes  the  cross-cultural 
approach  in  meeting  the  health  needs  of  clients 
and  families.  It  is  open  to  all  University  students, 
regardless  of  major,  as  an  elective. 
212  Nursing  Theories  and  Concepts  (4)  Taken 
in  the  sophomore  year.  Nursing  theories  and  con- 
cepts, conceptual  frameworks,  theories  from  other 
disciplines  that  may  applv  to  nursing,  and  the 
nursing  process  are  studied  in  this  course.  PRE- 
REQi  Sophomore  standing. 
NSL  212  Nursing  Theories  and  Concepts  Lab 
(2)  (Must  be  taken  with  NSG  212)  This  clinical 
experience  includes  interviewing  skills,  physical 
and  psychosocial  assessment,  vital  signs  measure- 
ment, basic  hygienic  practices,  bodv  mechanics, 
and  infection  control. 

216  HealthyAging  in  the  New  Millennium  (3) 
The  student  will  have  the  opportunit}'  to  form  a  rela- 
tionship with  a  healthy,  elderly  individual.  Students 
will  utilize  communication  skills  through  interaction 
on  a  one-to-one  basis  with  senior  citizens  in  a  private 
home  setting.  Students  will  become  acquainted  with 
the  problems  of  day-to-day  living  and  the  crises  that 
face  this  population  along  with  the  adaptive  strengths 
and  resources  that  are  an  essential  part  of  the  healthy 
older  person's  personality. 

217  Loss  and  Grieving:  What  to  Say,  What  to 
Do  (3)  Loss,  grief,  and/or  depression  are  universal 
experiences.  Concrete  measures  to  help  oneself 
and  peers  better  cope  with  these  experiences  are 
presented.  Barriers  that  make  providing  comfort 
and  support  to  others  difficult  or  uncomfortable 
are  identified  and  discussed.  Effective  measures  for 
talking  with  and  helping  those  who  are  grieving, 
depressed,  or  suicidal  are  presented,  and  each  stu- 
dent is  assisted  to  develop  his  or  her  own  style  in 
comfortably  using  selected  approaches.  Classes  will 
be  participatorv  with  minimal  lecture. 

218  Concepts  in  Caring  (3)  The  emphasis  of  this 
course  is  that  caring  is  a  universal  concept  that  can 
be  viewed  from  many  discipUnes.  Nurses,  profes- 
sionals in  the  caring  business,  serve  as  the  guides 
in  a  creative  journey  connecting  human  caring  and 
the  various  disciplines. 

219  Computers  and  the  Health  Care  Delivery 
System  (3)  This  elective  course  will  be  of  practical 
importance  to  any  student  who  is  interested  in  the 
impact  of  computers  on  the  health  care  delivery 
system.  The  course  is  divided  into  three  areas;  1) 
an  overview  of  the  computer;  2)  apphcation  of  the 
computer  to  the  health  care  delivery  system, 
including  the  role  of  the  health  care  professional 
and  the  consumer;  and,  3)  issues  pertaining  to  the 


computer  and  the  health  care  dehver^'  system.  Use 
of  the  computer  with  a  variet)'  of  appUcations  and 
CAI  software  is  integrated  throughout  the  course. 

220  Care  of  the  Inner  Self  (3)  This  course  focuses 
on  care  of  the  inner  self  or  spirit.  The  purpose  of 
the  course  is  to  prepare  one  to  understand  the  inner 
self  and  to  know  how  to  utihze  the  power  within 
the  self  to  maintain  wellness  and  prevent  illness. 

221  Skills  for  Professional  Success  (1)  This  one- 
credit  elective  for  level  III  and  IV  nursing  majors 
is  designed  to  help  students  foster  clinical  judg- 
ment skills  by  focusing  on  study  skills,  critical 
thinking,  and  test-taking.  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
preparing  students  with  skills  that  are  essential  for 
success  on  the  National  Council  Licensure 
Examination  for  Registered  Nurses  (NCLEX- 
RN).  PREREQiMust  be  enrolled  in  nursing 
courses  at  300  or  400  level. 

#  222  Issues  in  Transcultural  Health  Care  Delivery 
(3)  This  is  a  systems  approach  to  health  care  deliv- 
er}'. Survey's  health  needs  of  diverse  U.S.  populations 
using  a  mulridiscipUnary  approach.  Introduces  the 
origin  and  evolution  of  sociocultural  health  beliefs  as 
they  impact  health  behaviors  and  outcomes  of  cul- 
turally and  ethnically  diverse  indi\iduals  and  popula- 
tions. All  concepts  will  be  approached  fi"om  busi- 
ness/economics, health,  and  political  science  per- 
spectives. Promote  collaboration  among  disciplines, 
to  improve  student  communication  skills  to  facilitate 
their  ability  to  advocate  for  diverse  populations,  and 
to  improve  health  care  services  for  diverse  popula- 
tions. 

311  Adaptation  I  (5)  Must  be  taken  during  junior 
year,  fall  semester.  The  emphasis  of  this  course  is  on 
the  prevention  of  illness  and  promotion  of  health  by 
assessment  of  the  health  status,  appropriate  inter- 
vention, and  evaluation  of  the  health  promotion 
plan.  The  nursing  process  provides  the  framework 
for  promotion  of  wellness  in  a  variety*  of  settings 
with  clients  of  any  age  group.  PREREQi  BIO  307. 
NSL  311  Adaptation  1  Laboratory  (5)  Chnical 
experiences  are  provided  in  agencies  where  rela- 
tively well  populations  have  been  identified,  such 
as  schools,  nursery  schools,  well  baby  clinics,  and 
health  maintenance  clinics.  NSG  311  and  NSL 

311  always  must  be  taken  concurrend\'.  PREREQ^ 
BIO  lOO',  204,  259,  and  269;  CHE  103-104  and 
CRL  103-104  or  CHE  107  and  CRL  107;  "WRT 
120  and  121;  HEA  303;  NSG  212  and  NSL  212; 
PSY  100;  HEA  206  or  PSY  210;  and  SOC  200. 

312  Adaptation  II  (6)  Must  be  taken  during  junior 
year,  spring  semester.  The  emphasis  of  this  course 
is  on  the  maintenance  of  health  and  promotion  of 
adaptive  responses  in  cHents  with  chronic  health 
problems.  The  nursing  process  is  used  to  assist 
these  chents  to  adapt  to  stressors  through  support- 
ive therapeutic,  palliative,  and  preventive  measures. 
NSL  312  Adaptation  II  Laboratory  (5)  Clinical 
experience  is  provided  in  sertings  where  clients  with 
chronic  health  problems  have  been  identified.  These 
settings  include  rehabilitation  centers,  child  develop- 
ment centers,  nursing  homes,  and  acute  care  set- 
tings. These  environments  provide  flexibihty'  for  stu- 
dents to  implement  changes  for  clients  and  acquire 
skills  that  will  be  utilized  in  other  nursing  courses. 
NSG  312  and  NSL  312  always  must  be  taken  con- 
currendy  PREREQ^NSG  311  and  NSL  311. 

314  Internship  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to  pro- 
vide nursing  students  with  the  opportunity  to 
enhance  knowledge  and  skills  acquired  in 
NSG/NSL  311-312.  Students  will  have  the  oppor- 
tunity' to  participate  in  the  care  of  a  group  of  clients 
over  a  consecutive  span  of  days  and  to  increase 
their  awareness  of  the  professional  role.  PREREQ^ 
Successful  completion  of  NSG/NSL  31 1-312. 


316  Coping  with  Cancer  (3)  The  emphasis  of  this 
course  is  on  coping  with  clients  who  have  cancer. 
Various  phj-siological  and  ps)'chosocial  effects  this 
disease  has  on  clients  and  their  families  will  be 
examined.  The  course  will  allow  students  to  explore 
their  own  feelings  related  to  cancer  and  assist  them 
in  their  contacts  with  cancer  clients.  Topics  that  will 
be  discussed  include  dealing  with  loss,  pain,  pain 
management,  hospice  care,  and  communication  with 
the  cancer  client.  This  course  is  open  to  all  students. 

317  Selected  Topics  in  Nursing  (3)  An  in-depth 
study  of  selected,  current  topics  relevant  to  nursing' 
and  health  care.  This  course  will  emphasize  the 
critical  analysis  of  current  topics  on  health  care. 
Each  student  will  develop  a  commitment  to  read- 
ing and  critiquing  nursing  hterature  in  professional 
journals  as  part  of  the  teaching-learning  process. 
367  Nursing  Imphcations  of  Drug  Interactions 
(1)  The  student  will  be  introduced  to  essential  phar- 
macological principles  and  concepts.  The  nursing 
process  will  provide  the  firamework  for  the  applica- 
tion of  the  theory  in  a  variet}'  of  health  care  settings. 

♦  410  Independent  Study  in  Nursing  (3)  The  stu- 
dent produces  an  independent,  research-oriented 
project  under  close  faculty  advisement  on  a  nursing 
topic  of  special  interest  to  the  student.  Participation 
in  a  selected  field  experience  is  optional.  PREREQ; 
Permission  of  department  chairperson. 

411  Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  I  (6)  Must 
be  taken  during  senior  year,  fall  semester.  The 
emphasis  of  this  course  is  on  the  study  of  adaptive 
responses  that  create  new  stresses,  requiring  addi- 
tional adaptations  and  frequendy  interrupting  an 
individual's  mode  of  ftinctioning.  The  nursing 
process  is  used  to  assist  chents  in  crises. 

NSL  411  Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  I 
Laboratory  (5)  Clinical  experience  is  provided  in 
acute  care  settings,  in  psychiatric  in-patient  set- 
tings, and  in  communit}'  health  settings.  NSG  411 
and  NSL  411  always  must  be  taken  concurrently. 
PREREQ:  MAT  121,  NSG  312,  and  NSL  312. 

412  Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  II  (6)  Must 
be  taken  during  senior  year,  spring  semester.  NSG 
412  is  a  continuation  of  NSG  411  with  the  empha- 
sis on  the  subconcepts  of  decision  making  and 
advocacy.  The  nursing  process  is  utilized  interde- 
pendendy  in  approaching  multihealth  care  problems 
of  chents.  Special  attention  is  given  to  inquiry  as  the 
student  correlates  nursing  theories  and  concepts 
with  identifiable  research  problems  in  varied  envi- 
ronments. Opportunit}'  is  provided  in  this  semester 
to  develop  organization  and  management  skills. 
NSL  412  Advanced  Adaptational  Problems  11 
Laboratory  (5)  Clinical  experience  is  provided  in 
acute  care  settings,  psv'chiatric  inpatient  settings, 
and  communit}'  health  settings.  NSG  412  and 
NSL  412  always  must  be  taken  concurrently. 
PREREQ:  NSG  411  and  NSL  411. 

414  Breastfeeding  and  Human  Lactation  (3)  For 
students  seeking  in-depth  knowledge  about  breast- 
feeding and  human  lactation.  Emphasis  is  on 
understanding  the  physiolog}'  of  human  lactation 
and  the  health  impact  on  infants  and  their  moth- 
ers. The  normal  process  of  breastfeeding  will  be 
addressed  with  exploration  of  the  barriers  to 
breastfeeding  as  well  as  the  supports  available  for 
breastfeeding. 
>    Diverse  communities  course 

♦  Approved  interdisciphnary  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Philosophy 


Pharmaceutical  Product  Development 

117  Schmucker  Science  Center  South 
610-436-2939 
e-mail;  ppd@wcupa.edu 
Leslie  Slusher,  Dirrcfor 
ADVISORY  BOARD 
Albert  CafFo,  Chemistry 
Kevin  Dean,  Honors 
Joseph  DiBussolo,  Adjunct 
Jack  Gault,  Marketing 
Judith  Scheffler,  English 
Russell  Vreeland,  Biology 
Joan  Woolfrey,  Philosophy 

The  Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  Program  educates  students 
for  careers  in  the  pharmaceutical  and  biotechnolog)'  industry.  The  cur- 
riculum was  developed  through  extensive  dialog  with  key  industry  lead- 
ers and  is  designed  to  meet  the  special  needs  of  students  seeking  careers 
in  these  dynamic  companies.  The  curriculum  for  the  degree  is  interdisci- 
plinary in  nature;  students  will  acquire  a  solid  foundation  in  the  basic 
and  pharmaceutical  sciences,  as  well  as  experience  in  technical  writing, 
oral  communication,  statistics,  economics,  and  biomedical  ethics.  This 
innovative  curriculum  is  coupled  with  two  summers  of  paid  cooperative 
emplo)Tnent  following  the  sophomore  and  junior  years.  Students  will  be 
placed  with  pharmaceutical  and  biotechnology  companies.  They  will 
develop  a  level  of  understanding  and  experience  that  is  hard  to  duplicate 
in  the  classroom.  Graduates  of  this  program  will  possess  a  breadth  of 
understanding  that  previously  took  several  years  of  industrial  experience 
to  acquire.  They  will  be  poised  to  enter  the  pharmaceutical  and  biotech- 
nology industry  as  middle  managers  or  enter  graduate  programs. 
Please  contact  the  Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  Office  for 
further  information  on  admission  standards  for  undergraduate  and 
transfer  students. 


BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— PHARMACEUTICAL 
PRODUCT  DEVELOPMENT 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
PHI  370  will  be  required  and  will  flililll  the 
interdisciplinary  requirement,  MAT  121  will  be 

required  and  will  fiiffill  the  basic  skills  mathematics 
requirement,  and  ECO  112  must  be  selected  as 
one  course  in  the  behavdoral  and  social  sciences. 
Although  these  courses  mav  be  used  to  fiilfdl 
distributive  requirements,  they  are  required  courses 
in  the  degree  program.  Two  of  the  general  education 
student  electives  are  to  be  chosen  from  the  list  of 
pharmaceutical  product  development  electives  in 
consultation  with  an  adviser. 

2.  Chemistry  Courses  11  semester  hours 
CHE  103*,  104,  231,  232,  321,  and  476;  and 

CRL  103,  104,  231,  and  232 

3.  Biology  Courses  22  semester  hours 
BIO  110*,  214,  220,  230,  367,  and  469;  and  BIL  333 

4.  Interdisciphnary  1 1  semester  hours 
IND  481,  482,  483,  484,  and  485 

5.  Supporting  Courses  20-21  semester  hours 
COM  230*,  ENG  371,  MAT  108,  YW{  130 

and  140,  and  STA  311 

6.  Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  Electives    6  semester  hours 
Two  courses  are  to  be  chosen  from  the  following 

list  in  consultation  with  an  adviser. 
BIO  217,  307,  310,  314,  334,  357,  421,  428,  431, 
454,  456,  464,  465,  467,  484;  BLA  201;  CHE  300, 
321,  333,  345,  381,  403,  424,  436,  479;  CRL  321, 
424,  436,  471,  472;  MAT  122,  162,  221,  261,  421, 
422;  MKT  200 


This  course  also  satisfies  the  general  education  requirement. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PHARMACEUTICAL  PRODUCT 
DEVELOPMENT 

Symbol:  IND 

481  Drug  Design  I  (3)  The  first  course  in  a  three- 
semester  sequence.  This  course  emphasizes  the 
chemical  aspects  of  drug  development  and  integrates 
the  major  concepts  in  medicinal  chemistry.  A  vanety 
of  topics  involving  drug  design  and  development  are 
introduced.  These  include  the  establishment  of  lead 
compounds  and  the  development  of  structural 
libraries  through  combinatorial  chemistry.  Molecular 
modeling  and  structure/activity  relationships  are 
introduced.  PREREQ:  BIO  469  and  CHE  232. 


482  Drug  Design  II  (3)  A  course  emphasizing 
pharmacokinetic  and  toxicokineric  aspects  of  drugs. 
Sites  and  mechanisms  of  drug  reaction  and  drug 
metabolism  are  discussed.  Drug  to.xicology  is  also 
explored  in  depth.  Laborator)'  therapeutic  drug 
monitoring  as  a  measure  of  improving  drug  efficacy 
is  considered.  PREREQ:  BIO  367  and  IND  481. ' 

483  Drug  Design  III  (3)  A  course  emphasizing  sta- 
tistical skills  which  are  often  employed  in  drug 
development  and/or  clinical  trials.  Stages  in  the  drug 
discovery  process  are  explored  as  well  as  informed 
consent,  bioethics,  and  other  medical  legal  issues.    ^ 
Methods  for  demonstrating  drug  safet)'  and  efFicaq' 
are  discussed.  PREREQ;  IND  482  and  STA  311. 

484  Pharmaceutical  Co-Operative  (1)  A  summer, 
paid  cooperative  experience  with  a  pharmaceutical 


or  biotechnolog}'  company.  These  co-ops  are 
designed  to  provide  experiences  in  key  aspects  of 
the  pharmaceutical  industry.  Students  will  be  super- 
vised joindy  by  an  on-site  professional  scientist  and 
a  Department  ot  Biology  or  Chemistry  faculty 
member.  PREREQ:  Completion  of  BIO  214,  220; 
BIL  333;  and  CHE  232.  A  minimum  GPA  of  2.75 
and  a  grade  of  C  or  better  in  all  science  courses  are 
required.  A  minimum  ot  24  credit  hours  must  be 
completed  at  West  Chester  University'  for  successful 
evaluation  and  recommendation  fo  the 
Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  Committee. 
485  Pharmaceutical  Co-Operative  II  (1)  A  sec- 
ond summer,  paid  cooperative  experience  with  a 
pharmaceutical  or  biotechnology  company.   PRE- 
REQ:  Completion  of  IND  484. 


Department  of  Philosophy 

103  Main  HaU 

610-436-2841 

Thomas  Plart,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Claghorn,  Croddy,  Piatt,  Struckmeyer 

ASSOCL\TE  PROFESSORS:  Hoffman,  Porritt,  Williams 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Burtner,  Woolfrey 


The  Department  of  Philosophy  offers  two  concentrations  leading  to 

the  bachelor  of  arts  degree. 

1.  The  philosophy  concentration  surveys  the  history  of  philosophy, 
explores  its  major  disciplines,  and  focuses  on  selected  topics  of 
perennial  interest.  The  purpose  of  the  program  is  to  develop  the 
organizational,  analytic,  and  expressive  skills  required  tor  law 


Philosophy 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


school,  the  seminar)-,  graduate  work  in  philosophy,  and  the  wide 
range  of  careers  in  government,  business,  and  industry. 

2.   The  religious  studies  concentration  is  designed  for  students  planning 
on  religious  vocations,  or  as  a  foundation  for  graduate  work  in  religion 
or  cross-cultural  studies.  The  emphasis  is  on  individual  and  social 
expression  ot  religion.  Western  and  non-Western,  philosophic  impli- 
cations, and  fine  arts  applications. 

Majors  in  the  B.A.  program  should  consult  the  department  handbook 

and  their  adviser  for  current  requirements. 

REQUIREMENTS  COMMON  TO  THE  B.A. 
PROGRAMS 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement         0-15  semester  hours 

3.  Major  Requirements  30  semester  hours 

4.  Free  Electives  27-42  semester  hours 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS— Philosophy  Concentration 

1.  Required  Core  Courses  21  semester  hours 
PHI  101,  190,  270,  272,  350,  412,  and  499 

2.  Philosophy  Electives 


BACHELOR  OF  ARTS— Religious  Studies  Concentration 

1.  Required  Courses  24  semester  hours 
PHI  101,  102,  202,  203,  204,  205,  271,  349 

2.  Elective  in  Religious  Studies  3  semester  hours 
As  advised 

Minor  Programs 

Students  may  minor  in  either  philosophy  or  religious  studies.  A  mini- 
mum of  18  semester  hours  is  required.  Elective  courses  are  selected  in 
consultation  with  the  student's  minor  adviser.  Either  of  these  minors 
may  be  taken  as  a  concentration  in  the  bachelor  of  arts  in  liberal  stud- 
ies general  degree  program. 

Philosophy  Minor 

1.  Required  Courses 
PHI  101,  150  or  190,  174  or  180,  and  270, 
271,  or  272 

2.  Philosophy  Electives  (under  advisement) 

Religious  Studies  Minor 

1.    Required  Courses 

PHI  102,  202  or  203,  204  or  205,  and  349 
9  semester  hours  2.   Religious  Studies  Electives  (under  advisement)     6  semester  hours 


18  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 

18  semester  hours 

12  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PHILOSOPHY 

Symbol:  PHI,  unless  otherwise  noted. 
NOTE:  Only  PHI  405,  436,  and  499  have 
prerequisites.  All  other  philosophy  courses 
are  nonsequential  and  open  to  all  students. 
Not  all  courses  will  be  offered  every  year. 

INTRODUCTORY  COURSES  IN 
PHILOSOPHY  AND  RELIGION 

101  Introduction  to  Philosophy  (3)  The  chief 
problems  and  methods  of  philosophic  thought, 
with  a  survey  of  some  t^-pical  solutions.  The  place 
and  influence  of  philosophy  in  life  today. 

#  102  Introduction  to  Religious  Studies  (3)  The 
role  of  religion  in  human  life.  Illustrations  drawn 
from  various  traditions,  rituals,  and  belief  patterns, 
both  ancient  and  modern. 

125  Theology  and  Science:  Enemies  or  Partners 
(3)  An  inquirv  into  the  relationship  of  theology  to 
the  natural  sciences.  Team  taught  by  both  a  physi- 
cist and  a  philosopher,  the  course  investigates  how 
ideas  of  God  have  been  affected  by  advances  in 
physics  and  biology.  Crosslisted  as  PHY  125. 
150  Critical  Thinking  and  Problem  Solving  (3) 
Introduction  to  the  principles  of  valid  inference 
and  effective  thinking.  Problem  solving;  puzzles; 
games;  decision  making;  the  syllogism;  probabilit}'; 
logical  fallacies;  and  creative  thinking. 
#174  Principles  of  the  Arts  (3)  A  critical  e.\amina- 
tion  of  traditional  and  contemporary  aesthetic  theo- 
ries from  diverse  culmral  perspectives  to  extend  stu- 
dents' thinking  about  the  "concept"  as  well  as  the 
"experience"  of  art.  Visual  and  literar)-  arts  are 
emphasized,  as  well  as  how  to  live  a  more  artfiil  life. 
1 180  Introduction  to  Ethics  (3)  Introduction  to 
major  theories  in  moral  philosophy  and  ethical 
decision  making  in  our  daily  lives  with  an  emphasis 
on  the  influence  of  culture,  power,  and  privilege. 
207  Philosophies  of  Nonviolence  (3)  An  exami- 
nation of  the  concepts  of  violence  and  nonvio- 
lence, especially  as  seen  by  recent  thinkers.  The 
course  attempts  to  link  theor\-  with  practice  by 
considering  the  contributions  of  Tolstoy,  Gandhi, 
Thoreau,  and  other  philosophers,  religious 
thinkers,  and  activities. 

#  SSC  200  Introduction  to  Peace  and  Conflict 
Studies  (3)  An  intcrdisciplinan'  inquir\'  into  the 


nature  and  causes  of  social  conflict.  The  aim 
throughout  is  to  find  ways  of  avoiding  destructive 
conflict,  whether  through  negotiation  or  other 
means.  The  issue  of  justice  as  a  factor  in  conflict 
receives  special  attention. 

COURSES  IN  THE  HISTORY  OF 
PHILOSOPHY 

■  270  History  of  Ancient  Philosophy  (3)  A  sur- 
vey of  the  major  figures  of  ancient  philosophy, 
from  the  pre-Socratic  period  through  Plato,  Aris- 
tode,  the  Epicureans,  and  Stoics,  to  the  Skeptics 
and  Neo-Platonists. 

271  History  of  iVIedieval  Philosophy  (3)  The  his- 
tory of  philosophy  from  the  early  Church  fathers 
to  the  late  Middle  Ages.  St.  Augustine,  St. 
Thomas,  mysticism,  Jewish  and  Mohammedan 
influences,  humanism,  and  the  rise  of  science. 

■  272  History  of  Modem  Philosophy  (3)  From 
Descartes  to  Hegel.  The  social,  political,  and  sci- 
entific impact  of  the  philosophers. 

■  273  19th-CentuiyPhiIosophy(3)  Hegel  and 
German  Idealism;  decisive  influences  on  European 
and  American  literature  and  thought.  Survey  of  the 
chief  themes  of  Schopenhauer,  Comte,  Mill, 
Spencer,  Marx,  Kierkegaard,  Darwin,  and  Nietzsche. 
284  American  Philosophy  (3)  Leaders  in  science, 
literature,  religion,  and  government  who  have  shaped 
American  thought.  Philosophers  of  Puritanism,  the 
Revolution,  Transcendentalism,  and  native  schools  of 
Realism,  Idealism,  and  Pragmatism. 

■  415  Existentialism  (3)  "Existentialism"  loosely 
refers  to  one  strand  of  20th  century  philosophy 
and  literature  that  explores  the  loss  of  confidence 
in  the  Enlightenment  "dream  of  reason."  A  survey 
of  this  existentialist  family  of  artists  and  philoso- 
phers including  Kierkegaard,  Dostoevskv, 
Nietzsche,  Heidegger,  Sartre,  Kafl^a,  and  Camus. 
Includes  a  brief  survey  of  existentialist  themes  on 
contemporar\'  post-modernist  developments  in  the 
arts,  social  sciences,  and  philosophy. 

COURSES  ON  OTHER 
PHILOSOPHICAL  TOPICS 

190  Logic  (3)  Arguments  are  used  in  everyday  life 
to  persuade  and  make  a  point.  An  introductory 
course  that  discusses  what  arguments  are,  what 
makes  them  good  or  flawed,  and  how  the  truth 
and  falsitT.'  of  their  various  parts  affect  our  evalua- 


tion of  them.  Provides  students  with  a  skill  for 
logical  and  systematic  thinking  that  will  help  them 
through  their  college  careers  and  beyond. 

♦  201  Contemporary  Issues  (3)  Discussion  and 
analysis  of  contemporary  philosophical  issues.  The 
topic  varies  from  semester  to  semester. 

#  330  (also  LIN  330)  Introduction  to  Meaning 
(3)  Discussion  of  the  analysis  of  meaning  given  by 
various  disciplines,  including  philosophy,  psycholo- 
gy, hnguistics,  communication  studies,  and  the  arts. 
360  (also  LIN  360)  Philosophyof  Language  (3)  A 
discussion  of  our  use  of  language  in  the  acquisition  of 
knowledge.  We  will  use  material  from  philosophy, 
linguistics,  psychology,  art,  music,  and  literature. 
371  Biomedical  Ethics  (3)  The  study  of  philo- 
sophical concepts  and  ethical  criteria  as  applied  to 
health  care  practice  and  clinical  research.  Issues 
examined  and  analyzed  include  problem-solving 
methods,  the  theory  and  practice  of  informed  con- 
sent, end-of-life  decision  making,  resource  alloca- 
tion, and  problems  posed  by  managed  care, 
research  ethics,  and  emdronmental  concerns. 

412  Ethical  Theories  (3)  An  inquir\-  into  the 
meaning,  interpretations,  and  fiinction  ot  ethical 
theor)'  in  our  lives.  The  course  will  e.xplore  some 
combination  of  classic,  modern,  and  contemporary 
ethical  theories.  PREREQ:  PHI  101,  180,  or  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

413  Aesthetic  TTieories  (3)  Interpretation  of 
beauty  and  art.  Effects  of  motivation,  and  prob- 
lems in  media  and  in  goals.  A  background  of 
meaning  for  the  evaluation  of  specific  works  of 
painting,  sculpture,  music,  and  architecture. 

414  Philosophy  of  Religion  (3)  Religion  and  the 
religious  experience  as  viewed  b)'  major  Western 
thinkers.  The  existence  of  God,  immortality,  reli- 
gious knowledge,  evil,  miracles,  and  science  and 
religion. 

422  Philosophyof  Science  (3)  The  nature  of  sci- 
entific method  and  scientific  theon',  with  reference 
to  presuppositions,  inference,  explanation,  predic- 
tion, applications,  and  verification. 


#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 
I    Diverse  communities  course 

H  Culture  cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Physics  and  Pre -Engineering 


436  Symbolic  Logic  (3)  Principles  and  methods 
of  symbolic  logic.  Practice  in  determining  validity 
of  sentential  and  quantificational  arguments.  The 
algebra  of  classes.  PREREQ;  PHI  190  or  permis- 
sion of  the  instructor. 

480  Environmental  Ethics  (3)  Explores  different 
approaches  to  the  question  of  how  to  view  and 
interact  with  the  natural  environment.  Analyzes 
ethical  issues  regarding  the  natural  environment 
and  develops  students'  ability  to  express  views  in  a 
thoughtfiil  and  critical  way  through  written  assign- 
ments and  presentations. 

482  Social  Philosophy  (3)  The  relationship 
between  the  individual  and  the  social/political 
order.  The  good  society  and  the  just  state  as  seen 
by  modern  and  recent  Western  thinkers,  such  as 
Locke,  Rousseau,  Marx,  Nozick,  and  Rawls. 
Cutting-edge  issues  of  the  present  day  are  also 
explored.  Course  is  conducted  in  seminar  format. 


COURSES  IN  RELIGION 

202  Religions  of  the  West  I  (3)  A  survey  of  the 
thought  of  Christianity  and  Judaism  to  the  year  500. 

203  Religions  of  the  West  II  (3)  A  survey  of  the 
thought  of  Christianity,  Islam,  and  Judaism,  from 
the  year  500  to  the  present.  Emphasis  on  theologi- 
cal development,  with  attention  to  social,  econom- 
ic, and  historical  factors. 

204  Philosophies  and  Religions  of  India  (3)  The 

religious  and  philosophical  heritage  of  India,  from 
Vedic  times  to  the  present.  Examination  of  major 
classics,  such  as  Rig  Veda,  Upanishads,  Bhagavad- 
Gita,  and  Yoga-sutras;  recent  writers  such  as 
Tagore,  Gandhi,  and  Radhakrishnan. 

205  Philosophies  and  Religions  of  the  Far  East 

(3)  A  survey  ot  Far  Eastern  philosophy,  reUgion, 
and  scientific  thought.  Confijcianism,  Taoism,  and 
the  various  schools  of  Mahayana  Buddhism, 
including  Zen,  are  given  primary  emphasis. 


349  Ideas  of  the  Bible  (3)  An  introduction  to 
BibUcal  concepts  of  revelation,  God,  man,  nature, 
and  redemption  in  light  ot  Hebrew  and  Greek 
thought. 

414  Philosophy  of  Religion  (3)  See  "Courses  in 
Philosophical  Topics,"  above. 

INDEPENDENT  STUDIES 
AND  SEMINARS 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  (1-3) 

♦  499  Philosophic  Concepts  and  Systems  (3)  An 

intensive  study  of  the  major  works  of  one  philoso- 
pher, stressing  themes  and  comparison  with  other 
views.  Required  of  all  philosophy  majors.  PRE- 
REQ^ Sb(  hours  of  philosophy  and  senior  stand- 
ing, or  permission  of  instructor. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Physical  Education  —  See  Kinesiology 


Department  of  Physics  and  Pre-Engineering  Program 


127  Boucher  Hall 

610-436-2497 

Anthony  J.  Nicastro,  Chairperson 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Nicastro,  Skelton 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR:  Waite 

The  Department  of  Physics  offers  three  undergraduate  degree  programs: 
the  bachelor  of  science  in  physics,  the  bachelor  of  science  in  education, 
and  a  cooperative  five-year  engineering  program  with  The  Pennsylvania 
State  University  at  University  Park  and  the  Harrisburg  campus. 
For  admission  to  the  physics  program,  most  students  should  have 
completed,  in  addition  to  the  general  University  requirements,  one 
year  each  of  high  school  chemistry  and  physics,  and  a  minimum  of 
three  years  of  mathematics,  including  algebra  and  trigonometry.  Any 
student  with  a  deficiency  must  complete  WRT  120  and  MAT  161 
with  grades  of  C-  or  better  to  be  admitted  to  the  program. 
West  Chester  has  a  chapter  of  the  national  physics  honor  society, 
Sigma  Pi  Sigma. 

A  minor  program  in  physics  also  is  available. 
The  physics  programs  can  also  be  found  on  the  Internet 
(http://phy.wcupa.edu). 

The  Robert  M.  Brown  Endowed  Scholarship  for  Physics  was  estab- 
Ushed  in  1997  by  Mr.  Robert  M.  Brown.  Partial  tuition  scholarships 
are  awarded  annually  to  students  in  the  physics  program. 
In  addition,  the  Dr.  Michael  F.  Martens  Award,  established  by  the 
West  Chester  Lions  Club,  is  given  annually  to  students  who  have  shown 
outstanding  achievement  in  physics.  Awards  are  determined  by  the 
department's  faculty.  Other  awards  include  the  Benjamin  Faber  Award 
in  physics  and  mathematics,  and  the  Diane  and  Roger  Casagrande 
Scholarship  for  students  in  pre-engineering  or  communication  studies. 
In  addition  to  these,  the  Physics/Philosophy  Prize  is  awarded  to  a  stu- 
dent who  has  made  a  notable  contribution  on  a  topic  related  to  the 
interface  of  science  and  theology.  These  awards  are  granted  annually  at 
an  induction  ceremony  for  new  members  of  the  West  Chester  University 
Chapter  of  Sigma  Pi  Sigma,  the  national  physics  honor  society. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— PHYSICS 

This  program  is  designed  as  preparation  for  graduate  school  or  careers 
in  government  or  industry.  The  curriculum  includes  a  strong  foundation 


in  mathematics  and  the  humanities.  A  wide  choice  of  electives  in  the 
program  provides  the  flexibility  to  develop  a  minor  in  an  area  of  interest. 

Requirements 

A.  Physics:  PHY  170,  180,  240,  300,  310,  320,  330,  350,  370,  420, 
and  430;  an  additional  six  credits  in  physics  must  be  chosen  from 
available  electives  at  or  above  the  250  level 

B.  Mathematics:  CSC  141;  MAT  161,  162,  261,  and  343 

C.  Chemistry:  CHE  103  and  104;  CRL  103  and  104 
Students  must  maintain  a  GPA  of  2.0  or  greater  in  their  physics 
courses.  Transfer  students  must  take  15  or  more  physics  credits  at 
West  Chester  at  the  300  level  and  above  for  graduation. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION— PHYSICS 

The  B.S.  program  in  physics  education  provides  a  soUd  background  in 
physics,  mathematics,  and  related  science  for  a  teaching  career  at  the 
secondary  level  and  leads  to  certification  to  teach  physics  in  the  pubUc 
schools  of  Pennsylvania. 

A.  Physics  Concentration  Requirements 

1.  Physics:  PHY  170,  180,  240,  300,  310,  320,  330,  and  410  or  430 

2.  Mathematics:  MAT  161,  162,  261,  and  MAT  343  or  PHY  370 

3.  Sciences:  CHE  103  and  104;  CRL  103  and  104;  SCB  350;  and 
an  elective  in  astronomy,  biology,  and  computer  science 

B.  Professional  Education  Requirements  (See  page  138.) 
Students  must  maintain  a  GPA  of  2.0  or  greater  in  their  physics 
courses.  Transfer  students  must  take  nine  or  more  physics  credits  at 
West  Chester  at  the  250  level  and  above  for  graduation. 

COOPERATIVE  PHYSICS/ENGINEERING  PROGRAM 

The  Department  of  Physics,  in  cooperation  with  The  Pennsylvania 
State  University  at  University  Park  and  the  Harrisburg  campus,  offers 
degree  programs  in  physics  and  engineering  requiring  three  years  at 
West  Chester  University  plus  two  years  at  The  Pennsylvania  State 
University.  At  the  end  of  this  period,  the  student  receives  two  bac- 
calaureate degrees:  a  B.S.  in  physics  from  West  Chester  and  a  B.S.  in 
engineering  from  Penn  State. 

Admission  to  The  Pennsylvania  State  University  is  contingent  on  a 
recommendation  from  the  Department  of  Physics  and  the  student 
having  maintained  the  overall  average  for  the  specific  engineering 


Physics  and  Pre-Engineering 


College  ot  .-Vrts  and  Sciences 


major.  Most  areas  ot  engineering  require  a  minimum  3.0  GPA  for 
admission  at  the  junior  level. 

Students  who  have  completed  a  bachelor's  degree  are  not  eligible  for 
transfer  to  Penn  State  in  this  program. 

Areas  of  study  in  engineering  at  The  Pennsyh'ania  State  Universitv  at 
Universit)'  Park  are  the  following: 


Aerospace  Engineering 
Agricultural  Engineering 
Architectural  Engineering* 
Ceramic  Science 
Chemical  Engineering 
Ci\'il  Engineering 
Computer  Engineering 
Electrical  Engineering 
Engineering  Science 


Environmental  Engineering 
Industrial  Engineering 
Mechanical  Engineering 
Metallurgy 
Mining  Engineering 
Nuclear  Engineering 
Petroleum  and  Natural  Gas 
Engineering 


Areas  of  study  in  engineering  at  The  Pennsylvania  State  Universit}'  at 
Harrisburg  are  the  following: 
Electrical  Engineering 
Environmental  Engineering 
Physics  Concentration  Requirements 

A.  Physics:  Pm'  115,  116,  170,  180,  240,  260,  300,  310,  320,  and 
370;  an  additional  six  credits  in  physics  at  or  above  the  300  level 


must  be  chosen,  depending  on  the  engineering  area  selected 

B.  Mathematics:  CSC  141;  MAT  161,  162,  261,  and  343 

C.  Chemistry:  CHE  103  and  104;  CRL  103  and  104 

In  addition,  students  intending  to  enroll  in  chemical  engineering  must 
have  CHE  231  and  232;  in  mining  engineering,  ESL  201  and  ESS 
101;  and  in  petroleum  and  natural  gas  engineering,  ESL  201  and  ESS 
101.  Students  intending  to  enroU  in  aerospace,  electrical,  or  nuclear 
engineering  must  take  PHY  370  and  PHY  420. 

Minor  in  Physics  19  semester  hours 

The  program  can  be  used  as  technical  preparation  to  complement  work  in 
other  scientific  or  nonsdentific  areas,  e.g.,  business  majors  interested  in 
careers  in  technologically  oriented  industries,  majors  interested  in  technical 
or  scientific  sales,  English  majors  interested  in  technical  writing,  or  social 
science  majors  interested  in  the  area  of  energ\'  and  the  environment. 
Required:  PHY  130  and  140,  or  Pm'  170  and  180;  also  PHY  240.  In 
addition,  students  must  select  eight  credits  of  physics  courses  at  the 
250  level  or  above,  chosen  under  advisement  with  the  Department  of 
Physics.  Transfer  students  must  take  a  minimum  of  six  credits  at 
West  Chester  at  the  250  level  or  above.  A  2.0  GPA  or  better  must  be 
maintained  in  all  physics  courses. 


'Architectural  engineering  majors  must  spend  three  years  at  the  University 
Park  campus  of  Penn  State. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PHYSICS 

Symbol:  PHY 

(3,2)  represents  three  hours  of  lecture  and  t^vo 
hours  of  lab. 

100  Elements  of  Physical  Science  (3)  A  study  of 
motion,  energy,  light,  and  some  aspects  of  modern 
physics. 

105  Structure  of  the  Universe  (3)  A  suney  of  phe- 
nomena and  objects  in  the  universe  from  the  very 
smallest  distance  scales  to  the  grandest  in  the  cos- 
mos. Includes  a  historical  consideration  ot  the  devel- 
opments of  modem  theories  ot  the  physical  world. 
lis  Engineering  Graphics  I  (1)  Use  and  prepara- 
tion of  engineering  drawings.  Topics  include  the 
use  of  instruments,  linework,  geometric  construc- 
tion, lettering,  four  tiipes  of  projections,  dimen- 
sioning, and  sections. 

116  Engineering  Graphics  II  (1)  A  continuation  of 
PHY  115,  to  include  topics  such  as  layout,  detail,  and 
assembly  dra\vings,  developments,  auxiliar\'  drawings, 
various  t^'pes  of  dratting,  machine  tool  processes,  and 
computer  drafting.  PREREQ^  PHY  115. 
125  Theology  and  Science:  Enemies  or  Partners 
(3)  .An  mquir\'  into  the  relationship  ot  theology  to 
the  natural  sciences.  Team  taught  by  both  a  physi- 
cist and  a  philosopher,  the  course  investigates  how 
ideas  of  God  have  been  affected  bv  advances  in 
physics  and  biolog)-.  Crosslisted  with  PHI  125. 
130  General  Physics  I  (4)  An  introductory,  non- 
calculus,  physics  course.  Mechanics  of  soUds  and 
fluids,  wave  motion,  heat  and  temperature,  ther- 
modynamics, and  kinetic  theory-.  (3,2)  PREREQ^ 
Algebra  and  trigonometn-. 

140  General  Physics  II  (4)  An  extension  of  PHY 
130.  Electricity  and  magnetism,  geometrical  and 
physical  optics,  and  modern  ph)-sics.  (3,2)  PRE- 
REQ:  PHY  130. 

170  Physics  I  (4)  An  introductory  laborator\-based 
course.  Includes  mechanics,  kinetic  theor)',  waves, 
heat,  and  thermodynamics.  The  laboratory  emphasizes 
error  analysis,  the  writing  of  technical  reports,  and  data 
analysis  using  computers,  PREREQ^MAT  161. 
180  Physics  II  (4)  A  continuation  of  PHY  170. 
Includes  electricity  and  magnetism,  geometrical  and 


physical  optics,  electronics,  and  modern  phracs. 
PREREQ:  PHV'  170.  Concurrent  \vith  MAT  162. 
240  Introduction  to  Modem  Physics  (3)  An 
atomic  view  of  electricit\'  and  radiation,  atomic  the- 
ory', special  relatirit\'  theon',  X-ra\"s.  radioactivitv', 
nuclear  fission,  and  introductory  quanmm  mechan- 
ics. PREREQ;.  M/^T  162,  and' PHY  140  or  180. 
260  Engineering  Statics  (3)  Composition  and 
resolution  of  forces,  equivalent  force  sii'stems,  equi- 
librium of  particles  and  rigid  bodies,  centroids  and 
center  ot  gravity,  analysis  of  simple  structures, 
internal  forces  in  beams,  friction,  moments  and 
products  in  inertia,  and  methods  of  rirtual  work 
PREREQ;  MAT  162,  and  PHY  130  or  170. 
300  Mechanics  (3)  Particle  kinematics,  dynamics, 
energy,  and  momentum  considerations;  oscilla- 
tions; central  force  motion;  accelerated  reference 
frames;  rigid  body  mechanics;  Lagrangian  mechan- 
ics. PREREQ:  AUT  162,  and  PHi'  140  or  180. 
310  Intermediate  Physics  Laboratory  I  (2)  A  lab- 
oratory course  to  familiarize  students  with  labora- 
tory equipment  and  methods  by  performing  a 
series  of  classical  and  modem  physics  experiments. 
The  results  of  these  are  reported  through  both  oral 
presentations  and  written  reports.  CONCUR- 
RENT: PHY  240. 

320  Intermediate  Physics  Laboratory  II  (2)  A 
continuation  of  PH^'  310,  but  including  an  intro- 
duction to  wTiting  scientific  proposals  and  the  use 
of  computers  for  data  acquisition.  Students  are 
required  to  propose  and  complete  an  experiment 
of  their  own  design  as  one  part  of  this  course. 
PREREQ:  CSC  141,  PHY  310. 
330  Electronics  I  (3)  Emphasis  is  divided 
between  theory  and  e.xperiment.  TTie  course  begins 
with  a  brief  review  of  resistive  and  RC  voltage 
dividers.  Electronic  circuits  studied  include  basic 
operational  amplifiers,  timers,  instrumentation 
ampUfiers,  logic  circuits,  flip  flops,  counters,  and 
timers.  (2,2)  PREREQ:  MAT  161,  PHY  140  or 
180,  or  permission  of  instructor. 
340  Fundamentals  of  Radioisotope  Techniques 
(3)  Biological,  chemical,  enrironmental,  and  ph\'si- 
cal  effects  of  nuclear  radiation.  Radiation  detection 
instrumentation  and  radio  tracer  methodology. 
(2,2)  PREREQ:  CHE  104,  and  PH\'  140  or  180. 


350  Heat  and  Thermodynamics  (3)  Equations  of 
state,  first  and  second  laws  of  thermodynamics, 
ideal  and  real  gases,  entropy,  and  statistical 
mechanics.  PREREaor  CONCURRENT: 
NLA.T  262,  Pm'  240. 

370  Mathematical  Physics  (3)  Selected  topics  in 
mathematics  applied  to  problems  in  physics,  ordi- 
nary' differential  equations,  vector  calculus,  Fourier 
analysis,  matrix  algebra,  and  eigenvalue  problems. 
PREREQ:  MAT  261,  and  PfPt'  140  or  180. 
400  Analytical  Dynamics  (3)  Wave  propagation, 
Lagrange's  equations  and  Hamilton's  principle, 
rigid  body  motion,  and  special  relatirity.  PRE- 
REQi  MAT  343  and  Pm'  300. 
410  Optics  (3)  Geometrical  and  physical  optics. 
Reflection  and  refraction  at  surfaces,  lenses,  inter- 
ference and  dift'raction,  and  polarization.  PRE- 
REQ. PHi'  140  or  180.  PREREQ.or  CONCUR- 
RENT: MAT  262. 

420  Atomic  Physics  and  Quantum  Mechanics 
(3)  Fundamental  concepts  of  quantum  mechanics 
with  appUcation  to  atomic  physics.  Topics  covered 
are  Bohr  model,  Schrodinger  equation  with  appli- 
cations, perturbation  theor\'.  helium  atom,  and 
scattering  theorv'.  PREREQ:  PHY  240  and  300, 
and  MAT  343  or  PHi'  370. 
430  Electricity  and  Magnetism  (3)  Electrostatics 
of  point  charges  and  e.xtended  charge  distributions, 
fields  in  dielectrics,  and  magnetic  fields  due  to 
steady  currents.  Ampere's  Law  and  induced  emfs. 
Topics  in  electromagnetic  waves  as  time  permits. 
PREREQ:  PHY  300,  and  M\T  343  or  PHY  370. 
440  Microcomputer  Electronics  (3)  Laboratory 
study  ot  special  circuits,  integrated  circuits,  micro- 
computers, and  microcomputer  interface  applica- 
tions. PREREQi  PHY  330,  and  M\T  343  or 
PHY  370. 

450  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  I  (1)  A  course 
to  familiarize  students  with  contemporary  labora- 
tory equipment  and  methods. 
460  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  II  (1)  A  con- 
tinuation of  PHY  450. 

♦  470  Seminar  in  Physics  (1)  Oral  and  wTitten 
reports  on  approved  topics.  Variation  in  topics 


♦  TTiis  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Political  Science 


from  year  to  year,  depending  on  the  interest  and 
needs  of  students. 

♦  480  Special  Topics  (1-3)  Topics  of  special 
interest  to  be  presented  once  or  twice.  PREREQ^ 
To  be  specified  by  the  instructor.  Course  may  be 
repeated  by  student  for  credit  any  number  of  times 
when  different  topics  are  presented. 

♦  490  Introduction  to  Research  (1-9)  Specific 
problems  in  consultation  with  the  faculty  adviser. 
PREREQ^  Permission  of  instructor. 


#  SCB  210  The  Origin  of  Life  and  the  Universe 

(3)  An  interdisciplinary  course  that  presents  the 
theory  and  evidence  tor  the  first  three  minutes  of 
the  universe,  and  formation  of  the  stars,  galaxies, 
planets,  organic  molecules,  and  the  genetic  basis  of 
organic  evolution.  PREREQ^  High  school  or  col- 
lege courses  in  at  least  two  sciences. 
SCI  102  Electricity  with  Physical  and  Biological 
Applications  (3)  An  exploration  of  the  physics  of 
electrical  circuits,  the  chemical  basis  of  electricity  as 


the  flow  ot  electrons,  acid-base  and  oxidation- 
reduction  reactions  in  chemical  and  in  living  sys- 
tems, the  electrical  activity  in  the  human  nervous 
system,  and  connections  between  electricity  and 
sensation  and  locomotion  in  humans.  For  elemen- 
taiy  education  majors  only.  Team  taught  with  the 
departments  of  Biology  and  Chemistry. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 


Department  of  Political  Science 

106  Ruby  Jones  HaU 

610-436-2743 

Peter  Loedel,  Chairperson 

PROFESSOR:  Marbach 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Bernotsky,  Loedel,  Polsky, 

Sandhu,  Schnell 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Kennedy,  D.  Milne,  Stevenson 
The  department  offers  a  bachelor  of  arts  degree  in  political  science 
wdth  four  concentrations.  The  objective  is  to  provide  programs  tai- 
lored to  each  student's  career  goals  and  still  to  allow  a  wide  range  of 
options  after  graduation.  All  four  B.A.  programs  are  intended  for  stu- 
dents with  an  interest  in  government  and  public  service,  journalism, 
business,  education,  and  the  law. 

The  department  offers  qualified  students  the  opportunity  to  do 
internships  and  earn  academic  credits  for  them.  The  main  goal  is  for 
students  to  complement  their  classroom  learning  wdth  experiential 
learning  through  their  work  in  an  organizational  setting.  To  start  the 
process,  students  should  speak  with  the  department  chair. 
The  following  rules  apply  to  all  B.A.  students  in  political  science: 

1.  Students  must  complete  the  last  15  hours  of  their  pohtica!  science 
program  at  West  Chester  University,  including  one  of  the  follow- 
ing courses:  PSC  400,  401,  or  402.  Exceptions  may  only  be  grant- 
ed by  the  chair  of  the  department  for  compelling  personal  reasons. 
(Examples:  A  student's  family  has  moved  a  great  distance,  and  he 
or  she  needs  to  complete  only  one  or  two  courses;  the  student 
and/or  the  student's  spouse  has  been  relocated  to  another  state  by 
his/her  employer.) 

2.  Students  must  have  a  C  average  or  better  in  all  political  science 
courses,  and  no  more  than  two  grades  below  C  in  pohtical  science 
courses.  A  grade  of  C-  is  considered  a  grade  below  C. 

3.  Internal  transfers  must  have  an  overall  cumulative  average  of  2.0  to 
enter  any  political  science  programs. 

PROGRAMS  OF  STUDY 

1.  The  B.A.  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  is  a  general  Uberal  arts  program 
exposing  the  student  to  the  broad  areas  of  political  science,  including 
American  government,  international  relations,  comparative  govern- 
ment, pubhc  administration,  political  behavior,  and  political  theory. 

2.  The  B.A.  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  -  APPLIED  PUBLIC 
POLICY  is  for  students  who  are  interested  in  the  practical  application 
ot  political  science  in  a  variety  of  professional  settings. 

3.  B.A.  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  -  INTERNATIONAL 
RELATIONS  is  for  students  with  a  primary  interest  in  international 
affairs  and  includes  relevant  cognates  in  several  disciplines. 

4.  B.A.  POLITICAL  SCIENCE  -  ELECTIVE  CITIZENSHIP 
EDUCATION  TEACHER  CERTinCATION  is  designed  for  stu- 
dents with  an  interest  in  earning  a  political  science  degree  and  becom- 
ing certified  to  teach  at  the  secondary  education  level. 

The  department  also  sponsors  pre-law  advising,  the  Law  Society,  and 
the  Political  Science  Club. 


II 


3  semester 
3  semester 
3  semester 


B. 


6  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


6  semester  hours 


Bachelor  of  Arts 

A.  Required  Core  for  AH  Concentrations 
PSC  100  American  Government 
PSC  200  Foundations  of  Pohtical  Science 
PSC  213  International  Relations 

PSC  230  Introduction  to  Political  Philosophy    3  semester 
Required  Courses  for  General  Concentration  6  semester 
PSC  202  or  204  or  240  and  one  of  PSC  400, 
401,  or  402 

C.  Required  Courses  for  International 
Relations  Concentration 
PSC  240,  PSC  401  or  402 

D.  Required  Courses  for  AppUed/Pohcy  Track 
Concentration 
PSC  202  or  204,  400  or  401 

E.  Required  Courses  for  Elective  Citizenship 
Education  Teacher  Certification  Program 
PSC  202  or  400  and  PSC  401  (research 
paper  must  focus  on  educational  issue) 

Bachelor  of  Arts  General  Concentration 

A.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 

B.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Cluster 

C.  Pohtical  Science  Core  (see  above) 

D.  An  additional  course  from  the  behavior 
or  American  government  category, 
which  includes  PSC  201,  301,  250-259, 
320-329,  350-359 

E.  An  additional  course  from  the 
comparative  group,  including  PSC  246, 
or  340-349 

F.  Three  PSC  courses  at  the  200  level  or  above 

G.  Cognates  distributed  as  follows: 

1.  GEO  101  or  103 

2.  Either  HIS  150,  151,  or  152 

3.  Either  ECO  101,  111,  112;  PSY  100;  or  SOC  200 
DL  Bachelor  of  Arts — International  Relations  Concentration 

A.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39*  48  semester 


hours 
hours 
hours 
hours 
hours 


48  semester 

0-15  semester 

18  semester 

3  semester 


hours 
hours 
hours 
hours 


3  semester  hours 


9  semester 
9  semester 


hours 
hours 


hours 
0-12  semester  hours 


B.  Foreign  Language  (must  be 
completed  through  the  202  level) 

C.  Political  Science  Core  (see  above)  18  semester  hours 

D.  PSC  217  3  semester  hours 

E.  Two  additional  comparative  courses,  6  semester  hours 


chosen  from  among  PSC  240-249  or  340-349 


6  semester  hours 


15  semester  hours 


F.  Two  additional  international  relations 
courses,  chosen  trom  among  PSC  311, 
312,  317,  318,  319,  and  330 

G.  Additional  and  cognate  courses  as 
follows: 

1.  GEO  101  or  103 

2.  HIS  101,  102,  150,  151,  or  152 


Students  in  the  international  relations  concentration  are  encouraged  to  take 
PSC  240. 


Political  Science 


School  ot  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


3.   Nine  additional  hours  selected  with 
advanced  approval  of  adviser  which  may 
count  up  to  sLx  additional  language  hours 

IV.  Bachelor  of  Arts — ^Applied/Public  Policy  Concentration 

A.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39    48  semester  hours 

B.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Cluster  0-15  semester  hours 

C.  Pohtical  Science  Core  (see  above)  18  semester  hours 
PSC  202  or  204  must  be  taken  as  part  of  the 

Pohtical  Science  Core. 

PSC  400  or  401  must  be  taken  as  senior  seminar. 

D.  Specific  Concentration  Requirements  9  semester  hours 
PSC  322,  356,  357 

E.  Two  additional  PSC  courses  chosen  from        6  semester  hours 
the  following: 

PSC  201,  202,  or  204  (if  not  taken  above), 
301,  323,  324,  355,  358,  359,  375,  or  up  to 
sbc  hours  of  internship  credit  taken  under 
advisement 

F.  Cognates  distributed  as  follows:  9  semester  hours 

1.  A  sociology  course  selected  under  advisement 

2.  An  economics  course  selected  under  advisement 

3.  A  geography  course  selected  under  advisement 

V.  Bachelor  of  Arts  —  Elective  Citizenship  Education  Teacher 
Certification  Program  (formerly  Social  Studies) 

A.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39      48  semester  hours 

1.  Academic  Foundations;  COM  208  and 
MAT  103  required 

2.  Diverse  Communities:  PSC  301  or  323 

3.  InterdiscipUnary:  PSC  204  or  318 

4.  Behavioral  and  Social  Sciences:  PSY  100 
and  SOC  200  recommended 

5.  Humanities:  HIS  101  and  LIT 
course  required 

6.  Free  Electives:  EDF  100,  EDP  250,  MAT  104 

B.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement    0-15  semester  hours 

C.  Political  Science  Core  (see  above)  18  semester  hours 


D.  An  additional  course  from  the  behavior  3  semester  hours 
category,  PSC  301  or  323  (in  additional 

general  requirements) 

E.  An  additional  course  from  the  comparative      3  semester  hours 
group,  PSC  240-249  range  or  340-349  range 

F.  Electives  6  semester  hours 
PSC  204  or  318  (if  not  used  in  general 

requirements)  and  any  two  additional  political 
science  courses  at  the  200  level  or  above. 
Electives  should  be  chosen  to  reflect  the 
themes  from  the  citizenship  education  standards. 

G.  Cognates  distributed  as  follows:  9  semester  hours 

1.  ECO  101  or  111  and  112 

2.  GEO  101  or  103 

3.  HIS  151 

H.  Free  electives  to  complete  128  credits  needed  for 
graduation.  Among  these  must  be  EDA  341; 
EDM  300;  EDP  351;  EDS  306,  411,  412; 
HIS  102,  152;  and  SSC  331. 

Additional  Requirements  for  Student  Teaching  and 
Certification 

An  overall  GPA  of  2.50  or  better  is  required,  as  well  as  a  GPA  of 
2.50  or  better  in  all  history  and  social  science  courses. 

Minor  in  Political  Science  18  semester  hours 

Students  may  minor  in  general  political  science  or  in  one  of  the  sub- 
fields  such  as  international  relations.  Students  take  PSC  100  plus  five 
courses  in  a  concentrated  area,  or  (at  least  two)  areas  under  depart- 
mental advisement. 

This  minor  may  be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  of  arts 
or  bachelor  of  science  in  liberal  studies  general  degree  program. 

Minor  in  Public  Management  18  semester  hours 

Students  take  PSC  100  and  PSC  202  plus  four  additional  courses  in 
pubhc  administration  under  department  advisement.  This  minor  may 
be  taken  as  one  of  the  minors  in  the  bachelor  ot  arts  or  bachelor  of 
science  liberal  studies  general  degree  program. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
POLITICAL  SCIENCE 

Symbol:  PSC,  unless  otherwise  indicated 

100  American  Government  and  Politics  (3) 

Devoted  to  understanding  how  the  system  works: 
political  action,  elections,  interest  groups,  civil  lib- 
erties. Congress,  the  presidency,  and  the  courts  are 
among  the  topics  considered.  Seeks  to  provide  a 
framework  in  terms  of  which  process  and  current 
issues  become  meaningful. 
HOI  The  Politics  of  Diversity  in  the  United 
States  (3)  Uses  contemporary  issues  as  a  means  to 
investigate  the  eftects  of  race,  class,  and  gender  on 
the  political  experiences  of  citizens  while  providing 
an  overview  of  American  political  institutions. 

200  Political  Analysis  (3)  Incorporates  techniques 
for  analyzing  political  questions  logically  and  sys- 
tematically, and  introduces  basic  research  design 
and  methodological  and  library  usage  skills  appro- 
priate to  the  political  science  discipline.  Required 
course  for  B.A.  majors  in  political  science, 
applied/public  polic)',  and  international  relations, 
and  the  B.S.  in  Education  with  a  political  science 
concentration.  Optional  course  tor  minors  in  polit- 
ical science,  public  administration,  and  interna- 
tional relations.  PREREQ:  PSC  100. 

201  State  and  Local  Government  (3)  Examination 
of  the  organization,  tiinctions,  and  politics  of  state 
and  local  government,  including  analysis  of  politics 
in  states,  counties,  cities,  and  towns  in  urban,  sub- 
urban, and  rural  areas.  Intergovernmental  relations 


in  education,  transportation,  and  welfare  policy  are 

examined.  PREREQ:  PSC  100. 

202  Elements  of  Public  Administration  (3) 

Considers  public  administration  in  the  United  States 
as  a  process  of  implementing  public  policy.  Uses  case 
smdies  and  projects  with  texts  focusing  on  organiza- 
tional theor\',  human  behavior  and  motivation,  bud- 
geting, personnel,  and  administrative  responsibilit)'. 
#  204  Introduction  to  Urban  Studies  (3)  An 
examination  of  the  breadth  ot  urban  studies  from 
the  perspectives  of  many  social  science  disciplines. 
Philadelphia  is  emphasized  as  an  object  of  percep- 
tion, as  a  place  of  life  and  livelihood,  and  as  an 
example  of  continual  change  in  the  urban  environ- 
ment. PREREQ:  WRT  121. 
213  International  Relations  (3)  Politics  among 
nations,  including  politics  carried  on  through 
international  organizations.  Examines  power  poli- 
tics, techniques  of  diplomacy,  and  methods  of  cur- 
rent international  organizations.  Special  attention 
to  U.S.  interests  and  policies. 
217  American  Foreign  Policy  (3)  Cultural,  politi- 
cal, economic,  and  psychological  intluences  on 
policy,  process  ot  decision  making.  Special  atten- 
tion to  a  few  policy  areas  such  as  relations  with 
allied,  underdeveloped,  revolutionary,  or 
Communist  countries.  Possible  response  to  threats 
of  war,  population  growth,  resource  shortages,  and 
pollution  may  be  examined. 

230  Introduction  to  Political  TTiought  (3)  Great 
political  thinkers  of  Western  civilization  from 
Plato  to  the  present.  Historical  background  of 


Western  thought  and  its  relevance  to  the  present 

political  world. 

240  Introduction  to  Comparative  Politics  (3)  An 

introduction  to  the  comparative  study  of  political 
systems  at  various  stages  ot  cultural,  social,  eco- 
nomic, and  political  development. 
■  246  Soviet  Politics  (3)  Marxism-Leninism,  the 
tunctioning  of  the  political  system,  and  its  domi- 
nation of  all  areas  of  Soviet  life.  Some  brief  atten- 
tion to  the  conduct  of  Soviet  foreign  policy. 
252  Civil  Liberties  and  Ciiil  Rights  (3)  A  survey 
of  the  sources  of  civil  liberties  and  civil  rights  in 
the  United  States  with  an  inquiry  into  contempo- 
rary problems  and  their  solutions  through  statutory 
and  constitutional  developments. 
256  Energy  and  the  Political  Process  (3)  Stresses 
the  process  of  policy  making  and  implementation 
in  the  field  of  energy.  Emphasis  also  is  given  to 
foreign  policy  and  natural  securitii'  implications. 
>  301  Gender  and  Politics  (3)  Examines  the  role 
of  women  in  politics  and  examines  how  the  per- 
spectives of  marginalized  groups  gives  access  to 
new  interpretations  about  the  U.S.  political  system. 
Specific  topics  include  socialization,  the  media, 
political  campaigns,  elections,  and  public  policy. 
310  The  United  States  and  Latin  America  (3) 
This  course  examines  U.S.  relations  with  the 
nations  of  Latin  America.  Emphasis  is  on  under- 


I    Diverse  communities  course 

#    Approved  interdisciplinar)'  course 

H  Culture  cluster 


School  ot  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


Political  Science 


standing  the  goals  of  U.S.  policies  and  the  real 
impact  of  those  policies.  U.S.  \iews  of  Latin 
America,  both  contemporan-  and  historical,  are 
explored  as  are  Larin  American  attitudes  and  views 
toward  the  United  States.  The  extent  to  which  the 
United  States  has  been  motivated  in  its  dealing  by 
great  power  hegemonic  concerns,  economic  self 
interests  (dollar  diplomacv).  cultural  imperiahsm, 
human  rights,  and  desire  to  champion  democratic 
governance  are  all  examined.  Contemporary'  con- 
cerns with  promoting  market  economics,  narcotic 
trafficking,  and  immigration  are  also  considered. 

311  Soviet  and  Post-Soviet  Foreign  Policy  (3) 
Emphasis  on  So\iet-,\merican  relations  since 
1945  and  a  comparison  of  the  two  socieries. 
Topics  treated  include  the  influence  of  Marxism, 
Great  Russian  nationalism,  and  historical  experi- 
ence on  Soviet  foreign  relations.  PREREQ^  PSC 
213  or  246  or  permission  of  instructor. 

312  Politics  of  Modem  Nationalism  (3)  An  analwis 
of  political  processes  in  the  former  So\'iet  Union  and 
Eastern  Europe,  Western  Europe,  and  the  Middle 
East.  The  role  ot  nationalism  in  these  countries  alter 
the  demise  of  communism.  The  rise  of  nationalism 
in  the  Middle  East  and  Western  Europe. 

317  Contemporaiy  International  Relations  (3) 
Recent  issues  and  problems  with  special  emphasis  on 
superpower  behavior  around  the  world.  Aso,  third 
world  revolutions,  intemational  terrorism,  human 
rights,  intemational  law  and  the  United  Nations,  and 
the  changing  intemational  economic  order. 

318  Intemational  Political  Economy  (3)  The  focus 
is  the  politics  of  intemational  economic  relations. 
Atemative  analytical  and  theoretical  perspectives 
will  be  examined  tor  their  value  m  helping  to  under- 
stand and  evaluate  the  historical  developments  and 
cxirrent  operation  of  the  global  economy.  Special 
attention  is  given  to  system  governance  (intemation- 
al regimes  such  as  the  World  Trade  Organization 
and  the  Intemational  Monetary'  Fund)  and  the  abili- 
ty' ot  the  nations  of  the  world  to  provide  stability  to 
the  international  political  economy.  The  primary 
objective  of  this  course  is  to  de\'elop  analytical  and 
theoretical  skills  in  the  application  of  various  inter- 
national political  economy  perspectives  (liberalism, 
mercantilism,  Mandsm/stmcturalism)  which  e.xam- 
ine  the  interrelationship  between  states  and  markets. 

319  Middle  Eastern  Politics  (3)  Topics  include 
the  Aab-Israeli  conflict,  the  poUtics  of  the  Persian 
Gulf,  the  role  of  OPEC,  and  the  superpower  con- 
flict in  the  region. 

322  Public  Opinion,  Propaganda,  and  Political 
Behavior  (3)  The  dynamics  of  opinion  formation 
and  change,  and  the  role  of  public  opinion  in  poh- 
c}'  formation.  Political  socialization,  survey 
research  and  political  socialization,  sun'ey  research, 
and  propaganda  techniques  also  are  considered. 
t  323  The  Politics  of  Race,  Class,  and  Gender 
(3)  This  course  examines  the  relationship  among 
race,  class,  and  gender  as  thev  relate  to  people's 
poUtical  behavior  and  experiences.  Aso  examines 
the  American  political  system's  response  to  them 
in  terms  of  its  public  pohcies. 
324  American  Political  Parties  (3)  Patterns, 
fiinctions,  and  history  of  the  ^Anerican  political 
party  system  at  national,  state,  and  local  levels. 
Theoretical  and  empirical  studies  of  political  inter- 
est groups,  pubhc  opinion,  and  voting  behavior. 
329  Judicial  Behavior  (3)  A  behavioral  approach 
to  the  law,  yvith  specific  reference  to  conceptual. 


methodological,  and  ideological  considerations. 
Depending  on  the  availabUitv  of  information,  role- 
playing  simulations  will  be  used  with  students  por- 
traj'ing  judges  and  attorneys. 
330  The  Politics  of  the  Holocaust  and  Genocide 
(3)  This  course  examines  the  political  causes  of  the 
Holocaust  and  genocide  both  in  a  historical  and 
current  context.  Case  studies  include  the  Jew^  in 
Europe  as  well  as  the  .Amenians  and  Cambodians. 
339  Contemporary  Political  Thought  (3)  Consi- 
deration of  major  political  thinkers  since  Marx, 
including  BerUn,  Rawls,  Ehvorkin,  Nozick,  and 
rational  choice  theorists. 

■  340  Latin-American  Culture  and  Politics  (3) 
Comparative  analy-sis  of  contemporary  Latin- 
American  systems.  Political  cultures,  decision 
making,  ideologies,  and  poUtical  processes. 
Emphasis  is  on  Mexico  and  Central  America. 
Offered  each  semester. 

■  342  Government  and  Cultures  of  Western 
Europe  (3)  Primary  attention  focuses  on  France, 
Germany,  and  Great  Britain;  secondary  attention 
is  on  other  European  systems.  Political  cultures, 
popular  participation,  poUtical  parties,  and  formal 
institutions  ot  government. 

343  Culture  and  Politics  of  Asia  (3)  Study  of  cul- 
tural, philosophical,  and  poUtical  systems  of  mod- 
em Asia  with  special  emphasis  on  China,  Japan, 
and  India. 

348  Afiican  CiJture  and  Politics  (3)  The  poUtical 
nature  and  practices  of  individuals,  organizations, 
and  governments  of  Black  ^Arica  are  examined  in 
the  cultural  context  of  the  contemporary'  indepen- 
dent period.  PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  equivalent. 
350  American  Constitutional  Law  (3)  The  devel- 
opment of  the  American  constiwtional  system  as 
reflected  in  leading  decisions  of  the  United  States 
Supreme  Court.  Emphasis  on  national  poyvers, 
federaUsm,  and  the  BUI  of  Rights.  PREREQiPSC 
100  or  permission  of  instructor. 

355  Congressional  Politics  (3)  Deals  yvith  the 
internal  and  e.xternal  factors  that  influence 
Congressional  behavior,  including  the  roles  of 
constituents,  pressure  groups,  parties,  the  commit- 
tee system,  rules,  and  the  leadership.  Their  rela- 
tionships to  the  president  and  court  structure  and 
their  impact  on  electoral  poUtics  also  are  consid- 
ered. Comparisons  with  state  legislatures. 

356  American  Public  Policy  (3)  PoUa'  formation 
and  execution.  PoUcy  areas  considered  vary  from 
semester  to  semester.  May  include  role-playing. 
PREREQ:  PSC  100  or  101  or  permission  of 
instmctor. 

357  Advanced  Political  Analysis  (3)  Discussion 
and  appUcation  ot  research  design,  conceptuaUza- 
tion,  measurement,  operaUzation,  research  models, 
sampUng,  and  data  analysis  for  poUtical  science. 

358  Applied  Public  Policy  Analysis  (3)  An  exam- 
ination of  pubUc  poUcy  issues  of  state  or  national 
concern.  Both  analysis  of  current  poUcy  and 
research  resulting  in  neyv  poUcv  recommendations 
wiU  be  included. 

359  The  American  Presidency  (3)  In-depth 
analysis  of  the  nature  and  significance  of  the 
American  presidency,  including  constitutional 
development,  presidential  roles  and  customs,  the 
recruitment  process,  the  executive  branch,  and  the 
poUtics  of  the  presidency. 


372  Organization  and  Management  (3)  Intro- 
duction to  pubUc  and  nonprofit  organization  man- 
agement. Broad  coverage  of  key  elements  of  orga- 
nizational functions  and  structure  for  potential 
managers.  Uses  both  macro  sociological  and  micro 
psychological  levels  of  analy-sis.  Case  studies  inte- 
grated into  conceptual  fi-ameyvorks. 

373  American  Intergovernmental  Relations  (3) 
Designed  to  famiUarize  students  with  the  complex 
network  of  confUct,  cooperation,  and  interdepen- 
dence among  national,  state,  and  local  government 
units.  Topic  areas,  among  others,  include  an 
analysis  of  the  continuing  evolution  of  American 
federaUsm,  an  examination  of  this  relationship 
from  state  and  city  government  perspectives,  and  a 
description  of  specific  intergovernmental  fiscal 
programs  and  poUcies. 

375  Public  Policy  and  Budgeting  (3)  Introductory 
course  to  pubUc  fiscal  management  appUcable  to 
local,  state,  and  national  levels  of  government. 
Focus  on  the  three  major  aspects  of  fiscal  manage- 
ment: pubUc  services  in  a  free  market/mixed  econ- 
omy'; revenue/ta.xation  theory  and  practice;  and 
governmental  budgeting  systems  and  concepts. 
PREREQ:  PSC  202. 

399  Political  Science  Symposium  (3)  Nature  of 
research  in  poUtical  science.  Constmcrion  of  a 
research  design.  Extensive  reading  in  an  area  of 
poUtical  science. 

HBl  400, 401, 402  Hartisburg  Intemship 
Seminar  (15)  A  fiiU-semester  intemship  in 
Pennsylvania  state  government.  Smdent  intem  is 
placed  in  cabinet-level  or  legislative  office. 
Placement  (9  cr.);  PoUc\'  Research  Project  (3  cr.); 
PoUc\'  Seminar  (3  cr.).  The  intemship  is  open  to 
any  junior  or  senior  student,  regardless  of  major, 
who  has  a  minimum  GPA  of  3.5.  Stipend  involved. 

400  Senior  Seminar  in  Political  Science  (3) 
Research  in  poUtical  science.  Methodology',  bibUog- 
raphy,  and  presentation,  both  oral  and  yvritten.  The 
research  paper  for  the  seminar  must  be  acceptable 
as  a  required  departmental  senior  research  paper. 

401  Senior  Project  in  Political  Science  (3) 
Execution  of  the  research  design  constructed  in 
PSC  399.  Involves  completion  of  a  major  senior 
paper  under  supervision  of  a  stafl  member. 
Extensive  independent  effort. 

402  Seminar  in  Intemational  Relations  (3) 
Theme  centered  with  capstone  paper.  Senior  I.R. 
majors  only. 

410  Independent  Studies  in  Political  Science  (1-3) 
Research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  poUtical 
science.  Open  to  seniors  only.  PREREQ; 
Permission  of  instructor. 
♦  412  Intemship  in  Political  Science  (3-15) 
Upper-level  student  field  placement  learning. 
Short-term,  3-  to  6-hour  experiences  in  poUtical 
settings  under  faculty  advisement;  and  9-  to  15- 
hour  placements  in  state,  federal,  local  government 
or  pubUc  serv'ice  agencies.  Learning  contracts  and 
faculty'  advisement  create  a  whole  experience  from 
exposure  to  government  admirustration  and  poU- 
tics. Offered  each  semester. 
414  Intemational  Theory  (3)  General  theory 
appUed  to  specific  case  studies.  Advanced  readings. 


I    Diverse  communities  course 

H  Culture  cluster 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Professional  and  Secondan'  Education 


School  of  Education 


Pre-Medical  Program 

117  Schmucker  Science  Center  South 

610-436-2978 

Melissa  Betz  Cichowicz,  Director 

COMMITTEE  MEMBERS 

Melissa  Betz  Cichowicz,  Chemistry 
Blaise  Frost,  Chemistry 
Felix  Goodson,  Chemistry 
Anthony  Nicastro,  Physics 
Leslie  Slusher,  Biology 
Richard  Woodruff,  Biology 
Joan  Woolfrey,  Philosophy 

The  Pre-Medical  Program  prepares  undergraduate  and  post-baccalau- 
reate students  for  application  to  the  health  professional  schools  of 
medicine,  dentistry,  and  veterinary  medicine  as  well  as  schools  ot 
optometry,  podiatry,  chiropractic,  and  physical  therapy,  and  for 
careers  in  biomedical  research.  Supervised  by  a  Pre-Medical 
Committee,  the  program  consists  of  an  individualized  selection  ot 
course  work,  personal  counseUng  and  academic  support,  and  optional 
junior-year  biomedical  research  at  a  medical  school  or  research  insti- 
tute. For  highly  select  undergraduates  and  post-baccalaureates,  med- 
ical school  admission  assurance  programs  are  available  in  affiUation 
with  Drexel  Universit}'  School  of  Medicine,  the  Penn  State  University 
College  of  Medicine,  Temple  Universit\'  School  ot  Medicine, 
Philadelphia  College  of  Osteopathic  Medicine,  Temple  University 
School  of  Dentistry,  and  Arcadia  University's  M.S.  in  physician  assis- 
tant smdies.  Students  with  majors  other  than  chemistry-biology  (pre- 
medical)  are  required  to  have  two  advisers — one  from  their  major  field 
and  one  from  the  Pre-Medical  Committee. 
Because  of  the  intense  competition  tor  health  professional  school 
admission,  only  academically  talented  and  highly  motivated  students 
should  apply  to  the  pre-medical  program.  Applicants  are  selected  on 
the  basis  of  their  potential  for  achievement  in  the  program.  Students 
in  the  program  are  expected  to  maintain  a  minimum  3.20  grade  point 
average  and  the  high  standards  of  performance  necessar)-  for  health 
professional  school  admission. 

It  is  essential  for  incoming  students  contemplating  a  medical  career  to 
register  with  the  Pre-Medical  Office  immediately  upon  matriculation 
at  the  Universit)'.  Similarly,  it  is  essential  for  students  who  at  some 


later  time  develop  an  interest  in  a  medical  career  to  register  with  the 
Pre-Medical  Office.  Students  who  fail  to  consult  with  the  Pre- 
Medical  Office  prior  to  taking  the  Medical  College  Admissions  Test 
(MCAT)  or  who  tail  to  report  the  results  of  any  MC  AT  exam  to  the 
Pre-Medical  Office  forteit  the  privilege  of  receiving  a  Pre-Medical 
Committee  letter  of  evaluation  when  they  apply  to  medical  school. 
All  West  Chester  students  who  wish  to  apply  to  a  health  professional 
school  should  ask  their  professors  to  forward  letters  of  evaluation  to 
the  Pre-Medical  Committee  and  should  process  their  applications 
through  the  committee.  The  committee  will  send  a  composite  letter  of 
evaluation  to  the  professional  school.  Except  for  special  circumstances,  no 
letters  of  recommendation  should  be  sent  directly  to  professional  schools. 
Further  information  is  available  in  the  Pre-Medical  Office,  117 
Schmucker  Science  Center  South. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  —  CHEMISTRY-BIOLOGY 
(PRE-MEDICAL) 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39    48  semester  hours 
Includes  six  semester  hours  of  English 

composition 

2.  Biology  24  semester  hours 
BIO  110,  217,  220,  230,  357,  448,  and  468 

3.  Chemistry  31  semester  hours 
CHE  103,  104,  231,  232,  321,  345,  418,  and 

476 

CRL  103,  104,  231,  321,  and  476 
4A.  Internship  Track  12  semester  hours 

CHE  450 

One  three-credit  biology  or  chemistry 

concentration  elective 
4B.   Noninternship  Track  15  semester  hours 

CRL  321,  CHE  477 

BIO  490  or  CHE  491 

Three  three-credit  concentration  electives 

5.  Supporting  Courses  19  semester  hours 
MAT  121  and  161 

PHY  130  and  140,  or  170  and  180 

6.  Free  Electives 


7-10  semester  hours 


See  also  Chemistry. 


Department  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Ed 


201C  Recitation  Hall 

610-436-2958 

Yi-Ming  Hsu,  Chairperson 

Paul  Morgan,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Hsu,  Hynes 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  K.  Brown,  Haggard,  Hohngak, 

Mastrilli,  Welsh 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Bolton,  Goss,  Kinslow,  Kurzinsky, 

Morgan,  Penny 
The  bachelor  of  science  in  education  or  the  bachelor  of  arts  with  an 
elective  program  in  teacher  certification,  which  prepares  the  student  for 
teaching  in  the  secondary  schools  or  K-12  classes,  may  be  earned  with 
an  academic  speciahzation  in  biology,  chemistry,  citizenship  education, 
communication,  earth  and  space  science,  English,  French,  general  sci- 
ence, German,  Latin,  mathematics,  physics,  Russian,  or  Spanish. 
Satisfactory  completion  of  a  secondary  or  K-12  curriculum  also  will 
quality  the  student  for  a  Pennsylvania  Instructional  I  Certificate, 
which  is  valid  for  six  years  of  teaching  the  specified  subject  in 


ucation 

approved  Pennsylvania  schools.  The  student  must  choose  one  acade- 
mic field  of  specialization. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE  IN  EDUCATION 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Professional  Education  Requirements  33-36  semester  hours 
Secondary  and  K-12  Education 

EOF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250  and  351, 
EDA/EDR  341,  EDS  306,  teaching  skills/methods 
(taken  in  academic  department  of  subject 
specialization),  EDS  411/412 

3.  The  teaching  certification  is  given  in  specific  subject 
areas.  Therefore,  speciahzation  in  one  of  the  teaching 
fields  listed  below  is  required  for  graduation  in 
secondary  or  K-12  education.  The  minimum  number 
of  semester  hours  required  for  each  field  is  listed  in 
this  catalog  under  the  appropriate  academic  department. 
These  hours  wiU  satisfy  the  Instructional  I 
Certification  requirements  in  Pennsylvania. 


School  of  Education 


Protessional  and  Secondan'  Education:  Emironrnental  Education 


Earth  and  Space  Science 

English 

General  Science 

Mathematics 

Physics 


Secondary  Areas  of  Certification 

Biolog}- 

Chemistn- 

Citizenship  Education 

(formerh"  Social  Studies) 
Communication 

K-12  Areas  of  Certification 

French  Russian 

German  Spanish 

Latin 

Students  in  the  secondajy  or  K-12  education  programs  must  confer 
regularly  with  their  professional  studies  adviser  in  the  Department  of 
Professional  and  Secondary-  Education,  as  well  as  wth  the  academic 
adviser  assigned  by  their  respective  academic  department.  Prospective 
students  may  obtain  information  on  these  secondary  or  K-12  educa- 
tion programs  from  the  Teacher  Education  Center  located  in  251 
F.H.  Green  Librar>-  (610-436-3090). 
Formal  Admission  to  Teacher  Education  and  Teacher 
Certification 

Refer  to  the  catalog  section  on  "Teaching  Certification  Programs"  for 
information  on  program  requirements. 


Student  Teaching  Eligibility 

To  be  eligible  tor  student  teaching  (EDS  411-412),  the  smdent  must 
have  fulfilled  the  following  requirements: 

1.  Completed  the  following  three  courses:  AL^T  103  or  above,  PSY 
100,\\'RT121. 

2.  Completed  the  following  eight  courses  with  at  least  a  C  (2.0): 
EDF  100,  EDM  300,  e"dP^250,  EDP  351,  EDA/EDR  341, 
EDS  306,  and  methods  or  teaching  skills  course(s)  in  the  area  of 
specialization  offered  in  the  appropriate  academic  department. 

3.  Completed  any  test  and/or  other  requirements  set  by  the  appropri- 
ate academic  department. 

4.  Completed  a  minimum  of  90  semester  hours  with  the 
Penns\'lvania-mandated  GPA  (2.8),  including  a  minimum  grade  of 
C  in  all  education  courses. 

5.  Fulfilled  the  requirements  for  formal  admission  to  teacher  educa- 
tion status  described  on  pages  145-146. 

Minor  in  Professional  Education  18  semester  hours 

Any  student  who  is  not  a  major  in  a  teacher  education  program  and  is 
in  good  academic  standing  (minimum  cumulative  GPA  ot  2.00)  may 
enroll  in  the  program. 
Required  Courses: 

EDF  100,  EDM  300,  EDP  250,  and  diree  elective  courses  under 
departmental  adwsement 
Students  must  earn  a  minimum  grade  of  "C"  in  all  minor  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
FOUNDATIONS 

S)-mbol:  EDF 

100  School  and  Sodetj*  (3)  An  introduction  to  the 
nature,  tiinction.  scope,  organization,  administration, 
and  support  of  the  public  school  in  ,'\merican  society-. 
350  The  Professional  and  Student  Personnel 
Ser\ices  (3)  .\n  introduction  to  nonadjunctive  ser- 
vices in  education.  PREREQ:  EDP  250. 
360  The  Learner  in  Nonschool  Settings  (3) 
Emphasis  in  the  course  \siil  be  placed  on  intra- 
and  Interpersonal  development,  facilitative  growth 
and  adjustment,  and  dv-sftmcrion  as  they  may 
impact  the  nonschool  educator  or  trainer. 
364  Systems-Based  Educational  Services  (3) 
This  course  introduces  the  student  to  general  sys- 
tems (social)  theon',  focusing  on  the  elements, 
dvTiamics,  and  operations  of  a  sv'stem  that  must  be 
considered  in  developing  educational  activities  and 
programs  for  that  s\'stem.  The  student  will  learn 
strategies  of  systems  analii'sis  and  inten'ention 
through  the  investigation  ot  such  topics  as  needs 
assessment,  objective-based  programming,  organi- 
zational development,  and  program  evaluation. 
412  Internship  in  Nonschool  Settings  (3)  The 
internship  experience  is  designed  tor  upper-level 


education  students  who  are  interested  in  using  and 
transferring  e.\isting  discipline  and  pedagogical 
skills  in  nonschool  settings.  A  regularly  scheduled 
practicum  will  he  held  tor  all  internships. 
♦  498  Workshop  in  Educational  Foundations  (3) 

EDUCATIONAL  TECHNOLOGY 

S>-mbol:  EDM 

300  Introduction  to  Educational  Technology 
Integration  (3)  An  overview  of  the  integration  of 
technology'  in  teaching  and  learning  with  a  focus 
on  computer  applications. 

EDUCATIONAL  PS\  CHOLOGY 

Symbol:  EDP 

249  Adolescent  De^-elopment  (3)  This  course 
focuses  on  the  emotional,  social,  intellectual,  moral, 
phj'sical,  and  self-concept  factors  shaping  human 
behavior  with  emphasis  on  adolescent  behavior. 

250  Educational  Psychologj-  (3)  A  smdy  of  learn- 
ing in  relation  to  the  physical,  social,  emotional, 
and  intellectual  aspects  of  personahtv'. 

351  Evaluation  and  Measurement  (3)  A  study  of 
constructing  testing  materials  and  procedures  with 
emphasis  on  interpretation  and  application  to  the 
assessment  of  classroom  learning.  PREREQ^  EDP 
250. 


SECONDARY  EDUCATION 

S\-mbol:  EDS 

306  Principles  of  Teaching  and  Field  Experience 
in  Secondare  Education  (3)  Methods  and  strate- 
gies of  teaching  in  secondarv'  schools  will  be  the 
core  of  the  course.  Implications  of  classroom  man- 
agement, learning,  and  other  related  problems  will 
be  discussed.  Students  will  observe  in  a  classroom 
for  nine  weeks.  PREREQ^  EDF  100  and  permis- 
sion of  department  chairperson. 
♦  410  Independent  Study  (1-3)  Special  topics  or 
projects  initiated  bv  the  students  that  will  enable 
them  to  do  extensive  and  intensive  study  in  an  area 
of  secondari-  education.  PREREQl  Permission  of 
department  chairperson. 

411-412  Student  Teaching  (6)  (6)  Observation 
and  participation  in  teaching  and  all  other  activities 
related  to  the  teacher's  work  in  the  area  of  the  stu- 
dent's specialization.  PREREQl  Formal  admission 
and  90  semester  hours  including  all  professional 
education  courses.  Students  must  have  at  least  a  2.8 
cumulative  average  and  at  least  a  grade  of  C  (2.0) 
in  all  secondarv-  education  and  professional  educa- 
tion courses.  Offered  in  fall  and  spring  semesters. 


♦  This  course  mav  be  taken  a^ain  for  credit. 


Environmental  Education  Program 

Thomas  Mastrilli,  Coordinator 

Enwoivmental  Education  Certification  Program 

This  interdisciplinarv  program  enables  teacher-education  majors  to 
secure  certification  to  teach  and  administer  environmental  education 
programs.  The  certification  is  K-12,  and  the  student  must  be  eru-oUed 
in  or  have  completed  a  teacher-certification  program  in  an  area  other 
than  envirorunental  education  and  have  achieved  a  2.80  cumulative 
GPA  to  enter  the  program.  The  curriculum  is  a  mixture  ot  existing 
courses  from  the  physical,  social,  and  behavioral  sciences  as  well  as 
courses  specifically  designed  for  the  envirorunental  educator.  Students 


are  required  to  complete  all  of  the  cognate  requirements  in  section  1 
below  (three  semester  hours  more  than  already  required  by  general  edu- 
cation and  teacher  education  program  requirements)  and  all  of  the  core 
courses  in  section  2  below.  Smdents  wishing  to  explore  this  program 
should  consult  with  the  coordinator  of  envirorunental  education. 

Certification  Program  45-55  semester  hours 

1.   General  Education  Cognates  21-31  semester  hours 

BIO  100  or  110;  CHE  100  or  102,  or 
CHE  103-104/CRL  103-104;  ESS  101, 


Psychology 


College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


GEO  102,  and  9  semester  hours 
in  the  behavioral  and  social  sciences 
2.   Environmental  Core  Courses 

BIO  172  or  270,  EDO  300,  EDO  450, 


16  semester  hours 


IND  110  or  SCE  320,  and  BIO  102  or 
ENV  102  or  ESS  102 
3.   Recommended  Electives 

EDO  420,  EDO  498,  and  ESS  480 


8  semester  hours 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
ENVIRONMENTAL  EDUCATION 

Symbol:  EDO 

300  Environmental  History,  Theory,  and  Practice 

(3)  This  course  is  intended  as  an  overview  and  intro- 
duction to  the  field  of  environmental  education. 
Historical  antecedents,  including  nature  education, 
outdoor  education,  and  conservation  education,  as 
well  as  philosophies  and  methodologies  appropriate 
for  a  basic  understanding  of  environmental  educa- 
tion, will  be  analysed,  with  emphasis  on  compliance 
with  curriculum  regulations  in  Pennsylvania.  Sources 
of  support  for  environmental  education  in  the  form 


of  professional  organizations,  resources,  and  funding 
mechanisms  will  be  identified. 
420  Organization  and  Administration  of  Out- 
door Education  (3)  Basic  concepts  of  outdoor 
education,  the  role  of  outdoor  education  in  the 
school  program,  and  the  initiation  and  administra- 
tion of  outdoor  education. 

450  Environmental  Education  Design,  Delivery, 
and  Field  Experience  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to 
facilitate  the  infusion  of  environmental  educarion 
into  the  traditional  classroom  and  prepare  teachers 
to  use  a  variety  of  settings  for  environmental  educa- 
tion teaching  opportunities.  Emphasis  will  be  phced 


on  teaching  techniques  closely  identified  vrith  cur- 
riculum development  goals  and  objectives  for  envi- 
ronmental education  including  the  use  of  case  stud- 
ies, addressing  controversial  issues,  and  strategies  for 
the  development  of  ecological  literacy  and  critical 
thinking  skills.  The  stadent  also  will  have  a  field 
placement  that  will  provide  an  opportunity  to  put 
environmental  education  theory  into  practice. 
498  Workshop  in  Environmental  Education  (3) 
Generallv  these  will  be  one-week  workshops  to 
provide  environmental  educators  with  training 
and/or  skills  in  specific  programs,  topics,  or  activi- 
ties related  to  environmental  education. 


Department  of  Psychology 

Peoples  Building 

610-436-2945 

Phillip  Duncan,  Chairperson 

Stefani  Yorges,  Assistant  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Bloom,  Bonifazi,  Duncan,  Kumar,  Mahlstedt, 

J.  McConatha,  Moore,  Morse,  PoUak,  J.  Porter,  L.  Porter, 

M.  Renner,  Treadwell 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Kerr,  C.  Renner,  Yorges 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Azorlosa,  Cans,  Johnson, 

Rieser-Danner,  Wren 
The  B.A.  in  PSYCHOLOGY  prepares  students  to  understand  vari- 
ables, such  as  heredity,  learning,  and  the  environment,  which  shape  and 
change  behavior.  Careers  are  possible  in  cUnics,  guidance  centers,  indus- 
try, hospitals,  schools,  and  government.  Students  should  consult  their 
advisers  concerning  recommended  preparations  for  specific  career  goals. 
This  program  also  will  prepare  the  smdent  for  postgraduate  smdy. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS— PSYCHOLOGY 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 
MAT  103  or  higher  MAT  course  is  required. 

BIO  100  or  110  or  259  is  recommended, 
COM  201,  208,  212,  or  216;  WRT  121,  204, 
or  220 

2.  Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirement,         0-15  semester  hours 
see  pages  39-40 

3.  Department  Requirements  44-45  semester  hours 
A.  Required  Psychology  Courses  (32-33  semester  hours) 

PSY  100,  245,  246,  and  400.  Smdents  must 
choose  three  courses  from  Group  I,  three 
courses  from  Group  II,  and  one  course 


from  Group  III.  Smdents  are  strongly 
encouraged  to  take  PSY  245  as  early  as  pos- 
sible, but  MUST  enroll  in  it  before  taking 
more  than  21  hours  in  psychology  courses. 
Group  I  (choose  three  courses) 

PSY  254,  257,  365,  375,  or  either  382 
or  384  (but  not  both) 
Group  II  (choose  three  courses) 

PSY  255,  335,  350,  363,  464,  or  475 
Group  III  (choose  one  course) 

PSY  266,  336,  366,  386,  410,  441,  466,  or  470 
B.  Psycholog)'  Electives  (12  semester  hours) 
Four  additional  courses,  selected  from 
among  any  of  the  departmental  offerings. 
4.   Student  Electives  to  complete  120  semester  hours 

These  electives  are  in  addition  to  the  nine 
semester  hours  of  electives  listed  under  the 
general  education  requirements  and  may  be 
selected  from  among  any  ot  the  University's 
course  offerings. 

Minor  in  Psychology  18  semester  hours 

The  minor  in  psychology  is  designed  for  students  of  any  major  and  is 
tailored  to  the  specific  educational  goals  of  each  student.  After  taking 
PSY  100,  the  student  will  choose  15  additional  hours  of  PSY  courses. 

Minimum  Grade  Requirement 

Beginning  in  the  fall  of  1996  all  newly  declared  psychology  majors 
and  minors  must  earn  a  grade  ot  C-  or  better  in  PSY  100  and  all 
other  PSY  courses  that  fulfill  departmental  requirements.  PSY  courses 
used  as  general  education  free  electives  are  exempt  firom  this  policy. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
PSYCHOLOGY 

Symbol:  PSY 

100  Introduction  to  Psychology  (3)  Introduction 
to  the  scientific  study  of  behavior.  The  multiple 
bases  of  human  behavior  with  emphasis  on  the 
learning  process.  Basic  concepts,  principles,  and 
methodology'.  Smdents  may  be  required  to  become 
familiar  with  an  ongoing  research  study  in  psy- 
chology as  an  out-of-class  assignment. 


210  Developmental  Psychology:  Lifespan  (3)  A 

survey  of  research  findings  and  theoretical  issues 
related  to  developmental  processes  from  the  prena- 
tal phase  to  senescence.  PREREQi  PSY  100. 
Majors  are  advised  to  take  PSY  382  or  PSY  384 
rather  than  PSY  210. 

245  Statistics  for  the  Behavioral  Sciences  (3) 
Descriptive  and  inferential  statistical  concepts  and 
techniques  and  their  application  to  the  collection, 
analysis,  and  interpretation  of  behavioral  data. 


Computer-assisted  computation  procedures  will  be 
employed.  PREREQi  MAT  103  or  higher. 
246  Research  Methods  in  Psychology  (3)  Critical 
examination  of  research  methods  in  psychology, 
including  experimental  and  quasi-experimental 
designs,  correlational  methods,  and  survey  meth- 
ods. Smdents  will  receive  practical  experience  in 
the  design,  implementation,  analvsis.  and  interpre- 
tation of  data,  and  in  preparation  ot  written 
reports  for  research  projects.  PREREQi  PSY  245. 


School  ot  Business  and  Public  Attairs 


Social  Work 


254  Social  Psychology  (3)  The  study  ot  the  wa\-s 
in  which  the  indi\'idual  is  affected  bv  the  actual, 
imagined,  or  implied  presence  of  others.  PRE- 
REQ:  PSY  100. 

255  Introduction  to  Biological  Psychology  (3) 
Basic  concepts  concerning  the  reciprocal  relation- 
ship between  behaN^or  and  biolog)'  will  be  intro- 
duced. PREREQi  PSY  100. 

257  TTieories  of  Personality  (3)  A  course  in  per- 
sonalit\'  that  examines  the  theories  and  writings  of 
Freud.  Jung,  Adler,  Fromm,  Erikson,  Rogers,  and 
other  major  personalit\-  theorists.  PREREQ;  PSY 
100. 

265  Industrial/Organizational  Psychology  (3)  A 
basic  course  for  business  majors  and  others  inter- 
ested in  the  psychology'  of  the  workplace. 
Emphasis  on  the  theoretical  developments  in  psy- 
cholog^'  as  these  relate  to  the  studv  ot  people  in 
organizations  and  industn-.  PREREQ;  PSY  100. 

266  Biological  Psychology  Laboratory  (2) 
Laboratorv'  exercises  and  experiments  in  basic  bio- 
logical psy'cholog)'.  PREREQ;  PS'i'  100,  245,  246, 
and  concurrent  or  preWous  enrollment  in  PSY  255. 
325  Psychological  Testing  and  Measurement  (3) 
Principles  ot  psychological  measurement  including 
standardization,  scale  transformation,  reUabilit}', 
validity',  and  item  anal^^is.  Use  of  tests  for  the 
solution  of  problems  in  industrial,  clinical,  and 
educational  settings.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

327  Behavior  Modification  (3)  A  sun'ey  of  the 
principles  and  practices  employed  in  inducing 
behaWoral  changes  in  clinic,  institution,  agency, 
and  school  settings.  PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

335  Animal  Behavior  (3)  The  evolution  and 
adaptiveness  of  beha\ior.  Emphasis  on  physiologi- 
cal, genetic,  and  learning  processes  underlnng  ani- 
mal behanor.  PRERECl  PSY  100,  or  BIO  100  or 
110,  or  permission  ot  instructor. 

336  Animal  Behavior  Laboratory  (2)  Laborator)' 
exercises  and  experiments  in  the  principles  of  ani- 
mal behavior  and  comparative  psychology.  PRE- 
REQ^ Concurrent  enrollment  in  (or  previous  com- 
pletion of)  PSY  335. 

350  Motivation  (3)  A  stud)'  ot  drives,  motives, 
and  emotions  as  determinants  of  behavior. 
Phv'siological  and  social  aspects  of  motivation  will 
be  explored  with  some  attention  given  to  patho- 
logical factors.  PREREQ:  PS^l'  100. 
362  Histoiy  and  Systems  of  Psychology  (3)  An 
integrated  overview  of  the  historv'  of  psychology  as 


well  as  the  sv'stems,  theories,  and  tlmdamental  issues 
with  which  psvchologists  have  concerned  themselves 
in  the  past,  recent,  and  current  stages  ot  the  science. 
PREREQiPSY  100;  PHI  101  recommended. 
363  Psychology  of  Learning  (3)  Basic  laws  and 
theories  of  learning.  PREREQ.  PSY  100. 

365  Psychology  of  Women  (3)  A  studv  of  the 
behavior  and  experience  ot  women.  Biological, 
cultural,  interpersonal,  and  intrapersonal  determi- 
nants of  women's  acrions,  thoughts,  and  feeUngs 
will  be  explored.  PREREQi  PSY  100. 

366  Learning  Laboratory  (2)  Laboratory  e-xercises 
and  experiments  in  the  principles  of  Pavlovian  and 
instrumental  conditioning.  PREREQ^  Successful 
completion  or  concurrent  enrollment  in  PSY  363. 
375  Abnormal  Psychology  (3)  An  in-depth  study 
of  psychological/psychiatric  disorders,  including 
diagnosis,  epidemiology,  etiology,  and  treatment. 
PREREQ:  PSY  100. 

382  Developmental  Psychologv- of  Infancy,  Child- 
hood and  Adolescence  (3)  Study  ot  the  normal 
child  from  conception  to  puberty.  Emphasis  on  cur- 
rent theoretical  issues  involved  in  the  effects  of  early 
cx-perience  and  environment.  PREREQ;  PS\'  100. 
384  Developmental  Psychologj'  of  Adulthood 
and  Aging  (3)  Study  ot  psychological  development 
during  the  mature  vears  up  to  and  including  death 
and  dving.  PREREQ;  PSY  100. 
390  Principles  of  Counseling  and  Psychotherapy 
(3)  A  review  of  theoretical  assumptions  underpin- 
ning various  approaches  to  counseUng  and  psy- 
chotherapv  with  particular  reference  to  compara- 
tive outcome  data.  PREREQ:  PSY  257  or  375. 
400  Senior  Seminar  in  Psychology  (3)  In-depth 
study  of  advanced  topics  in  psychologv'.  Students 
will  prepare  and  present  written  and  oral  presenta- 
tions describing  and  analyzing  current  issues  in 
psychology.  Required  of  all  psychologv'  majors. 
♦  410  Research  in  Psychologv'  (1-3)  Special 
research  projects,  reports,  and  readings  in  psychol- 
ogv'. PREREQ;  Permission  of  department  chair- 
person. 

413  Psychodrama  I  (3)  This  class  is  designed  as 
an  introducton'  course,  integrating  theory  and 
practice  ot  psychodrama  as  a  psychotherapeutic 
modality.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  understanding 
the  basic  psychodramatic  and  sociometric  tech- 
niques from  a  theoretical  perspective  with  empha- 
sis placed  on  how  to  use  these  basic  techniques  in 


appUed  situations.  PREREQ;  PSY  100  and  per- 
mission of  instructor. 

430  Human  Sexual  Behavior  (3)  ^An  intensive 
studv  of  those  variables  under  which  human  sex-ual 
behavior  functions.  Research  from  sociological  and 
medical  studies  is  integrated  with  psychological 
knowledge.  PREREQ;  PSY  100. 

441  Field  Experience  in  Psychology'  I  (3)  A 
work-study  program  in  an  educational,  business, 
or  mental  health  facility  under  joint  supervision  of 
the  instructor  and  the  staff  psychologist  of  the 
field  institution.  Permission  of  instructor  required. 

442  Field  E.xperience  in  Psychology  II  (3) 
Continuation  of  PSY  441. 

443  Psychology'  of  Group  Processes  (3)  An 
exploration  of  the  draamics  of  interpersonal 
behavior  in  small  groups.  Theory  applied  to  prac- 
tice in  class.  PRERECi;  PSY  100;  permission  of 
instructor  recommended. 

445  Organizational  Development  (3)  The  study 
of  human  behavior  in  task  group  and  organization- 
al contexts.  PREREQ;  PSS'  265  recommended. 
447  Interpersonal  Relationships  (3)  A  study  of 
processes  and  factors  in  establishing,  maintaining, 
and  terminating  relationships  via  the  use  of  group 
methods.  PREREQ;  PSY  100  and  permission  of 
instructor. 

464  Advanced  Biological  Psychology  (3) 
Anatomical,  endocrinological,  and  phv'siological 
processes  underlving  behavior,  including  motiva- 
tion, emotion,  learning,  and  memon,'.  Special  atten- 
tion is  given  to  the  biological  bases  and  treatments 
of  mental  illness.  PREREQ;  PSY  100  and  255. 
470  Sensory  and  Perceptual  Processes  (3)  A 
study  ot  how  we  process  senson-  information  and 
perceive  our  environments.  PREREQ;  PS^'  100. 
475  Cognitive  Psychology  (3)  Basic  research  and 
application  in  memon'  and  information  process- 
ing. PREREQ;  PS\'  100;  PSY  363  recommended. 
481  Eating  Disorders  (3)  .'\n  in-depth  study  of 
anore-xia  nen'osa,  bulimia  nervosa,  and  other  variants 
of  disordered  eating.  PREREQ;  PSY  257  or  375. 
♦  490  Topical  Seminar  in  Psychologv'  (1-3) 
Special  topics  in  psychologv'  not  offered  under  exist- 
ing, regularly  offered  courses.  PREREQ;  Consent 
of  instructor  or  chairperson  recommended. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  with  the  approval 
of  the  Department  of  Psychology  chairperson. 


Department  of  Social  Work 

114  Rosedale  Avenue 

610-436-2527 

Dark  Spence  Coffev,  Chairperson 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  DeHope,  JovTier,  Voss 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Coffey,  Hicks,  Hodgins 

The  social  work  program  is  accredited  on  the  baccalaureate  level  as  a 

professional  degree  in  social  work  b)'  the  Council  on  Social  Work 

Education. 

This  mission  of  the  Department  of  Social  Work  at  West  Chester 

Universit}'  is  to  develop  the  knowledge,  values,  and  skills  in  students 

to  enable  them  to  fiinction  effectiveh'  as  beginning  generalist  social 

workers.  Students  develop  knowledge  of  the  social  welfare  needs  of  a 

complex  urban  and  rural  environment.  Students  learn  to  use  critical 

thinking  skills  in  resolving  ethical  dilemmas  and  to  evaluate  their 


skills  to  guide  life-long  learning.  Students  are  also  prepared  for  gradu- 
ate social  work  education.  The  student  applies  theory  to  practice  in 
varied  field  experiences  in  the  junior  and  senior  years. 
The  B.S.W.  program  has  two  phases.  The  first  phase  is  the  pre-social 
work  education  track  for  declared  undergraduate  social  work  majors. 
Students  take  pre-social  work  along  with  their  general  education 
requirements  during  the  first  two  vears.  They  then  apply  tor  candidacy 
for  the  second  phase,  which  is  the  professional  social  work  track  in 
which  course  work  is  completed  during  the  junior  and  senior  years. 
During  the  junior  and  senior  years  students  combine  academic  course 
work  and  field  practice.  The  bachelor  ot  social  work  is  conferred  on 
undergraduates  who  complete  all  the  academic  requirements  ot  the 
program  and  of  West  Chester  Universit)'.  The  B.S.W.  is  recognized 
as  the  first  professional  level  of  social  work  practice. 
Student-learning  objectives  of  the  B.S.W.  program  are  as  follows: 


Social  Work 


School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 


1.  Understand  the  value  base  of  the  profession  and  its  ethical  stan- 
dards and  principles,  and  practice  accordingly. 

2.  Understand  the  forms  and  mechanisms  ot  oppression  and  discrim- 
ination, and  apply  strategies  of  advocacy  and  social  change  that 
advance  social  and  economic  justice. 

3.  Apply  the  knowledge  and  skills  of  generalist  social  work  practice 
with  systems  ot  all  sizes. 

4.  Analyze,  formulate,  and  influence  social  policies. 

5.  Evaluate  research  studies,  apply  research  findings  to  practice,  and 
evaluate  their  own  practice  interventions. 

6.  Use  communication  skills  differendy  across  cUent  populations,  col- 
leagues, and  communities. 

All  students  are  expected  to  demonstrate  attitudes  and  behavior  con- 
sistent with  the  values  and  ethics  of  professional  social  work  and  the 
National  Association  of  Social  Work  (NASW)  Social  Work  Code  of 
Ethics. 

Policy  for  Social  Work  Majors 

Majors  are  required  to  meet  with  their  social  work  adviser  to  plan  an 
integrative  course  of  study,  to  select  courses  prior  to  scheduling,  to 
discuss  career  opportunities,  and  to  keep  abreast  ot  departmental 
activities.  Handbooks  are  provided  to  help  students  be  aware  ot 
requirements  and  procedures  in  the  department.  Social  work  majors 
should  be  aware  of  social  work  prerequisite  courses  and  must  see 
their  adviser  before  registering  for  classes. 

Academic  Promotion  Policy 

Social  work  students  who  have  a  grade  of  D,  F,  or  NG  (no  grade)  in 
required  courses  must  repeat  these  courses  and  achieve  a  satisfactory 
grade  before  entering  the  junior  field  placement.  Not  achieving  at 
least  a  C-  in  social  work  required  courses  is  considered  grounds  for 
dismissal  trom  the  social  work  program. 

Department- Related  Activities 

The  Social  Work  Club  is  a  student  organization  that  involves  depart- 
ment facult)'  and  resources.  The  activities  of  this  organization  are 
open  to  all  students.  The  honor  society.  Phi  ^Alpha,  is  sponsored  by 
the  Department  of  Social  Work  and  is  the  Chi  Gamma  Chapter  of 
the  National  Social  Work  Honor  Society.  EligibiUtj'  requires  an  over- 
all GPA  of  3.0  and  3.5  in  required  social  work  courses.  For  more 
information,  see  the  Student  Activities  and  Service  Organization  sec- 
tions of  the  catalog. 

Department  Field  Placements  and  Volunteer  Ejcperiences 

Social  work  students  do  volunteer  experience  in  the  second  semester  of 
their  first  year.  During  the  second  semester  of  the  junior  year  and  in 
both  semesters  of  the  senior  year,  students  will  be  placed  in  various  social 
work  agencies  (see  partial  listing  of  social  work  field  placements). 
Students  must  have  completed  SWO  200,  220,  225,  300,  320,  332, 
and  350  with  a  cumulative  average  of  3.0  before  they  register  to  take 
the  junior  field  placement  in  the  spring  semester. 
INSURANCE.  Students  are  also  required  to  carry  liability  insurance 
coverage  in  the  amount  of  $1,000,000/3,000,000  during  the  second 
semester  of  their  junior  and  the  entire  senior  year  at  a  yearly  cost  of 
approximately  $35.  Students  who  have  cars  must  submit  a  copy  of  their 
insurance  to  the  director  of  field  placement.  Students  may  join  NASW 
and  become  a  member  of  a  national  social  work  organization  and 
receive  habilit)'  insurance  at  a  reduced  rate.  Students  should  apply  for 
child  abuse  clearance  and  state  pohce  background  check  in  the  fall 
semester  of  their  junior  year  for  various  field  placement  considerations. 

Social  Work  Field  Placements 

Below  is  a  sampling  of  settings  where  students  have  been  placed  to 

fultill  their  field  experience  requirements: 

Chester  County  Children,  Youth,  and  Families 

Delaware  County  Children  and  Youth 

West  Chester  Area  School  District 

Coatesville  Area  School  District 

Philadelphia  School  District 

University  of  Pennsylvania  Health  Systems 

National  Hospital  for  Kids  in  Crisis 


Chester  County  Juvenile  Probation 

Delaware  County  Adult  Probation  and  Parole 

Philadelphia  Prison  System 

Women's  Law  Project 

Ferris  School  of  Delaware 

First  Step  of  Chester  Count)' 

Belmont  Center  for  Comprehensive  Treatment 

Terry  Psychiatric  Center  of  Delaware 

Libertae 

Marion  Adoptions 

St.  Gabriel's  Hall 

Intercultural  Family  Services 

Family  Services  of  Chester  County 

Family  Services  of  Montgomery  County 

Family  Services  ot  Lancaster  County 

Safe  Harbor  of  West  Chester 

Gateway  Counseling 

Eldernet 

Women's  Alternative  Center 

Vitas  Hospice 

Devereaux  Foundation 

Chester  County'  Office  of  Aging 

Montgomery  County  Aging  and  Adult  Services 

Home  of  the  Sparrow 

Crosslands 

Sunrise  Assisted  Living 

Veterans  Administration  of  CoatesviUe 

Admission  Requirements 

Applicants  must  meet  University  requirements  for  admission.  After 
successfiilly  completing  the  first  two  years  of  pre-social  work  course 
requirements,  students  may  apply  for  candidacy  for  the  professional 
social  work  track. 

For  candidacy  students  must  have  completed  requirements  for  the  first 
two  years  of  general  education,  Uberal  arts  cognates,  and  pre-social 
work  courses  with  the  necessary  minimum  cumulative  grade  point 
averages  specified  below. 

In  comphance  with  the  Council  on  Social  Work  Education,  the 
national  accrediting  body  for  social  work,  the  program  only  accepts 
upper-division  social  work  courses  from  accredited  programs  that  cor- 
respond with  West  Chester  University  social  work  program  sequenc- 
ing. No  social  work  credits  are  granted  for  life  and  work  experience. 
BACHELOR  OF  ARTS— SOCIAL  WORK 

I.  Required  Courses  for  the  First  Two  Years 

A.  General  Education  Courses  48  semester  hours 
(Requires  a  GPA  of  2.0) 

WRT  120  and  121  (6) 

LIT  165  (3) 

HIS  101  or  102  or  150  (3) 

Foreign  Language/Culture  Requirements  (6) 

B.  Required  Liberal  Arts  (Cognate)  Foundation   30  semester  hours 
(Requires  a  GPA  of  2.5) 

ANT  102  (3);  BIO  100  (3);  GEO  101  or  103  (3); 
HIS  150  or  101,  or  102  (3);  MAT  103  or  121  (3); 
PHI  180  (3);  PSC  101  (3);  PSY  100  (3); 
SOC  200  or  240  (3) 

C.  Pre-Social  Work  Courses  12  semester  hours 
(Requires  a  GPA  of  3.0) 

SWO  200  (3),  SWO  220  (3),  SWO  225  (3) 
SWO  300  (3) 

II.  Junior-  and  Senior-Level  Students 

A.  Continued  matriculation  at  the  professional  level  of  the  bac- 
calaureate program  requires  that  all  students: 

1.  Maintain  an  overall  GPA  of  2.0  or  better  in  the  general  edu- 

cation requirements. 

2.  Maintain  an  average  of  2.5  GPA  in  the  required  additional 

liberal  arts  cognate  foundation  courses  (CSC  110  and  nine 
hours  of  advised  electives) 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


Sports  Medicine 


3.  Adhere  to  field  practice  requirements  in  accordance  with  the 

Undergraduate  Social  Work  Field  Manual. 

4.  Comply  with  the  NASW  Code  of  Ethics. 

B.  Professional  Social  Work  Courses  45  semester  hours 

(Requires  a  GPA  of  3.0) 
SWO  320,  321,  332,  350,  351,  375,  431, 
432,  495,  496  (3  each) 
SWO  375,  450  and  451  (6  each) 

Transfer  Students 

Students  from  other  colleges  and  universities  who  desire  to  transfer  to 
the  West  Chester  University  baccalaureate  social  work  program 
should  apply  through  the  University's  Office  of  Admissions,  which 
will  coordinate  the  credit  evaluations  of  social  work  courses  with  the 
baccalaureate  social  work  program  director.  Transfer  students  are 
required  to  make  appUcation  for  candidacy. 

A  transfer  credit  analysis,  listing  all  transfer  credits  accepted  by  the 
University,  will  be  sent  to  the  Department  of  Social  Work  and  also 


directly  to  the  student.  The  B.S.W.  program  director  may  accept 
social  work  transfer  credits  from  CSWE-accredited  undergraduate 
social  work  programs. 

The  field  practicum  and  seminar  are  concurrent  courses  in  the  WCU 
undergraduate  social  work  program;  therefore,  they  are  not  transfer- 
able. The  poUcies  and  requirements  for  the  field  practice  are  expUcat- 
ed  in  the  Baccalaureate  Program  Field  Instruction  Manual.  All  other 
social  work  courses  not  meeting  the  requirements  of  the  program  may 
be  accepted  as  SWO  199  course  credit  hours. 

Internal  Transfer  Students 

Internal  transfer  students  meet  the  same  standards  for  the  program  as 
other  students  do. 

NOTE:  The  Department  of  Social  Work  offers  pre-social  work 
courses  in  the  summer  to  assist  transfer  students  to  begin  as  a  junior 
when  they  enter  West  Chester  University  in  the  fall.  It  is  crucial  that 
all  transfer  students  be  advised  by  the  undergraduate  program  chair 
before  the  first  session  of  summer. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
SOCIAL  WORK 

Symbol:  SWO 

PRIMARILY  FOR  FRESHMEN  AND 
SOPHOMORES 

200  Introduction  to  Social  Work  (3)  Current 
social  problems  and  the  influence  ot  societal  values 
on  their  definition  and  the  structures  devised  to 
meet  them.  Two  hours  per  week  of  volunteer 
experience  in  a  social  agency  is  required. 
220  Introduction  to  Generalist  Practice  (3) 
Students  are  provided  background  knowledge  and 
skUls  to  fimction  professionally  in  society.  The  course 
adopts  the  psychological  perspective  that  links  self- 
concept  and  its  development  with  group  behavior, 
the  fimction  of  social  reality,  and  social  role. 
222  Human  Service  Professionals  and  the  Law 
(3)  A  study  of  legislation  and  case  law  affecting 
social  welfare  programs  for  the  development  of  an 
understanding  of  legal  reasoning  and  key  areas  of 
legal  knowledge. 

I  #  225  Race  Relations  (3)  Emphasis  is  placed  on 
racial  awareness  by  examining  racial,  ethnic,  and 
cultural  differences  of  minority  groups  in  the 
United  States. 

BjV.  COURSES  FOR  SOCLVL  WORK 
MAJORS  AND  OTHER  UPPERCLASS 
STUDENTS 

300  Family  Systems  I  (3)  Introduction  to  selected 
items  in  systems  analysis,  emphasizing  application 
to  understanding  family  systems  and  the  organiza- 
tional framework  of  human  behavior. 
320  Generalist  Social  Work  Practice  I  (3)  The 
theory  and  application  of  the  generalist  model  and 


the  problem-solving  method  to  direct  practice 
with  individuals  and  families. 
321  Generalist  Social  Work  Practice  II  (3)  A 
continuation  of  the  application  of  the  generalist 
model  and  problem-solving  method  to  direct  prac- 
tice with  groups,  organizations,  and  communities. 
332  Social  Welfare  Policies  and  Services  (3)  The 
history  of  social  welfare  in  the  United  States,  and 
an  overview  of  major  fields  of  social  work  practice 
wdth  emphasis  on  legislation  and  policy  formula- 
tion. 

350  Human  Behavior  in  Social  Environment  I 
(3)  Examination  of  life  stages  of  early  childhood 
through  adolescence. 

351  Human  Behavior  in  Social  Environment  II 
(3)  Continuation  of  SWO  350.  Focus  on  middle 
adulthood  to  aging. 

421  Mental  Health  and  Social  Work  Practice  (3) 
The  scope  of  mental  health  ser\iccs  and  specific 
practice  skills  for  social  work  with  mentally  disturbed 
or  retarded  clients  only. 

423  Special  Skills  in  Child  Protective  Services 
(3)  Emphasis  is  placed  on  understanding  chUd 
abuse  and  neglect,  assessment  of  persons  in  crises, 
and  treatment  for  the  abused  and  neglected  child 
in  today's  society. 

431  Methods  of  Social  Inquiry  (3)  Fundamentals 
of  problem  identification,  research  design,  sampling, 
observation,  data  collection  and  reduction,  and  non- 
statistical  analysis. 

432  Advanced  Social  Welfare  Policies  and 
Services  (3)  A  theoretical  framework  for  the 
analysis,  formulation,  implementation,  and  change 


of  social  policy,  governmental  guidelines,  and 
social  legislation. 

COURSES  FOR  SOCIAL  WORK 
MAJORS  ONLY 

375  Field  Placement  (6)  Junior-year  field  experi- 
ence for  the  social  work  major. 
395  Junior  Seminar  (3)  A  practice  seminar 
designed  to  relate  to  the  student's  field  placement. 

♦  410  Independent  Studies  in  Social  Work  (1-3) 
Special  research  projects  or  practices  in  social 
work.  Juniors  and  seniors  only.  PREREQ^ 
Permission  ot  department  chairperson. 

♦  450-451  Field  Experience  I-II  (6)  (6)  Super- 
vised work  experience  in  a  social  agency.  Seniors 
only. 

490  Seminar  in  Social  Work  (3)  In-depth  topics 
in  social  work  offered  to  complement  the  under- 
graduate program's  field  practicum  and  not  offered 
in  required  courses. 

♦  495  Senior  Seminar  in  Social  Work  (3) 
Integration  of  field  and  classroom  experiences  in 
discussing  the  application  of  the  generalist  model 
to  the  helping  process. 

496  Social  Work  Process  Seminar  (3)  Seminar 
on  the  social  work  process  designed  to  relate  to  the 
second  semester  field  experience. 


I   Diverse  communities  course 

#  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Department  of  Sports  Medicine 

216  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences  Center 

610-436-3293 

Carolyn  C.Jimenez,  Chairperson 

Neil  Curtis,  Coordinator  of  Athletic  Training  Education 

Sandra  Fowkes  Godek,  Coordinator  of  Sports  Medicine  Services 

PROFESSOR:  Godek 

ASSOCIATE  PROFESSORS:  Curtis,  Fowkes-Godek 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Jimenez,  Taylor 


INSTRUCTOR:  Norris 

ADJUNCT  PROFESSOR:  Bartolozzi,  Fawcett 

The  Department  of  Sports  Medicine  offers  the  B.S.  in  ATHLETIC 

TRAINING  which  prepares  smdents  to  achieve  certification  from  the 

National  Athletic  Trainers  Association  Board  of  Certification,  Inc. 

(NATABOC).  Students  completing  this  major  also  are  eligible  for 

entry-level  athletic  training  positions,  as  well  as  graduate  study  in  such 

fields  as  physical  therapy,  exercise  physiology,  biomechanics,  and 

sports  medicine. 


Sports  Medicine 


School  ot  Health  Sciences 


Applicants  should  have  a  combined  SAT  score  of  1070  and  rank  in 
the  top  20  percent  of  their  high  school  class.  Qualified  students  are 
required  to  participate  in  an  interview  with  department  faculty  prior 
to  admission. 

Pre-Physical  Therapy 

A  student  may  follow  several  academic  paths  to  prepare  for  a  profes- 
sional physical  therapy  program.  There  is  no  official  pre-physical  ther- 
apy curriculum  at  West  Chester  University.  Students  who  are  interest- 
ed in  preparing  for  a  professional  physical  therapy  school  may  meet 
the  prerequisites  either  through  the  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  by 
enrolling  in  the  Department  of  Biology,  or  through  the  School  of 
Health  Sciences  by  enrolling  in  the  Department  of  Sports  Medicine. 
Students  also  may  elect  to  take  their  undergraduate  degree  in  the 
College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  in  the  liberal  studies  science  and  mathe- 
matics track  with  a  biology  minor.  Students  interested  in  pre-physical 
therapy  should  contact  either  Dr.  NeU  Curtis  in  Sports  Medicine  or 
Dr.  Judith  Greenamyer  in  Biology. 

BACHELOR  OF  SCIENCE— ATHLETIC  TRAINING 
(Includes  the  Commission  on  Accreditation  of  AUied  Health 
Education  Programs  [CAAHEP]  accredited  athleric  training  educa- 
tion program) 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 

2.  Athletic  Training  courses  44  semester  hours 
SMD  100,  204,  212,  272,  310,  311,  312,  313, 

315,  316,  414,  417,  418,  454,  and  SML  261,  310,  and  311 

3.  Related  Requirements  29  semester  hours 
BIO  259  and  269;  COM  208;  HEA  100  and  303; 

KIN  352,  361,  and  475;  and  MAT  121. 

4.  Related  Requirements  that  also  satisfy  the  26  semester  hours 
General  Education  Requirements 

BIO  110,  CHE  107,  COM  208,  MAT  121, 

Pm'  100,  and  PSY  100 

Other  courses  in  chemistry,  physics,  mathematics,  and  biology  may 

be  substituted  with  approval  of  program  director. 

5.  Clinical  Experience 

Clinical  experiences  are  provided  in  a  number  of  high  school,  col- 
lege, and  university  settings  under  the  supervision  of  a  certified  ath- 
leric trainer.  Due  to  potential  scheduUng  conflicts,  athletic  training 
students  may  be  excluded  from  playing  varsity  sports  during  their 
four  semesters  of  clinical  experience.  Students  enrolled  in  SMD 
315-316  and  417-418  must  have  current  certification  in  CPR  and 
fu'st  aid,  be  vaccinated  with  hepatitis  B  vaccination  or  sign  a  vaccine 
declination,  and  have  professional  liabUity-  coverage.  Students  must 
supply  their  own  transportation  to  clinical  sites.  Students  in  clinical 
assignments  are  required  to  purchase  and  wear  specified  uniforms. 

6.  Students  must  earn  a  minimum  grade  of  C  in  the  following  courses. 
In  order  to  be  recommended  for  the  NATABOC  Certification 
Exam,  students  must  have  a  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of  2.5  in 
the  following  courses: 

BIO  259,  269;  HEA  303;  KIN  352,  361,  475;  SMD  204,  272,  310, 
311,  312,  313,  315,  316,  414,  417,  418,  454;  SML  261,  310,  311 

Technical  Standards  for  the  B.S.  in  Athletic  Training  Major 

The  B.S.  in  athletic  training  program  at  West  Chester  University  pre- 
pares students  for  careers  as  certified  athletic  trainers  where  they  will 


enter  emplovment  settings  and  render  athletic  training  services  to  indi- 
viduals engaged  in  physical  activity.  The  clinical,  classroom,  and  labora- 
tory experiences  place  specific  demands  on  the  students  enrolled  in  the 
program.  The  technical  standards  developed  for  the  degree  establish  the 
essential  quahties  necessary  for  students  to  achieve  the  knowledge,  skills, 
and  competencies  of  an  entry- level  certified  athletic  trainer  and  meet 
the  expectations  of  the  agency  (Commission  on  Accreditation  of  Allied 
Health  Education  Programs  {CAAHEP})  that  accredits  the  program. 
Students  must  possess  the  abilities  outlined  below  to  be  admitted  into  the 
program.  Students  selected  for  admission  must  verify-  that  they  under- 
stand and  meet  these  technical  standards  with  or  vnthout  a  reasonable 
accommodation.  A  student  with  a  condition  who  may  need  a  reasonable 
accommodation  to  meet  these  standards  will  be  referred  to  the  Office  of 
Services  for  Students  with  Disabilities  (OSSD)  for  an  evaluation  of 
whether  the  condition  is  a  disability  as  defined  by  applicable  laws,  and  a 
determination  of  what  accommodations  are  reasonable.  The  determina- 
tion will  specifically  take  into  consideration  whether  the  requested 
accommodations  might  jeopardize  the  safety  of  the  patient,  and  the  abili- 
ty to  complete  the  classroom,  laboratory,  and  clinical  course  work 
required  for  the  athletic  training  program.  The  OSSD,  with  input  from 
the  Department  of  Sports  Medicine,  will  make  this  determination. 
Whenever  possible,  reasonable  accommodations  will  be  provided  for 
those  individuals  with  disabUiries  to  enable  them  to  meet  these  standards 
and  ensure  that  students  are  not  denied  the  benefits  of,  excluded  from 
participation  in,  or  otherwise  subjected  to  discrimination  in  this  program. 
The  following  are  technical  standards  for  the  B.S.  program,  which  are 
not  inclusive  of  all  expected  abilities: 

1.  Critical  thinking  ability  sufficient  for  clinical  judgment 

2.  Interpersonal  abilities  sufficient  to  interact  with  individuals,  fami- 
lies, and  groups  from  a  variety  of  social,  emotional,  cultural,  and 
intellectual  backgrounds 

3.  Communication  abiUties  sufficient  for  interaction  with  others  in 
verbal  and  written  form 

4.  Physical  abihties  sufficient  to  maneuver  in  small  or  confined  spaces 
and  to  provide  emergency  care 

5.  Gross  and  fine  motor  abilities  sufficient  to  provide  safe  and  effec- 
tive athletic  training  care 

6.  Tactile  dexterity  sufficient  for  physical  assessment 

7.  Visual  ability  sufficient  for  observation  and  assessment  necessary  in 
athletic  training  care 

8.  Auditory  ability  sufficient  to  monitor  and  assess  health  needs 

9.  Ability  to  maintain  composure  and  fiinction  in  highly  stressful  sit- 
uations such  as  those  associated  with  critical  injury  or  iUness 

Facilities 

Offices,  classrooms,  and  laboratories  for  the  Department  of  Sports 
Medicine  are  housed  in  the  Russell  L.  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences 
Center.  Clinical  experience  is  offered  in  two  athletic  training  rooms  on 
campus,  one  located  in  Hollinger  Fieldhouse  and  the  recendy  expanded 
facility  located  in  the  Sturzebecker  Health  Sciences  Center.  The  athlet- 
ic training  rooms  offer  students  the  opportunity  to  work  with  state-of- 
the-art  equipment,  including  numerous  electrical  modalities,  Cybex  iso- 
kinetic dvTiamometers,  and  the  latest  in  proprioreceptive  apparatus.  In 
addition,  the  department  maintains  a  dose  working  relationship  with 
the  Human  Performance  Laboratorv'  of  the  Department  of  Kinesiology. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
SPORTS  MEDICINE 

Course  Symbols:  SMD;  SML  indicates  a  lab 
course.  The  first  number  in  parentheses  is 
the  number  of  class  hours  per  week;  the  sec- 
ond number  indicates  hours  of  credit. 

100  Foundations  of  Sports  Medicine  (3)  (3)  An 

overview  ot  the  professions  in  the  discipline  of 
sports  medicine. 


200  Understanding  Your  Sports  Injury  (3)  (3) 

Prepares  physically  active  individuals  to  understand 
the  principles  of  prevention,  recognition,  manage- 
ment, and  rehabilitation  of  injuries  and  illness 
commonly  associated  with  sports-  and  fitness-ori- 
ented activities.  (Nonathletic  training  majors  only.) 
204  First  Aid  for  Health  Professionals  (3)  (3) 
Prepares  health  professionals  to  meet  emergencies 
requiring  first  aid.  Includes  "First  Responder" 
training. 


SML  204  First  Aid  for  Health  Professionals  Lab 

(0)  (0)  Lab  experiences  in  the  application  of  skills 
and  knowledge  presented  in  SMD  204.  Must  be 
taken  concurrendy  with  SMD  204. 

211  First  Aid  for  Children  (1)  Safety  procedures 
and  cardiopulmonary  resuscitation  (CPR)  for  early 
childhood  and  elementary  education  majors. 

212  Pathology  and  Evaluation  of  Athletic 
Injury/Illness  1  (3)  (3)  A  presentation  of  the 
pathology,  pharmacology,  and  management  strate- 
gies relevant  to  sports  medicine.  Emphasis  will  be 


School  of  Education 


Teacher  Certification  Programs 


on  nonorthopaedic  conditions  commonly  encoun- 
tered in  a  physically  active  population.  PREREQ; 
BIO  259  and  269. 

SML  261  Surface  Anatomy  Laboratory  (2)  (1) 
Orientation  to  major  anatomical  landmarks  and 
underlying  structures.  Required  of  athletic  training 
majors.  PREREQ:  BIO  259  and  269,  KIN  361, 
or  concurrent  KIN  361. 

271  First  Aid  and  Athletic  Training  (3)  (2)  A 
course  designed  to  qualify  students  in  First  Aid 
and  CPR,  and  to  introduce  the  principles  of  ath- 
letic injury  prevention  and  management.  For  non- 
majors  only. 

272  Athletic  Training  Techniques  (3)  (2)  A 
course  designed  to  develop  athletic  training  skills 
for  beginning  athletic  training  students.  PRE- 
REQ; SMD  271  or  SMD  204. 

310  TherapeuticModalities  for  Athletic 
Training  (3)  (3)  Physical  agents  used  in  athletic 
training  are  presented  with  regard  to  the  physics, 
physiological  effects,  indications,  contraindica- 
tions, and  progression.  PREREQ^  KIN  352  and 
361.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 

SML  310  Therapeutic  Modalities  for  Athletic 
Training  Lab  (2)  (1)  Lab  experiences  in  the  appli- 
cation of  physical  agents  presented  in  SMD  310. 
PREREQ,or  CONCURRENT:  SMD  310. 
Athletic  training  majors  only. 

311  Therapeutic  Exercise  for  Athletic  Training 
(3)  (3)  The  principles,  objectives,  indications,  con- 


traindications, and  progression  of  various  exercise 
programs  used  in  the  rehabihtation  of  athletic 
injuries  are  presented.  PREREQ^  KIN  352  and 
361,  and  SML  261.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 
SML  311  Therapeutic  Exercise  for  Athletic 
Training  Lab  (4)  (2)  Lab  experiences  in  the  appli- 
cation of  exercises  presented  in  SMD  311.  PRE- 
REQ.or  CONCURRENT:  SMD  311.  Athletic 
training  majors  only. 

312  Pathology  and  Evaluation  of  Athletic  Injury/ 
Illness  II  (3)  (3)  A  continuation  of  SMD  212  with 
emphasis  on  the  pathology  of  injuries  to  the  e.xtrem- 
ities  commonly  seen  in  athletics  and  the  techniques 
for  their  evaluation.  PREREQ;  KIN  352  and  361, 
SMD  212,  SML  261.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 

313  Pathology  and  Evaluation  of  Athletic  Injury/ 
Illness  III  (3)  (3)  A  continuation  of  SMD  312 
with  emphasis  on  the  head,  neck,  and  trunk.  PRE- 
REQ; SMD  312.  Athleric  training  majors  only. 

315  Athletic  Injury  Management  I  (2)  (2) 
Chnical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours  with  spe- 
cific behavioral  objectives  in  athletic  equipment 
selection  and  fitting,  and  the  presentation  of  ill- 
ness, injuries,  and  conditions.  PREREQ_or  CON- 
CURRENT: SMD  311  and  312,  and  SML  311. 
Athletic  training  majors  only. 

316  Athletic  Injury  Management  II  (3)  (3) 
Chnical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours  with  spe- 
cific behavioral  objectives  in  case  study  presenta- 
tions of  injuries,  illnesses,  and/or  conditions,  and 


hospital  emergency  department  medical  care. 
PREREQ.or  CONCURRENT:  SMD  310  and 
313,  and  SML  310.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 
414  History,  Organization,  and  Administration 
of  Athletic  Training  (3)  (3)  A  presentation  of  the 
historical  and  current  perspectives  of  athletic  train- 
ing, including  techniques  for  organizing  and 
administering  athletic  training  programs.  PRE- 
REQ; SMD  272.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 

417  Athletic  Injury  Management  III  (3)  (3) 
Chnical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours  with  spe- 
cific behavioral  objectives  in  case  study  presenta- 
tions of  injuries,  illnesses,  and/or  conditions,  plus 
group  discussions  of  chnical  situations.  PREREQ; 
SMD  310,  311,  313,  and  316;  and  SML  310  and 
311.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 

418  Athletic  Injury  Management  IV  (3)  (3) 
Chnical  experience  of  200  or  more  hours  and  partic- 
ipation in  critical  reviews  of  sports  medicine  research 
combined  with  seminars  which  afford  interaction 
with  various  medical  and  paramedical  practitioners. 
PREREQ;  SMD  310,  311,  312,  and  313;  and  SML 
310  and  311.  Athletic  training  majors  only. 

454  Theories  and  Practices  of  Conditioning  and 
Training  (3)  (3)  Apphcation  of  principles  of  physi- 
ology, psychology,  and  kinesiology  for  the  design 
and  use  of  conditioning  programs  for  various 
sports.  PREREQ;  KIN  352  and  361. 


Teaching  Certification  Programs 

The  primary  mission  of  the  teacher  education  programs  at  West 
Chester  University  is  the  preparation  and  continuing  development  of 
educational  professionals  in  order  to  meet  the  needs  of  diverse  student 
populations  in  the  public  schools  and  other  education  environments 
throughout  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania. 
We  are  committed  to  excellence  in  teacher  education  which  utilizes 
innovative  curriculum  designs  and  fosters  coUaborative  effort  in  the 
schools  and  community. 

We  are  committed  to  preparing  exemplary  professionals  to  assume 
their  roles  and  responsibilities  as  educators  in  a  multicultural,  global 
society;  to  pursue  personal  and  professional  development  opportuni- 
ties; to  support  the  continuing  improvement  of  our  schools;  to  assume 
leadership;  and  to  participate  in  the  education  community. 
West  Chester  University  offers  19  undergraduate  certification  pro- 
grams and  two  endorsement  areas  for  students  who  wish  to  prepare 
themselves  to  be  certified  teachers.  These  programs,  which  are 
described  more  fiiUy  in  the  departmental  listings,  include: 


Biology 
Chemistry 
Communication 
Early  Childhood 
Special  Education 
Elementary  Education 
English 

Elective  Certification: 
French,  German,  Latin, 
Russian,  Spanish 
B.S.Ed.:  Earth-Space  Science 
Certification  only:  General  Science 
B.A.:       Elective  Certification 

Citizenship  Education 
B.A.:       Elective  Certification 

Citizenship  Education 


Department 

Progra 

Biolog}' 

B.S.Ed, 

Chemistry 

B.S.Ed. 

Communication  Studies 

B.S.Ed, 

Early  Childhood  and  Special 

B.S.Ed, 

Education 

Elementary  Education 

B.S.Ed, 

English 

B.S.Ed, 

Foreign  Languages 

B.A.: 

Geology  and  Astronomy 
Geography  and  Planning 

History 


Kinesiology 


B.S.: 


Mathematics 
Music  Education 


Physics 
Political  Science 

Professional  and  Secondary 
Education 


Health  and  Physical 
Education 
Endorsement  Certification:  Driver 

Education 
B.S.Ed.:  Mathematics 
B.M.:      Music  Education: 

Vocal,  Choral,  General, 
Instmmental 
B.S.Ed.:  Physics 
B.A.:       Elective  Certification 

Citizenship  Education 
Endorsement  Certification: 
Environmental 
Education 

FORMAL  ADMISSION  TO  TEACHER  EDUCATION 

All  students  seeking  a  bachelor's  degree  in  education  or  a  bachelor  of 

arts  degree  with  elective  certification  must  formally  apply  for  admis- 
sion to  teacher  education.  This  provision  applies  to  those  who 
received  University  admission  to  major  in  teacher  education. 
Beginning  September  1,  2003  the  minimum  standards  for  formal 
admission  to  a  WCU  teacher  preparation  program  include: 

1.  Major  in  a  teacher-education  program  or  enrolled  in  an  elective 
certification  program; 

2.  48  semester-hour  credits  of  college-level  study; 

3.  A  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of  2.8  on  all  college-level  work; 

4.  Passing  scores,  as  estabUshed  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education  (PDE)  on  the  currently  specified  PPST's  (Praxis  I: 
Reading,  Writing,  and  Mathematics).  Please  consult  with  the 
Teacher  Certification  Office  in  Recitation  Hall  regarding  up-to- 
date  testing  information  or  visit  the  PDE  web  site: 
www.state.pa.us. 

5.  Six  semester-hour  credits  of  college-level  (100  level  or  above) 
mathematics,  three  semester-hour  credits  of  college-level  (100  level 


Teacher  Certification  Programs 


School  of  Education 


or  above)English  composition,  and  three  semester-hour  credits  in 
literature  taught  in  English;  and 
6.    Recommendation  bv  the  department  of  the  student's  major. 
(Department  recommendation  mav  be  contingent  upon  comple- 
tion of  additional  and/or  more  rigorous  requirements  than  the 
minimum  described  above.) 
WCU  teacher  education  students  who  achieve  formal  admission  to 
teacher  education  starting  September  1,  2003  and  thereafter  must  main- 
tain a  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of  2.80  to  retain  formal  admission 
status.  Students  who  are  formally  admitted  after  September  1,  2003 
must  complete  their  programs  with  a  minimum  cumulative  GPA  of 
3.00  to  qualify  for  PDE  teacher  certification.  Each  program  has  desig- 
nated, for  its  own  majors,  its  advanced  professional  courses.  Only  those 
majors  who  have  been  formally  admitted  to  teacher  education  are  eligi- 
ble to  take  these  courses. 

Students  who  earn  formal  admission  to  teacher  education  and  later 
fall  below  the  required  cumulative  GPA  are  permitted  to  take  course 
work  to  improve  their  GPA  to  the  required  level  (2.80).  Such  students 
will  not,  however,  be  permitted  to  register  for  additional  advanced 
professional  education  course  work  in  their  programs  until  they  again 
achieve  the  minimum  cumulative  GPA  required  for  formal  admission 
(2.80). 

STUDENT  TEACHING 

Student  teaching  is  the  concluding  experience  of  the  teacher  educa- 
tion program.  Students  majoring  in  early  childhood,  elementary,  for- 
eign languages,  secondary,  and  special  education  must  file  applications 
to  student  teach  with  the  Teacher  Education  Center  (251  Francis 
Harvey  Green  Librar\-)-  Students  majoring  in  health  and  physical 
education,  and  music  education  must  fde  applications  with  their 
departments. 

To  be  eligible  to  complete  a  student  teaching  experience,  candidates 
must  have  completed  the  course  requirements,  must  meet  the  state- 
mandated  minimum  grade  point  average  (2.80)  or  higher,  and  must 
have  satisfied  the  requirements  for  formal  admission  to  teacher  educa- 
tion. See  program  listings  and  advising  sheets  for  specifics.  Students 
should  contact  their  departments  for  the  requirements.  A  student  must 
earn  an  academic  grade  of  C  or  better  in  both  student  teaching  assign- 
ments and  graduate  with  the  state-mandated  minimum  grade  point 
average  (3.0)  or  higher  to  qualify'  for  a  Pennsylvania  teaching  certifi- 
cate. Students  receiving  a  grade  of  C-  or  lower  in  either  or  both  stu- 
dent teaching  assignments  will  not  be  eligible  for  a  teaching  certificate. 
Students  are  assigned  a  student  teaching  placement  in  schools  with 
which  the  University  has  a  formal  agreement. 
TEACHING  CERTIFICATION 

Students  apply  for  a  Pennsylvania  certificate  through  the  University's 
Teacher  Certification  Office.  As  soon  as  certification  requirements 
have  been  met,  students  apply  for  teacher  certification. 
The  Teacher  Certification  Office  verifies  that  all  requirements  have 
been  met  prior  to  submitting  a  recommendation  for  certification  to 
the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education. 

Applicants  for  the  certificate  must  be  citizens  of  the  United  States.  A 
noncitizen  must  have  declared  the  intent  to  become  a  citizen  of  the 
United  States  to  qualif\'  for  a  teaching  certificate.  For  more  informa- 
tion, contact  the  Universitj-'s  Teacher  Certification  Office. 
Application  forms  and  information  about  certification  are  available 
from  the  Teacher  Certification  Office,  302  Recitation  Hall,  in  the 
School  of  Education. 

Postbaccalaureate  students  who  wish  to  obtain  teaching  certification 
should  consult  with  the  Teacher  Education  Center  located  in  the 
Francis  Harvey  Green  Library. 

THE  PRAXIS  SERIES  EXAMINATIONS 
Professional  Assessments  for  Beginning  Teachers 

Students  pursuing  initial  Pennsylvania  Instructional  Level  I 
Certification  must  pass  the  examinations  prescribed  at  the  time  of  cer- 
tification by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of  Education.  Currently, 
these  examinations  include  the  foUoviring: 


•  As  part  of  the  requirements  for  formal  admission  to  teacher  edu- 
cation, all  students  must  pass  the  PPST  (Praxis  I)  exams  in  read- 
ing, mathematics,  and  writing.  Students  are  strongly  encouraged 
to  take  these  exams  in  the  second  semester  of  the  first  year  of  col- 
lege study. 

•  Candidates  in  programs  leading  to  N-3,  K-6,  and  K-12  certifica- 
tion must  pass  the  Fundamental  Subjects:  Content  Knowledge 
exam.  It  is  suggested  that  candidates  take  this  exam  during  the 
junior  year. 

•  AH  candidates  for  certifications  must  pass  a  major  specialty  area 
test.  It  is  suggested  that  candidates  take  these  tests  in  the  senior 
year,  after  completing  all  program  requirements.  Candidates  stu- 
dent teaching  in  fall  2003  and  thereafter  do  not  need  to  take  the 
Principles  of  Learning  and  Teaching  test. 

HEIA- Title  II  Praxis  Test  Results  for  Program  Completers, 
Regular  Teacher  Education  Preparation  Program  for 
2001-2002  Academic  Year 

Results  from  Educational  Testing  Service 

Assessment  Type  Number        Number  Passing  Rate 

(Aggregate)  Taking  Passing       Institutional    Statewide 

Assessment   Assessment 

Basic  Skills  700  645  92%  92% 

Professional  645  580  90%  92% 

Knowledge 
Academic  Content  468  427  91%  91% 

Areas  (Mathematics, 

English,  Biology,  etc.) 
Other  Content  Areas  94  90  96%  98% 

(Career/  Technical 

Education,  Health 

Education,  etc.) 
Teaching  Special  69  69  100%  99% 

Populations  (Special 

Education,  ESL,  etc.) 

Commentary  on  the  Results 

For  the  2001-2002  academic  year,  the  aggregated  institutional  pass  rate  for 
program  completers  ranged  from  91%  to  100%  on  the  five  ripes  of  test  assess- 
ments. These  aggregated  results  are  consistent  with  statewide  pass  rates.  These 
results  show  strength  in  performance  in  light  of  the  large  number  of  WCU 
students  who  take  these  tests.  WCU  students  represented  anywhere  from  5% 
to  14%  of  all  tests  taken  bv  type  of  assessment  statewide. 
On  the  content  knowledge  tests,  the  range  on  pass  rates  was  from  86%  to 
100%.  Again,  comparing  institutional  pass  rates  to  the  statewide  results,  WCUs 
program  completers  scored  at  about  the  state  pass  percent.  In  a  few  content 
areas  (three),  slightly  below  (-1%  to  -4%)  the  statewide  pass  rate  occurred  while 
four  programs  were  at  the  statewide  pass  rate.  Conversely,  in  seven  content 
areas,  the  institutional  pass  rate  exceeded  that  of  the  statewide  pass  rate. 
Selected  highlights  from  the  content  area  tests  include  the  toUowing: 

•  The  English  Language  Literature  Content  Knowledge  test  pass  rate  was 
100%,  which  is  5%  above  the  statewide  rate. 

•  The  four  content  area  tests  where  WCU  prepares  "Teaching  Special 
Populations"  had  a  pass  rate  ot  100%. 

Selected  content  areas  of  some  concern  that  require  more  analysis  include  the 
following: 

•  The  Social  Studies:  Content  Knowledge  test  performance  was  4%  under  the 
statewide  pass  rate  average  of  90%. 

•  The  Earth  Science  Content  Knowledge  test  performance  was  4%  under  the 
statewide  pass  rate  of  95%.  Ten  of  the  11  students  passed  this  test. 

Questions  related  to  these  tests  should  be  directed  to  the  Teacher 
Certification  Office,  302  Recitation  Hall.  West  Chester  Universit)-  is  a 
designated  Praxis  test  center  and  administers  these  tests  six  times  a  year 
according  to  the  dates  established  by  Educational  Testing  Service  (ETS). 

INSTRUCTIONAL  I  CERTIFICATE 

A  student  who  completes  one  of  the  Universifys  teacher  education  curric- 
ula and  passes  all  Praxis  tests  required  by  the  state  qualifies  for  an 
Instructional  I  Certificate,  which  is  issued  by  the  Pennsyh'ania 
Department  of  Education.  This  certificate  is  \'alid  for  six  years  of  teaching 
in  Pennsylvania.  Recommendation  for  the  certificate  is  made  by  the  dean. 
School  of  Education,  who  serves  as  the  certifying  officer  of  the  University. 


College  of  j\rts  and  Sciences 


Theatre  Arts 


INSTRUCTIONAL  II  CERTIFICATE 

This  certificate  requires  three  years  of  successfiil  teaching  in  Pennsyl- 
vania under  the  Instructional  I  Certificate,  successfiil  completion  of  an 
Induction  Plan  approved  by  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education,  and  the  satisfactorv  completion  of  24  semester  hours  of 
additional  course  work  completed  at  a  baccalaureate-granting  institu- 
tion, after  issuance  of  the  baccalaureate  degree.  This  certificate  is  a 
valid  license  to  teach  in  Pennsylvania. 

All  or  part  of  the  educational  requirements  for  this  credential  may  be 
obtained  through  approved,  in-service  programs.  Effective  July  1,  2000 
(ACT  48)  the  state  requires  all  certified  teachers  and  administrators  to 


engage  in  continuing  professional  development  activities.  WCU  course 
work  is  an  acceptable  option  for  the  six  hours  of  college  credit  (or  its 
equivalent)  required  for  teachers  and  administrators  every  five  years. 
Certification  in  additional  subject  areas  may  be  obtained  by  complet- 
ing requirements  for  that  area,  or  in  certain  areas,  by  completing  a 
Praxis  specialty  examination  (see  the  Pennsylvania  Department  of 
Education  web  site:  www.state.pa.us).  Students  should  consult  the 
department  in  which  they  seek  certification  for  information  and  an 
evaluation  of  their  credits. 


Department  of  Theatre  Arts 

G-18  E.O.  BuU  Center 
610-436-3463 

Jay  H.  Berkowitz,  Chairperson 

PROFESSORS:  Bytnar,  Hashimoto-Sinclair,  Rovine 
ASSOCIATE  PROFESSOR:  Berkowitz 
ASSISTANT  PROFESSORS:  Murphy,  Wunsch 
INSTRUCTORS:  Morgan,  Saddoris 

The  Department  of  Theatre  Arts  offers  a  bachelor  of  arts  program 
which  combines  the  foundation  of  a  Uberal  arts  education  with  the 
creative  skills  needed  by  the  developing  theatre  artist.  In  addition,  the 
department  cooperates  with  the  Department  of  Communication 
Studies  in  its  bachelor  ot  science  in  education  which  qualifies  gradu- 
ates to  meet  the  state  ot  Pennsylvania  requirements  for  teacher  certifi- 
cation in  communication.  Students  who  are  majors  in  the  program 
may  choose  a  minor  in  theatre  to  meet  the  certification  requirements. 
Students  with  an  academic  major  or  minor  in  the  department  are 
required  to  meet  with  a  departmental  faculty  adviser  to  develop  their 
curricular  plans,  select  courses  prior  to  scheduling,  discuss  career  options, 
and  to  be  aware  of  cocurricular  opportunities.  Handbooks  are  provided 
to  entering  students  for  their  use  as  a  guide  to  the  development  of  their 
academic  programs.  You  must  achieve  a  scholastic  index  of  at  least  2.0  in 
your  major  before  you  will  be  recommended  for  graduation.  Grades  of 
C-  or  lower  in  major  subjects  must  be  raised  to  C  or  better. 

Department  Student  Activities 

University  Theatre,  United  States  Institute  for  Theatre  Technology, 
Alpha  Psi  Omega,  and  the  Kennedy  Center  American  Colleges 
Theater  Festival  are  organizations  that  involve  students,  majors,  and 
nonmajors  in  theatre-related  activities.  For  more  information  see  the 
"Student  Affairs"  section  of  the  catalog. 

Department  Apprenticeships 

Although  not  required,  professional  apprenticeship  experiences  are 
available  to  qualified  theatre  majors.  Students  and  their  placements  are 


48  semester  hours 
33  semester  hours 


27-28  semester  hours 


screened  by  the  department  to  assure  mutual  satisfaction  for  all  parties 
involved.  For  details,  students  should  see  the  department  chairperson. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN 
THEATRE 

1.  General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39 

2.  Core  Requirements  (all  concentrations) 
THA  103,  104,  113,  215,  301,  306,  and  307 
Two  from  the  following: 
THA  210,  213,  304,  305,  314,  315,  316 
Six  semesters  of  one-credit  THA  200 

3.  Concentration  Requirements 

a.  Performance  (24-27  semester  hours) 
THA  102,  202,  203,  209,  210,  303 
6-9  semester  hours  as  advised 

b.  Musical  Theatre  (24-27  semester  hours) 
MTC  110;  THA  203,  303;  VOC  211,  424; 
VOI  191;  and  three,  one-credit  voice  classes 
5-8  semester  hours  as  advised 

c.  Technical  Production  (24-27  semester  hours) 
ART  106 

Two  from  the  following: 

THA  210,  213,  304,  305,  314,  315,  316 

15-18  semester  hours  as  advised 

d.  General  (24—27  semester  hours) 

THA  102,  202,  203,  204,  207,  209,  210,  213, 
250,  302,  303,  304,  305,  308,  309,  310,  313, 
314,  315,  316,  399,  400,  401,  403,  404,  406, 
409,  499,  or  any  University  course  as  approved 
by  adviser. 

4.  Foreign  Language  Options,  see  pages  39-40       15  semester  hours 

Bachelor  of  Science  in  Education:  Theatre  Emphasis 

(See  Department  of  Communication  Studies.) 

Minor  in  Theatre  Arts  19  semester  hours 

THA  103,  104,  113,  200,  210,  215  or  316,  and  301 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
THEATRE 

Symbol:  THA 

101  Introduction  to  Theatre  (3)  A  survey  of  the- 
atre as  a  humanit)'  bv  exploring  how  theatre 
reflects  its  time  and  country.  This  course  teaches 
the  student  what  to  listen  for  and  what  to  look  for 
when  attending  a  live  theatre  performance.  Fulfills 
general  education  arts  requirement. 

102  Voice  for  the  Performer  (3)  The  goal  of  vocal 
training  is  the  understanding  of  the  individual 
voice.  Voice  training  seeks  to  uncover  the  potential 
for  a  naturally  produced  vocal  sound  with  all  its 


capabilities  and  limitations.  FulfJls  general  educa- 
tion arts  requirement. 

103  Acting  I  (3)  A  course  designed  to  introduce 
the  basic  skills  and  techniques  needed  by  the 
developing  actor  to  create  successfiilly  a  character 
for  performance  on  stage.  Fulfills  general  educa- 
tion arts  requirement. 

104  Stagecraft  (3)  Planning,  construction,  paint- 
ing, rigging,  and  shifting  ot  scenery.  Management 
ot  all  operations  backstage.  Laboratory  required. 
113  Script  Analysis  I  (3)  To  promote  the  devel- 
opment of  the  student's  analytical  faculties  in  the 
research  for  a  staged  production.  The  course  con- 


tent focuses  on  modern  and  post-modern  theatre, 
including  multicultural  and  feminist  plays.  Fulfills 
general  education  arts  requirement. 
150  Summer  Theatre  Workshop  (3)  A  combina- 
tion ot  classroom  instruction  and  applied  produc- 
tion techniques  for  student  interns  working  with 
the  department's  Summer  Theatre  program. 
Available  to  freshman/sophomore-level  students 
and  to  qualified  high  school  seniors.  PREREQ^ 
Interview  and  permission  of  the  department. 
♦  200  Theatre  Practicum:  Majors  (1)  This 
course  is  designed  to  provide  theatre  arts  majors 


♦  This  course  mav  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Women's  Studies 


Collee;e  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


and  minors  the  opportunities  to  participate  in  and 
learn  skills  directly  related  to  specific  areas  of  the- 
atrical production'  PREREQ:  THA  104. 

202  Dialects  (3)  Dialects  and  regionaUsms  for  the 
stage. 

203  Acting  II  (3)  Continued  focus  on  the  basic 
skills  and  techniques  needed  to  create  a  role  on  the 
stage.  Emphasis  on  character  development.  PRE- 
REQlTHA  103. 

204  Scene  Painting  (3)  Studio  course  designed  to 
introduce  students  to  basic  skills  and  techniques  of 
scenic  pamting.  PREREQ^  TR^  104  and  THA  113. 
207  Children's  Theatre  (3)  Production  of  chil- 
dren's theatre  for  stage  and  tele\ision.  Course  ele- 
ments will  include  script  analysis  and  production 
values,  publicity,  and  tour  preparation.  Students 
enrolled  in  the  course  will  create  a  complete  pro- 
duction. Fulfills  general  education  requirement. 

209  Creative  Drama  (3)  Theon'  and  practice  in 
creative  techniques  ot  expression  and  dramatic 
forms  to  be  used  as  a  teaching  and  recreational 
device  for  children  and  adults.  Fulfills  general  edu- 
cation requirement. 

210  Stage  Makeup  I  (3)  Theory-  and  practice  in 
design  and  application  of  various  ty-pes  ot  makeup 
for  the  stage. 

213  Script  Analysis  II  (3)  To  introduce  students 
to  the  unique  problems  of  interpreting  dramatic 
te-xts  from  the  classical  periods  of  theatre  history 
for  contemporar\'  stage  production. 
215  Costume  Construction  (3)  Theory  and  prac- 
tice in  theatrical  costuming  including  organization, 
construction,  drafting,  dyeing,  painting,  and 
wardrobe  management.  Laboratory  required. 
250  Race  and  Gender  in  American  Theatre  (3) 
This  course  will  focus  on  how  some  traditionally 
marginalized  groups  have  been  examined  and  por- 
trayed in  ^\merican  theatre. 

301  Directing  I  (3)  An  introduction  of  the  theo- 
ries and  techniques  of  stage  direction  with  empha- 
sis on  prerehearsal  planning,  play  selection,  script 
analysis  and  promptbooks,  casting  and  blocking. 
PREREQ:  THA  103,  104,  and  113. 

302  Scene  Construction  and  Rigging  (3)  This 
course  develops  a  familiarity  with  scenic  construc- 
tion techniques  and  materials.  Practical  solutions 
to  technical  problems  are  discussed.  Other  topics 
include  theatre  safety,  technical  drawing,  and  bud- 
geting. This  course  is  a  requirement  for  technical 
majors  but  an  elective  for  all  other  theatre  majors. 
PREREQ:  THA  104. 

303  Acting  III  (3)  A  course  for  the  advanced  stu- 
dent actor  who  wishes  in-depth  work  and  study  in 


character  building  and  analysis.  Extended  scene 
work  and  audition  materials  also  will  be  stressed. 
PREREQ;  THA  203. 

304  Scene  Design  (3)  This  course  identifies  and 
explores  the  processes  involved  in  creating  a  scenic 
space  that  is  both  practical  and  expressive.  Skills  in 
set  design,  representational  painting,  scenic  draft- 
ing, and  script  interpretation  are  developed.  PRE- 
REQ:  ART  106,  THA  104,  308,  or  permission  of 
instructor. 

305  Stage  Lighting  (3)  Exploration  of  lighting  as 
a  means  of  artistic  communication  in  the  theatre. 
The  course  covers  the  aesthetics,  tools,  technology, 
and  the  graphic  methods  used  to  Hght  a  play. 
Special  topics  in  lighting  for  other  performing  arts 
will  be  discussed.  PREREQ;  ART  106,  THA 
104,  308,  or  permission  of  instructor. 

306  History  of  Theatre  I  (3)  The  development  ot 
theatre  from  the  ancient  Greeks  to  the  17th  centu- 
ry. PREREQ:  THA  113  or  THA  213. 

307  History  of  Theatre  II  (3)  The  development 
of  theatre  from  the  17th  century  until  the  Modern 
Period  in  the  late  19th  century.' PREREQ:  THA 
113  or  THA  213. 

308  Graphics  for  the  Stage  (3)  An  exploration  of 
graphic  solutions  used  in  the  various  stages  of 
planning  and  executing  a  setting  for  the  theatre. 
Scenic  design,  stage  technician  drafting  tech- 
niques, and  perspective  techniques  used  exclusively 
in  the  theatre.  PREREQ:  THA  104. 

309  Trends  in  Contemporary  Theatre  (3)  The 
theatre  artists,  structures,  and  social  miheu  whose 
collective  interaction  can  be  referred  to  as  contem- 
porar)-  theatre.  The  creative  work  being  done  in 
America,  England,  Poland,  South  Africa,  and 
other  nations  will  form  the  core  of  the  course. 

310  Stage  Makeup  II  (3)  Theory,  development, 
and  application  of  theatrical  makeup  according  to 
the  play,  its  period,  the  style  of  production,  the 
actor,  and  the  character.  Students  must  have  previ- 
ous knowledge  of  the  basic  two-  and  three-dimen- 
sional makeup  devices.  PREREQ:  THA  210. 

313  Playwriting  Workshop  (3)  Writing  the  play, 
possibilities  and  limiatations  ot  the  stage.  Attention 
to  sets  and  costuming  where  rele\'ant.  Characteriza- 
tion by  action  and  dialogue.  Problems  of  establish- 
ing motivation.  The  play's  totality  in  theme,  charac- 
ter, and  action.  Informal  readings  of  student  work, 

314  Stage  Management  (3)  Duties  and  responsi- 
bilities of  the  theatrical  stage  manager  throughout 
the  production  process. 

315  Sound  Design  (3)  An  in-depth  study  of 
sound  and  how  it  relates  to  theatrical  production. 


316  Costume  History  and  Design  (3)  The  history 
of  European  and  American  costume  and  its  appli- 
cation to  the  period  production.  The  process  of 
designing  costumes  in  various  styles  vrill  be 
explored.  Students  are  required  to  design  costumes 
for  penods  studied.  PREREQ;  ART  106,  THA 
215,  THA  308,  or  permission  ot  instructor. 

317  History  of  Theatre  III  (3)  The  development 
of  theatre  from  the  late  19th  century  (the  Modem 
Period)  through  the  present.  The  major  theatrical 
movements  of  the  United  States,  England,  France, 
Germany,  Spain,  and  Russia  will  be  covered. 

♦  399  Directed  Studies  in  Theatre  (1-3) 
Research,  creative  projects,  reports,  and  readings 
in  theatre.  Students  must  apply  to  advisers  one 
semester  in  advance  of  registration.  PREREQ; 
Permission  of  instructor. 

♦  400  Professional  Apprenticeship  (3-15)  This 
course  pro\ides  a  structured  and  supervised  work 
experience  in  theatre.  Students  must  submit  an 
application  to  the  department  chairperson  for  per- 
mission. 

401  Directing  II  (3)  Play  direction  as  a  creative 
aspect  of  stage  production  with  emphasis  on  explo- 
ration of  concept,  techniques  of  rehearsing  a  play 
and  working  with  actors,  and  the  role  and  ttinction 
of  the  stage  manager.  PREREQ;  THA  301. 

♦  403  Advanced  Theatre  Practiciun  (3)  A  pro- 
duction seminar  tor  advanced  arts  students  that  will 
culminate  in  a  public  performance.  Under  the  men- 
torship  of  a  faculty  professional,  the  class  will  work 
as  an  ensemble  that  takes  the  production  process 
form  the  determinants  of  a  production's  pertor- 
mance  potential  to  its  final  public  presentation. 
404  CAD  for  the  Stage  (3)  To  develop  the  student's 
ability  in  utilizing  the  AutoCAD  Release  14  envi- 
ronment to  draft  and  plot  scenic  designs  and  techni- 
cal drawings  for  the  theatre.  PREREQ;  TH,\  308. 
406  Acting  IV  (3)  A  special  topics  seminar  with 
study  and  scene  work  in  a  variety  of  period,  modem, 
and  contemporary  styles.  Students  will  first  focus  on 
the  physical,  intellectual,  and  emotional  demands 
inherent  in  the  texts,  and  then  on  the  process  of 
moving  from  textual  analysis  to  performance. 

409  Theatre  Arts  Outreach  (3)  Pro\ides  students 
with  the  experience  of  working  with  children  as  part 
of  an  outreach  program  in  partnership  with  the 
West  Chester  School  District  and  Council  of  Arts. 

♦  499  Theatre  Seminar  (3)  Intensive  examination 
of  a  selected  area  of  study  in  theatre.  Topics  will 
be  announced  in  advance. 


♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Women's  Studies  Program 

211  Main  Hall 

610-436-2464 

Geetha  Ramanathan,  Director 

WOMEN'S  STUDIES  FACULTY 

Jen  Bacon,  English 

Helen  Berger,  Sociology 

Lorraine  Bernotsky,  Political  Science 

Juanita  Comfort,  English 

Virginia  DaCosta,  Art 

Celia  Esplugas,  Foreign  Languages 

Karen  Fitts,  English 


Susan  Gans,  Psychology 

Robin  Garrett,  Nursing;  Director,  Women's  Center 

Karin  Gedge,  History 

Anne  Herzog,  English 

Linda  Huff,  English 

Jane  Jeffrey,  English 

Lisa  Kirschenbaum,  History 

Elizabeth  Larsen,  English 

Rodney  Mader,  English 

Deborah  Mahlstedt,  Psychology 

Mary  McCuUough,  Communication  Studies 


College  of  Axts  and  Sciences 


Women's  Studies 


Lisa  Millhous,  Communication  Studies 
Hyoejin  Moon,  English 
Merry  G.  Perry,  English 
Cherise  Pollard,  English 
Ruth  Porritt,  Philosophy 
Geetha  Ramanathan,  English 
Arlene  Rengert,  Geography  and  Planning 
Stacey  Schlau,  Foreign  Languages 
Frauke  Schnell,  Political  Science 
Eleanor  Shevlin,  English 
Carolyn  Sorisio,  English 
LaTanya  Thames-Leonard,  History 
Karin  Volkwein,  Kinesiology 
Joan  Woolfrey,  Philosophy 

The  women's  studies  program  consists  of  an  interrelated  group  of 
courses  offered  in  a  wide  variety  of  academic  disciplines.  The  program 
operates  under  the  supervision  of  the  Women's  Studies  Steering 
Committee.  This  program  is  envisaged  both  as  an  enrichment  to  lib- 
eral education  and  as  a  preprofessional  field.  The  social  transforma- 
tion that  is  taking  place  in  society  and  in  intellectual  life  is  making 
study  in  this  area  an  asset  in  many  arenas. 

The  aim  of  the  program  is  to  integrate  the  perception  and  experience 
of  women  into  the  curriculum  and  to  encourage  inquiry  into  previous- 
ly neglected  areas,  such  as  women's  history,  women's  literature  and 
art,  psychology'  of  women,  and  women's  position  in  societ)'. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS  IN  WOMEN'S  STUDIES 

L   General  Ed.  Requirements,  see  pages  36-39       48  semester  hours 


2.  Foreign  Languages 
Culture  Cluster  may  be  used. 

3.  Required  Courses  6  semester  hours 
WOS  225  and  405 

WOS  400,  and  410  or  415  are  strongly  encouraged. 

4.  Other  Approved  Courses  18-24  semester  hours 

5.  Electives  to  complete  120  credits. 

Women's  studies  students,  both  majors  and  minors,  take  courses 
across  discipUnes.  Several  crosslisted  courses  are  offered  each  semester, 
e.g.,  CLS  359  (women's  Uterature  II),  PSY  365  (psychology  of 
women),  and  PSC  301  (women  in  politics). 

Other  courses  may  be  chosen  fi"om  the  list  of  women's  studies  offerings. 
Additional  courses  ma}'  be  applied  to  the  major,  under  ad\isement.  At 
least  sLx  major  courses  must  be  completed  at  the  300-400  level. 
These  courses  are  open  to  all  students  who  have  any  required  prereq- 
uisite as  student  electives  under  general  requirements.  With  the  per- 
mission of  their  departments,  students  also  may  take  these  courses  as 
electives  within  their  major  or  minor  disciplines. 

Minor  in  Women's  Studies  18  semester  hours 

Required  Courses  6  semester  hours 

WOS  225  and  either  WOS  405  and  410  or  415 
Women's  studies  students,  both  majors  and  minors,  take  courses  across 
disciplines.  Several  crosslisted  courses  are  offered  each  semester,  e.g., 
CLS  359  (women's  literature  II),  PSY  365  (psycholog)'  ot  women),  and 
PSC  301  (women  in  politics).  No  more  than  two  courses  ma\'  be  taken 
in  a  single  department.  Additional  courses  may  be  applied  to  the  minor, 
under  advisement.  For  advising  in  women's  studies,  contact  Dr.  Geetha 
Ramanathan,  211  Main  Hall.  Descriptions  of  WOS  courses  in  women's 
studies  appear  below.  See  departmental  listings  for  all  other  courses. 


COURSE  DESCRIPTIONS 
WOMEN'S  STUDIES 

Symbol:  WOS 

I  #  225  Women  Today:  An  Introduction  to 
Women's  Studies  (3)  An  interdisciplinary  course 
designed  to  enable  students  to  analyze  various 
kinds  of  statements  on  women,  to  question  the 
implications  of  changing  cultural  patterns,  and  to 
sample  fu'st-hand  efforts  for  change.  Satisfies  inter- 
disciplinary requirement. 

•  #  250  Women's  Self-Reflections  in  Writing, 
Art,  and  Music  (3)  An  interdisciplinary  approach 
to  ways  women  record  their  lives. 
>  #  315  Third- World  Women  (3)  This  course 
will  examine  the  nature  of  women's  lives  in  the 
Third  World,  focusing  on  topics  such  as  family, 
education,  health,  development  policies,  and  polit- 
ical change.  Geographic  areas  studied  include 
Afirica,  Asia,  Latin  America,  and  the  Middle  East. 


♦  320  Independent  Study  (3)  Independent 

research  and  study  tor  upper-division  students. 
Topic  to  be  approved  by  supervising  faculty  mem- 
ber. PREREQ:  WOS  225. 

♦  325  Special  Topics  in  Women's  Studies  (3) 
Selected  (and  changing)  topics,  e.g.,  lesbian  studies; 
black  women;  women  and  work;  love  and  sexuality. 

♦  329  Gender  and  Peace  (3)  .\n  examination  of 
the  ways  in  which  social  constructions  ot  gender 
intersect  with  perceptions  and  the  experience  of 
war. 

♦  400  Internship  (3)  This  course  is  designed  to 
allow  students  the  opportunit)'  to  put  into  practice, 
outside  the  academic  setting,  the  knowledge  regard- 
ing women's  experiences  gained  in  other  courses. 
Some  possible  sites  might  be  a  women's  health  clinic, 
a  business,  a  newspaper,  a  social  service  agency,  or  an 
electoral  campaign.  There  will  be  both  an  on-site  and 
a  faculty'  supervisor.  PREREQi  WOS  225  and  two 
other  women's  studies  courses. 


♦  405  Feminist  Theory  (3)  Designed  to  introduce 
and  discuss  basic  questions  in  contemporary  feminist 
theory,  the  course  will  explore  different  philosophies 
of  feminism  and  include  such  issues  as  motherhood, 
intersections  with  other  theories  ot  oppression,  and 
body  politics.  PREREQ^  WOS  225  or  permission 
of  the  instructor. 

♦  410  Senior  Colloquium  (3)  Sample  topics  include 
global  feminism,  mothering,  the  experiences  ot 
women  of  color,  and  feminist  Utopias.  PREREQ^ 
WOS  225  and  two  other  women's  studies  courses. 

♦  415  Senior  Project  (3)  Preparation  of  research 
in  any  area  ot  women's  studies,  to  be  decided  by 
student  and  adviser.  Supervision  includes  exercises 
in  method  and  bibliography.  Usually,  a  lengthy 
research  paper  wiU  be  the  final  result.  PREREC^ 
WOS  225  and  two  other  women's  studies  courses. 
I    Diverse  communities  course 

♦  Approved  interdisciplinary  course 

♦  This  course  may  be  taken  again  for  credit. 


Charles  A.  Gomulka,  Chair  ....  Pittsburgh 

Kim  E.  Lyttle,  Vice  Chair Pittsburgh 

R.  Benjamin  Wiley,  Vice  Chair Erie 

Matthew  E.  Baker WeUsboro 

Jeffrey  W.  Coy Shippensburg 

Brandon  W.  Danz Strasburg 

Daniel  P  Elby York 


Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 

Edward  G.  Rendell,  Governor 

State  System  of  Higher  Education 

Judy  G.  Hample,  Chancellor 
Board  of  Governors 

David  P.  Holveck Malvern 

Vincent  J.  Hughes Philadelphia 

Marie  Conley  Lammando Steelton 

C.R.  "Chuck"  Pennoni Bryn  Mawr 

Vicki  L.  PhUlips Harrisburg 

Edward  G.  Rendell Harrisburg 

James  J.  Rhoades Mahanoy  City 

West  Chester  University  CouncU  of  Trustees 


David  M.  Sanko Harrisburg 

B.  Michael  Schaul Mechanicsburg 

Ronald  L.  Strickler,  Jr. York 

John  K.  Thornburgh Pittsburgh 

Christine  J.  Toretti Indiana 

Kara  L.  Wealand Middletovm 

F.  Eugene  Dixon,  Jr.,  Chairman  Emeritus 


Carol  Aichele,  Chair Malvern 

Bernard  J.  Carrozza,  Vice  Chair Newtown  Square 

Jessie  Pincus,  Secretary West  Chester 

Barry  C.  Dozor Broomall 

Thomas  Fillippo Malvern 

Judy  G.  Hample,  ex-officio Harrisburg 

tjohanna  K.  Havlick,  Trustee  Emerita 


Laurence  Harmelin West  Chester 

David  James West  Chester 

Alan  P.  Novak Coatesville 

Michael  Stoll West  Chester 

Donald  Tavlor West  Grove 

Elinor  Z.  Taylor West  Chester 

J.  Curtis  Joyner,  Trustee  Emeritus 
John  Unruh,  Trustee  Emeritus 


William  E.  Hughes,  Sr.,  Trustee  Emeritus 

Board  of  Directors:  The  Fund  for  West  Chester  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Christopher  Franklin  '87,  President 
Gail  Mackler-Carlino,  Vice 

President 
Emily  Jane  Lemole,  Secretary 
Donald  R.  Mcllvain,  Treasurer 
Thomas  A.  Fillippo  '69,  Council  of 

Trustees  Representative 


Richard  T.  Przywara,  Executive 

Director 
Madeleine  Wing  Adler 
William  H.  Boucher  '48 
Matthew  Bricketto 
Millie  C.  Cassidy 


Albert  E.  Filano 
Maury  Hoberman 
David  P  Holveck  '68 
Elisabeth  Kalogris 
Donald  E.  Leisey  '59 
John  A.  McCarthy 


Martha  Ford  Mcllvain  '52 
Ray  M.  Mincarelli 
Mark  P.  Mixner 
John  N.  Nickolas  '90 
Mark  G.  Pavlovich 
Carlos  Ziegler 


Board  of  Directors:  West  Chester  University  Foundation 


Charles  E.  Swope,  President 

W.E.  Mullestein,  Vice  President 

David  L.  Peirce,  Executive  Director  and  Treasurer 

William  H.  Boucher  '48 


John  J.  Ciccarone 
Albert  E.  Filano 
Mrs.  Guv  Fry 
Mrs.  John  B.  Hannum 


WCU  Alumni  Association  Board  of  Directors 


Jacqueline  Sowa  Colyer 
Eros  Connor 
J.  Glenn  Crawford 
Carmen  Evans  Culp 
Arthur  DiGiuseppe 
Janice  Weir  Etshied 
Karl  HeUcher 
Angela  Howard 


Tanya  Hunter 

Judith  A.  Jarrett 

Emlyn  H.Jones  (faculty  liaison) 

Carolyn  Keefe 

Joseph  F.  Kienle  III 

Herb  Lee 

Oresto  Leto 

Donald  A.  Lewis 


Barr)-  Mar  key 

Nancy  Ambrosia  MacMullan 

Lynn  McDowell 

Richard  Merion 

Anne  Sourbeer  Morris 

Alexander  Murphy 

John  F.  Murphy 

C.  Curtis  Norcini 


Eleanor  Latta 
Leslie  B.  Schramm 
Elinor  Z.  Taylor  '43 


Nick  D.  Polcim 

Ann  Giangiulio  Rilatt 

Christopher  P.  Schrode 

Luther  B.  Sowers 

John  Stoddart 

Elinor  Z.  Taylor  (Council  of 

Trustees  liaison) 
Terry  Weyent 
James  Young 


+De 


West  Chester  University  is  a  member  of  Pennsylvania  s  State  System  of  Higher  Education. 


Administration 


President Dr.  Madeleine  Wing  Adler 

Executive  Deputy  to  the  President Mr.  Lawrence  A.  Dowdy 

Director,  Social  Equir\' Ms.  Luz  Hernandez 

Vice  President  for  Academic  Affairs/Provost Dr.  Linda  L.  Lamwers 

Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences    Dr.  Charles  D.  Hurt 

Associate  Dean,  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences   ., Dr.  Jennie  Skerl 

Dean,  School  of  Business  and  Pubhc  Affairs Dr.  Christopher  M.  Fiorentino 

Dean,  School  of  Education Dr.  Tony  W.  Johnson 

Dean,  School  of  Health  Sciences Dr.  Donald  E.  Barr 

Dean,  School  of  Music Dr.  Timothy  V.  Blair 

Associate  Provost    Dr.  Sheila  Patterson 

Director,  Academic  Advising  Center Mr.  Herb  Lee 

Director,  Academic  Development  Program Dr.  Peter  Kyper 

Director,  Admissions Ms.  Marsha  L.  Haug 

Registrar Vacant 

Director,  Financial  Aid Mr  Dana  C.  Parker 

Director,  Library  Services Mr.  Richard  Swain 

Director  of  the  Business  Technology  Center Dr.  Thomas  A.  Egan 

Dean,  Graduate  Studies  and  Extended  Education Dr.  Cheryl  M.  Vermey 

Dean,  Undergraduate  Studies  and  Student  Support Dr.  Quincy  Moore 

Associate  Vice  President  for  Sponsored  Research  and  Faculty  Development Dr.  George  Hong 

Vice  President  for  Administrative  and  Fiscal  Affairs Mr.  Mark  P.  Mixner 

Director,  Human  Resource  Services Mr.  Michael  T.  Maloy 

Director,  Environmental  Health  and  Safety Ms.  Gail  Fellows 

Executive  Director,  Facilities  Administration Mr.  William  E.  Bennett 

Director,  Physical  Plant Mr.  Greg  Cuprak 

Director,  Support  Services Mr.  Royston  Gathings 

Director,  Facilities  Planning Mr.  Thomas  Clark 

Director,  Facilities  Design  and  Construction    Ms.  Dee  Giardina 

Director,  Space  Management  and  Calendar Mrs.  Barbara  (Babs)  Winicur 

Director,  Public  Safety Mr.  Michael  D.  Bickjng 

Director,  Fiscal  Affairs Ms.  Amy  W.  Boland 

Director,  Business  Services Mr.  William  Peoples 

Director,  Financial  Reporting Ms.  Maureen  Sandusky 

Bursar  (Director,  Student  Financial  Services) Mr.  Daniel  Pauletti 

Director,  Budget    Ms.  Linda  Boucher 

Internal  Review Mr.  Richard  Griffing 

Contracts  and  Grants  Business  Manager Mr.  Robert  Halon 

Vice  President  for  Advancement Dr.  Mark  G.  Pavlovich 

Associate  Vice  President  for  Advancement Mr.  Richard  T.  Przywara 

Director,  Alumni  Relations Ms.  Carole  Murray 

Director,  Cultural  and  Community  Affairs Mr.  John  Rhein 

Director,  Annual  Giving  and  Corporate  Relations Vacant 

Director,  Major  Gifts  and  Foundation  Relations Ms.  Mary  Kate  Andris 

Director,  Planned  Giving Ms.  Norma  Clayton 

Director,  Pubhc  Relations  and  Marketing  (Interim) Ms.  Loretta  MacAlpine 

Director,  Publications  and  Printing  Services Ms.  Cynthia  A.  Bednar 

Manager,  Graphics  and  Printing Mr.  W.  Tyson  Cooper 

Vice  President  for  Information  Services Dr.  J.  Fred  Gage 

Executive  Director,  Academic  Computing  Services Mr.  Adel  Barimani 

Director,  Administrative  Computing  (Interim) Ms.  Carol  Clark 

Director,  Networking  and  Telecommunications  (Interim) Mr.  Steve  Laverty 

Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs  (Interim)  and  Dean  of  Students Dr.  Matthew  Bricketto 

Assistant  Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs Ms.  Diane  DeVestern 

Assistant  Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs/Residence  Life  and  Housing    Dr.  Thomas  Puree 

Assistant  to  the  Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs Ms.  Jacqueline  Hodes 

Director,  Athletics Dr.  Edward  Matejkovic 

Director,  Career  Development  Center Ms.  Elizabeth  GiangiuUo 

Director,  Children's  Center Ms.  Sandra  Jones 

Director,  Counseling  and  Psychological  Services  Department Dr.  Judith  Baron 

Director,  Greek  Life  and  Student  Organizations Mr.  Charles  Warner 

Director,  Health  and  Wellness  Centers Ms.  Mar}'ann  Hammond 

Director,  Housing  Services Mr.  Peter  Galloway 

Director,  Judicial  Affairs  (Interim) Ms.  Lynn  Klingensmith 

Director,  Multicultural  Affairs Mr.  Jerome  Hutson 

Director,  Recreation  and  Leisure  Programs Dr.  Stephen  Gambino 

Director,  Residence  Life Ms.  Marion  McKinney 

Director,  Service  Learning  and  Volunteer  Programs Mrs.  Margaret  Tripp 

Director,  Sykes  Union Mr.  David  Timmann 

Director,  Women's  Center Ms.  Robin  Garrett 

Student  Services  Incorporated,  Executive  Director Ms.  Mell  Josephs 

Student  Services  Incorporated,  Coordinator,  Co-Curricular  Programs Mr.  Stephen  McKiernan 

Student  Services  Incorporated,  Program  Coordinator  for  Campus  Activities Mr.  Jett  Gerstein 

Student  Services  Incorporated,  Bookstore  Manager Mr.  Terry  Shira 


Faculty 

Spring  2003 


MADELEINE  WING  ABLER  (1992)  President 
B.A.,  Northwestern  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin 

LINDA  L.  LAMWERS  (1995)  Vice  President  for 

Academ  ic  Affairs/Provost 

B.A.,  Douglass  CoUege;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Rutgers 

University 

J.  FRED  GAGE  (2000)  Vice  President  for 
Information  Services 

B.S.Ed..  West  Virginia  University;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pittsburgh 

MARK  R  MIXNER  (2002)  Vice  President  for 
Administrative  and  Fiscal  Affairs 
B.A.,  College  of  William  and  Mary;  M.S.A., 
George  Washington  University 

NL\TTHEW  J.  BRICKETTO  (1986)  Interim 
Vice  President  for  Student  Affairs 
B.S.,  Seton  Hall  University;  M.Ed.,  Ohio 
University;  M.B.A.,  Fairleigh  Dickinson 
University;  Ed.D.,  Rutgers  University 


MARK  G.  PAVLOVICH  (2000)  Vice  President 

for  Advancement 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 

CHARLES  D.  HURT  (2002)  Dean.  College  of 

Arts  and  Sciences 

B.A.,  University  of  Virginia;  M.S.,  University  of 

Kentucky;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Wisconsin  - 

Madison 

CHRISTOPHER  M.  nORENTINO  (1985) 
Dean,  School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs 
B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D., Temple  University 

TONY  W.JOHNSON  (1997)  Dean,  School  of 

Education 

B.A.  Western  Carolina  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

George  Peabody  College  for  Teachers 

DONALD  E.  BARR  (1997)  Dean,  School  of 
Health  Sciences 

B.S.,  Colorado  State  University;  Ed.M,  Ph.D., 
State  University  of  New  York  at  Buffalo 


TIMOTHY  V.  BLAIR  (1992)  Dean,  School  of 

Music 

B.Mus.,  Susquehanna  University;  M.M.,  The  New 
England  Conservatory  of  Music;  D.M.A., 
Catholic  University  of  America 

CHERYL  M.  VERMEY  (2002)  Dean.  Graduate 
Studies  and  Extended  Education 
B.S.,  Millersville  University;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D., 
Temple  University 

QUINCY  MOORE  (2001)  Dean,  Undergraduate 
Studies  and  Student  Support 
B.A.,  Colver-Stockton  College;  M.S.,  University 
of  Nevada;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Iowa 

SHEILA  PATTERSON  (1992)  Associate  Provost 
B.S.,  Mankato  State;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Southern 
Illinois  University 


ANN  A.  ABBOTT  (2001)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Graduate  Social  Work;  Professor 
B.S.,  St.  Norbert  College;  M.S.S.,  Ph.D.,  Bryn 
MawT  CoUege 

THOMAS  J.  AHLBORN  (1967)  Associate 
Professor  of  Computer  Science 
B.S.,  California  University;  M.A.,  Kent  State 
University;  M.S.,  University  of  Delaware 

NASEER  AHNL\D  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  D.Sc,  Aligarh  Muslim 

University 

SYLVIA  MOSS  AHRAMJIAN  (1976)  Associate 
Professor  of  Instrumental  Music 
B.Mus.,  Juilliard  School  of  Music;  M.M.,  Indiana 
University,  Bloomington 

KRISTEN  ALBERT  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music  Education  , 

B.S.,  Millersville  University;  M.Ed.,  Shippensburg 

University 

NANCY  ALLEN  (2002)  Director,  Pre-Major 

Advising,  Assistant  Professor  of  Educational  Services 
B.A.,  Bucknell  University;  M.A.,  Duquesne 
Universirv-;  Ph.D.,  New  York  University 

THOMAS  ANDREWS  (1997)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Economics 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

PAUL  M.  ARSENAULT  (1998)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Marketing 

M.S.,  Mariena  College;  M.B.A.,  Wake  Forest 
University;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

NANCY  N.  ARTUS  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.A.,  Humboldt  State  University;  M.S., 

Washington  State  University;  Ph.D.,  Michigan 

State  University 


HANNAH  ASHLEY  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.S.,  Cornell  University;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

CHRISTIAN  K.  AVWYAH  (1989)  Associate 
Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  University  of  Ghana;  M.A.,  University  of 
Guelph;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Alberta 

JULIAN  AZORLOSA  (2001)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Psychology 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

JENNIFER  S.  BACON  (2000)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  English;  Assistant  Professor 
B.A.,  University  of  South  Carolina;  M.A., 
University  of  Cincinnati;  Ph.D.,  Rensselaer 
Polytechnic  Institute 

JOHN  H.  BAKER  (1974)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Art;  Professor 

B.A.,  West  Chester  University;  M.F.A.,  University 
of  Delaware 

LYNDA  A.  BALOCHE  (1989)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Elementary  Education; 

Professor 

B.A. ,  Trenton  State  College;  Ed.D.,  Temple 

University 

SCOTT  BALTHAZAR  (1991)  Professor  of  Music 
History  and  Literature 

B.A.,  Amherst  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania 

JUDITH  BARON  (1974)  Chairperson  and 
Psychologist.  Counseling  Center;  Professor 
B.A.,  M.A.,  University  of  Michigan;  Ph.D.,  York 
University,  Toronto 

ROGER  BARTH  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.A.,  La  Salle  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Johns 

Hopkins  University 


CHARLES  R.  BAUERLEIN  (1988)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Loyola  University  of  the  South;  M.A., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

NADINE  M.  BEAN  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Graduate  Social  Work 

B.A.,  M.S.S.A.,  Ph.D.,  Case  Western  Reserve 

University 

MARSHALL  J.  BECKER  (1968)  Professor  of 

Anthropology 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ROBERT  M.  BEDFORD  (1966)  Professor  of 
Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.S.,  The  Juilliard  School;  D.M.A., 
Catholic  University  of  America 

DENA  G.  BEEGHLY  (\992)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Literacy;  Associate 

Professor 

B.S.,  Southern  Connecticut  State  University; 

M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  University  of  Georgia 

SHARON  BEGAN  (1992)  Assistant  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Biology;  Professor 
B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.S.,  East  Tennessee 
State  University;  Ph.D.,  Southern  Illinois 
University  at  Carbondale 

MICHAEL  BELL  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 

B.A.,  Arizona  State  LIniversity;  M.A.,  Northern 

Arizona  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Texas  at 

Austin 

JOHN  T.  BENESKl  (1986)  Professor  of  Biology 
A.A.,  Southwestern  College;  B.A.,  M.A., 
Humboldt  State  University;  Ph.D.,  Washington 
State  University 


Faculn* 


C'i'NTHIA  D.  BENZING  (1988)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Economics  and  Finance;  Professor 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.B.A., 
Ph.D.,  Drexel  University 

HELEN  A.  BERGER  (1991)  Professor  of  Sociology 
B.A.,  Brooklyn  College;  M.A.,  Sussex  University 
(England);  Ph.D.,  New  York  Universlti,' 

JAY  H.  BERKOWITZ  (1969)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Theatre  Arts;  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.A.,  Temple  University 

R.  LORRAINE  BERNOTSKY  (1996)  Associate 
Professor  of  Political  Science 

B.A.,  Messiah  College;  M.A.,  Temple  University, 
D.Phil.,  University  of  Oxford 

DEBORAH  BIERSCHWALE  (\999)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Counseling  and  Psychological  Services 
B.A.,  University  of  Michigan;  M.A.,  PsyD., 
Widener  University 

DEBRA  BILL  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of  Health 
B.A.,  Central  Connecticut  State  Universit)'; 
M.P.H.,  University  of  North  Carolina;  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

RICHARD  E.  BLAKE  (1975)  Professor  of  Art 
B.F.A.,  Tyler  School  of  Art  of  Temple  University 

JAMES  R.  BLEIBERG  (2002)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Counseling 

B.A.,  Haverford  College;  M.Ed.,  Harvard 
Universitv;  M.A.,  Hebrew  Union  College;  Ph.D., 
Widener  University 

ARVTD  J.  BLOOM  (1988)  Professor  of  Psychology 
B.A.,  Wesleyan  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Colorado 
State  University 

MARITA  R.  BOES  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Hunter  College;  Ph.D.,  City 

University  of  New  York 

GAIL  G.  K.  BOLLIN  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 
Elementary  Education 

B.A.,  St.  Bonaventure  University;  M.A.,  Purdue 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

DAVTD  L.  BOLTON  (\99\)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Professional  and  Secondary  Education 

B.A.,  Seminar  Marionhoehe  (Germany);  M.A., 

Andrews  University;  Ph.D.,  Florida  State 

University 

DEANNE  L.  ZOTTER  BONIFAZI  (1991) 
Professor  of  Psychology 

B.A.,  Bloomsburg  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Kent 
State  University 

ROGER  E.  BOVE  (1984)  Associate  Professor  of 

Economics  and  Finance 

B.A.,  Harvard  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Harvard 

University 

ERMINIO  BRAIDOTTI  (1978)  Professor  of 

Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  Youngstown  State  University;  M.A., 

Middlebury  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

RICHARD  G.  BRANTON  (1962)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Mathematics;  Professor 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  University  of 
Delaware;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

^LARY  R  BREWSTER  (1993)  Professor  of 
Criminal  Justice 

B.A.,  St.  Joseph's  College;  M.A.,  Fordham 
University;  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  University 


PATRICL^  BRODERICK  (1995)  Associate 
Professor  of  Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 
B.A.,  Alvernia  College;  M.A.,  Villanova 
University;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

DAVID  E.  BRODY  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Art 

B.A.,  Vassar  College;  M.A.,  Boston  University; 

Ph.D.,  Boston  University 

STEVEN  L.  BROITMAN  (1987)  Associate 
Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Stony 
Brook;  M.Ed.,  University  of  Massachusetts;  M.A., 
Ph.D.,  Princeton  University 

MICHAEL  W.  BROOKS  (1971)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  English;  Professor 
B.A.,  Antioch  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Toronto 

DEBORAH  S.  BROWN  (1992)  Professor  of 
Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Delaware 

DAVID  F  BROWN  (1991)  Professor  of 
Elementary  Education 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Northern  Illinois  University;  Ed.D., 
University  of  Tennessee 

KIMBERLEE  S.  BROWN  (1993)  Associate 
Professor  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.Ed.,  Temple  University;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 
Universit}';  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ROGER  J.  BROWN  {19bS)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Foreign  Languages 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

TIMOTHY  J.  BROVW  (2002)  Associate  Professor 
of  Communication  Studies 
B.A.,  M.A.,  West  Chester  Universit)-;  Ph.D., 
Ohio  State  University 

SHEREE  BUCHENROTH  (2002)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Economics  and  Finance 
B.A.,  University  of  Findlay;  M.B.A.,  Ph.D., 
Indiana  University 

M^RY  BUCKELEW  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  New  Me.xico 

MARY  ANNE  BURNS-DUFFY  (1969)  Interim 

Assistant  Director,  Library  Services;  Assistant 

Professor 

A.B.,  Immaculata  College;  M.S.L.S.,  Drexel 

University 

SEETHA  BURTNER  (2002)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Philosophy 

B.A.,  St.  Xavier  College;  M.S.,  Ohio  State 
University;  M.A.,  Colorado  State  University; 
Ph.D.,  Purdue  University 

J.  BRYAN  BURTON  (1991)  Professor  of  Music 

Education 

B.M.,  West  Texas  State  University;  M.A.,  Western 

State  College  of  Colorado;  D.M.E.,  University  of 

Southern  Mississippi 

JEAN  PIPER  BURTON  (\993)  Associate 

Professor  of  Library  Services 

B.S.,  Valley  City  University  of  North  Dakota; 

M.L.S.,  Vanderbilt  University;  M.L.S.,  Widener 

University 

RICHARD  M.  BUSCH  (1990)  Professor  of 

Geology 

A.B.,  Franklin  and  Marshall  CoUege;  M.A., 

Temple  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 


ROBERT  E.  BYTNAR  (1975)  Professor  of 

Theatre  Arts 

B.S.Ed.,  California  University;  M.A.,  West 

Virginia  University;  M.F.A.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh 

ALBERT  CAFFO  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  Universit)';  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

Ohio  State  University 

WEI  WEI  CAI  (1996)  Associate  Professor  of 
Elementary  Education 
B.A.,  Beijing  Teachers  College;  M.A., 
Bloomsburg  University;  Ed.D.,  Indiana  University 
of  Pennsylvania 

AJVL\NDA  CAIN  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Library  -  Cataloging 

B.A.,  Evergreen  State  College;  M.L.S.,  University 
of  Washington 

GERARD  A.  CALLANAN  (2001)  Associate 
Professor  of  Management 
B.A.,  Temple  University;  M.B.A.,  LaSaUe 
University;  Ph.D.,  Drexel  University 

SUSAN  F  CAROFF  (1995)  Associate  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.Ed.,  The 

Citadel;  Ph.D.,  Purdue  University 

L\TMN  CARSON  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

Health 

B.A.,  Neumann  CoUege;  M.S.,  St.  Joseph's 

University;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

LOUIS  A.  CASCL^TO  (1963)  Associate  Professor 

of  Earth  Sciences 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  CoUege  (Pa.);  M.S.,  Villanova 

University 

GIOVANNI  CASOTTI  (1996)  Associate  Professor 

of  Biology 

B.A.,  Ph.D.,  Murdoch  University  (Australia) 

KATHRYN  S.  CHILCOTE  {\9S9)  Associate 
Professor  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 
B.A.,  M.M.,  University  of  the  Pacific;  D.M.A., 
University  of  Oregon 

PAUL  F  CHRIST  (1994)  Associate  Professor  of 

Marketing 

B.B.A.,  M.B.A.;  Temple  University;  Ph.D.,  Drexel 

University 

HUNG  M.  CHU  (1976)  Professor  of  Management 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  CoUege  (Ind.);  M.B.A., 
Northern  lUinois  University;  Ph.D.,  Louisiana 
State  University 

MELISSA  CICHOWICZ  (1986)  Director,  Pre- 
Medical  Program;  Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  CoUege;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Mari'land 

BETHANN  CINELLI  (1987)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Health;  Professor 

B.S.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.Ed., 

Temple  University;  D.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

GEORGE  S.  CLAGHORN  (1963)  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

B.A.,  Universitv  of  Chattanooga;  Ph.D., 

Universitv'  of  Pennsylvania;  D.D.,  Eastern  Baptist 

Seminary 

BARBARA  CLEGHORN  (\999)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Kinesiology 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  Drexel 

University 


Faculrv 


FRANCES  E.  CLELAND  (1994)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Kinesiology;  Associate 

Professor 

B.S.,  Purdue  University;  M.S.,  P.E.D.,  Indiana 

University 

DARLA  SPENCE  COFFEY  (1998)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Social  Work;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.W.,  Eastern  College;  M.S.W.,  University  of 
Pennsvlvania;  Ph.D.,  Bryn  Mawr  College 

JUANITA  RODGERS  COMFORT  (2001) 
Assistant  Professor  of  English 
B.A.,  M.A.,  Old  Dorainion  University;  Ph.D., 
Ohio  State  University 

KATHERINE  A.  CONROY  (1983)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.,  Rutgers — The  State  University;  M.S., 
Boston  University 

IDNA  CORBETT  (1992)  Associate  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.A.,  Goshen  College;  M.A.,  Michigan  State 
University;  Ed. D.,  Temple  UniversiO' 

CAROL  A.  CORRODY  (2002)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Elementary  Education 

B.B.A.,  Hofstra  University;  M.S.,  Long  Island 
Universitv",  Ph.D.,  University  of  North  Carolina 

STANLEY  J.  CRAMER  (2000)  Assutant  Professor 
of  Kinesiology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  West  Chester  University;  Ph.D., 
Temple  University- 

CARL  CRANMER  (2000)  Assutant  Professor  of 
Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  Oberlin  Conservatory  of  Music;  M.M., 
D.M.A.,  The  Juilliard  School 

WALTER  L.  CRESSLER  lU  (2001)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Library  References 
B.A.,  Dartmouth  College;  M.S.,  Drexel 
University;  M.Ed.,  Widener  University;  Ph.D., 
UniversitN'  of  PennsyK^ania 

W.  STEPHEN  CRODDY  (1969)  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

B.A.,  Universit)'  of  Southern  California;  M.A., 

Temple  University;  Ph.D.,  Brown  University 

DAVID  CULLEN  (1993)  Instructor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.M.,  Hartford  School  of  Music 

JUDITH  A.  CURTIN  (2001)  Instructor  of 

Communicative  Disorders 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Marquette  University 

NEIL  CURTIS  (1993)  Associate  Professor  of  Sports 

Medicine 

B.S.,  Boston  Universit)';  M.S.,  University  of 

Arizona;  Ed.M.,  Ed.D.,  Columbia  Universit)' 

VIRGINL^  M.  DA  COSTA  (\99S)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Art 

B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Albany; 
M.A.,  California  State  University  at  Long  Beach; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  California,  Santa  Barbara 

DANIEL  DARIGAN  (1992)  Professor  of  Literacy 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Northern  Illinois  University;  Ph.D., 
Universit)'  of  Oregon 

LAWRENCE  R.  DAVIDSON  (1989)  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  Rutgers — The  State  University;  M.A., 

Georgetown  Universit)-;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Alberta 


KEVIN  W.  DEAN  (1991)  Director,  Honors 

Program;  Professor  of  Communication  Studies 
B.S.,  Bowling  Green  University;  M.A.,  Miami 
Universit)-  oi  Ohio;  Ph.D.,  Univcrsit\-  of 
Maryland 

ELI  DEHOPE  (2Qa\)  Associate  Professor  of  Social 

Work 

B.S.W.,  Temple  University;  M.A.,  University  of 
Pennsv'lvania;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

CHERYL  B.  DELUCA  (2000)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
B.A.,  M.S.,  Purdue  Universit)-;  Ph.D.,  State 
University  of  New  York  at  Buffalo 

PHIUP  M.  DeMOSS  (1972)  Professor  of 

Economics  and  Finance 

B.A.,  Park  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Kansas  State 

Universit)- 

DAVID  P  DeVENNEY  (1996)  Associate  Professor 
of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.M.,  Iowa  State  Universit)';  M.M.,  University  of 
Wisconsin-Madison;  D.M.A.,  Conservatory  of 
Music,  Universit)'  of  Cincinnati 

KATHLEEN  DEVLIN-KELLY  (191  (>)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N.,  Georgetown  University;  M.S.N. ,  Boston 

University 

ANDREW  E.  DINNIMAN  (1972)  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.A.,  L^niversiti'  of  Connecticut,  M.A.,  Universit)' 
of  Mar)'land;  Ed.D.,  Pennsylvania  State  Universit)- 

W.  LARRY  DORMINT  (1972)  Associate  Professor 
of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

B.Mus.,  Jacksonville  University-;  M.M.,  Florida 
State  Universit)';  D.M.,  Indiana  University 

GEORGE  PULLMAN  DRAKE,  JR.  (1994) 

Associate  Professor  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special 

Education 

B.S.,  West  Virginia  Universit)-;  M.Ed.,  Trenton 

State  College;  Ph.D.,  Universit)-  of  Virginia 

MARTHA  DROBNAK  (1992)  Chairperson. 

Department  of  Elementary  Education;  Associate 

Professor 

B.A.,  Grove  City  College;  M.Ed.,  University  of 

Pittsburgh;  Ed.D.,  Nova  Universit)' 

PHILLIP  K.  DUNCAN  {\9m  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Psychology;  Professor 
B.A.,  Wittenberg  Universit)-;  M.A.,  Western 
Michigan  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Florida 

KEVIN  C.  DUNLEAVY  (1979)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Economics  and  Finance 

B.A.,  Universit)'  of  Delaware;  Ph.D.,  Duke 

Universit)' 

T.  OBINKARAM  ECHEWA  (1986)  Professor  of 

English 

B.S.,  University  of  Notre  Dame;  M.S.,  Columbia 

University;  M.A.,  Universit)-  of  Pennsylvania; 

Ph.D.,  S\Tacuse  Universit)' 

HOWARD  EDELMAN  {\9U)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Computer  Science 
B.S.,  Cit)'  University  of  New  Yorl^  M.S., 
University  of  Delaware 

THOMAS  EGAN  (1968)  Director,  Center  for  the 
Study  of  Connectivity  and  Databases;  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ed.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 


LINDA  ELLO  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Graduate  Social  Work 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S., 

Universit)-  of  Iowa;  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  -The  State 

Universit)- 

PAUL  R.  EMMONS  {\9%S)  Associate  Professor  of 
Library  Services 

B.  Mus.,  Lawrence  University  of  Wisconsin; 
M.M.,  M.S.,  Universit)-  of  Illinois 

RICHARD  G.  EPSTEIN  (1991)  Professor  of 

Computer  Science 

B.A.,  George  Washington  University;  M.S.E., 

University  of  Pennsylvania;  Ph.D..  Temple 

University 

JORGE  ESCORCL\  (1968)  Associau  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

Lie,  Universidad  Pedagogica  del  Caribe;  M.A., 
Boston  University 

CELLA  ESPLUGAS  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  Teacher's  College,  Argentina;  M.Ed., 
BowUng  Green  State  University,  Ph.D., 
Universit)-  of  Toledo 

MAYA  EVENDEN  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  University  of  Victoria;  M.P.Mgmt.,  Ph.D., 

Simon  Eraser  Universit)' 

JAMES  D.  FABREY  (1975)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Computer  Science;  Professor 
A.B.,  Cornell  Universit)';  Ph.D.,  Massachusetts 
Institute  of  Technology 

G.  WINHELD  FAIRCHILD  (1983)  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.A.,  Hamilton  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Michigan 

JAMES  S.  FALCONE  (1991)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Chemistry;  Assistant  Professor 

B.S.,  Universit)'  of  Pennsylvania;  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Delaware 

GEORGE  FASIC  (19%%)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Geography  and  Planning 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S., 
Columbia  University 

JOHN  J.  FENTON  (1980)  Professor  of  Chemistry 
B.A.,  Catholic  Universit)'  of  .America;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Minnesota 

JUDITH  S.  FINKEL  (1968)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special 
Education;  Professor 

B.S.,  Temple  University;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 
Universit)';  Ph.D.,  Union  Graduate  School 

FRANK  E.  nSH  (1980)  Professor  of  Biology 
B.A.,  State  Universit)-  of  New  York  at  Oswego; 
M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State  Universit)' 

CYNTHIA  G.  nSHER  (2000)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Geology  and  Astronomy 

B.A.,  Augustana  CoUege;  M.B.Sc,  Ph.D., 

University-  of  Colorado 

ANDREA  R.  FISHNL\N  (1990)  Professor  of 
English;  Director,  Pennsylvania  Writing  and 
Literature  Projects 

B.A.,  Dickinson  College;  M.Ed.,  Shippensburg 
University';  Ph.D.,  University  ot  Pennsylvania 

KAREN  L.  nrrS  (2OOO)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  M.E.,  Northwestern  State  University; 

Ph.D.,  Texas  Christian  University 


Faculty 


ROBERT  P.  FLETCHER  (1992)  Associate 
Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  University  of  California;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  California,  Los  Angeles 

KEVIN  E.  FLYNN  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Accounting 

M.S.,  Drexel  University 

ANITA  K.  FOEMAN  (1991)  Professor  of 

Communication  Studies 

B.H.,  Defiance  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

CLAUDE  R.  FOSTER,  JR.  (1967)  Professor  of 
History 

B.A.,  Eastern  College;  B.D.,The  Reformed 
Episcopal  Seminary;  M.A.,  University  of 
Delaware;  Th.M.,  Crozer  Theological  Seminary; 
Zeugnis  filer  deutsche  Sprache  und  Kultur, 
University  of  Freiburg;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

SANDRA  FOWKES-GODEK  (\99\)  Associate 
Professor  of  Sports  Medicine 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  Llniversity;  M.S., 
University  of  Colorado;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

BONITA  FREEMAN-WITTHOFT  (1974) 
Director,  Ethnic  Studies  Institute;  Associate  Professor 
of  Anthropology 

B.A.,  University  of  Maine;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

RAYMOND  FRIDAY  (1969)  Professor  of  Vocal 
and  Choral  Music 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Mus.,  Oberlin 
College;  Diploma,  Academy  of  Vocal  Arts;  Ph.D., 
New  York  University 

JONATHAN  FRIEDMAN  (2002)  Director, 
Holocaust  and  Genocide  Studies  Program;  Associate 
Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Kent  State  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Maryland  -  College  Park 

BLAISE  F  FROST  (1989)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.A.,  Yankton  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

South  Dakota 

FRANK  F  FRY,  JR.  (1993)  Associate  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  Colorado 

State  University;  D.PE.,  Springfield  College 

ANGELO  F  GADALETO  (1986)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Counseling  and  Educational 
Psychology;  Professor 

B.A.,  Rider  College;  M.Ed.,  University  of 
Delaware;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Virginia 

MARC  GAGNE  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Geology 

B.S.,  University  of  Montreal;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Georgia 

GLORIA  GALANTE  (1993)  Instructor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University 

CLYDE  J.  GALBRAJTH  (1974)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Accounting;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.,  M.B.A.,  Drexel  University;  C.P.A., 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 

GAIL  M.  GALLITANO  (I'in)  Associate 
Professor  of  Mathematics 
B.S.,  Monmouth  College;  M.S.,  Farleigh 
Dickinson  University;  M.A.,  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 
Columbia  University 


ROBERT  J.  GALLOP  (2001)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
Drexel  University 

SUSAN  CANS  (1997)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  New  York  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Chicago 

CONSTANCE  GARCIA-BARRIO  (1990) 
Associate  Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
B.A.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Temple 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

EMILIA  GAROFALO  (2002)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

ROBIN  GARRETT  (1978)  Director,  Women's 
Center;  Assistant  Professor  of  Nursing 
B.S.N.,  Case  Western  Reserve  University;  M.S.N., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  GAULT  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

Marketing 

B.S.,  U.S.  Naval  Academy;  M.B.A.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania;  Ph.D.,  Drexel  University 

KARIN  E.  GEDGE  (1997)  Assistant  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  Lake  Forest  College;  M.A.,  State  University 

of  New  York  at  Brockport;  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 

JAMAL  GHOROGHCHIAN  (1986)  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  University  of  Moshad  (Iran);  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Southampton  (U.K.) 

ELIZABETH  A.  GIANGIULIO  (1972) 
Director,  Career  Development  Center;  Associate 
Professor  of  Educational  Services 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  University 
of  Arizona 

JAMES  THOMAS  GILL  (1995)  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.A.,  Randolph  Macon  CoUege;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 

University  of  Virginia 

PETER  L.  GLIDDEN  (1995)  Associate  Professor 

of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  College  of  Wooster;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Columbia 

University 

JOSEPH  J.  GODEK  III  (1972)  Professor  of  Sports 

Medicine 

B.S.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.S.,  West  Chester 

University 

DENNIS  GODFREY  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  University  of  Northern  Iowa;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan 

STEVEN  C.  GOOD  (1996)  Associate  Professor  of 

Geology 

B.A.,  Augustana  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Colorado 

FELIX  E.  GOODSON  (1998)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Chemistry 

A.B.,  Princeton  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
California,  Berkeley 

MARLENE  GOSS  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Professional  and  Secondary  Education 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Temple  University;  Ph.D.,  Walden 

University 

RONALD  L.  GOUGHER  (1969)  Associate 

Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  Muhlenberg  CoUege;  M.A.,  Lehigh 

University 


HENRY  GRABB  (1992)  Associate  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

B.A.,  University  of  Central  Florida;  M.M., 
Northwestern  University  of  Illinois;  D.M.,  Florida 
State  University 

CHARLES  W.  GRASSEL  (1968)  Associate 

Professor  of  Geography 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

PAUL  D.  GREEN  (1971)  Professor  of  English 
A.B.,  Temple  University;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Han'ard 
University 

JUDITH  J.  GREENAMYER  (1988)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Biology;  Assistant  Professor 
M.S.,  University  of  California;  D.V.M.,  Ohio 
State  University 

ANITA  GREENLEE  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Keyboard  Music 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Juilliard  School  of  Music 

SCOTT  C.  GREENWOOD  (2001)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Literacy 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Westminster  College;  Ed.D.,  Lehigh 

University 

HARVEY  C.  GREISMAN  (1979)  Professor  of 

Sociology 

B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  New  Paltz; 

M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

SHIRLEY  R.  GRICE  (1972)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ed.D., 
Temple  University 

SANDRA  GROSS  (1997)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  M.S.,  North  Dakota  State  University;  Ph.D., 

Kansas  State  University 

FRANK  GROSSHANS  (1975)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Chicago 

CHARLES  E.  GROVE  (1999)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Foreign  Languages 

B.S.,  SHppery  Rock  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pittsburgh 

CHERYL  GUNTER  (1999)  Associate  Professor  of 
Communicative  Disorders 

B.A.,  University  of  Tennessee;  M.A.,  Memphis 
State;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Texas  -  Austin 

SHIV  K.  GUPTA  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Delhi  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Wisconsin;  Ph.D.,  Case  Western  Reserve 

University 

WILLIAM  I.  GUY  (1974)  Instructor  of 
Educational  Services 
A.B.,  Temple  University 

PATRICIA  L.  GYSLING  (1998)  Instructor  of 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.A., 

University  of  Michigan 

SUSAN  STABLER  HAAS  (2002)  Instructor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.N.,  M.S.N.,  Villanova  University 

CYNTHIA  S.  HAGGARD  (1990)  Associate 
Professor  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.A.,  M.A.,  Ed.  D.,  Indiana  University 


Faculty 


WAYNE  HANLEY  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Central  Missouri  State  University; 

Ph.D.,  Universit)'  of  Missouri 

DAN  HANN./^  (1998)  Instructor  of  Instrumental 

Music 

B.M.Ed.,  Temple  University;  M.M.,  University  of 

Colorado 

CHRIS  L.  MANNING  (1995)  Associate  Professor 

of  Instrumental  Music 

B.A.,  B.A.,  University  of  South  Florida;  M.M., 

University  of  Akron;  D.M.A.,  University  of 

Colorado 

JOHN  H.  HANSON  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  University  of  Liberia;  M.A.,  Syracuse 

University;  Ph.D.,  Florida  State  University 

CHARLES  A.  HARDY  III  (1990)  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

JEFFREY  E.  HARRIS  (1983)  Associate  Professor 
of  Health 

B.A.,  University  of  California,  San  Diego; 
D.H.Sc,  M.P.H.,  Loma  Linda  University 

YOKO  HASHIMOTO-SINCL.'UR  (1969) 
Professor  of  Theatre  Arts 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Aoyama  Gakuin  University  (Japan); 
M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Michigan 

JOHN  G.  HEUON  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York;  M.A.,  Ed.M., 

Ed.D.,  Columbia  University 

ANNE  F  HERZOG  (1993)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  College  of  Holy  Cross;  M.A.,  Georgetown 

University;  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  -The  State  University 

THOMAS  J.  HESTON  {\97S)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  History;  Professor 
A.B.,  Gettysburg  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Case 
Western  Reserve  University 

WILLL\M  L.  HEWITT  (1992)  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Adams  State  CoUege;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Wyoming 

JANET  S.  HICKMAN  (1992)  Professor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.N.,  University  of  Bridgeport;  M.S.N., 

Northern  Illinois  University;  Ed.D.,  Temple 

Universit\' 

CAROL  J.  HICKS  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Social  Work 

B.A.,  Lincoln  University;  M.S.W.,  Smith  College 

MARK  HICKMAN  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 
B.A.,  Marshall  University;  M.A.,  Miami 
Universitv  of  Ohio 

ALLAN  B.  HILL  (1997)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Temple  University;  Ed.D.,  The 
Fielding  Institute 

MARGARET  SCHIFF  HILL  (1990)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Art 

B.F.A.,  Kutztown  University;  M.F.A.,  Syracuse 

Universit)' 

STEPHANIE  L.  HINSON  {1992)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Counseling  and 
Educational  Psychology;  Associate  Professor 
A.B.,  Princeton  University;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 
University  of  Virginia 


CHERYL  HODGINS  (1979)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Social  Work 

B.A.,  University  of  New  Hampshire;  M.S.W., 
University  ot  Texas 

FRANK  HOFFMAN  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

A.B.,  University  of  Missouri;  M.A.,  University  of 

Hawaii;  Ph.D.,  University  of  London 

JOHN  HOLINGJAK,  JR.  (1965)  Associate 
Professor  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  Ed.M.,  Temple 
University 

BELLE  HOLLON  (1987)  Associate  Professor  of  Art 
B.FA.,  Philadelphia  CoUege  of  Art;  M.FA., 
University  of  Wisconsin 

AMY  HOYLE  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Elementary  Education 

B.A.,  University  of  Michigan;  M.A.,  Eastern 

Michigan  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  North 

Carolina 

YI-MING  HSU  (1975)  Chairperson,  Department 
of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education;  Professor 
B.A.  National  Taiwan  Universit}';  M.A., 
University  of  Oregon;  D.Ed.,  University  of 
Georgia 

LINDA  HUFF  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  Morgan  State  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pittsburgh 

JOHN  L.  miVES  (1990)  Professor  of  Professional 
and  Secondary  Education 

B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Albany; 
M.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at 
Binghamton;  Ph.D.,  State  University  of  New  York 
at  Albany 

CAROL  ISAACSON-BRISELU  (1988) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Instrumental  Music 
B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York;  M.M., 
Temple  University 

KATHLEEN  JACKSON  {2002)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  West  Chester  State  College;  Ed.D.,  Temple 

University 

JOANN  JAWORKSI  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University';  M.Ed., 

Millersville  University;  Ph.D.,  State  University  of 

New  York  at  Albany 

TAMJVTY  C.  JAMES  (1994)  Associate  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  M.E.,  Ph.D.,  Kent  State  University 

JANE  E.  JEFFREY  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  Memphis  State;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Iowa 

RONN  M.  JENKINS  (1972)  Associate  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  Bucknell 
University;  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ELAINE  B.  JENKS  (1992)  Associate  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 

B.A.,  University  of  Maryland;  M.A.,  Gannon 
University;  Ph.D.,  Pennsylvania  State  University 

ZHEN  JIANG  (2002)  Associate  Professor  of 
Computer  Science 

B.S.,  Shanghai  Jiaotong  University;  M.S.,  Nanjing 
University;  Ph.D.,  Florida  Atlantic  University 


CAROLYN  CONSUELO  JIMENEZ  (1994) 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Sports  Medicine; 
Assistant  Professor 

B.A.,  Colorado  College;  M.S.,  University  of 
Arizona;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

ALLEN  H.JOHNSON  {\91  \)  Associate  Professor 
of  Geology 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  M.S.,  University  of 
Arizona;  Ph.D.,  Case  Western  Reserve  University 

DEIDRE  .ANN  JOHNSON  (1991)  Associate 
Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  Knox  CoUege;  M.A.,  Eastern  Michigan; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Minnesota 

VANESSA  K.  JOHNSON  {\999)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Psychology 

B.S.,  University  of  Washington,  Seattle;  M.A., 
Ph.D.,  University  of  California,  Berkeley 

CLIFFORD  A.JOHNSTON  {\992)  Associate 
Professor  of  Mathematics 
B.S.E.,  Mansfield  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

SUSAN  L.JOHNSTON  (2001)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology 
B.A.,  University  ot  Pennsylvania;  B.S., 
Hahnemann  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

EMLYN  H.JONES  (1968)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Kinesiology;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

JAMES  A.  JONES  (1992)  Associate  Professor  of 

History 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

MILDRED  C.  JOYNER  {\9m  Associate 
Professor  of  Social  Work 
B.S.W.,  Central  State  Universit)';  M.S.W., 
Howard  University 

FRANK  KADERABEK  (1995)  Instructor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

SETH  K.AHN  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of  English 
B.A.,  Wake  Forest  University;  M.A.,  Florida  State 
University;  Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

WALLACE  J.  KAHN  (1977)  Professor  of 

Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 

B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;'M.Ed.,  A.G.S., 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Maryland 

BARBARA  A.  KAUFRVLW  {\9m  Assistant 
Professor  of  Criminal  Justice 
B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S., 
University  of  Pennsylvania;  J.D.,  Temple 
University  School  of  Law 

NELSON  W.  KEITH  (1989)  Professor  of  Sociology 
M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  -The  State  University; 
Barrister-at-law,  The  Honourable  Society  of  the 
Inner  Temple  (U.K.) 

JOHN  J.  KENNEDY  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Political  Science 

B.S.,  M.P.A.,  Kutztown  University;  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

SANDRA  L.  KERR  (1994)  Associate  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  Boston  CoUege;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  State 

University  of  New  York  at  Stony  Brook 

JOHN  J.  KERRIGAN  (1972)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Villanova 

University;  D.Ed.,  Temple  University 


Faculrv" 


JOHN  A.  KINSLOW  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Professional  and  Secondary  Education 

B.A.,  Antioch  University;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

LISA  A.  KIRSCHENBAUM  (1996)  Associate 
Professor  of  History 

A.B.,  Brown  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  California,  Berkeley 

EUGENE  KLEIN  (1967)  Professor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.M.E., Temple  University;  M.M.E.,  Indiana 

University 

SHARON  B.  KLETZIEN  (1991)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Literacy;  Professor 
B.A.,  West  Texas  State  University;  M.A., 
American  University-;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

ROBERT  M.  KLINE  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

Computer  Science 

B.A.,  Millersville  University;  Ph.D.,  Washington 

University 

TERRY  KLINEFELTER  (2mi)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Keyboard  Music 

B.S.Ed.,  M.M.,  West  Chester  University,  M.M., 

Temple  University 

DENNIS  R.  KLINZING  (1976)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Communication  Studies;  Professor 
B.S.,  Clarion  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

MAUREEN  T.  KNABB  (1986)  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Virginia 

KAREN  M.  KOEHLER  (1987)  Associate  Professor 

of  Kinesiology 

B.S.,The  King's  College;  M.A.,  Northern 

Michigan  University;  Ed.D.,  Universit}'  of  North 

Carolina-Greensboro 

MAREILE  A.  KOENIG  (1990)  Associate  Professor 
of  Communicative  Disorders 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Southern  Illinois  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Illinois 

V.  KRISHNA  KUMAR  (1977)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.S.,  Osmania  University  (India);  M.S.,  Indian 

Agricultural  Research  Institute;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Wisconsin-Madison 

ROBERT  S.  KURZINSKY  (1970)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.S.,  Bloomsburg  University;  M.Ed.,  West 
Chester  Universit)';  Ed.D.,  Nova  University 

PETER  T.  KYPER  (1987)  Professor  of  Educational 

Services 

B.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  Ph.D.,  Auburn 

University 

JANET  LACEY  (2000)  Associate  Professor  of 

Health 

B.S.,  Simmons  College;  M.S.,  M.Ed.,  University 

of  Massachusetts;  Dr.P.H.,  University  of  North 

Carolina 

WILLIAM  LALICKER  (1995)  Associate  Professor 
of  English 

B.A.,  Loyola  Marymount  University;  M.A., 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Washington 

MARGARETE  J.  LANDWEHR  (1992) 
Associate  Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
B.S.,  Georgetown  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Harvard  University 


BARBARA  J.  LAPPANO  (1970)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Kinesiology 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

ELIZABETH  LARSEN  (1984)  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  University  of  Minnesota;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Wisconsin-Milwaukee 

RANDALL  E.  LASALLE  (1998)  Director, 
M.BJl.  Program;  Associate  Professor  of  Accounting 
B.S.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.S.,  University  of 
Baltimore;  Ph.D.,  Drexel  University 

KENNETH  L.  LAUDERMILCH  (1968) 
Professor  of  Instrumental  Music 
B.S.,  Lebanon  Valley  College;  M.Mus.,  New 
England  Conservatory  of  Music;  D.M.A., 
Catholic  Universit)-  of  America 

EVAN  A.  LEACH  (1993)  Associate  Professor  of 

Management 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.A.,  West 

Chester  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Yale  University 

HERBERT  LEE  (1968)  Chairperson,  Department 
of  Educational  Services;  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University 

THOMAS  J.  LEGG  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  State  LTniversity  of  New  York  at  Cordand; 

M.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Brockport; 

Ph.D.,  College  of  William  and  Mary 

PATRICIA  LENKOWSKI  (1995)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Library  Services 
B.A.,  Glassboro  State  College;  M.S.,  Drexel 
Universit)';  M.Ed.,  Widener  University 

MONICA  R  LEPORE  (1983)  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.S.,  College  of  Mount  Saint  Vincent;  M.S., 

University-  of  Wisconsin;  Ed.D.,  New  York 

University 

DAVID  G.  LEVASSEUR  (1997)  Associate 
Professor  of  Communication  Studies 
B.A.,  M.A.,  Universit)-  of  Maryland-College 
Park;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Kansas 

JAMES  R  LEWANDOWSKI  (1991)  Professor  of 
Geography  and  Planning 
B.A.,  M.A.,  University  of  Toledo;  Ph.D.,  Ohio 
State  University 

AMY  J.  LIU  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Geography 

B.S.,  Stanford  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Houston  -  University  Park;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Cincinnati 

PETER  H.  LOEDEL  (1996)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Political  Science;  Associate  Professor 
B.A.,  B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  California, 
Santa  Barbara 

EDWARD  J.  LORDAN  (IQQX)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Communication  Studies 
B.A.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Temple 
Universit)';  Ph.D.,  Syracuse  University 

HENRY  R.  LOUSTAU  (1999)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Art 

B.A.,  Dartmouth  College;  M.F.A.,  University  of 
Illinois  -  Urbana-Champaign 

PATRICK  W.  LUCK  (1973)  Associate  Professor  of 

Sociology 

B.A.,  University  of  Vermont;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

Universitv  of  Connecticut 


COLLEEN  T.  LUDEKER  (1990)  Associate 

Professor  of  Music  Education 

B.M.E.,  Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania; 

M.M.,  DePauw  University;  Ed.D.,  West  Virginia 

University 

TIMOTHY  LUTZ  (1998)  Associate  Professor  of 

Geology 

B.A.,  Wesleyan  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

GLENN  LYONS  {\9%A)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Instrumental  Music 

B.A.,  Harpur  College;  M.  Mus.,  Peabody 

Conservatory  of  Music  of  Johns  Hopkins 

University 

CHARLOTTE  MACKEY  (1998)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N.,  Eastern  College;  M.S.N.,  D.Ed.,  Widener 

University 

RODNEY  MADER  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

ROBERT  C.  \L\GGIO  (1991)  Professor  of  Music 

Theory  and  Composition 

B.A.,  Yale  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

MARY  ANN  O.  MAGGITTI  (1970)  Professor  of 
Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
B.A.,  Emannuel  College;  M.S.,  Central 
Connecticut  State  College;  Ph.D.,  Temple 
LIniversity 

DEBORAH  MAHLSTEDT  (1988)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.S.,  State  Universit)-  of  New  York  at  Rockporr, 

M.Ed.,  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

PAUL  L.  MALTBY  (1991)  Professor  of  English 
B.A.,  Thames  Polytechnic;  M.A.,  London 
University;  Ph.D.,  Sussex  University 

LISA  E.  MARANO  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.A.,  Rider  University,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Lehigh 

University 

ROBERT  J.  MARBACH  (1976)  Professor  of 

Political  Science 

B.A.,  La  Salle  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

STEPHEN  MARVIN  {2(m)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Library  Services  in  References 
B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York;  M.L.S., 
Syracuse  University 

THOMAS  M.  MASTRILLI  (1995)  Associate 
Professor  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Penns)'lvania  State  University; 
Ed.D.,  Universit)-  of  Pinsburgh 

EDWARD  M.  MATEJKOVIC  (1995)  Athletic 

Director;  Chairperson,  Department  of  Athletics; 

Professor 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ed.D., 

Temple  University 

CHRISTINE  A.  MATUS  (1999)  Instructor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.A.,  West  Chester  University 

GEORGE  W.  MAXIM  (1972)  Professor  of 
Elementary  Education 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Mansfield  University;  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 


Facultv 


SUNITA  MAYOR  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.A.,  University  of  Calcutta;  B.Ed.,  University  of 

Rohtak;  M.Ed.,  Xa^er  University;  Ed.D., 

University  of  Cincinnati 

GUSTAVE  N.  MBUY  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.A.,  University  of  California;  M.M.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Cincinnati 

KRISTEN  A.  McCASKEY  (2001)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Music  Education 

B.S.,  Millersville  University;  M.Ed.,  Shippensburg 

Universit}' 

CHRISTINA  W.  McCAWLEY  (1971)  Associate 

Professor  of  Library  Services 

B.A.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University;  M.S.L.S., 

Catholic  University-  of  America;  Ph.D.,  Drexel 

University 

DOUGLAS  McCONATHA  (1988)  Professor  of 

Sociology 

B.S.,  University  of  Alabama;  M.A.,  University  of 

Atlanta;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Utah;  M.RH.,  Yale 

University 

JASMIN  T.  McCONATHA  (1990)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  Universin-  of  Utah;  M.S.,  Jacksonville  State 

Universit)"  Ph.D.,  University  of  Georgia 

RALPH  CARL  McCOY  (1996)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Theatre  Arts 

B.A.,  Emory  CoUege;  M.F.A.,  North  CaroUna 
School  of  the  Arts 

MARY  McCULLOUGH  (1977)  Professor  of 

Communication  Studies 

B.A.,  B.S.,  Millersville  Universit>';  M.S.W., 

Universit)'  of  North  Carolina;  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

ANN  McFARLAND  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music  Education 

B.M.,  Susquehanna  University;  M.Mus.,  Temple 

University 

CHARLES  H.  McGEE  (1987)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Management:  Associate  Professor 
B.A.,  University  of  California,  Santa  Barbara; 
M.A.,  University  of  Southern  California;  Ph.D., 
Northwestern  University 

VICKl  A.  McGINLEY  (1997)  Associate  Professor 
of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
B.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

RANDOLPH  T.  McVEY  (1999)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Criminal  Justice 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Sam  Houston  State  University 

JAMES  E.  McVOY  (1979)  Chairperson,  Department 
of  Music  Theory  and  Composition;  Professor 
B.M.,  Syracuse  University;  M.M.,  Ph.D.,  Eastman 
School  of  Music 

SHERI  A.  MELTON  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.A.,  Loyola  University;  M.Ed.,  University  of 

New  Orleans;  Ph.D.,  Louisiana  State  Universit)' 

OWEN  METCALF  (1989)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music 

B.M.,  M.M.,  University  of  Colorado;  D.M., 

Indiana  University 


CHERYL  L.  MICHEAU  (1990)  Associate 
Professor  of  English 

B.S.Ed.,  Millersville  University;  M.A,  Middlebury 
College;  M.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

ELAINE  R.  MILITO  (1981)  Professor  of 

Computer  Science 

B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Stony 

Brook;  M.A.,  City  University  of  New  York, 

Queens  College;  Ph.D.,  Penns)'lvania  State 

University 

LISA  ^^LLHOUS  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 

B.A.,  Macalester  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Minnesota 

FRANK  E.  MILLIMAN  (1960)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Mathematics;  Associate 

Professor 

B.N.S.,  College  of  Holy  Cross;  A.B.,  Hobart 

College;  A.M.,  Columbia  University 

DUANE  D.  AflLNE  (1999)  Director,  M.SA., 
Program;  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 
B.A.,  College  of  William  and  Mary;  Ph.D., 
Universit)-  of  Delaware 

D.ANIEL  MOHAN  (1980)  Associate  Professor  of 

Economics  and  Finance 

B.S.,  B.A.,  Monmouth  College;  M.B.A.,  Bucknell 

University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Rutgers  -  The  State 

Universit)' 

GARRETT  G.  MOLHOLT  (1987)  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  M.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Wisconsin-Madison 

ROBERT  MOMYER  (1986)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Instructional  Media 

B.S.,  Philadelphia  College  of  Art;  M.Ed.,  Lehigh 

University 

CECILY  MOON  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of  Art 
B.F.A.,  Mount  Allison  Univesity;  M.F.A.,  Long 
Island  University 

EDMUNDO  MORALES  (1989)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology;  Professor 
B.A.,  Richmond  College;  M.A.,  New  York 
Universirv;  Ph.D.,  Cit)-  University  of  New  York 

MICHAEL  J.  MORAN  {\9?,\)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Chemistry;  Professor 
B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

JOAN  MARY  MORGAN  (2000)  Instructor  of 
Theatre  Arts 

R.N.,  General  Nursing  Council  for  England  and 
Wales;  B.F.A.,  Brandeis  University 

PAUL  MORGAN  (1999)  Assistant  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education; 

Assistant  Professor 

B.A.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ph.D.,  Columbia 

University 

TANYA  MORGAN  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Health 

B.A.,  M.S.,  University  of  Arkansas;  Ph.D., 

University  of  North  Carolina 

WALENA  C.  MORSE  (1968)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

A.B.,  Duke  Universit)';  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Br)-n  Mawr 

College 


ANNE-MARIE  L.  MOSCATELLI  (1991) 
Assistant  Chairperson,  Department  of  Foreign 
Languages;  Associate  Professor 
B.A.,  Fordham  Universit)-;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Bryn 
Mawr  College 

JOSEPH  G.  MOSER  (1966)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  Rose  Polytechnic  Institute;  M.S.,  Purdue 

Universit)' 

JAMES  L.  MURPHY  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Theatre  Arts 

B.A.,  Potsdam  College;  M.F.A.,  Yale  University 

STERLING  E.  MURRAY  (1972)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Music  History  and  Literature; 

Professor 

B.Mus.,  Universit)'  of  Maryland;  A.M.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Michigan 

ROGER  W.  MUSTALISH  (1978)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Health;  Professor 

A.B.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.S.,  Michigan 

State  University;  M.P.H.,  Ph.D.,  Universit)'  of 

Minnesota 

KOSTAS  MYRSIADES  (1969)  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  University  of  Iowa;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana 

University 

LINDA  S.  MYRSLUDES  (1990)  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  Beaver  College;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana 

Universit)- 

ALI  NAGGAR  (1977)  Professor  of  Accounting 
B.Com.,  Cairo  Universit)';  M.B.A.,  Long  Island 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Oklahoma 

TAHANY  NAGGAR  (1977)  Professor  of 
Economics  and  Finance 

B.Com.,  Rigadh  University;  M.A.,  Long  Island 
University;  Ph.D.,  Universit)-  of  Oklahoma 

CAROL  M.  NAPIERKOWSKI  {\<)%°i)  Associate 
Professor  of  Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 
B.A.,  Temple  University;  M.A.,  ViUanova 
Universit)-;  Ph.D.,  Universin-  of  Connecticut 

REGINALD  NEALY  (1986)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Crim  inal  Justice 

A.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  Pohce  Academy;  B.S., 

Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S.,  Lincoln 

University 

LARRY  A.  NELSON  (1971)  Professor  of  Music 

Theory  and  Composition 

B.Mus.,  Universit)-  of  Denver;  M.Mus.,  Southern 

Illinois  University;  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State 

University 

PAULA  NELSON  (1998)  Instructor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

B.A.,  Universit)-  of  Maryland;  M.M.,  D.M.A., 
University  of  North  Texas 

PATRICIA  A.  NESTER  (1984)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N.,  M.S.N.,  Medical  School  of  Georgia; 
Diploma  in  Nursing,  Gastonia  Memorial  Hospital 

JANA  L.  NESTLERODE  (1986)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Criminal  Justice;  Professor 
B.A.,  Penns)'lvania  State  University;  J. D., 
Widener  Universit)- 

EMILY  T  NEWBOLD  (1970)  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

B.Mus.,  Eastman  School  of  Music;  M.Mus., 
Temple  University;  D.M.A.,  Combs  College 


Facultv 


JOHN  T.  NEWCOMB  (1990)  Associate  Professor 

of  English 

A.B.,  Davidson  CoUege;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Duke 

University 

SARA  E.  NEWELL  (1989)  Associate  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 

A.A.,  Clark  CoUege;  B.A.,  Western  Washington 
University;  M.S.,  University  of  Wyoming;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Utah 

ANTHONY  J.  NICASTRO  (1990)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Physics;  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

VIOREL  NITICA  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Univesity  of  Bucharest;  Ph.D., 

Pennsylvania  State  University 

KAREN  NOLAN  (2001)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.A.,  Grove  City  CoUege;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 

University;  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

ELIZABETH  NOLLEN  (1986)  Instructor  of 

English 

B.A.,  Ohio  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana 

University 

ISAAC  B.  NORRIS  (1986)  Director,  Professional 
Studies;  Instructor  of  Sports  Medicine 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  University 
of  Maryland 

KATHERINE  NORTHROP  {1999)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.F.A., 
University  of  Iowa 

ROBERT  P.  NYE  (1968)  Professor  of  Health 
A.B.,  Gettysburg  CoUege;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 
University;  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

ERIN  O'CONNOR  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  Brandeis  University;  Ph.D.,  Boston  College 

JULIAN  ONDERDONK  {20)01)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Music  History 

B.A.,  Bowdoin  CoUege;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  New  York 

University 

GWENELLE  S.  O'NEAL  {199%)  Associate 
Professor  of  Graduate  Social  Work 
B.A.,  Spelman  CoUege;  M.S.W.,  New  York 
University;  D.S.W.,  Columbia  University 

BRLAN  E  O'NEILL  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Crim  inal  Justice 

B.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.S.W., 
Mar)-wood  CoUege;  Ph.D.,  City  University  of 
New  York 

C.JACK  ORR  (1986)  Professor  of  Communication 

Studies 

B.A.,  Messiah  CoUege;  B.D.,  Eastern  Baptist 

Theological  Seminary;  M.A.,  Northwestern 

Universit)';  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

MARGARET  OTTLEY  (2001)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Kinesiology 

B.A.,  Spelman  CoUege;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D..  New  York 

University 

SHARON  OWENS  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Graduate  Social  Work 

B.A.,  Alabama  A  &  M  University;  M.S.W., 
University  of  Alabama,  Tuscaloosa;  Ph.D.,  Clark 
Atlanta  University 


TERRIE  OZELIS  (1994)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
B.A.,  Eastern  Michigan  University;  M.S., 
National  Louis  Universitj",  Ed.D.,  Northern 
Illinois  University 

RAJUL  PANDYA  {\999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Geology 

B.S.,  University  of  lUinois  at  Urbana-Champaign; 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Washington,  Seattle 

RICHARD  D.  PARSONS  (1990)  Professor  of 

Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 

B.A.,  ViUanova  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Temple 

University 

FREDERICK  R.  PATTON  {\9?,\)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Foreign  Languages; 

Professor 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Temple  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

MARTIN  PATWELL  (1994)  Associate  Professor  of 
Educational  Services 

B.A.,  Manhattan  CoUege;  M.S.,  Marist  CoUege; 
Ed.D.,  Boston  University 

PETER  PAULSEN  (1989)  Instructor  of  Music 
B.M.,  West  Chester  University 

REBECCA  PAULY  (1987)  Professor  of  Foreign 

Languages 

B.A.,  Smith  CoUege;  M.A.,  University  of 

California,  Berkeley;  D.M.L.,  Middlebury  CoUege 

MICHAEL  V.  PEARSON  (1988)  Associate 
Professor  of  Communication  Studies 
B.A.,  lona  CoUege;  M.A.,  WUliam  Patterson 
CoUege;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

MICHAEL  A.  PEICH  (1968)  Professor  of  English 
B.A.,  Wartburg  CoUege;  M.A.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

ROBERT  A.  PELOSO  (1993)  Instructor  of 
Computer  Science 

B.E.S.,  Johns  Hopkins  University;  M.S.,  Carnegie 
MeUon  University 

ROBERT  E.  PENNINGTON  (1966)  Professor  of 

Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.Mus.,  D.Mus.,  Northwestern 

University 

CHRISTIAN  V.  PENNY  (2002)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.S.,  Lock  Haven  University;  M.Ed.,  East 
Stroudsburg  University;  Ph.D.,  Pennsylvania  State 
University 

JULIE  A.  PERONE  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Counseling 

B.S.,  M.A.,  M.RA.,  Ohio  State  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Maryland 

G.  KING  PERRY  (1983)  Instructor  of  Computer 

Science 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Bloomsburg  University 

MERRY  G.  PERRY  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  South  Florida 

W.  BENNETT  PETERS  (1973)  Professor  of 

History 

B.A.,  Pomona  CoUege;  M.A.,  California  State 

University,  San  Francisco;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

California,  Santa  Barbara 

PATRICIA  A.  PFLIEGER  (1988)  Assistant 

Professor  of  English 

B.A.,  University  of  Missouri;  M.A.,  Eastern 

Michigan  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Minnesota 


JASON  PHILUPS  {1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Marketing 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.B.A.,  Texas 

A  &  M  University;  Ph.D.,  Pennsylvania  State 

University 

JANET.  PIPPART-BROWN  (1987)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Music  Education;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.Ed.,  Holy 
Names  CoUege 

THOMAS  W.  PLATT  (1968)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Philosophy;  Professor 

B.A.,  Washington  and  Jefferson  CoUege;  M.A., 

University  of  Pittsburgh;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

JOAN  POLKA  (1990)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Counseling  Services 

B.A.,  Holy  FamUy  CoUege;  M.A.,  West  Chester 

University 

EDWARD  I.  POLLAK  (1977)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  State  University  of  New  York  at 

Binghamton;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Connecticut 

CHERISE  POLLARD  {1999)  Assistant  Professor 
of  English 

B.A.,  Rutgers  -  The  State  University;  M.A., 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Pittsburgh 

YURY  POLSKY  (1989)  Associate  Professor  of 
Political  Science 

B.A.,  M.A.,  University  of  Moscow;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Michigan 

RUTH  PORRJTT  {\99\)  Associate  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

B.A.,  John  CarroU  University;  Ph.D.,  Purdue 

Universin' 

JACK  PORTER  (1968)  Professor  of  Psychology 
B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

LOUIS  H.  PORTER  (1974)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  Ohio  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Howard 

University 

CHARLES  PRICE  (1990)  Professor  of  Music 

History  and  Literature 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Stanford  University 

CATHERINE  M.  PRUDHOE  (1992)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Early  Childhood  and 
Special  Education;  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Delaware 

CATHY  HUAQING  QI  {2Q0\)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
M.Ed.,  Belmont  University;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D., 
Vanderbilt  University 

CAROL  A.  RADICH  (1972)  Professor  of 
Elementary  Education 

B.A.,  Glassboro  State  CoUege;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Maryland 

DENIS  RAIHALL  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Economics  and  Finance 

B.A.,  Bethany  CoUege;  M.B.A.,  Universit)'  of 
Pittsburgh;  Ph.D.,  Pennsylvania  State  University 

GEETHA  RAMANATHAN  (1987)  Director, 
Women's  Studies  Program;  Professor  of  English 
M.A.,  University  of  Bombav;  A.M.,  University  of 
lUinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of  lUinois  at 
Urbana-Champaign 

J.  WESLEY  RANCK  (1999)  Instructor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  West  Chester  University 


flU       Faculty 


JUDITH  D.  RAY  (1978)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

A.B.E.  of  Harris  Teachers  College;  M.A.Ed., 

Washington  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Minnesota 

JOHNT.  REDINGTON  (1992)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Marketing;  Associate  Professor 
B.S.,  M.B.A.,  Temple  University;  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

THOMAS  G.  REED  (1967)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Communication  Studies 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  Ph.D.,  Union  of 
Experimental  Colleges  and  Universities 

HELEN  G.  REID  (1975)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.A.,  B.S.,Te.xas  Woman's  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  New  Orleans 

MARTIN  S.  REMLAND  (1991)  Associate 

Professor  of  Communication  Studies 

B.A.,  Western  Illinois  University;  M.A.,  Central 

Michigan  University;  Ph.D.,  Southern  Illinois 

University 

ARLENE  C.  RENGERT  (1976)  Professor  of 

Geography  and  Planning 

A.B.,  Indiana  University;  M.A.,  Ohio  State 

University;  Ph.D..  University  of  Pennsylvania 

CATHERINE  M^CKETT  RENNER  (1995) 

Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

B.A.,  Nazareth  College  of  Rochester;  M.S., 

Ph.D.,  Ohio  University 

MICHAEL  J.  RENNER  (1992)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  Boise  State  University;  M.S.,  University  of 

Oklahoma;  Ph.D.,  University  of  California, 

Berkeley 

JOEL  M.  RESSNER  (1984)  Associate  Professor  of 

Chemistry 

B.S.,  Lehigh  Universit)",  M.Sc,  University  of 

Sussex;  Ph.D.,  Lehigh  University 

JANE  RICHTER  (1986)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music 

B.S.,  M.M.,  Temple  University;  D.M.A.,  Combs 

College 

RANDALL  H.  RIEGER  (2000)  Associate 

Professor  of  Mathematics 

B.A.,  Bowdoin  College;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University 

of  North  Carolina 

LORETTA  RIESER-DANNER  (1997)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Psychology 

B.S.,  Pennsylvania  State  Universit)';  Ph.D., 

University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

GREGORY  E.  RILEY  (20O2)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  University  of  Alabama;  M.M.,  University  of 

Missouri  -  Kansas  Cit}-;  D.M.A.,  University  of 

Southern  CaUfornia 

MARK  T.  RIMPLE  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Music  Theory  and  Composition 

B.Mus.,  University  of  the  Arts;  M.Mus.,  D.M.A., 

Temple  University 

RALPH  RODRIGUEZ  (1999)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Management 

B.S.,  Philadelphia  CoUege  of  Bible;  M.B.A., 

Johnson  School,  Cornell  University;  Ph.D., 

Temple  University 

WILLIAM  D.  ROSENZWEIG  (1989)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  St.  John's  University;  M.S.,  Long  Island 

Universitv;  Ph.D.,  New  York  University 


SALLY  A.  ROSS  (1988)  Associate  Professor  of 
Social  Work 

B.A.,  Central  State  University;  M.S.W., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

JOHN  R  ROSSO  (1998)  Instructor  of  Foreign 

Languages 

B.A.,  Haverford  College;  M.A.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

HARVEY  ROVINE  (1992)  Professor  of  Theatre  Arts 

B.S.,Towson  State  University;  M.A.,  University  of 

Central  Florida;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Illinois 

ALEXANDER  ROZIN  (2002)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Music  Theory  and  Composition 

B.A.,  University  of  California  at  Berkeley;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

NANCY  J.  RUMHELD  (\9U)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Art 

B.F.A.,  Moore  College  of  Art;  M.S.,  West  Chester 

University;  Ph.D.,  Nova  Southeastern  University 

ELBERT  M.  SADDLER  (1985)  Associate 
Professor  of  Counseling  Center 
A.B.,  Rutgers  -The  State  University;  M.Ed., 
Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

JANE  WESTON  SADDORIS  (1971)  Instructor 
of  Theatre  Arts 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.  in 
Education,  ViUanova  University 

MICHEL  H.  SAGE  (1994)  Associate  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

M.A.,  San  Diego  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
CaUfornia,  Berkeley 

DONNA  R.  SANDERSON  (2001)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Elementary  Education 
B.S.,  James  Madison  Universit>';  M.S.,  Widener 
University;  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

BHIM  SANDHU  (1978)  Associate  Professor  of 
Political  Science 

B.A.,  Punjab  University  (India);  M.A.,  University 
of  Texas;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Missouri 

GOPAL  SANKARAN  (1989)  Professor  of  Health 
B.S.,  M.B.,  Maulanaazad  Medical  College  (India); 
M.D.,  All  India  Institute  of  Medical  Sciences; 
M.P.H.,  Dr.  P.H.,  University  of  California, 
Berkeley 

FRANK  SAUERS  (1986)  Instructor  of  English 
B.A.,  ViUanova  University;  M.A.,  Purdue 
University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Colorado 

JUDITH  A.  SCHEFFLER  (1985)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  English;  Associate 

Professor 

A.B.,  Muhlenburg  College;  M.A.,  Purdue 

University;  M..^..  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

ROBERTA  L.  SCHINI  (2001)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Economics  and  Finance 

B.S.,  Virginia  Commonwealth  University;  M.A., 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

CHERYL  SCHLAMB  (2002)  Instructor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.S.N.,  University 

of  Pennsylvania 

STACEY  SCHLAU  (1985)  Professor  of  Foreign 

Languages 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Queens  CoUege;  Ph.D.,  City 

University  of  New  York 


LISELOTTE  M.  SCHMIDT  (1970)  Professor  of 

Music  History  and  Literature 
B.Mus.,  Converse  CoUege;  M.A.,  New  York 
University;  M.Mus.,  Manhattan  School  of  Music; 
Ed.D.,  Columbia  University;  Fulbright  Scholar 
(University  of  Munich,  Germany,  1957-58) 

FRAUKE  I.  SCHNELL  (1992)  Associate  Professor 

of  Political  Science 

B.A.,  University  of  Tuebingen,  Germany;  M.A., 

Ph.D.,  State  University  of  New  York  at  Stony 

Brook 

R.  GERALD  SCHOELKOPF  (1969) 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Library  Services; 

Assistant  Professor 

B.A.,  VUlanova  University;  M.S.L.S.,  McGUI 

University 

RANI  G.  SELVANATHAN  iX'iid)  Associate 

Professor  of  Management 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University  of  DeUii  (India); 

Ph.D.,  University  of  Paris 

GUS  V.  SERMAS  (1971)  Professor  of  Art 

B.A.,  Baylor  University;  B.F.A.,  B.S.,  University  of 

Texas;  M.F.A.,  Universit)'  of  Wisconsin 

LEIGH  S.  SHAFFER  (1980)  Professor  of 
Anthropology  and  Sociology 
B.S.,  M.S.,  Wichita  State  University;  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

NL\URAJ.  SHEEHAN  (1980)  Professor  of  Health 
B.S.,  LoweU  Technological  Institute;  M.S., 
University  of  LoweU;  Sc.D.,  University  of 
Pittsburgh 

ELEANOR  R  SHEVLIN  (2001)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

A.B.,  Georgetown  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Maryland 

CAROL  SHLOSS  (1987)  Professor  of  English 
B.A.,  Swarthmore  CoUege;  M.A.T.,  Harvard 
University;  Ph.D.,  Brandeis  University 

CHARLES  V.  SHORTEN  (1989)  Professor  cf 

Health 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute  and 

State  Universit)';  Ph.D.,  Clemson  University 

DAVID  1.  SIEGEL  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of 

Social  Work 

B.A.,  Brooklyn  CoUege;  M.S.W.,  University  of 

Michigan;  D.S.W.,  Columbia  University 

HAROLD  L.  SKELTON  {l^bS)  Associate 
Professor  of  Physics 

B.S.,  Case  Institute  of  Technology;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
Universit)'  of  Delaware 

SUSAN  C.  SLANINKA  (\97S)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Nursing;  Professor 
B.S.N.,  VUlanova  Universit)-;  M.S.N.,  University 
of  Pennsylvania;  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

FRANCES  A.  SLOSTAD  (1996)  Assistant 
Chairperson,  Department  of  Elementary  Education; 
Associate  Professor 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  VUlanova 
University;  Ed.D.,  Immaculata  CoUege 

LESLIE  B.  SLUSHER  (1991)  Director. 

Pharmaceutical  Product  Development  Program; 

Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  North  CaroUna  State  University;  Ph.D., 

Pennsylvania  State  University 

ARTHUR  R.  SMITH  (1994)  Associate  Professor  of 

Geology  and  Astronomy 

A.B.,  M.S.,  Ed.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 


Faculu' 


CARL  M.  SMITH  (1971)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Accounting 

B.B.A.,  M.B.A.,  Temple  Universlt)';  C.P.A., 

Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 

LUANNE  SMITH  (19%'))  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  University  of  Kentucky;  M.A.,  Murray  State 

University;  M.F.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University 

PAUL  K.  SMITH  (1985)  Associate  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Florida  State  Universit}-;  Ph.D., 

Southern  Illinois  University 

THOMAS  H.  SMITH  (2Q02)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Mathematics 

B.S.,  St.  Joseph's  University;  Ed.M.,  West  Chester 
University;  Ed.D.,  Temple  University 

ROBERTA  SNOW  (1989)  Professor  of 

Management 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Syracuse  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Pennsylvania 

CAROLYN  SORISIO  (\999)  Assistant  Professor 
of  English 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 

H.  LEE  SOUTHALL  (1967)  Professor  of 
Instrumental  Music 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Trenton 
State  College 

ALICE  J.  SPEH  (1989)  Director,  Liberal  Studies 
Program;  Associate  Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
A.B.,  Brown  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Bryn  Mawr 
College 

THOMAS  W.  SPIERLING  (1972)  Psychologist, 

Counseling  Center;  Professor 

B.A.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State  University 

LYNN  KELL  SPRADUN  (1995)  Associate 
Professor  of  Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 
B.A.,  University  of  Kentucky;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D., 
University  of  Louisville 

DAVID  A.  SPRENKLE  (1987)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Vocal  and  Choral  Music;  Associate 

Professor 

B.S.,  M.M.,  West  Chester  University;  D.M.A., 

University  of  Maryland 

ELIZABETH  LEEANN  SROGI  (1991) 
Professor  of  Geology  and  Astronomy 
B.S.,  Yale  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Pennsylvania 

CHRISTINE  STACKHOUSE  (1999)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  Allentown  CoUege  of  St.  Francis;  M.S.N., 
Indiana  University  of  Pennsylvania 

TIMOTHY  K.  STARN  (1996)  Assistant  Professor 

of  Chemistry 

B.S.,  Ph.D.,  Indiana  University 

W.  CRAIG  STEVENS  (1992)  Assistant 

Chairperson,  Department  of  Kinesiology;  Associate 

Professor 

B.A.,  Johns  Hopkins  Universit)';  M.S.,  Springfield 

College;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

LINDA  S.  STEVENSON  (2002)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Political  Science 
B.A.,  College  of  Wooster;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pittsburgh 

JOHN  STOLAR  (1988)  Professor  of  Geology  and 

Astronomy 

B.S.,  Shippensburg  University;  M.Ed.,  West 

Chester  University;  Ed.D.,  Pennsylvania  State 

Universitv 


PAUL  STOLLER  (1980)  Professor  of  Anthropology 

and  Sociology 

B.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh;  M.S.,  Georgetown 

University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Texas  at  Austin 

ANN  COGHLAN  STOWE  (1984)  Chairperson. 
Department  of  Nursing;  Assistant  Professor 
B.S.N.,  M.S.N.,  University  of  Pennsylvania; 
Diploma  in  Nursing,  Thomas  Jefferson  University 

FREDERICK  R.  STRUCKMEYER  (1966) 

Professor  of  Philosophy 

B.A.,  King's  CoUege  (N.Y.);  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  Boston 

University 

ELENA  F  STUART  (1977)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Communicative  Disorders;  Assistant 

Professor 

B.A.,  Emerson  College;  M.S.,  Purdue  University 

GRETCHEN  STUDLIEN-WEBB  (1999) 

Assistant  Professor  of  Kinesiology 

B.F.A.,  Ohio  State  University;  M.F.A.,  Temple 

University 

RICHARD  H.  SWAIN  (1994)  Director  of  Library 
Services;  Associate  Professor 
B.A.,  Oakland  University;  M.Phil.,  M.A.,  Yale 
University;  A.M.L.S.,  University  of  Michigan 

ROBERT  J.  SZABO  (1974)  Associate  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.S.,  Kutztown  University;  M.Ed.,  Ed.D.,  Lehigh 

University 

WACLAW  SZYMANSKl  (1985)  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

M.A.,  Jagiellonian  University  (Poland);  Ph.D., 

D.Sc,  Polish  Academy  of  Sciences 

JOHN  C.TACHOVSKY  (1970)  Professor  of 

Geography 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  West  Chester  University;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Cincinnati 

LIN  TAN  (1989)  Professor  of  Mathematics 
B.S.,  M.A.,  Zhejian  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  California,  Los  Angeles 

BRADLEY  E.  TAYLOR  (1973)  Assutant 

Professor  of  Kinesiology 

B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Temple  Universit}- 

CHRISTOPHER  J.  TEUTSCH  (1989)  Associate 
Professor  of  English 

M.A.,  Jagiellonian  University  (Poland);  Ph.D., 
University  of  Wisconsin-Milwaukee 

LaTONYA  THAMES-LEONARD  (2001) 

Assistant  Professor  of  History 

B.A.,  Tougaloo  College;  M.A.,  University  of 

Mississippi 

SANDRA  J.  THIELZ  (1973)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.S.,  Southern  Connecticut  State  College;  M.Ed., 

West  Chester  University 

DIANA  R  THOMAS  (1995)  Professor  of  Library 

Services 

B.A.,  University  of  Maryland,  M.B.A.,  Cornell 

University;  M.A.,  University  of  Chicago 

WESLEY  W.  THOMAS  (1979)  Professor  of 

Management 

B.S.,  University  of  Maine;  M.S.,  West  Chester 

University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Cincinnati 

PHILIP  A.  THOMPSEN  (1997)  Associate 
Professor  of  Communication  Studies 
B.S.,  Northern  Arizona  University;  M.S., 
University  of  Southwestern  Louisiana;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Utah 


BRENT  WESLEY  THOMPSON  (2001) 
Assistant  Professor  of  Nursing 
B.S.N.,  M.S.,  University  of  Delaware;  D.N.Sc, 
Widener  University 

HARRY  TIEBOUT  III  (1992)  Professor  of  Biology 
B.A.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Florida 

VICTORL\  TISCHIO  (1998)  Assistant  Professor 
of  English 

B.S.,  M.A.,  Southern  Connecticut  State 
University;  Ph.D.,  State  University  of  New  York 
at  Albany 

THOMAS  W.TOUN  (1992)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Economics  and  Finance 
B.A.,  University  of  Southwestern  Louisiana; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Houston 

SANDRA  M.TOMKOWICZ  (1993)  Director, 

Pre-Law  Program;  Associate  Professor  of  Marketing 

(Legal  Studies) 

B.S.,  La  Salle  University;  J.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

JOHN  R.  TOWNSEND  (1998)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Chemistry 

B.A.,  University  of  Delaware;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
Cornell  University 

THOMAS  H.  TOVWSEND  (1999)  Instructor  of 
Computer  Science 

B.A.,  Oberlin  College;  M.Sc,  West  Chester 
University;  M.Sc,  Ph.D.,  Purdue  University 

THOMAS  TREADWELL  (1968)  Professor  of 

Psychology 

B.A.,  Morris  Harvey  College;  M.S.,  University  of 

Bridgeport;  Moreno  Institute,  New  York 

(Certified  Psychodramatist,  T.E.P);  Ed.D., 

Temple  University 

C.  JAMES  TROTMAN  (1979)  Professor  of 

English 

B.A.,  M.Ed.,  Pennsylvania  State  University; 

Ed.D.,  Columbia  University 

MICHELLE  L.  TUCKER  (1988)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.,  Michigan  State  University;  M.S.N., 
University  of  Michigan 

DONNA  L.  USHER  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 

Art 

B.F.A.,  B.S.,  Moore  CoUege  of  Art;  M.FA., 

University  of  Delaware 

MARIA  VAN  LIEW  (1998)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Foreign  Languages 

B.A.,  Clark  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
California,  San  Diego 

ANDREA  VARRICCHIO  (1986)  Associate 
Professor  of  Foreign  Languages 
B.A.,  Chestnut  Hill  College;  M.A.,  Middlebury 
College;  Ph.D.,  Temple  University 

CARLA  LEE  VERDER.AME  (\99i)  Assistant 
Professor  of  English 

A.B.,  Smith  CoUege;  M.A.T,  Brown  University; 
Ph.D.,  Universit)'  of  Michigan 

RICHARD  K.  VELETA  (1965)  Professor  of 

Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  M.Mus.,  D.Mus.,  Northwestern 

University 

JOHN  VILLELLA  (1986)  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Instrumental  Music:  Associate 

Professor 

B.S.,  M.M.,  West  Chester  University;  Ed.D., 

Widener  University 


FaculU' 


KARIN  A.E.  VOLKWEIN  (1992)  Associate 
Professor  of  Kinesiology 

Staatsexamen,  University  of  Marburg,  Germany; 
Ph.D.,  University  of  Tennessee 

JACQUES  C.  VOOIS  (1969)  Professor  of 
Keyboard  Music 

B.Mus.,  Oberlin  College;  M.Mus.,  Manhattan 
School  of  Music;  D.M.A.,  Peabody  Conservatory 
of  Music  of  Johns  Hopkins  University 

RICHARD  W.  VOSS  (1996)  Associate  Professor  of 
Social  Work 

B.A.,  St.  Fidehs  College;  M.S.W.,  Fordhara 
University;  D.P.C.,  Loyola  College 

RUSSELL  H.  VREELAND  (\9%9)  Associate 
Professor  of  Biology 

B.S.,  M.S.,  Rutgers  -The  State  University;  Ph.D., 
University  of  Nebraska 

JACK  WABER  (1976)  Professor  of  Biology 

B.A.,  Hope  College  (Mich.);  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Hawaii 

G.  ALAN  WAGNER  (1967)  Professor  of  Vocal  and 
Choral  Music 

B.Mus.,  Northwestern  University;  M.F.A., 
Carnegie  Mellon  University 

MATTHEW  M.  WAITE  (2001)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Physics 

B.A.,  Gettysburg  College;  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Delaware 

DONNA  WANDRY  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
B.S.,  University  of  Wisconsin  -  Eau  Claire; 
M.Ed.,  University  of  Utah;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
Florida 

CHERYL  L.  WANKO  (1993)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  English:  Associate  Professor 
B.A.,  New  York  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Pennsylvania  State  University 

BARBARA  BROWN  WANTA  (1983)  Assistant 

Professor  of  Nursing 

B.S.N. ,  University  of  Pennsylvania;  M.S.,  Oxford 

University  (U.K.);  M.S.N.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 

JOHN  W.  WARD  (1961)  Associate  Professor  of 

English 

A.B.,  M.A.,  Miami  University;  Ph.D.,  University 

of  Delaware 

JOHN  W.  WEAVER  (1973)  Professor  of  Computer 

Science 

B.A.,  Eastern  Mennonite  University",  M.A., 

University  of  Delaware;  Ph.D.,  The  Johns 

Hopkins  University 

RICHARD  J.  WEBSTER  (1967)  Director, 

Interdisciplinary  Studies;  Chairperson,  Department  of 

History:  Professor 

A.B.,  Lafayette  College;  M.A.,  University  of 

Delaware;  A.M.,  Ph.D.,  University  of 

Pennsylvania 


MICHAEL  S.WEISS  (1978)  Professor  of 
Communicative  Disorders 
B.A.,  Long  Island  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 
Purdue  University 

JOAN  M.WELCH  (1990)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Geography  and  Planning;  Professor 
B.A.,  St.  Cloud  State  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Boston  University 

LESLEY  A.  WELSH  (1991)  Associate  Professor  of 
Professional  and  Secondary  Education 
B.A.,  Eastern  Connecticut  State  University;  M.A., 
Ph.D.,  LIniversit)'  of  Connecticut 

LINWOOD  J.  WHITE  (1968)  Associate  Professor 
of  Art 

B.F.A.,  Maryland  Institute  College  of  Art; 
M.F.A.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

JEROME  M.  WILLLAMS  (1985)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Foreign  Languages;  Professor 
B.A.,  Haverford  College;  M.A.,  M.Phil.,  Ph.D., 
Yale  University 

JOHN  G.  WILLIAMS  (1992)  Associate  Professor 
of  Kinesiology 

B.Ed.,  University  of  Nottingham,  U.K.;  M.Ed., 
University  of  Bath,  U.K.;  Ph.D.,  University  of 
London,  U.K. 

THOMAS  WINTERS  (1988)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Music  History  and  Literature 
B.A.,  BuckneU  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
University  of  Pennsylvania 

SALLY  A.  WINTERTON  (2001)  Assistant 
Professor  of  Elementary  Education 
B.A.,  Immaculata  College;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 
University;  D.Ed.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

C.  GIL  WISWALL  (1985)  Chairperson, 
Department  of  Geology  and  Astronomy;  Professor 
B.A.,  Colgate  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  University 
of  Montana 

PAUL  WOLFSON  (1978)  Associate  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

A.B.,  Columbia  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

University  of  Chicago 

RICHARD  I.  WOODRUFF  (1966)  Professor  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  Ursinus  College;  M.Ed.,  West  Chester 

University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Pennsylvania 

JOAN  WOOLFREY  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Philosophy 

B.S.,  North  Dakota  State  University;  M.A.,The 

New  School  for  Social  Research;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Oregon 

FRANCES  H.  WREN  (1989)  Assistant  Professor 
of  Psychology 

B.A.,  West  Chester  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Temple  University 


JUUET  WUNSCH  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Theatre  Arts 

B.A.,  Wesleyan  University;  M.F.A.,  Carnegie 
Mellon  University 

RICHARD  W.  WYATT  (1989)  Associate  Professor 
of  Computer  Science 

B.A.,  B.S.,  M.A.,  University  of  Melbourne;  Ph.D., 
University  of  California,  Berkeley;  M.Sc,  State 
University  of  New  York  at  Buffalo 

JANE  A.  WYSS  (1990)  Associate  Professor  of  Vocal 

and  Choral  Music 

B.M.,  M.M.,  D.M.A.,  University  of  Texas  at 

Austin 

CHEER- SUN  D.  YANG  (2000)  Associate 
Professor  of  Computer  Science 
B.S.,  M.B.A.,  Tamkang  University;  M.S.,  Kansas 
State  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Delaware 

JOANN  YAWORSKI  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Literacy 

B.A.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.Ed., 
MillersviUe  Universit}';  Ph.D.,  State  University  of 
New  York  at  Albany 

K.  HYOEJIN  YOON  (2002)  Assistant  Professor  of 

English 

B.S.,  B.A.,  M.A.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute 

and  State  University;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Albany 

STEFANI  YORGES  (1996)  Assistant  Chairperson, 

Department  of  Psychology;  Associate  Professor 
B.A.,  Hastings  CoUege;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Purdue 
L'niversit)' 

EDEN  ZABAT  (1997)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Nursing 

B.S.N.,  Pennsylvania  State  University;  M.S.N., 

Villanova  University 

RAYMOND  ZETTS  (1997)  Associate  Professor  of 

Kinesiology 

B.A.,  Texas  Lutheran  College;  M.A.,  Southwest 

Texas  State  University;  Ed.D.,  Universit\-  of 

Georgia- Athens 

NAIJIAN  ZHANG  (1999)  Assistant  Professor  of 
Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 
B.A.,  Xi'an  Foreign  Languages  Institute  (China); 
M.A.,  M.A.,  Bowhng  Green  University 

PETER  ZIMMER  (2000)  Assistant  Professor  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  M.S.,  University  of  Wisconsin;  Ph.D., 

University  of  Kansas 

MARTIN  ZLOTOWSKI  (1973)  Associate 
Professor  of  Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education 
A.B.,  New  York  University;  M.A.,  Ph.D., 
Michigan  State  Universin.' 

ANTHONY  W.  ZUMPETTA  (1988)  Associate 
Professor  of  Anthropology  and  Sociology 
B.A.,  Edinboro  University;  M.A.,  Ed.D.,  Indiana 
Universit)'  of  Pennsylvania 


Adjunct  Faculty 

ARTHUR  R.  BARTOLOZZI  Department  of 

Sports  Medicine 

A.B.,  Brown  University;  M.D.,  University  of 

California,  San  Diego 


DAVID  K.  COHOON  Department  of 

Mathematics 

B.S.,  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology;  M.S., 

Ph.D.,  Purdue  University;  David  Ross  Research 

Associateship  at  Institut  Henri  Poincare 


JOSEPH  M.  DIBUSSOLO  Pharmaceutical 

Product  Development  Program 

B.S.,  West  Chester  University;  M.S.,  Ph.D., 

Drexel  University 


Faculn- 


CUFFORD  W.  FAWCETT  Department  of 
Sports  Medicine 

B.S.N.,  Cedan-Ule  CoUege;  M.Ed.,  University  of 
\'irginia;  M.S.N.,  University  of  Delaware 

GML  M.  FELLOWS  Department  of  Health 
B.S.,  Universit)-  of  Arizona;  M.S.,  West  Chester 
Universit)' 

CHARLES  A.  GAK&^KDepartment  of  Geology 

and  Astronomy 

B.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Case 

Institute  of  TechnoIog\' 

PrnTUS  GOTKIN  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Universit}'  of  Pennsj-lvania;  M.Ed.,  Beaver 
CoUege;  Ph.D.,  Pacific  Western  Universit)' 

JOANNE  S.  GR.A.NT  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Moranan  College;  M.S.,  Drexel  University 

ZDEN1C\  L.  JON.\K  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  Charles  Universiti,';  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Yale 
University 


BRIAN  KELLAR,  Department  of  Health 
A.S.,  West  Chester  University;  B.A.,  M.S., 
Eastern  College 

LORI  KILLLAN,  Department  of  Health 
A.S.,  Delaware  Count)'  Community  College; 
B.A.,  University  of  Redlands 

CARYN  LENNON  Department  of  Biology 

B.S.,  Quirmipiac  College 

EDWIN  T.  LURCOTT  Department  of  Geology 

and  Astronomy 

B.S.,  S)Tacuse  Universit)' 

HELEN  E.  MARTIN  Department  of  Counselor. 

Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 

B.A.,  Kings  College,  N.Y.;  M.A.,  West  Chester 

University 

WILLIAM  K.  NATALE  Department  of  Biology 
A.B.,  Oberlin  College;  M.D.,  University  of 
Pittsburgh 


RONALD  J.  PEIC-UA  Department  of  Psychology 
B.S.,  Pennsyhfania  State  University;  Ph.D., 

Michigan  State  Universit)' 

RICR.\RD  RUPKALVaS  Department  of  Biology 
B.S.,  IlUnois  Benedictine  College;  M.D.,  Rush 
Medical  College 

HOWARD  L.  RUSSELL  Department  of  Biology 
B.A.,  Boston  Universit)';  V.M.D.,  Universit)'  of 
Pennsylvania;  M.P.H.,  Tulane  University 

MICHAEL  J.  WARHOL  Department  of  Biology 
A.B.,  Princeton  University;  M.D.,  University  of 
Pittsburgh 

JACK  C.A.RLTON  WHITE  Department  of 

Biology 

B.S.,  M.D.,  Universit}'  of  Vermont;  Diplomate, 

American  Board  of  Surgery 

SUSAN  WrX  Department  of  Health 

B.S.,  West  Chester  Universit)-;  M.S.,  Eastern  College 


Emeriti 

LOIS  W.  .ALT,  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

•ALEXANDER  ANTONOWICH,  Music 

Education 

ELEANOR  ASHKENAZ,  Chemistry 
DOROTm'  D.  BAILEY,  English 
•HAROLD  W.  BENDA,  Dean  of  Education 
•BERNICE  BERN.-\TZ,  Dean  of  Women 
ROBERT  BERNH,-\RDT,  Biology 
V.  ROBERT  BIELSKI,  Geography  and  Planning 
WALTER  R.  BL.AIR,  Educational  Services 
•JAMES  A.  BINNEY,  English 
•MARY  M.  BUSS,  Biology 
JUSTO  B.  BRAVO,  Chemistry 

WALTER  E.  BUECHELE,  JR.,  Counselor, 

Secondary,  and  Professional  Education 

H.J.AMES  BURGWYN,  History 

ROBERT  E.  CARLSON,  History 

•PAUL  E.  CARSON,  Music 

DIANE  O.  CASAGRANDE,  Communication 
Studies 

CONRAD  E.  CHALICK,  Counseling 

NONA  E.  CHERN,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

K.  ELEANOR  CHRISTENSEN,  Childhood 
Studies  and  Reading 

CARMELA  L.  CINQUINA,  Biology 

ISlARY  E.  CLEARY,  Education 

♦JOHN  W.  CLOKEY,  Dean  of  Arts  and  Utters 

B.ARBARA  J.  COATES,  Physical  Education 

BERNARD  B.  COHEN,  Psychology 

•FA\'E  A.  COLLICOTT,  Librarian 

GERALDINE  C.  CONBEER,  Librarian 

STELLA  CONAWAY,  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

EDWIN  B.  COTTRELL,  Health  and  Physical 
Education 

•GEORGE  R.  CRESSMAN,  Education 


GEORGANN  CULLEN,  Biology 

•KATHERINE  M.  DENWORTH,  Education 

PHILUP  DONLEY.  Health  and  Physical  Education 

RAYMOND  A.  DO\TE,  History 

NLARC  L.  DURAND,  Chemistry 

'MARK  M.  EVANS,  Director  of  Student  Teaching 

•MARION  FARNHAM,^rt 

RUTH  FELDNL\N,  Psychology 

ALBERT  E.  HLANO,  Vice  President  fir  Academic 
Affairs  and  Mathematical  Sciences 

B\T10N  Y.  FLECK,  Dean  of  Social  Sciences 

THOM-^SJ.  FR.ANCELLA,  Criminal  Justice 

HOWARD  FREEMAJSI,  Counseling 

JOHN  FURLOW,  Physical  Education 

CHARLES  GANGEMI,  Keyboard  Music 

CHARLOTTE  M.  GOOD,  Education 

•ROBERT  B.  GORDON,  Sciences 

'ANNE  M.  GOSHEN,  Psychology 

'IVURI.AM  S.  GOTTLIEB,  Music 

ROBERT  GREENE,  Foreign  Languages 

SEYMOUR  S.  GREENBERG,  Geology 

THELMA  J.  GREENWOOD,  Biology 

MADEL'i'N  GUTWIRTH,  Foreign  Languages 

•SAUNDR,'^  M.  H.'U.L,  Theatre  Arts 

H.  THEODORE  HALLMAS,Art 

JOAN  HASSELQUIST,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

'JACK  GARDNER  HAWTHORNE,  ^rt 

•CHARLES  W.  HEATHCOTE,  Social  Sciences 

THOMAS  J.  HELM,  Social  Sciences 

WALTER  J.  HIPPLE,  Philosophy 

FRANK  (i  HELMS,  Library 

'PHIUP  R  HOGGARD,  Education 

PATRICL\  CARLEY  JOHNSON,  History 


PAMELA  JUDSON-RHODES  (HEMPHILL), 
Art 

CAROLYN  B.  KEEFE,  Communication  Studies 

MARY  KEETZ,  Literacy 

JAMES  KELLEHER,  English 

•W.  GLENN  KILLINGER,  Dean  of  Men 

•CHARLOTIT  E.  KING,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

MARY  L.  KLINE,  Nursing 

'CARSIE  C.  KULP,  Education 

•GEORGE  LANGDON,  Geography  and  Planning 

'MURIEL  LEACH,  Health  and  Physical EducaHon 

JAMES  E.  LHEUREUX,  Mathematics 

MELMN  M.  LORBACK,  Physical  Education 

SANDRA  F  MATHER,  Geology  and  Astronomy 

•GRACE  D.  MCCARTHY,  English 

'EMIL  H.  MESSIKOMER,  Dean 

JAMES  S.  MILNE,  Political  Science 

•LLOYD  C.  NUTCHELL,  Dean  of  Music 

WILLIAM  M.  MOREHOUSE,  Theatre  Arts 

SHIRLEY  A.  MUNGER,  Music 

•DOROTHY  R.  NOWACK,  Health 

BERNARD  S.  OLDSEY,  English 

WILLIAM  R.  OX'ERLEASE,  Biology 

JACK  \.  OWENS,  Health  and PhysUat Education 

RUTH  PETKOFSKV'.  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

•DOROTm"  R.AMSEY,  English 

GEORGE  F  REED,  Geology  and  Astronomy 

N.  RUTH  REED,  Health 

RUSSELL  K.  RICKERT,  Physics  and  Dean  of 
Sciences  and  Mathemalia 

WALTER  NATHANIEL  RIDLEY,  EducaHon 

ALFRED  D.  ROBERTS,  Foreign  Languages 


tDeceased 


Faculty 


RONALD  F.  ROMIG,  Biology 
*B.  PAUL  ROSS,  Education 
PHILIP  B.  RUDNICK,  Chemistry 
•HELEN  RUSSELL,  Library  Science 
C.  RUTH  S.^OL,  English 

GLENN  W.  S,AM\JElSO^,  Anthropology  and 

Sociology 

HAROLD  R.  SANDS,  Psychology 

HARRY  SCHALK,  History 

'GERTRUDE  K.  SCHMIDT,  Music 

JOHN  SHEA,  Political  Science 

JANE  E.  SHEPPARD,  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

'CAROLYN  G.  SIMMENDINGER,  ^rt 

W.  CLYDE  SKILLEN,  Biology 

•KENNETH  C.  SLAGLE,  Dean  of  Arts  and  Sciences 

PHILIP  D.  SMITH,  JR.,  Foreign  Languages 

NORBERT  C.  SOLDON,  History 


•CHARLES  A.  SPRENKLE,  Dean  of  Music 

RUTH  S.  STANLEY,  Mathematical  Sciences 

R.  GODFREY  STUDENMUND,  Education 

RUSSELL  L.  STURZEBECKER,  Dean  of 
Health  and  Physical  Education 

JANE  B.  SWAN,  History 

ROY  D.  SWEET,  Vocal  and  Choral  Music 

'EARL  F  SYKES,  President 

ELINOR  Z.  TAYLOR,  Physical  Education  and 
Dean  of  Administration 

'JOSEPH  M.  THORSON,  Business  Administration 

'WILLARD  J.  TREZISE,  Biology 

'EDWARD  T  TWARDOWSKI,  Health  and 

Physical  Education 

'S.  EUZABETH  TYSON,  English 

JOY  VANDEVER,  Music  Education 

•EARLE  C.  WATERS,  Health  and  Physical 
Education 


RUTHI.WEIDNER,.^r/ 

SOL  WEISS,  Mathematical  Sciences 

THEODORA  L.  WEST,  English 

BENJAMIN  WHITTEN,  Keyboard  Musk 

ARDIS  M.  WILLL\MS,  Chemistry 

LOIS  M.  WILLIAMS,  Music 

H.\RRY  WILKINSON,  Music 

LLOYD  C.  WILKINSON,  Physical EducaHon 

♦JOSEPHINE  E.  WILSON,  English 

JAMES  J.  WRIGHT,  Musu  Theory  and  Composition 

EDWIN  L.  YOUMANS,  Dean  of  Health  and 
Physical  Education 

CARLOS  R.  ZIEGLER,  Childhood  Studies  and 
Reading 

•EDWARD  ZIMMER,  Music 

CORNELIA  ZIMMERMAN,  Childhood  Studies 
and  Reading 


tDeceased 


Honorary  Degrees 

1984 

ANDREW  WYETH,  Doctor  of  Humane  Letters 

1993 

ENULIE  KESSEL  ASPLUNDH,  Doctor  of  Public 

Service 
CONSTANCE  E.  CLAYTON,  Doctor  of  Public 

Service 

1994 

DAVID  P  ROSELLE,  Doctor  of  Lam 
CHARLES  E.  SWOPE,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 


1995 

WILUAM  A  BOUCHER,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 

1996 

CURT  WELDON,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 
EUNOR  Z.  TAYLOR,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 

1997 

JACOB  LAWRENCE,  Dof/oro/fmf/Jr/j 

1998 

CHAIM  POTOK,  Doctor  of  Humane  Letters 
MARIAN  WASHINGTON,  Doctor  of  Public 
Service 


1999 

PASQUALE  W.  "PAT-  CROCE,  JR.,  Doctor  of 

Public  Service 
CLIFFORD  E.  DeBAPTISTE,  Doctor  of  Law 

2000 

DAVID  R  HOLVTCK,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 
IRWIN  H.  POLISHOOK,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 

2001 

ALAN  G.  MACDIARMID,  Doctor  of  Science 
F  EUGENE  DIXON,  JR.,  Doctor  of  Public  Service 


President's  Medallion  for  Service 

1986 

EMILIE  KESSEL  ASPLUNDH 
JANICE  WEIR  ETSHIED 
W.  GLENN  KILLINGER 

1987 

THOMAS  B.  CHAMBERS 
T.  FRANK  GANNON 
WILLLAM  E.  HUGHES 
MICHAEL  J.  JONES 
SARA  L.  SCHMID 
KURT  STRAUSS 

1989 

ATSUSHI  MINOHHARA 
MASAYOSHI TANAKA 

1990 

CLIFFORD  E.  DeBAPTISTE 


1991 

MORGAN  DOWD 

ADEL^TNE  KELLY 
ALV^'  KELLY 

1992 

STANLEY  J.  YAROSEWICK 

1993 

ALBERT  E.  FILANO 


1994 

JAA1ES  L.  LARSON 
F  JOSEPH  LOEPER 

1995 

CARLOS  R.  ZIEGLER 


1997 

RAY  M.  MINCARELLI,  JR. 
ROSANNE  D.  MINCARELU 

1998 

HENRY  A.  JORDAN 
BARBARA  M.  JORDAN 
JOHN  F  UNRUH 

1999 

LITTLETON  G.  MITCHELL 

2000 

MURIEL  HERMAN 
LARRY  MENDTE 

2002 

MARTIN  R.  BERNDT 


Trustees  Achievement  Awards 


1985 

FRANK  GROSSHANS 

CHARLES  C.  SOUFAS,JR. 

1986 

RICHARD  W.  nELDS 

1987 

MARSHALL  J.  BECKER 
WACLAW  SZYMANSKI 


1989 

CHRISTOPHER  BUCKLEY 
LARRY  A.  NELSON 

1990 

PAUL  STOLLER 

1992 

MARY  E.  CRAWFORD 


1995 

RICHARD  E.  BLAKE 

FRANK  E.  nSH 

1996 

JEROME  M.  WILLIAMS 

1997 

STERLING  E.  MURRAY 


Faculrv 


1998 

KOSTAS  MYRSIADES 


Distinguished  Teaching  Chairs 

1982-1983 

FRANK  A.  SMITH 
JANE  B.  SWAN 

Faculty  Merit  Awards 

1982-1983 

DIANE  O.  CASAGRANDE 
MARY  A.  KEETZ 
JANE  E.  SHEPPARD 
CHARLES  H.  STUART 

1983-1984 

ELIZABETH  A.  GIANGIULIO 
KOSTAS  MYRSIADES 
LOIS  WILLIAMS 

1984-1985 

FRANK  E.  MILLIMAN 
RUTH  I.  WEIDNER 

1986-1987 

G.  WINFIELD  FAJRCHILD 
KOSTAS  MYRSIADES 

1987-1988 

WALLACE  J.  KAHN 
STERLING  E.  MURRAY 
ARLENE  C.  RENGERT 


2000 

RICHARD  EPSTEIN 
CLAUDE  FOSTER 


2001 

RUSSELL  VREELAND 

2002 

STACEY  SCHLAU 


1988-1989 

PAMELA  HEMPHILL 

1989-1990 

IVLADELYN  GUTWIRTH 
JOAN  HASSELQUIST 

1990-1991 

BENJAMIN  WHITTEN 

1991-1992 

CHRISTOPHER  BUCKLEY 

1992-1993 

WILLIAM  TOROP 

1993-1994 

LOUIS  CASCL^TO 

1995-1996 

T.  OBINKARAM  ECHEWA 
PHILIP  RUDNICK 


Lindhack  Distinguished  Teaching  Award 


1998 

ERMINIO  BRAIDOTTI 

1999 

SUSAN  C.  SLANINKA 


2000 

W.  BENNETT  PETERS 

2001 

ANNE-MARIE  MOSCATELLI 


Irving  Hersch  Cohen  Faculty  Merit  Award 


1990 

DOROTHY  NOWACK 

1991 

GEORGE  CLAGHORN 

1993 

JUDITH  nNKEL 

1994 

RICHARD  VELETA 

Distinguished  Faculty  Awards 

1974-1975 

THOMAS  A.  EGAN,  Teaching 
E.  RILEY  HOLMAN,  Teaching 
MICHAEL  A.  PEICH,  Teaching 

1975-1976 

WALTER  E.  BUECHELE.JR.,  Service 
CARMELA  L.  CINaWNA,  Service 
PHILLIP  B.  DONLEY,  Service 
GEORGE  W.  MAXIM,  Teaching 
EDWARD  N.  NORRIS,  Service 
PHILIP  D.  SMITH,  JR.,  Teaching 
WILLIAM  TOROP  Teaching 


1995 

DEBORAH  MAHLSTEDT 

1997 

IRENE  G.  SHUR 

1998 

DIANE  O.  CASAGRANDE 

1999 

JOHN  J.  TURNER 


1976-1977 

ROBERT  E.  BYTNAR,  Service 

ANDREW  E.  DINNIMAN,  Service 

IRENE  G.  SHUR,  Teaching 

RUSSELL  L.  STURZEBECKER,  Service 

1977-1978 

MARC  L.  DURAND  and  ROBERT  F  FOERY 

(Joint  Project),  Service 
BERNARD  S.  OLDSEY,  Service 
GEORGE  F  REED,  Teaching 
RICHARD  I.  WOODRUFF  Teaching 

1978-1979 

ROBERT  E.  CARLSON,  Service 
JOHN  J.  TURNER,  JR.,  Teaching 
C.  RALPH  VERNO,  Teaching 
ROBERT  H.  WEISS,  Service 


1996-1997 

RICHARD  E.  BLAKE 
REBECCA  PAULY 
ELISE  A.  TRIANO 

1997-1998 

H.JAMES  BURGWi'N 
JASMIN  T.  MCCONATHA 

1998-1999 

DONNA  L.  USHER 
PAUL  A.  STOLLER 

1999-2000 

LEIGH  SHAFFER 
RICHARD  WOODRUFF 

2000-2001 

MARTHA  POTVIN 
KARIN  VOLKWEIN 

2001-2002 

RONALD  GOUGHER 


2002 

GAIL  BOLLIN 


2001 

ROBERT  MAGGIO 

KENNETH  L.  LAUDERMILCH 

2002 

HENRY  GRABB 


1979-1980 

CAROLYN  B.  KEEFE,  Teaching 
JOHN  A.  MANGRAVITE,  Teaching 
PHILIP  D.  SMITH,  JR.,  Service 
NORBERT  C.  SOLDON,  Service 

1980-1981 

LOUIS  A.  CASCIATO,  Teaching 
PHILIP  B.  RUDNICK,  Service 
FRANK  A.  SMITH,  JR.,  Teaching 
JANE  B.  SWAN,  Teaching 
JOSEPH  M.THORSON,  Service 


ACADEMIC  CALENDAR  2003-2005 


FALL 

August  23  and  24 
August  25 

September  1 
September  21 
October  6 
October  13  -  14 
November  26 
December  1 
December  6-7 
December  8 
December  9-13 
December  14 


SEMESTER  2003 

Residence  halls  open 

Classes  begin  -  8  a.m. 

Late  Registration  and  Drop/Add 

Labor  Day  (no  classes) 

Rosh  Hashanah* 

Yom  Kippur* 

Fall  Break  (no  classes) 

Thanksgiving  recess  begins  —  8  a.m. 

Thanksgiving  recess  ends  -  8  a.m. 

Reading  days 

Last  day  of  classes 

Examination  period 

Commencement 


FALL 

August  28  and  29 
August  30 

September  6 
September  16 
September  25 
October  18  -  19 
November  24 
November  29 
December  11-12 
December  13 
December  14-18 
December  19 


SEMESTER  2004 

Residence  halls  open 

Classes  begin  -  8  a.m. 

Late  Registration  and  Drop/ Add 

Labor  Day  (no  classes) 

Rosh  Hashanah* 

Yom  Kippur' 

Fall  Break  (no  classes) 

Thanksgiving  recess  begins  -  8  a.m. 

Thanksgi\'ing  recess  ends  -  8  a.m. 

Reading  days 

Last  day  of  classes 

Examination  period 

Commencement 


January  12 

January  19 

March  5 
March  15 
April  6 
April  9 
April  30 
May  1  -  2 
May  3-7 
Mav8 


SPRING  SEMESTER  2004 

Classes  begin  -  8  a.m. 

Late  Registration  and  Drop/Add 

Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.  Day 

(no  classes) 

Spring  break  begins  -  5  p.m. 

Spring  break  ends  -  8  a.m. 

Passover' 

Good  Friday* 

Last  day  of  classes 

Reading  days 

Examination  period 

Commencement 


Please  consult  the  current  course  schedule  and  the  University's 
including  the  one  for  summer. 


SPRING  SEMESTER  2005 

January  10 

Classes  begin  -  8  a.m. 

Late  Registration  and  Drop/ Add 

January  17 

Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.  Day 

(no  classes) 

March  4 

Spring  break  begins  -  5  p.m. 

March  14 

Spring  break  ends  -  8  a.m. 

March  25 

Good  Friday' 

April  24 

Passover* 

AprU  29 

Last  day  of  classes 

April  30  -  ] 

May  1             Reading  davs 

May  2-6 

Examination  period 

May  7 

Commencement 

Web  site  (www.i 

ivcupa.edu)  for  the  most  up-to-date  calendars. 

'Although  the  University'  will  be  in  session,  no  examinations  are  to  be  administered  on  these  major  Christian  and  Jewish  holv  days.  All  members  of  the  academic 
community'  are  also  expected  to  be  considerate  of  and  provide  appropriate  accommodations  to  students  of  other  faiths  when  assignments,  exams,  and  other  course 
requirements  fall  on  the  major  holy  davs  of  their  reUgions. 


University  Policy 

When  storm  conditions  affect  the  operation  of  the  Universirv', 
announcements  are  made  over  local  radio  and  TV  stations  via  a 
system  of  code  numbers  keyed  to  affected  schools.  Prefixes 
indicate  whether  the  school  wiU  be  closed  or  open  later  than 
usual.  The  Universir\''s  numbers  and  applicable  prefixes  are  853 
for  canceDation  of  day  classes  and  2853  for  evening  classes. 
On  Tuesday  or  Thursday,  either  a  nvo-hour  delay  or  class  cancel- 
lation wtU  be  called.  Two-hour  delays  on  these  days  will  mean 
that  8  a.m.  classes  are  cancelled,  and  the  class  normally  starting 
at  9:30  a.m.  will  start  at  10  a.m.  and  continue  to  10:50  a.m. 
On  Monday,  Wednesday,  or  Friday,  a  one-hour  delay  means 
that  the  8  a.m.  class  is  cancelled.  A  two-hour  delay  means 
that  both  the  8  a.m.  and  9  a.m.  classes  are  cancelled. 
Most  radio  stations  begin  announcements  around  6  a.m.  The 
school  closings  are  usually  repeated  about  once  each  half-hour. 
For  evening  classes,  a  decision  to  cancel  wiU  be  made  around 


for  Storm  Closings 

noon,  and  announcements  should  begin  around  1  p.m.  Although 
classes  may  be  cancelled,  essential  personnel  must  report  to 
work.  People  should  not  call  Public  Safety  for  school  closing 
information,  since  it  ties  up  phone  lines  that  must  be  kept  clear 
for  emergencies.  Storm  closing  information  is  available  on: 


Philadelphia  radio: 
la'W  1060  AiM 
WCAU  1210  AM 
\VnL  560  AM 
VWEN  950  .\M 
WSSJ1310AM 
WDAS  1480  AM 
WDAS  105.3  FM 
WKDN  106.9  FM 


Local  Radio: 
WCOJ  1420  AM 
WCHE1520AM 
WJBR  1290  AM 
WSBA  910  AM 
WILM  1450  AM 
WCUR  91.7  FM 
WARM  103  FM 
WLAN  97  FM 


Television: 
NBC  TV  10 
WTXF  FOXTV  29 
WGAL  TV  8 

Web: 

www.k)'wl060.com 

www.nbclO.com 


Telephone: 

Universir\'  Information  Desk 
610-436-1000 


Campus  Map 


North  Campus 


*  Shuttle  bus  stop 

E   Emergency  phones 
^§  Student  parking* 
fjijijl  Faculty/Staff  parking* 
IM  Faculty/Staff/Student  parking* 
M^  Visitor  parking 

"University  decal  required.  Lot 

restrictions  designated  by 

posted  signs,  which  take 

precedent  over  published 

materials. 
A  separate  map  designating 
parl<ing  for  the  handicapped 
is  available  at  Public  Safety 
in  the  Peoples  Maintenance 
Building. 


South  Campus 


Borough  of  West  Chester 


TIBSEBHr 


Chester  County 


Inde: 


Academic 

Affairs,  29-35 

Calendar,  166 

Classification,  See  Student  Standing 

Development  Program,  30 

Dishonest)'  Policy,  46-47 

Foundations,  37 

Passport,  8 

Policies,  Exception  to,  52 

Policies  and  Procedures,  40-53 

Renewal  Policy,  49 

Standards:  Probation  and  Dismissal, 
Maintenance  of,  48-49 
Acceptance  Fee,  11 
Accommodations,  ii 
Accounting,  Department  of,  57 
Accreditation,  ii 
Acti\'ities,  26-29 
ADA 

Classroom  Modifications  Appeals 
Procedure,  32-33 

Policy  and  Accommodations,  ii,  53 
Adding  a  Course,  42 
Adjunct  Faculty,  162-163 
Administration,  151 
Admission 

Requirements,  7-8 

to  Teacher  Education,  145-146 

to  West  Chester  University,  7-9 
Admissions  Staff,  9 
Adult  Studies,  34 
Advanced  Placement  Program,  50 
Affirmative  Action  Policy,  ii 
African- American  Studies,  See  Ethnic 

Smdies  Program 
Air  Force  ROTC,  34,  81-82 
Alumni  Association,  29 
American  Studies  Program,  107 
Anthropolog)'  and  Sociology, 

Department  of,  57-59 
Anticipated  Time  for  Degree 

Completion,  51 
Appeals  to  Fee  and  Reftind  Policies,  11 
Applicable  Catalog  Year,  36 
Application 

Fee,  11 

for  Admission,  7-8 
Applied  Music,  Department  of  124-126 
Aralia  Press,  35 
Armed  Services  Programs,  34 
Armed  Services  Reserve  Officer  Candidate 

Program  (ROC),  34 
Armv  ROTC,  34,  81 
Art  ' 

Collections,  6 

Department  of,  59-62 
Assessment,  30 

Astronomy,  See  Geology  and  Astronomy 
Athlete  Absence  Policy,  44 
Athletic  Training,  See  Sports  Medicine 
Athletic  Program,  Intercollegiate,  28-29 
Attendance  Policy,  44 
Audit  Fee,  11 


Auditing  Privileges,  43 

Awards,  See  Scholarships  and  Awards 

B 

Baccalaureate  Degree  Requirements,  36-40 
Biology,  Department  of  62-65 
Board  of 

Directors,  Alumni  Association,  150 

Directors,  Fund  for  West  Chester 
University  of  Pennsylvania,  150 

Directors,  West  Chester  University 
Foundation,  150 

Governors,  150 
Bookstore,  23 
Bus  Transportation  on  Campus,  23 


Calendar,  Academic,  166 
Campus 

and  Facilities,  4-6 

Description  of,  4—5 

Map,  167 
Career  Planning  and  Placement  Services,  23 
Catalog  Year,  Applicable,  36 
Certification 

Admission  for,  8 

Teaching,  145-147 
Changing  Majors,  42 
Chemistr}',  Department  of  65-68 
Chemistry-Biology,  See  Chemistry,  Pre- 

Medical  Program 
Chester  County  Map,  169 
Children's  Center,  23 
Citizenship  Education  (formerly  Social 

Studies),  68 
Class  Load,  See  Full-time  status 
Classification 

Degree  -  Definitions,  40 

of  Students,  21-22 
Classroom  Behavior,  Disruptive,  47-48 
CLER  34 

Closing,  Storm,  Policy  for,  166 
Coaching,  See  Kinesiology 
College  Level  Examination  Program 

(CLEP),  34 
College  Literature,  35 
Commencement  Fee,  11 
Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania,  150 
Communicable  Diseases  (immunization  for 

student  teachers),  24 
Communication  Studies, 

Department  of,  68-70 
Communications  Directory,  ii 
Communicative  Disorders, 

Department  of  71 
Community  Development,  25 
Commuters,  See  Off-Campus  Students 
Comparative  Literature  Studies  Program, 

107-109,  See  also  EngUsh 
Computer  Science,  Department  of,  72— Ti 
Computing  Services,  See  Information 

Services 
Continuing  Education,  See  Adult  Smdies 


Correspondence  Courses  Policy,  50 

Council  of  Trustees,  150 

Counseling  and  Educational  Psvchology, 

Department  of  74 
Counseling  and  Psychological  Sen'ices 

Department,  23-24 
Counseling  Center,  23-24 
Course 

Audit  Fee,  1 1 

Prefixes,  Guide  to,  56 
Creative  Writing,  See  English 
Credit  By  Examination,  43 

Fee,  11 
Criminal  Justice,  Department  of  74—76 
Cumulative  Grade  Point  Average,  44—45 

Required  for  Graduation,  51 
Cut  Polic>',  44 

D 

Damage  Fee,  1 1 
Dance,  See  Kinesiolog}' 
Darlington  Herbarium,  5 
Daycare,  See  Children's  Center 
Deadline  for  Application,  7 
Dean's  List,  48 
Degree 

Classification  -  Definitions,  40 

Completion,  51 

Programs, 

Graduate,  35 
Undergraduate,  55 

Requirements,  36-40,  See  also  Individual 
Program  Listings 
Dental  Hygiene,  See  Health 
Description  of  the  Campus,  4-5 
Dining  Accommodations,  22-23,  See  also 

Aleal  Fee 
Directions  to  the  Universitj',  4 
Director\'  Information  -  Rights  and  Privacy 

Act  of  1974,  52 
Disabilities 

Services  for  Students  with,  32 

Students  with,  8 
Dishonesty  Policy,  Student 

Academic,  46—47 
Dismissal,  Academic,  48-49 
Disruptive  Classroom  Beha\'ior,  47-48 
Distributive  Requirements,  37-38 
Diverse  Communities  Requirement,  37,  38 
Double  Major,  41 
Driver  Education,  See  Kinesiology 
Dropping  a  Course,  42 
Dual  Degrees,  41 

and  Majors,  36,  41 


Early  Admission,  7 

Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education, 

Department  of,  76-78 
Earth  Science,  See  Geolog)'  and  Astronomy 
Economics  and  Finance, 

Department  of  78-80 
Educational 

Development,  Department  of,  80-82 


Index 


Educational,  cont'd. 

Psychology,  See  Counseling  and 

Educational  Psychology 
Services  Fee,  9 
Elementary  Education, 

Department  of,  82-84 
Emeriti,  163-164 
Engineering,  See  Physics 
English,  Department  of,  84-88 
Enrollment,  3 
Environmental 

Education  Program,  139-140 
Health,  See  Department  of  Health 
Programs,  31 
Ethnic  Studies  Program,  109 
Evening  Studies,  See  Adult  Studies 
Exception  to  Academic  PoUcies,  52 
Excused  Absences  Policy  for  University- 
Sanctioned  Events,  44 
Exemption  from  Final  Examinations,  44 
Experiential  Learning  Credits,  50 


Faculty,  152-163 

Faculty  Awards,  163-165 

Family  Educational  Rights  and  Privacy 

Act.  52-53 
Federal 

Parent  Loan  for  Undergraduate  Students 
(PLUS),  13 

PeU  Grant,  13 

Perkins  Loan  Program,  13 

Stafford  Loan  Program,  13 

Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 
Grant  (FSEOG),  13 

Work  Study  Program,  13 
Fees  and  Expenses,  9-11 
Field  Experiences,  School  Assignments,  41 
Film  Theory  and  Criticism,  See  Comparative 

Literature 
Final  Examination,  Exemption  from,  44 
Finance,  See  Economics  and  Finance 
Financial  Aid,  12-21 
Foreign 

Culture  Clusters,  40 

Language  and  Culture 
Requirements,  39-40 

Languages,  Department  of,  88-93 

Students,  See  International  Students 
Former  Students,  Readmission  of,  8-9 
Francis  Harvey  Green  Library,  6 
Fraternities,  27 
Frederick  Douglass 

Institute,  3 

Society,  3-4 
French,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Full-Time  Status,  40 


GI  Bill,  See  Veterans  Affairs 
General 

Education  Requirements,  36-39 

Fee,  9 
Geography  and  Planning, 

Department  of,  94-96 
German,  See  Foreign  Languages 


Geology 

and  Astronomy,  Department  of,  96-98 

Museum,  5 
Grade  Point  Average,  Cumulative 

(GPA),  44-45 
Grade 

Appeals,  45-46 

Changes,  45 

Reports,  44 
Grading  System,  44 
Graduate 

Credit  (for  Undergraduates),  43-44 

Studies,  35 
Graduation 

Fee,  See  Commencement  Fee 

Honors,  51 

Responsibility  for  satisfying 
requirements,  36 

Requirements,  51 
Grants,  13 
Greek 

Letter  Organizations,  27-28 

Life  and  Student  Organizations,  24 

See  also  Foreign  Languages 
Green  Library,  6 
Guaranteed  Student  Loan,  See  Federal 

Stafford  Loan  Program 
Guide  to  the  Catalog,  56 

H 

Health 

and  Physical  Education,  See  Kinesiology 

and  Physical  Education  Majors  Fees,  11 

Center  Fee,  9 

Department  of,  98-102 

Services,  24-25 
Hebrew,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Hispanic-American  Studies,  See  Ethnic 

Studies  Program 
Historical  Properties,  6 
History 

Department  of,  102-105 

of  the  University,  3 
Holocaust  Studies,  Minor  in,  109 
Honor  Societies,  28 
Honors 

Graduation,  51 

Program,  29-30,  105-106 
Housing 

Assignments,  22 

Deposit,  11 

Fee,  9-10 

Off-Campus,  23 

On-Campus,  22 

Refunds,  11 
How  to  Reach  West  Chester,  4 

I 

Identification  Card  Fee,  10,  11 

Independent  Study,  43 

IndividuaUzed  Instruction,  43 

Infirmary,  See  Health  Services 

Information  Sciences,  See  Computer  Science 

Information  Services,  5 

Institute  for  Women,  4 

Instructional 

I  Certificate,  146-147 

II  Certificate,  146-147 


Instrument  Rental  Fee,  11 
Insurance 

Programs,  24 

Requirements  for  International 
Students,  8 
Intention  to  Graduate,  Required  Notice,  51 
Intercollegiate  Athletic  Program,  28-29 
Interdisciplinary 

Programs,  106-111 

Requirement,  37,  38-39 
International  Education,  30 
International  Students,  8 

Insurance  Requirements,  8 

Services  Fee,  10 
Internships,  33-34 

Introducing  West  Chester  University,  3-4 
Italian,  See  Foreign  Languages 


Jewrish-American  Studies,  See  Ethnic  Studies 

Program 
Journal  of  the  Hellenic  Diaspora,  35 
Journalism,  See  EngUsh 
Judicial  Affairs  and  Community 

Development,  25 
Junior  Year  Abroad  Program,  89,  See  also 

International  Education 

K 

Key  to  Symbols,  55 

Kinesiology,  Department  of,  111-115 


Languages,  See  Foreign  Languages 

Late  Registration  Fee,  11 

Latin,  See  Foreign  Languages 

Latin- American  Studies  Program,  109-110 

Learning  Assistance  and  Resource 

Center,  31-32 
LiabiUty  Insurance  Requirement  for 

Students  in  Nursing,  129 
Liberal  Studies  Program,  116 
Library 

Francis  Harvey  Green,  6 

Music,  6 
Life  Learning  Experience,  See  Experiential 

Learning  Credits 
Linguistics  Program,  110 
Literacy,  Department  of,  117 
Literature,  See  English 
Loans,  13 

Location  of  the  University,  4 
Lost  Key  Replacement  Fee,  11 

M 

Mail  Service,  25 
Majors,  Changing,  42 

See  also  Individual  Programs  of  Study 
Management,  Department  of,  118-119 
Map  of 

the  Campus,  167 

Chester  County,  169 

West  Chester  Borough,  168 
Marketing,  Department  of,  119-120 
Married  Students  (Housing),  22 
Mathematics,  Department  of,  120-122 
Meal 

Fee,  10 


Inde 


Meal,  cont'd. 

Plans,  See  Dining  Accommodations 

Refunds,  11 
Media  Organizations,  Student,  28 
Militan-  Science,  80-82 
Minor  Fields  of  Study,  41 
Mission  of  the  University,  tide  page 
Multicultural  Affairs,  25 
Music 

Applied  Music,  Department  of,  124—126 

Education,  Department  of  126 

Histor)'  and  Literature, 
Department  of,  127 

Instrument  Rental  Fees,  11 

Librar}',  6 

School'  of,  122-128 

Theory  and  Composition,  Department 
of,  127-128 
Musical  Organizations,  28 

N 

Name  Changes,  52 

National  Student  Exchange  Program,  30 

Native-American  Studies,  See  Ethnic  Studies 

New  Student  Programs,  25 

Noncredit  Courses,  See  Adult  Studies 

Nondegree  Smdent  Application  Fee,  11 

Nondegree  Students,  40,  See  also  Adult 

Smdies 
Nondiscrimination  Policy,  ii 
Notice  of  Intention  to  Graduate,  51 
Nursing,  Department  of,  128-130 

o 

Observatory,  5 
Off-Campus 

and  Commuter  Services,  23 

Housing,  23 

Students,  22 
Office 

for  Adult  Smdies,  34 

of  the  Associate  Provost,  54 
On-Campus  Housing,  22 
Organizations,  27-28 
Orientation  Programs  (New  Student 

Programs),  25 
Overloads,  40-41 
Overseas  Smdv,  See  International  Education 


Parent  Loan  for  Undergraduate  Students, 

Federal  (PLUS),  13 
Parking 

Decal,  See  Vehicle  Registration 

Fees,  11 

Improvement  Fee,  9 
Partial  Payment  Poliq',  10-11 
Pass/Fail  Policy,  43 
Passport,  Academic,  8 
Payment  of  Fees,  10 

Peace  and  Conflict  Studies  Program,  110 
Pell  Grant,  Federal,  13 
Pennsylvania  State  System  Visiting  Student 

Program,  30-31 
Perkins  Loan  Program,  Federal,  13 
Pharmaceutical  Product  Development,  131 
Philosophy,  Department  of,  131-133 
Physical 


Education,  Department  of.  See 
Kinesiology 

Education  Uniforms  (Fees),  11 

Examinations,  8,  24—25 

Fitness,  See  Kinesiology 
Physics,  Department  of,  133-135 
Placement,  23 

Credentials  Fee,  11 
Planetarium,  5 

Planning,  See  Geography  and  Planning 
Policy  on  Disruptive  Classroom  Behavior, 

47-48 
Political  Science,  Depanment  of,  135-137 
Portfolio  Assessment  Fee,  1 1 
Portuguese,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Post  Office,  See  Mail  Service 
Praxis  Series  Professional  Assessments,  146 
Pre-Business,  See  Economics  and  Finance, 

Management,  and  Marketing 
Pre-Engineering,  31,  133-134 
Pre-Law,  31,  See  also  Political  Science 
Pre-Major  Academic  Advising  Program,  31 
Pre-Medical  Program,  31,  138 
Pre-Professional  Study,  31 
Pre-Theology,  31,  See  also  Philosophy 
Probation,  Academic,  48-49 
Professional 

and  Secondary  Education, 
Department  of  138-140 

Education  Requirements,  138-139 

Organizations,  27 

Smdies,  116 
Proficiency  (English  and  mathematics),  36 
Programs 

Graduate,  35-36 

of  Study  and  Course  Offerings,  56 

Undergraduate,  55 
Psychological  Services,  23-24 
Psychology,  Department  of,  140-141 
Public 

Health,  See  Department  of  Health 

Management,  Minor  in,  136 

Safety,  25 
Publications  and  Media  Organizations 

(Smdent),  28 


Quad,  The,  28 


R 


Radio  Station,  See  Station  WCUR 
Reading,  See  Literacy 
Readmission 

of  Dismissed  Smdents,  49 

of  Former  Swdents,  8-9 
Readmitted  Students  (Housing),  22 
Recreation  and  Leisure  Programs,  28 
Reftind  Policy,  11 
Religion,  See  Philosophy 
Religious  Organizations,  27 
Renewal  Policy,  Academic,  49 
Repeat  Course  Procedure,  43 
Repeating  Courses,  42 
Required  Notice  of  Intention  to 

Graduate,  51 
Requirements 

for  Admission,  7-8 

for  the  Baccalaureate  Degree,  36 


for  General  Education,  36-39 

for  Graduation,  51 
Residence  Lite  and  Housing  Services,  22 
Resident 

Credit  Requirement,  51 

Smdents,  21-22 
Respiratory  Care,  See  Health 
Responsibility  (for  satisfying  graduation 

requirements),  36 
Rights  and  Privacy  Act,  52-53 
Robert  B.  Gordon  Namral  Area  for 

Environmental  Smdies,  5-6 
ROTC  Programs,  34,  80-82 
Russian,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Russian  Smdies  Program,  111 


Safety  Education,  See  Kinesiology 

SAT,V 

Scholarly  Publications,  35 

Scholarships  and  Awards,  13-21 

School  Assignments  for  Field  Experiences,  41 

Second  Degrees,  8,  41 

Secondary  Education,  See  Professional  and 

Secondare  Education 
Security,  See  Public  Safety 
Serpentine,  The,  28 
Servdce  Learning  and  Volunteer 

Programs,  26 
Service  Organizations,  27 
Services  for  Smdents  with  Disabilities,  32 
Sex-ual  Harassment  Policy,  ii 
Short-Term  Emergency  Loan,  13 
Snow  Days,  See  Storm  Closing  Policy 
Social  Smdies  Program,  See  Citizenship 

Education 
Social  Work,  Department  of,  141-143 
Sociology,  See  ^Anthropology  and  Sociology 
Sororities,  27-28 
Spanish,  See  Foreign  Languages 
Special  Collections,  See  Francis  Harvey 

Green  Library 
Special  Education,  See  Early  Childhood  and 

Special  Education 
Speech 

and  Hearing  Clinic,  6 

Pathology,  See  Communicative  Disorders 
Sports,  See  Intercollegiate  Athletic  Program 
Sports  Medicine,  Department  of,  143-145 
SSI,  26 

Fee,  9 
Stafford  Loan  Program,  Federal,  13 
State 

Grants,  13 

System  of  Higher  Education,  150 
Station  WCUR,  28 
Stams,  Full-Time,  40 
Storm  Closing  Policy,  166 
Strucmre  of  Academic  ^Affairs,  54 
Smdent 

Academic  Dishonesty  Policy,  46-47 

Activities,  26-28 

Affairs,  21-29 

Athlete  Absence  Policy,  44 

Attendance  Policy,  44 

Class  Load,  See  Full-Time  Stams 

Consumer  Rights  and  Responsibilities, 
12-13 


Index 


Student,  cont'd. 

Government,  See  SSI 

Name  Changes,  52 

Newspaper,  See  The  Quad 

Organizations,  27-28 

Services,  Incorporated  (SSI),  26 
Fee,  9 

Standing,  40 

Teaching,  146 

Teaching  Eligibility,  82,  146 

Union  Expansion  Fee,  9 
Summer  Sessions,  34 
Supplemental  Educational  Opportunity 

Grant,  Federal  (FSEOG),  13 
Sykes  Union  Building,  26 


Taking  Courses 

Off  Campus,  49-50 

Out  of  Sequence,  42 
Teacher  Education,  Admission  to,  145-146 
Teaching 

Certificates,  146-147 


Certification  Programs,  145-147 
Theatre  Arts,  Department  of,  147-148 
Toxicology,  See  Chemistr}' 
Transcript  Fee,  11 
Transcripts,  51 
Transfer 

of  Credit,  50 

Students,  7-8 

Students  Housing,  22 
Tuition,  9 
Tutoring  Center,  See  Learning  Assistance 

and  Resource  Center 

u 

Uncollectible  Check  Policy,  11 
Undergraduate  Programs,  55 


Values  Statement,  title  page 
Vehicle  Registration,  25-26 
Veterans  Affairs,  34 
Visiting  Student  Program,  30-31 
Volunteer  Programs,  26 


w 

WCUR,  28 

Wellness  Center,  See  Health  Services 
West  Chester  Borough,  Map  of,  168 
West  Chester,  How  to  Reach,  4 
Withdrawal/Enrollment  Change  and  Aid, 

12 
Withdrawal  from  the  University,  42 
Withdrawals  from  Housing,  22 
Withdravnng  from  a  Course,  42 
Women's 

Center,  26 

Studies  Program,  148-149 
Work  Study  Program,  Federal,  13 
Writing 

Emphasis  Courses,  38 

Program,  33 

See  also  English 

X-Y-Z 

Yearbook,  See  The  Serpentine 


Department  Telephone  Numbers 

College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  (610)  436-3521 

Anthropology/Sociology 436-2556 

Art 436-2755 

Biology 436-2538 

Chemistry 436-2631 

Communication  Studies    436-2500 

Computer  Science 436-2204 

English 436-2822 

Foreign  Languages    436-2700 

Geology  and  Astronomy 436-2570 

History 436-2201 

Mathematics     436-2440 

Philosophy   436-2841 

Physics   . '. 436-2497 

Psycholog}' 436-2945 

Theatre  Arts 436-3463 

School  of  Business  and  Public  Affairs       436-2930 

Accounting 436-2236 

Criminal  Justice    436-2647 

Economics  and  Finance 436-2217 

Geography  and  Planning 436-2343 

Management 436-2304 

Marketing 436-2304 

Political  Science    436-2743 

Social  Work    436-2527 

School  of  Education  436-2321 

Counseling  and  Educational  Psychology 436-2559 

Early  Childhood  and  Special  Education    436-2579 

Elementary  Education 436-2944 

Literacy 436-2877 

Professional  and  Secondary  Education 436-2958 

School  of  Health  Sciences  436-2825 

Communicative  Disorders 436-3401 

Health    436-2931 

Kinesiology- 436-2610 

Nursing  .  .' 436-2219 

Sports  Medicine   436-3293 

School  of  Music  436-2739 

History/Literature 436-2739 

Instrumental  Music 436-2739 

Keyboard  Music    436-2739 

Music  Education 436-2739 

Theory  and  Composition    436-2739 

Vocal  and  Choral    436-2739